A Sanskrit grammar : including both the classical language, and the older dialects, of Veda and Brahmana

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at|http: //books .google .com/I

i, Google

i,XH--+. 57. J

ilglgimHElSBBIMB

WARD COLLEGE
LIBRARY

FROM THB UBRARY OP

IN WILLIAM FRIEND

.„ Google

i, Google

D, Google

i, Google

,1,1.0, Google

i=y Google

BIBLIOTHEK

INDOGERMANISCHER GEAMMATIKEN

BEAHBEITET VON

F. BTTOHELBB, B. DELBBUOE, E. FOT, H. EUBSOHUANIf,

A. LESKIEH, a. METEB, B. 8IBVBBS, H. WBBEB, W. D. WHITIIEY

E. WISDI80H,

A SiKSCBIT GRAMHAB, INCLDDlHa BOTH THE CLASSICAL LaNGUACB, AND ~

THb Olseb Dialects, of Veda and Bbahmana
Bi William Dwight Wbithbv.

THIRD BDITIOH.

LEIPZIG,

DRUCK UND VERLAG VON BBEITKOPF & HABTEL.

itizecy Google

SANSKRIT GRAMMAR,

INCLUDING BOTH THE CLASSICAL LANGUAGE, AND TBE
OLDER DIALECTS, OF VEDA ASD BEAHMANA.

ffltllM DWI6HT WHITNEY,

THIED EDITION.

TS13 WOBX ta copyaiiBT.

LEIPZIG:

BREITKOPF & HARTEL.
BOSTON:

OINN A COMPANY.
1896.

mzec^y Google

3 1-M^ . 57. 2>

'A

,1,1.0, Google

PREFACE

TO THE FlEST EDITION.

It was ia Jnne, 1875, as I chanced to be for a day or
two in Leipzig, that I was unexpectedly invited to prepare
the Sanskrit grammar for the Indo-Enropean series projected
t)y Messra. Breitkopf and Hftiiel. After some consideration,
and consultation with friends, I accepted the task, and have
since deroted to it what time conld he spared from regular
dntiea, after the satisfaction of engagements earlier formed.
If the delay seems a long one, it was nevertheless onavoid-
ahle; and I would gladly, in the interest of the work itself,
hare made it still longer. In every snch case, it is necess-
ary to make a compromise between measurably satisfying a
present pressing need, and doing .the subject fuller justice
at the' cost of more time; and it seemed as if the call for
a Sanskrit grammar on a somewhat different plan from those
already in use — excellent as some of these in many respects
%i& — was urgent enough to recommend a speedy com-
pletion of the work begun.

The objects had eapedally in view in the preparation
of this grammar have been the following:

1. To make a presentation of the facte of the language
primarily as they show themselves in use in the literature,
and only secondarily as they are laid down by the native
grammarians. The earliest European grammars were by the
necessity of the case chiefly founded on their native prede-

ioy Google

Ti Preface.

cesBors; and a traditional method was thos eBtabliBhed whicfa
has been perhaps Bomewhat too closely adhered to, at the
ezpeuse of clearness and of proportion, as well as of scien-
tific truth. Accordingly, my attention has not been directed
toward a profonoder stndy of the grammatieal science of the
Hinda schools: their teachings I hare been contented to take
as already reported to Western learners in the existing
Western grammars.

2. To include also in the presentation the forms and
constructions of the older language, as exhibited in the Veda
and the Brahmana. Orassmann's excellent Index- Vocabalary
to the Rig- Veda, and my own manuscript one to the Atharva-
Veda (which I hope soon to be able to make public'), gave
me in full detail the great mass of Vedic material ; and this,
with some assistance from pupils and friends, I hare sought
to complete, as far as the circumstances permitted, from the
other Vedic texts and from the rarions works of the Brah-
mana period, both printed and manuscript

3. To treat the language throughout as an accented one,
omitting nothing of what is known respecting the nature of
the Sanskrit accent, its changes in combination and inflection,
and the tone of individual words — being, in all this, ne-
cessarily dependent especially upon the material presented
by the older accentuated texts.

4. To cast all statements, classifications, and bo on,
into a form consistent with the teachings of lingoistie science.

• In doing this, it has been necessary to discard a few of tfa^
long-used and familiar divisions and terms of Sanskrit gram-
mar — for example, the olasBiScation and nomenclature of
"special tenses" and "general tenses" (which is so indefen-
sible that one can only wonder at its having maintained itself
so long), the order and terminology of the conjugation-classes,
the separation in treatment of the facte of internal and ex-

* It was published, as vol. XII. of the Journal of the Americao
Oriental Society, in- 1881.

itizecy Google

Pkbface yli

ternal eaphonie combination, and the like. Bnt care hag been
taken to facilitate the tTan«tion from the old to the new;
and the changes, it is beliered, will commend themaelves to
nnqnalified .acceptance. It has been sought also to help an
appreciation of the character of the language by putting its
facta as far as possible into a statistical form. In this respect
the native grammar is especially deficient and misleading.

Regard has been constantly had to the practical needs
of the learner of the langnage, and it has been attempted,
by due arrangement and by the use of different sizes of
type, to make the work as usable by one whose object
it is to acquire a knowledge of the classical Sanskrit alone
as those are in which the earlier forms are not included.
The custom of transliterating all Sanskrit words into Euro-
pean characters, which has become Qsual in European San-
skrit grammars, is, as a matter of course, retained through-
out; and, because of the difficulty of setting even a small
Sanskrit type with anything bnt a large European, it is
practiced alone in the smaller sizes.

While the treatment of the facts of the langnage has
thus been made a historical one, within tiie limits of the
langnage itself, I have not rentured to make it comparative,
by brining in the analogous forms and processes of other
related languages. To do this, in addition to all that was
attempted beside, would have extended the woik, both in
content and - in time of preparation, far beyond the limits
assigned to it. And, having decided to leave out this ele-
ment, I have done so consistentiy throughout. Explanations
of the origin of forms have also been ayoided, for the same
reason and for others, which hardly call for statement

A grammar is necessarily in great part founded on its
predecessors, and it would be in vain to attempt an acknowl-
edgment in detail of all the aid received (com other schol-
ars. I have had at baud always especially the very schol-
arly and reliable brief summary of Eielhom, the full and

itizecy Google

excellent work of Mooier Williams, tbe smaller grammar of
fiopp [a wonder of learning and method for the time when
it wae prepared), and the Tolnmes of Benfey and MtUler.
As regards the material of tbe Ungnage, no other aid, of
course, has been at all comparable with the great Peters-
bnrg lexicon of BObtlingk and Roth, tbe existence of which
gives by itself a new character to all investigations of the
Sanskrit langnage. What I have not found there or in the
special collections made by myself or by others for me, I
. have called below "not quotable" — a provisional designa-
tion, neeessarily liable to correction in detail by the results
of further researches. For what concerns tbe verb, its forms
and their classification and uses, I have bad, as every one
must have, by far the most aid firom DelbrUok, in his Alt-
indisches Verbum and bis various syntactical contribu-
tions. Former pupils of my own, Professors Avery and
£^gren, have also helped me, in connection with this
subject and with others, in a way and measure tiiat calls for
public acknowledgment. In respect to the important matter
of the declension in the earliest language, I have made great
use of the elaborate paper in the Joum. Am. Or. Soc. (print-
ed contemporaneously with this work, and used by me
almost, but not quite, to the end of the subjeot) by my
former pupil Prof. Lanman; my treatment of'it is founded
on bis. My manifold obligations to my own teacher, Prof.
Weber of Berlin, also require to be mentioned: among other
things, I owe to him the use of his copies of certain nn-
published texts of the Brahmana period, not otherwise access^
ible to me; and he was kind enough to look through -with
me my work in its inchoate condition, favoring me with
valuable suggestions. For this last favor I have likewise to
thank Prof. DelbrUck — who, moreover, has taken the trouble
to glance over for a like purpose the greater part of the
proof-sheets of the grammar, as they came from the press.
To Dr. L. von Schrttder is due whatever use I have been

ioy Google

PRKPACE ix

able to make (anfortnoately a very imperfect one) of the im-
portant HaitTayani.-Sanifaita. *

Of the deficiencies of mj mork I am, I think, not less
folly aware than any critic of it, even the seTerest, is likely
to be. Sbonld it be fonnd to answer its intended purpose
well enoQgh to come to another edition, my endeavor will
be to improye and complete it; and I shall be gratefnl for
any corrections or snggefltions which may aid me in mak-
ing it a more efficient help to the stndy of the Sanskrit
language and literatore.

GOTHA, July 1879.

W. D. W.

PREFACE

TO THE Sbcohd Edition.

In preparing a new edition of this grammar, I have
made nse of the new material gathered by myself during
the intervening years,** and also of that gathered by others,
80 far as it was accessible to me and fitted into my plan;***
and I have had the benefit of kind suggestions f^om varions
quarters — for all of which I desire to return a grateful
acknowledgment. By such help, I have been able not only
to correct and repair certain errors and omissions of the
first edition, but also to speak with more definiteness upon

* Since pabliabed in fall by blm, 1881—6.
** A pxrt of this new material was pabliehed by myBelf in 1885,
as a Supplement to tbe grammar, under the title "Roots, Verb-Forms,
and Primary Derivativee of the Sanskrit Language".

*** Especially deserving of mention is HoltEmann's oollectioD of
■naterisl liom the Mafaabbarata, also published (1884) in the form of
a Snpploment to this work; also Btthtlingk's similar collection from
the larger half of the Ramaya^a.

Digitizecy Google

very many points relating to the material and usages of
the language.

In order not to impair the applicability of the referen-
ces already made to the work by rarioiis authors, its para-
graphing has been retained nnchanged throughout; for in-
creased cODTenience of further reference, the sabdirisionB
of paragraphs have been more thoroughly marked, 'by letteni
(now and then changing a former lettering); and the par-
agraph-numbers hare been set at the outer instead of the
inner edge of the upper margin.

My remoteneBs from the place of publication has for-
bidden me the reading of more than one proof; bnt the
kindness of Professor Lanman in adding his revision {ac-
companied by other timely suggeetious} to mine, and the
care of the printers, will be found, I trust, to have aided
in securing a text disfigured by few errors of the press.

Circumstances beyond my control hare delayed for a
year or two the completion of this revision, and hare made
it in some parts lees complete than I should have desired.

New-Haven, Sept. 1888.

W. D. W.

Digitizecy Google

INTRODUCTION.

Bbiep Account op the Indian Litebatuee.

It seems desirable to give here such a sketch of the
history o£ Indian literature as shall show the relation to
one another of the diiferent periods and forms of the lan-
^age treated in the following grammar, and the position
of the works there quoted.

The name "Sanskrit" [saibskpta, 1087 d, adorned, elab-
orated, perfected}, which is popularly applied to the whole
ancient and sacred language of India, belongs more properly
only to that dialect which, regulated and established by the
labors of the native grammaiians, has led for the last two
thousand years or more an artificial life, like that of the
Latin during most of the same period in Europe, as the
written and spoken means of communication of the learned
and priestly caste; and which even at the present day fills
that office. It is thus distinguished, on the one hand, from
the later and derived dialects — as the Prakrit, forms of
language which have datable monuments from ae early as
the third century before Christ, and which are represented
by inscriptions and coins, by the speech of the uneducated
characters in the Sanskrit dramas (see below), and by a limited
literature; the Pali, a Prakritic dialect which became the sac-
red language of Buddhism in Ceylon and Farther India, and is

itizecy Google

Xli iNTROSDOnOtl.

still ID service theie as such; and jet latet and more altered
tongues forming the transition to the languages of modern
India. And, on the other hand, it is distinguished, but
very much less sharply and widely, from the older dialects
or forms of speech presented in the canonical literature,
the Veda and Brahmana.

This tact, of the fixation by learned treatment of an
authorized mode of expression, which should thenceforth be
used according to rule in the intercourse of the educatedj
is the cardinal one in Indian linguistic history; and as the
native grammatical literature has determined the form of
the language, so it has also to a large extent determined
the grammatical treatmoat of the language by European
scholars.

Much in the history of the learned movement is still
obscuTse, and opinions are at variance even as to points of
prime consequence. Only the concluding works in the devel-
opment of the gramatical science have been preserved to
us; and though they are evidently the perfected fruits of a
long series of learned labors, the records of the latter are
lost beyond recovery. The time and the place of the cre-
ation of Sanskrit are unknown; and as to its occasion, we
hare only our inferences and conjectures to lely upon. It
seems, however, altogether likely that the grammatical sense
of the ancient Hindus was awakened in great measure by
their study of the traditional sacred texts, and by their com-
parison of its different language with that of contemporary
use. It is certain that the grammatical study of those texts
(fSkhSs, lit'ly branchet], phonetic and othei; was eealously
and effectively followed in the Biahmaaic schools; this is
attested by our possession of a number of phouetico-gram-
matical treatises, prSti9SkhyBS (pratt fftkhBm belonging to
each several text), each having for subject one principal
Vedic text, and noting all its peculiarities of form; these,
both by the depth and exactness of their own researches
and by the number of authorities which they quote, speak
plainly of a lively scientific activity continued during a long
time. What part, on the other hand, the notice of differ-

Digitizecy Google

iMTSODnonoH. ziil

ceneee between the correct speech of the learned and the
idtered dialects of the vulgar may have borne in the same
moTement is not easy to determine; but it is not customary
that a langu^e has its proper usages fixed by rule until
the danger is distinctly felt of its undergoing corruption.

The labors of the general school of Sanskrit giammar
reached a climax in the grammarian P&pini, whose text-book,
contaioii^ the facts of the language cast into the highly
Artful and difficult form of about four thousand algebraic-
formula-like rules (in the statement and arrangement of
which brevity alone is had in view, at the cost of distinct-
ness and unambiguousness), became for all after time the
authoritative, almost sacred, norm of correct speech. Re-
specting his period, nothing really definite and trustworthy
is known; but he is with much probability held to have
. lived some time (two to four centuries) before the Christian
era. He has had commentators in abundance, and has. under-
gone at theit hands some measure of amendment and com-
pletion; but he has not been overthrown or superseded.
' The chief and most authoritative commentary on his work
is that called the HahSbhSahya greul comment, by Fa-
tanjali.

A language, even if not' a vernacular one which is in
tolerably wide and constant use for writing and speaking,
is, of course, kept in life principally by direct tradition, by
communication from teacher to scholar and the study and
- imitation of existing texts, and not by the learning of gtam-
matical rales; yet the existence of grammatical authority, -
and especially of a single one, deemed infallible and of pre-
scriptive value, could not tai\ to exert a strong regulative
influence, leading to the. avoidance more and more of what
was, even if lingering in use, inconsistent with his teachings,
and also, in the constant reproduction of texts, to the grad-
ual effacement of whatever they might contain 'that was
unapproved. Thus the whole more modern literature of
India has been Paninised, so to speak, pressed into the
mould prepared by him and his school. What are the
limits of tbo artificiality of this process is not yet known.

Digitiz^cy Google

xW Intboddoitom.

The attention of special students of the Hindu giammai
[aiid the subject is so intricate and difficult that the number
is exceedingly small of those who hare masteted it suffi-
ciently to have a competent opinion on such geneial matters)
has been hitherto mainly diiected towaid detenuining what
the Sanskiit according to Pacini leally is, toward explaining
the language from the grammar. And, naturally enough,
in India, or wherever else the leading object is to learn to
speak and write the language correctly — that is, as author-
ized by the grammarians — that is the proper course to
pursue. This, however, is not the way really to understand
the language. The time must soon come, or it has come
already, when the endeavor shall be instead to explain the
grammar from the language: to test in all details, so far
aa shall be found possible, the reason of Panini's rules
(which contain not a little that seems problematical, or even
sometimes perverse); to determine what and how much
genuine usage he had everywhere as foundation, and what
traces may be left in the literature of usages possessing an
inherently authorized character, though unratified by him.
By the term "classical" or "later" language, then, as
constantly used below in the grammar, is meant the lan-
guage of those literary monuments which are written in con-
formity with the rules of the native grammar: virtually, the
whole proper Sanskrit literature. For although parts of this
9X6 doubtless earlier than Paitini, it is impossible to tell
just what parts, or how far they have escaped in their style
the leveling influence of the grammar. The whole, too,
may be called so fax an artificial literature as it is written
in a phonetic form (see grammar, 101 a) which never can
have been a truly vernacular and living one. Nearly all of
it is metrical: not poetic works only, biit narratives, histories
(so far as anything deserving that name can he said to exist),
and scientific treatises of every variety, are done into verse;
a prose and a prose literature hardly has an existence (the.
principal exceptions, aside &om the voluminous commen-
taries, are a few stories, as the Da9akiunKraoarita and the
VSsavadattSj. Of linguistic history there is n^t to nothing

Digitizecy Google

ItlTSOODOnON. IV .

in it all; but only a history of etyle, and this foi the most
pait ahoVing a gradual depiaration, an inciease of artificiality
and an intensification of certain mote undesirable features
of the language — such as the use of passive constiuotions
and of participles instead of veibs, and the substitution of
compounds foi sentences.

This being the condition of the later literature, it is of
so much the higher consequence that there is an eailiei
literature, to which the suspicion of artificiality does not -
attach, or attaches at least only in a minimal degree, which
has a truly vetnaculai ohaiacter, and abounds in prose as
well as verse,

The results of the very earliest literary productiveness
of the Indian people are the hymns with which, when they
had only crossed the threshold of the country, and when
their geographical horizon was still limited to the river-
basin of the Indus with its tributaries, they praised their
gods, the deified powers of nature, and accompanied the
rites of theii comparatively simple worship. At what period
these were made and sung cannot be determined vrith any
approach to accuracy: it may have been as early as 2000
B. C. They were long handed down by oral tradition, pre-
served by the care, and increased by the additions and
imitations, of succeeding generations; the mass was ever
growing, and, with the change of habits and beliefs and
religious practices, was becoming variously applied — sung
in chosen extracts, mixed with other material into liturgies,
adapted with more or less Of distortion to help the needs
of a ceremonial which was coming to be of immense elah*
oration and intricacy. And, at some time in the course
of this history, there was made for preservation a great col-
lection of the hymn-mateiial, mainly its oldest and most
genuine part, to the extent of over a thousand hymns and ten
thousand verses, arranged according to traditional authorship
and to subject and length and metre of hymn: this collection
is the Blg-VedB Veda of verses (fc) or of hymns. Other
collections were made also out of the same general mass
of traditional material: doubtless later, although the inter-

Digitizecy Google

Xti iBTKODDOTiOK,

lelatioDS of this period aie as jet too unclear to oJlow of
out speaking with entire confidence aa to anything twncetn-
ing them. Hius, the SSma-Veda Veda of chanU (Bftmut),
containing only about a sixth as much, its veises neaily all
found in the Rig-Veda also, but appearing hete with nume-
rous differences of reading : these were passages put together
for chanting at the soma-saorifioes. Again, collections called
by the compiehensiTe name of Tojur-Veda Veda of aac-
rificial formuku (yajua) : these contained not verses alone,
but also numerous prose utterances, mingled with the former,
in the order in which they were practically employed in
the oeremomes ; tfaey were strictly liturgical collections. Of
these, there are in existence several texts, which have their
mutual differences: the Tajasaneyi-Saiiihita (in two slightly
discordant versions, MKdhyandina and ES^va), sometimes
also called the White Yajur-Veda; and the various and
considerably differing texts of the Black Yajur-Veda, namely
the T&itUrtya-SaihhltS, the USitrBra^J'-SaihhitS, the Eapiq-
thala-BaihliitS, and the EBtbaka (the two last not yet pub-
lished). Finally, another historical collection, like the Rig-
Veda, but made up mainly of later and less accepted
material, and called [among other less currtot names) the
Atharva-Veda Veda of the Athareana (a legendary priestly
family); it is somewhat more than half as bulky as the Rig*
Veda, and contains a certain amount of material correspond-
ing to that of the latter, and also a number of brief prose
passages. To this last collection is very generally refused
in the orthodox literature the Name of Veda; but for us it
is the most interesting of all, after the Rig-Veda, because
it contains the largest amount of hymn-material (or mantra,
as it is called, in distinction from the prose brfthma^a),
and in a language which, though distinctly less antique
than that of the other, is nevertheless truly Vedio. Two
versions of it are extant, one of them in only a single
known manuscript.

A not insignificant body of like material, and of various
period [although doubtless in the main belonging to the
latest time of Vedic productiveness, and in part perhaps

Diaii.zecy Google-

iKTRODnOTION XTll

the imitative woik of a yet mote modern time), is aoattOTed
thiough the texta to be later described, the BrShmavas and
the Satr»B. To aasemble aad sift and compare it is now
one of the pressing needs of Vedic study.

The fundamental divisions of the Vedic liteiatme here
mentioned have all bad theit various schools of sectaries,
each of these with a text of its own, showing some differ-
ences from those of the other schools; but those meotiooed
above are all that are now known to be in existence; and
the chance of the discovery of others grows every year
smaller.

T^e labor of the schools in the conservation of theii
saoied texts was extraordinary, and has been crowned with
such success that the text of each school, whatever may
be its differences from those of other schools, is virtually
without various readings, preserved with all its peculiarities
of dialect, and its smallest and most exceptional traits of
phonetic form, pure and unobscured. It is not the place
here to describe the means by which, in addition to the
religious care of the sectaries, this accuracy was secured:
forms of texts, lists of peculiarities and treatises upon them,
and so on. When this kind of care began in the case of
each text, and what of original character may have been
efiaced before it, or lost in spite of it, cannot be told. But
it ia certain that the Vedic records furnish, on the whole,
a wonderfully accurate and trustworthy picture of a form of
ancient Indian language [as well as ancient Indian beliefs
and institutions) which was a natural and undistotted one,
and which goes back a good way behind the classical San-
skrit. Its differences &om the latter the following treatise
endeavors to show in detail.

Along with the vetses and sacrificial formulas and
phrases in the text of the Black Yajur-Veda are given
long prose sections, in which the ceremonies are described,
theii meaning and the reason of the details and the accom-
panying utterances are discussed and explained, illustrative
l^ends are reported of fabricated, and various speculations,
etymological and other, are indulged in. Such matter comes

ioy Google

zviit Introduction.

to be called brfthma^a (appaiently relating to the brahman
ot u>orship). In the White Yajm-Veda, it is separated into
a woik by itself, beside the sfubhitft oi text of veises and
foimulas, and is called the patapatba-Brftbrna^a Brahmana
of a hundred ways. Other sitnilai collections are found, be-
longing to vaiious othei schools of Vedic study, and they
beat the common name of BrSbmaijw, with the name of the
school, or some other distinctive title, prefixed. Thus, the
Aitarera and EKuQltokl-Brthma^aa, belonging to the schools
of the Rig-Veda, the PoSoaTiAfa and Sa^TiAfa-Br&hma^a
and other minor work's, to the Sama-Veda; the Gopatha-
Brfthmaoa, to the Atbarva-Yeda ; and a JSiminlya- or Tala-
TakSra-Brfthmaoa, to the Sama-Veda, has recently (Buinell)
been discovered in India; the TBittiiiya^BTftbrna^a is a col-
lection of mingled mantra and brBhmaj^a, bke the saihhitS
of the same name, but supplementary and later. These
works are likewise regarded as canonical by the schools,
and are learned by their sectaries with the same extreme care
which is devoted to the satbhitSa, and their condition of
textual preservation is of a kindred excellence. To a cer-
tain extent, there is among them the possession of common
material: a fact the bearings of which are not yet fully
understood.

Notwithstanding the inanity of no small part of their
contents, the Biohma^ias are of a high order of interest in
their bearings on the history of Indian institutions; and
philologically they are not less important, since they re-
present a form of language in most respects intermediate
between the classical and that of the Vedas, and offer spe-
cimens on a large scale of a prose style, and of one which
is in the main a natural and freely developed one — the
oldest and most primitive Indo-European prose.

Beside the Brahmanas are sometimes foimd later ap-
pendices, of a similar character, called Ara^yakao {foreat-
sections): as the Aitareya- Ara9.yaka , Tfiittlriya-Arapyaka ,
Bfhad -Aranyaka, and so on. And from some of these, or
even from the Itrrihmauas, are extracted the earliest Upa-
nitiads [sittittga, lectures on sacred subjects) — which ,

ioy Google

IMTHODDOTIOM. xln

howeyer, ate continued and added to down to a oompaia-
lively modein time. The Upanishads are one of &e lines
by which the Biahma^a literatuie passes over into the latei
theolf^cal literatuie.

Another line of transition is shown in the BtttrM [linea,
rules). The works thus named are analogous with the
Brahmaj^as in that they belong to the sohoole of Vedic
study and aie named from them, and that they deal with
the religious ceremonies : treating them, however, in the
way of prescription, not of dogmatic explanation. They,
too, contain some mantra or hymn-material, not found to
occur elsewhere. In part (9r&utB or kalpa-satros] , they take
up the great sacrificial ceremonies, with which the Brah-
manas have to do; in part (grhya-sfltras), they teach the
minor duties of a pious householder; in some oases [sS-
mayaoSrika-antraa] they lay down the general obligations of
one whose life is in accordance with prescribed duty. And
out of the last two, or especially the last, come by natural
development the law-books (dharma-fSBtraB), which make
a conspicuous figure in the later literature: the oldest and
most noted • of them being that called by the name of
Manu [an outgrowth, it is believed by many, of the Manava
Vedic school); to which are added that of TBjftavalkTa, and
many others.

Respecting the chronology of this development, or the
date of any class of writings, still more of any individual
work, the less that is said the better. All dates given in
Indian literary history are pins set up to be bowled down
again. Every important work lias undergone so many more
or less transforming changes before reaching the form in
which it comes to us, that the question of original con-
struction is complicated with that of final redaction. It is
so with the law-book of Manu, just mentioned, which has
well-founded claims to being r^arded as one of the very
oldest works of the proper Sanskrit literature, if not the
oldest (it has been variously assigned, to periods from six -
centuries before Christ to four after Christ). It is so, again,
in a still mote striking degree, with the great legendary

ioy Google

3CX iNTaODUOnON.

epio of the MahftbliKrata. The giound-woik of this is .
doubtless of very early date; but it has served as a text
iato which matetials of vaiious character and period have
been inwoven, until it has become a heterogeneous mass,
a kind of cyclopedia for the warriot-caste, hard to separate
into its constituent parts. The story of Nala, and the phil-
osophical poem Bhsgavad-QIta, are two of the most noted
of its episodes. The BOmSyapa, the other most famous epic,
is a work of another kind; though also worked over and
more oi less altered in its transmission to oui time, it is
the production, in the main, of a single author (Valmikij;
and it is generally believed to be in part allegorical, le-
presentiog the introduction of Aryan culture and dominion
into Southern India. By its Bide stand a number of minor
epics, of various authorship and period, as the BaghuvaA^a
(ascribed to the dramatist Kalidasa], the Mfigliak&vya, the
BhattikSvya (the last, written chiefly with the g:rammatical
intent of illustrating by use as many as possible of the
numerous formations which, though taught by the gram-
marians, find no place in the literature)-

The Purft^as, a large class of works mostly of immense
extent, ate best mentioned in connection with the epics.
They are pseudo-historical and prophetic in character, of
modem flate, and of inferior value. Real history finds no
place in Sanskrit literature, nor is there any conscious
historical element in any of the works composing it.

Lyric poetry is represented by many works, some of
which, as the Ueghadata and Oltogovinda, are of no mean
order of merit.

The drama is a still more noteworthy and important
branch. The first indications of dramatical inclination and
capacity on the part of the Hindus are seen in certain
hymns of the Veda, where a mythological or legendary
situation is conceived dramatically, and set forth in the
form of a dialogue — well-known examples are the dialogue
of Sarama and the Fanis, that of Yama and his sister Yami,
that of Yasishtfaa and the rivers, that of Agni and the other
gods — but there are no extant intermediaries between these

Digitizecy Google

Introduotioh. xii

and the Btandaid diama. The begioDuigB of the latter date
&oni a period when in actual life the higher and educated
characters used Sanskrit, and the lower and uneducated need
the popular dialects derived from it, the Prakrits ; and their
dialogue reflects this condition of things. Then, hotrevei
learning (not to call it pedantry) intervened, and stereotyped
the new element; a Prakrit grammar grew up beside the
Sanskrit grammar, according to the rules of which Prakrit
could be made indefinitely on a substrate of Sanskrit; and
none of the existing dramas need to date fiom the time of
Temacular use of Prakrit, while most or all of them are
undoubtedly much later. Among the dramatic authors,
Kalidisa is incomparably the chief, and his ^akuutalft is
distinctly his masterpiece. His date has been a matter of
much inquiry and controversy; it is doubtless some cen-
turies later than our era. The only other work deserving
to be mentioned along with Kalidasa's is the Hroohakatikft of
^udraka, also of questionable period, but believed to be
the oldest of the extant dramas.

A partly dramatic character belongs also to the iable,
in which animals ate represented as acting and speaking.
The most noted works in this department are the PaSLoa-
tantra, which through Persian and Semitic versions has made
its way all over the world, and contributes a considerable
quota to the fable-literature of every European language,
and, partly founded on it, the comparatively recent and
popular Hitopade9a [salutary imtmction).

Two of the leading departments of Sanskrit scientific
literature, the 1^^ and the grammatical, have been already
sufficiently noticed; of those remaining, the most important
by far is the philosophical. The beginnings of philosophic-
al speculation are seen already in some of the later hymns
of the Veda, more abundantly in the Brahmai^aa and Aran-
yakas, and then especially in the Upanishads. The evo-
lution and historic relation of the systems of philosophy,
and the age of their text-books, are matters on which much
obscurity still rests. There are six systems of primary rank,
and reckoned as orthodox, although really standi n^ in no

Digitizecy Google

xzti ItmoDDonOTi.

accoidanoe with approved teligious doctrines. All of them
seek the same end, the emancipation of the soul £rom the
necessity of continuing its existence in a succession of
bodies, and its unification with the All-soul; but they
differ in i^^d to the means by which they seek to attain
this end.

The astronomical science of the Hindus is a reflection
of that of Greece, and its literature is of recent date; but
as mathematicians, in arithmetic and geometry, they have
shown more independence. Theii medical science, although
its b^nnings go back even .to the Veda, in the use of
medicinal plants with accompanying incantations, is of little
account, and its proper literature by no means ancient.

ioy Google

CONTENTS.

Preface v

iNTBODncnoB zi

I. Alphabet 1 — 9

II. Ststeh of Sounds; Fbohdmoiatiok .... lo — 34
Tovels,>10{ CoDBonauU, 13 ; Qnindty, 27; Accent, 28.

IIL Rules of Euphonic Cohbihatiom 34 — 87

iDtrodactory, 34; Principles, 37; Boles of Vowel Com-
blnaUou, 42; Permitted Flaali, 49; DeaaplratloD, 53;
Surd »nd Sonant AislmiUtloQ, 64; Combination* of
Final B and r, 56 ; ConTenlon ot a to ^, 61 ; Con-
veraion of n to 9, 54 ; CouTOiilon of Dental Mut«t to
Llngaals and PaUttb, 66; Combinations of Final n,
69; Combinations of Final m, 71 ; the Palatal Hntes
and Sibilant, and h, 72; the Lingual Sibilant, 77;
Estension and Abbreviation, 78 ; StTenftheoini; and
Weakening Piocessea, 81 ; OOQit and Vpddlllt 81 ;
Towel-longthenlng, 84; Vowel-llghtenlng, 86; Natal
Increment, 86; Eedopllcallon, 87,

IV. Declbmsion 88 — 110

Gender, Number, Case, 68; Uses of the Cases, 89;
Endings of DedensloD, 103; Variation of Stem, 107;
Accent In Deelenslon, 108.

V. Nouns and Adjeotiveb HI — 176

Cla«siflcatlon etc., Ill ; Dedeoslon T., Stems in a, 112 ;
Declension II., Stem* in 1 and u, 116; Declension
IIL, Stems in Long Vowels (ft, I, Q): A. Soot-words
etc., 124; Stems in Diphthongs, 130; B. Derfiatite
Sterna etc., 131; Deelenslon IT., Stems In f or ar,
137 ; Declension V., Stama in Consonsnts, 141 ;
A. Boot'Stema etc., 143; B. DeriTatlTe Stems In aa,
U, OS, 153; C. DerivatiTB Stems in on, 156: D.
in In, lei; X. tn ant or at, 163; V. Perfect Far-
tioiplei in viAa, 169; Q. Oomparatives in yUAaor
yaa, 172; Comparison, 173.

itizecy Google

VI. NuMEEALe 177 185

Csrdlnils, 177; Oidlndi etc, 183.

VIL Pronouns 185—199

Penontl, 186; Demoustnttie, 188; Interrogitlva,
194; Belttin, 195; other Proiioniu; Empliitic, In-
definite, 196; Noniu nied pranominally, 197;
Prauomlntl DedTittTCi, PoBseasivw etc., 197; Ad-
jective! declined ptonomiaallr, 199.

Vni. CONTOQATIOK 200 226

Tolee, Tense, Moda, Nnmtei, Penon, 200; Teilwl
AdJectiTes and Nouns, ^3; Secouduy Conjogatloiu,
203; Persontl Endings, 204; Snbjnnettie Hoda, 209;
OpUtive, 211; Imperative, 213; Uses of the Modes,
215; PsrtlDlples, 220; Augment, 220; RednpIicltloD,
222; Accent of tlie Verb, 223.

IX, The Prebbnt-Btstem 227 278

OeaenI, 227; Conjugations and Vonlngition Classes,
228; Boot-Class (second or ad-class), 231; Re-
dnpllcaUng Claaa (third or ha-claBs), 242; Hasal
Class (seTsntb or rudh-ctase), 2&0; du and n-ClassCB
(fifth and eighth, oi Bn- and tan<classes), 254; nS-
Class (ninth or krl-clasE), 260; a-Clasa (Btst oi
bhG-class), 2D4; Accented A-Claas (sixth or tud-
cUss), 269; yft-ClasE (fonrth or dlv-dass), 271;
Accented y&-ClaE9 or PaislTe ConjagatloQ, 275;
So-called tenth or cnr-cUsa, 277; Dees of the Pres-
ent and Imperfect, 278.

X. The Peepect-System 279 — 296

Perfect Tense, 279; Perfect Participle, 291 ; Modea
of the Perfect, 292; Pluperfect, 295; Uses of the
Perfect, 295.

XL The Aorist-S^htemb 297 — 330

ClMsiDcatioD, 297; I. Simple Aorist: 1. Root-Aorlst,
299; Passive Aorlst 3d sing., 304; 2. the a-Aorist,
305; n. 3. Reduplicated AoHst, 308; III. Sibilant
Aorlst, 313; 4. the B-Aoriat, 314; 5. the Ij-Aorlsl,
320; 6. the Bi(-Aorist, 323; 7. the sa-Aoiist, 32S;
Piectttive, 320; Uses of the Aorist, 328.

XII. The Futurb-Systems . ." 330—339

I. The s-Fntare, 331 ; Preterit of the B-Foture, Con-
ditional, 334; H. The Periphrastic Fature, 335;
Usea of the Fatntes aud Condittonat, 337.

ioy Google

Xni. Vbrbal adjeotites and Nounb: Partici-
ples, Ihsthitivbs, Gerunds 340 — 360

PtulTB Ptfttolpte In t& or a&, 340; Put AcUtb
Participle In tavant, 344; Fntnie Paetlve Putl-
ciplei, Geranillvea, 310; loSnitlveB, 347; Uses of
the Infliiltlres, 351; Qemnds, 365; AdverbUl Oemnd
Id am. 369.

XIV. Dbritatite or Secondary Conjuoatioh . . 360 — 391

I. Pisstie, 361; II. InCenBlve, 362; Present-Syitem,
866; Perlect, AortM, Fntnre, ate,, 370; III. Desider-
atiTS, 372; Pieasot- System, 374; Perfect, Aarlst,
Falnre, etc., 370; IV. Otueitive, 376; PieBent-Syatem,
380; Perfect, Aeiiit, Futare, etc., 383; V. Denom-
InatlTe, 386.

XV- Periphrastic akd Compound Cokjuoation 391 — 403
The Petiphrutic Perfect, 3fi2; PutlcipUl Perlphiu-
tic Phruei, 391; Compoiltion wltb Frepoeltlonsi
PieBiee, 396; Other Verbal Camponndi, 400.

XVI. Indbcunables 403 — 417

Adverbe, 403; PrepoiitiDDi, 114; ConJnactioDg, 416;
iQtaijectloni, 117.

XVII. Derivation of Deolinable Stems 418 — 480

A. Primary DeriTaUvea, 420; B. Secondary DeriTa-
tlrea, 154.

XVITT. Formation OP Compound Stems 480 — 51S

Claa^lRcatiou, 180; I. CopalatlTe Conpounda, 435;

II. Determlnatiie Companndg, 489; A. Dependent
ComponDda, 480; B. Descitptlve Componrtde, 101 j

III. Secondary Adjectlre Componnda, 501 ; A. Poa-
neasite Componnda, 501 ; B. Oompounda with GoTemed
Final Member, 511; AdJecHye Compounda aa Nonna
and as Adverbs, 512; Anomalous Componnda 511;
Stem-llnala altered In Compoaitlon, 514; Looae
Constmctton with Compounds, 615.

Appendix 516—520

A. Bxamplea of Various Sanikrll Tfpe, 516; B. Ex-
ample of Acoantnated Teit, 516; Synoptia of the
conjugation of roota bhu and if, 520.

Sanskrit-Index 521 — 539

GbnbraIi-Index . 540 55i

ioy Google

ABBREVIATIONS.

AA. Aitareya-Aranykka.

AB. Aitareya-Brihrnana.
AQS, A(va1IyaDa-^iauU-8iltia.
AQS. AQvalayana-Qrhya-Sutra.
Apast. Apastamba-SQtra.
APr. Atharva-Pratiijakhya.
AV. Atharva-Veda.

B. or Br. Brihioanas.

BAU. Brhad-Aranyaka-Upanisad.
BbG. Bhagavad-Gita.
BbP. Bhagavata-PurSns.
BB. BtlhtliQgk and Roth (Peters-
burg Lexicon).

C. Claesical Sanskrit
Q. 9aknataU.

9a tr. 9'i^uit>J&ja-U<'hatDijaiii.
QB. Qatapatha-Brahmana.
99s. (ankhlyana-Qraata-Satra.
gaij. Qankhayana-Grbya-SQtra.
ChU. Chindogya-npantjad.
9vU. Qvetafvatara-UpaQlsad.
DKC. Data-Kumara-CariU.
E. Epos (HBb. aud R.).
OB. Gopatha-Brabma^a.
GQS. Gobhinyu-Grhya-Sfitra.
H. Hilopadeca.
Har. HarivanQa.
JB-JaiiiiiDlya(orTalavakBra)Brah-

JUB. Jiimlniya - UpanUad - Brah-

ma^a.
K. Eathaka.

K19. EapiBthala-SambitL
KB. K&a;itaki- (or QtmUtiiyKiia-)

Brahmana.
KBU. EaiiBitakl-Brihmana-Upaai-

fad.
K9S. Katyayana-Qranta-Sutra.
KS. Ein^ika-Sutra.
ESS. Eatha-3arit-Sigara.
KthU. Ka(ha Upanl^.

EU. EenB-0paniRad.

LQS. Latyayana-Qranta'Sutra.

H. Hann.

HaiU. H^tri-UpaDiaad.

HBh. Habibharata.

MdU. Hondaka-Upanifad.

Hegh. HeghadQta.

KS. Hsitrayani-Samhiti.

Nais, Nai|adhiya.

Xir.' Nimkta.

PaSc. PaBcatantra.

PB. PaBcaviiiQa-[or Tiindya-J Br^-

mana.
POS. Piraskara-Grhya-Siitra.
PD. Pra^na Upaniaad-
R. Bimsyana.
Ragh. BsgbiiTad;H.
RPr. Bigveda-PrattQ&khya,
RT. RiJa-TaraiigliiT.
EV. Rig- Veda.
S. Sutras.

.SB. ^adTibfa-Brlbmana.
Spr. lodische SprUcfae (BUhtliQgk).
3V. Sama-Veda.
TA. Taittliiya-Aranyaka.
TB. TUttirlya-Briibmana.
TPr. Taittiriya-Praticakbya.
Tribb. Trtbhaayaratna {comm. Ui

TPr.).
TS. Taittiriya-Sambita.
U. Upauisads.
V. Vedaa (RV., AV., SV).
Vas. Vaaistha.
VBS. Varaha-Brhat-Sambita.
Vet. VetalapafScaviiiffati.
Vikr. VikramorvaQi
VPr, Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya.
V3. Vajaseneyi'Sanibita.
V3. Kan. do. KS^va-text
V. TftjiSatalkya.

Dgil.zecy Google

CHAPTEK I.

1. Tub natives of India write theii ancient and sacied
language in a variety of alphabets — generally, in each
part of the country, in the same alphabet which they use
for their own vernacular. The mode of writing, however,
which is employed throughout the heart of Aryan India, or
in Hindustan proper, is alone adopted by European scholars :
it is called the devanftgarl.

A, This name ti of donbtTnl oitgin and value. A more compiehenslve
name l» nfigan (perhaps, of the city'); and deva-n^ari U nagorl of
iAt godi, or of th* Brahmant.

S. Hueh that relatai to the hiitoty of the ladlin alphabete ii still
obKOTO. The earliest written monDineiits of known date In tbe conntrf are
the inaoriptiona containing tbe edlatg of A9oka or Piyadaal, of about the
middle of tbe third century B. G. They are In two dllTeient syitems of
cbanclerfi, of which one ihowa diatinet eigue of dedTition from a Semitic
tonrce, vhile the other ia alao probably, though mntb leaa evldentlr, of the
same origin. From the latter, the Lath, or Sonthsm A^oka character (of
Oiraai), come the later Inilian alphabets, both those of the northern Aryan
lanfoages and thoie at the sonthem Draridian langoagea. The nftgon,
devanAeart, Bengali, Quzeriti, and others, are farieties of Its northern
deriretiTes; and with them are related some of the alphabets of peoples
outside of India — as In TilMt and Farther India — who have adopted Bindn
enltare or religion,

a. There Is reason ia believe that writing was first employed in India
for pra^lical parpoees — for correspoodeiice aad buslneaa and the like —
and only hy degrees came to be applied also to literary ase. The Itteratore,
to a great extent, and the more fully in proportion to its claimed sanctity
and authority, ignores all written record, and usomes to he kept In eiistence
by oral tradition alone.

Whitnsy, OTanmir. 3. «d. 1

ioy Google

9. Of the deranfigAri iUelf there are nlnoT varieties, depending on
iineieatat of locality or of period, as aUo ot indlvidoal hand [sea eiamples
In Weber'* catalogae of the Beilln Sanekrit HSS., in RajendialiU MKra's
notlcei of HfiS. In IiidUn HbTaiiei, In the publlbhed fac-^imiles of in-
«cT[p(loni, and ao on); and these aie In some measure leSected in the type
prepared for printing, both in India and in Europe, But a itudent who
maliea himaelf fimliUr with one style of printed chambers will have little
diniculty nitb the others, and wilt loon learn, by practice, to read the mann-
scrlpta. A few specimens of types other thin those uaed in thl« work are
gUvn In Appendix A.

a. On aci^oitnt of the dlfflculty of combiriing them nlth the smaller sites
of onr Iloman a[id Italic typo, the devanSgari characters are need below only
In ronnectliui with the Brst or largest aiie. And, in srcordance with the
loudibln ntSKa Of teient gramtnari, they are, wherever given, also trans'
literated, In Clarendon Ictteri ; while the latter alone are D*ed in the other

1. The Btudcnt may be advised to try to ramiliariie himself from
the Btart with the deTuiftgan mode of writing. At the same time,
it U not indiBpensable that he should do bo until, having learned the
principal paradigms, be comes to begin reading and analysing and
parsing; and many wilt find the latter the more practical, and in the
end equally or more effective, way.

6. The chaiacteis of the devanKgarl alphabet, and the
European letters which will be used in transliteratiog them,
ate as follows:

Hliurt long

I . q a = HT a

palatal

' ? '

' t -

owela: simple ! labial

. 3 u

lingual

' B I

■ ^' r

dental

• 3 1

l» ^ 11

"'"■"■■»»• {r:r :ii

.. : It

ra " ^, --. 6 or ifa (Bee 73c,'.

•Did surd up.

Bimut

nn. up. uml

guttural .' 3R k i. p^ kh

"Us

- q 8h a J a

palatal i ^ c » ^ oh

-St J

n ^ Jh - 31 a

liugual . r ( > 5 f

»i <*

. E ill .1 m »

dental « tT t « St Oi

"? a

«^ dh -q n

labial «^ p .- T; ph

.ST b

->I bt .. H lU

Diaiiize. ..Google

Tbeory op THia Mode of Writing.

palatal

»a y

li»E«al

"T '

dental

..gi

labial

..g V

palatal

-a ?

lingual

"U »

dental

-H a

Aspiration •• ^ h

a. To thcBe mny be nddcd n. lingual 1 X, which in some of the
Vedic textB takes the place of 3 4 when occurring between two
vowels (M).

8. A few other Boun<le, recogoized by the theories of the Eindu
frrammaritin?, but either having no acpnrate characters to represent
them or only very rarely and exceptionally written, will be notlceil
lielow |T1 b, a, 930). Such are the guttural and labial breatbinga, the
nasal gemivowols, and others.

7. The order of aiTangement given above is that in
which the sounds are catal<^iied and described by the native
grammarians; and it has been adopted by European scholars
as the alphabetic order, for indexes, dictionaries, etc.: to the
Hindus, the idea of an alphabetic arrangement for such
practical uses is wanting.

A, In eomi worka (ae the Petenburg leiicon), i vlaargft whteh Is le-
gtided u eqalvilent to and «xchang»ibte Tjtb > ilbtUnt (17S) it, though
written » vlsarga, given tha ilpbabetic pli(e of the sibilant.

6. The theory of the devanSgivrl, as of the other Indian
modes of writing, is syllabic and consonantal. That is
to say, it regards as the written unit, not the simple sound,
but the syllable (ak^ra); and further, as the substantial
part of the syllable, the consonant or the consonants which
precede the vowel — this latter being merely implied, or,
if written, being written by a subordinate sign attached to
the consonant.

9. Hence follow these two principles:

A. The forms of the vowel-characters given in the
alphabetical scheme above ate used only when the vowel

j,i,....,LiOOglc

9—] I. Alphabet. 4

forms a syllable by itself, oi ia not combined with a pieceding
cODBoiiaat: that is, when it is either initial or preceded by
another vowel. In combination with a consonant, other modes
of representation are used.

B. If mote consonants than one precede the vowel,
forming with it a single syllable, their chaiacteis must be
combined into a single compound character.

a. NntWe Sinda usftge, id mftonBcriptH and iQSoriptions, treats
ihe whole materinl of a sentence alike, not separating its words from
one another, any more than the aylUblee of the same word: a final
consonant is combined into one written syllable with the initial vowel
or consonant or consonants of the following word. It never occnned
to the Hindus to space their words io any way, even whero the mode
of writing admitted such treatment; nor to begin a paragraph on a
new line; nor to write one line of verse under another: everything,
without exception, is written solid by them, filling the whole page.

b. Thus, the sentence and verge-line ahaifa rudrebhlr vamibliiQ
carSmy aham ftdltyftlr uta vigvadev&i^ (Big-Veda X. 115. 1: see
Appendix B) 1 icander loith the Vtuut, the Rudraa, I with the Aditya*
and the AU-Oode is thus syllabized; a hadi ru dre bhl rva Bubhi
90a rS mya ha m& di ty6i rn ta vi Qva de vfti^, each syllable end-
ing with a vowel (or a vowel modilicd by the nasal-sign amtavftra,
or having the sign of a final breathing, viearga, added: these being
the only elements that can follow a vowel in the same syllable); and
it is (together with the next line) written In the manuscripts after this
fashion:

£ach syllable is written separately, and by many scribes the
successive syllables are parted a little from one another: thus,

and flo on.

o. In Wiiatern practice, however, it is almost universally customary
to divide paragraphs, to make the lines of verae follow one another,
and also to separate the words so far as this can be done without
changing the mode of writing them See Appendix B, where the verse
here given is so treated,

A. Further, in works prepared fo\ beginners in the language, it
is not uncommon to maku a more complete separation of words by a

j,i,.c..,LiOOJ^IC

5 Writimq op Vowels. [—10

free nse of the Tir&mtt-Biga (11) Qnder finnl conHonuts: thus, for
example,

or even by Indicating nlao tbe combiDations of initial and final vowela
(126, 137): for example,

e. In traneiitentiDg, WeBteni methods of separation of words are
of course to be followed; to do otbervise wonld be simple pedantry.

10. Under A, it is to be noticed that the modes of
indicating a Towei combined with a preceding consonant
are as follows:

a. The short Q a has no written sign at all; the con-
sonant-sign itself implies a following Q a, unless some other
vowel-sign is attached to it [or else the Tirftma: 11). Thus,
the consonant-signs as given above in the alphabetic scheme
are leally the signs of the syllables ka, kha, etc. etc. (to lia).

b. The long ^ ft is written by a peipendiculai stroke
after tbe consonant: thus, ^ kS, Kl dJi&, ^ hft.

c. Short ^ i and long ^ I are written by a similar stroke,
which for short i is placed before the consonant aud for
long I is placed after it, and in either case is connected with
the consonant by a hook above the upper line : thus, Hi kl,
^ kl; ^ bhi, >f^ bbl; ^ nl, r) nl.

Tbe book above, turning to tlie left or to the tight, ie biatorlcally the
euentiU part of the cbuscter, h>Tliig been otlglDsUy the whole of it; the
hoolu were only later prolongad, lO u to leuh all the way down beside
the conBonsnt. Id tbe USS,, Ehey almost never bare the horizontal stroke
drawn across them ibove, though thij ii added in the prloled characters;
thus, originally *% ki, ^ M; in the MSS., 1%, ^ ; in print, fe, ^,

d. The u-Bounds, short and long, are written by hooks
attached to the lower end of the consonant-sign: thus, ^
kn, ^ kll ; ? ^m, 7 4IL On account of the necessities of
combiBatioQ, du and dll are somewhat disguised: thus, Xi
g^; and the forms with ^ r and ^ k are still more irregular:
thus, "^ ru, 5 rfl; ^ hu, "^ kO.

Digitizecy Google

to—] I. Alfhabst. 6

e. The f-voweU, short and long, are written by a aub-
joined hook, single oi double, openiag toward the right:
thus, ^ kr, ^ ^i ? dfi ^ <^' In ttie b-fiign, the hooks
aie usually attached to the middle: thus, ^ hf, ^ hf ,

Ai to the cambliitllDii ot f irltti preceding r, see below, 14 d.

f. The }-Towel is written with a reduced form of its
full initial character: thus, ^il; the coTiespondiog long has
no real occurrence (23 &), but would be written with a similar
reduced sign.

g. The diphthongs are written by strokes, single or
double, above the upper line, combined, for ^ o and ^ Su,
with the K-sign after the consonant: thus, % ke, % k&i;
^ ko, ^ kSu.

b. In lome deTanOgan mannsciipts (bb in (lie Bengill tlphibet), iha
Biiigle Bitoke abov«, or one of the double ones, It repUced bj i sigu like the
a-(jgn befote Iha conioiunt: thus, (^ fc«, Ri kU; |^ ko, (^ kAo.

11. A consonant-sign, howevei, is capable of being made
to signify the consonant-sound alone, without an added vowel,
by having written beneath it a stroke called the vir&ma
[rest, atopy, thus, ^ k. ^ d, ^ h.

0. Since, u wai poiuted out ibove, the Uindiu write the words ot a
sentence continnonsly like cue woid (Sa, 1>), the vlr&ma ii in geuenl uiled
foi only when ■ Biul consonant occora before a pause. But It ia alio oc-
caalonall)' reaoited to by acribea, di Id pilot, in order to BToid an awkward
or difficult combination of coneonant-eigiis: tbna,

^Ilft; liijbhl^ %^ lijau, Sl^fq afik?va;
and It Ib used to make a aeparation of words in texts prepared far begin-
«eri (Bd).

12. Under B, it is to be noticed that the consonant
combinations are for the most part not at all difficult to
make or to recognise for one who is familiar with the
simple signs. The characteristic part of a consouant-sign
that is to be added to another is taken (to the exclusion of
the horizontal or of the perpendicular framing-line, or of
both), and they are put t<^ethet according to convenience,

ioy Google

7 Combinations of Consonants. [—-14

either side by side, or one above the othet; ia a few oom-
biaations either atrangemect ia allowed. The consonant that
is to be pronounced first is set before the other in the one
order, and above it in the other order.

a. Examples of the side-by-side anangement are: nr gga,
^ jja, nf pya, nr nma, f^ ttlia, y^ bbys, 7°fi ska, ^ q^a,
r^ tka.

b. Examples of the abov&-and-below anangement are:
^ kka, BT kva, '^ coa, ^ iija, ^ dda, H pta, ^ tna,
W tva.

13. In some cases, however, there is more or less ab-
breviation or disguise of the independent form of a con-
sonant-sign in combination. Thus,

a. Of aR k in ^ kta, ^ kla; and in ofTS ki^a etc.

b. Of ?T t in fT tta;

o. Of ^ d in ?; dga, T daa, etc.;

d. Of If m and 7 7, when following other consonants:
thus, ^ kya, Wf kma, ^ fima, ^ Oya, ^ dma, t^ dya,
^ hma, ^ hya, ^ ohya, ^ <lii;a.

e. Of EFT 9, which generally becomes 7T when followed
by a consonant: thus, ^ Qoa, ff ^na, ? ^va, S7T 9ya. The
same change is usual when a vowel-sign is added below;
thus, 5 9U, !>[ 9F,

f. Other combinations, of not quite obvious value, are
^ wa, ^ Ua, ^ ddba, ? dbha, '? ^fa, "^ 9tiia; and the
compounds of ^ b: as ^ h^a, ^ hna.

g. In a case or two, no trace of the constituent letters
is recognisable: thus, ^ k^, ^ jfia.

14. The semivowel ^ r, in making combinations with
other consonants, is treated in a wholly peculiar manner,
analogous with that in which the vowels are treated.

a. If pronounced before another consonant or combination
of consonants, it is written above the latter, with a hook

j,i,....,LiOOglC

14—] L Alfbabbt. 8

opening to the n^t (mnch like the ngn of the rowel j,
as writtea under a eonsoiunt: lOej: thus, ^ rka, ^ rya,
3 rtva, T^ pmya, rR rt«n^

b. Then, if a consonanlrgioup thus containing r as
first member is followed by a vowel that has its sign, or a
part of its sign, or its sign of nasality lanusrtca: 70, 71),
written above the line, the r-sign ia placed furthest to the
right: thus, ifi rke, $ rka^ ^ rki, ^iki, ^ rko, S^rfelA,
■^ rkofi.

o. If r is pronounced after another consonant, whether
before a vowel or before yet another consonant, it is written
with a straight stroke below, slanting to the left: thus,
TT pra, H dhza, H gra, S ara, -f ddhfa, ^T ntra, XZ( grya,
R srva, ^ ntrya; and, with modifications of a preceding
cODSouant-sign like those noted above (13], If tra, ^ dra,
'm ijTtk, ^ bra.

d. When ^ r is to be combined with a following ^ f,
it is the vowel which is written in full, with its initial
character, and the consonant in subordination to it: thus,

16. Further oombinationa, of three, or four, or even
five oonsonant-signs, are made according to the same rules.
Examples are:

of three consonants, W ^tva, 3T ddhya, &] dvya, ^
drya, ^ dhrya, c^ psva, ^ 9oya, ^ 9th;a, fIT hvya;

of four consonants, ^ ktrya, ^ fik^ya, ^ 9trya,
rPTT tamya;

of five consonants, f^ rtsnya.
a. The mtnuEcriptfl, and the type-fonts u well, differ fiom one knother
more )n tbelr mintgeiaent of conionint combioillona than In any other respeet,
often havlnf peruUrittea vhlch one needs > little piacllce to anderatand. It
1b quite useless to give in a grammar the whole aertes Of potaible combioatlont
(aome of them ezcesslvely rare) irhlch are pioTlded for In any given type-
font, or even In all. There ia nothing which due funiliarity with the simple

ioy Google

9 Various Siohs. [—18

rigns tnd wttb tb« ibove rulei of combinttloQ will not enibla the atadent
leadlly to antlyBB tad eiplsio.

16. a. A sign called the avagraha [separator] — namely
>r — is occasionally used in the manuscripts, sometimes in
the manner of a hyphen, sometimes as a mark of hiatus,
sometimes to mark the elision of initial ^ a aftei final ^ e
OT ^ o (136). In piittted texts, especially European, it is
ordinarily applied to the use last mentioned, and to that
alone: thus, ^ >I5R^ te 'bruvan, W -I^RtrT ao 'bravlt, for t©
abravan, so abravlt.

b. If the elided initial-vowel is nasal, and has the anu-
av&ra-flign (70, 71) written above, this is usually and mote
properly transferred to the eliding vowel; but sometimes it
is written instead over the avagraha-sign : thus, for bo 'b^umKn,
&om so aJi9umSn, either W 'IJ'IRH or Ht 'ImHH

0. The sign ° is used in place of something that is
omitted, and to be understood from the connection: thus,
cjh^^ft^ o^ d^ vlrasenaantaa -tarn -tena.

d. Signs of punctuation are I and ii.

At the eod of a verse, a paragraph, or the like, the Utter of
them is ordinarily written twice, with the figure of eoiinieratioD
between: thus, il 1^0 |i.

17. The numeral figures are

^ 1. ^ '^ 5 3. 6 <. H 6, ^8, ti 7, US, 5 fl, 0 0.

In combination, to express larger numbers, they are
used in precisely the same way as European digits: thus,
5_»t 26, ^0 630, bOOO 7000, ^TT^ 1896.

IB. The Hlndn grammarlana call the different sonndH, and the
characters representing them, by a k&ra Ifttaktr) added to the sound
of the letter, if a vowel, or to the letter followed by a, if a consonant.
Thus, the sonnd or character a is called akSra; k is kak&ra; and
80 on. But the kfira is also omitted, and a, ka, etc. aro used alone.
The T, however, is not called rakSra, but only ra, or repba marl:
the sole example of a speoific name for an alphabetic element of its
class. The anasvXra and viearga are also known by these names alone.

Digitizecy Google

11- System op Sounds.

CHAPTER n.

SYSTEM OF SOUNDS; PRONUNCIATION.

I. Vowels.

19. The a, 1, and u-vowels. The Sanskrit has these
thiee eailiest and most universal Towele of Indo-Eutopean
language, in both short and long foim — Q a and 5T 5,
^ i and ^ I, 3 ti and ^ U. They aie to be pronounced in
the "Continental" or 'Italian" manner — as in far oi farther,
pin and pique, pull and rule.

30. The a is the openeBt vowel, ao utterance from the expanded
throat, stands in do relation of kindred with anj' of the classes of
coDHonaotal soniidB, and has no correap ending semivowel. Of the
close vowels 1 and u, on the other hand, 1 is palatal, and shades
through its semivowel y into the palalal and gnttnral consonant-
clusses; u is similarly related, throngh ils semivowel v, to the labial
class, as involving in its utterance a narrowing and rouoding of
the lips.

a. the Panine&n soheme (commehury to Piii)liii'B grsmmu i. 1. 9)
oluEes a IB guttural, but sppireiitif only Izi older to giv« that series as
veil BS the rest a Yovrel ; no one of the PTitl9akby)is puts a Into one clafs
with k etc, AU tbeee anthoritleB dticni In Mlling the 1- and a-vowels
reipeetlTely palatal and labial.

SI. The short a is not pronounced in India with the full openness
of &, as its corresponding short, but usually as the "nentral vowel"
[English so-called "abort u", of hut, son, blood, etc.). This peculiarity
appears very early, being acknowledged by Paijini and by two of the
Pratieakhyas iAPr. i. 36; VPr. 1. 72), which call the utterance Bariivpta,
covered up, dimmed. It is wont to be ignored by Western BCholars,
except those who have stadied in India.

32. The a-vowelsare the prevailing vowel-sounds of the language,
being about twice as frequent as all the others (includiug diphthongs]
taken together. The 1-vowela, again, ate about twice as Quoierous
as the a-vowels. And, in each pair, the short vowel la more than
livice PVa to 3 times) as common as the long.

Diail.zecy Google

1 1 Vowels. [—27

a. Fat mote preeUe ettlinatea or frsqaeocy, or these ind of Ihe othet
■Ipbibetic elementB, and Tor the wijr Id which tbey were obtained, teo
belov, 76,

28, The T- and l-vowels. To the three simple vowels
already meotioDed the SaaslcTit adds two otheis, the r-vowel
and the l-vowel, plainly generated by the abbreviation of
ayllablee containing respectively ^ ^ ^ °' vl ^ along with
another vowe): the ^ r coming almost always (see 237, 241-3]
&om W^ ar or ^ ra, the rT I from lEFT al.

a. Some ot the Blndit gratnoiKrluis idd to Ihe tipbabet also a long );
but this ta only for Ihe aake of an ittlflclal eymmetry, niace the aoond doet
not occur to a single genuine word In the Imgnage.

24. The rowel ^ r is simply a smooth or untrilled
r-sound, assuming a vocalic office in ayllable-making — as,
by a like abbreviation, it has done also in certain Slavonic
languages. The vowel ^ I is aa /-sound similarly uttered
— like the English ^vowel in such words as able, angle,
addle.

a. The modern Hindus prononoce these vowels as n', ri, li [or
even In), having long lost the iiabit and the facility of giving a vowel
value to the pure r- and I-sounds. Their example is widely followed
by European scholars; and hence alao the (distottiDg and altogether
objectionable) ttansliterationa pi, fl, li. There is no real difficulty in
tbe way of acquiring and practising the true utterauce.

b. Some of the gtammirians (see APt. i. 37, note} attempt to deflne mOTe
nearly the way In which, in these vowels, a real r- oi ^element ta combined
with something el«e.

26. Like their corresponding semiTowela, r and I, these vowels
belong respectively to the geneinl lingual and dental clasaes; the
euphonic inflaeace of j and f [1B8| shows this clearly. They are
BO ranked in the Paninean soheme ; but the Pr&ti^akbyas in general
strangely class them with the Jibvlmallra sounds, out "gutturals" (38).

29. The short \ is found in evety variety of word and of position,
and is not rare, being just about as frequent as longfL Long f is very
much more unusual, occurring only in certain plural cases of nouu-
steras in f (371b, d. 876). The \ is met with only in some of the
forma and derivatives of a single not very common verbal root (k)p).

27. The diphthongs. Of the four diphthongs, two,
the V e and W o, are in great pait original Indo-European

L.,j,i,....,LiOOgle

87—] II. System of Sounds. 12

Bounds. In the Sanskrit, they vrear the aspect of being
products of the increment oi strengthening of ^ i and 7 u
respectively; and they are called the corresponding gxt^a-
vowels to the latter (see below, 236 ff.). The other two, ^ U
and w Su, are held to be of peculiar Sanskrit growth; they
are also in general results of another and higher increment
of ^ i and 3 n, to which they are called the corresponding
TfrddM-TOwels (below, 2S5S.]. But all are likewise some-
times generated by euphonic combination (127); and ^ o,
especially, is common as result of the alteration of a final
qff as (17B).

28. The ^ e and ^ o are, both in India and in Europe,
usually pronounced as they are transliterated — that is, as
long e- (English "long a", or e in tJici/) and o-sounds, without
diphthongal character.

a. Such they appsreotly already were to the aathurs of the
Praticakhjas, which, while tanking them as diphthongs (soifadlijak^ant),
give rules reBpecting their pronunciation in a manner implying them
to be TiTtually unitary sounds. But their euphonic treatmeat (131-4)
clearly shows them to have been still at the period when the euphonic
laws established themselveB, as they of course . were at their origin,
real diphthongs, ai [a + ■) and au [a + u). From them, on the same
evidence, the heavier or vfddbi dlphthongB were dlBtiagnished by the
length of their n-element, as at {a + ■') and au (a + u).

b. Tbe ttcosnluble dtstiDCtnsBS of the two elements tn tlk« v^ddbl-
diphthongB Ib aollced bj the Frat^ikhyu (eea APi. f. 40, note); bnt the
lelatloD of thote elements U either defined m equal, or the a la made of
leu qnintltf than the t and u.

26. The lighter or gu^-diphthonge are much more frequent
(6 or T timee] than the heavier or v^ddU-diphthongB, and the e and
ftl than the o and ftu (a half more]. Both pairs arc somewhat more
than half as common as the simple t- and u-vowels,

30. Tbe general name given y tbe Hindu grtrnmaiiana to the foweU
Is avara tone; the simple vowels are called samfttUUc^ara homogentom
tyliable, and the diphthong! are called saifadliTak^ara comhitiation-syllabh.
The position of the organs in their nttetsnce Is deSned to be one of openness,
01 of non-cloBUTe.

«. As to quantity and accent, see below, 7611., 80 ff.

ioy Google

II. Consonants.

SI. The Hiodu name for 'coDsonant' is vralkjuia numi/ttttr.
Tbe consonants are divided by the grammariana into Bparqa eontaet
or mnte, anta^thft, xntermediale or aemivowel, and ^mon spirant.
Thej will here be taken np and described jo tbia order.

83. Hntes. The mntea, sparQa, are so called aa involving a
complete closure or contact (sparfn), and not an approiimatioa only,
of the month-organs by which thoy are prodnced. They are divided
into five chases or series (varga), according to the organs and parts
of organs by which the contact is made; aod each series is composed
of live members, differing according to the sccompanimenis of the
contact.

33. The five mute-setiea are called respectively guttural,
palatal, lingual (or cerebral), dental, and labial; and they
are arranged in the order as just mentioned, beginning with
the contact made furthest back in the mouth, coming for-
ward itom point to point, and ending with the fiontmost
contact.

34. In each series there are two eurd members, two
sonant, and one nasal [which is also sonant) : for example,
in the labial series, ^ p and m ph, ^ b and ^ bh, and ^ m.

a. The meruberi are by the Hindu giammturtins called Tespectiiely^^rri,
leeond, third, fourth, and last oi Jifth.

b. The surd consonanU aie known aa oghoqa tonelat, and the aonanta
aa gtao^vant kaving tone; and the dedcrLptlons of the grammarlana ate In
accordance with these taroiB. All alike recognlee a dKrcrence of tone, and not
in any manner • dllTaience oT force, vbetber of contact or of eipalsion, aa
aeparatirig the tiro great classea in question. That the difference depends on
Tlv&ra opening, or aaifav&ra ch$ur« {of the gloltie), ie alio recognised
by them.

86. The first and third members of each series are the
ordinary corresponding surd and sonant mutes of European
languages: thus, m k and TJ g, rT t and ^ d, ti p and ? b.

se. Nor is the character of the nasal any more doubtful.
What I? m is to TT P, and ^ b, or =1 n to rT t and 5" "^i that
is also each other na«al to its own series of mutes : a sonant
expulsion into and through the nose, while the mouth-
organs are in the mute-contact.

ioy Google

ae-] n. SrSTBM ov Sounds. ] 4

a. The HindD gramiiuriana £!*■ diitlni-tlf this dcSnitiOD. The niul
(animSaika patting through the note) lotiiidi ue decliied lo be foimed by
month and nose tofetlieT; dt their niulilj (antmSflil^tt) to be gireo them

If nndosme of the now.

37. The secood and fourth of each series are aspirates:
thus, beside the surd mute ^ k we have the corresponding
surd aspirate ^ kh, and beside the sonant T\ g, the corres-
ponding sonant aspirate ^ gh. Of these, the precise char-
acter is more obscure and difficult to determine.

a. Thit the upiretes, ill of tbem, ire leil mates or oontict lonndg, md
not frieiUveg (like Enrop^in th ind ph lod eh, et«.), U beyond qaettion.

b. It i* *Uo not doubtful Id whit way the said th, fOT eiimple, dilTere
from the nniBpinted t: laeb aspiiales ire found in mmy Aelitic Imgaages,
and even in some !E[iiope.in; they involve the slipping-out of in indible bit
0^ Jlattu 01 aspintion belneen the bieacb of mate-elosuTe ind the following
sound, whsteyef it m»y be. They ite anrnritely enough lepresenled by the
tb etc., vith vhirh, in Imitation of the Latin treitment of the similu indent
Greek aspirates, we are accustomed to write them.

o. The sonant aapintea are generally uadentood ind described as made
In 1 eimilir way, with » peri;eptible A-sound after the breaeli of sonant mnte-
closnre But there are great theoTeticil difflcuItieB in the wiy of ai^cepting
thii GiplanitioD ; md some of the best phonetic obierrers deny that the modem
Hinilu pronnnciation is of inch 1 cbaricler, and dellne the element following
the mate as a ''glottal bazx", rithei, or u m emphuized ntterince of the
beginning of tho succeeding sound. The question ii one of great difficulty,
and upon it the opinions of the highest authorities are much at yirianee.
Sonant aipititrs are still in use in India, in the pronnnciation of the Terniculir
as well as of the leimed languages.

d. By the Priitltalihyis, the afpitttes of both classes are called BOfman:
which might mean either accompanied hy a rtuh of breath (taking Qfman
In its more etymological sense), or accompanied hy a tpiranl (b^low, 6B).
And some native anthorltles define the surd ispirstes is mide by the combi-
nation of each sard non-aspirate with its own eoneiponding surd spirant; and
the sonant aspiTites, of each sonant non-isplnte with the sonant spirant, the
Il-Bound (below, 66). Bat Ibis would make the two claiees of aspjrites of
qoite diverse character, and would also mike th the same as ts, ^ as ff , oh
as CQ — which is In any measure pliasible only of the last. Pi^ni baa no
name for aspirates ; the scheme given in bis comment (to i. 1. 9) attributes
to them mahapril^ great expiration, and to the non-asplratcs alpaprK^a
tmali expiration.

e. It is usual among European scholars to pronounce
both classes of aspirates as the corresponding non-aspirates

Digitizecy Google

15 GuTTrRAL AND Palatal Mutes. [—42

with a following h: for example, EI th nearly as in English
boathook, ^ ph as in haphazard, tT dh as in madhouse, ^ bh
as in abhor, and so on. This is (as we have seen above)
strictly accurate only as regards the auid aspirates.

38. The BUDHDt aspirates nre {in the opiaion of most), or at least
represent, origioal Indo-European sounds, while the surd aspirates
are a special Indian devolopmeut. The former are more thau twice
as common as the latter. The unaspirated (non-nasal) mutes are very
much more frequent [5 times) than the aspirates (for the special fre-
quency of bb and original gb, see 60 and 66j; and among them the
surds are more nnmorons (2Vj timesl than the sonants. The nasals
(chiefly n and m) are nearly as fiequeut as the suid non-aspirates.

We take up now the several mute-seriee.

39. Guttural eeties: SR k, J^^kb, Hg, q^gh, l!^ n.
These are the ordinary European /: and ^-sounds, with theii
corresponding aspirates and nasal (the last, like English nff
in singing).

a. The guttnraii «ra daftned by the PrldcakhyM as nude by contsrt ot
the buc of the tongae with the hase of the Jaw, and tliey'ars called, from
the former organ, JlbT&inuliya tongue-root sounds. The Paiiinem ich^uie
de*cribe9 them limply as made lu the throat (kai^Jhaj. From tho eujjhoiiic
inllnence n( a k on a rollowin; b (bebw, 180), »>? may perhaps infor that
In theii ultcranre the tongoe was well drawn back lo the mouth.

40. The k is by far tho commonest of the gnttnral series occurring
oonsiderably more often than all the otlier four taken together. The
nasal, except as standing before ono of the others of the same series,
is found only as final (after the loss of a foDowiug k: 386, 407) in
a very small number of words, and as product of the assimilation of
final k to a following nasal (161).

41. The Sanskrit guttural series represents only a minority of
Indo-European gutturals; these last have suffered more and more general
corruption than any other class of consonants. By processeB of alteration
which began in the Indo-European period, the palatal mutes, the
palatal sibilant f, and the aspiration b, have come from gntturals.
See these various sounds helow.

42. Palatal series; ^c, ^ oh, sT j, iK jb, 31 fl.

The whole palatal series is derivative, being generated by the
cormptiou of original guttntals. Tho o comes from an original k —
as does also, by another degree of alteration, the palatal sibilant f
(see below, 64), The J, in like m.inuer, couies from a g; but the

j,i,....,LiOOglC

12—] IT. Ststem of Sounds. ig

Suskrlt j InclndOB in Itself two degrees of altentioD, one eorrespond-
iBg to the ftlteration of k to c, the other to that of k to q {see below,
SIB). The o ii eomowhat mote common than the j (aboat as four
to three). The aspirate ob is yery mach less freqaent (a tenth of oj,
and comes from the original gronp ek. The sonant aspirate jb is
exceisivelj rare (occnrring bnt once in RV., not once in AV., and
hardly balf-a-doaen times in the whole older language); where fouad,
it is either onomatopoetic or of aoomalons or not Indo-Enropean origin.
The nasal, fi, never occurs except immediately before — or, in a
small namber of words, also after (SOlj — one of the others of the
same series.

43. Hence, Id the euphonic processes of the language, the
treatment of the palatals is in many respects peculiar. In some
situations, the orfginal unaltered guttural shows itself — or, aa
it appears from the point of view of the Sanskrit, the palatal reverts
to its original guttural. No palatal ever occurs as a final. The J is
differently treated, according as it represents the one or the other
degree of alteration. And o and j (except artificially, in the algebraic
rules of the grammarians) do not interchange, as corresponding snrd
and Bonant.

44. The palatal mutee are by European scholars, as by
the modern Hindus also, pronounced with the compound
sounds of English ch and j (in church and Judge).

a. Their deicTiptlon by the old HiDda grunmariana, howCTer, givea tbeui
t not lee< absolutel; aimple characlei than betonga to the other mules. They
Me called tilaTya palatal, and declared to be formed againat tbe palate by
the middle ot the tongue. They «eeni to hsT« been, Ihen, broaght forward in
the month from the gnttoral point, and made (gainst the hard palate tX i.
point not far from the lingual one (belov, 4B), but 'nith the upper flat sarftce
of the tongue instead of ite point Snch sonnds, in all languages, pass eitily
into the (English) eh- and y-sonnds. Tbe value of the oh u makiug the
preceding Towel long by position" (SS7), and its frequent orlgluaMon
from t + f (SOS), lead to tbe suspicion that it, at least, may have had
this character from the beginning: compare 87 d, above.

4B. Lingual series: ?1 1, 7 (h, I <}, ^ 4h, HI Q. The
lingual mutes are by all the native authorities defined as
uttered with the tip of the tongue turned up and drawn
back into the dome of the palate (somewhat as the usual
English smooth r is pronounced). They are called by the
grammaTians mftrdhanya, literally head-sounds, capitals,
cephalics ; which term is in many European grammars

ioy Google

17 LlNflDAL AHD DeNTAL MdTBB. [—47

lendeied by 'ceiebrals'. In practice, among Euiopean
SanskritieU, no attempt is made to distinguish them from
the dentals: 7 t is pionounced like FT t, 3 <} like ^ d, and
so with the rest.

46. The lingoale are another non-origin&l series of BonndB,
coming mainly from the phoaetio alteratioa of the next Berlea, the
dentals, but also in part occurring in words that have no traceable
lodo-Enropean coDDection, and are perhaps derived from the ab-
original languages of India. The tendency to lingnalization Is a
poBitive one in the history of the language: dentals easily pass into
liaguals under the Influence of contiguous or neigbbonring lingual
sounds, but not the contrary i and all the sounds of the class become
markedly more frequent in the later literature. The conditions of
their ordinary occurrence are briefly these: 1. q comes from a, much
more rarely ftom q, J, bf, in euphonic circumstances stated below
(ISO, 318ff.)i 2. a dental mute following ^ is assimilated to it,
becoming lingual (t, \b, 9; 187); 3. n la oftea changed to 9 after a
lingual vowel or semivowel or sibilant in the same word (lB9ff.);
4. ^, which is of very rare occurrence, comes from assimilation of
a dental after q {108 a) or h (233]-, 5. \ and 4 come occasionally
by substitution for some other sound which is not allowed to stand
as final (14S, 14B-7). When originated in these ways, the lingual
letters may be regarded as normal; in any other eases of their
occurrence, they are either products of abnormal corruption, or signs
of the noa-Indo-European character of the words in which they

a. In ■ cerUtn nombeT of paMigei anmerlcall)' eximlned (below, 75),
tbe abnormal occnirencea of lingual mnteB weie Im9 thin half of the whole
nnmber (71 ant of 169), and moit of them (43) weie of 9: all were found
more freqaeut in the later panages. In the Eig-Veda, only 15 words have
an abnormal (; only 6, such a (hi only 1, BDch 1 ^b; about 20 (Encluding
9 toota, nearly all of whtcb have derlvativee) abow an abnormal 4' besldea
9 that have ^k^; and 30 (Inoludlng 1 root) show a 1^

b. Taken all together, the lingnals are by far the rarest class of
mutes (about t'/j per cent, of the alphabet) — hardly half as frequent
even as the palatals.

47. Dental series: q^t, q^th, ^ d, U dh, ^T^n. These
are called by the Hindus also dantya dental, and are
described as formed at the teeth [oi at the roots of the
teeth], by the tip of the tongue. They ate practically the
equivalents of our European /, d, n.

WhllBBJ, Oramiiur. 3. ti. 2

Diaii.ze.., Google

47—] II. System or Soitndb. 18

a. Bat tbe modem Hlndni ue iild to prononoce theit denttli with the
tip of the l«Dgiie thnut well foiward agiinst the upper teetb, bo th&t theie
lounda get a alight tinge of the quality belonging to the Engltab ind Hodem
Greek Ih-ionait. The abeenDe or (htt quality in the Europeui (eipecially
tbe English) dentili la doubtleas tbe reuon why to tbe ear of ■ Hlndo the
Utl«r (ppeu more aiulogona with his Ungaals, and he is apt to nae tbe linguale
in writing European void a,

48. The denuls are one of the IndD-Enrope*n original rnnte-
clasHB. In their occDirence in Sanakrit they are just about aa frequent
ns all the other four ciaBses taken together.

49. Labial seiiea: 1 p, ^II ph, ? b, H bh, ^ m.
These sounds are called o^ttiya labial by the Hindu gram-
marians also. They are, of course, the equivalents of our
p, b, m.

so. The nDmerical relations of the labials are a little peculiar.
Offing to tbe absence (or almost entire absence) of ( In Indo-Earopean,
the Sanskrit b also is greatly exceeded in frequency by bh, which
is the most common of all the sonant aapirates, as ph is the least
common of the surd. The nasal m (notwithstanding its frequent
euphonic mutstiona when final: SlSff.) occurs Jnst abont as often as
all the other four members of the series together.

a. From an early period in the history of tbe language, hot Increasingly
later, b and t eiohange with one another, or fail to be diEtingniahed In the
manQSorlpta. Thus, the donble root-forms b^h and vfh, b&db and Tadh, and
BO on, Jn the Bengal manuscripta, v la widely written inatead of more original b.

61. Semivowels: 77 y, J r, 3 I, 5 v.

a. The name giren to this claas of rounds by tbe Hindu grammarians Is
antahstbA ttanding bttieetn — either from their character as ntterancos
intermediate between vowel and coneonanl, or (more probably) from the
clKumBtance of their being placed between tbe mutes sad aplrants in tbe
arrangement of the consonants.

b. The semivowels are clearly akin with the several mute aeries
in their physical character, and they are olaaslfied along with those
series — thongh not without some discordances of view — by the Hiudn
grammarians. They are said to be produced with tbe organa slightly
in contact (i^atapi^t^), or in imperfect contact (duhap^^faj.

62. The ^ r is clearly shown by its influence in the
euphonic processes of the language to be a lingual sound,
or one made with the tip of the tongue turned up into the
dome of the palate. It thus resembles the English smooth r,
and, like this, seems to have been untrilled.

Dijiiizec., Google

{9 Semivowbls. [^BB

a. The PtnlneiD leheme leckoni r m ■ llnguil. None of tbe P^ti^ikhyM,
tao«eT«r, doei lo; dot are ihej enttrelf eoniiitent with one anoUiet In lu
dwcriptton. For Iha moit p>it, they define it u mida tt "the rtiots of the
teeth". Thii waatd give It • position like thi>t of tbe Tibnted r; but no
■nthority hlnti tt & Tib»tlon u beloaging to it.

b. In point of frequency, r stands yerj high on the list of coo-
soDanU; it is nearly equal with v, n, m, and y, and only exceeded
by t.

68. The ^ 1 ia a sound of dental positioD, and is bo
defined and classed by all the native authorities.

a. The peenllai ehanctet of >n ^aoand, u iDTOlviag eipultlon at the
ilde of the toD^e along with conUct at Ita tip, ia not noticed by any Hinda
phonetlat.

b. The gemlTOweli r and 1 ue very widely interchangeable In Sanakrlc,
both Id loota and in luffliei, and even In prefixes : tbeie are few toots contaln-
ing * I which do not ahow also fenna with t; woidi written with the one
lettei ate found in othet texts, ot in other parts of tbe same text, written
with tbe other. In the later periods of the langnigs they are mere lepitated,
nod tbe I becomes decidedly more beqnent, thongh always much ratei than
the r (only as 1 to 7 or 8 oi 10).

B4, Some of the Vedic texts have another ^aonnd, written with
a sUghtly different character (it is given at the end of the alphabet,
Ca), which is snbetitnted for a lingual 4 (as also the same followed
by h for a 4^) when occurring between two vowels. It ia, then,
doubtless a lingnal I, one made by breach (at the side of the tongue)
of the lingual instead of the dental mute closure.

a, Ezamplee ate; |^ lie, for ^ i^e, bnt ^^ 1^7*; MIoo^^
mOhnfe, for iflBq ml^bn^, bat ^^H mi^Tftn. It Is especially in
the Rig-Teda and its anxiltary litetatate that this snbstltatlon is naual.

SB. The n* y in Sanskrit, aa in other languages generally,
stands in the oloseat relationship with the vowel ^ i (short
or long); the two exchange with one another in cases ia-
numerable.

a. And in the Teda (as the metre shows) an 1 is very often to be read
where, in oonfoimlty with the roles o( the later Sanskrit eopbony, a y ta
rnitten. Thus, the final i-TOwel of a word remains i before an Initial vowel ;
that of a stem maintains itself unchanged before an ending; and an ending
of derivation — as ya, tya — has 1 Instead of y. Sacb cases will he noticed
in more detail later. Tbe ooastancy of the phenomenon in certain words and
classes of word* shows that this was no merely opUonsl interohinge. Very
probably, the Sanskrit y had everywhere more of an 1-charaotei than belongs
10 the corresponding European sound.

itizecy Google

56—] !I. Ststbm of SotrjsDS. 20

Be. The 7 is by it* phyaiol character a palatal ntterance; and
It IB classed as a palatal aemivowel by the Hindu phonetiate. It is
one of the most common of Sanskrit sounds.

67. The ^ T is pronounced as English or French v
(Geiman vj) hy the modem Hindus — except when preceded
by a consonant in the same syllable, in which case it has
rather the sound of English w; and European scholars follow
the same practice (with or without the same exception).

a. By its whole treatment in the eaphony of the language, however,
the V stands related to an u-towoI precisely as y to an t-vowel. It
is, then, a v only according to the original Roman value of that
letter — that is to say, a ic-sonnd in the Eaglish sense; though (as
was stated above for the y) it may well bavo been less markedly
separated from u than English w, or more like French oh in out etc.
Bnt, as the original w has in most European languages been changed
to u (English), so also in India, and that from a very early time: the
Panioean scheme and two of the Fr&titikhyss (VPr. and TPr.) distinctly
define the sound as made between the upper teeth and the lower
lip — which, of course, identifies it with ihe ordinary modem v-sonnd.
As a matter of practice, the nsnal pronnuciation need not be seriously
objected to; yet the student shoald not fail to note that the rules of
Sanskrit enphooy and the name of "semivowel" have no implication
except to a w-sound in the English sense: a c-souud (German u>) is
no semivowel, bnt a spirant, standing on the same articulate stage
with the English fA-sounds and the /

68. I'he V is classed as a labial semivowel by the Hindu phonet-
leal authorities. It has a somewhat greater frequency than the y.

a> III the Teda, under the lame clrcam stances as the y (above, B6 ft),
v ia to be read as a vowel, tL

b. Ab to the iuCeichange of v and b, see above, 60a.

69. Spirants. Under the name O^man (literally heat,
steam, Jiatus), which is usually and well represented by
spirant, some of the Hindu authoiities include all the remain-
ing sounds of the alphabet; others apply the term only to
the three sibilants and the aspiration — to which it will here
also be restricted.

a. Tbe term is not found In the Paninean Bcheme ; by dttrerent treatises
the luttunl and labial breathings, these and the vlaarga, or all these and
anUBvSra, are aho (In addition to (he sibilants and li) cslled ii^man (see

.,Goo»^lc

21 SlBlLAHTS. [—68

AFi. i. 31 Dote). The orguia ot Dttennce aie dexulbeil u bslng la the
poeitlon of the mate-aerlee to which eieb splruit belongs reipedively, but
uneloBed, oi unclosed in tbe middle.

60. The TT B. Of the three Bibilants, ot suid spirants,
this is the one of plainest and least questioned character:
it is the ordinary European 3 — a hiss expelled between
the tongue and the roof of the mouth directly behind the
upper front teeth.

a. It is, then, dental, u it ie clasBed by all tlie Hinda aDtborities.
NotwithBtanding the great tosses which it suffers in Saoskrit euphony,
hj conveTBioQ to the other sibilants, to r, to TiBarga, etc., it is
■till very high among the coDBonantB in the order of fiequeucy, or
considerably more common than both the other two sibilants together.

dl. The ^ 9- As to the character of this sibilant, also,
there is no ground for real question: it is the one produced
in the lingual position, or with the tip of the tongue
reverted into the dome of the palate. It is, then, a kind of
s^-sound; and by European Sanskritists it is pronounced
as an ordinary sh (French ch, German sch), no attempt
being made (any more than in the oase of the other Ungual
sounds: 45} to give it its proper lingual quality.

a. Its lingaal character ia ehowa by ita whole euphonic Influence,
and it is described and classed as lingual by all the Hindn anthor-
iHea (the AFr. adds, i. 33, that the tongue in its utterance is trougb-
Bhaped). to its audible quality, it ia a »A-sound rather than B«-Boand;
and, in the considerable variety of sibilant-utterance, even in the
same community, it may coincide with the jA of some among
onrselvea. Yet the general and normal «A is palatal (see below, 63] ;
and threrefore the sign ^, marked in accordance with the other lin-
gual letters, is the only unexceptionable transliteration for the Hindu
character.

b. Id madoFD ptonuiidition in India, ; la muoh confounded with kb;
■nd the mannacilpts aie apt to eicbange the chinetecs. Some Uter giim-
matlckl tteatlaea, too, take note or the lelitiooablp.

6fl. This sibilant [as was noticed above, 46, and will be more
particalarly explained below, 180 ff.] is no original sound, bnt a
product of the Ungnalization of s under certain euphonic condltiona.
The exceptions are extremely few (9 oat of 145 noted occnrrencea:
75), and of a purely eporadic character. The RIg-Veda has [apart

Digitizecy Google

•a—] II. System or Soukdb. 22

from ^ Bah, 182 b) only twelve words whloh show a q under other
Condi tiooa.

a. The flDit 9 of a root bu Id lome OMet att&lued ■ more Independent
TilQe, and doet not levett to B when the enphonic condJtlDna ate teMOVed,
1>Qt Bhowg aiionlaloDl rorml (286-6).

63. The ^ 9. This sibilant is by all the native authoiities
classed and described as palatal, nor is there anything in
its histoiy or its euphonic tteatment to cast doubt oa its
character as such. It is, then, made irith the flat of the
tongve against the forward part of the palatal arch — that
is to say, it is the usual and normal sA-sound. By European
scholars it is variously pronounced — more often, perhaps,
as s than as «A.

a. The two (A-8onnd(, ; and 9, ate made In the »anie patt of the
mouth (the 9 probably lather tnilliet baclt), but with a different part of
the tengne; and they are doabtleti not moie nnlike than, for example, the
two f-aonnds, written ( and t; and it would be not lest proper to pronounce
them both u one »h Ihan to pronoance the lingnaU and dantali alike. To
neglect the difference of b and 9 i« much lev to be approved. The very
□ear relationship of 9 and q Ib attested by their enphonic treatment, which
1b to a conaiderable extent the same, and by their not infrequent oonfUsion
by the wTlteie of mannscripti.

64. As was mentioned above (41), the 9, lilce o, comes from the
corruption of an original A-sonnd, by lose of mute-contact u well as
forward shift of the point of production. Id virtue of this derivation,
it sometimes (though less often than o) "reverts" to k— that is, the
original k appears instead of it (43),' while, on the other band, aa a
«A-aoQnd, it Is to a certain extent convertible to 9. In point of frequency,
it slightly exceeds the latter.

66. The remaining spirant, ^ h, is ordinarily pronounced
like the usual European sutd aspiration h.

a. This ia not, however, its real character. It is deflned by all the native
anthoiities at not a auid element, but a sonant (or elae an ntterance Inter-
mediate between the two); and Its whole value In the enphony of the language
i» that of a »onaut: but what le its precise value Is very bard to say. The
Pauiuein scheme ranks U as guttural, as It does also a: thia meint nothing.
The Pratitakbyas bring it Into no lelatlon with the guttural clsss) one of
them quotes the opinion of some anthorltiea that 'It bas the aame poai^n
with the beginning of the following vowel" (TPr. 11. 47) — which so Us
tdentifles it with our h. There is nothing in ita enphonio influence to mark
It a* retaining any trace of gntturally articulated character. By some of

ioy Google

23 VlHARQA. [—89

tie DatiTe phooetiati it ia identifled vlth tbe upintton of tlie lontnt
upintei — with the element by which, for eiunple, gh differs from g.
This view U aopparted bjr tlia derivation of h ftom the aapiiates (ueit
paiagiaph), bjr that of 1 4- b from ^ (S4), and by the treatment of initial
h after a Bnal mute (168).

68. Tbe h, as alreadj noticed, is not an original sonnd, bnt
cornea in nearly all cases from an older gh (for the few iostanoes of
its deriTatlon from dh and bh, aee belov, 2S3s). It Is a vastly
more frequent Boand than the unchanged gh (namely, as 7 to 1): more
frequent, indeed, than any of the guttural mutee except k. It appears,
like J !S19), to inclnde in itself two stages of corruption of gb: one
coTrespondlng with tbat of k to o, the other with that of k to ;;
see below, 233, for the roots belonging to the two classes respectively.
Like the other sounds of gnttural derivation, it sonetimos exhibits
"reversion" (48) to its original.

67. The : It, or viflarga (visarjRDlya, as it is unifoimly
called by the Prati^akhyas and by Pacini, probably as belong-
ing to the end of a syllable), appears to be merely a surd
breathing, a final A-sound (in the Eutopean sense of h),
uttered in the articulating position ot the preceding vowel.

a. One FrBti^kh;a (TPr. U. 48) glvet jnat this lait deicriptlon of it.
It Is b; Tarfou* authorities classed with h, or with b and ft: all of them
are alike Bounda In whoae utterance the month-oisans have no definite
shaping action.

68. The visorga is not original, but always only a substitute
for final b or r, neither of which ia allowed to maintain itself nnchauged
{170ff.). It is a comparatively recent member of tbe alphabetic
system; the other euphonic changes of final ■ and r have not passed
through viaarga as an intermediate stage. And the Hindu aathorittes
are oonsidentbly discordant with one auotber as to bow far 1; Is a
necessary aubstitnte, and how iax a permitted oim, alternative with
a sibilant, before a following initial surd.

60, Before a Burd guttaral or labial, reapectively, aome of the
native authorities permit, while others require, conversion of final s
or r into the so-called JlhvSmlUIya and upadbmAniya spirants. It
may be fairly questioned, perhaps, whether these two sounds are not
pure grammatical abstractions, devised (like the long {-vowel: 33a)
in order to ronnd out the alphabet to greater symiuetry. At any
rate, both manuscripts and printed texts in general make no account
of them. Whatever Individual character they may have must be,
it would seem, in the direction of the (German) ch- and /-sounds.
When written at all, they are wont to be Uansliterated by x ond 9^.

ioy Google

70— J IL Systeh of Sounds. 21

TO. The ~ anuBv&ra, ft or ifa, is a oasal sound lacking
that oloBure of the organe which is required to make a
nasal mute 01 contact-sound (36); in its utterance there is
nasal resonance along with some degree of openness of the
mouth.

71. There li di«Miid»nee of opinion unong both the Hindu phonetlBU
lad theli modein EniDpean (nicceBaoia reipecting the leal chu&ctei of thU
eUmenC; henee « Utile detail la neceuuy here with legud to its oecnnence
sad theii tIcvb of it

a. Certain dmU» in Ssnikrlt are of eerrile chsitetei, Uvars to be
uiimlUted to > foUoviDg coasonaDt, of irbateTet cb>T>eter that ma; be.
Such are Anal m in aentence-combinatiOD (313), the penultimate nasal of
a root, and a nasal of inclement (266) in general. If one of theae naMl«
Btandi before a contact-latter 01 mote. It becomei ■ naaal mute Mneepond-
ing to the latter — that Is, a nual utterance In the aame poiltlon of the
mouth-organa which gtveg the anccaediog mate. If, on the other hand, the
following conioaant doee not in^ol^e a contact (being a semirowel or aplnmt),
the naaal element ia also withoat contact: it ia a naaal utterance with
unclosed month-organa. The qneatlou ia, now, whether this naeil utteranc«
becomea merely a naaal Infection of the preceding vowel, turning it into ■
nasal vowel (as in French on, en, uit, etc., bj reason of a aimllar loaa of
a naaal mute); or whether it la an element of more Indlrldnal ebaiacter,
having place between the Towel and the conaonant; or, once more, whether
it ti aometimes the one thing and aometlmea the other. The opinions of
the PAtl(«kh7aB and Knini are briefly aa followa :

b. The Atbaira-Priti^aUiya holda that the result is everywhere a
nasalized lowel, except when n or m Is asBlmllated to a following I; in
that case, the n or m becomes a naeal 1: that ia, the naaal utterance it
made in the l-posltioD, and haa ■ perceptible I'Charactei.

c. The other Prltl9akhyaa teach a limilai coUTersion Into a naeal
counterpart to the semiyowel, or s nasal aemiTowel, before y and 1 and v
(not before r also). In moat of tiie other obbbi where the Atharfa'FratifakhTa
acknowledges a nasal Towel — namely, belbre r and the spirants — the others
teach the intervention after the Towel of a distinct naaal element, called the
anuBv&ra a/ter-ton».

d. Of the nature of this nasal afterpiece to the lowel no IntelUglbty
clear account ia given. It la aald (RPr.) to be either vowel or consonant;
it is decUred (BFi,, VPr.) to be made with the hobo alone, or (TPr.) to be
nasal like the naaal mutea; it is held by some (RPr.) to be the louaut tone
of the naial mutes; in its formation, a* in that of vowel and spirant, there
ia (BFr.) no conuct As to ita quantity, see fnttber on.

e. There are, however, certain casea and clasaes of caaea where these
other authorities atao acknowledge a nasal TOweL So, especially, whereyer

i, Google

25 Akubvaba. [—73

a flual a li UeiUd (308-8) u if it vera hb (its UitoilMlly otdei foim];
*Dd also In * Bmall DUiuber of ipeelflad voidi. They al»o mautloii the
doctrine of Dual vowel lutead of uinsvKrft as held by some (and TPi.
U nnceTtain and incanilatent Id Iti choice between the one and the olheij.

f. In Panlnl, Anally, the prevaiUag doctrine 1b that of annsvftra
eTeiywhere; and it la «ven allDwed in maoy cases vheie the Piatifikfayas
pieacribe oaly a uual mate. Bat a naaal semivowel la alto allowed inatead
befoie a semtTowel, and a nsBal vowel is allowed in the caaea (mentioned
above) where soma of the Fratifakhyas leqolre it by eiaepHon.

g. It ii evidently a lali qnestlDn whethai this dlseoidance and nnoertalnty
of the Hindu phanetisls is owini to a real difference of utteraoce in different
ctasaes of eases and in different localitleB, or whether to a different scholaetlc
analysis of what la really everywheTe the same utterance. If anuBTftra
I* a nasal element following the vowel, it cannot well be any thing bnt
either a proIongatioD ot the same vowel-sonnd with nasality added, or a
nasalized bit of nenlral-vowel eonnd (in the latter case, however, the altering
inflaenee of an 1 ot u-vovel on a following a ooght to be prevented, which
is not the case: Bee 1B3).

7S. The asBimilated nasal element, whether viewed as nasalized
Towel, naBal Bemivowel, or independent aniuiTjtTa, has the value of
eometbing added, in making a heav^ syllable, or length by poeilioD (70).

a. The Pratlfikhyaa (YPt„ RPr.) give determinatloni of the qaandty
of the anxuvftra combining irlth a short and with a long vowel respectively
to make a long syllable.

73. a. Two different HlgtiB, i and r, are found in the mannscriptB,
indicatiDg the nasal sound heie treated of. Usually they are written
above the syllable, and there they seem most naturally to imply a
D&sal affection of the vowel of the syllable, a nasal (anunaalka) vowel.
Hence some texts (Sama- and Tajur-Vedas], when they mean a real
aniuv&ra, bring oao of the signs down into the ordinary consonant-
place; but the usage is not general. As between the two signs,
some mannscriptB employ, or tend to employ, the Z where a nasaliied
(annnaslkal vowel is to be recognized, and elsewhere the -; and this
distinction Is consistently observed in many European printed texts;
and the former is called the anunoalka sign: bat the two are doubt-
less originally and properly equivalent.

b. It is a very common custom of tbe mannscriptB to write the
oaTiBvKra-sigD for any nasal following the vowel of a syllable, either
before another consonant or as final (not before a vowel), without
any reference to whether it is to be pronounced as nasal mute, nasal
semivowel, or annavSra. Some printed texts follow this slovenly and
nndesirable babit; bnt most write a nasal mute whenever it Is to bo
pronounced — excepting where it is an assimilated m [S13).

itizecy Google

73—1 H- System op Sochds. 26

0. It is convenient also In tranBliteraUon to distiDguiBh the as-
similated m by a special sign, di, from the annav&ra of more inde-
pendent origin, ft; and this method will be folloved in the present work.

74. This is the whole system of soands recognized by the written
character; for certain other transidonai sonnds, more or lees widely
recognised in the theories of the Hindu phonedsts, see below, S80.

75. The whole spoken alphabet, then, may be aiiai^ed
in the following manner, in order to show, so far as is
possible in a single scheme, the relations and important
classifications of its vaiious members:

a, s 1

^y

T. r

Sb

jl

41,

S

J

i

kh

oh

»h

k

0

t

Qutt

P«l.

ling

V

Semivowels

Nasals

AnoBvira

AspiraUon

Visarga

Sibilaota

bh

asp.

b

unasp.

Ph

up. «•'•■

P

unasp.

Dent. Lab.

a. The figures set under the characters give the average per-
centage of freqoenoy of each sound, found by counting the number
of times which it occurred in an aggregate of 10,000 sonnds of con-
tinouB text, in ten different passages, of 1,000 sounds each, selected
from different epochs of the literature: namely, two from the Rig- Veda,
one from the Atharva-Veda, two from different Brahma^as, and one
each ftom Hana, Bhagavad-GItti, Qakantals, Hitopadega, and Vaaa-
vadat» (J.A.O.S., vol. X., p. c1).

ioy Google

III. Quantify of sounds and syllables.

7d. The Hindu giammarians take the pains to define the
quantity of a consonant (without distinction among consonants
of diffeient classes] as half that of a short vowel.

77. They also define the quantity of a long [dlrglia]
Towel 01 diphthong as twice that of a short (hraava) vowel —
making no distinction in this respect between the gu]^-
and the vrddbi-diphthongs.

7B. Besides these two vowel-qiiantitiee, the Hindus
acknowledge a third, called pluta (Utetally swimminff), or
protracted, and having three moras or three times the quantity
of a short vowel. A protracted vowel is marked by a follow-
ing figure 3: thus, ^ S3.

». Tbe protracted vowels are practically of rare occurrence (in
RV., three oases; in AV., fifteen; in the Brahmana literature, decidedly
more frequent). They are used in cases of qnestioning, especially of
a balancing between two alternatives, and also of calliDg to a distance
or urgeotly. The protraction is of the last syllable in a word, or in
a whole phrase; and the protracted syllable has nsually the acnte tone,
in addition to any other accent the word may have; Bometimcfl it
takes also anuavSra, or is made naeal-

b. Examples are; adti&l^ avid ftsisd upiri avid a^3t (RV.) tcai
it, foTMoih, belowT uxu it, forsooth, ahoeef Id&m blitl7a3 idii3m {ti
(AV.) toying, it thi* more, or is thalf Agni^i p&tnlvos^ admam piba
(TS.) O Agni! fhou with thy ipouie.' drink the toma.

c. A dipbtboDg Is piotracted by prolongation of its Biet or a-elemcnt:
thuB, e to &si, o to jL3a.

d. The sign ot protraction Is also lometiniei wTltt«n u the lesnlt of
accentual combination, when ao-called kampa occurt: «ee below, 87 d.

70. For metrical purposes, syllables (not vowels) are
distinguished by the grammarians as heavy (guru) or light
(iBghn). A syllable is heavy if its vowel is long, or short
and followed by more than one consonant ("long by po-
sition"). Anusvftra and vlsar^a count as full consonants in

DijiiLc. ..Google

79 — ] 11. Ststeu of Sounds. 28

making a heavy syllable. The last syllable of a pSda (pri-
mary divuion of a verse) is reckoned as either heavy ot
light.

B,. Th« dittinctlOD In tanni betveea Ihs difference of long *nd short In
TOirel-ioiind >nd that of lieiit7 tod Uglit in lyUtblO'ConatnictlaD li laluible,
and ihoald be obierred.

IV. Accent

80. The phenomena of accent are, by the Hindu gram-
maiians of all ages alike, described and treated as depend-
ing on a variation of tone or pitch; of any difference of
stress involved, they make no account.

81. The primary tones (svaraj or accent-pitches are two:
a higher (ud&tta raised), or acute; and a lower [anadStta
not raised), or grave. A third (called svarita: a term of
doubtful meaning) is always of secondary origin, being (when
not enclitic: see below, 8S] the result of actual combination
of an acute vowel and a following grave vowel into one
syllable. It is also uniformly defined as compound in pitch,
a union of higher and lower tone within the limits of a
single syllable. It is thus identical in physical character
with the Greek and Latin circumflex, and fully entitled to
be called by the same name.

8B. Strictly, therefore, there is but one diatiDClion of tone in the
Sanskrit accootnal syatem, as described by the nntive grammuiaDB
and marked in the written texts: the accented syllable is raised in tone
above the unaccentod; while then further, in certain cases of the
fusion of an accented and an nnaocented element Into one syllable,
that syllable retains the compounded tone of both elements.

88. The svarita or circamflex is only rarely fonnd on a pnre long
vowel or diphthong, but almost always on a syUable in which a vowel,
short or long, is preceded by a ; or v repreaeatiog an originally acate
i- or u-7owel.

a. In transliteration, in this work, the adStta or acute will be
marked with tbe ordinary sign of acute, and the svarita or circumflex
(as being a downward slide of the voice forward) with what is usually
called the gravo accent: thus, &, acute, yk or vh, cironmflex.

Digitizecy Google

29 Accent. [—65

84. The Piitlfikhyia dUtlaguith and ntme lapuately the cItcdid flexed
lonei (Tiling by different processes of comblnadon : thoe, Che ciioamflex is
c&llad

a. K^&ipTK (quieli), vhen ui tcnte i- oi a-Toirel (short nr long) i*
eonTeited into y oc v before t, dlislmlln TOirel of grave lone : tbiK, VT^pte
^m vi-ftpta, apevimt&r from apsu aiit4r.

b. JStya (native) oi nitya [own), when the ume comblDition Ilea
farther back, In the make-np of a item oi foim, and bo ii coaatiot, or
beloDgi to Ibe word In all cireumetancei of iM occurrence; thai, IcTli(from
kua), nhx (adar), ayhik (niak), bodhnyii (budhnfa), kanyll (kanift),
Dady&a (nadi-as], tanvll (^tantt-ft).

o. Tbe worda of both tbe aboie ciutea are in the Veda, in the great
majority of cues, to be read frith reatoTatioD of the acute vowel ai a lepirate
ayllable: thna, apsii antb, B&ar, nadlaa, etc. In some texts, part of
them are written correspondingly: thna, ttivrta, toni^TS, budbniya.

d. Praflifta, when the acute and graie Towela are of anch character
that they are fused Into alongTOwel or diphthong (IfiSo): that, dlyi 'va
(RV. AV. etf.), 'rom dlvf iva; ijldg&t& (TSO, from Bd.adgSMi nSl 'vt
'fniyKt (QB.), tiom ak evk aqnlyat

e, Abhlnlbita, when an initial grave a ia absorbed by a final acute
A or 6 (186 a): thns, ti 'bruvon, from ti abmvan; s6 'bravTt, from
b6 abraTit.

85. But further, the Hindu grammariaoB agree in de-
claring the (natuially grave] syllable following an acute,
whether in the same oi in another word, to be svarita or
citoumflex — unless, indeed, it be itself followed by an
acute 01 circumflex; in which case it retains its grave
tone. This is called by European scholars the enclitic or
dependent circumflex.

a. ThDB, in tdna and t6 oa, the syllable na and word oa are
regarded and marked as circumflex; but in t^na ti and td oa aviir
they are grave.

b. Thla aeema to mean that the TOlee, which la borne up at the higher
pitch to the end of the acute syllable, does not ordinarily drop to grave
pilch by an Instantaneous movement, bat descends by a more or lets per-
ceptible slide In the course of the following ayllable. No Hindu authority
snggeats the theory of a middle or Interniediate tone for the enclitic, any
more than for the independent clnnimflei. For the moat part, tbe two are
Identiasd with one another, in treatment and designation. The enclitic
eimunltex ts likewise divided into a unmber of snb -varieties, with different
names : tliey are of too little conteqDonce to be worth reporting.

D,j,i,...., Google

80—] II. System of Soukds. 30

86. The esaential difference of the two kinds ol oircnmflex is
Bhown cle&rlf enough by these fftcts: 1. the iDdepandent circumflex
takes the pl&ce of the acute as the proper accent of a word, while
the enclitio is the mere shadow following an acute, and following it
in another wotd precisely as in the same word; 2. the independent
circumflex mUutainB its character in all eituatione, while the encliUe
before a followiog circumflex oi acute loses its circumflex character,
and becomes grave; moreover, 3. in many of the systems of marking
accent (below, 88), the two are quite differently indicated.

87. The accentuation is marked in manuscripts only of the older
literature: namely, in the primary Vedic texts, or suhhitfts, in two
of the Brahma^as (TMttirlya and ^^tapatha), in the Taittf tlya-Aranyaka,
in certain passages of the Aitareya-Ara^yaka, and in the Suparnadhyaya.
There are a number of methods of writing accent, more or less different
Arom one another: the one found in manuscripts of the Big-Veda,
wbicb is most widely known, and of which most of the others are
only slight modificatious, is as follows. '

a. The acute syllable is left unmarked; the circumflex, whether
independent or encliljc, has a short perpendicular stroke above; and
the grave next preceding an acute or (independent) circumflex has a
short horizontal stroke below, Thus,

gfilH agnlm; sji^Ih Juh6tl; FF5|T tanva; Iji kva.

b. But the Introductory grave stroke below cannot be given if an
acute syllable ia initial; hence an unmarked syllable at the beginning
of a word is to be understood as acute; and hence also, if several
grave syllables precede an acute at the beginning of a sentence, they
most all alike have the grave sign. Thus,

^; Indiah; ^ t«; ^ff'^i^ kari^yiai; r^fcf^lHI tuviJMl

o. All the grave eyliables, however, which follow a marked cir-
cumflex are left unmarked, until the occurrence of another accented
syllable causes the one wbicb precedes it to take the preparatory
stroke below. Thus,

H<^nVitt<^ Hudf flOtasaihdf k ;

but H^^fl'+iH^JJ NlH^audt^lkaBurfidre g&vSm.

d. If an Independent circumflex be followed by au acute (or by
another Independent ciroumflex), a figure 1 is act after the former
ciroumflexed vowel if it be short, or a figure 3 if it be long, and the
signs of accent are applied as in the following examples:

^LHItT! apBv aintAl^ (from apad anti^);

{lUI^H: ifty63 v&ni^ (from ri^6 aT&ni^).

Digitizecy Google

J

81 AOOBNT. [—99

Th« ntloii»1e of this mod« of deilgnitlon ii not well nnderatood; the
Frili^kbyu give no aeconnt of it. Jn the ichalaatln attsriDce of the lyllable
M deilgnftted la made > pecniiu qntvei oi rouhult of the voice, called
kampa or Tlk&mpanft.

e. The icceat-mnki a.n written with led ink in the mannBerlptg, being
*dded (itei iha teit is written, ind pecbape often b; mothet band.

88 a> Netrljr scoordsnt with thii, the Rlg-Veda method of deeigniting
Mcent, tre the methods employed in the m>nDHaript« of the Atbu*>-Yeda,
of the yquineyi-SuhhlU, >nd of the Tiittinya-Sambita, Biihniana, and
Arinytka. Tbeli diffeieneoB from It are of trifling importance, conitittng
mainly in peculiar ways of marking the circamflei that precedes an aoate
(87 d). In lome manuecripta of the Atbarva-Veda, the aueiit-markB aie
dota inatead of attokee, and that for the dicumflei is made within the
syllable instead of aboTC it

b. In most mannseripts of the Haltrayanl-Samhita, the acute syllable
itself, besides Its snrroundlnga, is marked — namely, by a perpendlcalar
stroke abOTe the syllable (like that of the ordinary cirenmBei In the BV.
method}. The independent circumflex has a hook beneath the syllable, and
the cltcnmllei before an acute (87 d) la denoted simply by b Ognre 3,
st*adlng before Instead of after the circumfleied syllable.

a. The (atapatha-Brihma^a nees only a single aceent-algn, the horizontal
stroke beneath the syllable (like the mark for grave in RV.). Thla ia put
nnder an acute, or, if two or more acates immediately follow one another,
only nnder the preceding syllable. To mark in Independent olrcamflei, it
ia pat under the preceding syllable. The method is an Imperfect one, allow-
ing many ambigoltles.

d. The Sama-Teda method la the most intricate of all. It has a dozen
dlfTeient slgna, consisting of flgacea, or of flgnies and letters combined, all
placed above the syllables, and varying according both to the aooentaal ohuacter
of the syllable and to Its snrroDndlngs. Its origin is obscure; if anything
more it indicated by It than by the other simpler aystems, the fact has not
been demonstrated.

8e. Id tbia work, as everything given in tbe devanicart characters
ia also given in tianal Iteration, it will in general be unnecessary to
mark the accent except in the transliterated form; where, however,
the case is otherwise, there will be adopted the method of marking
only the really accented syllables, the aonte and the independent
circnmflex: the latter by the asual evarita-sign, the former by a small
o (for ad&tta) above the syllable: thus,

^ bidfo, ^ Agnej fE(^ avkr. ^TuTT nndyia.

a. These being given, evetythlog else which the Hindu theory recog-
nlies aa dependent on and aeeompanylng them can readily be nnderatood
as implied.

i, Google

eO— ] II- SrsTEU OF Sounds, 32

90. The theory of the SiDskrtt ueent, m heie given (& coniiiUnt and
Intelliglbl* bod; of phenomena), has been eveilaid if the Hindu theoriati,
eapedallf of the Pridfikhyu, with • nnmbeT of added fealurei, of a maeh
more qneitlonable chaiactei. Tha»:

a. The nnmarked grave tyllablei following a oiicnmflei (either at the
end of a lentence, ot till the neat aproaeh of another acnte) ate deolaied
to have the aame high lone with the (also nnmarhed) acDte. The; are
called praoaya ot pradta (atmmulattd: beciDM liable to oceor ia an
indefloite leries of ancceiiiTe aylUbleO.

b. The citcnmflei, whether independent or enclitic, It declared to begin
on a higher pitch thin aeate, and to descend to aoute pitch in ordinary
cube: the conclndlng Inatant of it being bronght down to grave pitch,
however, In the cue of an Independent circumflei which ii Immediately
followed by another Mcent of tbe voice to higher pitch, in acnte or inde-
pendent circDmBex (a kampa syllable: 87 d).

0. Kntol gives the ambignona name of dk&^mti-imonotme) to the
praoita eyllablea, and says nothing of the uplifting ot the dicumtlei to
a higher plane; he teaches, however, a depresalon below the grave pitch for
the marked grave syllable before acnte or clrenmflez, calling It sannatara
(other wise anadSttatara).

SI. The system ot aecentnation a) marked In (he Tedic texti appears
to h&ve asBumsd in the traditional recitation of the Brabmanie schools
a pocnliar and artiflclal form. In which the designated syllablea, grsTe and
circumflex (equally the enclitic ind the Independent otrcnmflei), have acquired
s couiplcuous value, wbile the nndeaignited, the acnte, hai sunk into In-
significance.

0S> The SaoBkrit accent taught in the native grammars and
represented b^ the acceotnated texta is essentially a system of word-
accent only. No general attempt la made (any more than in the
Qreek syatem) to define or marb a sentence-accent, the effect of the
emphasis and modalation of the sentence in modifying the independent
accent of individual words. The only approach to it is seen (n the
treatment of vocatives and personal verb-forme.

a. A vocative is nsnally without accent except at the iKgiDoing
of a aeotence: for further details, see 314.

b. A personal verb-form is usnally accentiess in an independent
clause, except when etaoding at the beginning of the clause: for
farther details, see &B1 fF.

98. Certain other words also are, nsnally or always, without
accent

a. The partlcloi en, tO, u, ama, Iva, dd, avid, ha, and the Tedic
kam [or k&m), gha, bbala, aamaha. Im, lim, are always without
accent; also ratbS In BT. (sometimes alio elsewhere) in tbe sense of iva,
at the end of a pftda or verae-divldon.

ioy Google

33 Accent. [—96

b. The Mine i> true of miUId prauonni ind pronominal itemi : mS,
me, n&nt nu, tvK. t«, vtm, vm (491 b), enft (600). tva [60S b),
sama (618 o).

o. The CUM ot the pnnoinlntl stem a ue Mmetimei ucanted and
aomstimeB accentleii (602).

d. Ad accentleas word is not allowed to Btaod at the beginniDg
of a senteace; also not of a p&da or primarf division of a veTsa; a
p&da ia, in all matters relating to accenttiation, treated like »u In-
dependent aenteoce.

94. Some words have more than a eingle accented ayllable.
Such are:

a. OertaiD daal copnlatiTe componndt In the Veda (see 1SB6), aa
mltriT&TDQfi, dyivftp^ftblTl. Alao, a tew othei Tedic eomponnd* [lee
1867 d), aa b^haap&tl, t&niin&p&t.

b. In a fair caaea, the torther oompounda and derivatlTei of anob
compounda, aa dyitTtpptblvivant, btbaepAtipra^atta.

o. Inflnltlve dattTea In tavftl (aee 979 a), m ita,vai, ipabbar-
tavfif.

d< A void natatally bairlone, bvt having ila final syllable protracted
(aee 78 a).

e. The particle v&vk (In the Brihmanaa).

96. On the place of the accented syllable in a Saoskrit
irord there is no testiictios whatever depending upon either
the number or the quantity of the pieceding oi following
syllables. The accent rests where the rules of inflection
or derivation or composition place it, without regard to any
thing else.

a. Tboa, (ndre, agnKvi, (ndreqa, agnfnA, agninam, bKhaoyuta.
toapaoTuta, parj&nyajlnvita, abhimStitSbi, ^aabhlmlStaTar^a,
abhi^Bstlalit&na, hlrai^avaqimattama, e&tuQoatv&riA^adakfara.

96. Since the accent is marked only in the older litera-
ture, and the statements of the grammarians, with the
deduced rules of accentuation, are &r from being sufficient
to settle all cases, the place of the stress of voice for a
considerable part of the vocabulary is undetermined. Hence
it is a geneial habit with European scholars to pronounce
Sanskrit words according to the rules of the Latin accent.

WliitDS)', Onmrnu-. 3. «d. 3

j,i,....,LiOOJ^IC

07—] in. Euphonic CoifBiNATiON. 34

97. In this woik, the accent of Moh word and fonn will in
gener&l be marked, so far as there ia aotfaority determining its place
and cliaracter. Where specific wotda and forms are quoted, they
will only be BO far acceotnated as they are found with accent in
accentuated texts.

CHAPTER III.

BOLES OF EUPHONIC COHBINATION.

Introductory.

86. The words in Sanskrit, as in the other languages related
with it, are in great part analysable into roots, suffixes of derivation,
and endings of inflection, these last being added mostly to stems
containing suffixes, but also sometimes directly to roots.

a. Thete ue, of conrge, t ceit&in nnmbcr of tinlnflected words —
indecUntbles, particles ^ &iid iJbo not a few that ire !uc*p<ble of analyels.

09. The Sanskrit, indeed, possesges m exceptionally analyaable
character; its formative process^ are more regular and transparent
than those of any other Indo-European tongue. Hence the prevuling
method of the Hindu native science of grammar, which sets up a
certain body of roots, and prescribes the processes by which these
may be made stems and words, giving the various added elements,
and laying down the rules by which their combination is effected. And
the same general method is, for like reason, tollowed also by European
grammarians.

100. The eaphonic laws, accordingly, which govern the combiuation
of suffix or of ending with root or stem, possess a high practical im-
portance, and require to be laid down in preparation for the topics
of declension and conjugation.

101. Moreover, the formation of compounds, by joining two or
more simple stems, is extremely frequent in Sanskrit; and this kind
of combination has its own peculiar eaphonic rules. And once more,
in the form of the language as handed down to us by its literature,
the words composing a sentence or paragraph are adapted to and
combioed with one another by nearly the same rules which govern
the making of compounds; so that it is tmposaible to take apart and
understand a Sanskrit sentence without knowing those rules. Heuce

D,j,i,....,CiOOJ2lC

35 IHTRODUOTORT. [—108

BD Increued Aegrw of practical importance beloDging to ths subject
of eaphonio combination.

a. Thi* enpbonlc tnterdepsndense of the wUTds at ■ lentenoa Ig nn-
knavn to an; other Ungnage in anything like the (tme degree ^ and it
cannot but be snspected of being at leait In part artiflrlal, Implying an
erecliOD Into neceaauy and Invariable nilet of what in the living language
were only optional praeticea. Thla is strongly Indioated, indeed, by the
evidence of the older dialeot of the Vedag and ol tbe derived PrakrIHc
dialects, In both of wbloh some of tbe m1e« (especially tliat aa to the biatn« ;
aee 113) are often violated.

lOS. The roots irblch are anthenticated by tbeir occarreace in
the literary monnmenta of the language, earlier and later, anmber
between eight and nine hundred. About half or these Iielong fully
to tbe language throughout its whole history; some (about a hundred
and fifty) are limited to the earlier or pre-claaeioal period; some,
again (over a hundred and twenty}, make their first appearance in
the later language.

a. There are In this nnmber roots of very diverae character. Thoae
occurring only later are, at least In great part, preanmably of secondary
origin; and a certain nnmher are even doubtleis artifldal, used onoe or
twice beetose found in the root-Uita of the Ulndn grammarians (103).
Bnt also of the leit, >ome are plainly lecondary, vhtie otheit are ques-
tionable; and not a few are variations or dtrferentiated forms of one another.
Thnt, there are roots ehowliig respectively r and 1, as rabh and labh,
mmo and mine, kfar snd Icfol; roots with and wltbout a atrengthening
naial, as vand and vad, maud and mad; roots in & and In a nasal, as
khft and kbao, g& and gam, j& and Jan; roots made by an added i,
as tT& from t^, mii& from man, pB& from btaae, yi from 1; roots the
prodoct of rednplicatloD, as Jakf from gbas, dndb from dtaQ; roota with
a final sibilant of formative origin, as bhakf and bhlkf from bb^,
iiak^ from naQ, qruf froin qrn, hfta from hK; root-forms held apart by
a well-MtabUihed discordance of inneotion and meaning, which yet are
probably different sides of one root, a« k^f drag and ^j^ plough, vid knoui
and viA ^nd, vx tndo/e and vf choote; and so on. In many such cases
it la doubtful whether we ought to acknowledge two roots or only one; and
no absolute rale ot distinction can be laid down and maintained.

108. The list of roots given by tbe Hindu grammarians contains
aboQt two thousand roots, wltbont inctndlng all those which students of
the language are compelled to recognize. Considerably more than half of
tbls number, then, are nn authenticated by nsa; and although some of
those may yet come to tight, or may have existed without finding their
way into any of the preaerved literary docnments, it is certain that most
are flctitlODs.- made In part for tbe explanation of words falsely described
as their derirativea, but in the main fOr unknown and perhaps on discoverable

ioy Google

103—] III. Euphonic ComtHA-noN. 36

a. The looU aniiDthentieited by tnee4ble oee will be mide no tceoant
of In tbii gramiDir — or. If Doticed, irlll bs apeoifted &s of that cbmetar.

104. The fonDs of the roots as here nsed will be found to differ
in certain reepecta from those given by the oatJTe gnmmuiAna and
tdopted hj some European works. Thoa:

a. ThoB« root! of *htcb tbe Initiil n and s are regululy cODTeited
to 9 and f iftet certiin pieflses are by tbe Hinda grunmariani given u
beglDOing iritb ^ and q; no westeni anthoiity follows this eiample.

b. The HindQi clsiBify u Blmpls tooM a namber of dariTad »t«m>:
redoplicated ones, is dldM, J3gr, daridrS; preaent-stamg, u fiipn; and
dsnomlnatiTG itemt, aa aTAdhlr, kom&r, eabbag, nuuitr, sSatr, arth.
and the like. Tbeie are In European workt generally reduced to tbeir

o. A nnmbei of roala ending in an S which ia inegnlarlj treated in
the precent-Eystem are written in the Blndu list* with diphthaoga — e or
Si or o; here they will be regarded as &-rootd (see 261]. The o of snch
loot-foims, eapeeially, i« pnrely arbltruy; no forms oi deiivatives made
from the loota Jnitlfy it.

d. Tbe roots ebowlng interchangeably x ^"^ ^ e"^ IX ot va and
or (&4a) are written by tbe Hindus with f or with f, or with both. Tbe
f here alee it only formal, intended to mark the roots as liable to <ett*ln
modlBoations, since it aowbere sbowa itself in any form or deiiTatife. Snob
roots will in this work be written with 7.

e. The Toote, on the other hand, ebowing a Tariatlon between x i^d
ar (rarely ra] as weak and strong forma will be here written with j, as by
the native grammarlini, although many European anthorities prefer tbe other
or strong form. So long as wo write the unnrengthened vowel In vld and
ql, in mud and bho, and tbeir like, consistency seams to require that we
write it in B^ and kf aleo — in all oaiei alike, withoat refbienee to what
may have been the more OTiginsl Indo-European form.

106. In many cuei of roots showing mora than one form, the selection
of a repreaontativa form la a matter of compantlve indifference. To deal
with ancb casea according to their historical character ia the part rather of
an Indo-Enropean comparative grammar than of a Sinakrit grammar. We
mast be content to accept as root* what elementa aeem to have on the
whole that value in the existing condition of the language.

106. Stems as well aa roots hitve their variations of form (311).
The Hindu grammarians nsnallj give the weaker form aa the nonnal
one, and derive the other from It by a fitrengthening change; some
European authorities do the same, while others prefer tbe contrary
method; the choice is of unessential consequence, and may be deter-
miDed in any cue by motives of conveaieoce.

107. We shall accordingly consider first of all, Id the present
chapter, the euphonic principles and laws which govern the combination

Dijiiizec ..Google

37 Introductory. [ — 109

of tbe elements of words uDd of words as elemenls of thu sODtenoe;
then will t>e taken up the subject of inflectloii, under the two heads
of deelenaloii and conjugation; and an aotount of the elasses of
unimfleeted words will follow.

ft. The formation of conjngational stems [tense and mode-stems;
also participles and infinitive) will be tangbt, as is nanal, in connection
with the processes of co^jngational inflection ; that of nninflected
words, in connection with tbe variong clsBsas of th<Me words. But
the general anhject of derivation, or the formation of declinable stems,
will be Uken op hj itself later (chap. XVII.); and It will be followed
by an account of the formation of compound stems (chap. XVIll.].

108. It is bj no means to be expected of beginners
in the language that they will attempt to mastei the lules
of euphonic combination in a body, befoie going on to leain
the paiadigms of inflection. On the contrary, the leading
paiadigms of declension may best be learned outright,
without attention, or with only a minimum of attention,
to euphonic lule. In taking up conjugation, howevei, it
is practically, as well as theoretically, better to learn the
forms as combinations of stem and ending, with attention
to such laws of combination as apply in the partioalar cases
oonceined. The rules of external combination, governing
the make-up of the sentence out of words, should be
grappled with only when the student is prepared to begin
the reading or the formation of sentences.

Principle* of Euphonic Combtnation.
108. The rules of combination (aadidhi putling together)
are in some respects different, according as they apply —

a. to the internal make-up of a word, by the addition
of derivative and inflectional eadings to roots and stems;

b, to the more external putting together of stems to
make compound stems, and the yet looser and more accidental
collocation of words in the sentence;

o. Hence they are usually divided into rules of internal
combinatioD, and rules of external combination.

ioy Google

110—] III. EUPHOHIO COUBIRATIOM. 3S

110. Id both oUwes of oaae^ howtvn, the genenl prinoipl«B
of combinadon are the same — and likewise, to a great extent, the
specific rules. The diffeieDcea depend in part on the oconrreiioe or
Don-oootmence of certain combinatiODB in the one class or the other;
in part, on the difference of treatment of the same soand as final of
a root or of an ending, the former being more persistent than the
Utter; in part, on the occurrence in external combination of certain
changes which are apparently phonetic but really historical; and, most
freqoent and conspicnotts of all, on the fact that (1B7) vowels and
semivowels and nasals exercise a sonantising influence in external
combination, but not in internal. Hence, to avoid nnnecessair repe-
tition as w^l as the separation of what really belonga together, the
rules for both kinds of combination are given below in counectioQ
with one another.

111. a. Moreover, before case^endlngs beginning with bb and a
(namely, bbyftm, bhis, bhyaa, su), the treatment of the finals of stems
is io general the same as in the combinations of words (pada) with
one another — whence those endings are sometimes called pada-end-
ings, and the cases they form are known as pada-cases.

b. The Importanoe of thi* distinction ii lomewhat eiKggeT4ted by the
ordlnuf slatement of It. In fact, dli Is the only lontnt mnte initiftl of id
ending ocoarrlng in conJugatioD, u bh in declenBion; and the diffeience
of their treatment is in put ovlDg to the one coming Into oolllsion OBtully
mth tlie flnsl of a root ind the olhei of an ending, and in pait to the fact
that dh, u a dental, is mote ustmllible to palatals and UsgaaU than bh.
A more marked and pioblematio diatlnotlon ie made between Btl and the
verbal endiagi Bl, Bva, etc., eipeclally after palatal Bounds and ^.

0. Further, before certain of the suffixes of derivation the final
of a stem is sometimes b«ated in the same manner as that of a word
in composition.

d. This is eipeclallr tie ease before leoondu? sufllxea having •
markedly distinct otBoe, like the poBaeaaive nant and vant, the abitract-
miking tva, the anffli of material m^a, and ao on; and it la mech
more frequent in the later langnsge than in the eailler. The examples are
sporadlo in character, and no role can be given to cover them: for details,
see the varione infflies, in chap. XVIL In the RV. (as may be mentioned
here] the only examples are vidy^nmant (beside garutmant, kabiid-
mant, etc.), p^advant (beside datvinti mar&tvant, et«.), dbj^adTln.
(beside namaavfn, etc), ^agmii (beside ajmi, idtunii, etc.), mrnmifa
(betide manasmj^a, etc.), and ahaibyd, kiiiiTU, f adiyd, and afibojA,
davoy&, Aak^dboyu (beside namaayia, vaoaay^ etc.); and the AV.
adds only sAtaoran (ItV. sahivaa).

IIS. The leading *Tales of internal combination (as already stated:
108) aie those trhich are of moat immediate importance to a beglnnei in
the langasee, aince his first task ts to muter the principal pandigms of

ioy Google

39 Gbkeral Princiflbs. [—117

inflection ; the rules of Bxteniii comblnttioD may better be left DnUaohed
until be comet to dealing vitb words iti tenteacM, or to tisniUtlng. Then,
howeTer, they ue indltpeuMble, since the proper form of the voids that
compoM the soDtenee it not to be determined irithont them.

a. The geoenl principles of oombinaUon onderlyiog the euphonic
rales, and determining their olaeslGoation, may be stated as follows:

118. Hiatus. In geneial, hiatus is forbidden; every
syllable except the initial one of a sentence, or of a word
.or phrase not forming part of a lenteaoe, must begin with
a consonant (oi with more than one).

a. For details, and for exoeptioDs, see 12B ff.

b. In the earlier langnage, howerer, hiatos In evsry poiitlon was
abondautlT admitted. This appeals ptalnljr from the mantra*, or metrical
parti of the Teda, where In innnmerable tnstaaess y and v are to be read
aa i end n, and, less often, a long vowel is to be resolved into two vowels,
in order to make good the metre: e. g., TWjr&QSm haa to be read as
vfirl>a^9a-&m, avagvyam as aa-aq-Ti-am, and ao on. In the BAhmsinas,
also, we find trao, avar, dySUs described as dissyllables, VjrSna and
satyam ss trisyllables, rl^auya as of four syllaUes, and the like. See
further ISBe.

114. Deaspiiation. Ad aspirate mute is liable to
lose its aspiration, being allowed to stand unchanged only
before a vowel or semivowel or nasal.

116. Assimilation. The great body of euphonic
changes in Sanskrit, as elsewhere, fells under the general
head of assimilation — which takes place both between
sounds which are ao nearly alike that the difference
between them is too insignificant to be worth preserving,
and between those which are so diverse as to be practically
incompatible.

110. In part, assimilation involves the coDveision of
one sound to another of the same series, without change of
articulating position; in part, it involves a change of position,
or transfer to another series.

117. Of changes within the series, the most frequent sod im-
portaot occnr in the adaptaUou of sold and Boaant sounds to one

ioy Google

117—] III, EuPHOKio Combination. 40

another; bnt the nanle nod 1 h&ve also in ceiUin cases their i^clat
aasimilative influence. Thaa:

ft. Id the tiro cluiei of ddu-dmlI matea sod splrasts, laid uti Bonsnt
ue wholly isMtiipttlble ; no suid of elQieT dasB can eithei piecede oi follov
a Booaat of either.

b. A mute, surd or lonaDt, li wtlmilated by being chtnged U> ft«
conNpondent of the other kind; of the tpiranta, the snid a U the only one
having a sonant coneipondent, namely t, to *hleb It Is convertible In ex-
teraal combloatlen (164 ff.).

o. Tb« naiala are more freely oombinable : a nasal may either precede
01 follow a mate of either kind, or the aonuit epirant ti; tt may alio follov
a aord apiiant (albUant); no naaal, however, ever piecedea aslblUnt in the
Interior of a word (It ia changed Instead to amUTira); and tn exletnal
oombinatlon their concaTrenee la nanally aiolded by Inaertion of a inrd mnte.

d. A. aemlTOWel haa atlll lesi aonantiilng Influence; and a vowel least
of all: both are freely preceded and followed by sonnda of every other
olaaa, In the Interior of a word.

e. Before a sibilant, however, la found, of the semivowels, only r and
very rarely 1. Moreover, in external oombinatlon, i la often changed to its
anrd correspondent a.

Bnt

f. In composition and ienteDce-eollooatloa, initial vowels and aemi-
Towels and naiala alio require the preceding Anal to be sonant. And

g. Before a nasal and 1, the asalmllative procesa la sometimes eanied
further, by the conieralon of a Snal mute to a nasal or 1 reapectlvely.

118. Of ooQTersiona iDvolving a change of artionlate position, the
moet important are those of dental aonnde to lingual, and, leas often,
to palatal. Thna:

a. The dental B and n are very frequently converted to ^ and q. by
the aaaimilating Influence of contiguous or neighbouring llugaal aonnde : the a,
even by aounds — namely, 1- and a-vowela and k — which have themselves
no Ungaal character.

b. A non-nasal dental rante la (with a few exceptions In external
oombinatlon) made lingual when it oomei into collliion with a Ungual aonnd.

0. The dental mutea and aibilant are made palatal by ■ contiguoua
palatal.

Bnt alio:

d. A m [not radical) la assimilated to a following consonant, of
whatever kind.

Oi For certain anomalous caaea, see 151.

119. The euphonic combiDatlons of the palatal mutes, the palatal
ribilant, and the aspiraUoo, aa being sounds derived b^ phonetic
alteration from more otiginal guttarals (4Sff.), are made peculiar

ioy Google

41 General Prikoiples. [—124

Uid eompticatod by two circiirastftDces: their reverBion to a galtural
form (or the appesnnce of the unaltered gnttoral iostead of tbom:
48); and the different treatment of J itnd h according aa they represent
one or another degree of alteration — the one tending, like o, mora
to the gattnral rerersion, the other showing, like 9, a more sibilant
and lingual character.

ISO. The lingual sibilant 9, also of derivative character (from
dental a), shows as radical final peculiar and problematic phenomena
of combination.

121. Extensioii and abbreviatioa of conao-
nant-gioups. The native giammarianB allow or require
ceitain exteneions, by duplication or inseitioa, of groups of
consonants. And, on the other hand, abbreyiation of cer-
tain other groups is allowed, and found often practised in
the manuBctipts.

122. Permitted Finals. The permitted occurrence
of consonants at the end of a word is quite narrowly
restricted. In general, only one consonant is allowed after
the last TOwel; and that must be neither the aspiration,
nor a sibilant, nor a semivowel [save rarely FT 1], nor an
aspirate mute, nor a sonant mute if not nasal, noi a palatal.

128. Increment and Decrement. Besides these
more or less regular changes accompanying the combination
of the parts that make up words, there is another class of
a different character, not consisting in the mutual adaptations
of the parts, but in strengthening or weakening changes of
the parts themselves.

184. It Is impossible to carry through a perfectly systematic
arrangement of the detailed rules of euphonic combination, because
the different varieties of euphonic change more or less overlap and
intersect one another. The order observed below will be as follows:

1. Rules of vowel combination, for the avoidance of hiatus.

2. Bules as to permitted finals (since these underlii: the further
treatment of final consonants in external combination).

3. Rules for loss of aspiratloii of an aspirate mute.

4. Rales of surd and sonant assimilation, including those for final
s and r.

ioy Google

1S4— ] III. ECPBONIO COMBIHATION. 42

5. Rnles for the conversion of dental Bonnda to lingokl and
p&tatal.

6. RdIos for the oh&ngOB of final nasals, Including those in wbioh
a former final following the nasal re-appears in oombination.

7. Rnlee regarding the special changes of the derivative sonnde
— the palatal mutes and sibilant, the aspiration, and the Ungual
sibilant.

8. Roles as to extension and abbreviation of consonant groups.

9. Rules for Btrengthening and weakening processes.
Everywhere, rales for more sporadic and less elaselfiable cases

will be given in the most practically convenient connection; and the
Index will render what help is needed toward finding them.

Rules of Vowel Combination.

126. The coDGuitenoe of two von els, or of vowel and
diphthong, without interveoiDg consonant, is forbidden by
the euphony of the later or classical language. It is avoided,
according to the circumstances of the case, either by fusion
of the two oonounent sounds into one, by the reduction of
oae of them to a semivowel, or by development of a semi-
vowel between them.

a. For the not InrTeqoent etsat ot compoaitlon uid aentence -combi-
nation In wfaleh Uie reoent Imi of a s ot y ot v belwMD vowels Isitoi
> permanent hUtni, tee below, 1S2 ff,, 176-1; for ceitiln fluil towoIb
which ate malntaiaed uDch&Dged In Benteace-combinatlon before an Initial
vowel. Me 138.

b. A Tery few woTdi in tbaii admitted written form show Inteilor
hiatus; such ate titaii lime [perhaps for titaSQ, BR.), prAiiga vagon-
pok (foT pr^uga?); and, in RV., BuOti.

0. The testa of the older dlaleot ato wiltten according to the enpfaonlo
rules of the later language, althongh In them (aee 118 b) the htatna is
really of &eitnent occntience. Hence they ate not to be read aa written,
but with constantly tecnrring reversal of the pioceuea of vowel-combination
which they have been made artiflciilly to undeigo. See futlhet IBS e.

d. Also In the later langnage, hiatns between the two p&das oi primary
dlilsioDB of a metrical line Is tolerably frequent, and it la not nnknown in
sporadic cases even la the Interior of a pBda.

e. The mles of vowel combination, as regards both the resulting
sonnd and its accent, are nearly the same in interna] and in external

ioy Google

43 VOWBL GOUBINATIOM- [ — 1S7

126. Two sitnilai simple vowels, shott oi long, coaleeoe,
and form the coiieBpondiug long vowel : thus, two B~ToweIs
(either oi both of them short oi long) fotm E)T S; two i-vowels,
^ I; two o-vowels, ^T Q; and, theoietioally, two f-voweU
foim ^ f, but it is questionable whether the case ever
practically occurs. Examples are:

H ?T7lsI: sft oS 'prajatt (ca + aprajat);

Srrfle< Rtl 'vft (ati + iva) ;

H^H BQlttam (su-uktam);

^IslTHifl^riys "sit (rBja + Srtt);

CtcAlT^: adUfvara^ (adhi-lfvarab] ;

^^tpCT juhUpabhTt (juliQ — upabh^].

a. A« the above examplea iadlute, It will be tho practice oTCTjrHhere
in tbls work, In trtngUletattoD (not In the devanSgari teitj, to separate
Independent words; and. if an Initial vowel of a folloning word has caaletoed
with a final of the pieseding, thia will be iodtoated by an apoatiopbe —
single If the initial lowel be the shorter, doable if it be the longoi, of the
two different Initials which In everf case of convblnation yield the same reault.

X27. An a-vowel combines with a following i-vowel to
^ e; with an u-vowel, to iHt o; with fj x, to ^ ar; with
51 I (theotetioally), to 95T al; with ^ e or^ Si, to^ 51; with
^ o or ^ &u, to €t Sa. Examples axe:

^IslK rajendra (rRja-indra);

f^r|l4^5l : liitopade9at^ [hita-apadefalji);

(f^fN: mabargl^ (iaali&-r9Mk] ;

^ BSi 'va (sft + evaj;

( Nut) H TBjfilfvaryam (rBja-ftifvaryam);

)^^°hH: divSukasat (divS^okasalji) ;

k( ^ l| ^IT J varSn^adham (jvara-ftu^adham).

a. In tbe Vedic teste, the vowel f ie ordinarily written unchanged
after the a-vowel, which, if long, la shortened; that, mahanM^ instead of
maharfl^. The two vowels, however, are usually pronounced as one syllable.

b. When saceesalve words like indra S ihi are to be combined, the
first combination, to IndrB, la made Brat, and tbe resnlt Is indre " 'tat
(not indrfti " lii, from indra e 'hi).

ioy Google

128—] III. Euphonic Coubimatiom. 44

128. As legarda tbe accent of theaa vowel combiuatioiis, It 1b
to be noticed that, 1. u a matter of coarBe, the uoiun of acute with
acute yields acute, and that of grave with grave yields grave; thxt
of otrcomBex with circumflex cannot occur; 3. a circumflex wldi
following acute yields Kcnte, the final grave element of tbe former
being raised to acute pitch; a grave with following acute does the
same, as no upward slide of the voice ou a syllable is acknowledged
in the language; but, 3. when the former of the fused elements ib
acute and the Utter grave, we might expect the resulting syllable
to be in general circumflex, to represent both the original tones.
Pacini tn fact allows this accent in every such case; and in « single
accentuated Brahmana text [^B,], the circumflex is regularly written.
But the language shows, on the whole, an indispositioo to allow the
circumflex to rest on either long vowel or diphthong as its sole btaie,
and the acute element ie suffered to raise the other to its own level
of pilch, making the whole syllable acute. The only exception to
this, in most of the texts, is the combination of i and 1, which be-
comes i: thus, dlvi 'to, from dlvl Ivft; in the T&ittiriya texts alone
snoh a case follows tbe general rule, while d and a, instead, make
&: thus, a&dg&tA from ad-odgStfi.

12&. The i-vowels, the u-TowelB, and W r, before a
dissimilar vowel 01 a diphthoajf, aie regularly converted each
into its ovrn ooriespooding semivowel, TT 7 01 ? v 01 ^ r.
Examples aie:

\rii\^ Ity ShA (iU + ftbs);

qfll^ madhv iva (madbu-|-iva);

i'^'stif dDhitrsrthe (duhltfarthe) ;

pmr 8try ssra (atrl+asya):

^ vadhvU (vadha-U).

a. But in internal combination the 1 and a-vowels are not seldom
changed instead to I7 and nv — and this especially in monosyllables,
or after two consonants, where otherwise a group of consonants
difficult of pronnnciation would be the result. The oases will be
Dotieed below, in explaining inflected forms.

b. A radical i-vowel is converted into y even before 1 in perfect
tense-inflection: so nlnyima (iiinl+ln[>a).

0. la * few aportdlo cuas, i and a becomo iy and av ena In wocd'
eompDsition: e. g., triyavl (tii+avi), viyafiga (vi + aOga), euvlta
(BO + ita): Mimp*ie 1204 b, 0.

d. Not ver; aeldom, the same word (eapeciall; u found in differant
texts of the older Unpwge) hu more than one form, ibowiDg vuious treitment

itizecy Google

45 VOWBL COHBINATION. [—181

of >n i- or n-va«el : e. g. aror or auvar, tuivi or tonnTS, bodlmya
ot budhnlyK, T&txyfd or Tatrlyfil. For tbe iDost part, doabtleu, theae
ITS only two vijs of writing the iftme proDDncUtiaD, an-ftr, bodlmiA,
and M on; and Gie tlliooTd>nc« bu no otheT importaiKie, hlMoiioal or phonetic.
There la more or last of tlila difference of trsatment Of an 1- ot u-element
after > eonioDiiit In all periods of tlie langnige.

e. In the older langaage, there ia a marked difference, In leipect to
the freqoencr of to wel- combination for aToldlng hUtiu as compated with
that of non'Combinitlon and ransaqnent htataa, between the claai of caaei
vhete two Towel-aonnda, limllar or dlaalmiliT, wonid eoaleaee into one (1S0,
1S7) and that where an 1- oi U'lowel would be converted Into a aeml-
vowel. Thai, in word-oomposilion, the ratio of the caies of eoaleaoed vowels
to thoae of hiatne are in RT. rb Htb to one, In AT. aa nlnateen to one,
while the cases of seniiTowel'CDnTeTslon are in RV. only one in twelve, in
AT. only one In Ave; in sentenoe-comblnatlon, the ctsea ot ooaleacence
are la both RV. and AV. abont se seven to one, while thoae ot semlvowel-
eonverston ate In RV. only one in llfly, In AT. one in five.

f. For certain cases of the loss or aasimilation of 1 and a before j and
T respeetively, see S83 b.

130. Ab regards the accent — here, as in the preceding cue
(128], the only combination requiring notice Is that of an acute 1' or
u- vovrel with a following grave: the result is circnmflex; and such
cases of circumBex are many times more frequent than any and all
others. Examples are:

odfp vyuftl (vi-urti); ^PJJtlfd ftbhyBTcati;

s^ nadySu (nadi-Su);

fttiy arista (sii-l^ta); H*<in tanTas (taoa-aB).

a. Of a aimllsT combination of acnte f with foltowing grave, only a
alngle ease Itaa been noted in accented tezta: namely, vljaKtr dt4t (1. e.
▼ijSftt^ et&t: ^B. xiT. 6. 6")', the accentoation is in accordance with the
rulea for 1 and tL

ISl. Of a diphthong, the final 1- or u-element is changed
to its conesponding Bemivowel, IT y ot ^ t, before any vowel
01 diphthong: thus, ^ e (really ai: 28 a) becomes Wf &7<
and 3^ o (that is, an: 28 a) becomes Wi &▼; ^ Bi becomes
Om Bjr, and ^ Sn becomes q)? Bt.

a. No change of accent, of conrae, occnrs here: each original
syllable retains its syllabic identity, and hence also ita own tone.

b. Eiamplea can be given only for Internal eombloation, eince in eitetnal
combination there are farther ebaagea; see the next psragraph. Thus,

^ naya (ce-a); 'im n&ya (nU-a);

q^ bbava (bbo-a); HR bb&va (btiBu-a).

L,j,i,;ec.y Google

ISfl— ] ni. EnpHOHic Combination. 46

182. Id exteinal combinatioD, we have the important
additional rule that the semiTOwel resulting from the con-
version of the final element of a diphthong is in general
dropped; and the resulting hiatus is left without fuithei
change.

188. That is to say, a final ^ e [the most frequent
ease) becomes simply ? s before an initial vowel (except
Q a: see 136, below), and both then remain unchanged;
and a final ^ Si, in like manner, becomes [everywhere]
^ B. Thus,

fTsgrnm: ta SgatK^ (te + agatW>);

^IT^ ^ uagara ilia (n^are+lha];

(TPTT *l(i(ld teams adadSt [tasmU + ada<Ut};

fn^l 3Wr^ BtriyS uktam [striySi + uktam).

a. The liter grimmulana alloiT the 7 to such rombinitlon* to be etthet
Mtttned 01 dTopped; bat the onl/oim pnctice of tbe msDoecripts, of eTery
■ge, in secoidance Mth the strict requirement of the Vedic grsmmire
(PritlfilthTu), ts to omit the BemiTOvel tnd leive the hiatn*.

b. The percliteace of the hittua csoeed by this omlsBiDn Is ■ plain
Indication of the compaTatWely recent loie of the iDtervening conaontntal

o. Insl«ncee, howeTor, of the aioldanee of biatas by combination of the
Femaiiiing Bnal vowel with the following initial eecording to the nsnai mlea
■re mat with in eiery period of the langoafe, (rem the BV. down; hot
they are rare and of sporadic character. Compare the similar I
the hiatus after a lost Anal a, 170-7.

d. I
the MS.,

184. a. The dipfatbong o (except as phonetic alteration of final
aa: see 176 a) is an nnaaaal final, appearing onlj in the Btem bo
(861 o), in the voc- sing, of u-Btems (341), in words of which the
final a U combined with the particle u, aa atho, and in a few inter-
jections. In the last two olasses it ie nncombiaable (below, ISSo.f^;
the vocatives BOmeUmes retain the v and sometimes lose it (the
practices of different texts are too different to be briefly stated); go
(In composition only) does not ordinarily lose its final element, bnt
remains gav or go. A final aa becomes a, with following hiatus,
before any vowel save a (for which, see the next paragraph}.

Dijiiizec., Google

47 ' VowEi, CoKBiHA-noN. [— I8B

b. The EI T of m^&T from ^ Ku is usually retained:
thus,

rTI=R tSv era (tSu + era) ;

3»Tri^=^T(]l ubtaBT indr&gnT (ubUu + ii^^Kgi^)'

O. Id tb« oldei Ungiuge, howe*er, it U In lome texts dropped be-
fore m n-TOWel; thus, ti abbSA; In otboi texts It la treited like &1, or
loses ita n-element before every inltUI vonel : thns, ti evi, atihi In-
drigni

1S6. After final ^ e or ^ o, an initial CI a disappears.

»■ The reBnlting accent is as if the » were not dropped, bnt
rather absorbed into the preceding diphthong, having ite tone dul^
represented in the combleation. If, namely, the e or o is gTare or
dtcnmflex and the » acute, the former becomes acute; if the « or
o is acute and the a grave, the former traoomes circumflex, as dsu-
allf in the fusion of an acute and a grave element. If both are
acQte or both grave, no change, of course, is seen in the result.
Examples are:

% '^RR te 'bniTan (t^ abruvanj;

Ht 'iBlorifT ao 'braTlt [s&it abravlt);

(^!yH°tll 'dn: hUusitavyo 'gni]^ (hlfiBitavyat^ agni^);

Ui^"iil A(<^rl y^ indrd 'bravlt (ydd indra]^ ibravlt);

U^ts)*^ Js<c(1H 7&d vS^&ay& 'bravlt (ydd rBjanyi]^
ibpftTrtt).

b. As to the use of tbe avagraha sign in the cue of snob *n ellalon,
see above, 16. Id Ir&nilitention, the reveried apoBtrophe, or roogh bieitb-
Ing, vlll be used in tbla work to lepreaent it.

O. Tbls elielon or absoiptioa of InitiU a tftet Srisl e oi o, whlob In
the Ister Isnguaige ia the innriabU rule, Is in the Veda only sn occaaloTial
oecnrrence. Thua, In tbe BV., oat ot nearly 4&00 inatancea of snch an
Initial a, It ia, as the metre ahowa, to be leally omitted only about seventy
ttmesi In tbe AV., less than 300 timea ont of about 1600. In neitbet
woili la there any accordsooe in respect to tbe combination in qnesUon
between tbe written and spoken Form of tbe text: in BV., tbe a Is (u
written) elided in more than three qnartera ot the cues; In AV., in about
two thttda; and In both texts it is written in a number of inatancea where
tbe metre rsqnlres its omission.

d. In a few cues, an initial A is tbua elided, eapeolally that of

e. To the rules of vowel combitution, as above stated, there
are certain exceptions. Some of the more isolated of these will be

L.,j,i,....,L-'OOJ2lC

13B— ] III. EutHONlG COUBIHATION. 48

noticed whore they come up ia the processeB of ioflectlon etc; a few
require mentioo here.

186, Id internal combination:

»■ The aagment a makes with the iDltixl vowel of s root the
combinations &1, ia, &r [vpddhl-TOwelB: S3S), tnstetd of e, o, tat
lea^ft-TOwels), as reqaired by 137: thus, Uta (a-)-ltA) KubhnU
(a-f-nbhnU), trdhnot (a+fdlinot).

b. The flnal o of > item (1S03 a) bsMimel av befoia the snrax ya
(origiDtlly la: ISlOa).

O. The flnil TDvel of a (tern ia often dropped irhen & e«eondir)r sofflx
U added (laOSa).

d> Foe the Teikenlng and loss of radical Toweb, and for certain InMi-
tlons, iee below, S49 ff., SET-8.

137. Id externitl oombination:

a. The fimil a or & of a prupoBitioD, with initial r of a root, makes
Sr Instead of ar : Thus, Krchati [&-|-rohatl), avftrohaU (aTa-|-r?liatl),
np&rqati (^B.: upa-|-r?ati; but AV. upar^antl}.

b. Ingtanoe* ue occaatonall; met with of a fliiil a or ft being loat
entirely before Initial e or o: thna, in Terb'formg, av' aqyftmaa AB.,
np' eifatn etc. AV.j in deriiaiiveE, >s apetavya, apetfi in componnda,
as da^onl, yatbetam, and (permiasibly) oomponnda with o^fha (not rare),
Ota [not quotable), odaua, aa adbaro^fba or adbarSoftha, tUodana
or tllftadana; and eien in sentence-combination, ii Iv" etayaa, aqvin'
ova, yatb' oelqe (ill RV.), tv* eman and tv' odman B.; and always
with the exolamaiton om or oihkftra.

0. The form Qh from f^vah sooiBlimeB makes the heavier or vpldlii
(336) diphthongal combination with s preceding a-iowel : thna, prftu^hl,
akQjlnhiJ^ (from pra + a^M. etc.)-

138. Certain final vowels, moreover, aie uncombinable
(pragrhya), or mamtain themfielves unchanged before any
following vowel. Thus,

a. The rowels i, tl and e aa dual endings, both of declen-
sional and of coDJugational forms. Thus, bandhQ fta&te imjtu; git^
irobatam.

b. The pronoun and (nom. pi.: fiOl); and the Vedio pronominal
forms asmi, yufimi, tvi (493 a].

0> A flnil o made by oomblnatlon of a final a-yowel with the particle
u (llSSb); thus, atho, mo, no.

d. A float I of a Vedie locatlie ease from an i-stem (336 f).

e. A protracted iual vowel C78>

t. The flnal, or only, vowel of an Interjection, as afao, he, ft, i, n.

g. The older language ihows occasional exceptions to these roles: tbns,
a daal I combined with a following i, as nfp&ti *va; an a elided after o,
as itho <«!) s leeitlTe I tamed into a semivowel, »s v6dy asylEm.

itizecy Google

Permitted Finals.

186. The sounds allowed to occur as finals in Sanskrit
voids standing by themselves (not in euphonic combination
with something following] aie closely limited, and those
which would etymologically come to occupy such a position
are often variously altered, in geneial accordance with theii
treatment in other circumstances, oi are sometimes omitted
altogether.

a. Tha virlety of oontODaDti that would ever coma at the end of eltbar
ui inflected foim ai ■ derivative (tern In the luigaige 1b veiy imall ; nunel;,
in tottM, onl; t (or d), n, m, b; in derivatlTe »tema, only t, d, n, r, S
(>nd, la ■ few lare trardg, J). But simoit all eonaonMite occur as flnali
of roots; and every root ta ilable to be found, alone or at 1a»t member of
a compound, iu the chaitctet of a declined stem.

140. All the vowel sounds, both simple and diphthongal,
may be sounded at the end of a word.

a. But neithei f noT ) ever eettuily occarsi and f la rare (only as
Renter sing, of a stem in f or ar, or u flnal of each a etem In compoeltlon).

Thns, {adra, giv&;a, ikKri, nadi, dSta. oamA, Jana;lt^, &gne,
QlvJrSl, viyo, agnt&.

141. Of the non-nasal mutes, only the first in each series,
the non-aspiiate suid, is allowed; the others — sutd aspirate,
and both sonants ~- whenever they would etymologically
occur, are converted into this.

Thus, agnim&t for agnlm&th, auhtt for siihfd, virdt for vlrddh,
trift^p for trlftubh.

a. In a few roots, when their final (sonant aspirate) thus
loses its aspiration, the original sonant aspiration of the
initial reappears: compare ^ h, below, 147.

ThoB, dagh becomes dliak, budh beoomes bbat, and so on.
The toot* exhibiting this change are stated below, 15B.

b. There wae some qaestian among the EUndn grammarians at to
whether the final mute i> to be estimated as of surd or of sonant quality;
but the great weight of authority, and the l&Taiiable practice of the manu-
tcrlpts, fsTor the surd.

Wkitn*r, anmnu. 3. si. 4

ioy Google

14a—] III. EOPBOKIO COHBDIATIOII. 50

142. The palatals, however, foim hete [om often else-
wh6ie) an exception to the rules fot the othei mutes. No
palatal is allowed as final. The ? o teretts (43) to its
original ^ k: thus, m^ Y&k, ^'^^4 aAhomilk. The W oh
(only quotable in the lOOt ^(S praohj becomes Z %■ thus,
m^ prftf. The ^^i either lereits to its original guttuial oi
becomes 7 ti in acootdance with its treatment in other com-
binations {218): thus, ftq^ bhi^Ak, fsqi^virij. The g; Jh
does not occur, but is by the native grammarians declared
convertible to 7 t-

143. Of the nasals, the ^ m and ^ n are extremely
common, especially the former (T{^ m and H s are of all final
consonants the most frequent); the in 9 is allowed, but is
quite rare; 1^ fl is found (remaining after the loss of a fol-
lowing ^ k) in a very small number of words [886 b, 0,
407 a); ^fi never occurs.

a. Bat the final m of s root \s changed to a (compare filfi a,
below) ■ thus, akran from kram, figan, aJagaUf nBanlgan from gam,
&ii&n from nam, ayBn from yam, pr&9&ii ^om qam ; no other cases
are qnotable.

144. Of the semivowels, the ^ 1 alone is an admitted
final, and it is very rare. The 7 ' '^ C*^^ ^^ nearest surd
conespondent, n a: 146) changed as final to visarga. Of
n y and c^ v there is no occurrence.

146. Of the sibilants, none may stand unaltered at the
end of a word. The H b (which of all final consonants
would otherwise be the commonest) is, like ^ r, changed to
a breathing, the vissrga. The V 9 either reverts (48) to its
original ^k, or, in some roots, is changed to 7t {^ accor-
dance with its changes in inflection and derivation: see
below, 218): thus, f^ dlk, but f^ vi\. The ^v is like-
wise changed to r t: thus, ^ Mi pr&v^

a. Tlie chkDge of f to ( U of r*N ooeniMDCB : lee below, fise d.

ioy Google

51 pEaidTTED Finals. [ — 160

b. Finiil ndictl a i» atii by tliB fnmmuiani to 1>e dhanged to t ; bnt
no inia axtmple ot tlie MBTfettlon It qootabls: m« 108; and compiTS
B6B».

146. The compound ^ k; is prescribed to be treated
as siinple ^f (not becoming S(i k by IBO, below). But
the case is a rare one, and its actual treatment in the older
language inegular.

a. In the only BY. cusb where the k; hu s qaul-ndlMl chareECei —
nunely an&k from an&kf, ind imyak from j/mrakf — tbe convanlon
1« to k. AIw, «/ forait of tlia o-aorlit (lee 690], we hate adb&k. asrSk,
■rUk, etc (foi adli&kf-t etc.); bot alio aprit, aySf, av«t> auKt ('°'
apT&kf-t etc.). And BV. ba« twlca ajrls from j/yaj, and AT. tvlce BrSa
from ynfi (wiDDgly lefened by BR. to yaraAa), both 2d ilag., wheie the
peiNoal ending haa petbapi oiowded. ont the loot-llaal and tenae-Bign.

b. The nnmeial QOf lix U perbapa better to be Tegarded aa fakf, vlth
tta kf treated aa ^ according to tba accepted inle.

147. The aspiration ^ ta is not allowed to maintain
itself, but (like ^J and SJ 9) either reverts to its original
guttural form, appearing aa ^T k, ox is changed to ^ t —
both in accordance with its treatment in inflection: see
below, 222. And, also as in inflection, the original sonant
aspiration of a few roots [given at ISGbj reappears when their
final thus becomes deaspirated. Where the ^ h is tiom
original Udh (223 g], it becomes fT t.

148. The visarga and anusTSra are nowhere etymolog-
ical finals; the former is only the substitute for an original
final H B or ^ t; the latter occurs as final only so far as
it is a substitute for if m (218 h).

148. Apait iiom the vowels, then, the usual finals,
nearly in the order of their frequency, are : f^ 1 m, ^n,
^t, ^ k, ^ p, Tf, those of only sporadic occurrence are
^ 11, ^1, m 9; and, by substitution, - ili.

ISO. In geneial, only one consonant, of whatever kind,
is allowed to stand at the end of a word; if two or more
would etymologically occur there, the last is dropped, and
^ain the last, and so on, till only one remains.

ug,i,.e.., Google

ICO—] m. EDPHONIO COICBTOATION. 52

a. Thns, tadontB beoomea tudant, and this tndan; ad*&o4
becomeB ndafik(148), and this adoo; and aah&nUt (a-aor, 3d sing.,
of yctuuid [800 bj) is in like manner redaced to aohSn.

b. But a nOD-nasal mate, if radical and not anffixal. Is ret^ned
after r : thue, drk from drj. v&rk from yv^i, avart from Vvft, AmSit
from ymfi, auh&rt from anb&rd. The case is not a common one.

C. For rellei ot totmex doable flnsU, preieTved by the 1at«i Unpiage
under the dUgulfe ot apparent eaphanlc combination*, lee below, fl07 IT.

IBl. Anomilons conTeraioni of & flnal mule to one of Mother «lus
are occistonilly met with. Eiimplea are :

a. Ot final t to k; thna, 1. in a few woida that have aiinmed a
apecial value ai partlelei, as Jy6k. Uj&k (beside t&iikt), fdhak (beside
fdhat), p^ak, drllk; and of kindied rharactei is khSdagd&nt (TA.);
3. In here and there a verbal form, as a&vifak (AT. and TS. Ka^.),
dambb^ak (Apast), avifTak (Parash.], fihalak (VS. HS.; = Bharatj;
3. in loet-dnals or the t added to TOOt-items (383 e), as -dh^k foT -dbft
(Sutras and later) at the end of compounds, soqrAk (TB.), Pfk^U (ST.);
and 4. we may farther note here the anomalons «flkfva (AB.) forintrra,
V'ldh) and aTfikaam (AB.), and the feminines in knl from nueealinea
in ta (1178d).

b. Of final d or t to a lingual; thus, pad in Tedlo pa^bbia,
p&t^bM. p^bl^a; upan&fbbyllm (QB.); vy »v&t (US. Ui. 4. 9;
yva* thine), and perhaps &p([ "rill (MS.; or V^(^j?).

O. Of k or J to t, in an isolated example or two, as aamT&t, &art,
■rt^Taaft (TS. K.), and prayitau t^S. Tb.; AV. -k(u).

d. In Taittinya taiU, of the final of annqt^fah and trlftdbh to a
gnttoial: as, aatuff^ oa, trlftiigbblB, aiiaftugbIi;aB.

e. Of a labial to a dental: In kttkdd for and beside kalc6bh; in
Badiafdbhia (TS.) from v'eiPi >°d in adbbla, sdhhT^a, from ap or
ftp (393). Excepting the first, those look like cases of disalmilatloni yet
examples of the combination bbh are not very rare in the older language ;
that, kaknbbbyftm, triift^bbhla, kakabbhai^^^ anugt^b bhi.

f. The forms pratidhi^gaa, -ffi (TtUttiriya texts) from pratldi^ are
isolated anomalies.

162. FoT all the pTocesses of external combination —
that ifi to S47, in oompositioa and sentence-collocation —
a stem-final oi wotd-final is in general to be legaided as
having, not its etymolc^cal form, but that given it by the
rules as to permitted finals. From this, however, aie to be
excepted the b and t: the various transformations of these
sounds have nothing to do with the viaarga to which as

L«j,i,....,LiOOglc

53 DBASpntATioN. [—IBB

finab before a pause they hare — donbtlesa at a com-
paiativeljr recent period of phonetic history — come to be
reduced. Words will everywhere in this work be written
with final B 01 r instead of }/.; and the rules of combination
will be stated as for the two more original sounds, and not
for the Tiaarga.

Oeaspiration.
IBS. An aspirate mute is changed to a non-aspiiate
before another non-naeal mute or before a sibilant; it stands
unaltered only before a vowel oi semivowel or nasal.

a. Sach ■ cue e*n only arlBS In inteinal eombinatiou, ainoe the
ptoae««ei of eiternkl oombln&tlon praappote the ndacUon D( the uptrate
Co > non-upii&te inld (IBS).

b. Ptactic*U]r, »1m, the talea u to changes of aipliatOB coneeni
almost only the lonant aipliatea, ■ln<»i the lanl, being of Ittec development
and rarer ooenmnce, are hardly ever found In attnationa that eall for theli
applicatioD.

164. Hence, if such a mute is to be doubled, it is
doubled by prefixing its own corresponding non-aspirate.

a. Bnt Id the maaneeripts, both Vedlc and later, an aaptiate mule
It not teldom found written doHble — aipeolally, if It be one of tare occut-
rente: for example (RV.), akhkholl, jijhjhati

IBS. In a few roots, when a final sonant aspirate (a
|(h, 17 dh, H bh; also^ h, as representing an original 3 gh]
thus loses its aspiration, the initial sonant coosonaat (IT g
or ^ d or ST b) becomes aspirate.

a. That Is to lay, th« original initial aaplrato of aueh mota ia reetored,
when Ita preBenee does not iDterfare with the enphoDia law, of compuatlvely
recant origin, whleh (in Sanskrit a* in Qreek) forbidi a root to both begin
and end with an aspirate.

b. The roots which show this peculiar change are:
in gb — daghi

in h (for original gb) — dab, dili, dub, drub, dfftb, ffub ; and
aUo K>^ah (in the later dealderatlie jlgb(k^);

In db— bandb. bBdta, bodb;

lu bb — dabb (bat only in the later deslderatiTe dbipsa tot whloh
the older language haa dipsa).

ioy Google

1B6— ] in. EUFHOMIO COUBIMATION. 54

O. The MOie ohang* ■ppeut when the law u to flnali c&oiei the los*
of the upliitlon *t th« ead of the loot: Be« ibove, 141.

d. But from dah, du2i, drota, uid guh ue foaud in the Vedi
alto fonns without the leetored Initial ispiiate: thai, dakgfftt; adok^at;
dodnkfa etc.; Jogukya; mitradrAk.

e. The seme anelog? li followed by dadb, the abhrsTitted snlistitnte
of tbe pfeaent-itemi dadll&, from )^dhft (667), Id some of the toims of
coqjDgttion: thus, dhatUitui from dadh+thaa, adhatta from adadh-f-
ta, adtaaddbvam from adadlL+dbTam, etc.

f. No CMe U met with of the throwing back of an upiiatlon upoD
oombiDation with tbe 2d aing. impt. aot. ending Hhl - tbna, dnsdbl,
daddlil (BT.), but dhogdlivam, dhaddhvam.

Surd and Sonant Assimilation.

166. Uadei tluB head, there u especially one very maiked
and important diffeteaoe between the internal combioations
of a loot or stem with suffixes and endings, and the external
combinations of stem with stem in composition and of word
with word in sentence-making: namely —

167. a. In internal combination, the initial vowel or
eemiTowel oi nasal of an ending of inflection or derivation
exercises no altering influence upon a final consonant of the
root or stem to which it is added.

b. To thli Tnle there are gome eieepttoD*; thni, »me of the detivatlTet
noted at 111 d; flnal d of a root befttie the participial lufllx na (dS7d);
and the fonns noted below, 161 b.

0. In external combination, on the other hand, an initial
sonant of whatever class, even a vowel oi semivowel or
nasal, requires the conversion of a final surd to sonant.

d. It haa been poloted oat above (163) that in the rnlef of external
combination only edmlttad flnali, along with ■ and r, need be taken
account ot, all othera being legarded a« lednced to theie befoie combining
with Initlali.

168. Final vowels, nasals, and ^ I are nowhere liable
to change in the processes of surd and sonant assimilation.

a. The r, however, hu a eorreapondkg surd in a, to which it la
sometimes changed in exteroal oombiDStioD, under clrcum>tanoes that
favor a surd utterance (178),

ioy Google

55 ASSIMILATIOII. [ — 161

168. With the exoeptious above atat«d, the oollisios
of BUid and soaant Bounds is avoided ia oombinationa —
and, legvlacl}' and usually, by aMimilatiog the final to the
following initial, ot by legiewive awimil&tion.

Thus, in interntl oombiiwtlOD : itai, ktO, attMs, atU (yaA +
Bi etc.} ; qagdlif, ^agdbTiua (Vf ale + dU etc.] j— in esternal combinatioD,
ibhtkd ay&m, JyAg jiva, fi4 a^It^alh, trlqtdb kpi, dlg-goja, qa^-
afa&, aroid-dbOmft, brh&d-bhanii, ab-Ji.

160. If, however, a final wnant aspiiate of a root is
followed by H t 01 9 th of an ending, the aasimilation is in
the other direction, or prc^essiTe: the combination is made
aonant, and the aapuation of the final (lost according to 163,
above} is transferred to Uie initial of the ending.

TbnB, gh with t or tb becomes gdli; dh with the same beoomes
ddh, as boddbi (visndb + ta), roddhia (y^mndh + thaa or taa);
bb with the same becomes bdh, as labdlii (lOabb+ta), labdb^
(lOabli+tvi).

a. Moreover, h, as representlDg original gh, is treated in the same
manner: thai, dncdlii, ddgdhum from dah — and compare r&4^
and ll^bi from mb and Uh, etc., SSSb.

bi In thii eombi nation, u the lonuit teplradon li not lost bot tnnafened,
the raftoratlcin o( the lnlti»l Mplntloir (165) does not take place.

O. In dadb from ydU (186 «), tbo more normal method is followed;
the db U made «nid, and the Initial Mptnted: thai, dbattbaa, dhattas.
And BT. hM ^hntt*™ Initead of dagdbam from f'dagb; and TA. hii
inttSm iaatead ot inddbsm &am yidb.

161. Before a nasal in external combination, a final
mute may be simply made sonant, ot it may be still further
assimilated, being changed to the nasal of ita own class.

Thus, either tAd nAmas or tAn nAmaa, vig me or vafi me, bAi}
mi^hij" or bi-tf mabin, tri^t^b n&nAm or trii^fom a&nAm.

a. In practice, the converiion into a natal ia almoat iUTariabl; made
in the mannioript*, ai, indeed, it i) by the Fiaticakbyaa laqniied and not
permitted meioly. Kren by the general gmnmarlana it ii required in the
eompoDnd fA^i^vatl, and before mStrft, and the annix mar* (1826) :
tbn*, TSDmAya, mfninAya.

b. Etcu in Internal combinatlan, tbo same aisinHlatlon Is made In
lome of the dedTatiTea noted at llld, and in the na-partleiplea (8ST d).
And s few ipondle initancei are met with STen in TeiMnllection : thoa,

ioy Google

161—] lU. EUFBONIO COHBIMATIOH. 50

BtUnoU, sUAnajM (UB.; tor stlghn-), mpuilta C^QS.; tux mpdn-).
jaflmajnuia (KS.; for jBgm-]; thMS, howevei (Uka the doable MpliUet,
lB4a)i **^ doDbtlsM to be i^ectad u f&lie TOMllage'

les. Before 1, « finftl t is not merely made BOOitnt, bat fullf
MsimiUted, becomiog 1: thas, tAl labb&te, Maptun.

165. Before ^ h [the case occurs only in external com-
bination), a final mute is made Bon&nt; and then the ^ Ii
may either remain unehanged or be converted into the
sonant aspirate corresponding with the former: thus, either
Hf4<t t^d hi or rri% tid dhi.

a. In prutlM, tha Uttet method la ilmott liiTaiUbly followed; ind the
gnmmeTlaiia of the Piiti^khyi pedod ue neuir nnenimosE in requiring It.
The phonatle difference between the two U tsij slight

Examples are: v^ «hat&^ f&44bota (^at+hotft), taddhiU
Ctat+liltk), ann;tab VtA.

Combinations of final H a and ^ r.

104. The euphonic changes of H s and ^ r are best
considered tt^ether, because of the practical relation of
the two sounds, in composition and sentence-collocation,
as corresponding surd and sonant: in a host of cases TT a
becomes ^ r in situations requiring or favoring the occur-
rence of a sonant; and, much less often, ^ r becomes H b
where a surd is required.

a. Id iotemal combination, the two are far less exchaogeable witli
one another: and this class of cases maf beat be taken up first.

166. Final r radical or qaasi-radical (that is, not belonging to
an ending of dedvatioD) remains unchanged before both surd and sonant
aonnds, and oven before ea In declension: tiios, plparfi, oatorthA,
oat6r;a, pOr^i^.

166. Final radical a remains before a surd in general, and usu-
ally before a, as in qitsal, gftssva, Bsee, a9lna [the last is also
written fi^fl^^u: 178j: but it is lost In &sl {yaa+ti: 636). Before
a sonant (that is, bh] in declension, it is treated as in external com-
binatioo: thus, ft^bhis. Before a sonant (that ts, db) in coiyagatioD,
it appears to be dropped, at least after long ft : thus, 9&dhl, qag&dU,
cakftdU (the onfy qooUble cases}; in edhi (v'ae+dbi: 636) the
root syllable is Irregularly altered; but in 2d perss. pl., made with
O-hvam, as adbvam, gtdlivani, ar&dbvain (861 a), vadhvam (v^aa

ioy Google

57 Fdui, ■ AND r. [—168

eloHej, it 1b, on ftocooot of the equlvatence sod inteiohange&bility of

dliv and ddhv (232), impossible to say whether the e in_ omitted ot;

converted into d.

S. FtnU tadiol b Is Terjr nre; BY. (twice, both 2d. pars, tiog.) tretts
iigbaa bom ygluis tn tlie wme muiner u >dt ordinary woid endlog
Id ap.

167. In a very few cases, final radical ■ before a is changed to
t [perhaps by dissfmilation): they are, from y-nn dtctU (also sporad-
leallf from vas thine, QB., and vaa clothe, Har.), the fature vatsy^ml
and aorist &Tfttsam; from y'ghas, the deslderative stem J{ghatsa.

a. For t M apparent ending of tba 3d sing, in a-ieibs, aee S66 a..

168. According to tlie gram id art ant, ths &nal B of certain other nioli,
nied ai noan-itema, becomea t at the end of the word, and before bb and
tm: thna, dbvaa, dhvadbhla, BradbhyaB, Bratsn. Bat genuine eiimplea
of inch obange are not qnotabla. -

a. Sporadic oaaea of a like converaion are found in tbeTeda: namely,
mSdbbfa and m&dl)liT&8 from tn&: aqidbtala from of^i sv&tttvad-
bhjas from aT&tavoa; av&vadbhla etc. (not qnotable) bom bv&vos.
Bnt the actnality of the eontenlan here la open to grave donbt; It rather
aeama the aubMltntion of a t-sCem for a a-atem. The aama li trae of the
change of vSAa to Tftt in the decleniloD of perfect participles (468). The
stem anafvah (404), from anas-vah, is anomalous and leolated.

b. In the eompoanda duoahuii& (dus-^nft) and p&raoohepa
(pams-qepa), the final a of the first member Is treated aa If a t (203).

169. As the final consonant of dertvatiTe stems and of inflected
forms, both of declension and of oonjngation, a is extremely frequent;
and its changes form a snbject of first-rate importance in Sanskrit
eaphony. The r, on the other band, is quite rare.

a. The r ia fonnd as original final la oertaln case-formi of stems tn
r 01 ar (368 ff.) ; In root-stemi in Ir and nr from looti in j (383 b) ;
In a amall nnmber of other sterna, as B-vta, iluur and itdhar (bealde
ihan and ddban: 480), ivix or dnr, and the Tedic v&dhar, oqar-,
vaaar-, vaiuur-, frutar-, aapar-, aabar-, athar- (cf. 17do); in a
tew particles, sa antAr, piftt&r, pdnari and tn the numeral oat&r
(482 g).

b> The enpbonlo treatment of a and r yielding preoUely the same
result after all yowals except a and &, there are certain fonus with regard
to whleh il Is nneertatn whether they end in S or t, and opinions dilTer
reapecting them. Such are nr (or m) of the gen.-sbl. sing, ot p-ttems
[371 o), and ua (oi or) of the 3d plnr. of verbs (B60e).

.yj

Lu.ao, Google

170—] III. EUPHOKIO COUBINATIOH. 58

170. a. The TT ■, ae ahead; notioed [146}, beoomes
visarga before a pause.

b. It is letained unchanged only when followed by
rT t 01 ET th, the fluid mutes o£ its own olass.

o. Before the palatal and lingual surd mutes — ^o and
^ oh, ^t and ^fh — it is assimilated, becoming the sibilant
of either claM respectively, namely KT 9 or ^ q.

d. Before the guttural and labial surd mutes — ^,k and
S kh, ^ p and m ph — it is also theoretically aasimilated,
becoming respectively the JlhTBrnOUya and upadtunSnlya
spirants (69); but in practice these breathings aie unknown,
and the conversion is to viaa^ia.

Examples are : to b. tatas te, oak^ua te ; to o. tataq oa, taoTK^
oblyft; pSdaf (nlatl; to d. nelalfy kflimam. purofa^ kbanaU; ya^a^
prSpci, v^kfa^ phalavKn.

171. The first three of these rules are almoat ai^versftl; to the
last ons there are nnmerons exceptions, the atbilant being retained (or,
b; 180, converted into f), espeolallj in compounds; but also, in the
Veda, even in sentence combination-

a. In the Veda, the reteDtlon of the Blbllftnt la compoandt \a the generU
mle, th« aieeptloDi to vhleh ate datalled In the Tedlc giunmua.

b. In the Utoi langnige, the letentton li nuinly detennlsed by the
Intlmaoj' OT the uitlqiilt; and fiMqoenoy ot the comblnatloo. Thna, the flnal
afblUnt of « pTeposltion or ■ void fllUng the offloe of a prapodtlan before
• TSTbal root la wont to be pieaetTed ; am) that of a item before a derivatlia
Df ykf, before pati, befors fcalpa and kftma, and lo on. Eiamplea ue
namaakara, vftoaspatl, Syu^Sma, payaakalpa.

o. The Vcdlc retention of the albllant In aeDtence-coUocatlon ia detailed
in full In the Piati9il[hyai. The chief claaies of oaaea are: 1. tbe final of
a ptepoaitloD or Its like before a Terbal form; 2. of a genitive before a
gOTemlng noon: ai dlv&S pntrA^ if&B pad6; 3. of an ablatlTe before
p&ri: aa Um&vataa p&ri; 4. of other lesa claaaidable oaaea: aa dyftof
pit^ trig pQtvlt. yia p&t^i. paridhlq p&tBU, etc

172. Before an initial sibilant — ^9, ? ti, H a — H a
ifl either assimilated, becomii^ the same sibilant, or it is
changed into visorga.

a. The DatlTB gramnuiluu ate In lome meaanie at variance («•«
AFr. il. 10, note) aa to vhloh of theie changea (hoold be made, and tn

...cGoogk

5d COHBIHATIONB OF FlNAX B. [—17ft

p«t their kUov either al pleuni*. The atage of the nuniuulpta U xlio
dlieoidtnt', the coiiTeitlon to Tiasrga la tbe pTeralent pnotlaB, thoogh the
■IblUat la alao not Inbeqnently fonnA written, eipeclally In Sonth-lDdlan
nuuinaetlpti. Eniopeu edltora geQwallj write visarga; bat the later
dletloiiaiiea and gloturiaa general!; mike the alphalietlc place of a woid tiie
aams la if the iibilant weie luad initead.

Examples are: toann]^ avByam or mutoB Bv&yam; indra^ ^Oth^
or indrttf qOia^; tMf ^a\ or tfif qB(.

173. There are one or two escepUooB to these rnleB:

B. It the initial sibUaat hae a auid mute after ll, the Qnal a may be
dmpped altogether — and by Boma anthoTlUea li Teqnlred to be *o dropped.
Thna, T&yftTS etlut or vSyBTK^ Btha; ontaBtanbu or oBtu^tan&m.
With regard to thii point the osage of the different miDuaorlpti and edltioua
Is greati; at Taiianoe.

b. Before ta, tbe B I* allowed to become Ttsarga, instead of being
retained,

174. Before a sonant, either vowel oi consonant (ex-
cept ^ t: see 179), ? a is changed to the aonant ^ r —
unless, indeed, it be preceded by St a or ^ S.

Eiamptes «re: derapatlr iva, fiir iva; manur gaoohati, tanOr
apaa; sraefr ajanayat; tayor adntabftmal?; BarvUr gtifU^; agner

a. For a few caaea like d&4^B, dO^iBfa, Bee bedow, 199 d.

b. The ezdamation blioe (4fi6) loaea Ita e before tokoIb and tonant
conaonanta; tbai, bho nBlqadha (and tbe a 1* lometlmei fonnd omitted
also before anrda).

o. The endings QH as and ?TH Ba (both of which are
extremely common] follow rules of their own, namely :

176. a. Final i^ as, before any sonant consonant and
before ahort SI a, is changed to lat o — and the 9 a after
it is lost.

b. The reinlting accentuation, and the feet that the loas of a ta only
oeeaaioDal In the older language of the Teda, hiTe been pointed ont abOTe,
136 a. e.

Examples are: nalo D&ma, bmbma^ro vedaTit; manobhava;
bantaTjo 'oml; anyonya (anyaa -f anya), yaqortham (ya^aa-f-
artham).

o. Final W\ as before any -other vowel than q a loses
its H s, becoming simple ^ a; and the hiatus thus occasion-
ed remains.

ioy Google

176 — ] III, EnPHOMIO COMBIHATIOM. 60

d. That U lo uy, the o from sa li tt«*ted u ui oilgiaal « U traat«d
In the lams ritoitloii: Me IS9-3.

Eiftrnples are: brhadagTR avBoa, tditytt iva, n&mftfibti,

176. ExcaptioDB to the rnlea as to final oa are:

a. The uominatiTe mucallne pionoauB B&e and ef&s and (Tedlc)
ny&s (496 a, 498 a, b) laie thsli b befote any aoiiKiDant: thoa, sa
dadarqa ha taic, a^a pora^ah Ihit mani bnt ao travlt ha »aid,
poni^ efa^.

b. Initancea ate met with, both In the eaiUei and In the Utei lan-
guage, of elbcement or the hiatni after alleiaUon of oa, by combtnatloD
of the Temainlng final a with the following Initial Tovel.' thne, tato
V&oa (tatas+nv&aa), payo^^i (payaB+afql], adHfiaana (adhas +
Saana): compuo lS3a, I77b. In the Veda, anch a eombinaUoD Ii
aomettmea abawn by the metre to be leqnlied, though the written text haa
Iba hiatus. But aa tn BV. la in the gieat majority of caaee eombiued with
the fallowing Towel; e. g., ai 'd tor si {d, ai 'smU for a& aamKi,
afta ';a(UiI^ for s& 6fadl^; and almtlar exunplea are fonnd alto In the
other Tedic texts.

o. Other ipoiadlc Inegnlarltle* In the treatment of final aa oecot.
Thna, It la changed to ai instead of O once fn RT. In av&s, once In ST.
In &vaa (RV. &vo), once In MS, la dambhlfaa; In bhnvaB (aecond of
the trio of aacred uttarancea bhas, bhavas, Stbt), eieept In It* earlleat
ocmrrenoea; la a aeilei of words In a Brabmina puaige (TS. B.), vli,
Jlnvir, ugr&r, bhimiir, trefir. Qmt&r, bbQt&r, and (K. only) pQt&r;
In Janar and mabar; and aome of the ar-atema noted at 109a are perhapa
of kindred character. On the other hand, aa la seTsral timet changed to o
Id BV. befote a anrd conaonantj and e&a twice, and f&B once, retaini Ita
final sibilant In a like poaiHon.

d. Ill MS., the final a left before hiatal by alteration of either aa
(o) or e (133) is made long If itielf nnaecented and If the following initial
vo*rel U accented: thua, alirS 6ti (from 8lliTaa-|-6tl)i nirapriitft CndrSya
(from •r&teH-inclOi '"d alio k£r;& 6ka- (from kSr^«, became Tirtnally
kiHaa); bnt Sdltyi indra^ (fiom &dlt7&8 + Indra^). et&ftara (from
ati + ftare).

177. Final 91? Bs before any sonant, whether vowel or
consonant, loses its CT a, becoming simple ^ B; and a hiatus
^U8 oocaaioaed remains.

a. The maintenance of the hiatna la tbeee eaaes, a] in that of O and
e and fti (above, 133-4), aeemt to Indicate a recent Iobb of the intermediate
toond. Oplniona ue divided aa to what thla ahonld have been. Some of
the uatlTB grammariana atalmllate the eaie of Sa to that of U, aunmiiti;

ioy Google

61 COMBINATIOKS OF FiNAL r. [ — 180

the eoDTenlon to ^ Id both «11ke — bnt probtbly odI; m a mtttw of
formil eoD^eiilenoe In nile-maUng.

b. Heis, too (u in the *lml|ir etioa of e >nd U and o: 188 o,
178 b}, there «e eumplM to li* found, both eiTllei mi litei, at effMemsnt

of the hUtu.

178. Final ^ r, in general, shows the same form which
n B would show under the same conditions.

a. Thus, it becomes viaaisn when final, and a sibilant or Ttsarga
before an initial surd mate or sibilant (170): thus, mdati pnnal^
dvSa tat, BV^ oa, oatuqoatv&riAfat; and (lllo,d) prttastina,
antastfa, datu^tara. dhOatra; prSta^ karotl, anta^pftta.

b. But original final r preceded b}' a or & maintaiDs itself nn-
changed before a sonant: thns, punor eti, prfttarjlt, ifcar Jy6tl^
Uiir dimni, TKrdbi.

o. The T li pre»ar>ed onebuiged btsu bafore & inrd in ■ Dumber ol
Tedio oompaamlt: thna, abarp&tt; evJUFcanas, BTkroak^aa, ar^rpatl,
erarf ^ svarf &ti ; dhOrf&d, dhur^ah ; pArpati, vftrkary&, S^trpada,
punartta; >nd in some of these the r la optlonslly teUlned In the latei
liogiuge. The RT. alio hu ftvar t&mal^ once In eantencB-comblnktion.

d. On the other hind, And ar of the TSib-fonn fivar i« ohtnged to

0 before a lonint In lOToril cum In RV. And r !■ lost, like s, In one

01 two cues in the same test: thai, aJc^K {ndu^ itha vrk.

179. A doable r is nowbece admitted: if snch wonid occur, eitlier
by retention of an ori^al r or b^ conversion of ■ to r, one r is
omitted, and tbe preceding vowel, If siiort, is made long by oompen-
■ation.

Thus, pnnft rainate, nrpatl r^att, mttA rUiAo, J70&«tlia,
dOrohso^

a. In lome Vedlo text#, bovever, there are InitaDcea of ar changed to
o before Initial r: tbni, wrb rohftva.

Conversion of ^a to i3[^9.

180. The dental sibilant n a is changed to the lingual
(T J, if immediately preceded by any vowel save 5 a and
53? 5, or by ^ t or 5" r — unless the H a be final, followed
by J r. "

A. The »«iimilat!ng InlliieDee of the preceding llnKoal vowelt and
■•mlvoirel Is obTions enough ; tbst of k and the other *oveli appear* to
be dne to • somewhat retracted position of the tongne In the mouth during

ioy Google

180—] in. EnPBOHIO COHBIHATIOM. 62

tbeir atteiuice, uulof It* tip to Teach tti* roof «t th« month men euUr
»t ■ point fuithST back thaa tbe dental one.

b< The genenil Hindu gnmmir pieaeribei the tune change tflet a 1
•leo; but the Pritifikhyai glTS no tnch nile, and phonetlo eonddwitlani,
the 1 being a dental sonnd, are abiolntely agatnat it Actual caiei ol the
combiDalion do not occot In the older language, not h*Te anj been pointed
out In the latei.

o. Tho TOweU that cause the alteration of a to f may be oalied
for bieTitf'a sake "alterant" vowels.

181. Henoe, ia the interior of a Sanekrit word, the dental ■ ii
not naaaUy found after any vowel save » and &, bat, instead of it
the llngnal-f. Bnt —

a. A following r prevents the conversion: thos, lurs, tiarsa,
tsmlara. And it ia bnt seldom made in the forois and derivativea of
a root contaioing an r-element (whether r or j), whatever the position
of that element: thus, aiaartl, alartam, B(u1srP&, tiotlre, pariardt.
To this mie there are a few exceptions, as vlqt^. vl;tBr&, nifffts,
vifpO'^li'M' givli}tlilrft, etc. In iOi4>'<ui the final ; of a root is
preserved even immediatelj before r.

b. Thli dlaaimilatlng Inflnenee of a foUowing r, ti compared -with
the invariable Miimilating laSnence of a preceding r, it peculiar and prob-
lamatlcal.

0< The leennencB of f In lueceHive eyllablaa Is aometlniea avoided by
leaving the formers anchanged: thas, slaab^, bnt sifakti; yBoialftliia,
but yM^TmaJli Similarly, in certain deilderative formaUona: aee below,
184 «.

d. Other eatea are sportdlc: RV. haa tbe forme Bisloe and siaiona
(bnt slfieatofl), and the itemi fblsa, klBti, bfaa, buak, bfBOTft; a
lingle root pla, with Ita derivative peanka, is fennd onee in (B. ; MS.
hu mramrfi; m&aala begtna to be found in AT.; and auch casei
grow more nomerani; for podis and the looti nifis and hlim, aee below,
ISSa.

18S. On tlie other hand [as was pointed ont above, 68), the
occurrence of q in Sanskrit words is nearly limited to coses falling
under this rule: others are rather sporadic anomalies — eioept where
f is the prodoct of g or kf before a dental, as is draftoni, oaftOt
tvaftar: see 818, 981. Thus, we find —

a. Fotir roots, kaf, laf, bht^ bhSq, of vrhlch the lait la commoD
and ii found aa early ai the Brahmanaa,

b. Further, in BY., ifo, kav&^a, ca^fla, o&fa, J&Ufa, ptt^yk,
bafk&ya, v&qaf (for vak^atP), kk^fhS; and, by aDOmaloni alteration
ot otlginal a, -;ah (torj^^h 'tc.), &4&4^a, apaftdt, and probably apiffhi
and afthlvint. Snch eaaes gtow more common later.

o. The nomenl fa;, u already noted (149 b), Is more probably ^akf.

ioy Google

63 COHTEXBIOH or ■ TO f. [— 18S

1SS> The DMatiiKtiOD of tha alterant vowel — or, in other words.
Ha being followed bj unuvba — does not prevent its altering effect
upon the afblUnt: thae, haviA^ para&qi. And the alteratloD tiUcea
place in the Intdal a of an ending after the final a of a Btem, whether
the latter be regarded u also ciiangod to « or aa oonrerted into
visargft: thus, bAvi^u or havi^qti, pftrnffn or pam^^a.

a. Bat llu a of ptufaa (8B4] remalm imebuigsd, appuently on
tAconnt of the ratiined senie of Ita nlns u pmcB; alio thtt of yhliiB,
beuoH of iti nine u Una (Unaati Mo.); yoUm (BV. only] is more

qDMtioiUble.

184. The principal oaBea of alteration of ■ In internal combination
are these:

&. In endings, inflectional or derivatiTe, beginning with a — thus,
au; at, a*) era; a of Bibilaot-aorlst, fntnre, and desiderstiTe; saffixes
ana, ■nn, aya, etc. — after a final alterant vowel or consonant of root
or stem, or a onion-vowel; thns, Jnhofl, qefe, anUfam, bhavlfy&ml,
f u^rflfo, defi^ Jlf90f vUcfo, ak&rfam.

b. The fioal a of a stem before an ending or anf&x: thus: havl^
havifaa, etc., from havls; fak^ofmant, qoolfka, nUlnnfa. mannfya,

o. Bo«t« hKTlng > fln*l alblUiit (eieepl q) sfter in tlterant TOwel ue
— with the eEteption of fletittooi onei and pia, nUiB, iiliiM — regarded aa
ending in ;, not a; and eoneemlng the tieatment of thli q In cDmbinattoD,
see below, S2B-6.

d. The initial a of a root after a reduplication: thus, aiqyade,
BOfTSpa, slffisatt, ooqlcayata. aanlfva^at.

O. Excepted la In geneial an Initial radical a lu a deildeiatlTe item,
when the deatdentlTe-tlgn becomea f : tbna, aiaipqati bota yof, alaafikfatl
from l^aafij. And there aro other aeatterlng caaea, aa treaOB (perf. from
t^traa), etc

ISB. Bat the aame change occars also, on a considerable scale,
in external oombiDaUon, especially in oompoBition. Thus:

a. Both in verbal forms and in derivatives, the final 1 or u of a
preposition or other like prefix ordinarily lingualizes the Initial a of
the root to which it Is prefixed; since anch combinations are both of
great frequencj and of peculiar intimacj, analogous with those of root
or stem and affix; thus, abhlqio, pratl;tl^ nlfLkta, v{;ita; anu-
(Tadh&m, anqdka; the cases are nnmberleas.

b. The principal ezceptlona aro Id acowdance with the priaclplea
already laid down: namely, when the root contalna an r-alemeut, and when
■ reenirenee of the libiUnt would take place. Bnt there ate alio othoia,
of a mors Irregular iharaeter; and the complete acconnt of the treatment
of Initial radical a after a prefix wonld be a matter of great detail, and not
worth gtving here.

ioy Google

18B— ] III, Euphonic Coubinattoh. 64

o. Mot Infreqiisntly, the InitUl S, utntUy ftlteied (fter a cettUn
prefix, Tettins the altered albiUnt evea aflet m interposed a of augment
or rednplleation: thus, aty aqth&t, abhy a^tblbn, parr a^ftfrajat, vy
n^aliaiita, ny o^adilma, ulr a^thSpayan, abhy a^ifLoan, vy a^Jabb-
nlt; vi ta^tba, vi ta^^tiivo.

A. Harh mom anomilODi is the oecisional alteratioQ ot iiiltlsl rsdiul
a after in a-element of a prefix. Saeh cues ue ava ^fambb (ag^nst
ni Btambh snd prati atambh) aad (sccordiog to the grimmsilins) ava
fvon.

186. Id other compounds, the final alterant vowel of the first
member not infrecjueDtly [especially in the Veda) lingualizes the
initial a of the second: for exnmple, yndhl^thlra, pltn^asf, go^fhi,
agnl^fomfc, anoqtubh, trl^aibdlil, dlvl^d, parame^t^n, abbifeni,
pitff&d. puTUftati.

a. A very few euei dgcdi of the auns alteration after an &-«Iement:
thus, saftdbh, avaffajnbha, Bavyaf^b^, apa^tba, npaqtut; also
l/sab, irhen Itj final, by 147, beoomes ( : thas, eatraf^t (but satrft-
■ibam).

187. The final a of the first member of a componod often be-
comes 9 after an alterant vowel: thns, the e of a prepositional prefix,
SB nli^dbvan, duft&ra (for da^ft'ira), ftvlfk^ta; and, regularly, a
a retained Instead of being converted to viaarfca before a labial or
guttural mute (171 a), as bavl;pai jyoti^k^; tapan)a.

186. Once more, ia the Veda, the same alteration, both of an Initial
and of a final e, it not infreqnent BTSn between the words eomposing a
sentence. The cases are detailed In the Pratl9akh7a belonging to each text,
and are of very various oharacter. Thus:

a. The Initial a, especially at partlolei: as Q f 6, h{ ^ma, k&m n
fvit; — also of pronouns: as bi ^ify; — of Teih-fomu, eipecially troin
V^aa: as bi qtb&, divi f tba; — and In other scattering cases: as n Ifttibl,
vA ;^F&m, trf ^adb&athft, &dM f96^, nUd^ ^U}, y^nl^ ^kaioaAja,
agai^ ftaye.

b. A flnal B, oftenest before pronouns (e«peciall; toneless ones): as
acnif (vA, ni^ {a, lyiif \A, gnolf tv&m, aiidblf fiiva; — bnt also in
other oases, and wherever a final a Is preserved, instead of being turned
Into Tiaaiga, hafora a guttural or labial (171): as trff ptttT^ tEjUf
kiri^otu. vitsto; p&tilp, dy&nq pit^ vlbbif p&tBt.

Conversion of ^ n to HT v.
189. The dental nasal =T u, when immediately followed
by a Towel or by R » or ^m ot CT y or 9 t, is turned in-
to the lingual HI 9 if preceded in the same word by the

ioy Google

65 CONVEBsiOH OP n TO 9. [ — lei

lingual Bibilant 01 semiTOwel 01 ToweU — that is to say,
by ^ p, ^ r, or H F or ^ T — : and this, not only if the
altering letter standi immediately before the naeal, but at
whatever distance from the latter it may be found: unless,
indeed, there inteivene (a consonant moving the fiont of
the tongue: namely) a palatal (except TJj], a lingual, or a
dental.

a. We may thug flgun U DunelTei tbe rtdionale of the pioceu; tn
the marked procllTlty of the Ungiugc towud Ungual uttetance, •ipedally
or the Dual, tb* tip of the ton^e, vh«D once teTeitod into tbe looie lin-
gaiA petition by the Dtlennce of » non-eontaot lingual alement, teoda to
hang thete and make Ita nest nual contact in that poaltlon ; and doei 10,
nnleai tbe prooIlTlty )■ latiafled by tbe nttaTance of > lingnal mnta, or tbe
eigan la throira oat of a4)n*tmeDt bjr the ntttrance of an element which
cansea it to aaiome ■ different pottote. This la not the oaae with the galtuT-
ali or labUli, -which do not moTe the ftont part of the tongne (and, at the
inflnenae of k on following s iboTs, tbe gntcnral podtloo fa*ota the sDccai-
don of a lingual): and the y is too wetikly palatal to Interfere with the
alteratlaD (as it* next lelatlTe, the 1-Towel, Itaelf lingnallzea a ■).

b. This is a rule of constant application ; and (as was pointed
oDt abOT«, 46) the great mtyorit; of occtirrenoea of 9 in the language
are the result of it.

190. Tbe rule baa force eapecialljf —

a. When anfllsM, of Inflection ot deilTatlon, are added to root* ot
Mama oonlalnlng one of tbe altering lonnds: tbna, nidrAi^, mdr^&m,
-rttrlije, vitriol. varlQi. dfitf^l, h&rft^ dvAfSi^, krl^iml, qr^U,
kqubha^A, t^ir^it kin^ vr^i^ mg^ dr&vl^a, i^kq^, pni^^i,
rikQJU. o&b^a^a, oQarqamli^, k^amKQa.

b. When the flnal n of a root or stem eomea to be followed, in Inflectton
01 derivation, by aach aoonda aa allow it to feel tbe effect of a preceding
altering catiie: thna, from y'ron, r&^anti, r&^ati, rbaqa, arSijifiia;
bom briJunazip briUim^n&t TyrAiiTnfl-ni, bTAlunanit) br^unasiyk,
br&hmai^vant.

c. The form pl^ak (BV. : 2d and Sd sing. Impf.), from Vpl^ li wholly
anomalous,

lei. This mle (11^^ that for the ohange of a to 9) appUea strictly
and especially when the nasal and the eaoee of ite alteration both lie
within the limita of the same integral word; bnt [also like the other)
it is extended, within certain limita, to compound words — and even,
io tbe Veda, to contlgaons words in the sentence.

Whitsfj, Onmaai. 3. ad. 5

ioy Google

103—] Ul. Euphonic Cohbihatioh. 66

18a. Especially, a prepOBition or similar prefix to » root, if it
contain r or end in euphonic r for s [174}, very often linguatixea the
n of a root oi of its derived stems &nd forms. Thos:

a. The Initiil n of • root li nsaally ind regoluly m ftlterod, In all
fonns und deriTitiiea, iftai park, pari, pra, nlr (for nia), antar, dor
(for doa): thai, p4r& ^aya, p&ri ^lyate, pik ^udasra; parB^utti,
pariijAma, praQavi, nii^, duraiiqa. Itoota taBeiiag this chsoee *ce
written irlth Initial 9 In the n«ttTe root-lliti. The only esceptlona of im-
pottinra are nj^ naUl, uand, and naq when iti f becomes f (as In
prinafta).

b. The flnal □ of a loot if liagaallzed in some of the fotmi of an
and ban: thus, pra '^iti, piSQi, pr& haijyate, prahi^iaiia.

0. The elaaa-iigne nn and nfi afe altered after the rooti bi and ml:
thai, pAri hiiyomi, pr4 mi^antl (but the latter not in the Teda).

d. The Ist sing. tmpT, ending Snl Is sometimea altered: thos, pr&
blWT&Ql.

e. DerivatlTeB by snlDies containing n Bomedmes have q by InDaence
of a preposition : thus, praj^a.

f. The n ot the prepoaltion jol Is sometimes altered, like the initial
of a root, afier another preposition: thna, pra^ipKta, pra^idhl.

168, In romponnd words, an alterln| cause in one member lomedmei
llnguallies a n of the neit following member — either Its Initial or final
n, ot n In Its Inflectional or deriiative ending. The eterdte of the altering
Inflnence can be seen to depend in part npon the closeness or fteqaency
of the compound, or its integration hy being made the base of a deriTstlTe.
Examples are: grKaaapf, tri^&man, urQ^asA; vq;tralii^aitl etc (bnt
vftraghni etc: 186a), nrm&ipaa, drugha^A; pravaha^a, nipl^a,
pfiryaqa. pltryinai Bvargdna, dnrga^i, usr&rftm^e, tryaflgagam.

184. Finally, in the Teda, a a (usually initial) is occMionUly Ungual-
ized even by an altering sound la another word. The tonelesa pronouns
naa and ana- are ofteneat thus affected : tbas, p&ri ^aa, pr&l '^Sn, Indra
ei^m; but slto the particle ii4 Ukt: thus, viz 9&; and a few other
cues, as vox ^ama, pnnar i^ayimasi, agn6r tive^a. Hoie snomalona,
and perhaps to be rejscled as false readings, are anch aa trl^ Imait and
ak^a^ &va and etihan; ^al^ (t^S.), and vyr^a? ''& (Ap»st).

195. a. The immediate combination of s n with a preceding guttniiJ
ot labial ssems in aome cases to hindei the conTereion to 9 : thua, vftraghiUt
etc., kqnbhnfttii tn»ioti (but in Veda tfp^n), k;epnu, bii^ui]ui&.

b. The ItV. haa the exceptions &;trinKm and rfiftrin&m.

Conversion of dentat mutes to Unguals and palatals.

196. When a dental mute comes in contact ^vith a
lingual or palatal mute or sibilant, the dental is usually
assimilated, becoming lingual or palatal respe'stively.

ioy Google

67 Bental Hutb9 to Lihguals and Palatals. [—190

The cases are the following'.

187. A dental anrd mute or oasal, or the dental sibilant, when
immediately preceded by a q, Is everywhere converted into the cor-
responding lingoal.

B, Undel thl> rale, the Minbiiittlont ff, ffll, and ^ tre very common;
^ iB ruely ao wiitteD, the viaarga being pnt instetd of the Ibimer sibilant
(173): thus, jy6tl^qa Initead of jyoti^fU.

b. Hack leu otUn, dh la changed to ^ after flnal | of a root or
lenie-atcm, with lo» of the ; or tta conveiaion to 4: eee SSflo.

C. Those OMei in nhich flnal ^ beconma \ before aa (e. g. dvifsii:
229 b) do not, o[ MintM, tall under thla lale.

19B. In the other (comparatively infrequent) cases where a dental
is preceded by a liogual in internal combination, the dental (except
of Bu loc. pt.) becomee lingual. Thus:

a. A n following immediately a q made luch b; the rale ^Ton at
189, abOTB — or, u it may be eipreBted, a donble aa well sb a itugle a.
— ia anbject to tbe lingnalization : thua, the paiUciplea ar^^A, kfup^a,
kfvli^a, chf99&, tf^nA; and, after preflxe* (185 a), alqa^na, pari'
viv?a, Ti9a9:7a, vifyaij^a. Btit TS. has idhi^fkaasa, and BT. y&Ju^
akann&Di*

b. Only a very few other instances ooenr: tfte and ilfta from yi4i
^a44^& (alao qa^dba and^^ha), and qa^^^ (fa^-J-nftm: anomalouG
gen. pi. of ^af : 488). A amall number of words follow the same rale in
eitern&l combination: see below, 190.

O. But tS^i (Vedic: yta^ + dM) ahowa loss of the Anal llngnal
after asalmilation of the dental, and compensatory lengthening.

d. Some of the casea of abnormal occnrienee of 4 "^ explained in a
ttmilai way, as resnlts of a llngnatlzed and afterward omitted sibilant before
d: thna al^A from nlada, ypi4- '">"' P^"^ V'"'^ 'rom mfsd. For
words eibibitiDg a like change In composition, see below, 198 o.

198. In external combiDation —

a. A flnal t is directed to be astimilsted to an Initial lingaal mate :
thus, ta(-tikft, ta4 4ayate, tat-thUioI, taf 41>&<i^'>to: bat the case
never occurs In the older language, and very rarely In the later. For final
n before a Ungaal, see 20Kb.

b. An initial dental after a final linguarusually remains oachanged;
and eu of the loc. pi. follows the same rote: thns, B&ttrlAQat, iua^
diT&h, ekar^t tviaa; Qafsu, rlltau.

o. Exceptiona are: a lew compounds with ^aq tix showing doable 9
(198 b): namely, ^iiQiiavatl, fanQ&bhl (and one or two others not
qnotable) ; and JB. baa (an ^iramlmita.

d. In a few compoanda, moreover, there appears a Hnguali^ed dental, with
compensatory lengthening, after a lost lingaal slbUant or Ita representative;

j,i,....,L-'OOJ^IC

199—] III. EOPHONIO COUBINATION. 68

namely, in certain Yedic con pound b v 1th diu: dI14ibha« dd^^Qi ductal,
du^&qa, dQ^ftfft (compue the anomalous piiro^i9 and -4£qa: part>S +
)/dftf) ; and, In (lie langaage of eTcry peiiod, cortaln componDds of f a^
with change of Its vowel to an alterant qnality (as in vo^am and nmjhiiiw
SS4b): f64'>9'>> ^o^liA (also (a44ba and fafdhd), ^oij&iit.

e. Between final t ■°^ Initial b, the iasenlon of a t ie permitted —
or, accordlug to some anthoiitlee, reqotiedi thns, ^&% aab&sr&l; or tt&^t
Bob&Brll^.

aoo. The oues of usimlUtion of a dental to a contignons p&latal
occur almOBt only in external combination, and before ftn initial palatal.
Tbeie ia bnt one case of intenutl combination, namely:

201 . A ^ n coming to follow a palatal mute in iDteinal
combinatioQ is itself made palatal.

Thos, yRofi£ (the ottly ioBtance after a], yajfii, jajfi^, ajiiata,

aoa. a, A ilnal rT t before an initial palatal mute it
assimilated to it, becoming ? c befoie %o or W cb, and ^j
befoie si j (^ jh does not occur).

Thus, no oarati, atao ohattaram, vldyuj jKyate; jBtwUlana.
vidyulJUiTa, bphAoohandaB, saooarito.

b. A final ^n is assimilated before sT j, becoming 3tii.

0> All the grimmailans, of every period, require this assimilation of
n to j ; but it Is more often neglected, or only occasionally made. In the
manuscripts.

d. For n before a snrd palatal, see below, SOS.

208. Befoie the palatal sibilant ^ 9, both fT t and R n
are assimilated, becoming respectiyely ? a and 3T fi; and
then the following n 9 may be, and in practice almost
always is, converted to W ch.

Thus, vedavlo ohOra:^ (-vlt qn-), tac ohxntvH, lircoliaya (brt4-
9aya); brbafi ohe^a^ or qe;ab, erapafi diete or qete.

a. Some anthorltiea regard the converaion of 9 to oh after t or n af
eTerywheis obligatory, otbcra aa only optional; some except, peremptorily
or optionally, a q followed by a mute. And some require the same oon*
verBlon after oTiry mate save m, reading also rfpEJ ohntudrlt ftnaf
oh^ol, anuffup chSradl, fuk ohucl. The manuscripts generally write
ch, instead of oob, as resDlt of the combination of t and f .

b. In the MS., t and 9 are anomalously combined into fi q: e. g.
t&b qst4m, etftTa&q&a.

ioy Google

eg COKBINATIOMS OF FINAL H. [—807

Combinations of final ^n.

S04. Final ndiMl n is assimilated in interofJ combination to a
following sibilant, becoming ajLuSTftra.

Thus, vAAbI, v&Aava, v&tuuX, ma&ty&to, jigh&Aaati.

ft. Aecotdlag to the gi&iDiiii,rlau9, It is tre&ted before bh aod au in
declenalon u in external oombin*tion. Bnt the cues are, at beat, eicea*-
iTely nre, and RV, bat rifiSQ and viAsa (the only VediB eumplea).

b. Final n of ■ deriiatiTe tJxtUi it tegulaily and usually dropped before
a conaonaDt In Infleotion and eompoaitlOD — in oontposltlon, eien before a
lowel ; and a radical n ooeaaionally followi the game rale : see 481 a, 439,
1808 o. 687.

O. For aaslmilatlon of n to a preceding palatal, see SOI.

Thus remaining cases are those of external combination.

806. a. l%e assimilation of n in external combination to a follow-
ing sonsnt palatal and the palatal albiianl 9 have been already treated
(scab, 808).

b. The n is also declared to be assimilated (becoming 9) before
a sonant lingual (^ ^li, 9), but the case rarelj if ever occttrs.

806. A n is also assimilated to a following initial 1, becoming
{like m: 313 d) a nasal L

a. The mannscTipta to a great extent disregard this mle, leaving the
n nncbanged; bnt also they la part attempt to follow it — and that, either
by writing the aatlmilated 11 (as the asBimlUtod m, 213f, and jnat as
leawnably) irith the (umBTSm-slgn , or elee hy doabling the 1 and potting
a aigo of natality above; the latter, howeTer, Is inexact, and a better way
vDDld be to separate the two I'e, writing the first vith virSma and a nasal
algo above. Thnt (^m trln lokftu):

mannaorlpls afj^+H or 3T1S1!?iR; better ift^ 3l+H.
The eecoiid of Iheae methode la the one oftenoat followed in printed texts.

807. Before the lingual and dental sibilants, ; and b, final n
remains nnobanged; bnt a t may also be inserted between the nasal
and the sibilant; thus, tan ;&( or tont ^\; mahin a4n or ma-
liint B&n.

a. Aocording to most of the gramniarianB of the Frati^Lhyaa (not BFr.),
the insertion of the t in sneh caees is a neceaeary one. In the mannscrlpts
it is very frequently made, bat not nnlformly. It Is probably a purely
phonetic phenomenon, a ttansition-aoand to ease the double change of sonant
to Burd and nasal to non-nasal ntterance — altbongh the not Infrequent
cases In which tinal n stands for original nt (as bharan, abharan,
agolmfin) may have aided to establish it aa a nile. Its analogy with the
eoBTeraion of n q into fioh (803] is palpable.

Digitizecy Google

208—} III. Euphonic Coiibinatiom. 70

208. Before the surd palatal, lingual, and dental mntea, there 1b
inserted after final a a eibilant of each of those classes respectively,
before which the n hecomes anaavira: tbas, dar&fiq oa, bhv&Af
oUdyftte, kiuu&r&As trin, abhara£a tata^, dadliaAQ (42Bo) oarum.

a. This rule, iihlch in the cluslcal Ungaage bis eGUbllshed Itself In
the form here given, ms ■ phonetic rule of unv&Tylng application, really
iniolrei a bietoric satvivel. Tbe latgs majority ot caaee of final n in the
langnags (not tai from three quarters) are for original ns; and the retention
of the sibilant in Eocb casei, when once Its historical gtoniid had been forgotten,
wag extended by analogy to all otbers.

b. Practically, tbe mle applies only to n before o and t, since cases
Involving the otber Initials occur either not at all, or only with extreme
rarity (the Vedft does not present an example of any of them). In tbe Veda,
the inseition is not always made, and the different texts bave with regard
to it different usages, which are fully explained in tboir Prati9aichyas; in
general, it Is less frequent tn the older texts. When the f does not appear
between n and a, the n is of coarse assimilsted, becoming fi (203).

208, Tbe same retention of original final s after a nssal, and
consequent treatment of [apparent] final ftn, in, ua, fa as if they were
Aha, IAb, Ofia, f&a [long nHgalized vowel with final a), ebowe itself
also in other Vedic forms of combination, which, for tbe sake of unity,
may be briefly stated here together;

a. Final Sii becomes Sii (nasalUed ft) before a following vowel : that
is to say, fiAe, with nasal vowel, is treated like fis, vltb pure vowel (177):
tbne, devad 6 'ha, upabaddhaA th&, mahtA nsi. This is an extremely
common case, especially in KV. Once or twice, the a appears as h heCore
p: thus, BT&tavtLnh p&yu^.

b. In like manner, 8 is Created aRer nasal i, u, ^ as it wonid be after
those vowels when pure, becoming T before a sonaut saand (174), and
(much more rarely) fy before a sard (170): thus, ra^miAr Iva, Bunl^Av
yuvaiiytliAr ut, ufftr abhi; ni&fy patraiu (and iifA§ p*, HS.).

o. RY. has once -lA before y. MS. usually has aA instead of fiA.

810. Tbe nasala n, 9, A, occnrring as finals after a short vowel,
iire doubled before any initial vowel; thus, pratyAAA Ad efi, ndy&an
{Ullty&^, AB&nii-lfu.

a. This is also to be regarded as a historical butvIvbI, the second
nasal being an assimilation of an original consonant following the flist. It
is always written in the manuscripts, although the Vedic metre seems to
show that the duplication was sometimes omitted. The RV. has the com-
pound vT^a^aqva.

211. Tbe nasals & and 9 before a sibilatit are allowed to in- ^
aert reepectively k and ( — as n [307) insBrts t: thus, prftty&Ak

itizecy Google

71 COUBINATIONS OF PlMAl, m. [ — 213

Combjnationa of final ^^m.
212. Final radical R m, in internal combination, is as-
similated to a following mute or spiiant — in the latter case,
becoming anuavKra; in the former, becoming the nasal of
the same class with the mute.

a, RetoTe m 01 V (as when final; 14Sa), It la chsoged to n: tbiu,
from )/gBm come ^anmB, sganmahi, ganv&hi, jagaiiT^fiB (which
appear to be the oDiy qnotsble cues). Aacording to tbe grimmirlaDE, the
suns cbaDge is made in the inflection of root-stems before bll and Bo: thus,
pTsqftnbhla, praQKuBU (from praq&ia: pTa+)^7am), No deriied noaii-
Btem ends in m.

b. The (B. and E(S. bafe k&mvant and gimvant,

218. Final ^T m in external combination is a servile sound,
bedng assimilated to any following consonant. Thus:

a. It remaios DDchanged only before a vowel or a labi&l mate.

b. Bnt also, by an anomaloos exoept[oD, befoie r of the root xij in
samrij and its deHTatlves aamrl^fU and a&mrUya

c. Before a mate of any other class than labial, it becomes the
nasal of that class.

d. Before the semivowela 7, 1, v it becomes, aocerdii^ to the
Hindu grammarians, a nasal semivowel, the nasal counterpart of each
respeclirelf (see 71),

e. Before r, a slbilaot, or h, It becomes uraevBTa (see 71).

f. The manascrlpts and tbe editions In general make no attempt to
distinguish the anal tones produced by the assimilation of m before a follov-
ing eemlvovel tiom that before a Bpiracl,

g. But if h be immediately followed by anothei consonant (which can
only be a naaat or semi-vowel), the m is allowed to be assimilated to that
following consonant, This Ie because tbe h has no position of the moath-
orgaiis pecullai to itself, but is uttered in the position of the ueit soand.
The Piatioakbyas do not take any notice of the case.

h. Cases are met with in the Teda whete a final m appears to be
dropped before a vowel, the flnal and initial vowels being then combined
Into one. Tbe pada-teit then generally gives a wrong interpretation. Thus,
saiiiT&iiaiu) tiliayaiiikar&ia (RV. tIU. 1. 3; pada-teit: •□ana ubh-i
ST. -nanam).
■ 1. It has been pointed oat above (78) that the assimilated m is
generall; represented in texts by the anusvJbra-siKD, and that in this
work it is transliterated by di (instead of a nasal mute or A).

L.,j,i,....,CiOOgle

III. EUFEOHIC COIIBIMA.TIOH.

The palatal mutes and aibilant, and ^ b.

814. These oounds show in some rittDttiona & reverBlon [4S]
to the original guttunla from which they are derived. The treat'
ment of J and li, also, is different, according as they repreeeot the
one or the other of two different degrees of alteration from their
originals.

ai6. The palatals and h are the least stable of alphabetic soonds,
undergoing, In rirtne of their derivative character, alteration in many
oases where other similar sounds are retained.

916. Thus, in derivation, even before vowels, semivowels, and
nasals, reversion to gattural form Is by no means rare. The cases
are the following:

a. Before a of snfax a, final O becomea k in anlci, Qvafiko, arki,
piki, vSki, fuko. parka, mark&, vfkA, pr&Uka etc., reka, sika,
moka, rok&, 96ka, tokA, mroki, vraakA ; — final j benamai g in
tjts&, bhige. bhAg&, yfiga, afiga, bhaagA, saOga, svafiga, pngA.
tufiga, yoaga, varga, m&TKa, mjsk, varga, aarga, nega, vegA. bhdga,
yug^ y&sa, loga, r6ga; — flml h becomeB gb in agtiA, maghi, arghii,
dlrgli& (and draghiyas, drfghiftha], degha, megh4, ogha, d6gha,
dr6ghn, m6gha; and In dughSua and m^hamftna. In neka (ynij)
we bare lurther an auomtlom aubatitntlDu of a anrtl for the final couaot of
the root

b. In anothei aertei of derl*atlTes with a, tbe altered lonnd appean:
eiunplea aie i^&, yj^a. ijvuA, qoea, vfaJA, vevlji, ynjat firj^ d6ba.

O, Before the snfflieB aa and ana, the guttaral only rarely appears:
namely, in iL&kas, 6kna, r6kaa, f Akaa, bh&rgaB, and In roga^; also
in Sbbog&ra.

d. Before an i-vowel, tbe altered aonnd appears (except In ftbhog{,
Asjyafle, tiglt&, moki, eplilgt): thus, 4j{, tnj£, niol, q&oi, vfvloi,

e. Before o, the guttnral reappeaii, as a rale (the oasea are few) : thos,
ftiika, vafUro, rekii, bhfgn, ntiETgnka, raghu (and r&ghlyaAB).

f. Before n, tbe eiimplei of lererBion are few, except of J (becoming
g) hefore the participial ending na (9S7o): thua, r^k^aa, vagnu (with
tbe final also made sonant); and participles bhagn&, rug^, etc.; and
apparently pfgl^ft from VpfO.

g. Before m (of ma, man, mant, xnln), tbe guttural generally
appears: thus, rukm&, tigmi, yngma, fgma (with sonant change); tak-
miu, v&kman, B&kman, yngm&n; rukmant; rgmin and vSgmfn
(with sonant change): — bat AJman, ojmitn, bhujm&n.

h. Before y, tbe altered sound Is used: tbns, paoyo, y^jya, yivjyn,
ynjya, bhnjyu. Sncb cases as bhogya, yogyn, negya, okya are doubt-
leii lecondaiy deriiativeB from bhoga etc.

ioy Google

73 Combinations of final Palatals. [—SIS

1, BetoTB r, tfae cisei us few, >iid the naege ippiientl; dMded: tfaua,
Utkr*, aakrs. vakri, ^vkrk, vlgr&, ugr&, tCigra, mfgra, v&fikii;
1}at v^ra end p«]ri(!>

J, Before v (of tbe iafSi«8 va, van, vln, etc., end piitlclpitl vfiAa)
the gunoril 1* Tegalirly preiened : thus, fkrii pakrA, v&krfti v&kvau,
fkran, rUcvan, 9akvaii, mrgvan, tdgvan, Tugran; ^kranC, pfk-
vanti Tfisv{ii, vagToni, vasracu (vltli furtbeT lODaDt cb&age); vivok-
viAs, ririkT^B, virlkvaAB, mrakv^As, ququkviAs; QUQUkvanA,
t^aqakr&al: alio bef))ie the anion-TOwel i In ofcivJiAB (RV., once). An
eiceptloo is yijvan.

k. The leTenloD of b in deriretlon ia eomptntlTely taie. The floal
J which Is tnUogoiu with f (S19| ahows much lesi ptocllTlty to reTenion
then that which coneapoade iiith O.

1. A like reieraiou ihows ilmlf also to eome extent In conjugttional
stam-fOimatloii and loBectlon. Thoa, (he initial ladiul becomea guttata I
after the Tsdapllcatlon In the present ot perfect ot desideratlie oi IntenaiTe
sterna, ot In dertiitKea, at the toots oi, oit, jl, bl, ban, and InJ&gari (ySf);
and ban becomea ghn on the ellaion at a (402, 637). The BT. haa
vlvakmi ^m yv*o and vfivakre from yve&o ; and ST. has saapgrnabe
(BV, <■!]-). And betare ran etc. of 3d pi. mid. we ba-ve g for radical J
to BBncran, aargram, aaaargram (>U in RV.).

217. Final ? o of a root or stem, if followed in internal
oombiaation by any other sound tbtm a vowel oi semivowel
01 nasal, teverts (4Sj to ite original guttural value, and shows
eveiywhere the same form which a ^ k would show in the
same situation.

TboB, T&kti, nviktha, v&k^l, vak^&nl, vagdbl; vOgbMs,
vSk^A; akt4, tiktbi, vakt&r.

a. And, as final o becomes k (above 148), the same rule applies
also to o in external combination: thiu, vltk oa, v^&pi, vte me.

Examples of c remitining unchanged in inflection are; noy&te,
rirlord, v&d, mumuom&be.

218. Final Q f) leveits to its original ?i k, in internal
oombination, only before the H a of a verbal stem or ending
(whence, by 180, ^ k?) ; before rT t and El tb, it eveiywhere
becomes zs 9 (whence, by 197, ? 9t and '? Qtb) ; before y dh,
H bb, and H bu of the loc. pi., as when final (146), it
r^ularly becomes the lingual mute (TT t or T 1^}.

ThDS, ivikfata, vek^y^mi; vk^ti, vl^\&, dlde^tu; dldl^^bi,
▼i^bbis.

ioy Google

918 — ] 111. Euphonic Combination. 74

tt. But & few roots exhibit tbe reverBioD of final 9 to k before
bb and so, and tiao vbeo final (14S}: tbey &re dii;, d|^, appf, and
optionallj nnqi and TI9 has in V. always vik^u, loc. pi., but vi\,
vi^bbJa, etc. Eiaioplea are dlkaaihQtta, disbbia, hrdiaptk, n4k
(or na().

Eiamples of 7 remaining anchanged before vowels etc. are: vi9l,
vivifTfta, avlQran, a^DOml, vnfmi, ngm&sL

b. A q remains irreguUily unchanged before p In tbe compoand vif p4U.

219. Final ^ j is in one set of words treated like ? c,
and in another set like ^ 9.

TbuB, from ynj: iyukthlla, Ayukta, yunkti, yukti, yoktra,
yokqyjml, yuk^u; yiifigrtht, AyugdhTam, yugbhia.

Again, from mpj etc. ; 4mfk^t, arakfynmi ; mir^, mfffA,
sffti. r&9tr&; mr^^hf, mr4<MiT&m, rS^bbia, r^sii. ri^.

a. To the former oi yi^-cUu belong (u thown by Cbeii quotable
rorma) about twenty roots and radical itema: namely, bll«j, aaj, ^1^ (not
v.), rsj color, Bvaj, majj, nij, tij, vij, 1 and 2 bbaj, yi^, mj, vjj,
anj. bbaBj, qlfij; t^Ji arij, bhi;^, &arJ; — also, stems formed with
tbe auttlies aj and U (383. l\), as tj^^iij, va^U; and |i;vij, though
eontaialug the toot yi^.

b. To the latter or mFJ-clsEs belong only about one thiid as many:
namely, y(^, btan^], VTtii, rftj, bhriU, mfj, a^.

o. A considerable number of J-toota ate not placed in circnmatances
to exhibit tbe dlitlnction; but such roots are in part stsigaable to one or
the other clas* on the evidence of the related languages. The disUnetioii
appears, namely, only when the J occnra as flnal, or it followed, either in
InDection or in derivation, by a dental mute (t, tli, dh), or, in noun-
InflerliuD, by bh or su. In derivation [aboTs, 216) we Sad a g some-
times from the idfJ-cUbs: thus, m&rga, a&rga, etc.; and (316,1) before
Vedic mid. endlngi, saapginabe, asrgnui, etc. (betide BasTJrlre) —
while ^m the yuj-cIasG ocnut only yuyujre, ayujran, bubbujrire,
with J. Aud MS. has vlQvaafk from ysfj.

220. Final oh fitlla under tbe rules of combination almost only
in tbe root praoh, in which it is treated as If it were { [pra{ bein^,
indeed, its more original form): thus, prak^yami, pnt'^ ^i^^ >i1bo the
derivative praqn4. As final and in noun -inflection (before bh and au),
it is changed to the lingnal mnte: thus, pr&^vlvftka.

a. llurt& Is called the participle of mfiroli, and a gerund miirtvi
Is given to the same root. They (with mltrtl) mntt doubtless come from a
simpler form of the root

ioy Google

75 Combinations of final kf, h. ( — SSS

SSI. The compouod k; Ib not inft'equent as final of & root (gener-
ally of demon Btrably seooiKlary origin), or of a tense-stem (ikaorisC:
see below, 878 ff.]; and, in the not reiy frequent cases of its internal
combination, it is treated as if a single sound, following the rules
for 9: thus c&kqe (oakf+se), e&k^Tft; o4|te, &aa^\n, &8rftf(tuD,
iiei^tft, tv&ftar. As to Us treatment when final, see 146,

a. Tbna, we are t&nght by the grammarians to make bucIi forcaB as
gor&t, gor&^bbis, goriffu (from gor&kq); and we actually have ^i.\,
^a^bhfs, fafsu from ;akf 01 qaif (146 b). For jagdha etc. from (/jak;,
Bee 333 f.

b. In the altigld anomalous root vraijo, the compouDd qo i% said to
loUaw tbe ralee for simple <}. From It aie quotable the future Trakfy&tl,
the genindB vntv£ (AV.) and vyktvi (RV), and the paiticiple (957 o)
T^kni. Its o reTcrte to k iti the derivitiTe vraska.

222. The Toot« in final ^ h, like those in fT j, fall into
two classes, exhibiting a similar diversity of treatment, ap-
pearing in the same kinds of combination.

a. In the one class, as dnb, we have a reversion of h [as of cj
to a guttural form, and its treatment as if it were still its original gb:
thus, &dhuk;am, dbok^yami; dugdhwrn, dugdb&; &dtiok, dhiik,
dbugbbie, dbuksu*

b. In the other class, as rub and aah, we have a guttural re-
version (as of 9I only before b )n verb-formation and derivation: thus,
aruk^at, rokfjlbni, Bftkfiyi, sakfinl. As final, in external combi-
nation, and in nouD-infiection before bh and bo, the b Hike f) becomes
a lingual mute; thus, tn^^afi pptanSfi^ ayodhy&b, turSs^bble,
turfifatBu. But before a dental mute (t, th, db] in verb-inflection
and in derivation, its euphonic effect is peculiarly complicated:
it turns the dental into a lingual (as would 9); but it also makes
it sonant and aspirate (as would 411: see 160): and further, it
disappears itself, and the preceding vowel, if short, is lengthened:
thns, from rota with ta comes rQ4bil^ from leb with ti comes leijtai,
from guh with tar comes guijUi&r, from meh with turn comes m^tptum,
from lib with taB or tbaa comes liijb&B, from lib with dbvam comes
U^T&m, etc.

o. This ie ag if we had to asanme as tianaitlon sound a Eonant aspliite
lingual sibilant sb, with the euphonic effecta of ■ linguU and of a sonant
wpirtte (100), llselt diiappeaiieg nndet the law of tbe existing laagaage
Thich admits do eoiisnt Blbilanl.

SS8. The lootB of the two classeB, as shown by their forms found
in use, are:

a. of the first or dnb-class: dab, dib, dub, drub, mub, solb
(aod the final of u^^Ib is similarly treated) ;

Digitizecy Google

SSS— ] in. Euphonic Combination. 76

b. of the second or nOi-clMB: vah, sab, mlh, rlta or Ith. gnh,
rah, 6fbiL, tfhh, brh, baAh, Bprti(?].

0. Bat mull forms alao (not <n KT.) the participle m&^llA 4nd i^ent-
noan TaJi^hia, m veil u mngdli&i and mogdfa&r; and dmli sod snih
»ra allovftd by (he giunmulaiis to do likewise: sach fotmi ts drfljjli* ■"^
■nl^lw, bowevec, h&Te not been met with In use.

d. Fiom roots of the ruh-tlus we find eleo In the Teda the forms
gart&ruk, nom. sing., end prSl^adb^k and dftdhtk; and hence pomspfk
(the onl7 oecntrence) doei not oaitalnlf prove yvpjh to be of the dab-

e. A nambei of otbeT h-root> ara not proved by their occDrrlag fomu
to belong to either olats; they, too, are with moie or ten conSdenoe aaiigned
to the one oi the other by oomparlson with the related languages.

f. lu derivation, before certain snilliei (S18), «e have gh Instead of
li ftom Terbs of either clasa.

g. The root niA comes from originil dh Initsad of gh, and Itt reversion
is iccDTdlngly to a dental mute: thna, natvluul, naddlUi, upSn&dbllla,
npSn&dyuga, anap&natkft. So alio the root grfth comes tnia (early
Tedic] grabh, aud sbovs labials in many forms and derivatlTes (though
h is aislmllited to other h-roots in the desidetatlve item Jighfk^). In
like manner, tl Is need fsr dll In some or the forms and derlvativaa of
y'dhS put; and further anilogont facta are the stem kakuh& beside
kKkabb^, the donble imperative ending dbi and bl, and the dative
m&byiun beside t&bbyun (4dl).

SS4. Inegnlaritles of combination are:

(t. The vowel f le not lengthened arter the loss of the b-element'. thus,
df^b^ tf^h&, b^^h& (tba only oasej; and in the Veda Iheii Qrst syllable
has metrical valne as heavy or long).

b. The roots vftb and sob change their vowel to o Instead of leng-
thening it: thus, TO^b&m, ToijbKin, To^bif, sd^bnm. Bot from sab
In the older Imgaage forms vlth S are mors frequent; thus, sA^it, itqS^bit
(also later), Ba^bMT. The root tfiih changes (he vowel of Its elaas-sign
nft into « instead of lengthening It: thai, t^p^e^bl, tfl^A^bU, Ktp^et
(the grammarians teach also tf^ehmi and tpqokfi: bnt no such forms are
quotable, and, IF ever actuslly in use, they mtut have been made by false
analogy with the others).

0. These anomsloas vowel-changes seem to stand in connection with
the fact that the eases showing them are the only onei vheie other than
•n alterant vowel (180) comet before the lingnslUed sibilant representative
of the fa. Compare fb^B^tt etc.

d. Apparendy by dissimilation, the final of TItb in the anomalous
oomponnd ana^vftb is changed to d Initead of ^: see 404.

itizecy Google

Combinations op finai. f.

The lingual sibilant ^ 9.

996. Since the liDgual aibilant, in its nsnal and normal occurren-
eea, ia (189) the product of liDgnalization of s alter certain alterant
■ooDds, ve might expect final radical f, when [In rare caaea] it comes
to Btand where a f cannot maintain itself, to revert to its original,
and be treated u a a would be treated under the same circumstances.
That, however, is true only in a very few Instances.

a. Namely, in the piefli dna (eTldtntly Identiul wltli ydo^); in
aaiia (adTeiblill; need oia-form from VJof)! in (RV.) vtvAs uid Avlvea,
from V'viq; in iiyea (RT,), fiom )/1f; and in K^fa, fiom gl^ m lecoud-
u7 form of v'ffia. All thes«, except the flnt two, sre more oi leis open
(o qoeition.

326. In general, final Hngual ^ fi, in intemal combination,
is treated in the same manner as palatal 1^9. Thus:

a. Before t and th it remains unchanged, and the latter are as-
slmllated: e. g. dvlffaa, dvi^fbu, dv^tnm.

Thli Is a common ind peifeetly n&taril combiiiatlon.

b. Before dh, bli, and m, as also in external combination (146),
it becomes a lingual mnte; and dta is made lingual (by 1S8) after it:
e. g. pl^^ijhl. Tlf^hi. TiTl^^hl, dvi^^hvam, dTi^bhia. dvitsai
bhlnnavltka.

o. So also the dh of dhvam u ending of 2d pi. mid. becomes ^
after Anil ^ ef ■ tenn-item, vhstker the | be regarded ts lott or u con-
Tsrled to 4 hefoie It (the muiasetlpta write simply ^V, not 4^t; but
this la ambigDODs; see 933). Thus, aftsr ; of O-aorlst stems (681 a), asto-
flivam. ftV(41iTan3, oyo^hvam (tha only qnotible cues), from oato^-h
dbvam et«.; bat arBdhvun f^om aria+dhTam. Fortber, after the ;
of i^-urist Items (801 a), Undhi^TKm, nrtiftaTam, ^anl^vam,
trepl^Tam (the only quotable oases), from ajani^ + dhvam etc. Tet
again, in the precatiTe (894), m bllavi^IijItTam, if, as Is probable
(unfortunately, no example of this person is quotable from any part of the
Uteratuie), the precatlre'Sign ■ (;) is to be regarded as present In tha fonn.'
Aecordlng, howoTer, to the Hindu grammarians, the use of 4b or of dh la
the ig-aot1st and precatlTe depends on whether the 1 of iQ or of I^i Is ot
is not "preceded by a semlTowel or h" — which both in itself appears
•enselew and is opposed to the evidence of all the quotable forms. MoreoTCi,
the same anthoiitles pretcriba the change of db to ^h, under the same
reMiictlon as to dreumstanoet, In the psrf. mid. ending dhve alto: In this
ease, too, without any coueeivabie reaeon; and no example of ^ve In tha
2d pi. pert, has been pointed out in the literature.

d. The canTorslon of q to ^ (or ^] as final and berote bh snd Bti is
patallel with the like couvarslon of f , and of j and fa in the mf J and rah

ioy Google

326—] 111. Euphonic Cokbination. 78

cluass of loota, and perhaps with the occi^ioual change of b to t (1674).
II ii ■ VBi; Inh'eqnent cue, occarrlng (lire as it may be aisnnied in th«
case of fBf) only onc« in RV. and once In AV. {-dvi% and -pruf], alilioasb
those texts hav« moie than 40 roots with flual |; in tlie Biahmanaa,
moteoTer, have been noticed farther ooly -pruf and ■ytf (QB.), and -flit
(K.). From piil^, RV. bu the anomalona font) pii^ak (2d and 3d alng.,
[or pina^'B and pliia§>t).

e. Before b id ioternal combiDfttion [except bu of loc. pi.) it be-
cornea ki thus, dvdkfi, dTefc;yamf, AdTikfam.

f. This change is of anomalous phonetic cbaiaclar, and dlfflcnlt of
eiplanation. It ig also practically of very race occorieoce. The only RV.
examples (apart from ptQak, above) are Tivekfi, from yvl^, and the
desld. stem rirLk^ from yrif; AV. has only dvik^at and dvlk^ta,
and the desld. 8t«m qiqlikfR from y'flif. Other eiamplea are quotahle
^m yy^n and pl^ and vlf (QB. etc.), and qif (^B.); and tbey are by
the Hindu grammarian* preacrlhed to be formed from abont half-a-dozen

Extension and Abbreviation.

827. Ab a general rule, ch ia not allowed by tbe grammariana
to stand in that form after a vowel, but la to be donbled, beooming
cch (which the manuscripts sometimes write obcbl.

a. The various authorities disagree wUh one another in detail as to
this dnpllcalloD. According to Paniui, ch Is doubled vithin a word after
either a long or a ehott vowel; and, as initial, necesairlly after a abort and
after the particles i and rai, and optionally ereryvhere after a long. In
RV., Initial oh Is donbled after a long vowel of i only, and certain special
cases after a short vowel are eicepted. For the required ossge in tbe other
Vedic teits, see theli several Pritl9Bkhya«. The Katbaka vritaa for original
oh (not ch from cambiuatioii of t oi n with q: SOS) after a vowel
everywhere ijdh. The manuscrlpta in general write simple oh.

b. Opinions are atill at variance as to how far this dopUcation has
an etymological ground, and how far it is only an acknowledgment of the
fact that oh makes a heavy syllable even after a short vowel (makes
"position": 78). As tbe duplication ia accepted and followed by most
European scholars, it will be also adopted in this work in words and sen-
tences (not in roots and stems).

aS8. After r, any conBonaDt (save a spiraot before a vowel) is
bj tbe grammariaoB either allowed or reqaircd to be doubled (an
aspirate, hy prefixing the corresponding non-aspirate: I54j.
Thus;
5R; arka, or 51^ arkka; ^THJ kiirya, or cfiJUl karyya;
mt &rUia, or qf^ arttha; ^ dirgba, or ^tr^ dirggha.

Digil.zecy Google

79 Extension and Abbreviation. [—381

(u Soma af the aathoiltlet include, ilosg with r, also h oc 1 ai v, or
mate tbin one of them, Id thl« mle.

b. A doabled conaDiiant ifEer r Is very common in msnuicripta and
intciipttona, u alao Id native lexl-edltlona and in the earllei editions pre-
pared bf Eniopean icbolara — in later onei, the duplication it DUiTenally
emitted.

o. On the other h*nd, the roBnaictlpts often write » ilnglo conionant
aftei r where a donble one Is etymolagically required: thus, kBftlkeya,
TSrtikft) for kftrttibeyo, vKrttibft.

229. The flrgt conaonaiit of a gronp ~ whether interior, or Initial
after a vowel o( ■ preceding word — la by the frammuiing either allowed
or leqnired to be doubled,

a, Thia duplication U allowed by Panlnl and required hy the Piatl;ikhyas
— In both, with mentlOD ot authorltlea who deny It altogether. For certain
exceptions, aee the Prattt^khyaa ; the meantug of the whole matter Is too
obaeore to Justify the giving of details here,

230. Other cues of exteoBion of coDBOnftot-groapa, required by
some of the grammatical autborities, are the following:

B. Between a non-nasal and a nasal mule, the insertion of ao-called
yamas (twitu), or nMal coanterpaTta, la tanght by the Prall^khysi (and
aasomed in Panini's commentary): see APr. 1, 99, note.

b. Between h and a (ollowlDg nsaal mute the Priticakbyas teach the
liiiertlan of a nasal lonnd called tiSdikya: see APr, I. 100, note.

o. Between r and a following consonant the PrBti9aUiya8 teach the
Insertion of a svorabliakti or voicel-fragment: see APr. 1. 101-2, note.

d. Some authorities assume this lusertion only before a spirant; the
others regard it as twice as long before a spirant as before any other con-
sonant— namely, a half or a quarter mora before the former, a quarter or
an eighth before the latter. One [VPr.) admits it after 1 as well u r. It
is Tarlonsly described as a fragment of the vowel a or of f (or }).

e. The RPr. pats a STajabhakti also between a sonant conaonant
and a following mute or spirant; and APr. iutrodnces an eletaent called
BpllotAlut (distinguuher} between a guttural and a preceding mute of
mother class.

f. For ooe or two other cases of yet more doubtful value, see the
Prati;akhyas.

asi. After a nnul, the fonner of two uon-DaBal mutes may
be dropped, whether homogeueoua only with the naaal, or with both:
thus, yufidhi for yoQgdhf, yuBdhTAm fur smfigdliv&m, Kfitim for
AfLktAm, pafltl for petilkti, ohinttun for obinttam, bbintbi for
bhinttbii, indhd for inddbe.

a. The abbreviation, allowed by Paninl, is required by APr. (the
other Pratifiikhyas take no notice of It). It Is the mote usual practice of
the manuscripts, though the full group Is also often written.

i, Google

asa— ] III. EnpHOMio Combination. 80

233. In geoersl, a double coDeoDant tincluding an aspirate wbieh
is doubled by the prefixion of a non-aspirate) in combiDation with anj
other conaonaDt is by the manuscripts written as simple.

a. Thtkt U to B&y, the ordlnmiy oaage of the mmaectlpts toiikM no
dlffetenca between those groups In which a phonetic daplication Is allowed
by the Tulea given sbove (228, 228) end those in which the duplication
Is etfmologlcal. As erery tv aftei a vowel miy also be properly written
ttv, so dAttvi and tattv& may be, aud almost invarUbly are, written aa
datvi and tatT4. As k&rtana is also properly k&rttana, so ^rttika
(fiom kftti) is written as kSTtlkA. So in inflection, we hsTS always, for
example, maJSli etc., not majjfi.^ from majj&n. Even in composition
and aantencc-colloeatlan the same abbiiTlatloDs are made; thus, liT<^ot&
for h^dyot&; olilniity asya for ottlnAtt? aeijra. Hence It la Impossible
to detemilne by the eTldeuce of written nsage whether we shonld regard
ftdbvun or iddhvam (from yia), &dvl^Tam or Advi^^Tam (&om
/dvlq), as the ttne fonn of > second person plnral.

238. a. Instances are sometimes met with of apparent loss (perhaps
after con'erslon to s semiTawel) of i or u before y or v lespectlTely. Thus,
in the BAbmanss, tu and nn with following Tfi{ etc. often make tr&E,
nvK£ [alio tTBvA, &n.v&{)i and other eiamples from the older langnage
are anvart- (onu+ywart); paryan, paryantl, paryfty&t, paryS^a
(pari+yan, etc.); aUiyarti(abhi+lyarti); antaryM(antar+lTSt)i
oftrvfio, oSrvftka, ofirvadana (o&ru+vKo, etc.); kyluit for kiyant;
dvyoga (dvi-f-yoga}; anvft, anvSsana (ana+vS, etc.); probably
vyiinotl for vi ytuotl (RV.), iitv4qI (nra-vaqi), ^qrari for ^f^-wart
(RT.); ■vjSja& (yi+y&niai); and the late Bvan^a for aavar^a. More
anomalous abbreviations are the common tpoa (tri+TOa); and dTTOa
(dvi+poa: S.), and treql [tri + ei>i: Apast).

Further, certain oases of the loss of a sibilant require notice. Thns:

b. According to the Hindu grammarians, the a of B-iorlst items Is.
lost after a aliDTt tdwbI in the 2d and 3d aing. middle; thus, adithSa
and adlta (lat sing, adlfl); ak^thSs and ah^ta (let sing, akffi). It
Is, howBTer, probable that such cases are to be explained in a different
manner : sea 834 a.

o. The 8 between two mntes is lost in alt combinatious of the
. roots ath& and stambh with the prefix ad: thns, dt thns, atthit^
ut tliKpaya, dttabdba, etc

d. The same omission is now and then made In other similar cases:
thus oit kambhanena (for sk&mbb-: RT.); taam&t tute (for stute)
■ud puromk tuta (for atata: £.]; the compounds fktb& (fk+atlLft:
PB.) and atphullflga; the derivative otpfaUa (Vaphal). On the other
hand, we have vldydt stanAyantt (BT.), utsthala, kakntatha, etc.

a. So also the tvise-slgn of the s-aoiist Is lost after a final consonant
of a root before the Initial conionsnt of an ending: thns, aobAntta (and

ioy Google

81 Abbreviation of CoNSONANT-GRonPS. [—386

tor this, by S31, och&Dta) for aoh&ntBta, fftpta for Q&pata, tftptam
for t&pstam, abhfiktft for &bhfikHta, (un&ubtam fot amftuketam.
Ihese are llie only quotable casta: compile S83.

f, A. final s of toot or tBUM-rtem It Is a few Initaucea lost aftor a
wuant upiiato, and tbe comblnatian of mates 1e tben made at If no ilbilaut
lk>d BTOi Inteiveoed. Thai, tiom tbe root ghas, irith omiesioii of the
TOTol and then of the final albtlant, we have the CoTta gdba (foe gbs-ta:
3d ling, mid.), the ptrtleiple gdha (lu agdhad), sad the derlTitlTe gdhi
(for gha-tl; in (»&<gdhi); and fulthei, fiom the ledupllrated form of the
Mme root, ot v'Jakf, we have Jogdho, Jagdhom, Jagdlivfi, Jegdhl (liom
jaghS'ta etc.); also, In like manner, from bapB, leduplleation of bhaa, the
fotm babdhSm (foi babbB-tfim). Accotdini to the Hiadn grammaiisnB,
the «ame uttei loss of the aoilst-slgn a tskes place aftet a final sonant
upinte of a loot before an ending beginning with t oi th: tbns, from
I^Qdh, B-aoclst stem arftuta act. and arata mid., oome the active dual
and plaral penons ar&nddliain and arSuddhftm and ai&addha, and the
middle slngnlai persons aruddhfia and araddha. None of the active
form?, however, have been found quotable from the llteratare, ancient ot
modem; and the middle focmi admit also of ■ different eiplanatlon: see
S84, S83.

Sirengthening and Weakening Processes.

9S4, Under this bead, we take np first the changes that affect
vowels, and tben those tbttt affect coDSonaDtB— adding for conyenienoe'a
Bake, in each case, a biief notice of tbe vowel and consonant elements
that bave come to bear tbe apparent office of ooonectives.

Qu^a and Vrddhi.

236. The so-called gu;^ and v^ddlii-ohaDges aie^the most
i^ulai and frequent of vowel-chaoges, being of constant
ooounence both in inflection and in derivation.

a. A gu^a-vowel {gaj^a secondary quality] di£fer^ ftom
the cotiesponding simple vowel by a prefixed a-element
which is combined with the other according to the usual
niles; a vrddhi-vowel (vrddhi growth, increment), by the
further prefixion of a to the guva-vowel. Thus, of ^ I or
^ I the oonesponding guijia is (a+i^ ^ e; the correspond-
ing vrddhi is (a-|-e'=)^ 31. But in all gunating processes
9 a remains unchanged — or, as it is sometimes expressed.

j,i,....,LiOOglc

S3&— ] in. Euphonic Coubinatiok. 82

?'» is ita own gu^; ^ B, of courae, temains unchanged
foi both gu^a and vrddhi.

286. The Beiieg of coitespondiug degrees is then as

follows:

simple vowel a& il uQ r )
giina aft e o ar al

Ti^dhi a ai Su &r

a. Thera is nowheie an; ocimnfiiice of f in a litaktloQ to osdeigo
either gu^a ot Trddhl-chinge; cor doei \ (26) aver inffsr chuige to
vrddhi. Theontlcally, f iranld hive the same chKUga u f, and the
vTddbl of } wonld be ftl.

b. In Beoondu; derivatlvM leqnltEng T^dhl of tho tint vTlIable
(1804), the o of go (861 o) U itreDgdianed to glu: than, gKomata,
gaoftblka.

287. The hlitoriul relatioDB of the memben of «ach Tovel-««ries are
»t1II malteri of loma dilteieace of opinion. From the »peeial point of view
of the SaDtkrlt, the simple voweli wear the aipect of being In general the
original or fundamental onea, and the olhen of being prodaet* of Oieir
InciemeDt or strengthoDlng, In two aeTBral degreee — so that the ralee of
fonnatlon direct a, 1, u, f, { to be raleed to gu^a or vTddhl reipectlTely,
ondet ipeelfled cendidonB, But j has long been so clearly seen to come
by abbreviation or weakening from an euUer ar (oi ra) that many Euopean
gnmmuluu hare preferred to treat the gin^a-fonne ae the original and
the other a* the dertfatlTe. Thai, for example: inttead of (MnmtDg certain
loola to be bbr and TTdh, and making from them bbaratl and vardhati,
and bhrta and v^ddlia, by the (une rules vblch from bhd and nl and
from badb and (dt form bbavati and nayati, bodbatl and oetati,
bbuta and nlta, buddha and oitta — they assume bbar and vardh to
be the roots, and give the ralej of formation for tbem in reverse. In this
work, as already stated (104 b), the f-fonn is preferred.

S36. The gn^a-increiiieDt is an lodo-European phenomenon, and
is In many caaea seen to occnr in connection with an accent on the
incresBed syllable. It Is found —

a. In root-eyllBblea : either in inflection, as dv^qti from ydvi^,
d61unl from yduh; or in derivation, as dv^^a, d^bas, dvifttun*
d^Kdhum.

b. In formative elemente: either conjugational clasa-signs, as
tan^mi from tanu ; or soffises of derivation. In inflection or In further
derivatloD, as matAye from matt, bhaniivaB from bhanu, pit&ram
from pitf (or plt&r), hantavyk from h&nta.

238. The v^ddhi-increment is BpeclGcally Indian, and its occur-
rence is lasB freqoeut and regular. It ia foiinil —

il.zecy Google

38 <3infA AND Trddhi. [—MS

a. Id root and snffix-iylUbtes, inetead of paf^: thna, titft6tl
from yata, sUhSyam from s&ktal, AnBlfam troxa ynl, AkOrfam
and Ur&Tati and ksrjk from ykf (or kftr), datlbam from dst^ (or
iSikt).

b. EspMlaUf oft«D, In initial Sfllablee in Becondarj derivation:
iknt, minaaA fW>m minas, vUdTntA from Tid;4t, bh&am& from
bhtHinl, pirthiva tiom pfthivi (1204).

But —

340. Tbe Ku^a-Increment doea not nanallf take place in a heavj
syllable ending with a conaonanti that ia tossy, the ml ea prescribing
giiQa in proceBses of derivation and inflection do not apply to a abort
vowel which Is "long by poaition", nor to a long vowel Dnless it be
finitl: thna, oAtatl from >'oit, but nlndati from ynind; oAyatl from
ynl, bnt jivatl from v'Jiv.

«. The Trddtai-lnoiemaDt Is not liable to thl« leitriction.

b. Ezeeptlona to tbe rule are occujoaallf met iritb: tbna, ellA, ebU
from yfb; be^&yKmi, b6i}(>fl> '*^< ^o™ I'bl^; oofa ete. from yof^;
ihate etc. tnim y'fih ermnder; uid espeelUly, ftom roots In Iv: dld^n
derl^yatl, divana, et<^., from ydlT; tlfftheva from y^fblv; Brer&ySml,
Brdvuka, bom yariv — on lecouDt of vblch It ia, doubtleu, that thsM
loota ure written with It (div etc.) by the Elndu giammuiani, tlthoagh
they nowhere «bov a short 1, in either verb-fonna or derivattvei.

o. A Aw ctMs oeam of prolongation Inatead of incrtment: thai
dfif^rati from ydnf. gdbatl from y%ah.

The ehangea of x (more original ar or nt) are so vsrions aa to
call for farther deacription.

S41. The inorementa of x arc Bometimea ra and rH, instead of
ar and Kr: namely, especially, where by ancb reversal a difficult com-
bination of coDSonants is avoided: thus, from Vd^f, draktrr^mi and
Adrftk^BLin; but aleo p]lb& and pratli, P|«li and pracb, Iqpa and
Utrap^t*-

942> Id a number of roots (about a dozen qaotable ones) ending
in X (for more originsl arl, the x ehangea both with or, and more
irregnlarly, in a part of the forms, with ir — or also with nr (espe-
cially after a labial, in p^, mx, vx, sporadically in others]: which ii
and ur, again, are liable to prolongation into Ir and Dr. Thus, for
example, &om tr (or tar], wo have tarati, tltarti, tatftra, atfiri^am,
by regnlar proceaBea; but alao tlrati, tlryati, tlrtvft, -tlrya, OnfM.,
and even (V.) tmySma, tntury&t. tartorft^a. The treatment of anch
roota haa to be described in speaking of each formation.

a. For the pnrpoBe of aitlflcially Indicating tbia peculiarity of treatment,
inch root! are by the Bioda grammarians written wltb long ft "r v'th both
r and X'- no f actnally appears anywhere tmong tbeir forms.

D,j,i,...., Google

848 — ] 111. EnPHOSIC COUBIHATION. 84

b. The (qootabla) f-ioots »re 3kf ttrew, Igf ting, 2gf hboOow,
Ijf tctar out, tf, l9r eruth.

a. Tba (qnoUblo) y and f-rooW sra f, 1 df pierce, 1 pf _;U^ 1 mf iKe,
2v7 cAoOfK, Btf, bvr-

d. Fotms iDtlogons vitii these are lomelimet m&de ilio from other
roots: thas, cln^ olrCrS, oaTOary&, fiopn yoor; HpHrdh&n and 8par>
dhfcBe from yspfdh.

S43. In & few cases f cones from tlie coutrictjon of otber syllables
than ar and ra: tbns, in tpta and t^tlya, from rij Id 9^911, from ru; in
bhrk&tl, from rQ.

Vowel -lengthening.

844. Vowel -lengthen iug conceraB especially 1 arid n, since the
lengthening of a is in part (except where in evident analogy with
that of i and u) IndiBtlnguiahable from its increment, and f is made
long only in certain plnrttl cases of etems In f (or ar: 960 ff.). Length-
ening is a much more irregnlai and sporadic change than increment,
and its cases will in general be left to lie pointed oat in connection
with the processes of inflection and derivation: a few only will be
mentioned here.

345. a. Final radit-al 1 and n aie espedall; liable to prolongation
befora y: as In paasive and gerund and to on.

b. Final radical ir and ur (from Taiiable f-roots: 843) are liable to
prolongation before all consonants except those of perEonal endings; namely,
before jr and tvS and na: and in declension before bh and a (38S).
Radical is has the same prolongation in declension (898).

346. Compensitory lengthening, or absorption by a Towel of the time
of a lost following consonant. Is by no means rommoD. Certain Instances
of it have been pointed out above (176, 188 o,d, 168 d, 888b). Perhaps
snch cases as plti for pltarB (371 a) end dhani for dlianins (436) are

' to be classed here.

S47. The final vowel of a former member of a compound is often
made Ion;, especially in the Vedi. Prolongations of flnal a, and before v,
ate most frequent; but cases ate fnnnd of every variety. Examples are:
der&vi, Tayun&Tid, prSvff, jthvaaa, {ndrftvant, sadanSs4d, ;auU
magha. Tigranara, AkSdaga; apijti, parin&h, vlrudh, tnvlmagh&,
tTifimsLSt, q&ktltrant; Tasted, anuradh, sum&ya, puruT&au.| i

848. In the Teda, the flnal vowel of a word — genenlly a, mach
less often i and a — is In a large nnmber of cases prolonged. Uanally
the prolongation takes place where It is taroied by the metre, but some-
times even where the metre opposes the change (for details, see the various
Prati^akhyaB].

Words of which Ihe flnsls are thna treated are:

Ugil.zecy Google

85 Vowel-lengthening. [— SBO

». Putlclss: namely, Athft, kAhtL, ev£, uta, ghi, b&. Hit, iv&,
e&, Bma, nt, afigtt, kiia, &trS, yktrSt, t&trft, kutr&, &ayditrS, ubhay-
Urft, adya, iochS, &p&, pr£; &tT, ni, y&di, nahi, abtd, Tl; u, Hi,
nd, Bli, mak^d.

b. C»ae-fonn8- agpeeislly Initr. elng., »■ eni, Unft, y6na, bv6ii&,
kod othen ; rarely gen. eiiig., sa uyft, hori^&syS. Cue* besides tliese
US few: BO Bim&i v^fubbft, barlyojanft (toc); tanvi Cl°'-}l '"'I urd
aad (not rately) pnrli.

O. Teib-foims ending in a, in great number and variety: thua (nearly
Id the order of their comparatife ftequ«acy), 2d alng. Impr. aot., aa pibA,
■yft, gamayft, dhftrAyft; — 2d p). act, in ta and tha, *a BtbS, attS,
blbhftS, Jayatft, ^rVatS, anadatd, nayathA, jivayathft (and one or
two In taaa; aviftanK, bantanS); ^ lit pi, art, in ma, u vidmS,
rlfkmft, Fdtay&mfi, rtihomS, vanuyfimfi, cabr^A, marm^jmS; —
2d sing. impT. mid. In ava, aa yukq^S, i^i^Tft, dadhl^Tft, Tahaavi;
— 1st and 3d sing. perf. act., as vedfi, vivegS, jagrabhA; 2d sing, perT.
act., vatthK; — 3d pi. perf. act., anajfi, oakrA, Of Terb-forms ending
in i, only the 2d alng. impv. act.: thus, k^rdhl, k^uhl, k^ldhl, qrudhl,
ffQadm, qrnnhl, didlhl, Jahl.

d. To these may be added the gerund in ya (883 a), as abhlgdryO,
ieyi.

Vowel-Ugbtening .

848. The alteratiOD of short a to an 1- or a-vowel !n the fonnatiTe
procoHBeB of the Ungnage, except ia ^ or ar rooU [as explained above];
IB a sporadic phenomenoc on If.

S50. But the lighteoing of a long B especially to an l-rowel
(ae also its loss), is a frequent procesa; no other vowel is so nn-
Btable.

a. Of the clasa-iign aS (of the krl-clBss of verbs: 717 ff.), the
i Is In y-tA forma changed to I, and before Towel-endiaga dropped alto-
gether. The final & of certain roota is treated In the same manner: thus,
mft, hi, etc. (6dS-6). And from some roola, fi- and i- or i-forma lo
Interchange that it Is difficult to claaslfy them or to determine the tme
character of the root.

b. Radical fi la weakened to the temblance of the anlon-vowel 1 In
certain verbal forma: as perfect dadlma from yd& etc (794k); aollst
adhlthfis from >'dta& etc. (834 a); preient JaMmaa bom yb& etc. (ae6>

O. Radical fi la shortened to the semblance of stem-a in ■ number
rednplicated forma, sa tlffba, piba, dada, etc.: see SVl-li also in a
few aoriets, aa Uivam, &khyam, etc. : see 847,

d. Badlcal fi sometime* becomea e, especially before y: aa Btlieyfiaaiii>
deya.

ioy Google

261—] HI. EnpHOMic CouBiNATiOM. 86

SBl. Oertkin A-rooU, twcftuH of their peealiu BXchingM willt I ind
i-toTEU, MpeeitUy in ftinnlog tbe pi«*ent (Mm, an gjTan by tlM Hindu
gnmrnoiiuu u loots ending In a ot U oi o. Thui, from 2 dhft tucit C^Im)
come the pieeent dh&Tati >nd participle and gamnd <UlIt&, dhitv&i the
othei loraxt are made from dbft, ae dadbtiB, Kdhftt, dliftByati, dbtttava,
dUfpi^atl. From 2g& ting (gU) cDine the present gi^tl, tbe parti-
ciple and geruDd git& and gitva, and paasiie giy&te, and the other fonui
tlom gS. From 3 d& cut (do) come the present dy&tl and participle dlt&
or diiiA, and the other forme from lU. The InegQlarltleB of these root*
nill be treated below, under the varioqe fonnations (see eapeclallf 761 d (T.).

263. Bj a proeeas at abbreviation eaientlally akin with that of nr or
ra to f , the va (uiaally initial) of a number ot roota becomes u, and the
ya of a much smaller number becomes i. In certain verbal forms and derlv'
atlTes. Thna, from vaa come avaoa, ooyMam, nktvo, ukt4, vkti,
ukthA, etc. ; from y«J come iyii&, Ijyiiaam, Ul{vA, ifft^ i^^, etc See
below, under the various formatloDs.

B. To this change U given by Earopean grammiriant the name of
aaifapr>»Hnu;a, by adapUtlou of a term used In the native grammar.

2fiS. A short ft, of root or ending, is not infreqnentl; lost between
oonaonants in a weakenad syllable: tbna. In verb-forma, gtan&nti, ftpapbun,
Jagmas, Jftjfins, AJfiata; in noun-forma, Tf^fie, r$jfiL

264. nalon-voweli. All the simple vowels come to aasnme in
certain oases the aspect of nnioo'vowels, or insertions between root or stem
and ending of inflection or of derividoa.

ft. That character belongi ottenest to 1, which ia very widely osed:
1. before the 0 of aorist and fatare and detlderative stenu, as in ^Irlf am,
JiTiqy&ml, jiJIvifSmi; 2. in tenae-lnllection, eapeoiaUy perfect, ai JiJI-
vim4i occasionally also present, as &iilti, r6dlti; 3. In derivation, as
JIvit&, ktUoltiun, Janitt. rooi^i^n, etc. etc.

b. Long I Is used sometimes instead of short; thns, Agrwhiyan,
grahli^imi; bntviti, T&vadltl; tarltfi savlt^; it is also often intro-
duced before b and t of the 2d and 3d stng. of verbs: thus, ttiie, itHt.

0, For details respecting these, and the more irregular and sporadic
occarrences of n- and a-vowela In the sane character, see below.

Naaal Inorement.

265. Both in roots And in endings, & distinetion of Btronger asd
weaker forms is very often made by the fH^sence or abMnce of a
naeal element, a nual mate or anasvBra, before a following eon-
Bonant. In general, the stronger form b doabtleu the more original;
bnt, in the present coodftion of the language, tbe nasal has cobs in
great meaaore to seem, and to some extent also to be naed, as an
actually strengtbening element, introduced luidei certain conditions
in fonnaUve aad inflective processes.

Digitizecy Google

87 Nabai, Ihckbhbnt. f— 900

». Bxtmple* »«, of roDts: ao >nd afio, srath knd granth, vid
and vind, da^ tnd d«Ag. eras and sraAs, dpta &nd dfAh: of endlngt,
bhijrantam uid bbiiratA, m&naai utd m&aaAal.

SB6. A final n, whathet of item di of loot, it lesa itatile than any
othei conionant, wh«ie a weaker fonn ig callad for: thna, froin ri^an *e
luTO r^K and r^abhls, and la composition r^a; frcm jtVin-nfff, dhani
and dhanibble and dhAnl; hom ybaa we have bathi and baU, etc.
A final radical m 1« Mmetlmea treated In the same way: thos, from Vgam,
gahf, gat&m, gati, g&tl.

SB7. Inserted n. On tbe otbei band, (he nactl n ha* coma to be
Died nlth freat — and. In the later hiatory of the language, with Increaajng
— freqneacy i« a niiiiin-eonaonant, Inserted between rowels: tbns, from agui,
ftg"^"fr and agniD^ ; from m&dba, m&dhnnaa, rr>4^hTiiit, mJidlifiiii ;
ftom qtvk, qlvtoa. glviiil, ^IvanjUa.

S58. Inserted y. a. After final g of a root, a y Is often found ss
apparently a mere nnloD-censonant before another vowel: Qint, in luflectlon,
&dUrl etc (.844), f i^r&yati eto. (104B), flviyfts ete. (SaS o), gitrati
etc. (761 e) ; further, in deriistlon, -gSya, -yiyam, djiyaka etc.;
•BthAyika; pfty&na. •gftyana; dlii^aB, 'hSyae; athlljln etc (many
ca«ei)i -Utftrin, •taUyin; athSyoka.

b. other more gporadio cases of inserted y — such as that in the
pronoon-fonns ayam, lyam, vayam, yuyam, svayam; and In optatire
inflection before an ending beginning with a vowel (B69) — wUI b« point-
ed out below in their o

BedupUo ation .

868. Reduplication of a root [originating doabtleBs In its com-
plete repetition] has come to be a method of radioal inoremeDt or
Btrengthening in varions formatiye proceseee: aamely,

a. in preBsnt-Btem formation (94S£f,]: as ditdftmi, blbbirmi;

b. Id perfeot-Btfim formation, almost uniTeTsallylTSSff.): iBtattna.
dadbftu, oakara, rireoa, lalopa;

o> in aoTiflt-Btam formation (866 ff.): as ddldbarami, Aonoyavam;

d. in intenBlve and desideratiTe-Btem formation, thronghont(1000ff.,
lOaeff.): as j&flgbantl, J6taaviti, marmrJy&tai p{pMati, JigbAfiaati;

e. in the formation of derivative noun-Btems (1143 e): as p&pii,
o&roara, sAsahi. oibiti^ mallmlnoiL

1 Bales for the treatment of the reduplication In these several cases
will be given in the proper coDnection below.

S60. As, by reason of tbe Btrengthening and weakening dianges
Indicated above, the eame root or stem not Beldom exhibits, in tbe
prooessea of inflection and derivation, varietieB of stronger and weaker
form, the distinction and description of these varieties foime iw Im-
portant part of tbe subjects hereafter to be treated.

Digitizecy Google

IV. Deglehsion.

CHAPTER IV.

DECLENSION.

Sdl. The general subject of declenBion inelndeB noans, adjectiTos,
and proaooDB, all of which are inflected in essential])' the same manner.
Bnt while the corieapondence of nouns and adjectives is so close that
they eaoDOt well be separated in treatment (oliap. V.), the pronoans,
which exhibit many pecnlarities, will be best dealt with in a separate
chapter (Vll.) ; and the words designating number, or numerals, also
form A class peculiar enough to require to be presented by them-
selves (chap. VI.)-

262. Declensional foims show primarily case and num-
ber; but they also indicate gender — since, though the
distinctions of gender are made partly in the stem it»elf,
they also appear, to no inconsiderable extent, in the changes
of inflection.

263. Gender. The genders are three, namely mascu-
line, feminine, and neuter, as in the other older Indo-Euro-
pean languages; and they follow in general the same lavs
of distribution as, for example, in Greek and Latin.

a. The only words which show no sign of gendet-dlBtlnetlon >re the
peraoiul pronouna of the first tmd second person (481), sud the nomeTsts
iboTe foar (483).

264. Number. The numbers are three — singular, dual,
and plural.

a. A few wotda ue nsed only in the plursl: ss dftr&a wi/s, £patt trotor;
the nameial dva ivJO, Is dnU only; and, as In other Isngoages, man; words
are, by the nature of thelt use, toand to occur only in the eingnlai.

Ses. As to the uses of the numbers, it needs only to be remarked
that the dual is (with only very rare and sporadic exceptions) nsed
strictly in all cases where two objects are logically indicated, whether
directly or by combination of two indiTiduals: thus, fivd te dytU
Vftpfthlvi ubh^ Btfim mayhtaven and earth both be propitiout to thee!
dalvaifa oa mSnufaih oa hotfir&u vf^yS haoing choten both the divine
and the human aacrificert; pathor deTayHnasya pltfyS^aBya oa of
the two paths leading retpeetively to the gode and to the Fathers.

L.,j,i,....,C-'Ooylc

89 Cases. - [—368

a. The dD>l 1« used alone (irittaont AvA Imo) properly irlieD the.
dnality ot the object* indicated Is -well nndeintood; thas, afvinau Ika finn
Amint; indraBys bin Indra'g two bagt; bnttaayadvfiT afvBu sttt^
A« Aoi two AoTM*. But notr and then the dual Blands alone piegnautly :
tfans, TOdaih vedftu Tfldftn v& one Veda or fico or more than Ctcn;
Aaf af(e fate (tea hundred and lixty-ont.

266. Case. The cases aie (including the vocative) eight:
nominative, accusative, instiumental, dative, ablative, gen-
itive, locative, and vocative.

a. Tb« order In which they ate here raeationed !■ that eslabllBhed for
them by the Hindu grammsilanB, and accepted from these by WnBtern
BcholaiB. The Hlndn names of the cases are founded on this order: the
nominatira is called peatlXAml, Jirat, the accnaattTe dvltlyi second, the
genitive faffhl eixlh (ec. vlbbaktl dinition, i. e. ccae), etc. The object
aonght in the arrangement is limply to set next to one another those cases
which are to a greater or Ihsb extent, in one or another number, identical
in form; and, patting the nominitWe Brst, as leading case, there is no
other order by which that object could be attained. The Tocative is not
considered and named by the native grammarians as a case lilie the rest;
In this work, it Till be giveii in the singular (where aland it is eier dis-
tinguished from the nomtnative otherwise than by aec«Dt) at the end of the
series of Msea.

A compendions statemeiit of the ueee of the cases is given in
the following paragraphs:

867. Uses of the Nominative. The nominative is the case
of the subject of the sentence, and of any vord qualifying the sub-
ject, whether attrihatively, in appositioo, or as predicate.

388. One or two peculiar constructioDS call for notioe:

a. A predicate nominative, instead of an objective predicate In the
accasative, Is used wlUi middle verb-forms that signify regarding or calling
one's self: thns, s6maih manyate papivan (BY.) kt thinii he has been
drinking eoma; ek maoyeta porft^avft [AV.) he may regard himielf as
xei»e in ancient things; dur^d va &hartii 'vocathftli (MS.) Aou hast
claimed to be a savior out of trouble; {ndro brfthma^o bruvS^a^
(TS.) Indra pretending to be a BroMnim ; kattbase aatyavftdl (R.) thou
hoaslsst thyself truth/a!. Similarly with the phrase rflpaih i^: thus,
kn96 riip&lil k^tva (T9.) taking on a black form (1. e. making shape
for himself as one that is black).

b. A word made by Iti (1103) logically predicate to an object is
ordinarily nomlnatiTe: thus, Kvexgd lok& fti y&ih T&danti (AV.) tchat
they call the heavenly tcorld; tam agnlffoma ity koakfate (AB.) if
they style asnlft^ma; vidarbharSjatanaj'&di dam^anti tl viddhl
mSm (MBh.') know me for the Vidarbha-king's daughter, Damayantl by

j,i,....,LiOOJ^IC

SS8— ] IV. Deolshsion. 90

atmtt. Both MiMtnietloiii ue eomblaed In ^fiadi bl bUun 1^ Uia^
pite 'ty vn tn mmtradam (H.) for to an ignorant man tkag givo Iht
name of 'chit^, hut that of '/athtr' to ont who mparta the taered ttxtt.

O. A DomiiittlTe, Instead of ■ Mcood voMtiie, !■ aDmallinei added to
» TOMtiTe ky oa and: thni, {ndraf ok aimeLih ptbat«di brhaapate
(RT.) togttker wtth Indra, do j/o two drink the »oma, O Briiatpaii! vifr*
dev& J^amSnaq ok eidatS (TS.) O ye AU-Oodt, and tht taerijittr,
tait not*!

869. Uses of the aCDuiative. The scousatEve [b eBpecialty
the case of the direct object of a tnnsitlTe verb, uid of kdj word
qo&lifjdQg that object, u attribate or appoBltive or objeodre pradi-
c»te. The construction of the verb ia shared, of course, by its par-
ticiples and iDfinitives; but also, in Sanskrit, by a number of other
derivatives, having a more or less participial or infiaitivaJ character,
and even Bometimes by nouns and adjectives. A few prepositions
are aecompaDied by the accusative. As less direct object, or goat
of motion or action, the accuwtive is construed especially with verbs
of approach and address. It is found used more adverbially as ad-
junct of place or time or manner; and a host of adverbs are accDS-
ative cases in form. Two accusatives are often found as objects of
the same verb.

570. The OEs of tha ■ociuatiTe si direct object of ■ ttaasltiTe verb
and of its InflnltlTet and paittcipleB hardly needs iUnstratton; an ezampla
or two ate: agnim I^e I praiie Agni; n&mo bharanta^ bringmg
homaffe; bhAjro d&um arhasl thou thouldtt give more. Of ptedteate
irords qoalifyiDg the object, an example is t&m osr&di bf^oml t&lfa
brahm^iqana (RV.) him I make formidable, him a priett.

571. Of verbal dBiivatives having bo far ■ participial chacaeter that
they share the cooitiuctlon of the verb, the variety is coDBlderable : thas —

a. Derivatl'ea In u from deaideratlve atems (1038) have wholly tha
character of preaenC paitlclples; thus, damaTantitO abhlpBavab (MBb.)
detiring to win Damat/anii; didfkfur Jan&k&tmaJSm (B.) detiring to
lee Jantdide daughter. Barely, alio, the verbal noun io & from such a root:
thus, Bvargam abhikfifikqayS (R.) with deaire of paradiie.

b. So-i^alled primary derivatives In In have the eame oharaeter: thoa,
m^ kftmfnT (AV.) loving me; anam abMbhft^ifl (HBh.) addretting
him. Even ttae obvianaly aeconduy garbbin lias In QB. the same cod-
ttruction : tbna, B&rv&^ bhutinl garbby kbbavat he became pregnant
toiih all beings.

o. Derivatives la aka, iu the later language; ai, bhavantam abhl-
vKdaka^l (MBh.) intending to lalute you \ mlthUfim avarodhaksk^ (R.}
betieging MilAila.

d. Noam tn tar, very frequently la the older langoage, and as peri-
phrastic future forma (fl48 IT.] in the later : thua, h&nt& 76 vj^Un

d,j,i,....,C-'OOQIc

9l UbBB op the ACCOBATIVB. [—873

•Anlto tk vtiiaSx dttA mag&inl (RV.) who tlayttk the dragon, lomneth
beett/, butoteM largemet; Uu hi >duh surradi hArt&r&D (JB.) for
thty teize on this universa; t7akt&r»h aaibyuge pr&^Sn (MBh.) riaking
life in hattU.

e. Tha root iUalf, in the older Uaguige, used with the Talus of a
pieMDt paiticiple at the end ot a campouud : thns, y&ifa yi^fUih poribhtlr
itA (BV.) tehat offering thou lurroundeat Iprotectesl); &bim a.p&fy pftrl-
ffham (KT.) (A« dragon confining tht tcatert. Also a aupeilaiiTa of a
toot-Btem (468, 471): thus, tv&ifa v4su devayaU T&nl^thati IRV.) thou
art chief ainner of amUh for the piout; Ut B6maih BomapttamA (RV.)
they tu>o are the greattet drinkeri of loma.

t. The deiiiaCive In i from the (especially the redtipUcated) rool, in
the older langaago: tboB, babhrfr vi^Tadi pap{^ admain dadir %ii}.
(RV.) bearing the ihattderbolt, drinking the soma, bellowing kiiie; yajfi&m
fttini^ (RV.) extending the laerijice.

g, DailTativM in nka, very freqnently In the Bribmana Unguige:
thus, vatB^Ag oa gblttuko vfkal^ (AV.) imdOie icotf deetroge hie calvee;
vMoko v&o bharati (TS.) he wine a garment; kamuk& enaih Htrifo
UuiTaiitl (MS.) the uiomen fall in love with him.

b. Other casei are mote sporadic: thaa, derlrittves In a, as inAxo
df^hS eld Sn^&h (RT.) Indra breake up even lehaf ia fatt; nfti V&
'rha^ p&itrkaifa liktham (H.) bg no mtant entitled to his father'^
atale; — in atnu, as vt^d dd Kn^atnubhl^ (RV.) with the breakeri
of whatever ie etrong; — In atha, as ;^)&th&7a devan (RV,) to make
offering to the gode; — in ana, as taifa nivSrai^a (HBh.) in reetraimng
him; BTamftflBam iva, bhojane (R.) at if in eating one'e own fleeh; —
in ani, aa Bam&tau turir&^l^ pptanydn (RV.) overcoming foee in
eombatt; — In tl, aa nk t&lh dhOrtfh (RV.^ there ie no injuring him; —
In van, la ApafoaddaghTt 'rmam bliavatl (H9.) he doet not come
thort of food; — in snu, as sthlrj oin namayif^vab (IIT.) bowing
enen Jim thinge.

S7S. Eianples of an aecnaatiie with an ordinary noim or adjective
■le only occasional ; snch words as AuuTrata faithful to, prAtirfipa
corrwtpondiitg to, abbldhr^a daring to cope witk, ptatT&flo oppoeite
to, may be regarded aa taking an accusative in Tirtna of the preposition they
contain ; also Annlra, ta ^tik& dsTa v&ni9am (HS.) the gode are inferior
to Varw^ RT. has tim ant&rvati^ pregnant wUh him; and AV. has
mtth kltmena through loving me.

S73. Th« direct eonatractlon of caie* with prepositions is compara-
tlTely loftrlcted In Saoikiit (llSSff.). With the accuaatlTe are oftenest
boiid pratl, oppoeite to, in reference to, etc. ; also ann after, in the count
of; aatar or antarS between; rarely ati aeroee; abM againit, to; and
others (IISS). CMe-fotms which have assumed a prepositional value are
alto often Q«ed with the aconaative: as antora^a, attare^a, dakfl^ena,
avare^a, QrdliTaiii, rte.

ioy Google

874—] DECLBNaiON. 92

S74. Tbe accuBati>e la very often found alM ts object of verbs which
in the related lingnages ue not tiuiBitiTe.

a. It aUDilii especiallir a* the goal of motion, with verba of going,
bilDging, aeuding, and the like ; tbua, vidarbbKn agaman (HBh.) thty
aent to Vidarbha; dlTaifa yayu^ (UBh.) (A«y went to heaven; vauagnl-
m&n db&Tanta^ (UBh.) rutming to aooda and buiha; ap6 dlTOm 6d
TBlianti (AV.) thty carry up toatert to tha tky; dev^ 74« (^^-) ^
mtAe offermg to the godt.

b. With Terba meaning go, this ia an extremely common oonatniction ;
and the nae of iuch ■ verb with an abstract noon makes pecnliir pbnteB
of beeoming: thtis, Btunatfim etl he goe$ to equality (i. e. hecomee equal);
BB gacched badhyatOm mama (HBh.) he ehall become liable to be elain
by me; Ba paitcatTam agata^ (H,] he ioae reeobied into the Jive ekmente
{underwent dieeolutien, died),

o. Veibi ot Bpeaiiing foltow the aime rule: thus, tun abravit he
taid to him; pr&kro^ad uoo&ir nSi^adham (HBb.) afta eried out loudb/
to the Niehadkan; y&S tvo "vltoa CAV.) mho upohe to thee.

d. The aaSDiDption of an acensatiire object ia exceptionally easy in
Sanskrit, and anch an object is often taken by a verb or phrue which ia
atriotly of intranaltlve rharacter: thns, aUiaB& prd 'ay aay^ (.^^^ >'»
might thou exeelleet (lit. art ahead) others; deTa v&{ br4hma a&m
avadanta (MS.) the gode tcere ditewaing [lit. wars talking together)
brabman; ailtii vSi icA yaii&d yantl (MS.) lurely they are cutting
me off (lit. are going between) from the offering; taih B4iii babbava
(^B.) he had inlercouree with her.

27B. Examptea of the cognate aconsitiTe, or accusative of implied
object, are not infrequent: thus, t&paa tapy&mahe (AV.) we do penance;
ti h&l 'tarn edbatum edhadi oakrixe ((B.) the;/ proepered loHh that
prosperity; u^itvA Bukhavaaam. (R.) abiding happily.

278. The accusative is often naed in more adverbial constraotlons.
Thus:

O. Occasionally, to denote meaaure of spice: tliaa, yojanaqataib
gantnm (HBh.) to go a hundred leaguee; ^a^ aoohrlto yojaninl (HBh.)
six leagues high.

b. Hucb more oft«n, to denote meaaare or duration of time: thoa, ak
BaibTatHarim Ordhrb tlt^that (AT.) he stood a year upright; tlsrA
ratrir dlkfit4h syftt (TS.) let him be consecrated three nights; gatT&
trill aborStr&n (HBh.) having traveled three complete days.

o. Sometimes, to denote the point of epace, or, oftener, of time: thns,
ylbn aaya di^am d&synh syat (QB.) whatever region hi* enemy may
be in; t^nftl tliifa ritrlih Bab^ " JagSma (QB.) he arrived that night
with him; Imfidi r^janiiii vyuffSm (UBh.) this current night.

d. Very oflen, to denote manner or acoompanying clrcamstance.
Thns, the neuter acousative of Innnmerable adjeotivea, simple or componnd

j,i,....,LiOOglC

93 Uses of the Accusatitb. [—378

(1111), U nsed advetbuny, while certain kinds of eompounda ue thus
DMd to such an extent Ibat the Hindu grammariaiij baTS made of Cbem a
special adierbial class (1313).

e. Special cskge are occasionally met vitb: thas, brahmaoAryaiD
UTtoa t^B.) /la kept a term of »tudenUhip ; phaliifa paoy&nte (MS.) thty
ripen thair fruit; gaih dtryadlivani (M3., S.) gamble for a cow.

9,11. Tbe aecusative i«, of course, freely used wiii other cases to limit
the same Terb, as the sense reqnltes. And wheneveT it is nsable vitb a
verb in two different const ractions, the verb may take two accasative:, one
in each constraction: and such combiDatlons aie qaite frequent in Sanskrit.
Tliiu, with verbs of appealing, asking, having teeonise: ss, ap6 yAoftml
bhe^iO&m (RV.) / a»k the ualert for medicinsi tvSm abam Batyam
ioohimi (R.) I detire truth from tht»:, tvfim vayaih qaraaath gatfi^
(MBb.) tee have resorted to thee for euccor; — Kith verbs of bringing,
sending, following, imparting, saying; as, gurutvaiii naradi nayantl (H.)
they bring a man to re^ectability; utfi oS 'nvetu mfiib vanam (R.)
and let Sila accompany me lo the forest; Bupeqasaih mi "va Bfjanty
Astain (KV.) they let me go home weU adorned; t&m idam abravlt (Mllh.)
this he said to Tier ; — and in olbec less c-ommon cases : at, v^rkf&lfa pakv&lil
ph&ladi dbonulii (RV.) shake ripe fruit from the tree; tadi vif&m
tvi 'dbok (AY.) poistm he milked from her; jitTfi rajyaih nalam
(MBli.} having iBon the kingdom from Ifaia; ixoM^^ltaii paj}im gify (RV.)
ye robbed the Pani of the kine; draqfum icohSva^ putraiii pa^cimadar-
^anam (R.) uJe wish to tee our son for the last lime.

a. A causative form of a transitive verb Tcgnlarly admits tvro acou-
lative objects; thus, devaA nqat&^ pfiy^B havl^ (RV.) make the eager
gods drink the oblation ; o^adhir eT4 ph&laib grfthayatl (HS.) he makes
tht plants bear fruit; vai^ijo dSpayet karfin (M.) he should cause the
merehanlt to pay taxe*. But such a caoGsttve sometimes takes an instin-
mental instead of a second aecnsative: see 282 b.

878. Daee oT the Instramental. The mstrumenta] is orig-
inally the ui'fA-case: it denoteB &dja(«ncy, accompaDiment, aisociation
— passing over into the expreasion of meaofl and iDBtrnment by the
same transfer of meaning which appears in the English prepositions
leith and by.

a. Nearly all the uaea of the ca«e are teadily dedncible from this
fundamental meaning, and show nothing anomaloai or difflonlt.

S70. The instrumental is often nsed to signify accompaniment : thus,
agnir derebhir a gamat (RV.) may Agni eome hither along toith the
gods; marndbhi rudr&ih bnvema (RT.) we mould call Rudra with the
Maruls; dTftparena Baht^ena kva j&ayasi (UBh.) whither wilt thou
go, with Dvapara for eampaniont kathayan nSi^adheita (MBh.) talking
viiA the Nishadhan. Bnt the relation of simple accompaniment is more
often helped to plainer expression by prepositions (eaha etc.: 284).

D,j,i,...., Google

SSO— ] rv. Declension. 94

380. The fnatniiaenUl of metng ot Instrnmant or igent U jet more
fieqaent: thai, blutdr&dl hir^Abhl^ 9r9iV9>i>u (RT.) nuiji ve hear
teitli our tart what it propitiout; ^astreijift nldhaium (HBb,] deaA fiy
tht t¥iori; keolt piMlbhyKib hats K^fti^ (HBh.) lome mere tlain by th«
ekphanU aHh their feet; pithak pt^ibby&ih darbhataro^akUr
navanltenS "figufthopakajii^tMbSbliy&in akfl^I AJya (AQS.) anoint-
ing their et/ee with freth butter, by he^ 0/ the 6uncA«i of daxbhn-^aie,
toiih the thumb and ring-Jinger, ueing the two hande euceeteivefy. And
this pusea eully over Into tbe expTession ot occulou 01 loason (fai wblch
the (blstlTe li moia trequent}: thae, k{pay& through piiy; tana satrena
tn virtue of that truth.

381. Of ipsdkl applleidoDB, Ibe foUowlDg mi; be DOtlced:

a. Aorordance, equality, llkeDees, and the like; thas, samiiii Jyotltk
sArye^a C^V.) a brightrttsi equal with the sun; ye^Sm ahattl Oft
pSdaraJaafi tulTab (MBh,) to the Aial of tnhoae feet I am not equal.

b. Price [by which oblalaed): thus, da^&bhi^ kilQ&ti dh»il4bhllii
(RV.) he huyt with ten kiae; ^vHx ^ataBahaBreoa dlratftih ^baU
mama (B.) J^' ^abdla be given me for a hundred thoutartd eoae; ea te
•kiahrdaradi dfttft rajft 'qvahrdayena tU (MBb.) the king uHl give
thee the eecret eeienee of dice in return for that of horeee.

o. Hedium, >nd henoe tlta epaee or distance or lOad, traTersed ; thtu,
ndna nk nivam anaraata (BV.) they brought [him] at it were a A^
by water; i 'hi yfttadi path£bhir derar^n&U^ (RV.) come hither by
god-travekd path*; jagmur vihiVaaa (MBh.) they went off through

d. Time paaied thioagb, or b; the Upie of whloh aDTtbtng \e bionshl
aboat: thus, vldarbbin yftttun iooh&my ekShnft (MBh.) 7 wiA to go
to Vidarhha in the course of one day, te oa k&lena mahatK yftaTaoam
pratlpedire (R.) and they tn a long time attained adolescence; tatra
kUena JSyaiite in&navft dirghaJlTina^ (H.) there in time are bom
men long-lived. This use of the initrameutal boidera upon that of the
locatiTe and BbUtife.

e. The part of the body on [or by) which snythlnj Is home Is nenally
expressed by the inatrnmenial : as, kukkura^ akandheno "bjate (B.)
a dog it carried on the thoulder; and thli constmctlon is extended to ench
cases as tulayK krtam (H.) put on [I. e. so as to be carried by) a balance.

t. Not infrequent are such phrases as bahutia kim pralKpena (R.)
what is the use of (i. e. it gained by) mucA talking? fco nn me JWltenUl
Vtbah (MBh.) what obf'eet is life to me? nlrojaa tu kim ftu^adhil^
(S.) but what has a well man to do leith medicines?

g. An Instrumental ot accompaniment is orcaaioniUy need almost or
quite with tbe Talae of an instrumental abeolnte: thus, na tvayfi tra
ma7& VaBtbitona ka "pi clnta karyft [Paric.) with me at hand, thou
needst feel no anxiety whatever on this point.

Ugil.zecy Google

95 USEB OF THE Instrdhehtal. [ — 286

S6S. a. Th« construotlon of t pageive leib (or psrtinlple] irlth an
Inttnimental of the agent 1» common from the eiillaat peitod, and liecomes
decidedly moie M l*tet, tbe paaalve participle vlth Instmrnental taking to
no amal eitent tbe place ot an active verb irlth it> mbject, Tbns, yam^na
d8tt&^ (RV.) given by Tama; ^Ibblr f^ya^ (BY.) to he praited by
Mgtt; vTldhena JUuh viMIr^am (H.) by the hunter a net [tea*] tpread;
tao ohratrft JaradgftTeno *ktam (H,) Jaradgapa, hearing thia, eaid;
mayft stmtaTyam (B.) / shall go. A. predlcat* to the Inttramental tnbjeet
of aaeb a coaatniction ii, of conrae, alto in the inatrameiital: thas, adllTinB
tavft "naoare^a tnar& BarvathB bhaTltavram (E.) hmeeforih I ehaO
akDoya be &y eon^aaion; avnhltUr bliavltaTTaih bhavadbhiti (Vlkr.)
you rmiit be attentive.

b. A caaaatlve vetb eometlmea takea an instrnniaDtal Inatead of an
accDsatlTe aa second object: tbna, tftdi qvabhih khftd^sd rft}& (M.)
the king should hace her devoured by doge; t& T&ni9eaK 'grfiliayat
(HS.) he eauted Varuna to teize them.

583. Han; iaatramental conitmctiDaa are snch aa call In tianaUtloD
for other piapoaltiona than with or hy; yet the tree iaatmmental relation i*
nmallT to be traced, eepeciaUf If the etymological senae of tbe itoidj be
calefull; coaaideied.

a. More anooialonatr, however, tbe inatrnmenlal is naed interobangeably
with tbe ablative with woida algnlf ylng separatloii : tbna, TataKlr vfyutft^
(RY.) eeparated J¥om their caloee; mi 'h&m ftbn&ii& vi rftdhl;! (AY.)
let me not be tevered from the breath of life; Ha tayft vyayujyata
(MBb.) he teat parted fivm her; pKpm&nftl VAi 'naih v{ pnnantl (HS.)
they eleanaa him from evil (compare Eagllah parted with). The aame
meaning may be given to the cue eren when accompanied by Baha teith:
tbna, bhartrft aalia viyogal^ (MBh.) separation from her huthand.

584. The prepoflltionB taking the inatmmentai (1 187) are thoae aig-
nifying v>i& and the like; tbtia, Baha, with the adverbial woids containing
■a aa an element, aa cAkun, iftrdham, Baratham; — and, in general,
a word oomponnded wiUi aa, aam, saha takea an iastrumental as its legnlar
and natural complement. Bat alto the preposition vlnS toiOuiut takei
Bomettmea the inslrnmental (cf, 888 a).

8BB. Dsea of the Dative. The dative is the oaae of the
iodireot object— ~ot that toward or in the direction of or in order
to or for which anything is or is done [either intraDSitiTOly or to a
direet object).

a. In more phyiical connections, the osea of tbe dative approach those
of tbe accosative (the more proper to-caee), and the two are sometimes
interchangeable; but tbe general value of tbe dative as the tmoard- or for-
esee ie almost everywhere diBtinctly to be traced.

886. ThDs, the dative U aaed with —

a. Worda signifying give, thare out, atetgn, and the like: thus, yo Q&
d&dStl B&kbye (RY.) who gives not to a friend; y&oohS 'Bin&l qArma
(RV.) beetote upon him protection.

,1,1.0, Google

286—] IV. Declension. 96

b> WoidB Bigulfying ahotc, announee, declare, and ibe like: thiiB
dhanur darfoya rSmBya (It.) lAotc the boa to Sama; Ev{r ebhyo
abhavat oliryalf (RV.) the tun viat manifattd to them; rtupan^aifa
bbimf^ pratyavedajraa (MBb.) they announced Eitupania to Shima;
tebhyah prat^iUlya (HBh.) having promieed to them.

o. Words •ignifying give atttntton, have a regard oi feeling, atpire.
Mid the like: thus, nivef&ya mano dadhu^ (HDh.) they aet their nrntdt
upon eneamping; mat^ 'va putr^bhyo m^^a (AT.) he gracioue at a
mother to her soni; idm aemibbTaih bf^Iae (RV.} nhy art thou angrg
at uiT kftmftya epfhayaty Stmii (Spr.) the eoul longi for- lone.

d. Words Biga\lyiug please, suit, conduce, and the like: thus, yadyad
rocata viprabbya^ (M.) whatever is pleasing to Srahmane; tad
ftuantyaya kolpate (KU.) that make* for immortaiity.

e. Words Bignlfyiug inclination, oheieance, and the like: thus, m^ihyaifa
uamautfim pradfga^ citaaral^ (I^V.} let the four quarters bow themse'.vee
to me; devebhyo namaskrtya (UBh.) having paid homage to the gods.

t. Words Bigiiifsing hurling or casting: aa yina du^^i^s iwyaai (A.Y.)
aith ichich thoti hurleet at the impious,

g. Id some of these comtructioiis the genitive and locative are al£o
used : see below.

2B7. In its more distinodve sense, as signifying for, for the bene_fit
of, teith reference to, and the like, the dative is nsed freely, aod in a
great vaiiely of constructions. And this nee puses over into that of the
dative of end or purpose, which is extremely commoa. Thas, ifom Imj*
Tana iaan&ya (AT.) making an arrow for hurling; gphn^ml ta s&n-
bhagatvaya b&stam (RV.) I take thy hand in order to happiness; rftft'aya
mUiyaifa badhyat&di sap&tnebbyah parfibhi^ve (AT.) be it bound
on in order to royalty for me, in order to destruction for my enemies.

a. Euch a dative is much osed ptadicttlvely (and ofteneet with the
copula omitted), iu the sense o1 makes for, tends toieard; also is intended '
for, and so must ; or is liable to, and so eon. Thus, npade^o mnrklifiQaiii
prakopSya na q&ataye (H.) good counsel [tends] to the exasperation,
not the conciliation, of fools; sa oatasy&h aaibtOffiya nfi 'bhavat (H.)
and lie teas not to her satisfaction; angopa ael nil diibhfiya (BT.) thou
art a good herdsman, not one for cheating (i. e. not to be cheated).

b. These uses of the dative are in the older language especially itlos-
trated by the dative Inflnitivas, for which see 982.

288. The dative is not nsed with prepositions (1124).

288. Uses of the Ablative. The ablative is the /rom-case
in the Tarioug sensea of that preposition ; it ia need to ezprees removal,
BepaiatioQ, distinctioD, issue, and the like.

200. The ablative is used where expulsion, removal, distinction, re-
lease, defense, and other kindred relations are expressed: thus, td Bedbautl
patho TflEam (AT,) they drive away the wolf from the path; m£ pik

D,j,i,....,CiOO'.Mc

97 Uses of the Ablative. [—292

gim& pathil^ (S.V,) maf/ tet not go away from the pa^; ^tl -vt ef&
y^janmuthit (MS.) Aa va-ily gott moay from V\t fact ofth* taerijiet;
txb ftsmid astu beti^ (^V.) far from as b» your miuUe; pftt&ib no
vf kftt (RV.) ime m from Aa tBolf\ istabbnftd dyom aTaardsa^ (RT.)
he kapt (lit. madt firm) th» Ay from falling.

SBI> The abUtlTB Is med wbeie ^proeednie ot Ifene from lamethlng
u from 1 soiuce or itaitlng-poinl Is ligaifled: thas, ^ukra k^i^ad aja-
niffa (BT.) the bright one hai been bom from the blaek one; lobhfit kro-
dbo^ pTAhh&vatiiWBh.) paeeion arieee from greed; vittfit te pra^im
aTldain (AV.) I have won thy lif&-brtatk from the wind; ji pr^oyft di^o
abhldltsanty aamaii (AV.) who attack ua from the taetem g^tarler; tao
duntrS sakMganKt (MBh.) having heard Outlfrom the troop of frienda ;
viynr aatarlk;Sd abhB^ata (MBb.) the wind tpoke ftora the sky.

a. Hence ilao, procednre m From > cause or oocuJon is Blgnifled by
the iblKtlve: thla 1b eapedally fraqnent in the later language, and In teoh-
nical phraseology Is a suiidlng eoDBttnctlon ; It borders on Inatrumental
cDDtttnctions. Thus, TAJrasya ^u^Bd dadfira (RT.) fi-om (by reason
of} the fitry of the thunderbolt hs burst aeunder; yuya dK^^abhiyrtt
Mtrve dharmam anorndbyantl (HBh.) from fear of whose rod all are
eonetant to duly; ak&ramigrltatritd okanuya (Trlbli.) because e con-
tains an element of a.

b. Very rarely, an ablative bas the seme or after: thae, agaOOtiaim
aliOT&trat Hrtbam (MBb.) they went to the shrine after a whole day;
takSrBt Bak&re takKre^a (APr.) after \, before s, m inserted t

S82. One oi two special applications of the ablative constructlan are
to be noticed:

a. Tha ablative vlth words implying fear (terrified recoil from); thus,
t&syS jatiy&l; s&rram abibbet (AV.) eoerything was afraid of her at
her birth; y&smad r^anta k^t^ya^ (^^0 «' whom mortals tremble;
yufmU bbiyt (BV.) through fear of you; yaem&n no 'dvljate loka^
(BhQ.) of whom (As world is not afraid.

b. The ablative of compstison (dlailnctlon from) : thaa, prii ririoa
diT& indxab ppthivyab (RY.) Indra is greater than the heaven and the
earth. With a eompitatlTe, or otber word used in a kindred way, the abla-
tive la the regular and almost constant constructlOD: thna, av&d61? svjdl'
ya^ (RV.) sweeter than the tweet; Idih taamftd dn^khataram (MBb.)
what it more painful than that? ko mlb^fid anyal^ (H.) who eUe than a
friend; g& avf^Itba mat (AB.) thou hast chosen the kine rather than me;
i^fiebhyo granthina^ gre^tbi granthlbhyo dbftri;^ var&t (M.)
poaseseors of text* are better than ignorant men; rememberers are better
t/tan possessors; t&d any&tra tvbxi n£ dadbmasl (AV.) we set this
down eltewhere {away) from thee; pdrvft viflvasmftd bhuvauAt (RV.)
earlier than all being*.

O. Occaslonsliy, a probably possessive genitive la used with the com-
parative; or an iugtrnmental (as in a comparison of equality): tbtis,
Wkitney, Gnmiui, 9. <d. 7

L.,j,i,.c..,Li00gle

892—] IV. DE0I.ENSIOK. 93

n& *Bti dbanyfttaro muna (R.) thers it no one more forbmaie fhan I
(j, e. my superior in fortune); patraib mamR prft^&ir gar^asam
(MBh.) a ton dearer Man my life.

d. OccuionUly, an ablatiTe fe lued instead of ■ putitiTe gsnitiTe;
thus, miUmnSd ekadi Jaghfina (R.) he tlew one out of U« pair;
tftbhya «bam (KSS.) one of them.

293. Tlie nblitfTe Is naed with & varietf ot prepwittons and wor'ti
■baring a prepositional chaiactei (1128); but ill these hare lathsr an ad-
verbial Talue, as stiengthening oi defining the yVom-Tolatton, than any
propel gotarning foree. We miy notlna here;

a. In the Teda, Adlii and p&ri are mnch naed u directing and «tce&gth-
enlng adjuncts with the ablative: as, jSt6 Mm&Tataa piri CAV.] horn
from the Himalaya ifortK); samndrad &dhl JaJ!Ll;e (AV.) thou art
bom from the ocean; oirantadi p&rl tastJiufali (RV.) moving forth
from thai tohiiA etande fatt.

b. Also para (and par&s), In the senie at forvard from, and hence
before: aa, pari j&raaa^ (BV.) before old age: and hence also, with
words of protection and the like, from: as fafamSnA^ para nid&^
(RV.) eeeuring from itl^iil.

o. Also a, in the sense of AitA«r^om, aU the way from: as, ^latbAd
&au ^uqyatu (AV.) let it dry eompktely up from the roof; t&amftd a
nadyi nama Stha (AT.) since that time ye are tailed rieert. But usn-
ally, and eapentally In the later language, the meaeuietaBnt of Interval
implied Id a la reversed In direction, and the constractlon means aU the
way to, untii: as jratl gir{bli;a a samtldrat (KV.) going from the
mountairw to the oceani i 'By& yajfid^jro 'd^a^ (VS.) until the end of
thi* tacrifke; ft ^^f^^'^ C) '•" ^ eixteenth yeai-; & prad&n&t (Q.)
untU her marriage.

284. Uees of the Genitive, a. Tlie proper valne of the
genitive is adjectivali It belongs to nnd qualifisB a doud, designating
iometbiog relating to the latter in a manner which the nataie of the
case, or the connection, defines more nearly. Other genitive con-
stmctiooB, with adjective or verb or preposition, appear to arise out
of this, bj a more or leas distinctly traceable connection.

b. The use of the genilJve has become much extended, eape-
cialiy in the later language, by attribatlon of a Uoun-cbaracter to the
adjective, and by pregnant veriial construction, so that it often bears .
the aspect of being a sobstitnte for other cases — as dative, instru-
mental, ablative, locative.

28B. The genitive in its normal adjective construction with a noun
or pronoun is claBslflahle Into the nsnal varieties: ai, genitive of possession
or appnrtenance, including the complement of implied relation — this is,
aa elsewhere, the commonest of all; the so-called partitive genitive; the
anbjacllve and objective genltivea; and so on. Genitives of apposition or

j,i,....,L-'OOJ^IC

99 Uses of the Qbhitive. [—887

equirtleuee (^eity of Rome), and of thwscteriitlc (man of hcnur), do not
occar, tad htrJIy that of miteiiil [hoiue o/tcoad). Eiamplai are: {ndrft-
ayftviO'B^ In^a'* IhundtrboU; pltft ^^ttisf&tct father of sotu; putmb
pitn> ton oflhafaiher; pltu^ kOmal^ putraeya the father » love of the
eon; ke nafi whiiA of ui; 9&taib diBlD&m a hundred female liavei.

a. The eipieaalon ol pMunlao etc. on tba pirt of pronoana Is mats
almoit entiTel; b; the genitive «ate, and not by a derlvad poMeSilva ad-
jBBtiVB (618).

b. Exceptional caaea like nftKarasya m&rga^ the road to the city
(ft, le ehemin de Parit), ynsyK liaiii d^ta Ipaita^ (HBfa,) tw meteenger
to tohom I am tcanted, are occaii^nally met with,

see. The geoltlre U dependent on an adjective:

A. A so-caUed paitiriie genlil'e vlth a superlative, or anothei ward
of ElmiUi siibstantlTal valne: thui, Qref(haifa TlrO^iian heti of heroes;
Vlrudh&ib TliraTati (AY.) of plante the mighty {mighOttt) one.

b. Tory oftaa, by a tran^ter of the p)tae«slve genillTe ^m noun to
adjeellve, the adjectiie being treated aa tf it had nonn-Talae: tboa, taaya
ammai^ or anarQpati or sadrgoh rtaembliitg him (I. e. hit lUte); ttwya
priyll dear to him (hit dear one) ; taayft Vlditam unk/toion to him (hi*
unkaovm thing) ; h&vyaq oarf a^Inilai (RY.) to be laerijiced to by mortala
{their abject of taerifice) : ipalto narauftrS^ftm (HBh.) deiired of men
and women {their abject of de»ire]\ yasya baBya praofltal^ (B.) of
tohomioeour bom (hie eon); hantavyo 'omi na ta (MBh.) I am not to
be tlain of thee; Um arthlngiti TafLoajitavyam aati (R.) why shiuld
there ht a deceiving of eupplianiif

O, In part, by a coaatrnotlon ilmilar to that of terbj which take a
genitive object: thn;, abhijttft rSJalharm&f&m (It.) underttanding the
dutiee of a king.

S97. The genitive as object of ■ verb It:

a. A p»ieiglTe genitive of th» teclplant, by pregnant conatraction,
with verb] li^lfying give, impart, communicate, and the like: that, Tar&n
pradftyft 'eya (UBh.) having beilomed gifts upon him (made them hie by
bettoical); rljflo nivedltam (S.) it wot made knovm to Ike king (made
hie by knowledge); yad auyaaya pratiJbSya punar aoysaya dlyate
(M.) that after being promised to one she it given to another. Thlj con-
nrDC'lon, by which the genitive beomei substitate for a dative or locative,
ab^anda in the later Ungnage, and U extended eonaetimes to prablemattc
■nd difficult usee.

b. A (In niott eaaes, probably) pirtitlve ganlllve, as a Um oomplete
or lesi abeoluts object than an accnsatlva: thns, with verbs meaning ynr(iiA»
(eat, drink, et:.), ai p£ba ButAsya (AV.) drink (of) the soma; midhvalj
pfiyaya (RV.) cause to drink the sieeei draught; — vit)i verbs meinlng
impart (of Ihe thing Imparted) etr., as d4d&ta no am^tasya (RV.) bestoic
upon us immortality; — with votbJ meinlng enjoy, be satisfied ot JlUed

L.,j,i,....,LiOOgle

ses— ] 17. Dbclbnbion. 100

teith: *s, mAtay ftndhosa^ (RV) do fAou M;oy Iht jmee\ tjjaMyfi
pQn^anU (8,) ftey _^W icitt ftuttw; — with Tsrin meaning perceive, note,
care for, regard with tMllog of varioni kinda: *i, vAsi^thasya BtnratA
fndro a^TOt (RT.) Zndm Htlened to FaeieU^a tohc tDiu praiting Atm;
y&tha mfcma sm&rKt (AV.) <ft«< Ae m«)r think of mr\ taaja onlcopa
(Mfifa.) he wot tmgry at him.

O. A genitlre of more doabttul chuicter, with varba meiBlng ruh or
have authoriig: u, tv&m ifi^ v&eOn&m (RV.) Ihcu art lord of good
thingt; jiXbA tl&in ef&ih vtr^ftni (AVO that I may rule over &em;
katlLMh mrtyu^ prabluivati veda^iatraTidSm (H.) Aow Aw dtath
power over thote who krtote the Veda* and Ireatieeet

d. A genitlie, IniUtil ol in tblatlTe, li gomeUmet toand oted with a
verb of teeeltlag of any kiud (beailDg inclnded), and with one of feadng;
ihuf, yo rajOa^ pratigflu^ti lubdhaaya (H.) whoever aceepU a gift
from a greedy king; QI^u me [MBb.] learn from me; blbhlmaa tava
(MBhJ we are afraid of thee.

B98. A genitive in ita luual pouenlre senie ii often found as pradl-
eata, and not Beldom wiih the copula amittod: tbna, y&thi 'ao iii4iaa
k^ali^ CAV.) that thou may*»t be wholly mine; B»rvttfy saihpattlvaa
tMfya sadltnftuh jaaja mdnesain (H.) all good forfunee are hie who
hat a contented mind; — n objentt'e predicate, bbsrto^ patnub TiJ&-
nanti (M.) they reeogniee a ion at the htttbanda.

[^a8(&.' a. The prepositional conitrnctloiiLOf thejenltWe (1130) are for
the moat put witb inch pcefoeitions as are realljr noun-casea aod hare the
gOTeinment of iQcb: thai, agre, arthe, kfte, and tite like; also with
othei prepositional woids which, in the geneia) looieneat of use of iha
genitive, havs become a»inillated to theae. A few moie real piepoaitiona
lake the genitive: either DBnally, like up&ri ahoiie, or o<-eaalonally, like
adh4a, ant&r, &U.

b. A genitlTe la occasionally Died in the older langnage with an
adverb, either of place or of time: thoa, y&tra bvk oa knroklfetrisrft
(gB.) in whatever part of Karakthelra; y&tra tu btlAmer JityeU (MS.)
on what tpot of earth he may be bom; iditiulii Uma^ (KV.) at Utit
time of the day; yimyi ritryft^ pTSUt^ (HS.) on tho mom of what
night; dvil} smiiTataftntBya (K.) twice a year. Suoli oxpreaaion i« the
Uit oeonr also later.

300. a. The genitive It very little nied adveibiilly; a few genitlveg
of time ocoDt In the older language: aa, aktos by night, vaatoB by day;
and there are found later inch caeei aa kasya dt kUuya (9) after a
e^tain time; tatah kftlasya mahata^ pray^ilu (R.) then after a long
time he went forth.

b. A genitive, origiaally of poiseiaion, piaging over into one of general
concernment, cornea in the later langnage (the conittnction it unknown
earlier] to be med absDlDtely, with an agreeing participle, or quite rarely

j,i,....,L-'OOJ^IC

101 Ubw of the Looative. [ — 802

■a mdjMllve. Form luch cue* u the loUowiog — ps^yftto bakamurkhii-
■ya nakol&lr btaakfltftl; Bnta^ (H.) of t/te fooiiah heron, while he
looked on, the young tcert tattn by the ichneumoas, or gato *rdlt(krfttrk^
katbSI^ k&thayato mama (K8S.) hoi/ my night mu patted in feUing
ttoriet, or kftrtavyMya karmo^ah k^pram ahrlyamilpaaya kUal^
pibfttl tadrssam (H.] of a work needing to be done but left undone time
guiekly drink* up iti eatenee ~ come into caneDcy, by InuotBtng Indepeo-
duiM of the geaitlTB, tnch other cues 4}; diTaib Jag&ma mntllll&tb
paqyataih tad ft (R. ] he laerd then to heaven, the aicetici looking on ; OTadi
iJUapataB taaya devadatas t&dft lihyetya vAkyam Uia [UBh.) m he
thia lamented, a divine meeeenger coming addreaaed him ; iti v&dlna evft
'l^a dhennr ftvaTrte vanftt (R>eh.) while he that apoke, the cow eamefrom
the forttt. The genitive ilwayi lDili»t«s ■ living actoi, and the putlclple U
tifiiall; one of seetag or hearing or nttorlng, espeoUlly the farmer. The con-
■trnctianUsaldbj' the HindugiimmtrUns to MQiey in Implication of disiegHd
or detptte; and inch U often to be recogniied in it, thaii(h not preralUngly.
'801. Uaes of the Locative, a. The locative Is pToperly the
in-t»M, the caM eipreesing aitaation or location; but ite aphare of
use haa been somewhat eitended, so as to touch and overlap the
boondaiiea of other cases, for which it seema to be a Bnbadtote.

b. Unimportant variatioDS of the sense of m are tboae of amid
or among, on, and of. Of courae, alao, altnatioa in time aa well as
place ia indicated by the case; and it is applied to yet lees physical
relatioDB, to sphere of action and feeling and knowledge, to atate of
thioga, to accompanying circumatance; and out of this last grows the
freqnent age of the locative aa the case abaolate.

o. Moreover, by a pregtiant eonatruction, tbe looative U used
to denote the place of rest or cessation of action or motion [into or
on to inataadof moron; Qerman in with aecnsative instead of dative:
comparo EngHsb there tt>T thither],

SOS. a. The lootttie of iltnattoD in gptee hardly needs lltnstration.
An example or two are: y* devi divi athi (A^O vihidi of you goda
■ are in heaiien\ aa deve^a na yak^eqn t&dfk (HBb.) not among goda
or Yakehae it tuch a one; it&rvatasya pntb^ (R^O o" '^ "^« of the
mountain; TldAthe aanta devib (RV.) may the goda he at the asaembly;
daqaina pade [MBh.') at the tenth aiep.

b. Tbe locative of time Indicates the point of time at nhlch anything
takes plaea: thaa, asy^ ti;4bo vyAf^ftu (RV.) at the shining forth of
thia down; staatnlnn eva kile (HBh.) at juit thai time; dvlda^e -var^e
(MBh.) t'n the twelfth year. That tbe accusative la occaatonally nsed In
thU sense, instead of the loeatiTe, was pointed ont above (876 o).

o. The person with whom, instesd of the place at which, one la or
remains is pnt in the locative: thn«, ti^hanty aamln paf&ra^ (HS.)
animaia abide with him; gaiin vaaan (U.) living at a teaeher'i; and,
piegnantly, tArat trayl bhavifySmi (HBh.) ao long will X eleane to thee.

ioy Google

—J IV. Declension. 102

303. The Iocati*« of epbera or coadltlon i
freqnent Die : tlii», m&do kbim {ndro JagbSnn (RV.) in fary Indra tUuj
the dragon; mltr&sya lumatau B7I11UI (RV.) may ure be in the favor
of Milra; te vaoane rfttam (MBh.) dtlighled in (Ay words.

a. Thli conBtiuRtian Is, on the one hind, generailied Into in eipiet-
Flon for wi the matter or cate of, or with referenee to, rtapeetmg, and
takes Id the later lau^age a totj wide lange, teaching upon i^enltlTe and
datUe constmctEonB : tbna, b 'm&ih bh^ia grwue ^qre? a g6f u (AV.) be
generout (o hitn in retainert, in kortes, in cotVt; tijii {t sakhltri imahe
fRV.) Aim we beg for friendthtp; npftyo "yftifa mayft &Ji^ ftnftyane
tBV& (MBh.) thi* meotti icae dioised by mt for (with reference to) bringing
thee hitlier ; B&tltve kSra^iuh Btriyft^ (H.) the eaute of {in the eaee of)
a iroman'i chaetity; n& qabto 'bbavaa nlvBrai^e (HBh.) he leae not
capable of preventing.

( b^^Q the other hand, ^e eipresifon by the loratlTO (f a (ondmon ef
thing! In whfrh anjtlilng takes place, or ot a conditioning or accompan)ing
elicoDutuice, pa»ea over Into a well-mtiked absolute conitmctton, which is
knoirn sven In the eulleat lUge of tbs langnage, hot beeomee more fteqneiit
later. Traniltlonal eiamples are: hkve tvi Bdnt udite h&ve mti'
dby&ibdills div&^ (RV.) I eaU to thee altha ariem tun (tohm the tun
has rieen), I tail at midtime of the day; aparUhe k^tfl 'pi 0& na me
kopn^ (MBb.) and even in ea»t of an offence committed, there ie no
anger on my part.

O. The normal condition of tie absolute conitinetlon i» with a parti-
clple accom pausing the noun: thni, stinji barhl^l Bamldbftnd ngnftd
(KV.) ioA«n the barbls it itreum and the fire kindled; kile f Qbha prSpt»
(MBb.) apropitiom time having arrived; avaatuitiSyBih rfttr&T aat&aalik'
c&^TBlamblnl oandramasl (H.) the night having drawn to a dose,
and the moon r.iting on the nanmit of <A< western mountain.

d. But Ibe noau m«y be wanting, oi may be rrplaced by an adrerbial
substltnte (aa evun. tRthS, itl): thus, varqati ifAcn it raint; [sOrye]
aatuuita after mnset; ftdityosya dffyamfUie (3.) whih there is tern
[tome part] of the aun; Ity ardhokte (<}■) with that words half uttered;
umabbU? BamannJ&Ue (MBh.) it being fully attenUd to by at; waxa
ukte kalinK (MBh.) it being thus spoktn by Kaii; tathA *naftl>lt^ (^0
it being thus aecomplithed. So likewise the participle may be wanting (a
ropnla aati or the like having to be snpplled] : tbns, dure bkaye the cause
of fetir being remote; while, on the other hand, the paitlcipla aati etr. ii
somntimee lednndantly added to the other participle: thus, tath& kfte aati
it being thus done.

e. The loeatlieU beqnent'y Died adTerbiilly or prepoaitionally (1116):
thna, ■artke ot •kfte in the matter of, for the sake of; agre t» ft-ont
of; rte without; aamlpa near.

304. The pregnant constructloD by wbloh the locative comes to ex-
press the goal or object of motion or action or feeling exerrited Is not

ioy Google

1 03 Uses op the Locative. [—307

uncommaD tram the etrliest time. It ii b; no laetnB to be shupl; dlttin-
gnlihsd from the oidinuT coMtruotioiii the two pus Into one ■nother, trith
a donbtFnl t«rtll«ry between. It cic«un:

ft. Eipcclalty vith letba, u of trrlvlng, sending, pltctng, commnnt-
''4iiug, bestowing, and many othen, in litoationi where in icaasntiTe or
a datire (or a gauitiTe, S87 b) might be looked for, and extbangeable with
ihem; thai, ^4 {d dev^Q gaochatl (RV.) Ihat, truly, goet to (to be among)
the godt; im&ifa no yqlfi&m ajoftefa dhehl [ItV.] »et thi» offering of
ourt among the immorlab; yi ialfioAntl t&aam dfiultama (^.V.) who
pour in the juice into the plant* (or, the juiet ihat i* »i the plant*) ; mi
pi^aoohe "^are dhanam (B.) do not offer wealth to a lord; papftts
medinySm (HBh.] he feB to (eo a* to he upon) the earth; Bkandhe
kftTft (a.)pwUing on the shoulder; Badifratya pOrvam aemian (HBh.)
hoping before promited ui.

b. Often alio with noniiB and adJectlTe* la iimilai cooalrDctionB (the
iiutanoei not ilvayi eair to lepMate from tbote of the locative meaning
with refer«nee to: above, 808 a)-. tbUE, dayA aRrvabhatftfti compataion
toward all creatures^ anttrac"^ nU^adhe (MBh.) affection for the
yithadhan; raj& samyae T^tta^ aadS trayi (HBh.) the king haa ataai/*
befiaved properly iouiard thee.

306. The piepoiitloiu conatmed with the lowtice (IISS) sUnd to it
only in the relation of adrerblal elementa strengthening and directing iU
meaning.

800. Declensional forms aie made by the addition o£
endings to the stem, oi base of inflectioD.

a. The stem itself, however, in many woids and classes
of woids, ie liable to variation, especially assuming a stiongei
form in some oases and a weakei in others.

b. And between stem and ending aie aometimes inserted
connecting elements (oi what, in the recorded condition of
the language, have Uie aspect of being such).

O, Respecting all these polota, the detaila of treatment, as exhibited
by ewh claEB of words or by single words, will be given In tbe fallowing
chaptera. Here, howaTer, It Is desirable also to present a brief general view
<f them.

807. Endings: Singular, a. In the nominative, the nana!
masc. and fem. ending is ■ — which, however, U vantiDK in derivative
ft and i-Btems; It is also eupfaoQicsllr lost (150) by coDSODant-Btems.
Henters in general have no ending, but show in this case the tuie
■tern; a-stemB alone add m (as in the accna. masc.]. Among tbe
pTODODna, am is a freqnent masc. and fem, nom. ending (and is found
even In do. and pi.); and nenterg show a form In d.

ioy Google

807—] IV. Dbclbbsion. 104

b. Id the acouBative, m or Bim Is the masc. and fern, ending
— am being added after a conBonant and r, and after i and S in the
radical diviaioD, and m elsewhere after vowels. The neuter acoaBative
is like the nomiiiative.

o. The instrumental ending for all geuders alike Is &. With
final 1- and u-vowels, the & is vsrionsly combined, and in the older
langnage It ia sometimea lost hy contraction with them. Stems in a
make the case end in ens [aometimeH enX in V.), and those in S make
it end in oyS; but instaDces occnr, in the early language, of immediata
addition of & to both a and B.

d. The dative ending ia in general e^ and with It llkewiae the
modes of combination of 1 and u final are various (and disappearance
by contraction not unknown in the oldest langnage). The a-steros
are quite irregular in this case, making it end in Bya — excepted is
the pronominal element -ema, which combines (apparently) with e to
-Bm&i. In the personal pronouns is found bli;ain (or bjam).

e. A fuller ending &1 (like gen.-abl. fin and loc. &m: see below;
belongs to feminine stems only. It is taken (with ioterpoaed ;) by
the great class of those in derivative ft; also by those in derivative I,
and {aa reckoned in the later language] in derivative n. And later
it Is allowed to be taken by feminine stems in radical i and n, and
even by those in 1 and u: these last have it in the earliest language
in only exceptional iDstances. For the substitution of fti for sbl.-gen.
fta, see below, h.

f. The ablative lias a special ending, d (ort), only In a-stems,
maac. and neut, tbe a being lengthened before it (except in the per-
sonal pronouns of Ut and 2d person, which have the same ending
at in the pL, and even, in the old language, in the dual). Everywhere
else, the ablative is identical with the genitive.

K* The genitive of a-stems laud of one pronominal u-stem,
amu) adds sya. Elsewhere, the usnal sbl.-gen, ending is as; but its
irregularities of treatmeot in combination with a atem-final are con-
siderable. With 1 and u, it is either directly added (only in the old
language), added with interposed n, or fused to es and os respect-
ively. With T (or »r) it yields ur [or us: 169 b).

b. The fuller fta is taken by feminine etems precisely as fti is
taken in the dative: see above. But in the langnage of the Brah-
manas and Sutraa, tlie dative-ending ftt is regularly and commonly used
instead of fte, both of ablative and of genitive. See 366 d.

i. The locative ending is 1 in consonant- and p and a-«tems
(faeing with a to e in the latter). The i- and u-stems (nnlem the
final vowel is saved by an ioterpoeed n) make the case end in ftu;
but the Veda has some relics or traces of the older forms (ay-i 1?)
and av-1) out of which this appears to have sprung. Vedic locatives

ioy Google

105 CiSB-EHDlNaS. [—809

ftom i-it«mB end bIbo in & Bnd L The pFonominal element -bum
makaa the locfttive -smln. Stems In an in the older lingiuge often
kwe the 1, and use the bare item as locative-

j. The ending ftm is the locaUre oorrespoudent to dat. ftl and
abl.-gen. Ke, and is taken under the same circum stances: see above.

k. The vocatire (uoleas by accent: 314) is distinguished from
the Domlnative only in the singular, and not quite alwsja there. In
a-Btems, it la the unaltered stem, and so also in most consonant-stems;
bnt nentera in kd and in maj drop the a; and the oldest language
hae sometimea a vocative in a from etems in nt and fie. Stems in f
change this to ns. In masc. and fem. 1- and a-stems, the case ends
respectively in e and o; In neuters, in the same or in 1 and a. Stems
in ft change K to e; derivative i and Q are shortened; radical stems
In long vowela use the nominative form.

308. Dual. a. The dual has — except ao far as the vocative
is sometimes distinguished from nominative and accusative by a dif-
ference of accent: 314 — only three case-forms: one for Dom., accus.,
and Toc.; one for instr., dat., and abl.; and one for gen. and loc.

b. But the pronouns of 1st and 2d person in the older language
distingnish five dnal cases: see 492b.

o. The masc. and fem. ending for nom.-accus.-voc. is in the
later language usually ftu; but instead of this the Veda has pre-
y^lingly &. Stems In S make the case end in e. Stems In i and u,
maee. and fem., lengthen those vowels; and derivative I in the Veda
remains regularly unchanged, though later it adds ftu. The neuter
ending is only 1; with final a this combines to e.

d. The universal ending for the Instr.-dat.-abl. is bby&m,
before which final a Is made long. In the Veda, it is often to be
read as tvo syllables, Uiifim.

e. The universal ending of gen.-loc. is os; before this, a and
ft alike become e (al).

300. Plural, a. In the nominative, the general masculine
and feminine ending is as. The old language, however, often makes
{he case in ftau instead of Se from a-stems, and in a. few examples
also from ft-stens. From derivative i-stems, ia instead of yaa is the
regular and nsnal Vedio form. Pronominal a-stams make the masc.
nom. In e.

b. The neuter ending (which is accusative also) is in general i;
and before thia the final of a stem is apt to be strengthened, by
prolongation of a vowel, or by insertion of a nasal, or by both. But
in the Veda the hence resulting fonns in ftnl. Ini, Qnl are frequentiy
abbreviated by loss of the ni, and sometimes by further shortening
of the preceding vowel.

ioy Google

800—] IV. Dbclbhsion. 106

0. The accuaatlTe endiog is also aa in oonaoiiaii totems and
in the radical division of I- and Q-stems (and in tlio old language
even elsewhere). Stems in short towsIb lengthen those vowela and
add in the muonline n (for ns, of which abundant traces remain),
and in the feminine b- In the neuter, this cue is like the nominative.

d. In the instiumental, the ease-ending is everywhere bhia
except In a-stems, where in the later language the case always ecda
in Sis, but in the earlier either In aia or the more regular ebhia
(Sbhia in the two personal pronouns; and the pronominal stem a [EOl]
makes ebUs only).

•■ The dative and ablative have in the plural the same form,
with the ending btayas (in Veda often bhlaa), before which only a
is altered, becoming e. But the two personal pronouns distingaish
the two cases, having for the ablaldve the singular ending (as above
pointed out), and for the dative the peculiar bbyam (almost never in
Veda bhlam), which they ezteod also into the singular.

f. Of the genitive, the universal ending is Sm; which (except
optionally after radical I and tt, and Id a few scattering Tedio in-
stances) takes after final vowels an Inserted consonant, a in the pro-
nominal declension, n elsewhere; before n, a short vowel is length-
ened; before a, a becomes e. In the Veda, it is frequently to be
proDODQoed In two syllables, as a-am

g. The locative ending is so, without any exceptions, and the
only change before it is that of a to e.

b. The vocative, as in the dual, differs from the nominative
only by its accent

310. The normal scheme of endings, as lecogniied by
the native giammarianB (and oonveniently to be assumed as
the baiBiB of apecial descriptione), is this:

SinKtkr. Dual. PlmL

m. t. n. m. r. IL m. f, lu

bbia
bbyaa
bhyaa

a. It Is taken in bulk by the consonantal stems and by the rad-
ical division of i- and Q-stems; by other vowel-stems, wiUi more or
less considerable variations and modificattons. The endings which
have almost or quite unbroken range, through stems of all olaasea,
are bhy&m and OS of the dual, and bhie, bbyas, Im, and an of the

ioy Google

107 Stronq akd Weak Stku. [—3)8

311. Variation of Stem. a. By fai the most im-
poitant matter undei this head ia ihe distiaction made in
la^e claaaes of woids [chiefly those ending in consonants)
between strong and weak stem-forms — a distinction stand-
ing in evident connection with the phenomena o£ accent.
In the nom. and accus. siag. and du. and the nom. pi.
|the fire cases whose endings are never accented: 316 ft),
the stem often has a stronger or fuller form than in the
rest : thus, for example (424), JlsJT^R raj&n-am, ^sTHt rSjan-
511, (IslHH rtjan-aa, against ^fTslT rajfl-5 and ^fTsjftTT rSja-
bhia; or (460 b) tl^TrPT mahint-am and (447) g^rPT adfiat-
am against R^RT mahat-S and Q^ adat-s. These five,
therefore, are called the cases with strong stem, or, briefly,
the strong cases; and the rest are called the cases with
weak stem, or the weak cases. And the weak cases,
again, are in some classes of words to be distinguished into
cases of weakest stem, or weakest cases, and cases of
middle stem, oi middle cases: the former having endings
beginning with a vowel (instr., dat., abl.-gen., and loc. sing.;
gen.-Ioo. du.; ace. and gen. pi.); the latter, with a consonant
(instr .-dat. -abl. du.; instr., dat.-abl., and loc. pi.).

b. The class of strong cases, as above defined, belongs
only to masculine and feminine stems. In neuter inflection,
the only strong cases are the nom. -ace. pi.; while, in those
stems that make a distinction of weakest and middle form,
the nom.-acc. du. belongs to the weakest class, and the nom.-
acc. sing, to the middle: thus, for example, compare (408)
ilrOf^ pratydfic-i, nom. -ace. pi. neut., and UriiyH praty-
dfio-as, nom. pi. maso. ; 51fft^ pratlc-i, nom.-acc. du. neut.,
and HhWIH pratIo-6fl, gen.-loc. du.; ^rll^^ pratydk, nom.-
acc. sing, neut., and HrUPw pratyig-bhis, instr. pi,

318. Other Tailitions concern chiefly the Ad*I VQirel of a stem, and
my be mainly left to be pointed out in detail below. 0( coniequenco

Diaii.zec.y Google

312—] IV. Declension. ]08

enough to mentloD heia la ouly the gu^pa-sbeiigtheDlag of > tiaal 1 ot n,
vhleh in tba Utet Ungnige ta alwtra made befoie aa of nom. pi. uid a
of dat. alng. Id inasc. and fern. ; In the Veda, It doea not alvaya take place ;
nor Is it foiMdden in dat. aing. neul. ilm; and it is leen BometimM In
loc. ling. Final f has gai^ft-strengthenlng In loc. aing.

813. Insertions between Btem and Ending. Arter TO«el-items,
an added n often makes Its appeacanoe before an ending. The appendage
la of least qneatioiiable origin In nom.-acc. pi. neat, wbeie tbe Intercbange
in the old langnage of the fotnu of ft- and l-stema viih those of fta- and
In-steou is pretty complete^ and the a-stenu follow their analogy. Else-
where, It ia most widely and flnnly eatabllsbed In the gen. pi., wheie in
the great maas of cases, and tiom the earliest period, the ending is vlrta-
ally nfim after a tdwoI. In the t- and a-stams of the later language, tiie
iostr. alng. of maM. and nent. Is aeparat«d by it« presence from the fem.,
and it Is In the other weakest cases made a usual distinction of neuter forms
from maacnllnei but tbe aipect of the matter in the Teda Is very different:
there the sppeaiance of tlie n is everywhere sporadic^ the neuter shows no
special inclination to take it, and it la not eiclnded even from the femi-
nine. In the ending ena from ft-stems (later Invariable, earllei predomi-
nating) its presence appears to have worked the most oonalderable trans-
formation of original ehape.

a. The place of n before gen. pi. ftm is taken by s In pronominal
B.' Slid S-stems.

b. Tbe y aflei tt before the endings ftl, Ss, and &di U moat probably
ail insertion, such a; Is made elsewhere (SS8).

Accent in Declension.

314. ft. Ad » rule without exception, the vocative, if accented
ikt all, ie nccented on the first Billable.

b. And in the Veda (the case is a rare one], whenever a syllable written
as one 1* to be pronounced as two by restoration of a semivowel to vowel
form, the first element only has the vocative accent, and tbe syllable as
written is clronmBei (88-4) : ihns, d^Sita (I. e. diftua) when dlisyllabie,
but dy&uB when monosyllabic; Jy^e when for jt&ke.

o. But the vocative is aocented only vb«n it etands at the be-
gionlng of a lentence — or, in verse, at the beginning aUo of a
metrical dirieion or p&da; elsewheie it is accentless or enclitic: tbua,
igne y&di y^]&&di parlbhAr Aal (RV.) O Agtii! uihalmer offering
tkou proUeUtt; but &p« tvft 'gnft ^ 'mosl (RV.) unto OtM, Agni, u>«

d. A word, or more than one word, qualifying a vocativs — nauaily
an adjective oi appositlve nonn, but sometimes a dependent nonn in the
genitive (very rarely In any other case) — coDstltntea, to Car as aocent is

L,j,l,;ec.y Google

109 Accent. [—316

conceiDsd, * DDity with th« tomUv; : thna (ill the exuuples horn BV.),
it the beginning of a p&da, with first syllsble of the comblnitloD aotented,
{ndra br&ta^ O brother Indra! r^Jan soma O king Soma! ykvi^\fb&
data mo»t yonAfui mnimger.' hdtar yaviftba Bukrato nu>»l ymt^ful
skilUd offerer! 6rJo nap&t aahaeran mig/iiy ton of atrengUi ! — ia the
inteiioi of & pftda, without acceut, BomOaa ladra girva^a^ the tomtu,
O long-loving Indra! tSv a^rlnS bhadratuwtS aup&Ql ye, O A^int
of propiiiout and beautiful hande! & r&Jiluft maha ftaeya K^P^ hither,
ye two kingly guardian* 0/ greet order!

e. On the other hind, two oi more independoDt ot ooSrdlnite loostlTea
>t the beginning of > pSda ue regulitlf sod UBnilly both aooented ; thua,
p{tar mata^ O father! O mother! 4gna fndra T&ro^a mitra d^a^i
Agni! Indra! Varuna! Mitra! gode! q&taniute q&takrsto thou of
a hundred aide! of a hundr/d arte! T&Bi;tha 9£ilcTa didiva^ pttraka
belt, bright, thining, eleaneing one! ttrjo na]^Kd UiAdya^oott ion of
elrength, proptiioueh/ bright one! But the texta oftei occmIodiI IrrtgnUt
eicoptloDi both to this and to tbe proceding mle,

f. FoT brevity, the voMtlve dnil ud plural will be glTen in the pai-
edlgma below tloDg irlth the noninattTe, wltboot taking the tronble to
apedfy in each Inatsnce that, If the latter be aecented elacwhare than on
(he Br*t gyllable, the aceeut of the voMtlve U different.

316. As regards the otber cases, rules for change of accent in
declension have to do only with monosyllables and with stems of
more than one syllable which are accented on the final ; for, if a stem
be accented on the pennlt, or any other syllable farther back — as
is B&rpaQt, vari, bh&gavant, eom&naa, sah&srBTflJa — (he accent
remains npon that syllable through the whole inflection (except in the
vocative, as explained in the preceding paragraph).

a. The only eiceptloni are a few nnmeral sterna: aee 488.

316. Stents accented on the final (including monoByllables) are
subject to variation of accent in declension chiefly in virtue of the
fact that some of the endings have, while others have not, or have
in less degree, a tendency themselves to take tbe accent. Thus:

a. The endinga of the nomlnatlTe and aecuaatiie singular and daal
and of the nomfnatlTe piuial (that ia to Bay, of the strong cases: 811) have
no tendency to take the accent away from the stem, and aie therefore only
accented when a flnal vowel of the stem and the vowel of the ending are
blended together into a single vowel or diphthong. Tbns, from dattA oouie
dattaii (=datt4 + au] anddattas (=datti + aa); bnt from nadi come
nadySii CE=nadI+au) and nadyaa (smadf+as)-

b. All the other endings sometimes take the accent; bnt those begiuning
with • vowel (i. e. of the weakest cases: 811) do so more readily than
those beginning with a consonant (I. c. of the middle cases: 311). Thar,
from 11&68 come n&va and nHubhls; fiom mahAnt, however, come
mahatlE but mah&dbhls.

itizecy Google

317—] IV. Declension. 110

The general rules of accent, then, maj be thus stated:

317, In the deolenBion of monosyllabic stems, the accent falls
upon the ending in all the weak cases (without distinction of middle
and weakest)- thus, nftv^ nfinbbyam, aftv^, nSufu; T&d, Tfigbhla,
vftcam, vAkfu.

a. Rut eoma monosyllible itemi retain the accent thiODghont: Cbns,
26bhlB, g&Tim, g6fu. For tncb casfg, tee below, 860, 361 o, d. 37fi,
380, 4S7. And in tlie a^c. pi. the stem Is evm otiensr tccented than
the ending, «omc woidt also admitting either accentuation.

Sie. Of polysj'llabic stems ending in consonants, only a few shift
the accent to the ending, and that in the weakest (not the middle)
cases. Such are:

a. Preient paitlclplei In &nt oi it: thug, from tudint, tndati ani
tudattbs and tudatam; bat tud&dbhj&m and tuditsn.

b. A few adjeetivea faiving tba (orni et sneh paiticiplea, ai maliat^
bfha.t&a.

e. 9t!ina o( which the accented flnal loaei Ita Erllabic chua~ter bf
tyiicopationorth?Tonel: thue, malJ&it, mQrdlmi, d&mn&a (from nuJJ&n
et^; 423).

d. Other aporadlc cases will be noticed nnder the different declensions.

e. Case-forms used adverbially sometimes ehow a changed accent:
Gee lUOff.

319. Of polysyllabio stems etidlng in accented short vowels
the final of the stem retains the accent if it retains its syllabic
identity: thus, dattina and datt jya from datt&; agnina and agn&ye
from agni; and also dattibhyaa, Bgnlbhls, and so on. Otherwise,
the accent is on the ending: and that, whether the final and the end-
ing are combined into one, aa in dattfifs, dhenSA, ogniiii, dbends,
and so on: or whether the fieal is changed into a semivowel before
the ending: thus, dhenvlt, jfUxt, jftmyos, bBhTds, etc.

a. But Sm of the gen. pi. from atema In i and 6 anl f may, and In
the older language alnays doei, take the accent, though e.'parated by n from
the stem : thus, acQiitJm, dlieailaitm, pi^am. in RV., even derivatlTe
i-3tcmB Bho'* usually the Fame shift: tbua, bahvln^. Of stems In it,
only numerals (483 a] follow this rule: thus, saptftnim, dafSnim.

320. Boot-fords In 1 and il as flnal memberg oT comp'>unds retain the
ac^nt througboat, not shitting it to any of the endings. And in the older
language there are polysyllabic words In long flnal vowels which follow In
this respect aa in others the analogy of the root-dec lenslon (below, 3B5ir.).
Apart from th^'se, the treatmrn'. ot sl-'ms in derivitive long vowels is, a<
regards ai-eent, the same ai of those in short vowels — save that the Ion ■
is not thrown forward npon tbe ending in gen. plural.

,1,1.0, Google

Classification.

CHAPTER V.

NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
321. &. Tm£ aooordance ia iaflMtion of substantire
and adjective stems is so complete that the tiro oaanot be
separated in tieatmeot from one another.

b. They may be classified, foi convenieaoe of descrip-
tion, as follows:

I. Stems in ^ a;
n. Stems in ^ i and 7 u;

III. Stems in )9T ft, ^ I, and tJt 11: namely, A. ladical-
stems(and a few otheis inflected like them); B. denvative stems ;

IV. Stems in n f (or 51^ ar);
V; Stems in consonants.

o. There le nothing ibsolate tn thii clasilBoatian and unngement;
It U meiely belieTed t« be open to w few objections ta any other. Mo
general igitement has been reached among Bcbolars as to the number and
order of Sanskrit declensions. The stems in a are here treated first became
of the great predominance ot the clui.

88S. Tbe dlvisioD-liDe between aubstftiitire and adjective, always
an uncertain one in early Indo-EuropeaD language, la even more
wavering in Sanskrit than elsewhere There are, however, in all the
4eclensionB as divided above — unless we except the stems in r oj
ar — words which are distinctly adjectives; and, in general, they
are inflected precisely like nonn-Btems of the same final: only, among
con Bon ant-stems, there are certain sub-claBseB of adjective stems with
pecnliarities of inflection to which there IB among nouns nothing cor-
responding. Bnt there are alBo two conBiderable classeB of adjectlve-
couponndB, requiring special notice: namely —

3S3. Compound adjectives having as final member a bare verbal
root, with tbe value or a present participle (383 a ff): thus, sii-dfq weU-
hoking; pra-badli forekmmoing; »-drdh not hating; veda*vid Veda-
kaowing; v^tTa-hiui Vitra-slayitig; upastha-s&d titling in tht lap.
Every root Is liabla to be used in this way, and such compounds are
not infrequent in all ages of the language: aee chapter on Compoands,
below (laeS),

ioy Google

SaS—] . v. NOCN8 AND ADJECnVEe. 1 J2

a> Tbli clut U eBientfally only a special cUbb of componnd adjecttvas,
since In the earlleit Veda tbe timple as well ae the aompoonded root wu
gometiiiies uBed adJecHvely. But the oompeuDded root vm from the begiDnlng
much more often so aied, and the later the more eiclualTely, eo that
prsotically the e1a»» ii > aeparate and impottaut ooe.

324. Compound adjeotives having a noun as final member, but
obtaining an ftdjective sense seoondarily, by having the idea of
poiteuion added, and being infiected as adjectives in the three gen-
ders (IS9Sff.). Thus, ]^T«4&k&in4 detire of progmy, whence the ad-
jectire pr^Jaklma, meaning denrotu [i. e. having dtiire) 0/ progtny;
eabh&rya (sa+bli&ryi) having ont'e wif« along; and so on.

a, la a few cues, t,Uo, tbe flnal nenn is syDtaeHosIly ot^ect of the
prec^dmg member (1808-10): thas, RtimKtra imtnodarate (atlmBtrun
bti/ond mtaiurt); T&va;4ddTef&a driving away anemia.

326. Hence, under each declension, we have to notice how a
root or a noun-stem of that declension is Inflected when Goal member
of an adjective compound.

a. As to accent, it needs only to be remarked here that a root*
word ending a oomponnd has the accent, but (380) loses tbe peoa-
liarity of monosyllabic accentuation, and does not throw tbe tone
forward upon the ending (except aSo in certain old forms: 410).

Oecleniion I.
stems (maBculine and neuter) in q s,
826. a. This declension contains the majority of all the
declined stems of the language.

b. Its endings deviate moie widely than any others
from the normal.

887. Endings: Slngntar. a. The nom. msac. baa the normal
ending a.

b. The aco. (masc. and neut.) adds m (not am); and this form bae
the office also of nom. neuter.

o. The Instr. change* a to ena nniformly in the later Ungual ^ and
eTBQ In the oldest Tedic this ia the predominant endiug (in RV., eight
niutba of all casea). Its flnal la in Vedlc leree frequently made long (anft).
But the normal ending ft — thus, ;ajfL£, DUbivft, mahitvit (foiy^JlLAna
etr.) — is alao not rue in the Veda.

d. The dat. has Bya (ae if by adding ays to a), alike in ail age»
of the language.

e. The abl. has t (or doubtless d: It is Imposaible from tbe evi-
dence of tbe Sanakrit to tell oblch It the original form of the ending),

j,i,....,LiOOglC

113 DBOLBHBION I., O-BTEUS. [—819

bafore vhlob & !■ made loDf: thli ondiDf 1* found fa do oQiot noaii-
declenston, and elMwhtn only in tbe penooal proaoDns (of til nDmben).

f. Th« gen. hu mya added to the flnal a; and tlii* endiDg U alto
limited to K-il«int (with tlie tlngla aioeptlon ot the pranonn amAffft:
SOI). lU flnal a li In onlj' tbtee oaiw made loag In the Teda; and Iti
y li TOoallEed (aola) almoit ai laiely.

g. The iDB. endt In a (*« It by combining the normal •nding 1 with
tiie final of the item), wlthont eioepllon,

h. The Toe. la the baie atem.

828. Dual. a. The dual endlnga in general aie the normal one*.

b> The Dom., aec, and tdc. maac. end in the later langnage «lira}i In
fta. In the Teda, hoTBTer, Ae uaael ending la aimple S (in RV., In
aeren eighth* of the ooonrreneea), The aame caaea in the neut end In a,
irhioh appeara to be the reanlt of fnaion of the ttem-flnal with tbe normal
ending L

0> The initr., dat., and abl. have bhylbii (In only one or two Tedlo
inttancea reaolved into bhiSm), with the atem-final lengthened to ft befoie It.

d. The gen. and las. have a y inaerted after the atem-flnal before oa
(or aa If the a had been changed to •). In one or two (donbtfnl] Tedte
Inatanoef (as alao In the pronominal forma enoB and yofl), oa ia anbatltnted
for the final a.

328. Plaial. a. The nom. maao. hai in the later langnage the
Doimal ending as combined with the final a to Bs. Bnt In the Teda the
ending KMS initead ia frequent (one third of the ooonirencei In RT., bat
only one twenty-flfih In the peculiar paita of AV.).

b. The ace. maao. enda in Bn (for earlier fins, of which abundant
traces are left in the Teda, and, under the diagnlae of apparent enphonic
combination, even In the later language; lee abOTe, 808 B.).

o. The nom. and «oc nent. have In the later langaage alwaya the
ending &nl (like the an-atflma; aee 4S1; or elaa with □, aa in the gen.
pi., before normal 1}, But In the Veda this ending altematea with almple
& (which tn RT. la to Boi aa three to two, In point of fieqnency; in AT.,
ai three to four}.

d. The Inatr. end* later alwaya in Sla; but In the Teda la found
abundantly the mote nonnal fonn abhla (in RV., nearly aa frequent as SIb;
in AT., only one Bfth aa frequent).

a. The dat. and abl. have bli;aB aa ending, with e Inatead of the
final a before it (aa In the Tedle inetr. ebbia, the loo. pi., the gen. loc.
du. [?], and the Inatr. alng.). The teaoluHon Into abhias U not infrequent
In the Teda.

f. The gen. enda lu ftnfim, the final a being lengthened and having

n inaerted before the normal ending. The S of the ending la not aeldom

(In leaa than half the inatancea) to be read aa two ayllahlei, aamt oplnlona

are divided at to whether the reaclntlon It hlttorical ot metrical only. A

WhltDSf, Orammar. 3. ei. S

ioy Google

TOT •null noMbtc (Uf-a-4oHii) of namplM Of timfie Sm u «ading
liutMd ot laim Munit la BT.

g. Tha loo. eadi In •fU — tlut ii lo uy, irlth Ui« BCTmtl mdfDg,
before whiob (lie iten-Onal li Aiaged W • (with OKweqaoDt ihMiga of a
t« n. ISO).

h. Of ftccent, In this deolenBion, oothlng raqnim to be Mid; the
■TlUble Moented in tha Btmn retaini Hi awn aeoant tfarougkont

880. Examples of declension. Ai ex&mples of the
infleotion of a-atema may be taken ^iHT kSma m. love;
^ deT& m. ffod; 51 (TO Bsyi n. mouM.
Siofnlu:

M. Einii^

>n^

WRPJ^

ktmu

dsT&a

■arimi

A. ^iPFI^

■K

sJltUM

1>^M».1

dav&m

aayfcaT

1. sm^

■^1

WIHjH

ktmena

devioa

laydiia

D. ^mra

"^^nr

MTWnj

ktmftja

dsv^lra

iB7l4«

Ab. ^irtn?!^

^^

MIHITf^

Utm«

d«Ht

Sarilt

0. WMflT

^olHI

M'lvuva

kimura

deir&arft

L. Jfif^

1^

cnfo

Utma

dav^

Bayi

T. ^fiq

>t

51?Q"

k&m«

din

fay*

Dd>):

«. A. V. ERT^

•^

W(?t

ktm&a

devad

aayi

I.D.Ab. ctiim^lH

"^^I^HllJ^

STOTMIW

dartblifKm

tarlibfarim

<?■ t. ^iiwt^

*^u)n

Mmjul*!^

kimaroB

davAyoa

sarliyoB

Plnnl:

H.V. ^(UmT

*^^

WHIiCi

k&nto

dev«a

Bmyktd

i, Google

DDCLBHBIOK I., R-STBMS.

5iWT_

"^

snRjift

k&nSn

d»iu

ftsyioi

*/8|H^

-m.

mii/Ih^

kdm^

devsla

Bt^B

^TiWi-TIfl^

"^^TIH

*(n-u*-Tni

kamebb7»s

dav6bl)7U

ftajr^bhyaa

+WHW^

>ipnii^

MIHIWI*!^

Ubotabi

devitnKin

•.rkasn

^i^jj

■^

^"^5

kame^u

dev6;u

ft.7^U

EumplM of tin pMuUar V«dlo ftrai v*: I

& Slag.: Iiutr. nv&theus, yt^Bi (sach genltiT* formi u i^vftolK I

*Ts fntfAj ap«ndle), I

b. Dn. : nom. etc. muo. devt; gen.-los. J^aatria (item pastyk). I

O. PI.: nom.-Too. miM. daTjUasi nest. 7«ai; liwtr. dw^UliS; gm. |

MrittiCi», davitiwAm. '

831. Among oonDB, there ftrd no irregalarities Id thia decleneioa.
For irregalsi numeral bases in a (or an], see 4S3-4. For the irreg-
nUrities of prOQomin&l stems in a, which are more or less fully
sbarod also by a tt\r adjectives of pronominal kindred, aee the chapter
00 Ptonoana (MSt).

AdJeotiTes,

S3B. Otiginal adjectives in a are an exceedingly large olasa, the
great majority of all adjectives. There Is, however, no each thing as
a feminine atom in a; for the feminine, the a Is changed to & — or
often, tboagh far iMa often, to I; and tta declenaion is then like that
of aenft or devi (S94). An example of the complete declenaion of an
a^JMtive »4tem Is tfae three genders will be given below (3W).

a. Wkether & mwcnent item in a ibill roim iu rsmlnlne in ft or
in I U > fuestloo to be deterailiied In great put only b; aotokl iiuge,,>nd
not by gnmmitical idle. Certain Imjtoituit clusM ot vordi, howevsr, etu
be pointed oat which take the Icti common andtag I tot tbe feminine: Ibni,
1. tbe (very nnmerom) «econd>ry dertiitlTes In a with v^ddhl ot the Arit
■ylkble (1304): b. g. &mltr& -trf, nutna^ -;I, ptvamSnil -xd, plor-
l^amloi -ail % piimarr derlTtllreg In ana with tccent on the radlcil sylUble
(1160): e. g. oodana -nl, saihgrAfaa^a •ifl, Bnb]i&gBifak4ra9a 'Ul;
3. primuy deilTitlTM In a, with strengtbeaing of the rtdical tylbble,
htTlDg » qnail-pirtlciplel meenlng: e. g. dtvikarii -Tl, avalcrSm& -ml.

8*

Dgil.ze.., Google

83S— ] V. KOUMB AND AdJBOTIVEB. {16

rathRTSh& -hi (but there are nuoy exceptloiu)^ 4. eecoDdo; deiivatlTee
in mayft (1225) end tana (lS4Se): e. g. ft^asmAya -yl; adyataaa
-nl; 5. moit oidlnal nnmetela (4B71l}: e. g. pafloam& •mi, navadafi
-^i, trUqattomA -mi. Not a few words make the femlniae in eithei S
or I; (. g. k6vala or -U, ugr£ ot -rl, pSpft or -pf, i5m^ oi •mi; bnt
ordinully only one of theie la accepted aa regntar.

3S3. There »e no verbal roots ending in a. Bat a ie sometimes
BubstitDted for the Goal K of a root (and, rarely, for final an), and it
ie then inflected like an ordinary adjective in a (aee below, 354).

334. a. A noun ending In a, when occurring as final member of
an adjective compound, is Inflected like an original adjective in a,
making its feminine likewise in S or I (367).

b. For the moat part, an adjectlTe compouad having a noon In a as
fln&l member makea ita feminine In I. Bnt theie at« numeiom exeeptlon;,
oeitain nanot tatiog, ueually ot alwayt, i instead. Some of the commonest
of tbeae are sa (oUowi: ak^ eye (e. g. loblt&kql, dvyakfl, gairftk^i),
panja leaf (e. g. tilapai^l, aaptapan^l; but ekapar^), mukha face
(e. g. kr;namaklu, durmukhii but trimukh& etc.), afiga limb, body
(e. g. anavadyUigi, BarvKfigi; bat oaturaAgB etc.), kega hair (^e. g.
Btikefl, muktake^I or .qS, etc.), karna ear (e, g. mah3kan;^i; but
gokar^ft etr.), ndara btUy (e. g. lambodarl), mula root (e. g. pafi-
oamoli; but oftener qat&mulft etc.). The very great majaiity ot lOch
nouni (as the examples indicate) signify parts of the body.

(^ On the other lutud, a feminine noun ending in derivative &
sbortens its final to a to form a masculine and neuter base: aee 367 o.

d. In frequent caaep, nouna of conaooant ending are, la Snala of com-
pounda, transferred to the a-declenaion by an added sufSx a (1206 a) or
ka ()9S2).

Declension II.

stems (of all genders] in ^ i and 7 u.

333. The stems in ^ i and 7 u are inflected in so close
accordance with one anothei that they cannot be divided
into two separate declensions. They are of all the three
genders, and tolerably numerous — those in ^ 1 mote
numerous than those in 7 u, especially in the feminine
[there aie more neuters in 3 u than in ^ ij.

a. The endings of this declension also difi'er frequently and
widely from the normal, and the irregularitiea in the older language
are nnmeroua.

ioy Google

]17 DECLBKSIOH II., 1- AND n-STEM8. [ — 836

330. Endlnca: ainguliT. a. The nom. muc. and fsm. adds to the
*t«iD the aonnil ending a. The nom. and leo. neat. U the l»re (tern,
tdthODt ending. In the Tedi, the final a of > fe« neateri 1b lengthened
(948 b): thai, vai, parA.

b. The *cc. mue. and fem. adda m to the stem. Vedie fortai In ittm
and a&m, and, with u, inam and nnam, are eieeMlvely rare, and donbtTal.

e. The Inttr. fem. Id the Utet Iingnage takes the nonnal ending &
■imp];, while the maac. and neat Insert n before <t, making infi and vtai.
But In the Teda, forms in yK and vK (ot IS and nS.) are not ioft^qnent
In mate, and neat, also; while Inft Is fonad, veiy nrely, m a fem. ending,
HoHOVer, fem. 7B is often (In two thirds of the ocenrrenoes) oontraeted to
\; and this is sTen sometlmeB shortened to i. An adverbial Initr. In uyt
from halr-a-doien stems In n occnrs.

d. The dst. mase. and fem, gnnitei the final of the stem before the
ending e, making e^e ancl Kve. The«e are the prevailing endings In the
T«da likewise; bat the more normal ja and ve (or ne) also occur', and
the fem. has Id this ease, ai in the instr., sometimes the form I for le.
Id the later language, the neuter Is cequired In this, at in all the other
weakest eases, to Insert n before the normal ending: but In the Veda such
totms are onir sporadic; and the neut. dat. has also the forms Aje, va,
ftve, like the other genders.

e. The abl. and gen. masc and (em, have regularly, both earlier and
liter, the ending a with guuated vowel before it; thns, ee, oa; and In the
Teda, the neut fDini) the cases in the same way; although unaa, required
later, is also not infrequent (iaaa does not oeeor). But the normal forms
yaa (or iaa) and vaa (or tum] ue also freqnent In both maso. and neuter.
As masc. ending, XUUM ocours twice in RV. Tha anomalons dldy&t (so TS, ;
In the corresponding passages, vidfAt VS., didyftut K., didiv&a HS.)
Is of doabtfnl cbarscter.

t. The toe maic. and fem. has for legnlar ending In the later lan-
guage &11, replacing both finals, i and a. And this is In the Veda also the
most freqnent ending; but, beside It, the 1-stems foim (abont halt la often
in BV.) their loc. In &: thus, agaft; and thli Is fonnd once even in the
neuter. The RV. has a number of examples of masc. and neat. locatlTes
in avl (the normal ending and the a gnnated before it) from u-stems;
and certain doubtful traces e( a corresponding (^ from i-stems. Halr-a-
doien locatives in I [regarded by the Vedic grammsjians u piagrli;a or
nncomblnable: 188 d) are made bom i-atems. The later language makes
the neuter locatives in ini and xad; but the former never occurs In the
oldest texts, and the litter only very rarely.

g. The later grammar allows the dat., abl.-gen., and loc fem. to be
formed at will with the fuller fem. terminations of long-vowel stems, namely
01, fta (for which, in BAhma^a etc,, Si Is snbstilnted; S07h), &m. Snoh
forms are quite rare In the oldest language even from l-items (less than
altogether in RT.; three times as many In AV.); and from
s they are almost unknown (five in RV. and AT.).

Digitizecy Google

8Se— J V. Nouns AMD ADJBOTiTse. 1)8

b. The TMs. gniutM tk« flnal of the stem, in nwr. and fem., alike
In the Miller and la th« IMer Uogntfe. In tbe neat., it i« Istai »[lo«ed
t» be eltbei of the ume foiin oi the uiulteied itea; lud tbia wm fMhaUgr
the DMge In the older time also; not Cnttaneea enDigb are qaotahls to
dAtermina the qneatlon. (AV. hu u once, aad VS. o onoe).

337. Daal. a. The later and eaillei language igtee In making the
nom.-scd.-TOD. maar, ar.d (em. by lengthening tbe flnd of the stem. The
■ame cuea In tbe nentei (aeeordlng le tbe nile given above) end latai Id
Inl and vaiS; bnt tbeee endings ue neail; nnknowD in the Tsda (as, Indeed,
the oaies Bte of onl; rare oecnnenoe): AT. hai lol twtee (BT. perhaps
onca)i TS. has unl once; RV, has nl from one n-iten, and I, onee sbort-
ened to I, ^m one oi two i-steins.

b. The nnvarylDg ending ot Insti.^dat.-abl., In all genders, 1b bhy&ni
added to tbe nnobanged Btem.

tt. The gen.-loo, of all ages add 08 to the stem In masc. and fem.;
In nent, ttt later Isngiuge Interpoaet, as elsewhere In tbe ireakeet oases,
a n ; piobahl; In tbe earlier Vedic the form wonld he like that of the other
gendeu; bat the only occurrence noted Is one onoa In AV.

3S8. Flaral. a. The nom.-TOC. maso. and fen. adds tbe normal end-
ing aa to the gnnated stem-llnal, making oytM and avaa. The eieepHona
in tbe Veda aM veijr few: one word (arl) has las in botb gsndeu, and a
few feminine* hftve la (like 1-stems); a very few u-atema have uaa. The
nevt. Dam.4ee. end* later in in! and On! (like tnt from a: 880 e); bnt the
Veda has I and 1 (abont equally fraqneitt) moch oftener dian mi; and il
end (moie uanally) a, roore than half as oftea as QnL

b. The accns. maco. ends la In and fin, for older £aa and ftna, of
which plain bsoes teaiilB in the Veda tn nearly half the instuee* of oooni-
rence, and enn not infrequently In tbe later Uagnage, In the gait* of
phonetie rombinstlon (908 tt.}. Tbe aeons, fern. end> tn I« and b. BhI botb
mate, and fem. fonnt In las and una are tennd tpsringty in a* Veda.

O, Tba Insti. of all gender* adds bhia to the slam.

d. The dat-abl. of all genders add* bhyna (in T., almost Daiar blilaa)
to the stem.

0. The gen. ot all gender* la made alike In Inam and Ouftm (of
which the II Is not seldom, In tbe Veda, to be resolved Into nam). Stem*
with accented final in tbe later langaage may, and in the euller alway*
do, throw forward the accent npon tbe ending.

f. The loc. of aU genders adds an (as ;u: 180) to the atem-llnal.

g. The accent ia in accordanoe with tbe genera] rules already
laid iowo, and there are no irregnlaritiei calling for apecial notice.

369. Examples o£ defilensioQ. As models of i-stem«
may be taken ^fil agni m. _^re; IT% giti f. gait; ^lij
vBri n. water.

itizecyGOOgle

DBQLmaiOM II., i- AMD n-STHMS.

Slnpilu:

*liriti

snft

ttgnb

gkti^

viri

A.

S

IT^H^

^

giUm

vSri

t

^flRT

iifin

ctii^mi

D.

^

UrTtTjlT^Iri

agniy*

gAtaT*. BJfctTBi

T&i9«

Ab.Q.

q^

ij^q^nRTRi^

=i"RniH^

tnt.

gitM. gitrtB

Tlirl^Ba

L.

a9t

JI^, HrHTJ^

«< 11(1111

•<1>I6

r*rliM

V.

<«

grf^, ^

iliu

giU

virU'rtf

D
W.A.V.

Hrft

STrf^Tlft

•cni

s&ti

Tiri^I

l.D.Ab.

cifiFin^

j|f(i'*-(i)»{^

ETrit^TTTft^

■gnlbhyim

c&tibbTim

v&ribhyim

G.L.

wuivji^

iirtTl+l^^

e^lf^ifllTl^

agttyiB

BityM

v&eiitOB

PInwl!

N. V.

aflira^

*lftd*J^

•=n(\^\

■tn&TaB

i&taru

vSnijl

A.

5*3,

Hrft^

^ifTm .

C&tiB

vtrtiM

I.

sftfPitj^

iiini^

^if^

agaibhlB

c&tibbiB

vuibbis

D.Ab.

*rfu»^n^

IlfrPTI?^

^rip-TiH^

acnlbb^

S&tibhTM

i^bhyM

0.

wn^iH^

IlrllllH^

ii(IUItK

•CBlB^

g&aaKm

▼irIfSm

L.

'ifi'S

JlfrTJ

^

■gnV

l&tlfU

viblfu

,1,1,0, Google

340—]

T. NOONB AND ADJSCTIVHB.

120

840. In ordti to muk more pUtnty the kbMnce la Tedle Unpuge of
■oma of the foima vhloh tn oommon later, ■]■ the tomt of Tadio oeourreDce
ue added below, and In the otdeT of theli tteqnenor.

B. SiDgnlar. Nom. ognis etc., as a1>0T«.

b. Ace.: maM. igaixa, jttjitaa, Qnai;i«m(?); fem. and neal. u

0. IdiU.: mue. ogpfnl, tKyyi and ttrmlt; fem. AoitO, VMt,
UMtji, onvtktf, dbtefnft; neat wanting.

d. Dat: maae. aga6j«; fem. tajitja, au, tuirii; neuL 9^o«7">

e. Oen.-abl. : mau. agato, kvjam, orUs; fem. &dltea, hetT^i ud
bbltiniBa; neai bhdiws.

f. Lac: maac. agnftA, agn£, iU&ri(?); fem. Itgattn, ndltl, dh&-
iiMKtayl(?), vMl, bhltmrKm; neut ftpratt, BOpUnt^mtu.

g. Voc; a> aboTe (nent wanting).

h. Dnal. Nom.-aoa.-TOB. : maic. b&zl; fem. ynvati; neut f6oi|
mAhl, b&rt^C?).

i. Insti.-dat.-abl.: ai aboie.

J. Qen.-loe. : mate, h&rlofl; fem. TUTKlydB and Jlmidsi neat, wanting.

k, Plata]. NoaL: male, agn&yos; fern, mat&rao, bhAmls; neat.
9001, bhtirl, bhAitpi.

1. Aeeoa.: maso, agnin; fem. k^tls, fi^oayaBC^)-
ID. Initt., dat.-abl., and loc. : aa abOTS.

n, Oen.; maao. fem. kATinlEiii, ^u^am etc (nent wanting).

841. As models of u-stems may be taken 917 fitra m.
enemy, ^ dhend f. cow, ^ m^dhu n. honey.

Slngalar;

g&trua

"^
q&tmm

9&tnufK
W^
qitrave
0. 5ralTT^
q4troB

g&trfta

9itra

dhenua

dh«ii6m

dheuvit

RU

m&dliu

qtfn

dhan&Ta, db lavfti mtdhnne
dheuda, dhe ivia midbiuiaa
dhanlu, dhenvltiii miidliniil
dhino m&dbu, midlio

ioy Google

1

Du.l;

N.A.y. sFrar

^.

qtrft

9&trQ

dhend

mddbuni

I.D.Ab. 5|5(i-TnR^

eJ^tti^

qUJUTIj^

g&trubh7im

dbenubhy&m

m&dhnbliTam

G-L.

5I^tH^

iJs^tTT^

ll^HtH

fitrvoti

dheav6s

m&dhunoe

Plu>l:

M. V.

sra^

TlHi^q^

qaft

f&tr.vtui

dhen&vM

m&dhuni

A.

5R*T

eHh

H^P?

qitrun

dhentts

m&dhuni

L

5r^ftH

Ei^Pra^

wPm^

Q&trubhiB

dbenubbla

D. Ab

!(M*-UH

^■^

Rgi-TTH

Qitrobhywi

dhennbhyoB

midhubhyBH

0.

CT^TUFI^

■iPHm

imTiT^

q&trQ^Sm

midhunftm

L.

5^

^

"m

^tru,u

dbenufu

m&dhu;u

84S.

The rormi of Vedic o

eeutrence ate given

liere (or the u-stems

in the SUDS miDoer u for the i-items ibaTs.

». Slngnlai. Nom.: masc. and fem. ae aboie; neat. vix&, ord.

b. Aceaa.: maae. ketfun, &bblniam, Bucetunam[?); fern, dhsndm.

o, loitr.: maac. k«t&il&, pUjvt and kr&tUS; fern. Adbenuft and
ponvii, Aguyij neut. m&dliimft, m&dbTft.

d. Dat.: maafl. keUvs, gf^Ts; fem. farave, £fvfil; neat. piLqTe(v),
ur&Te, midhim*.

e. Abl.-gen.: mate, manyos, pitr&s, olimi^Bs; fem. afndhoB, I^vfts;
nent. mUbvas and mJidlraaB, mddhoB, m&dhunaa.

f. too.: maac. pOrSi^, sOn&Tii fem. sladhfta, rdJJvSm; neat
Bltiitu, otnaTi, Bltno, B^uni.

ttinrt.

k. PIniel. Nom.: maac. fbti&raa, mUbnas aod m&dhvas; fem.
dkea&Tu, qatakratvaa; neat, purd^, purn, pnrfi.

g. Voo.; ae above.

h. Dnal. Nom.-acc-TOf. : m

Bc. and fem

Jtnimi.

1. lDitT.-aat.-abl.: aa iboT«.

J. Gen.-loe, : at above (but voe

or aoB).

D,j,i,i« J, Google

348—] V. NoDHS AHD ADjsonniB. 122

1. Aflcni. : muo. ftlUn, pafr&a; fem. {fOa, m&dliTaa. I

m. Initi., d<t-abl., and loc.: u sbOTe; also gea. (but with the kid* I
lotioD ""flftin in part). I

348. Irragalar decleiiBloD, There are no irregular a-stema,
and oqIjt a very few l-8tema.

«. SAkbl m. friend has for the fi?e strong caioa a peculiarly
strengthened base (vriddhled), namely a&khSy, iriiich in the oom.
aing. is reduced to s&Uift (without ending], and in the other oaaeg
takes the normal endings. The instr. and dat. sing, have the Dormal
endings simply, without inserted n or eo:^; the aU.-goB. sing, adds
ub; and the loc. sing, adds an: the rest is like assl Thus:

Slog. B&ktafi, aikhftyun, s&kbya, o&kbye, s&khyna, aikhrBiir
s&khe ; Dn. a&UiirSm o&kblbliy&m, B&khyoa; PI. eikhayaB, B&khln,

b. Ths Vedi hu ninall; B4UlBr& du., >ad oft«a kmItm the 7 to i,
in a&khlA, s&khloB, etc. Tbe componnds are naiullj dectloftd like the
simple word, ualeu (1316 b) aaUia be latstltnted.

0. There Is ■ corretpondlng fern-, Utkhl (declined Uke devi: 864);
bat the tana* of sakbl ue also sometime* (oniid utad with feminine Tains.

d. 7&ti m. is declined regularly In composition, and when it has
the meaning lord, maxUr; when nncompounded and when meaning
husband, It Is inflected like a&kbl in the instr., dat, abL-gen., and
loc. sing-, foraing p&tyK, pitya, p&tyus, p&ty&u. There are occasional
instances of confnsiun of tbe two clasaes of forms.

a. For patl as final membei of a poeiesslia rompoond is ngalari;
and nraall; inbstltnted patnl In the fem.; thus, JIvapatid Having a lining
htuband; dSsapatitl kmviug a barharian for matUr.

t. J&nl f. wife hai the gen. ling. J^tajua In the Veda.

B. aA «ag*r, gr»»dy, hotUle his in the Teda sryiB In pi. nom. and
■ncai., m*M. and fem. Us aeons, line, la Ktim or ai74m.

h. Vl bird hu in RT. the nom. 761 (betide via). In the plnial It
accents vibhlB, vfbhyaa, bnt vlnam.

1. The stems ik^t eyo, &Bthl bone, d&dlil curdi, and B&ktM thigh,
are defecliTe, their form* eiahanglng with and complementing foims from
ilems in &a (ak^&n etc.): see the etems la an, below (481).

J. The stem patbi road U na«d to make ap part of the Inflection of
p&nthan: see below, 433.

k. Kr6fta m. jackal lacki the etiojig oases, for which the coneepond-
ing forms of kroftf ■re snbatltDted.

344. Original a^eetive stems in 1 are few; those in n are much
ire nnmetons (many deriTatiTS verb-atems fanning a paitielpial

ioy Google

123 DCCLBMSIOK II., 1- ASD ll-STXMB, [—846

adjeedTe in u). Their isfleotlon is like that of nonni, and hu been
included Id the rales girea above. In tboie weak casee, however —
oamelf, the dat, abl.-gen., and loc. sing., and the geo.-Ioc. dual —
in which neut« nonnt differ from mascniines in the later laognage
by an inserted n (we have seen above that this differeuoe does not
exist in the Veda), Uie ne&ter a^jeotive is allowed to taite tither
form. The stem Is the same for masculine and neater, and generally
(and allowably always) for femlDine also.

a. Th«re are a tew InitMoei of a feminine noun In I ittndlng («ome-
Umei with ohuged uMnt) bwide a mMcullae tn i: tktu, krfml m., feelmi
r.; e4khl (343 a) m., Mkbi f . ; dondnbhi m., dundabhl r.; dli&ni
m., dhunl f.; ^ak^nl m., gaknnl or -nl f. In the later langnage, sips-
Ciallrt tbtr* It a mj baqaeat laterohaage of i ud I m tnah of the lame
«tem. No adjectlta tn 1 maket a regnUr femlalue In L

b> With •temi in a the taae ia quite diffeient While the feminine
may, and la pait ioee, end In a. Kite the ms*oaltne and neuter, a «pt-
cUI feminlAc-ttem t« oftoa nude b; lengUientng Ike u lo 0, oi alM hj
adding I; and tot Mine atcmi a feminine Is fonned Into two of theae three
wayi, or even in all the thne: thoi, kSrO, -dlpad, fundtayA, eaiilfd,
vaoasylt; •a^vl, nrri, (corn, pQrri (with prolongation of n bafoie r:
compire S4Bb), bahvi, prabhTl, roghvi, bUJi.t^ ■Tfid'vi; — pfthu
and pfthTl, vlbbA sad viVtni, mfd6 ard xof&ri, lagbn and laghvl,
vitra and t4*vI; bablir& and babtkxA, blbtwtau and tnblutelll, bhiru
and bl^rtl; — tan£i and taaA and tanvi, phalgu and phalgA and
ptaalffTl, m&dhit and madhtt and midllvL There are alio tome femi-
nine noQft^tBma in fl altndlng (nanaliir with ehanged accMit) beelde m*i-
coliaea In u: thu*, igm m., acrti f.; k&dru m., kodrA f.; gueeulu
m., gngsold f.; Jatu m., Jatii f.; pfd&kn m., pfdftktt f.

84B. Koots ending In 1 or n (or j: 870 b) regalarly add a t when
used aa root-wonh or as root-finals of compoonds; and henee there
ate no adjeqUves of the loot-olass in this decUnaion.

a. Yet, Id the Veda, a tew woidi ending In a abort ladieal a are
declined aa if thii were anfflxat: thna, Aamftadhru, BXt^tja; and the AT.
baa pftantU^ (once), Boota In fl aometimea alao ahoiten Q to u: thna,
pcabh^ vlbllL&t etc (.304); go (801 e) be<:omea gn in compotitlon; and
T» perhaps becomes rl (801 e); while looM in K Eometlmea apparently
weaken i to i (in -dbl f^om yAhiL eir.; 1158).

340. Componud adjectives having nonna of this declension as
final member are infleoted in general like original adjectivee of the
same endings.

a> Bnt In tneh compoonds a flnal i or n is eometlmea lengthened to
form a feminine atem: thai, anfro^I, Bwayonl or -ni, -gitraysftl or
•(1; Tftmora oi -m, dwhiu^Q or ■90, varatand, mltrbandhO; and
RT. ha* Aql^I from qign.

ioy Google

s AND Adjectives.

Declension III.

stems in long voveU: )9T S, ^ I| 3i &•

847. The st«me ending in long rowela fall into two
well-maiked classes or divisions: A. monosyllabic stems —
mostly bare toots — and their compounds, with a compar-
atively small number of otheis inflected like them; B. de-
rivative feminine stems in i^T S and ^ 1, with a small num-
ber in ^ D which in the later language have come to be
inflected like them. The latter division is by fai the larger
and more important, since most femiiune adjectives, and
considerable classes of feminine nouns, ending in ^ S or
^ I, belong to it.

A. Boot^-words, and those inflected like them.

848. The inflection of these stems is by the normal
endings throughout, oi in the manner of consonast-stems
(with ^ am, not tT m, in the accus. sing.); peculiarities
like those of the other vowel-declensions are wanting. The
simple words are, a^ nouns, with few exceptions feminine;
as adjectives (rarely), and in adjective compounds, they are
alike ia masculine and feminine forms. They may, for con-
venience of description, be divided into the following sub-
classes :

1. Root-words, or monosyllableB bavlaK the aspsct of such. Those
in S aie so rare that It is hardly possible to make op a whole scheme
of forms In actual use; those in I and & are more nomerons, bat still
very few-

2. Compounds having such words, or other roots with loog final
vowels, as last member.

3. Polysyllabic words, of various origin and character, inolading
in the Veda many which later are transferred to other declenilons.

4. As an appandix to this clasa we may most conveniently
describe the half-dozen stems, mostly of regalar inflection, ending in
diphthongs.

ioy Google

125 Declension III., i-, i-, and Qi-steiis. [—861

340. HonoBylUbic atema. Before the endiDga beginDlog with
Toirela, fioal I Is ohuiged to ly and Q to uv; while final S ia dropped
altogether, except in the strong oases, and in the aoo. pi., which is
like the nominative (according to the giAmmarlanB, ft Is lost here also:
DO instaDoes of ibe occurrence of such a form appear to be quotable).
Stems in I and Q are in the later langnage allowed to take optionally
the fuller endlngi U, Sa, Om in the singular (dat., abt.-gen., loc.)i but
DO such forms are ever met with in the Veda (except blilT&{[F], RV.,
once). Before Km of gen. pi., n may or may Dot be inserted; in the
Veda It is regnlarly inserted, with a single exception (dhlyiUii, once).
The vocative is like the nominative in the singular a« well as the
other nnmbers; but iDstaaceB of ita oocnrrence In nncomponnded iteits
are not found in the Veds, sod must be extremely rare everywhere.
The earlier Vedio dnal ending is s instead of &u.

3B0. To the i- and fl-stems the rules for monosyllabic accent
apply, the accent is thrown forward upon the endinge in all the weak
cases except the acous. pi-, which ia like the nom. But the &-stems
appear (the instances are extremely few} to keep the accent upon the
stem throughout.

SBl. EzampleB of deolension. As models of mon-
osyllabic inflection we may take sIT ji f. progeny; ^ dhi f.
thought; and ^ bhd f. earth.

a. The flrat ot tbeie is lathei aibilruil; extended nom the four cues
which >ctD4lly eccut; ot the loe. ilng. knd gen.-lcc. du., no Vedk examples
from ft-atemi 4ie found.

N.

SlDSolu:

tita

Si,

bbAs

dltlyam

3F\
bhdvam

m

fen

^

it

dbiya

bhttv*

%

fil&, ^

^,^

J«

Shisb, dhly&C

bhuv«, bhuTil

3^^ JOB
bliuT&s,bhuvM

Jl

bhavf, bbuv^

am
J*.

dbis

bUil

Dij.ieo, Google

V. Nouns itat AsnoriTW.

Diul:

N.A.V.

at

fimt

^

HA

dhfrto

bh^TKti

I.D.Ab.

Jibhyim

dhlUiyitiii

bhaUi;^

O.L.

Sim

dhljr6B

3*t

bhur^B

N.

dhiTM

bbATu

A.

dbfyw

bbuva.

I.

lihbiM

dhlbhle

>1^
bhubhlB

D.Ab.

dtalbh7&fl

bhObhyto

G.

jfaiam, J^

dbijr^, dblnim bhuvitm. bhOiUbi

L.

315

J4.U

*5

S5

bUl,<k

86S. HonoeylUbio items in composUion. When the nonna
above described ooenr as final member of a compound, or vben ai^
root In ft or I or a fa found in a Hke position, the lofleotion of an
S-stem is as above. Bnt I- and fi-atems follov a ditided usage : the
final Towel before a vowel-ending Is either oooverted into a short
vowel and semivowel (ly or av, as above) or into a semivowel simply
(y or v). The accent is nowhere thrown forward upon the endings;
and therafbre, when I and Q become y and v, the resaldag syllable
is circumflex (8S-4). Thns:

Mhc. (tad fern. Slngvlu:

-dbia
•dhfyam •dliyim
-dtaiyK -dhylt

-dhlye -dbyi

-dhlyaa -dbylM
-dhiyt -dhri

-bhuvam -bhvitAi

•bhi^Tt -bhTt

■bbdve -bhvi

-bhiiTaa -bbTJM

•hhixTl -bhTl

ioy Google

27 Dholbhsioh IlL, S-, I-, add a-eT»MS. [— f

Dttkli

N. A. T. -dtairU -dbrtiik •1>h&Tld -bhrKJi
I. D. Ab. -dbibhrftm -bbtkbhyim

0. L. -dhiyoa -dhfAs •bh&voa -bhT6i

Planl:

N. A. T. .dblyH -dbylw -bhi^Tu -bbviu

1. .dhibbiB -bhAbbia
D. Ab. -dufbhyas •bhAbbjkB

(-dbiyitai .. .„ r-bhiivam

L. -dhiqu -bbtifn

ft. At to lbs ftdmlntblllty of tha tnllei endlnp U, Se, and iia In the
•tngula (hBlatne), gnMrnatleal iithotltlu tn imaewhtt tt ladMM; bat
th«; ue nsTBi hand In tht V*da, ind k<*e bw» onltted from A« abote
■ohmiM u fvobaMy nnial,

b. It tiro MDHinntB pnceda tkc final I or Q, the diatyUaMc fOnna,
vldi ty ud Tiv, are legulaily KTitten; after one eanuinant, the mage it
Tarytng. The gnmmttrian* prescribe ly and ut vhen the monoirllahle »tem
hai more the character of a noon, and y and v when It la moia pure]; a
Terbal lOOt with partlolpUl Talue. No raoh ^tlootlon, bowever, It to be leen
io tbe Te(l4 — where, moreover, the dUfeience of the two foimi la onl;
graphic, glnoe tbe yS- and vK-forme end the tett ere alwajr* t« be read ai
dinrllabic; IB or IS and n& ot Oft, and m on.

c. Ai to neater Btamt foi euch adJeetlTOi, see 867.

853, A few fluthei Tedte Irtogalarltlea or pemllarttiet maj be brteflT
noticed.

a. Of the K-stemi, the forma In fis, ftm, S (da.] are aometlmet to
be read ti dlaeyllablee, au, aaro, aa. The datiTO of the item aiod at
InfinltiTe la el (u It £ + e}: thns, prakbyBl, pratim&{, parhUl.

b. Iiregnlir tniuter ot the accent to the ending in compoondi it seen
In e ea» or two : thw, avadyabhlyi (EV.), Kdbli (AV.).

964. Bat oompounds of the olasB above deserlbed are not ia-
tnqmvtiy transferred to other modeB of InflMtion: the S shortened
to a for a masculine (and neuter] etem, or declined like a Btem of
the derlTative s-cUbb (below, 864) as feminine; the I and a sbort-
ened to 1 and n, and inflected as of the second declension.

a. Thna, componnd sterna In -gtt, -Ja, -da, -Bthai -bhu, end others, ate
foand even In tbe Veda, end become freqnent later (being made fTom all, oi
nearlr all, the lOOta in 4) ; aad sporadic casei from yet others oeoai : for eiampls,
grtap&a, rayocUilfa and ratnadhibbla, dhommiie [all RT.]; and,
tfim I and a sompoandt, vefaqriB (TS.), Abrayaa (RV.), gaija^bhlB
(ST.), kaniuu^s (QB.) and rtanfbbyaa (RV.) and Beninlbbyaa (VS.)
sad grfimavlbbls (TB.), mp^ft (AT.), qttlbtariTe (TS.).

b. BtlU more nomeroos are tbe feminine* In ft which hsTO lost their

itizecy Google

SB*—] V. NOttMS AND AWBCTIVBB. 128

root-d«eUn(lon: examples m pr^^ (of irhieli the tarthei Mmponndi In
part bave toot-foima), Bvadhi, graddba, pratlma, and othen.

o. Then, In the later langaage, a few femlnioea in I ate made fiem
the ateme 1q a ahaitened ttam t: thna, gopl, goqthi, pumagi, paflki^Ii
bhnjagl, bbujaihgi, Bur&pl.

SfiS. Polyay llabio Stems. Stems of tbia division (A) of mora
than one ajllabte ue very rare indeed in tbe later language, and tiy
no means common in the earlier. The Rlg-Veda, however, preeeuta
a not ioooDBtderable body of them; and aa the class nearly dies ont
later, by the disuse of Its sterna or their transfer to other modes of
deolenaioD, it may be best described on a Vedic basis.

a. Of stems in &, maieullnea, hslt-s-dotsn ocdot Id the Teda: p&nthi,
m&nth&, and rbbukft ue otherwiae Ttsved by the later grammar: sea
belov, 4SS-4; uqiuB (nom. pr.) has the atiomaloaa nam. elng. Tiq&nl
(and lee. w irril as dat. uq&oe); mahi grtai is found only In aocui, sing,
and abnndantly In composition; atfi ^ome hae onlj> atfiau not derivable
from jta.

b. Of stems In I, oier seventy sra found In the Veda, nearly all
feminine*, and all accented on the final. Half of the feniinJne* are farmed
from maacnlines vlth change of accent: thus, knlyft^I (m. kalyiE^),
puruft (m. p6rufa]i othars show no change of accent: thni, yaml (m,
jaxak); others still have no corresponding maacaUnes: thai, nadi, Iftkjmi,
Btlnni. the masculines are about ten in number: for example, rathl,
prSvi, atari, ahf, Apatht.

o. Of stems In 0, the number is amallet: these, too, are nearly all
femlnlnes, and all accented on tbe Anal. The majority of them are the
feminine adjectives In tt lo masculines in tt oi U (above, 344 b) : thus,
oara^yd, carlf^llt, Jlgfaatati, madbd. A fair are ooans in d, with
change of accent; thus, agtii (igi-a), pfdikA (p^dikn), frogrlt (qvA-
fora); or vithoat change, as nptd. And a few have no correspanding
maBcnlinei: thns, tanA, vadhii, oaind. The masculines are only tvo or
three: namely, pr&gd, k^kadftfti, makftt(?]; and their forms are of the
QlmoEt rarity.

960. The mode of declensioD of these words may be iUustrated
by tbe following examples: ratbl m. eharioUer; nadf f. itream; tanft

a. No one of the selected examples occurs In all the Torms; forms for
wbloh no example at all la quotable are put In brackets. No loe. ring, from
any I-etem occure, to deteraine what the form would be. The stem nadf
is selected aa example partly in order to emphasize the diSeience between
the earlier Un|uage and the later In regard to the word* of this division :
aadi 1* later the model of derivative Inflection.

ioy Google

1 DECIJ1S8I0N III., KADIOAL S-, 1-, AND tl-8TBMa, [—868

SingQlu:

N.

ratblB

nadia

tanAs

A.

rathfun

nadiam

tandam

].

rftthls

nadift

taui^

D.

rftthie

nadfa

taw^e

Ab. Q.

rathiaa

nadlas

tanuas

L.

taniil

V.

ritiJo)

nitdl

t&au

Diul:

N. A. V.

rathiS

nadift

taniU

L D. Ab.

[rathiblij&in]

nadlbh^m

[taniibhyRm]

G. L.

nadioe

tanuoB

Plural:

M. A.

rathfaa

nadlas

tamuas

I.

[rathibbls]

na^blilB

tanlibMB

D.Ab.

[mthibhyM]

nadibhyaa

tanlltbhTaa

G.

TathinSm

nadlaSm

tantiiiSiu

L.

[rathisu]

nadiiru

tanti^u

b. ThB cuei

1 — nadlam, tan6&m, etc. — hb

written abOTe •ceoid-

lug to their trn« pbonetlo form, Umoat Invariably belonging to tbem ia
Qie V«dK; In the wittton tozt, ot coarse, tbe stem-flnal it made a Beal-
Towel, and th« teiolting tyUable U oltcamdeied; thus, nadykm, tan-
viaa, etc. ; only, u mail, after trro eciucDanta tb« ruolved form* i7 and
DV ate mitten ioitead; and alio wbere tbe eombinstlon yv wonld othet-
iriae remit! thas, oakriyfi, [agrAvSl,] and mltrfiyriTaB. The BV. really
leadi atarrfam eto. twice, and tanvka eto. four timet; and mob con-
tractlong ate mots often made In tbe AT. The ending ft of the nom.-acc.-Too,
da. U tbe equivalent of the later &u. Tbe nom. dng. In a from t-eums
1* foaad In the older langnige about sixty timeg, ftoia over thirty iteme.

367. Irregnluitles ot form, ptopetly eo called, ue very few In thU
division: oamli u loo, aing. [Inatoad of oatllTi) occnre a few time*; and
there ie another doobtful cue ot two of tbe euoe kind; tbe flnal d ia re-
garded as prag^bya or uncDnibinable(188); ton'ol ia lengthened to tKOvi

In a passage ot two; -yuvaa is once or twice abbreviated to -ylSlB.

368. The process of tranifer to tbe other form of I- and u-deoleniion
(below, 36S It,), whlcb has nearly esttngniihod this category of words In
the Latei langnage, hu Its beginolDgs In the Teds; bat In BY. they are
escesslTely tcenty: namely, datiim, loc sing., once, and gvaqmam, do,,
once, and dravltllu&, Instr. dng., with two or three othet doabtfal rasei.
In the AOiaiTan, we dnd tbe aco. sing. kabAm, tonAm, vadHllbn; tbe
ln«tr. alng. paliUJ and one or two others; the dat. dng. vadlivftl, gva-
qnuU, agruTSi; the abl.-gen. sln^ pimarbb^Tfis, pfdUcu^. qra^maa;
and the lee. sing. tonASm (with anomalona accent). Accnsativee ploial in
la and ua ate nowhere met with.

WbltnsT, Qismnar. 3. ti. S

ioy Google

3B9— ] V. Noons and Adjectives. 130

360. Adjective componadi from thaie wordi are vaiy tev; thow Thieb
occui Bie declined like the slmpla atamB; thai, birn^aTftqls tmd aali&a-
nstaris, AtaptatanOB and B&rrattuiaa, ill nom. sing, mucnllns.

BtemB ending in diphthongs.

3S0. There ue certatn raonoByllablo Bteme endiDg in diphthonge,
which are too few and too diverse in Inflection to Piake a declension
of, and which may be moat appropriately dlepoaed of here, in con-
nection with the Btemg In I and u, with which tbey have qiost afBnity.
They are:

ft. Btema in &a: naA and Klta;

b. etems in &1: ttA;

e. Btema in o: g6 and dyA (or dyu, 6iv].

361, a. The stem nftu f. ihip ia entirely regular, taking the
normal endlnga throughout, and following the loleB for monosyllabic
accentuation (317J— except that the accas. pi. is gaid (it does not
appear to occnr in accented texts) to be like the nom. Thus: nfiuB,
nJvam, afiva, n&7d, nftv&a, nivl; nJvSu,n&ubh7^> n&vAa; n^vaa,
nivae, n&ubhlB, nAubhy&a, nftvam, n&u^u. The stem glAu m. ball
is apparently inflected in the same way; but few of its forma have
been met with in use..

b. The Btem ral f (or m.) tcealth might be better desorlbed bb
rS with a union-consonant j (S68) interposed before vowel endings,
and Ib regularly inflected as anch, with aonnal endings and loono-
Byllabic accent Thus: ras, royam, rilya, riji, roy&B, rjl3^; ray&n,
t&bbTlbm, rfiy^Bi lijaa, rSy&B, r&bhlB, rftbby&a, rSyam, ruii. But
in the Veda the accus. pi. is either rBty&a or rayas; for accus. sing,
and pi. are also need the briefer forma ram (RV. once: ilyam does
not occur in V.) and r^ (SV., once); and the gen.-sing. is Bometimes
anomalously accented tiyaa.

c. The stem g& m. or f bull or com is much more irregular. In
the strong cases, except sccub. sing., it ia strengthened to gKii, form-
ing (like nftu) gftus. a^vftu, gavas. In accus. alng. and pi. it haa
(like rsi) the brief forms gam and glua. The abl--gen. sing, is s6b
(aa if from gu). The reat is regularly made from go, with the normal
endings, but with accent always remaining irregularly upon the stem:
thus, g&vft, g&ve, g&vi, g&vos, g&vSm ; g6bhyam, gdbhis, gAbbyas,
gd^u. In the Veda, another form of the gen. pi. is g6n&m; the nom.
etc. du. is (as la all other such cases] also givA; and g^m, g6s, and
g^ are not infreqoently to be pronounced as disaylUibles. As ace.
pi. is found a few times g&vsa

d. The stem dy6 f. (but in V. usually m.) sky, day la yet more
anomalous, having beside it a simpler stem dyu, which beoomes dlT
before a vowel-ending. The native grammarians treat the two aa

ioy Google

131 DeOLEKSION III., DlFHTHONOAI, StBHS. [ — 362

IndependeDt irordB, but it is more convenient to pat them together.
The stem d76 is inflected precisely like k6, as above deacribed. The
complete deoleuBion ia m follovs (with fonnB not aotnally met with
in use bracketed):

Slngolu. Dn>I. FlnnL .

A. divam dyim K"**'*"' "*^"''" divia. dylin [dyfc]

I. atvi [dy&v&] i dyiibMB [dy6blilB] \

G. divia dy«B 1^., , , . , [divim dyAvaml

I. divl dyivl If^'"^' ^'^1 dy«,« [dy6,u] ]

«. The dat. ttag. dy&ve ii not foond In tha early luigntge. Both
divoa and dlv&a occoi m uont. pL in Y. Ac nom. etc. da., dyarH le,
M naaal, tha regolaT Tadic form; onu oecnrs dy&vi (iu.), ai If a neuter
formj and dySl^ is fonnd oqcq used aa ablatiTe. The citee dySOfl, dyBm
and dynn (once) ue lead In V. sometiinea aa dl<«yllablea; and the first
at accented ToeaCiTe then becomes dySAa (i. e. dlftua: see 314b).

f. Adjective oompoandB having a diphthongal item u final membei
an not nametuiu, and tend to aliorten the diphthong to a vowel. Thus,
from nau ve haie bhinnum; from go, tevetat words like icu, sapt&gu,
BDgO, bahngu (f. •gA TB.) ; and, eorreBpandlngly, r&i eegtog to be reduced
to rl In bfh&draye and rdliAdrayaa (BV.). In dedvatlon, go maintains
lt« tnll fonu in gotra, ac6t&, -gava (r. -gavi), etc.; a* flnt member of
a componnd, it la titIoiuI; treated: thne, g&Tftqlr, gkvi^ (but ga&qir,
gaS^t^ K.), eto.; goa^v4 oi go'qra, gdfjlka, gdopa^a, etc In certain
eompoandi, also, dyn or dyo i&kea an aaomaloaa form: thus, dySurdA
(K.), dyKuTlokA (QB.), dySoaadiglta (AV.). In rvritat (nnleu ibit U
for rayiT&nt) rftl becomea re. BY. has &dlirig&vaa from &dhrlgn (of
quMtlonible import); and AY. hu ghitastaTaa, apparently accna. pi. of
ghrtaatu or -eto.

B. DeriTatiTe stems in S, I, O.

862. To this divisioii belong all the ft and I-stems which
have not been specified above as belonging to the other or
loot-word division; and also, in the later language, most
of the I and ll-stems of the other division, by transfer to
a more predominant mode of inflection. Thus:

1. a. The great mass of derivative feminine fi-steins, subBtantive
and adjective.

b. The inflectlDn of theae stems has maintained itself with little change
tluough the whole hlitory of the language, being almost precisely the same
in the Tedaa u later.

ioy Google

sea—] V. Nouns and Adjeotivbs. 132

2. o. The great m&as of deriTative faminine i-stema.

d. This cIms it without exoBptioii In the Ut«i laogiuge, In th» euller,
it loffera the ezceptloa pointed out iboTe (3E6b): that femlnlset m&de
with change of accent follow thla mode of declension only wh«n the accent
U Dot on the i; thn«, titirlql, p&mqql, p&llkiu, T6lii9l>

•< The I-ilenu of this division in genenl ue leguded u made by
eoDtnctlon of an eullei ending In yK. Theli InlleettoD hu become In the
later laDgnage somewhat mixed with that of the otiier division, and so fU
dlfferont from the Tedlc inDeetton: see below, 363 g.

f. Toir few dGTlTatlye stems in 1 uo lecognized by the grammaiiana
IR declined like the lOOt-diTlsion ; the Vedic wotds of that class are, If .
letalned In nse, tTtnifenod to thia mode of inHectlon.

g. A very small number of mucnilne I-stema (half-a-doten) are in the
Teda declined aa of the derivatiTe dlTjalon: they are a few rare proper
names, install etc.; and r^trl and eixt '(only one case each].

3. h. The u-Btems are few tn namber, and are transfers from the
other dirisioit, assimilated in inflection to the great class of deriyattve
I-stems (except that they retab the ending b of the nom. sing.]-

363. EndiDfB. The points of dlstlnctian between this and the other
dlTUion are a» follows:

a. In nom, sing, the UEaal s-endlng is wanting: except in the Q-atems
and ■ very few i-etema — namely, lakfiml, tail, tantH, tandU — which
have preserved the ending of the other division.

b> The aoens. sing, and pi. add limply m and b respectively.

o. The dat., abl.'gen., and loc. alng. take always the fuller endings
ftl, Ka, Km; and these are separated from the final of the fi-stenis by an
interposed y. In Biahmana etc., 01 is generally snbatitaled tor Oa (8071i).

d. Befoie tbe endlnge a of Instt. sing, and oe of gen.-loe. du., the final
of S-etema Is treated aa If changed to «; bat in the Teda, the instr. end-
ing & very often (in nearly half the occnrrences) blends with the final to ft.
The yft of I-etems la in a few Tedio examples contracted to I, and even
to 1. A toe sing. In i occurs a few times.

«. In all the weakest esses above mentioned, the accent of an i- at
n-stem having acVe final Is thrown forward upon the ending. In tlie
remaining case of the same dua, tbe gen. pL, a n is always Interposed
between stem and ending, and the accent remaina upon the fanner (in RV.,
however, it is UBuall; thrown forward npon the ending, as tn i and n-stems).

f. In Yoc. liog., final. & beoomei ej final i and u are shortened.

g. In nom.-acc.-voo. da. and nam. pi. appeaia In I (and a)-Btems •
marked difference between the earlier and later langroage, the latter borrow-
ing the forms of the other dlviilan. The da. ending iu la unknown in
BV., and very rare in AY.; the Vedic ending la i (a conesponding dual
of a-at«ma doea not occnr}. The tegnlar later pi. ending as bsi only •

ioy Google

133

DbOLBNSION ni., DESITATIvei S-, I-, AHD &>STEU3. [—864

doubtful exunple oi tiro in BY., and a Tery small namber to AT.; tlia
cue tbeN (and It la one at vary bequeot oocarrenccj adda S ilmpl;; and
thongh yaB-fonna oeoui In tlie Biabmanaa, along witb iB-foima, both aie
tutd Mthei ludiffeMntl; as nam. and accni. (as, Indeed, they BODietlmet
Inteichange aba in the eplet). Of ft-Eteme, the dn. nam. etc eadi in «,
iKth earlier and Itter^ in p]., of eonne, B-forme aie indlstlngnlahable from
sa-roTniB. The RT. hag a few examples of Bsu for fta.
b. The lemalniiig ease* call for no remark,

864. Examples of declension. As models of the
inflection of denTative stems ending in long vowels, we
may take WU sinB f. army; ^RIT kanyfi f. yiW; ^sft devi
f. goddess; ^U vadhli f. i

Singular:

N.

^

^^

¥t

^-.

Btes

kanyll

devi

TOdbtlB

A.

^RPJ^

^RTFl^

^^

^.

e^oftm

Imb;^

devim

vadbdm

I.

S=Tm

^■wn

^SIJT

g^n

wnaya

bmyiiys

devya

vadhva

D.

H=Tft

*-yi3

t«>

=1^

•^n&yU

kany&yai

devySf

vadhvai

Ab. 0.

n^nnro^

*-iJliJIH^

Ismq^

gsaift^

S^nfijraB

kanyiyas

devyis

vndhvia

L.

^Ihiuih^

■^oyiH^

Wm\

B^aiyBm

kany&yAm

deryun

vndhvim

V.

^

^Fct

<&

^

a4>nt,

Umye

d^vl

Tidbu

Dual:

N.A.V.

B«ne

kanyi

devysa

vRdhT&ii

I.D. Ab. tlHI*-mi^^ etrUIJ-yiiJ^ "^cJl*-«iH^ ^q^^TTt^

BinSbhylm kanyJtbbjBm devibliyllm vadhlibliySm

Bdniffos kany^yoe d«vji>a vadbv^a

ioy Google

V. Nouns and Adjectives.

Plowlr
H1IH
MDOB

kanytfl

dovyiB

vadhvita

Bfenaa

bany&s

Tadb4«

B^nsbhifl

kaii7&bldfl

deribhis

vadbdbhia

a^n&bhyM

kaii7&bliyaB

dsvibbyaa

gw^mr^

Benfin&m

dcvlQ&nL

vadhdn&m

B^nftsn

kanylUiu

devifu

^

a. In the Ted> vadhd is a ctem lielonglDg to the other dl<rl(loQ (lik«
tand, above, 366).

366. EiamploB of Vedtc forms are;

a. A-stenu: iDetr. sing. manifK (tM» itmplei form U eep«clilly com-
moii tTODi Items in t& end it); aom. pi. vaqdlaaa (about twenty eiamplcs];
arciu. pi- aradigamaBaa (a cue oc tiro). Half the bhyaa-eases ue to
ba Tead as bhlaa; the Sm of gen. pi. la a few Hmea to be leioWed into
aam; and the & and Am of nom. acco*. aing. ue, Teiy nraly, to be
treated in the same manner.

b. I-atems: iDati. sing, q&mt, Q^inl; loc. g&tiri; nom. etc. dn. devl;
nom. pL davlB; gen. pi, bahvinltlll. The llnsi of the atem ia to ba leatl
ai a vowel (not y) fcequeotly, but not In the majority of inataoeea: thns,
d«Tli, ABviia, deriam, r6daBio8.

o. The spoiadlo Inctancea of transfet betweea this dlviilon and the
preceding have been already GQfficiently notieed.

d. Of the regular aabstltntlon made la the B^hmaiia language (307 b,
336 Bi 363 a) of the dat sing, eadiog 111 for the gan.-abl. ending Sa, in
all elaiBes of vords admitting the latter ending, a few examples may be glren
heiei abblbhuty&i riipam (AB.) a tign of overpmoering; tTiftnbha9
oa JagatySi oa (AB.) of the truirtt triftubh andjagad; vSco dSivyftl
oa m&nufySi oa (AA.) oftpeech, both divint and human; etrly&i paya^
(AB.) iconxm'* mvtt; dhenvri v4 atAd rita^ (TB.) that, foriooth, u Me
ae»d of tht com ; JlnjByU tvaoa^ (KB.) of dead ekin ; JyftyasI y^ySy&l
(AB.) euperior to the yajyi; asyfii dlvo 'smftd antarlkfftt (^9a.)_/>-om
thia heaven, from thie atmoephere. The same subilitntton Is made ones In
the AY.: thus, BT&pantr asyU Jiiat&ya^ let her relative* tleep.

ioy Google

135 Declgnsion, III. Desitatite &-, !•, and a-STEue. [—368

366. The nonn strf f. woman (proliiMy oontraetad ^om Butri gaie-
ratrii), roUovs * mlxad dadeoBion: thus, atri, Btriyam. or atrim, etiiy^
Btriyii, Btriy^ BtriTlbn, stri; strly&a, BtTibbrim, strlyde; atriyas,
BtrfyaB or tttia, Btrfbh^ atribhy&s, strii^im, sti^o (bat the &caiu-
atiTu Bb^Qn tnd atria ue not found In the older Uognage, uid the to<i.
Btrt iB Dot quotable). The accentuation U that of a root-woid; the foim«
(coDiptenontl; (he nom. liog,) are thoie of the other or derlTati«e dlTttlon.

AdjeotlT«0.

867. a. The oocnneDce of original adjectives in long final vowels,
and of compoands having aa final member a item of the first division,
has been snfficientlj treated above, ao far aa masonllne and feminine
forms are oonoemed. To form a neuter stem in composition, th« rule
of the later langnage is that the final long vowel be shortened; and
the atem so made is to be infieoted like an adjective in i or u (839,
341, 344).

b. Such neater foima are very rare, and In the older langnage almaat
nnknowa. Of neater« from i-tteme have been noted In tbe Veda onl;
hariqiijaja, tea. elng. (k muc. form), and auftdhlas, gan. ilng. («ame
aa maao. and tbni.); from fl'Steme, onl; a few ezamplea, and from atem-
fonng which might be mate, and fam. aUo : thus, vlbhn, subhu, etc. (nom.-
Kce. alng.: eompare 364); aapuft and msyobIi4vfi, inatr. alng.; and
mayobha, ace. pL (compare puru: 34Sk); from a-iteme occnr only half-
a-dozen ezamplee of a nom. atng. In ta, like the muc. and fern. form.

o. Componods having nonna of the second division as final
member are common only from derivatives in &; and these shorten
the final to a In both masculine and neater: thus, from a not and
pr^Jft progeny come the masc. and neat, stem apraja, fern. apr^S
childlen. Snch compounds with nonns in 1 and u are said to be in-
flected in masc. and fern, like the simple words (onl; with In and fin
in ace. pi. masc.); bnt the examples given bj the grammarians are
fictitious.

d. Sterna with ahortened final are occasionally met with: thna, ekn-
patni, kttalakfmi; and anch adverbe (neut. alng. accus.) u upabhftlmi,
abliyi^aylai. The etem atrl Is directed to be ahottened to Btri for all
genden.

368. It is conrement to give a complete paiadigm,
for all gendera, of an adjeotive-stem in ^ a. We take for
the purpose m^ pSpi evil, of which the femimne is usu-
ally made in ^ S in the later language, but in ^ I in the
older.

itizecy Google

368-1

V. Nouns ahi
SingDUi:

> ADJBOTTVEa.

136
f.

N.

iTTW^ WFT^

nnr

cirft

pftp&s papim

pftpS

ptpt

A.

WJ^

MltllH

4141*1

pfipim

pSpit^

papim

I.

qi^

qPTOT

TFcm

p&P^na

p&piyil

papyS

D.

HiHru

mm&

Tl'^

pftpitya

pSp^yU

pSpyii

Ab.

m^Tf^

tJIMIUIH^

qrnmH

pftpSt

pap^SB

pSpyib

0.

qpiRj

Tn^nrtH

HIL-UIH

pSpisya

pSpSyto

papy&

L.

qf^

mf-uiH

pftp6

papSyim

papySm

V.

TFI

qfq

^nn

pSp»

pSpe

psn

Daal:

N. A.V.

TtqT 'Tlq

TN

mcni

pIpKd pilpe

PSPA

papya^

I. D. Ab.

tTFnwTt^

TFTP-TJTH^

wfh^TPi^

pftpSbhAm

pSpabhTftiii

pfipibhyam

G.L.

MW^^^

TlcjJtTT^

P&p&yoe

papAyOB

papyia

PlniU:

N.

qraif(^ HHlFi

i^miH

qicuH

pap& pSp±nl

pftpi^

papyta

A.

^TTH MIMlfn

tirara

4l4l«

^■^

pftpan pSpanl

papiU

papto

I.

tT^ftj^

frmPra^

irflPra^

papSfB

p&pibMa

pSpibblB

D. Ab.

mI'^'^h^

MNI*-*JH^

^TT^TITT

papabhyM

p&pfbhyas

,1,1.0, Google

DBOLENSIOH IV.| r-STBHS. [SI

pBp^nSm p&pinBxa pApin&m

pap^u pKplisa papifn

Stems in ff T ("^^ Sf^^' «r) .
860. This deolensioQ ia a compaiatively limited one,
being almost entirely composed of deiivative notuB foimed
with the suffix TT tr (oi fT^ tar), which makes masculine
nomina agentis [used also paitioipially], and a fair nouns of
relationship.

a. Bat it inclades also a few noons of relationslilp not made
with that snfGs: Darnel; darf m., wia^ and ii&aandr f.; aad, besideB
these, n( m., et^ (in V.) m., not (>d V.) f., sAvyafthf m., and the
fsmlnine numeralB ttsp and oRtasp (fot which, oee 463 e.t). The
femininee in tp are only mftt^, dnliit^, and y^tp.

b. The inflection of these sterna is qnlte close!; analogoas with
that of ateiDB id 1 and n (second declanaion); its peooliarity, as
compared with them, conaiats mainlj in the treatmeot of the atem
itself, which has a doable fonn, fuller in the atrong cues, briefer in
the weak ones.

370. Forma of the Stem. In the weak oaaee (excepting the
loc. sing.) the stem-finnl la r, which in the weakest cases, or before
a Towel-endlng, is changed regnlarlj to r (139). Bat as regards the
strong caaes, the sterna of this declension fall Into two classes: in
one of tbem — which Is very mncb tbe larger, containing ail the
nomitta agtntit, and also the nouna of relationship niptp and eT&sf,
and the irregular words atf and aavraft'^T — ^* F ^ vriddhied, or
becomes fir; In the other, containing most of the nouns of relationship,
with nf and xie(, the x is gnnated, or changed to ar. Id both classes,
the loc. sing, has ar as stem-final.

671. Endings. These are in general the normal, bat with the
dlowiog exceptions:

a. Tbe nam. alng. (nue. tnd f«m.) ends ilway* In K (toi orlgloal ars
OT in). The Toe. sing, endi In ar.

b. The MCDS. (lug. tddi am to tha (atrengthened) stem; the accaa.
pL liw (lile 1- and n-stema) n u mage, ending and a u fern, endlag, irlth
the f lengthened bsfoie them.

ioy Google

371—] V, Nouns and Adjectitbb- 138

0. The Bbl.'goTi. elog. cbangeB p to ur (ot ns: ISOb).

&. The gen. pi. (u In 1 and a-Btems) Inaerti n befOTB &m, and
Ungthena the neca-flDal before It. Bat tbe p of n^ may also temdn short

e. The above ua the rules of the later laogaige. Tbe older prMenta
certaiD deristloiu from them. Tbni:

f. The ending In nom.-aw.-Toc da. ie (a« anlTersally In the Teda)
regularly & Inatead of &a (only ten Sa-forms In RV.).

g. The 1 of loc. sing, is lengthened to I In a fev voida: thae, barUrl.
h. In the gen. pi., the RV. has once BV&Br&m, witbout Inserted n ;

and n&r^ Instead of Uf^^m ll freqaant.

1. Otber liieguUrltleg of ni are the dng. dst. nAre, gen. n&rftB, and
loc. nkd. The Veda -writes always nfi^am in gen. pi., but Its p is In a
majority of oases metrically long.

J. The stem usf t. datcn has the toc. sing, ofar, the gea. sing, uei&s;
and the accns. pi. also aar&ii, and loc. sing, asrjtm (which Is metrically
trtsyllablo: nB^^m), as If in analogy vlth I and &-steros. Once occurs
usrf in loc. sing., bnt it is to be read as if the regolar tilsylUblc form,
u;&rl (for tbe exchange of a and ^, see 181 r).

b. From atf come only tieaa (ippsreDtiy) and Btfbhia.

L la the gen.-loc. dn., the T Is almost always to be read u a sepa-
rate syllable, j, before the ending ob; thaa, pltf&B, etc. On the oontrary,
n&nfcndarl is once to be read n&n&ndrl.

in- For oeuter forms, see belOM', STB.

ST2. Accent. Tbe accentuation foUowB closely the rulea for
1- and a-Btems: if on the final of the stem, it coDtinneB, as aonte, oo
the correBponding Billable throughout, except In the gen. pi., where
it may be (and in the Veda always is) thrown forward open the
ending; where. In tbe weakest oases, r becomes t, the ending has the
accent. The two monosyllabic stems, at and ett. do not show the
monosyDabic accent: thas (besides the forms already given above),
nf blilB, ntqn.

878. Examples of declension. As models of this
mode of inflection, we may take (torn the first class (with
QT^ &r in the strong forms] the stems ^1^ d&tf m. fftcer
and 7^ BT&ar f. sister\ from the second class (with ^^ ar
in the strong foims), the stem v^ pit? m. father.
Singular:
N. ^THT T^HT ftfTT

dftti bv&bk piti

A- ^IfTT^^ Rflipi^ ftrHTI^

dfttaram Bv&Bftram pltirtua

ioy Google

139 Declension IV., r-STHMa. [—873

I.

^RT

T^HT

fiar

Mtii

m&eri

pitti

D.

^

^

fft

d&trd

nrSMTB

piW

At. 0.

^^

^^5T

fig?

dittr

BT&snr

pitiir

L.

^Tilft

?^f^

fMHf(

daUri

BT&aarl

pitAri

V.

^rax

^^^T

ftfTJ"

dim

■T&Bar

pltar

Dnal:

N. A. V.

iwifr

Hhi^I

ftrTft

Bviaftrftu

pit&rau

I. D. Ab,

^■m^

HMt-illH^

[iirt'-m*l^

dst^bhTSm

plttbhyam

Q.L.

^HIH^

H«IH

ft"^H^

dStT6B

■T&sroB

pltrds

Plaitlt

N. V.

<WI(«^

T^TIT^

dfttaras

BvAsSras

plt4rM

A.

?TTl

^=^,

fep^

dKl-

»vA«f«

pltfn

I.

^liTpH^

?^HiHH^

ftrriHH^

dIttbbiB

Bv&^bMs

pitfbbi"^

D. Ab.

^■mi^

f^ip~Tra^

lMrt*-U*t

dfttfbliTiui

BVftOTbliyae

pitfbhyaB

Q.

^i^un^

FT^tnw

fMHUriH^

ditenSm

pitT^im

L.

v^

^^^

fqrrg

datffu

sTionu

pitfipi

a. The femimne Btem

qiH mStt, mother, is inflected pre-

cisely like

ft(T pilt, excepting that its accusative plural it

m^^m5t*B,

ioy Google

373 — ] Y. NoDHS AND Adjeotites- 140

b. Th« pecnliai Vedio tonus hive Iwen •nfflaleutly iDSttnced sbore; I
the only one* of otbei Aui sporadic oecDtienee being tlie nom. etc. dn. I
dstar&, ev&aSrS. plt&rfi, and tha gen. pi. of Up, amrim. \

C. The nom. pi. forma pitsros and mfitaraa etc. are found used also
aa accUB. in the epioa.

874. The stem kro^ff m. jackal (lit'ly Juncler) BubstHutea in tbe
middle casee the oorreBponding foims of krA^tii (P^^ ^)-

976. Neater forniB. The gtMomaibaia preacribe a complete
neuter declenaion also for bues in tp, precisely accordant with that
of vM or m&dhu [above, 330. 341]. ThoB, for example:
Slog. Du. FIdi. '

K. A. eOAtt dh&t^ dliKt^l

I. dbStj^ dhst;^bb;am dhftttbhia

Q. dbStj^ao dhStt^OB dhStr^ini

y, dbAtTf dbatar dhatTDi dliatrnl.

a. The weakest cases, bowever (as of 1- and u-stema used ad<
jeotivelj: 344), are allowed also to be formed like the oorrespondii^
masculine cases: thas, dJi&tri etc.

b. No Bach nentei foiiDa chance to occni In the Veda, bnt they begUi
to appear In the Biihmanas, ander Inflaeuce of the oommon tendensf
(compare Oeim. £efter, Stlterin; Fr. metUettr, mtnteute) to glie thli
nomen agentU a more adJectiTe oharaeter making it coneapood In gender
with the Donn vblob it (oppositlTely) qnallBea. Thns, we have in
TB. bbartf and Janayltt. qnaiuviug ant&rlkfami and bliar^i^ and
JanaTitp^l, qnalUylng nU^trSi^; aa, in H., grahitffi, qualifying

O. When a feminine nonn is to be qnalifled in IUeb manner, the naoal
feminine derivatlTe In I ta employed: thns, In TB., bhartryka and bhar-
tr^&u, Janayltrriis and Jant^tlTSi^ qualifying itpaa and ahorStr^;
and such inatances are not anoommon.

d. The BY, ahowa the same tendency very cnrioaely onoa In the aecns.
pi. mfitrn, instead of mSt^, in appoaitlon with masculine noona [RY.
I. 36.2).

e. Other oentei forms In RV. ate Btbfitnr gen. glng., dfamat&rt lae.
sing.; and tor the nom. aing., Initead of -tf, a few more oi lesa doublfnl
cases, atbStar, sthftt^r, dliart&ri.

Adjeotives.

876, a. There are no original adjectives of this declension: for
the quHsi-adjectival character of the noanB composing it, see above
(876bj. The feminine stem is made bf the snffix i: thus, dfiti^ dbltci.

b. Roots ending to x (like those in 1 and a : 345) add a t to make
a declinable stem, when ocoorring as final member of a oomponnd:

ioy Google

141 DECLBK8I0N v., CONSONANT-STEUS. [—879

thas, kum&k^ (»^)i ▼(Orabhtt (ybhr), balUift (ylir). Prom some
r-raota, also, ue made stems in ir and ur; see below, 3B3 a, b.

o. NoDDB in 7 as finala of adjective componada are inflected in
the same toaoner as when simple, in the maacullne and feminlnei in
the neater, they wonld donbtleis have the peculiar aenter endings in
nom.-acc.-Toc. of all nnmbera.

d. Bat IS. hw once tr&tpitfinui, uom. pi., having thee for fathtr.

Declantion V.

stems ending in Consonants.

877. All stems ending in consonants may properly be
classed togethei, as foiming a single comprehensive declen-
sion: since, though some of them exhibit - peculiarities of
inflection, these have to do almost exclusively with the stem
itself, and not with the declensional endings.

878. In this declension, masculines and feminines of
the same final are inflected alike; and neuters are peculiar
(as usually in the other declensions) only in the nom.-aco.-
Too. of all numbers.

a. The majority of consonantal stems, however, are not
inflected in the feminine, but form a special feminine deriv-
ative stem in 1 1 (never in ^ &), by adding that ending to
the weak form of the masculine.

b. Exceptions are Id general the items of divisions A and B —
namely, the radical stems etc., and those in ae and la and na. For
special eaeea, see below.

879. Variations, as between stronger and weaker forms,
are very general among consonantal stems: either of two
degrees (strong and weak), ot of three (strong, middle, and
weakest): see above, 811.

a. The peculiar neuter forms, according to the usual
rule (811 b), are made in the plural &om the strong stem, in
singular and dual from the weak — or, when the gradation
is threefold, in singular from the middle stem, in dual &om
the weakest.

ioy Google

S79 — ] Y' Nouns and Adjectives. 142

b. Ab in the case of Bt«ms ending in short Yowele [fiB;&ni,
vartfi, midhOol, dS^^ etc-), a nasal sonetimeB appears in the
special aenter plaral cases vhicb is fonnd nowhere else in inflectioD.
Thus, from the stems in as. io, ub, the nom.-acc.-Too. pi. in -SAsl,
-lA^i, -ilA^ are very ootnmon at every period. According to the
grammarians, the radical stems etc. (division A] are treated in the
same way; bnt essmples of snch nenters are of extreme rarity in the
language ; no Vedic text offers one, and in the Brahmsnas and Sutras
have been noted only -hunti (AB. vii. 2. 3), -vpia (PB. ivi. 2. 7 et al.),
-bhaiiji (KB. xxvii. 7), -bhfntl (QB. viii. 1. 3*), and •yuBJi (H!3. ii. 1.8);
while in the later langnage is found here and there a case, like
•qruntl (Rsgh.), •piiA;! i^\q.) ; it may be questioned whether they are
not later analogical formations.

980. The endings are throughout those given above (310)
as &e "noimal".

a. By the general law as to finals (160), the e of &e aom. sing,
masc. and fern, is always lost; and inegnlarities of treatment of the
final of the stem in this case are not infrequent.

b. The gen. and abl. eiog. are never distinguished in form from
one another — nor are, by ending, the nom. and accus. pi.: but these
sometimes differ in stem-form, or in accent, or in both.

381. Change in the place of the accent is limited to monosyllabic
Btems and the participles in itat (accented on the final). For details,
see below, under divieions A and B.

a. Bat > tew ot the componndB of the root ailo ox ao ehow an inegnlu
shift of sGceut in the oldest Iingiuge: aee below, 410.

882. a. Foi convenience and clearness of presentation,
it will be well to sepaiate from the general mass of conson-
antal stems certain special classes which show kindred pe-
culiaiitiee of inflection, and may be beet described together.
Thus:

B. Derivative stems in as, is, ub;

C. Derivative stems in an (an, man, van);

D. Derivative stems in in (in, min, vin);

E. Derivative stems in ant [ant, mact, vant);

F. Perfect active participles in v&fis;
Q. Comparatives in ySbs or yas.

b. There remain, then, to constitute division A, espe-
cially radical stems, or those identical in form with roots,

ioy Google

143 Declembion v., Consonantal Root-stems. [— S8S

together with a comparatively small numbet of others which
aie inflected like these.

The7 will be takeD up in tbe order thiiB indicated.

A. Boot>Btema, and those Inflected like them.
388. The stems of this division may be classified a«
follows :

I. a. Root-stemB, having in them no demoustrftble elemeut added
to a root: Uidb, fo verte, gfr tong, p&d /oot, (Uq direction, taiii (V.)
ifrtat.

b. Sueb itami, however, u« Dot alirBys piectsely identtoKl la foim
with the loot: that, vto from yVao, nii (lom j/sfj, md^ from ynm^,
vrif from yvTtUj<s(l'), i^ from i^Tas ihirie; — tioin rooU in On&l f come
■teou in ir and ur: thm, g{r, K-^, atir; J^, ti^, dta4r, pur, mur,
stdr, sph&r; >Dd pmia from j^psar.

o. With Ibeae may ba raolced the stems with reduplicated root, as
oildt, yaviyddb, v&nivan, saay&d.

d. Words of this division la Qncompounded atg are toisrtbly beqneut
In the older laDgaage: tbos, in BV. ue found more than ahnndred of them;
in AT., alioat ality; bnt In the cluslcat Ssnakrlt tbe power of nslng any
root at will In this way is loit, and the examples are comparatively Taw.
In all peilodj, bo'wever, the adjective tue as floal of ■ compound is very
commoD (tee below, 401].

e. As to the InflnitiTe nse of varions cases of the root-nonn, see 9TI.
U. f. Stems made by tbe addition of t to a final sbort vowel of

a toot

K. No proper root-stem ends in a short vowel, slthongh there are (364)
examples of transfer of sach to Hhort-vcirel-decleDeiansi but 1 or n or f
adds a t to make a declinable form: thni, -Jft, -qrut, -k^. Roots in f,
hovrever, as has jnst been seen [b], also make itemt in Ir or iir.

II. As rtgaidl the frequency and nse of these words, the tame is true
as was stated above respecting root-stems. The Veda offers examples of
nesily thirty such formations, a few of them (mft, At, stut, brfit, Trft,
and dyiit If this is taken from d7u] in independent use. Of roots in J,
t Is added by kf, Hhf, dbTf, bhr, vr, a;, apf, bj, and hvj. The roots
gK (or gam) and ban also make -g&t and -tUit by addition of the t to
an abbreviated form in a (thn«, adtavag&t, dTUg&t, dvlgat, navag&t,
and aaihhit).

III. 1. HoDOnyllabic (aJBo a few apparently reduplicated) atema
not certainly connectible with any verb^ root tn tbe language, but
baviog tbe aspect of root-stenu, as containing no traceable suffix

ioy Google

888—] v. Nouns and AwBCnvEa. 144

thas, tvke tkin, p&th road, hfd )ieart, ftp and vir water, dvix door,
is mouOt, kaki^bh and kakud ntmmit.

J. Tbirty 01 forty sneli voiit ue foand in the older ItDgniga, uid
some of tliem contlnae In Utei oeo, while others btve been tnmferred to
other modes of declenston or have become extlnet.

b. Stems more or leas dearly derivative, lint made vitb enf^zes
of rare or even ieolated occnnence. Thus:

1. dertTatWei (Y.] tiom prepoeltioni with the Entflz vat: arrsvit,
&T&t, udv&t. niT&t, parSv&t, praw&t, aadiTit; — 2. derlTftttves (T.)
In tKt (periupB abbTSTiated ftom tfttl], In a few Ieolated forms: thiu,
apar&t&t, dev&tat, vr^tSt, aaty&t&t, Barv&tfit; — 3. other derive-
Utbi In t preceded by vutoag Towele : thug, da^&t, Teh&t, vabit, arav&t,
aagcit, vfteh&t; n&pat; ta^t, dlvit, yoqft, Tohit, aarft, harlt;
mar&t; siikft, fUcft; and the numerals for 30, 40, GO, trUif&t etc.
(475); — ! stem* In ad: thus, dn&d, dlqrf^ bhao&d. van&d,
far&d, aam&d; — G. items in J preceded by vsrloaa vowels: thus, tf^^ij,
dhnU, Mo&i, bhi9&j; 119O, va^ij, bhurij, ni^iJC?): Aa^J; — 6. a
few stems ending in a slblUnt spparenti; formative: thns, Jfiila, •dfia,
Vbta, voia, bill?; — 7. ■ remnant of nnduslflable oases, each aa vi;t&p,
vip&q, k&pith. <;nTudh. If Idb, ppkf udta, ragh&t [?), aari^li, viaruta.

Tiai^lh, kav&fli

384. 0 en dec. The root-stems are legnlarly feminine as nomen
aelionu, and maBcnUne as nomen agmtit (which ia probably only a
snbstsntive use of tlieir adjective value: below, 400). Bnt the femi-
nine noan, without ohangiDg its gender, is often also nsed concretely:
e. g., dnili f. [yAraSy be inimkal) means harming, enmity, and also
harmer, hater, enemy — tbaa bordering on the mascnilne value. And
some of the feminines have a completely concrete meaning. Throngh
the whole division, the maacnlines are mnch leas nnmerona than the
feminines, and the neotere rarest of all.

a. The independent neater stems are hfd (alao -hard), dim, var,
B7ar, mts fiuh, ta mouth, bhiia, doa (with which may le meiitioned
the indecllnablea g&m and 76b); also the apparent derlvatiTea y&fert,
Q&krt, k&prth, &8|j.

386. Strong and weak stem-foims. The distinotioii
of these two classes of forms is usually made either by
the presence or absence of a nasal, or by a difference in
the quantity of the stem-vowel, a^ long or short; less often,
by other methods.

386. A nasal app«arB in the strong cnsea of the following words:

1. Componnda baring aa final member the root ao or a&o: see below,

407 tr.; and RV, baa once uxuvy&fioam from root vyao; — 2. The

ioy Google

145 Declehbioh V., Consonantal Stems. [ — 889

atem ynj, lometlmei, In the older Unguaga: tbnt, nom. ring. ynH (for
T^Ak), accaa. 3rufijam,*da. yitLi& (but ilao y^am and TiiJS); —
3. The stem -drq, u final of a compound in the oldei language; "bat only
in the nom. ling, maae,, and not alvaya: tbiu, onyftdtS, Idftl, kid^
tsd^n, etftdrn, ead^ and pratlssd^: but alio idfk. t&d^k, Bvardtk,
etc.; — 4. For path tnd pudis, which labBtltnte moie eileDded Btemi,
tnd foT dant, lee beloir, 394 — 0.

887. The vovel a it lengthened in strong ouea as follows:
1. or the loots vao, eao, aap, nabh, gaa, la a few Inataneea (V,),
St the end of componnds; — 2, Of the loota vKb uid Bah, bat IrregoUtly;
■ee below, 408 — B; — 3. Of ap water (tee 893); also In Ita oompound
rityiip; — 4. Ot pAi foot: In the eomponnde of thla word. In the Utet
langDige, the aame lengtbenlDg li made tn the middle caiea alto; and in
RV. and AV. the nom. elng. neat. le both -pat and •pfit, while RY. baa
once -pftde, and pftdbhia and p&tan oocnr In the BrahrnKQas; — 5. Of
nas note (? nitaft nam. da. fem., RT., once); — 6. Sporadic esaei (V.)
are: yJU (!], toc. aing. ; pSth&s and -rSpao, bccdb. pi.; T&nlT&naa,
nom. pi. The atrengthened fornii t>h^ and rfij are conatant, through all
clasgee of oasee,

388. Other modes of differentiation, by elision of a or contraction
of the syllftble containing it, appear in a few stems:

t. In •ban: eee below, 402; — 2. In kqam (v.], along with pro*
longatlon of a: thua, kfllmS du., k;&naapl.; k;ain£ tnatr. sing., kf&mi
loe. slug., kfin&B abL sing.; — 3. In dvar, contncted (Y.) to dur in weak
caaee (but with some canfoslon of the two clacaee); — 4. In mkr, which
become!, in KY., sQr In weak cases; latei it la indedioable.

889. The endings aie as stated above (380).

a. Bespeoting their combination with the final of the stem, as
well as the treatment of the latter when it oooutb at the end of the
word, the rolea of enphonic combination (chap. IIL) are to be oon-
anlted; they require mnch more constant and various application here
than anywhere else in declension,

b. Attention may be called to a tew exceptional eases of combinalloD
(Y.): mSdbbia and m&dbhy&s from vaia numih; the wholly anomalous
pa^bhia (RY. and VS.J AY. has always padbh{B) from p&d; and aar&t
and ear&4'>'VB oonespondlng to a nom. pi. 8ar6ghaB (instead of Bttr&bas:
SaS). D&n Is appatenU; for d&m, b; 148a.

O. According to the grammarlana, nenter stems, nnleaa they end In a
nasal oi a aemlvowel, take In nom.-acc.-ioc. pi. a atieagtheolng naaal before
the final consonant Bat no such cases from nsntei nenn-etema appeal eiet
to haTe been met with In nse; and as regards adjective stems ending in a
root, see abOTC, 379 b.

WhilaeTi Onmrnai. 3. ed. 10

ioy Google

890—] V, IfoDNS AND Adjectives. 146

890. MonoByllabic atenis have the regular accent of inch, Haoir-
iDg the tone forward npon the endings in t^e weak casee.

a. Bnt the acoasatiTe plnral has its normal acoenttution as &
weak case, npon the ending, in only a minority (hardly more than a
third) of the sterna; namely in dat&a, path&s, pad&a, nld&s, ap&a,
of&B, jaSs&B, pn^B&a, mas&s, mahiuii and sometimes In v&oAs,
snio&s, hrut&n, srldh&s, k^pia, vip&s, dur&a, i^ka, dvlf &a, dnih&a
[beside v^as etc.).

b. ExcsptloDal InBbmou, In vhiob a weak caw bat the tons on the
Btem, oceni as tallows: s&dS, n&dbhyaB, t&nit (also tan£) and t&ne,
b^dha (infln.), ri^e and r&fisu, viimn, arinl, vfpoa, kf&ml, adrt
and sAraa (^bnt m5x6), kbhaa, and T&nas and b^has (in vinasp&tl,
bfhasp&tl]. On the otbei hand, a strong case Is aecented on the ending
in mali&s, nam. pi., and kfts&m (AV.: perhaps a falee reading). And
pre;^ Inati. aing., Is accented as if pr^ weie a simple stem, Instead of
pro-ff . VimrdbA^ Is of donbttnl character. For the lometlmeB anomalons
a'scentnitlon of stems In ao or a&o, eee 410.

301. Examples «£ inflsxioo. As aa example of
QOimal monosyllabio inflection, we may take the stem
^R ■^o f. voice (liom y^ vao, with constant prolongation] :
of inflection with strong and weak stem, ^p&d m.foot.
of polysyllabio inflection, R^ mamit m. xoind tit vsind'-god;
of a monosyllabio root-stem in composition, Bl^a trivft
three-fold, in the neuter. Thus:

aingulsr:

gral

•m

q^^

H4H

mk

tit

mnnit

trlTft

arai;^

"^.

M(>H'i

ftRrl^

viouu

pSdam

mariitam

trii^

Eirat

q^

H^jdl

fsfejrn

TloS

padi

maruttt

trlvitta

^

%

:t#

Blej^

vfto6

P«d4

mar&te

tpvfte

=<W4^

q^

q^iFm^

BCMfT^

TftoiiB

XfiMa

mar^tas

trivftae

^1%

It

ITfffT

f^Tsri^

TlUli

p>dl

martti

trlvfti

Dij.ieo, Google

Declension T,, Consonantal Steus.

Dull;

wm>

^

Hf)c7l

f^^rft

vio&a

padan

iiuur<^tsu

trivftl

SfinTIFT^

MtWIH

tr^sni^

vagbhyam

padbli;am

marudbh;&m triTfdbbySm

siraiH^

'^TH^

IT^tTni^

f^^M^

v5o6b

pad6B

tritnftoB

Pln»l:

EIT^

*H>nH^

f^%

rioM

P^dM

marutas

trivfnti

^RH^

pffdii&

Ht,rlH,

(^=jtt!

vSoAa, vaoas

marutos

trlvfnti

mfpw^

triz^

H(,r4H^

fiRfel^

TBgbhlB

padbble

marudbhiB

trii^dbMB

=nrv"TO^

qSJTT^

m;m^

Bmsra^'

T&gbli74a

padbhy&B

manidbhyaa

triTtdbhyw

NNIH^

Mr^lH

H t>ril^^

r^telrllH^

v&e^

padam

manitAm

trlTftfim

^

fTrH

Ht-ry

f^

vak9«

patBu

B; wAy of illustration of the leading methods of treatment of
ft Btem-final, at the end of the word and in oombiDation with case-
eodingg, characteristic Dase-forms of a few more stems are here added.
Thns:

a. Stenu in j: ynJ-clasB (210a, 142], bhl^^ pht/sieian: bhiq&k,
blilq&Jaia, blii^cbhls, bMi!4k9u; — mrJ-claBs |2ieb, 143), samr^
univerttd ruhr: Bamraf, eamrl^am, Bamra^bhiBi samratsu.

b. Stems in Hh: -Tfdb mereating: -vft, -TfdluuD, -ytdbhis.
-trftBa; -b^dh (16B) waking: 'bhdt, 'bi^dham, -bhtidbMB, -bhiitBU.

o. Stems in bh: -atubh pramng: -atup, -stubham, -st^bbhiB,
-Btdpsn.

d. St«ms in q: dfq (216 a, 14B| direction: dik, dlgam, dlgbhfa,
dik^A; — vlq (818, 146) Me peoph: vif, vi<}taa, vl^bhle, vifeu (V.
vlb^u: 218 a).

e. Stems In f (226 b, 14S): &vi^ mtmy. Avi%, dvifam, dTl^bhls,

t. Stems in h: doh-class (a32-3a, I&6b, 147). -d^ rnOking,

D,j,i,...., Google

391—] V. Nouns and Adjectives. 148

yielding: -dhi^ -ddbam, -dbugbhia, -dbukfn; — roh-olaM (823b,
147), -lili liekmg: -Ut, -liham, -U^bhla, .li(au.

g. Stems in m (143 a, S12a: only pra^iia, aom. «ing., Qaot&ble):
-q&m quieting: -{ibi, •q^mam, -fltabhlB, -qibiBn.

393. Tbe root-Btema Id Ir and nr (388 b] lenfrthen their vovel
when the final t is followed by another oonsonant (246 b], and also
in tbe nom. sing, {where the cue-SDding a is lost).

a. ThDB, from g{r f. tong cone gtr [gih], gfram, gtrt etc.;
gfrSo, girbhyam, K(r6B; giras, girbbfe, sirbhy&B, Eivitm, eSrfa
(166); and, in like manner, from pur f. stronghold come pdr (plih),
p&ram, por^ etc. ; pur&n, pilrbhyim, pur6B ; pAraa, pQf bhla, pOr-
bby&B, puram, pQr^ix.

b. There ace no looM In is (except the eiceBBWal; nre pla) ot In
OB; bat from the root qUa with Ita & weakened to 1 (S&O) comeg the
oonn S4jiB t. bleeiing, which is Inflected like g£r: thne, Bqla (Mtflb^,
B^am, ifi^ etc; ftflfSo, ftqirbliySin, iqi^oa; ft^tfAB, fi^irbhia,
aqirbhyaa, S^Cf&m, Rfi^fO. And sajda together \t appaieutl; a steieo-
typed DomlnittTa of like formation from the root juf. The form affapruf
(TS.), from the root-etem pruf, is Isaltted aod inomalons.

O. These stems in Ir, ur, la show a like prolongation of Towel alao
in composition and deiiTation: thna, glrrftifa, pQrbllfd, dhargsta,
dbOatTO, fiflrda, (Iffrvaiit, eto. (bnt also gfrran, glnra^aa).

d. The native grammar lets op a clasa of qnasl-ndical stems ' like
JlgamiB detirirtg to go, made trom the deslderatlTe conjngatiOD-stem (1027),
and pceseiibes for it a declension like that of iijia: thna, Jigamla, Jigo*
miq&r Jlgamirbhis, Jlgaml^^n, etc. Snch a class appears to be a mere
flgmsnt of the grammarians, since no example of it has heen found quotable
from the literature, either euUet or liter, and since there Is, In fact, no
more a desideratife alem Jigamle than a cansatlTe slem gama;.

3B3. The stem kp t. uater ia inflected only in the plural, and
with disBimilation of ita final before bh to d (161 e): thus, Apae,
ap&a, adbhfs, adbhy&a, apam, a,paii.

a. Bnt KV. has the sing, luslr. apli and gen. ap&s. In the earlier
langQBge (especially AT.], and eren in the epics, the nom. and accns. pi.
forms are occaslonilly confosed in use, Spaa being employed as accns.,

b. Betides the stem ap, case-forms of thla word are sometimei used
in composition and derivation : thnE, for example, abja, ftpodevata,
ftpom&yo, apBtunaot.

394. The stem puiha m. man is very irregular, snbstitating
pianidiB in the strong cases, and losing its b (necesearily) before
initial bh of a e&Be'etiding, and likewise [by analogy with this, or
by an abbreviatioD akin with that noticed at 231) in the loc. plural.
The vocative is (In accordance with that of the somewhat similarly

ioy Google

149 Dbclbssioh T., Cossonantal Stemh. [—898

inflected perfect partloiples: Bee4es&) pi^nuui in the later lui^age,
bat puni&a id the earlier. Thua: picim&n, pdmsAsEun, pmhao,
pTufasd, pu^u&a, puAsf, pAmau; pumftAeSu, pumbhyun, poifasdB;
piiun&fiaaa, poifaeie, pumbbb, pvunbhy&s, paihsaiii, puihBu.

a. Tha accentsitioD ol the -weak fomii. It vrlll be uottced, is that of
ft tnie moDDfyllibic item. The loitOB vith bb-endlnga nawhete oceoi lu Ibe
older language, not do the; appeal to have been cited from the later.
iDEtaaces ot the confnslon of itrong and weak farms are occasionally met
irltb. As to the retentton of a anUDgaillzed in the weakest cases (whence
necessarily toUowi th»t In the loe. pi.). BBe 183 a.

b. This stem appears undei • conaidaiablB Tarlety of forms in com-
position and detiTatlon; thus, as patbs in podiqoalf, podietva, pudia-
vant, -paiheka, etc.; u pmn Id puihTataa, pnibrQpa, podiTat,
pnmairtha, etc.; as podisa in piufaeaTant; — at the end of a coispoDnd,
either irilh Its full Inflection, ta In strlpAifaB etc. ; or aa purhsa, In
stripmhaa, mabSptufaBa; or u puma in atnpoma (TS. TA.).

S0E. The stem patb m. road is defeotive in declension, forming
only the weakest cases, while the strong aie made from p&utbs or
pinthan, and the middle from patbi: see nnder an-atems, below, 433.

396. The stem d&nt m. tooth is perhaps of participial origin, and
has, like a participle, the forms diiiit and dkt, strong and weak:
thus (V.), dka, d&ntam, dat£, etc.; dat&« ace. pi. etc. But in tbe
middle cases it has the monosyllabic and oot the participial accent:
thns, dadbbJis, dadbhy&a. la aom. pi. occurs also -datae instead
of -dantae. By the grammarians, the strong cases of this word are
required to be made from d&nta.

897. A number of other words of this divisioti are defective,
making part of their inflection &om stems of a different form.

a. Thna, b^ heart, m^Aa or mas n. meat, mas m. mtmlh, n&s
f. note, ni^ t. night (not fonnd in the oldei language), pft f. army, are
Mid br the grammarians to lack the nom. of all numbers and tha accns.
sing, and du. (the nentera, of conise, the ace. pi. also), making them
lespectiTBlr from hfdaya, milfia&, mitsa, naslks, nlqS, pftanfi. But
the usage in the older langnage U not entirely in accordance with thla
requirement: thna, we find m^ _fieah aocng. alng. ; mia month nom. sing.;
and uitsft nottrih dn. From p^ occnta only the loc. pi. p^u and (RY.,
once] the same case with doable ending, pftaufu.

398. On the other hand, certain stems of this division, allowed
by the grammarians a fnli inflectioD, are used to fill up the defioien-
cles of those of another form.

a. Thos, Asfj D. hlood, g&krt n. ordure, yUcft n. liver, d6s n.
(also m.) fore-artn, have beside them defective stems in &ii: see below,
488. Of none of them, howoTer, la anything but the nam.-acc. sing, found
in tha older langnage, and other case* later are but very scantily represented.

ioy Google

89S— ] V. Noons asd Adjetites, 150

b. Of Ss n. mouth, iDil i^d uialer, anl; s ewe 01 two ue fannd, !□
thn older langntee, bealde fis&n and aajr^ »d ud&u and ndakft (48S).

306. Some ot the illeniatiTe Btem* menttoned tbo^e are IntUnces of
trtngllion from ^^^e eoDeoDant to a Toirel deolenilon: Ihne, dAnta, mjsa.
A Dumtier of other similar cues oconr, epoiadlMllr In the ald«i laofnage,
mote commonly in tbe Uter. Sach are -pi>d», -ni&da, -dfifo, blir^&,
vi^t^pa, dvfira aad dura, pura, dbnra, -df^a, iuia&, nidK, kflpft,
k^pll, Kf a, and perhaps a few others.

a. A tev Inegalat atemi will find a more proper place imder the head
of Adjectives.

AdjeotiTea.

400. Original adjectivea having the root-form are comparatively

rare even in the oldest langaage.

a. Ahont a doaen are quotable from the RV., for the most pari ouly
Id a few scattering cases. Btit mah great is common in RT., though It
dies ont rapidly later. It makes a derivative feminine item, malli, vUch
contlnaee in use, t» meaning ettrfh etc.

401. But oomponnd adjectivee, hsring a root as final member,
with the value of a present participle, are abnndaDt fn every period
of the language.

a. Posaeaaife adjective compoanda, also, of the same form, are
Dot very rare: ezamplea are yat&aruo uiith offered hotel; adryatrao
gun-tkiimed; o&toqpad foar-foated-, subard kind-hearted, friendly;
ntyap (i. e. ritf-ap] having etreaminff lealert; Bah&sradv&r ^/tfrnisA^iJ
with a ihotuand doore.

b. The inflection of sach compounds is like that of the simple roet-
gtems, mascnllne and feminine being throughont the same, and the nenter
varjlng only in the nom.-aoc.-voc. of all uombers. Bat special neater formt
are of rare occarrenee, and maac.-fem. are sometimes nsed instead.

O. Only rarelji is a dertvatlTe feminine stem la I formed: in the older
language, onl; from tbe compounds vith ao or ajle (407 ff.), those -with
ban (402), those vith pad, as 4kapadl, dvipAdl, and with dant, as
vt^adaU, and mahl. kniMSH (AY.), upaaadi (?9B).

IrregnlaritieB of inflection appear in tho following:

402. The root ban ilay, aa final of a compound, is infleotei
somewhat like a derivative aonn in aa (below, 480 ff.|, becoming bft
in the nom. sing., and losing its n in the middle casea and its a la
the weakest caaea bnt only optionally Id the loc. sing.). Farther, when
the vowel ia loat, b in contact with following n reverie to its orig-
inal gh, Thoa:

ioy Google

151

DECLEKSIOM V-, CONSOHAHTAL STEUS.

[-*>•

Dntl.

VTTtrah&^fin

PlDial.

Ivrtrahibbia
vrtrahibhyilm 1 ^^ahAbhyM

« oeaal, the Btem-fonn ■hoirn

SlngnlttT.
N. vftraliM

A. Tftrali&9am

I. vftraghna

D. TTtraiglmA

Q ■ VvTtraghnia

V, TJlraliKD

a. Ab to the ehtngB of n to 9, aee 1'

b. A famlDine U made ij adding I ti
In the westeit Mies: thus, Trtrastmi.

0. An ucni. pi. -biinaB (Uke the uom.) kIio occqib. V}^nih&bhia
(RT., ono«) it the only middle esBe-tocm quotable from the older langnage.
TranBltloae to the a-deeUnaion begin already in the Teda: thua, to -h&
(EV. AV.), •glini (RV.), -hftna.

403. The root vah carry at the end of a componod is said by
the grammuians to be lengtbened to v&h in both the Btrong and
middle cases, and contracted in the we&kest caeea to ah, which with
a preceding a-TOwel becomea Su(lS7o]: thus, from havyavili laeri-
JUfiaaring [epithet of Agni), havTftTBt> baTyavabom, ba-vyft^S,
etc.; bavyavibftu, haTyava^bbySm, bavySuhos; bavyavabas,
bavySohaB, Jtavydvi^bblA, etc. And qvetav&b [not quotable) is
said to be farther irregular in mailing the nom. eing. in t&o and the
vocative in vaa or tBs.

a. In the earlier langaage, only Btiong fonua of eompounda with vab
have been fonnd to occur: namely, -v^f, -vabam. -Tabfia or -vabB, and
-V&as. But feminines In 1, from the weafceat atem — aa tury&ubi,
dity&uhi, paf^fiobi — are met with in the Brihmiijas. TS. haa the
inegakr nom. iiag. paffbavat.

404. Of very irregnlar faraiatioD and infleotioD is one common
compound of irab, namely ana^v&b (anaa-l-vah burden-bearing or
eart-drawing, i. e. ox). Its stem-form in the strong cases is ana^^ah,
in the weakest ana^uli, and in the middle aua^ild (perhaps by dis-
similation from ana^u^'- Moreover, its nom. and voc. sing, are made
in T&n and van (as if from a Taut-stem). Thus:

N.

SlngulBT.

Dual. Plural.

ana^vin
ana^vSham

}•»•*'*- nis."

ana^obft

. ana^uhe

)»•*'-" z^

lana^uhas
aaa^iUil

iaaijvaji

toaijvahftu ina^vaiiaa

i, Google

4o4— ] V. Noons asd Awectivbs. 152

a. Ana^udbbyM (A.T., once) It the only mtddle cue-fotm qaotable
from the older language. But compatiQdi ahoiriDg the middle item — u
aoo^i'^B'i'^^ ana^ndarhft — ^re met with In B^manu etc.

b. The GOiteapondtng feminine stem (of very infreqnent occanenee)
U eitbei noa^uhi ({B.) or ana^vUU (K. HS.).

406. The root sah overcome haa In the Veda » double liregalaritr:
its B is changeable to |f even after au a-Towel — u alao in ita tingle oc-
currence as an Independent adjective (RV., tv&di ^f) — while it toma-
times remaina nnehanged after an i oru-TOwel; and its a ia either prolonged
or remains unchanged, in both strong and weak cMes. The quotable formt
are : -^i\, -f abam or -Baham or -s&bain, -aUtS, -situ or -oAhs, -^aliaa
or -9AI1IUS 01 -B&haB; -s&lia (du.); -;ahas or -sUuw.

406. The compound avay^ (v'yJ mafce offtring) a certain priat or
(BR.) a certain tacrifice is said to fonn the nom. and toc slug, avayaa,
and to make its middle casei froui avay&a.

a. Itt only quotable form is avayaB, f. (RV. aad AV., each once).
If the stem is a deriTative from ava + i/yaj coneQiaU, avayas U very
probably from ava-HF'y^ which haa the aama meaning. But aadbamas
(BV., once) and pttrodee (RV. twice) thow a simiLai apparent anbatitution
in nom. aing. of the caae-ending a after long & for a final root-oonaonant
(d and f teepectiiely). Compare also the alleged qvetavfis (above, 40S).

407. Compounds with alLc or ao. The root ao or alio
makes, in combination with prepositiona and other words, s consid-
erable class of familiarly nsed adJectlTes, of quite irregular formation
and inflection, in some of which it almott loses its obanicter of root,
and becomes an ending of derivation.

a. A part of these adjectives hare only two stem-forms: a strong
in afic (yielding aa, from afiks, in nom. sing, maao.), and a weak in
ao; others diatinguiah from the middle in ao a weakest stem in o,
before which the a is contracted with a preceding i or a into 1 or tL

b. The feminine is made by adding 1 to the stem-form used in
the weakest cases, and ia accented like them.

408. Aa esamples of inflection we may take prftilo fonnard, «a*t,
praty&&o oppottte, vest, vi^vafic going apari.

Singnlar :

N. V. pr^ pr&k praty^ pra^&k vl^aa vffvak

A. priUioam prak pratyificam praty&k vi^aftoam vf^vak

I. prac& pratioi vifucfi

D. praoe pratioi vifuoe

Ab. a. praoas pratlo&s vf^ilcBA

L. pr^oi pratioi v{faoi

Dud;

N. A. V. pi^cfiu praoi ptaty&ilaftii pTatiof v{;Tafioftu vi^uol
I. D. Ab. pragbliy&in praty^bhy&m v{|vagbhyltm

O. L. pracos pratioAs vi;uoos

Digitizecy Google

153 DECI.EKSION v., C0N8OSANTAL Steus. [ — 4t3

Plurri:

N, v. pritfioaa prafioi pra^Altcaa praty&fici vi^vahoaa vi^va&ei
A. prioaa pra&ol pratio&a prftty&fiol vffaa&B vl^vofiai

L pr^bhiB praty&gbhia viifvaqbbia

D. Ab. pritsbhyas pratr^bhyas vi^TOgbhyae

Q. prjioftin pratleam vi;uo&m

L. pritkqu pratyik^u vl^Tabqn

a. The femiaiae stems are pi^i, pratioi, vi^i<a, raspectiTel}'.

b. No eiBjnple of the middle tormi excepting the nom. etc. siog.
DiDt. (and tMi genenllj ojed >■ adverb) le found eitfaei In RV. 01 AV.
In the tuae textt ii lacking the nom.' etc. pi. nant. in fiol; bnt o( this a
number of examples occnt in the Brahmanu: thus, pra&ol, praty&Siol,
KTvB&el, Bamy&fiol, nacUuTa&oi, anva&oi.

400. a. Like pc^o are inflected &pfifio, kvSho, p^ftiio, arvafic,
adliarfific, and othors of rare occnrrence.

b. Like proty&flo are inflected nykfio (i. e. nlaiio), samyi&o
{aam + afio, with irregularly inserted li, and udafio (weakest stem
^dio: ud+a2o, with i inserted in weakest cases onlj), with a few
other rare etema.

o. Like vi^tt&c is inflected anv&fio, also three or foar others of
which only isolated forms occur.

d. Still more irregular is tiry&iLo, of which the weakest stem is
tir&90 (tlr&s+tM: the other stems are made from tlr + afio or ao,
with the InseiCed 1).

410. The acnentnaUon of thete words is Inegolar, u regard* both
the stemi themseWes and their inflected foims. Sometimes the one element
has the tone and tometimea the other, wlthoat an; apparent reason for the
difference. If the oompoand i« accented on the flnil efllaMe, the accent
Is shitted in BV, to the ending in the weiliest cases provided their stem
•bows the contraction to I or il: thoa, priEoft, arvaoft, adhorioas, bat
pratloli. auao&B, samlci. Bat AT. and later texts nsnillr keep the
accent apon the stem: thne, pratloT, aamloi, anAcn (BV. hag pratiolm
once). The shift of accent to the endings, and even in polysyllabic stems,
li against ail nenal analogy.

B. DerivatiTe sterna in as, 1b, us.

411. The stems of this division are pievailingly neuter;
but there ate also a few masculines, and one or two
feminines.

412. The stems in ^(^ as aie quite numerous, and
mostly made with the suffix ^ as (a small number also

ioy Google

412—] Nouns and Adjectites. 154

with fITT tas and RTTnaB, and some aie obscuie); the others
ate few, and almost all made with the suffixes ^ is aod
3?r OS.

418. Their inflection is almost entirely regular. But
masculine and feminine stems in 3^ as lengthen the vowel
of the aiding in nom. sing. ; and the nom.-aco.-TO0. pi. neut
make the same prolongation (of 9 a or ^ i or 3 u) before
the inserted nasal (anasTftraj.

414. Examples of declension. As examples we
may take WJ^ m^as n. mind; ^T^J^&AgiiaB m. Angiras;
*f^ bans n. oblation.

Slngnlw:

«r*(iti.

^f^

m&nae

ktgiTBLB

]>.«<>

^^

sTsTm

■*Kl«,

m&UBS

Aagiruam

havls

TRHT

*(^i«l

?&!n

m&naaft

&aglTtt8S

Lri^

q=ft

af^tn

^S^

m&nase

kbeiTMe

■■■j<;»

HMHH^

sTitHH

^ftira

m&naaaB

dagirasoB

h.ylw.

fRfir

af^

■iielR)

m&niud

UKirul

hftvlfi

q=m

«r*(H^

^era^

m&iuui

&figln»

bAvla

mfaiaal AfigiroBila bavfyl

m&uobhyfim &&glrobliyfini bavfrbhyKm
m&aaaoB AfiglrasoB haviqoa

ioy Google

Declension Y., Stems ik aa, is, i

M. A. V

AHlRl

^^H^H,

i^cftftl

mJmSABi

ingiraaaB

havi&;i

I

^irrtHH^

^Wh^I^

#riHn

m&aobhis

duiglrobhla

baTlrbhiB

D. Ab.

IRh-TTH^

Mp^I^vira

^f^>^

m&nobhyaa

afigirobhyaa

bavfrbhyM

Q.

HItllH

Mr^-^MIH,

•ji^MIH^

mAnaaam

ftnglraaAm

bavifiUa

t.

^=5

af^;H

^■S

m&QBl^flu

&iigliatiau

h&vifygu

In like

manner, g^H

odlcfua n. eye

forms g^TT odhjuflB

^Tm^odkeurbhySm, 'g^f^ odk^ttjigl,

and 80 on.

415. Tedlc etc. IiisgnUiltiei. a. In the oldei langn&ge, tbe
ending* -aaam C^or. Ring.) and -aaaa (genenlly nom.-ice. pi. ; ODce at
twice gen.'abl. ting.) of stems la as ire not Inftequentl; conCiacted to -Sm,
-&B — e. g. ft^am, TOdbam; eur&dbfts, ^nOgfts — >nd out of each forma
grow, both aiiUer >nd Uter, tabetltDte-itemB In fi, as &<}&, jar£, medbi.
So from otbai forms grow etems in a tad In asa, -which exchange more or
leas with thoae in aa thiongh the whole history of the Unguage.

b. MoTo scatt«ting tnegnlaritlea may be mentioned, aa follows: 1. Tha
luaal maac. and Cam. da. ending In & lnst«td of ftu; — 2. af&a f. daten
often prolonga ita a In tha other atrong euee, as In the Bom. aing.: tbna,
Tifaaain, afltafi, nf^Laaa (and once In a weak case, ufdsaa); and In Ita
biatr. pi. ocean once (RV.) Uf&dbbla Instead of u^bhlB^ — 3. from
to^&a la onoe (BV.) foand a elmllar dost, Uxftei; — 4. from avdvaa
aitd Bvitavas occnr in RV. a nom. ring. maac. in T&n, aa If from a stem
In rant; and In the Brahmanaa ia ,foaud the dat.-abl. pi. of like foimatloD
ar&tavadUiTaB.

C. The sttms In ia and ub also ehow transitions to alemi la 1 and
M, and In Ifa and Ofa. From Jan^ la once (KT.) made the nom. ting,
Jaada, after the manner of an as-stem (of. al«o Jan&rvasaa (B.).

416. The grammariana regard ug&naa m. aa regular stem-form of the
proper name aotlced abore (3B6 a), bat give it the iripgnlar nom, U9&nft
and the toc ufanoa or uqanA or ufanan. Forms from the as-atem,
even nom., are aometlmeB met vith In the later literature.

a. As to forms from aa-atemi to &bail or Uiar and ddban or tidhar,
see below, 480.

ioy Google

Adjeotlves.

4t7. a. A few neuter nonnB io ae witb aoceot on the udioal
Billable have corresponding adjectiveii or appellatives In &a, with
accent on the eadiog: thus, for example, -&paa uorA, ap&s active;
t&raa quichntu, tar&B quick; jiqaa glory, yK9&a giorimu. A few
other similar adjectives — as tav&s mighty, vedb&s pioaa ~ are without
corresponding nonoa.

b. Odginal adjectives in is do not occur (as to alleged desider-
atire adjectives in ia, see 398 d). Bat In na are fonod as man; ad-
jectives as nouns (about ten of each clasa); and in several instances
adjective and nonn stand side by side, without difference of accent
such as appears in the stems in an: e. g. tipus heat and hot; T&poa
wonder and leondtrful

418. Adjective compounds having nouns of this division as final
member are very common: thoa, BunUnafl favorably minded; dlrgli-
iyuB long-lived; (iikr&foolB having brtlliaui brightnest. The etem-
form is the same for all genders, and each gender is inflected in the
usual manner, the stems in (m making their nom. sing. maso. and
fem. in fia (like iSigLroB, above). Thus, from Bum&caa, the nom.
and accus. are as follows:

Slogulu. Doil. Pland.

rn-Ln. m-f. ii.m,t n.

N. Butn&nSa

^^^ > Bom&naBSu -naal anm&naaas -nftAsl

and the other cases (save the vocative] are alike is all genders.

a. In Veda and Biilhmana, the neat. nom. sing, ii in a cDDSlderabte
namber ot instuicGs made in Ss, like the otfaei genders.

b. From dirgbayua, in like muinei:

N. dlrfcbiytiB \ _, .

A. dirftbSjnigam -j^f ^Bl'«^9«" -r^9> dftgliayn,aa -y&4^

L dlrgbayu^ft dirgbaynrbhySm dlrgb^Torblila

416. The stem aneb&s unrivalled (defined ib meaning time in the
later langnage) fonna the nom. a'lng. muc. and fem. aueluL

C. BeriTfttdTO stems in an.

420. The stemjB of this divieioa are those made by the

three suffixes ^ an, IH man, and ^ van, together with

a tew of more questionable etymology which are inflected

like them. They are almost exclusively masculine and

421, The stem has a triple form. In the strong oases

itizecy Google

157 Dbclbnsioh v., Stems m an. [—484

of the maBCuline, the vowel of the ending is prolonged to
3^ ft; in the weakest oases it is in general struck out
altogether; in the middle cases, oi before a case-eading
beginoing with a consonant, the final ^ n is dropped. The
^n is also lost in the nom. sing, of both genders (leaving
^ ft as final in the masculine, q a in the neuter}.

a. The peculiar cases of the neuter follow the usual
analc^ {811b): the nom.-aco.-voo. pi. have the leiigthening
to ^ S, as strong oases; the noni.-aoc.-Toc. du., as weakest
cases, have the loss of i? a — but this only optioiially, not
necessarily.

b. Id the loc. sing., also, the a may be either rejected or retained
(compare the correspondiDg usage with patems: 373}. And after the
m or T of man or van, when these ate preceded by another con-
BOuant, the a 1b alwaj^ retained, to avoid a too great accnmalation
of coDBonantB.

422. The vocative sing, is in masculines the pure stem;
in neuters, either this or like the nominative. The rest of
the inflection requires no description.

423. Ab to accent, it needs only to be remarked that when, in
the weakest caseB, an acute & of the suffix is lost, the tone ib thrown
forward upon the ending.

424. Examples of declension. As such may be ,
tak^Q jlsR r&jan m. kinp; qir^H fttmin m. soul, self;')
sfPFJ^nfanan n. name. Thus:

SlDgnUi ;

raj a Stmi nama

rJUJbuun Stmanam n&na

I. fnn yirHHi =iraT

rijSa atmAnft uanmK

rijILa atm&ne namne

ioy Google

434 — ] V. Nouns add Adjegtives-

Ab. O. jnW cJTffpTFr ^TBIT

i^&as fttm&naa nimnafl

r^jfil, r^ani fttm&nl

^an atman
Doal:

N. A. V. ^IsfT^ yirHI*Jt 'TTHt. ^Wtpft

raJSn&u fitmioSn namnt,

I. D. Ab. TTsFnnr^ *iirH*-u'!H^ HiH'-ym^

r^abbyim StmAbhyain namablirlia

r^fiOB fttmiinoB nimnos

Plniftl:

N. ^urns tfirHHH^ hwiIh

r^J&nas fttm^as nlbnCul

A. TntTi^ laifH-fH^ ^mi^

T^fLaa Ktm&uaa Dlbi&nl

I. TTsT^H^ WlrHPlH^ =?THft^

TE^abUs fitmibhia nimabhla

D. Ab. ^iyMJ4^ Mlr4^H^ ^H^UH,

r^abhyas fttm&bbyaB ' n^abbyaB

TaJiiAlll Stm&nftia nrfmngm

I" JTsTH MlrHH ^?FTH

r^asu fitm&aa namasa

a. The weakest cases of murdb&n m. head, would be accented
mardbna, murdhnfi, mQTdlui6B, mordhn&B (ace. pi.), m&rdhnaia,
etc.; and bo Id all aimilar cases {loc. sing., miirdlmf or mOnUx&nl).

436. VediD IrregaliTltles. a. Here, u elsewheie, the endljig of
the nom.-Mc.-TOo. da. miac. li QsniUy K Initetd ol &u.

b. The briefer form (with ejected a) of the loc. sing,, uid of the nent.
nom.-acc.-Too. dn., is qaite unnsDal In the older language. RV. writes
onoe 9atad£vni, bnt it la to be lead ^atadavani; and slmilai cases occur
In AY. (bat aho'seversl times -mni]. In the Brihma^as, too, aaeb forms
as db&mani and a&mani are very much more eommoo than saoh as aluti
and lonml.

ioy Google

159 Declenbion V-, Srsua m m. [ — las

a. But IbTODghont both Tsds uid Biahmins, uk abbreviated torm ot
Iha loo. alng., with the euiltng i omitted, ot IdentloU with the 110111, ij of
eoniidenbly moia frequent ooenneQce thm the legulu foitn : thua, mOr-
dhin, Umuuit fctUtTOD, beside mardh&ni eto. The u h>« nU the
viiul Mmbliwtloii* of ■ 6ml a: e. g. murdliaim aa;*, mOrdbo&t ea,
mordhafis tvB-

d. In the nom.-aoc. pi. neat., ■Iso, ui sbbiertatod foim Is eommoD,
ending In a or (twice as often) a, instead of Kni: thus, br&bma ind
briluna, beside tarAhroHiji : compare the ilmilai wrles of endings from
a-stema, 3S9o.

e. Fiom a few items in man is made an abbreviated Instr. ling., vtllh
lou of m. u well as of a: thus, mahina, prathini, vari^a, dSni,
pre^ bbOni, for mahlmni etc. And dxfighma and rafma (BV.,
each ODoe] are perhaps for drAgbm&fft, ra^taixxi.

t, Other of the weakest oasei than the loc. sing, ate eometlmes found
with the a of the snfflx retained: tbns, for example, bhdnuulS, damans,
yamauaa, "'^;^?"* (scooa, pL), etc. In the laflniUve datives (970 d)
— triuna^B, TidmAne, dlv&ne, etc. — the a alwajs remains. Abont as
numerous are the instances In which the a, omitted in the written form
of the text, is, as the metre shows, to bo restored In reading.

g. The voc sing, in vaa, wMoh is the asual Vedic form bom stems
n vant (below, 464 b] Is found also from a few In Tan, perhaps b; a
transfer to the vant-decIenBlon: thas, ptSvaa, evaySvaa, l£bidTaa(?),
prUaritraB, mStari^oa, vibhSvaa.

b. For voids of which the a Is not msde long In the strong oases,
i the nest paragraph.

' 480. A fev stems do not make the regular lengthening of a in

the strong cases (except the nom. sing.}. Tbns:

a. The names of dlTtnlties, p&fAn, aryam&n: thus, piifa, pilfA-
9am, puffi, etc

b. In the Veda, ok^fal, bull (but also akfi^ain); y^qan maidtu;
yfqan virile, bull (but vf^fti^am and v^&^aa are also met with); tm&n,
abbreviation ot Ktm&n; and two or three otiier scattering fcrms: anarvA-
9am, Jimanft. And in a nombet of additional instances, the Vedic metre
seems to demand a where & is written.

427. The stems qvAn m. dog and ravan young have in the
weakest caaes the contracted form ifim and Tilin [with retention of
the accent); in the strong and middle cases they are regular. Thos,
^i, Qv^iuim, qdnA, ^{me, ate,, qv&bbySm, qvibbis, etc.; yiivK,
y^vsaam, j6ah, Ti^vabbla, etc.

a. In dnal, BV. hss once ytina for yuvEnft.

498. The stem magh&van generous [later, almost ciclasiTely a
name of Indra) la contracted in the weakest cases to magbdn: thus,
matCtaATS, magh&T&aam, magbinfi* magh6ae, etc.

ioy Google

428—] V. NouMS AND Adjectives. IgO

a. The RV. bu odcb the ve*k form niBghdnaB Id nom. pL

b. PuaUel wltli tbla ii found the stem magli&Taiit (dMiton E);
and from the Utter ilone In the older Isuguage ue mads the middle cum:
thDR, nutglukTadbMB, magbaTBtBu, eto. (not ntoghavabliis etc.).

4Se> a. Steiot in a, ma, va, pn>llel irlth those In an, man, van,
KDd doD^tlags in muiy uses deriTed from tham thiongh traneltionil fonoi,
ue frequent in botb the uiUbi and the Utei luig;uige, puticDluly w And
memben of oonpotiDdg.

b. A Dumber of an-atems ara more or less defective, making a
part of their forms from other stems. Thas :

430. a. The stem &lian n. day is in the later language used
only in the strong and weakest cases, the middle (with the nom.
siDg., which nsnallf follows their aoalogy) coming from dbarorUiOB:
namely, ibar aom.-aoc. sing., ibobhySm, ibobhle, eto. (PB. ha*
abarbbia); bat Uuift etc., A-hni or Abanl (or Aban), UmS or &baiii,
&hfinl [ud, io V., &ha].

b. In the oldest Uogaiige, the middle uses Ababfals, ibftbhTAB,
ihaan also occnr.

o. In composition, onl]r abar ot abas la oaed aa preceding member;
as final membei, abar, ahaa, alian, or the derivatlvea aha, ahna.

d. The stem Adtaan a. udder eichangea In like manner, in the old
tangnage, with ddbar and l^dhaa, bnt has become later an as-stem only
(except in the fem. udbnl of adjective componnda): thna, tidbar oi ddbae,
tidhnaa, lidban or ddbani, ddbabhls, ^dha^sa. Aa derivatiTes from
It are made both Qdhany^ and udbasya.

431, The neuter stems akf&n eye, asth&n bone, dadb&n curdt,
aaktta&n thigh, form in the later langQage only the weakest caaes,
(tfcf(i^ aatbn6, dadlm^, aaktlml or saktb&nl, and so on; the rest
of the inflection is made from stems in 1, &kfl etc.: see above,
8431.

a. In the older language, other cases l^om the an-stems occur : thna,
ak^i^, akf&bbie, and ak^sa; asth^, astbAbbls, and astbibhraei

433. The nenter sterna aain blood, yakiin licer, ^ak&n ordure,
fis&n mouth, ad&n water, doq&a /ore-arm, ynf&n broth, are required
to make their nom.-acc.-voo. in all Dunbers from the parallel stems
^J, ji^tft, Q&hit, Asya, udaka (in older langaage ndaki;, d6B,
yCtfi, which are fully inflected.

a. Earlier occnra also the daat dof&ni.

433. The stem p&atban m. road is reckoned in the later langnage
as making the complete set of strong cases, with the irregularity that
the Dom.-voc. aing. adds a a. The corresponding middle cases are
made from patbf, and the weakest from path. Thus:

ioy Google

161 Dkclbksion v., Dbritative Stems is an. [—438

from p&ntbsD — p&nthSa, pintliSnam ; p&ntliftiifiu; p&nthSuaa;

from pathi — pathlbby&m ; patlifbhlB, patlifbtayu, pathlqu;

from path — patb^ path6, path^, patbl; patbos; path&s or
pithsa [accna.), pathibn.

a. In tlie oIde«t Ungntge (R'V.)i bovevei, tbe etrong Bl«m Is onlr
pinthA: thai, pJinthBa, nom. alng.; p&athKm, ue. elng.; p&nthu,
nam. pi. ; and evan In A.V., piiiithliiaia tnd pADtbSnaa ue rue eoni-
pand MU Uie othere. From patbf ocoui also the nom. pl. pathiyaa mi
gen. pi. pathln^m. ST. h>i onoe pftth&B, >oc. pi., with long S.

434. The stems mAnthan m. ftirring-$tick, tnd ^-bbakf&n m., mi
epithet of India, ue given by the gtunmBrims the time Infleotion vltli
p&ntban; but only s (ev cues haTS been fonnd In nse. In V. oecDi Trom
fhe fonnei the vx. sing. m&ntbSm, and gen. pl. mathliilEm (like the
eerregpondlDg cases from p&nthan); from the lattei, the nam. alng. ^bba-
fcfas and voe. pL ^bbiik^SB, like the oorreipondlng Vedlc fonns of p&nthan ;
bat also the aoc. sing, rbhakfifam and nom. pi. rbbnkf^pas, which
aie anei qnite anotliei model.

Adjeotlvee.

436. Original a^'ective stems in an are almoBt ezolusively tboee
made with the suffix 7an, aa jr^van aaeriJUing, Butvon preumg tht
aoma, jltran eonqutrtng. The stem is masc. and nent onl; (bnt
sporadic o«b«s of its nae as feu. occur in RV); the correBpoading
fem. stem is made in varf: thus, rfijvari, jltrari.

486. Adjective compounds having a noon in an as final mem-
ber are inflected after the model of noun-stemsi and the masculine
forma are sometimes nsed also as feminine; bnt UBnallf a special
feminine is made by adding i to the weakest form of the maaonline
stem: thus, B6maTajfii, h^llUodlmi, dkamOrdbni, dnn^amnl.

487. But (as was pointed out above: 420a) noune In an oconnlng
as final members of eempoonde often snbstitatg a stem in a for that in
an: thus, -rSJa, -Janma, -adbva, -aba; tbelr feminine is in s. Occa-
sional eiohangea of stems In van and In vant alto oocnr: thus, Tiv&avan
and vlT&svant.

a. The remaining dlvialons of the consonantal declenaion are
made up of adjective Btems only.

D. DeriTatlve Btema (adieotlve) in in.
488. The stems of this division are those fonned with
the suffixes ^^to, f^min, and 1^_^vin. They are mas-

ioy Google

438—]

y. Nouns ahd Adjectives.

162

culine and neuter only; the conesponding feminine is made
by adding ^ T.

a. The atema in In &ie very nuEaeroiie, since almost any iionn
Id a in the langaage may form a poasasBive derivative adjective with
this Biiffix ; thuB, b&la ttrtnglh, balfn m. n. balfni f. potteuing ttrengih,
strong. Stems in vin (IfiSS), boweTer, are very few, and those io
mln (1831) atill fewer.

439. Theii inflection is quite legulai, except that they
lose theii final ^ n in the middle cases (be£oie an initial
consonant o£ the ending], and also in the nom. sing., wheie
the masculine lengthens the ^ i by way of compensation.
The voc. aing. is in the masculine the bare stem; in the
neuter, either this oi like the nominative.

a. Id all theae reapecta, it wili be uotiqed, the In-declension
ttgreea with the an-deolenBion ; but it differs from the latter in never
losing the vowel of the ending.

440. Example of inflection. As such may be taken
olidH balin strong. Thus:

Singnlu. Dn&l. Plural.

ball

bali
^%
ballnam ball

balioA
^%^
balfne

bal{nSu balinl

ballbhySm

baliuas balini

balibh7BB

(HIhhIH^ ballnfim

Slfllft,/'; ' f ballnos"" ^%5

ballnl ;: , j baU^n

aif^l^aiRl'l.^% ^fe^ Slfepft ^f^I^ M^fH

b&lbi bUin. b&ll bUln&u b&lini bUinaa bUini

ioy Google

163 Declehsioh V., Derivative Stems in In. [—444

a. The darived femiDltie stem in Jul is inflected, of coorae, like
saj' other feminine la derivstire I (3d4t.

441. Ik There are no irregolaiides in the inflection of in-Btetus,
io either the eulier language or the later — eicept the ngual Vedio
dml ending in ft instead of au. '

t>. Sterna in In eicbange with Btems lu i throughoat the whole hlt-
tory of the lingotge, those of the one cUsa being developed oDt of thoae
of the othei often throagh truuitlonal forms. In a much amaller niimbeT
of casea, atema In in are eipiiided to ateiiig lu ina: e. g. QftkinA (RV.),

E. DerivatlTe stems {adjective) in ant (or at).
442. These stems fall into two sub-di visions: I. those
made by the suffix s^rl ant (or WJ at), being, with a veiy
few exceptions, active participles, present and future;
2. those made by the possessive suffixes R^T mant and
^rT vant [ot RH mat and c(rT vat). They are masculine and
neuter only; the corresponding feminine is made by ad-
ding ^ I.

1. Fairtioiples in ant or at.
44S. The stem has in general a double form, a stronger
and a weaker, ending respectively in ^rT ant and ^frf at.
The former is taken in the strong caacs of the masculine,
with, as usual, the nom.-acc.-voc. pi. neuter; the latter is
taken by all the remaining cases.

a. But, in sccoidauoe with the cala foi the formation of the (emlnine
Item (balow, 448), Che future partlciplee, and the present partlciplea of
Terba of flie tud-dma or accented ^-claaa (762), and of verba of the ad-
elaaa oi loot-cUsa ending In fi, ue by the gtammariaiia allowed to make
the Qom.-ace.-vDC. da. neat from either the stronger or the weaker atom ;
■nd the present paitlciples from all other present-atems eudlng In a are
required to make the aame from the Eirong alem.

444, Those verbs, however, which in the 3d pi. pres.
active lose \n of the usual ending f^T nti (ESOb), lose it
also in the present participle, and have no distinction of
strong and weak stem.

Digitizecy Google

444—]

V. Notms AND Adjectives.

164

a, Sneli are tbe Toibi fon&tng tbeii preaent-Btem by rednpllcition
without Kdded &: oimelr, tbote of the ledapltMtin; oi ba-clwi (BBS) and
the intenslTei (1012): thns, from yha, pTeieDt-«tem Jnho, ptttlcipla-
alem Juhvat; tutenrfve-Btem johu, IntaoelTe putlclple-item j6llTtit.
Farther, the puticiplea of loots appneutly contktnlng > contncted lednpU-
cation: nimelr, e&kfat, da^at, daeat, qasat, a&^oat; the aoiiit putl-
elple dli&kf at, and vBgh&t C'). VavfdliAiit (RY., once], which haa the n
notwithstauding Ita ledupllaation, oomes, like the dettdentiTe partieiples
(1083), from a stem in a: compace TSvfdli&ilta, vSv^pdlliBva.

b. Eieu theie vaiba are allowed by the grammarlaDe to make tbe
nom.-acc.-toc. pL nent. in antl.

446. The inflection of these stems is quit« regular. Hie
Dom. sing. masc. comes to end in ^ an by the regular
(160) loss of the two final consonants fiom the etymological
form iQt^iuitB. The vocative of each gender is like tbe
nominative.

449. Sterna accented on the final ejllable throw the acceot
forward upon the case-ending in the weakest cases (not in the middle

a In tbe feminine item) from enoh particlplea,
la iBtained, ati if it la loat

447. Examples of declension. As such may serve
i^elft bbivant betiiff, 51^ ad&nt eating, g^JfT jfihvat socn-

Thus:
Singuln:

bh&van bb&vat

bh&vantam bb&vat

>i^rn

bb&vats
bh&vate
bh&vatas
bb&vati

81^

ad&n

ad&t

ad&ntam ad&t

adata
^^
adat6

adatiw

a^

•dati

JAbvat J^vat
JlUivatam J&bvat

JubvatA

JtUtvata

J&tavataa

JiubvaU

ioy Google

Dbolbmbion v., Derivative Steiu in tut [ — 448

T.

^^ H^

^^ «^

3^

bhivftn bh&vat

idan iOat

juhvat

N.A.T,

Dul:

5^ a^
ad&nUa adaliY

sj^Hl ^

bh&vnntftu bhivantl

JubvatKu JubvatI

I.D.A1.

. ^j^mi^

5^sm

bbivadbh^am

adMbbyam

Jdhvadbhyam

a.L.

H^al^

5^^

g^?H

bhiratos

adat6B

J&bvatoB

Plutil :

N. T.

H^?ff[^ iRiH

5^tT^ 5^

s^^HH, i^^^

Jobvatas jdhvati

A.

'HrlTl^ i^srfW

^rJ^^ ^^

5^fT^ f^

btaiv&tM bhivantl

odatis ad&nti

J^vataa Jiibvati

I.

JRfr?!^

M^fAH^

a*f<H^

bh&vMlbtaia

ad&dbbis

JuhvadbhlB

D. Ab.

^^m^^

M<*yH.

a-^ftlH^

bbivadbhyas

ad&dbhyaa

JAbvadbhyaa

0.

»rafn\

w^

bh4vaUm

adatSm

JutavaUbn

L.

>1^

q^

!i*^

bli4vaitau

ad&tni

J&hvataa

, The fatnre participle btaavi^yint ma; fonn in nom. etc. dnil

neatei

bhavi«7«n; tndint, either tad&ati or

tadati; siat (KrKj, either yintS or jrftti. And J^vat, i

pinral neuter, may make aiso Jubvantl (beside jlUivatl, aa given in

the paradigm alwve).

b. But Utege atrong forma (u irell u bb&vanU, dn., >nd lt» Iik«
tiom pTSUDt-itemB fn anaccented a) ua quite contniT to genetil inklosy,
and of (omevrhat dnnbtfal chancEsT. No example of them li. qaoUble,
eltbei fiom the older oi from the Ittei Isngntge. Tbe ouei cDnceined,
indeed, would be everrwheie of iice occnnencs.

448. The Tedlc derlTtUona tnta the model m eboTe glTsn are Ivw.
The dual eediog In It only one aUth ta common sb K. AaomiloiiB accent
ia aeen la a c«e ot two: aood&t«, rathirBy&t&m, aod Tfigb&dbhle (if
thU la a participle). Tbt only Initanee in T. of nom. etc. pi. neal. la
■intt, with iengtheued ft (compaie tlia fonu in &Qtl, below, 4B 1 a, 454 o) ;
one ot two examplea In antl aie quotable from B.

ioy Google

449—] V. K0UF8 AND Adjeotives. 166

449. The feminine paiticiple-stem, as already stated,
is made bj adding ^ 1 to either the stiong or the weak
stem-form of ihe ma^c.-neut. The rules as to irhich of the
two forms shall be taken are the same with those given
above respecting the nom. etc. dual neuter; namely:

a. Participles from tenBe-Btems ending in unaccented a add T to
the strong stem-form, or make their feminine in anti.

b. Sn<ili ftre the bhQ oi nnaeeeiited a-elasR ind the iUt oi ya-ciui of
pieient-Btemi (ehtp. IX.), tud tbe desidsT4tlve< and c&oaktitM (chap. XIT.):
thus, from ybbu (etem bh&va), bbi4vaiitl; from ydlv (stem divya),
ditryanti ; frcm bnbhi^B ind bh&v&ya (de«ld. ind cans, of ytib^),
bdbbiifand and bhfiv&yants.

o. EiMpUoni to thli role ue now and then mat with, sTen from the
earliest period. Thna, RT. bae J&raU, andAT. tbe dettderatiTe slfBaaU;
In B. oeeoT vadaU, gocati, tppyatl, and in S. fnrthei tlffliatl, and the
caaaadve namayaQj whtle In the epics and later anch cues (Inclndtng
deiideratiTei and cinaatlTea) aie moie namerom (about Ilfty are qnotable),
though itlll only iporadic.

d. Participles from tense-stems in accented k maj add the femin-
ine-sign either to the strong or to the weak stem-form, or msj make
their feminines in &nU or in atf (vith accent as here noted).

e. Snch are the preaent-stems ot the tod or aceeuled &-cl&aB (751 ff.),
the B-fnlnraa (033 ft.), and the denominaUvea (lOSSS.): tbna, from ^tud
(stem tud&), tnd&nti or tndaUi horn btaaTi^yi (fnt. of yVtOi), bha-
vi^yinti or bbavlfyad; from derayA (denom. of devi), deray&ntl
01 devayati.

f. The forma In 4ntl from thia claaa are the preTalllnf oneg. No
future fern, participle In atl li quotable from the older language. From
prei-'atems in & are found there piUatl and sULoatf (RV.), tndatl and
pinvati (AY.). From denemlnatlTaa, devayati (KV.), dnraayati and
^atruyatS (AT.). In BhF. occnre dbakqyaU.

g. Verb* of the ad or loot-elags (61 1 ff.] ending Id & are giren
b; the grammarlana the eime option aa leguda the feminine of the present
participle; thua, ^m yyi, yantJ or ySti. The older language aSordi no
example of the former, ao fat ai noted.

h. From other tense-Btems than those already specified — that
is to say, firom the remaining ciasaee of present-stems and irom the
IntensiveB — the feminine is formed in ati (or, if the stem t>e other-
wise aoeeoted than on the final, in atl] only.

L Thus, adati from ^Ad; JfihvatI from ybu; ynfijatj from y'ynj;
sunvati from ym; knrwati from ykj; kri^tf from ykn; dAdlqati
from d^dig (Intena. of ydlg).

ioy Google

167 Declension V., Debitative Steug in &nt. [— 4BS

J. Feminine iCeiDa of this olus &ic ocoiioniJIy (bnt the cise is mach
lesi fieqaent tb4n Ita opposite: kboie, o) fonnd with the nual: tbae,
T&ntl (AT., once), Tiiid4iitl ((^B.; bnt prabtblr from the (ecoDdary &-alem),
grh^antl (S.), and. In tbe epliu tni lil«r, ench fonns la bruvnntl,
mdnntl, ctnTuitl, barrantl. JftnantI, mof^antL

450. A few words are partidpUl in form and Inflection, tbongh
not in meaning. Thus:

a. brbint (often written vrh&nt) great; it is inflected like ^
participle (with bphatl and bfh&ntl in du- and pi. neat.).

b. mab&nt ffrtat; inflected like a participle, bnt with the Irreg-
olaritf tbat the a of the ending is lengthened in the strong formB:
thus, mali&i, mataiatam; mata&it&u (neut. mabati); mahlintaa,
mab^tt: instr. tnahati etc.

C. pffant tfeekled, and (in Veda onl;) rd^a&t thming.

A. Jigat mtnxAh, lively (in tbe later lanfoage, w neuter noan, world),
» redaplioated fDmatloD from ygam go; lt« nom. ele. nent. pi. Is allowed
b; the gMmmBriana ta be only j&gantl.

e. rh&nt *miiS (only once, la RT., fhati).

f. All these form their feminine in atl only: thus, bfhati,
mahati, pffati and rdfati (contrarj to the rule for participlCB),
Jigatl.

g. For Halt tooth, which ii perhaps of partlciplU ori^n, see abore,

see.

451. The pronominal adjectWee lyant and kiyant are inflected
like adjectives in mant and vant, having (46S) {y&n and klySn as
nom. masc. sing,, (yati and klyatl as nom- etc. du. nent and as
feminine stems, and {yantl and klrantl as nom. etc. plnr. neut

a. Bnt the neut. pi. {ySnti and the loc. sing.(f) kiyKtl are fonnd
In RV.

2. FoBBesBlves in mant and vant.
462, The adjectives formed by these two suffixes aie
inflected precisely alike, and very nearly like the participles
in ^f\ ant. From the latter they differ only by leogthenicg
the Q a in the nom. sing. masc.

a. The too. sing, is in an, like that of the participle (in the
later language, namely: for tbat of the oldest, see below, 454 b).
The neut. nom. etc. are in the dnal only aU (or &tl), and In the plnral
anti (or inti).

b. The feminine is always made from the weak stem: thas mafl,
Tata (or m&tl. vka). One or two oases of nl instead of I are met
with: thus, antirratDl (B. and later], patlvatni [C.].

D,j,i,zec.y Google

4B2— ] V. NODHB AHD AsjECTtTZS. 168

0. The accent, however, is never thrown forirud (u In the
partEciple] upon the eue-BndIng or the feminine ending.

468. To illustrate the iofleotion ot snoh atems, it will
be sufficient to give a part of the forms of ISRH pa^umiat
possemng cattle, and HiraH bhigavont fortunate, blessed.
Thus:

SingnUr:

pstfuman paqom&t bhigav&n bli&gavat

A. tpiHrtu^ MajMf(_^ HJleWH^ m^[^

pwjumf^tam pa^nmit bhigavantam bh&gaTat
I. "WJIMI HJWtTI

paqtun&ta bh&gavat&

piqumaa piqomat bb&gavan bbigavat

Doki:
N.A.V. q^Rrit tigqal >PT^ i^lRrft

paqnm&ntiii pagumiiU bbigavantsu bh&gavatl

etc eto.

Plural:

pagumiutaa pafonduitt bb&gavantBS bh&gavantl

A. cj^TrTTl^ ntjuffl HIHrTfT H^wfrl

pagnm&taa pa^am&ntl bbieavatas bh&gavantl

I. MSJJMidH HiNf^U

pafum&dbUB bhigavadbhla

etc. etc

4B4. V«dio liTeguUTltiei. a. In doil muc nom. eU., ft (for
&n) ii the grefttlj pier&Ulag ending.

b> In Toc. »lDg. muc., tbe ending In the oldest Unciuge (RT.) la
ilmoit tlwfty* in aa Instead ot an (m In tbe perfect puttcipU: ttdoii,
462 a) : thai, adrlvas. haiivas. bUrLumaa, bavt^maa. Sach voMtlvea
in RV, oooar moie than \ hnndred tlinea, while not ■ single onqneitlenible
Initinoe of one to an la to be found. In Ihe other Yedia texts, TOMtivee
In as ue Gxtiemelr lue (bat bbagavas uid ll« contrutioa bhagos are
met with, ETen in the Uter langnige); uid in theti piodaotton of RT.

itizecy Google J

169 Dboliuisiok V., Derivative Stbus in nnt. [—456

pMsagai the as li luatlly ebKng«d t« xa. It nu pointed out aboie (4SBk)
that the BY. mtkei the toc. in (m ■I(d appuontlr (rem ■ te-u ail-stems.

O. Id BT., the nom, etc. pi. neut., In tho only two inBttnceB that
occar, ends In ftntl Initead of AUtl : thae, ghrtivUnti, pAfOmintl.
No sach fonnB bare bgen noted elsewhere in the older Iuignag«^ the 6V.
tt$,i* ftntl In it! verilon of the rorreiponding paslagel, and a feir ciam-
ple( of the lame ending ire qnolable from the Brahmanu: tbna, tftvanti,
otivantl, yjtvsatii shrt&vaiiti, pravuiti, rtomonti, yugmantL Com-
pare 448, 461.

<L In a few (eight oi ten) moie oi leas doabtftil caiei, a contoiion
of strong and veak fonna of stem is made; they tie too purely iporadto to
leqnlco tepoitlDg. The aame la tine of a case 0( two trbeie a mascnllDe
fonn appeara to be oied with a feminine noun.

4ftS. The stem irvant nmninjr, tUtd, has the Dom. eing. arvA,
from irvaax; Mid in the older tanguage also the voo. arvan and acoue.

466. Besides the participle bhAvont, there Is another stem bli&-
vftnt, frequently ased in lespeetfnl address as subsljtnte for the
prononn of tlie second person (but construed, of oonrse, with a verb
in the third person), vhloh is formed vith the suffix vant, and so
declined, having In the nom. sing, bh&vtn; and the contracted form
bhoa of its old-style vocative bbavaa is a common exclamation of
address: you, «iV.' Itfl origin has been variously explained; but i^ Is
doubtlesB a contraction of bhigavant.

457. The pionomlnal adjectlfei ttvant, etitvtut, T&vaot, and the
Tedic ivant, mivant, tvivant, et«., are Inflected like ordinary deiivstlTea

F. Ferfeot Fartioiplea in vUia.

468. The active pactioiples o£ the perfect tense-eystem
aie quite peculiar as regards the modifioations o( their stem.
In the strong oases, including the nom.-aoo.-voc. pi. neut.,
the form of their suffix is ^fH vS^, which becomes, by
regular process (160), vKn in the nom. siug., and which is
shortened to ^^vsn in the voc. sing. In the weakest
cases, the suffix is contracted into 3IT uf. In the middle
cases, including the nom.-a43c.-voc. neut. sing,, it is changed
to ^tT Tat.

a. A nnion-vovel i, if present in the etrong and middle cases,
disappears in the weakest, before of.

ioy Google

V. Nouns j

1 Adjectives.

170

469. The forms as thus described are masculine and
neuter only; the corresponding feminine is made by adding
^ I to the weakest form of stem, ending thus in 3^ ti^f.

460. The accent is always opoQ the snffix, whatever be its form.

461. Examples of inflection. To show the inflection
of these participles, we may take the stems {cj^lll vidvAfiB
knowinff [which has irregular loss of the usual reduplication
and of the perfect meaning] from y^^ vid, and afp!I^f?T
tasthivBAs having stood from y^^ sthB.

BlngnUr ;

N.

iMAH_^ &SrT^

flit*lqii fTWRrT

Tidvlia TidvAt

tastblv^ tastbiTit

A.

^trn^ ^^

r)fwi=?l?m^ rTfera?^

vidvaAeam vldv&t

taathivafisam taathivM

I.

%^

rlH^MI,

TidU^

tasthofK

D.

ie<i"N

r\^

Tidi^e

tasthj^e

Al). 0.

^f^^

m^rn^

Tidaias

tastlt^^BS

L.

(iwf^

vidiifi

tastlifiQi

V.

MaH Mift

FrfeR^ rlft^cffi

T^dvan vfdvat

t&atbivan t&atblvat

Dul:

H. A. V.

l^StHt ftpft

rlffBlctlfil rlfa^l

vidvlbbBftu vldii;!

1. D. Ab.

TldT&dbhrfim

taathlvidbbyftm

G. L.

1^3%!^

HtWqlH^

vidiifOB

taBthufOB

i, Google

1 7 1 Declbnsion v., Participles in vftAa. [ — 162

Planl;

vldvi^BaB vidvaAsi tuthiv^aaB tuthiv^el
A. HrS^H icJAlitl FTRI'TO FrfeRtftl

Tldu;as vidvifisl taathdqas taatblvaiiBi

vldT&dbblB tutbiT&dbhlB

TidvidbhTU twthlv&dbhriM

Ab. Q. i^i"E|W ffWllll

vid^&m tasth^ffim

L. KlSrH rlffEWrH

Tidvitaii tftsthlT&tsa

a. The feminine stems of these two participles aie feTjyl
Tidd^ and H^g^l tastbd^.

b. Odier emmples of the diffeient stems are:
from ykx — oak^^^a, cakrr&t, oakra^ cakru;!;
froin ym — ninlvAAs, nlnlT&t, 1111176^ ninTU^I;

from yljhQ — babua'ribiB, babhtlv&t, babhuTiif, babhuvu^i
from Vtan — tenlT^s, tenlv&t, t«nnf , t«nu^.

488. a. In tbe oldest luisuige (RT.), the TOcitive alng. mate, (lika I
that of vant and muit-atema: aboTS, 454 b) haa the ending iraa inatead
of van: tho«, oUdtras (changed to -van in a parallel pauage of AT.),
titirraa, dldivas, ml^bvoa.

b. Fonni tiom the middle stem, In vat, aie eitremel; rate earllei :
ODlf three (tatanv&t and vavrtvit, nent. elnf., and JBgfr&dbhta, initr.
pL], ara fonsd In RT., and not one in AY. And In the Teda the weakest
Item (not, aa later, the middle one) U made the baale of comparlion and
derivation: thai, vidi^fara, 4dSfa;tara, ml^oftama, mltJliA^ant.

o. An extmple at two of the nee of the weth etem-fonn for eaiea
regnlarlf made from the strong are found in RT,: the; are oakri!lfam,
acfl. (ing., and iblbliTDfas, nom. pL; emu|&m, by ite accent (nnleu an
enor), is taAer from a derlvatlTe stem emu^; and QB. haa pro^fam.
Similar inttcneea, eipeclally from TtdviAB, are nov and then met with
later (see BR., under vidvltAs),

d. The AT. has onee bhaktlv^Aaaa, as If a paiticlplal form from a
noon; hot S. and TB. gi*e in the ooriupondlng pasaage bhaktiv^afl-,
eakhT^aam (RT., once) la of donblful character; oUvlAaK (ST., once)
■how* a reiertion to guttnial form of the Ilnal of yno, elsewhere nnknown.

Diaii.ze.., Google

G. Comparatives in ySAs or ysB.

463. The comparatiTe adjectives of primary fonnatioii
[below, 467) have a double form of stem for masouUne and
neutei: a atioogei, ending in QtH rS&s [usually f^jtff TySAs),
in the strong cases, and a weakei, in m yas [or ^ITH lyae),
in the weak oases (there being no distinction of middle and
weakest). The voo. sing. masc. ends in TR yan (but for
the older language see below, 466 a).

a. The feminine is made by adding ^ I to the weak
maec.-neut. stem.

464. As models of inflection, it will be sufficient to
give a part of the forms of WI^ 9r^yaB belter, and of
i^lUH g^Lrlyaa heavier. Thus:

singula:

^in^

nftaR^ n^teni^

qtiyan

9r6Tas

Kfaiyto giriyaa

i^zra^

iTftatH\ ufhra^

qrfiyaa

K&rtyjUHsam g&rlyM

2nrai

t

nfkrar

^itkyM.

g&riyast

eU

etc.

M

5nra^

9r«yan

9r6yaB

giriyan gfcriyoa

^m^t

^tih!

nfhitqt iTTtarft

friyUsKu

^rAyaai

S&nyiAsftu g&rlyaBi

9r6yBABBe qriyafiBl giriyiAsaa g&riyOABi

friyoeu Qr^yftAsi K&riyasae g&rly&ftal

gr^obhia g&rlyobhiB

ioy Google

173 COHPARISON OF AdJECTTVES. [ — 167

a. The feminine stems of these adjeotires are vIuhI
frdyasl and )|(1uh1 girlyasl.

466. a. The Yedio too. mue. (u In tbe two pracedlng diiialoDB:
464 b, 461 a) ii in yas lutetd of yan : thiu, ojlyaa, Jy&raa (RV. : no
ei tin pie* eltewhere have be«n noted).

b. No eiunple of » middle cms ocodti in RV. oi AV.

0> In the later Ungnsge ue found t, veiy few ippireiil eiimplee of
■tiong ouei mide from the vedcer ■tem-form: thus, kanlfaaam and
yaviyaBam Me. muo., kanlyasKu do., yavlyaaaa nom. pi.

Comparison.

466. Deiivative adjective stems having a oomparstive
and superlative meaning — or often also (and more origin-
ally] a merely intennve value — ate made either directly
&om toots (by primary derivation], or from other derivative
or compound stems (by seoondaty derivation}.

a. The mbject of eempulson belong! more pToperl7 to the ebspter of
deiiTttlon; bnt It Mandi In snch neu lelttion to tnllectloo that It is. In
Mceidtnee with the antl onitom In griinmut, conTenteDtly and suitably
enoDfb treated briefly here.

467. The suffixes of primary derivation are ^T]TT Iras
(or ^ITtTT lySbs] for the comparative and ^ i^^ for the
superlative. The root before them is accented, and usually
strengthened by gunating, if capable of it — oi, in some
oases, by nasalization or prolongation. They are much more
frequently and freely used in the oldest language than
later; in the classical Sanskrit, only a limited number of
such, oompaiatives and superlatives are accepted in use; and
these attach themselves in meaning for the most part to
other adjectives from the same root, which seem to be
theit corresponding positives; but in part also they ate
aztifioially connected with other words, unrelated with them
in derivation.

a. Tbns, from ykflp hurl come kf^Iyas nnd fcfipi^ha, which
belong in meaning to k^prt fuiek; from yvx tneompatt oome v&rl-
yaa and viriffha, which belong to urn broad; while, for example,

itizecy Google

467—1 V. NOCHS AND Adjbotivbs. 174

kdjilru and k&niftba are attached b; Che grammarians to yuvan
young, or &lpa mnall; and v&rqiyu and T&rqi^tba to v^ddbi old.

468. From Veda and Brahmana together, considerably more than
A hundred inntanceB of this primary formation in lyas and Iffha (in
many cases only one of the pair actnally occurring) are to be quoted.

a. About half of thus (<n RV., the deolded mKJorlt;) belons, In
meaning u in form, to the 'bars root In its sdjeetlve idae, u DBed etpe-
clatly Bt the end of oomponDds, bat Bametlme* also ludependantly ; thus,
from ytap bum comes t&pi|f^a excenivelt/ burning; from I'yBj offer oome
r^iyas uid yftjlf(lia bvlttr mi bttt (01 vay icalfjiacrifieing; from j/yndh
Jight aomeB yAdhlyaa fitting befttr; — In a few Instances, the simple
root is also found used ss conespoadlng positive; thus, Jill hotly, rt^id
with J&Tiyaa and j&viqttut.

b. In a little class of instinoes (eight), the loot bai s ptepesiUou
prellxed, which then tskes the accent: thus, igaml^tba eipteialiy commg
hither; vfcayiffha beat clearing moaj); — In a conple of oases (Aqrami-
(t^a, ipar&vapiqtha. ^theyaa), the negative paitlole is piefiied; —
In a single word (Q&mbhaTlqtlia), an element of anotbu kind.

o. The words of this foimatlon somatimea take an Mcnsatire object
(see 271 e^

d. But even in the oldest language appears not infrequently the
same attachment in meaning to a deriTative a^ective vhioh (as point-
ed out above] is usual in the later speech.

a. Besides the eiau^les that occur alto later, others are met with like
T&rlftlia choicat (v&ra choice), b&rb.l;tlia greatait (b^li&iit great),
6;lt;(ha quiditit (btftaa quidcfy), and so <m. Fiobsbly by aDaJog; irltb
these, like formatlona ue In a tew cues made from the appuently ndioal
syllsbles of words which have no otherwise traceable root la the language:
thus, ktadhiyaa and kradhlft'ta (K.) from k;dll&. Btb&ViyBB aud
Bthiviq^bK from Bthar&, f&flyaa ifiy.) from q&^ant, iafiyaa (AV.)
aud A^itlia (TS.) from ai^i^-, and so on. Aud yet again, In a few eieep'
tional cases, the suffixes lyaa and iffha are applied to stems which ue
themselyes palpably derivati'e: thus, ^l|(lia from &qu (RV.: only ease),
tikQ^iyas (AV.) from tikf^i, br&hmiyaB and br&hmi^tha (TS. etc.)
from brUimtui, dh&nniftba (TA.) frooi db&rman, dr&^hifta (TA.:
Instead of d&rhiqlha) from dp^bi, r&gMyas (TS.) from raghn. These
are beginnings, not followed up later, of the extension of the formadou to
unlimited use.

f. In n^viyaa or o&vyaa and nAvi^Iia, bom a&va neu>, end in
atoyaa from eitaSk old (all RV.), we have also formations nnconnected
with verbal roots.

466. The stems in i^tha are inflected like ordinary at^eotives
in a, and make theii feminineg in S; those in iyaa have a peculiar
declension which has been described above (468S.J.

ioy Google

175 COMPABISON OF AdJBOTIVES. [—471

47a Of peoolarities and irregalaritieB of formatioo, the follow-
ing may be Dotioed:

a. Thg satflx lyaa hu In s tew instances the briefer form TAB, gener-
tlly aa alternative iritii the other: thne, t&viTaB and t4vyBS, n&viyaa
and n&vjOB, v&^aa and v&syaB, p&ulyaa and p&nyae; and sa from
rabh and aab; a&nraa dcoiub aloae. From bliu coma bhdyas and
bhdyiftha, beatd« irbich RV. has aUo bMviyas.

b. Of roota In &, the final blends with the InitUl of tho BuffliL to b:
thuB, 8tti6yaa, dhi^tlia, r^ffliai but snoh forma are in the V«da gener-
ally to be reaolved, aa dliil^tha, yiiSq^a. The root JyS ronns Jyeftha,
but Jyayaa (lik* bbtiyaa).

o. The tvo ioot« in I, pri and 911, form prdyas and prd^flia and
^r^yaa and Qr^fha.

d. From the loot of fjA come, wlthont strengthening, ^Jlyaa and
^Jiftha; but In the oldu language also, moie regularly, r^iyaa and
rtjlftha.

471. The suffixes of secondary derivation aie FT^ tara
and fT^ tama. They aie of almost uuestricted application,
being added to adjectives of every form, simple and com-
pound, ending in vowels oi in consonants — and this from
the earliest period of the language until the latest. The
aooent of the primitive remains [with rare exceptions) un-
changed; and that form of stem is generally taken which
appears before an initial consonant of a case-ending [weak
or middle form).

a. Examples (of older as wel) as later oooarrencel are: from
Towel-stema, prlyfttara, v&hnltama, raOiitara and rathltama (BV),
oAmtara, potftama, aadiTaktatara ; — from coDsonant-Btema, Q&ih-
tama, q&Qvattama, mr^arittama, tav&atara and tav&otamai tuvif-
(ama, v&pa^tara, tapaavltara, yaqaBvitama, bbiigavattara, bira-
QyavSfiiaattama ; — from compouDda, ratnadhatama, abhlbbiitara,
sukfttara, pOxbhittama, btaOylfthabhaktama, bhiindaTattara,
fuolvratatama, strtkfimatama.

b. Bnt in the Yeda tbe final n of a stem ii regularly retained; thns,
mBdlntara and madintama, vff&ntaina; and a few sterna oTon add a
nual: thuB, anrabhlntara, rayCntama, madb^ntama. In a case or
two, the strong item of a present participle is taken: thna, TTadbanttama,
B&banttama; and, of a peifeot participle, the weakeat atem: thaa, vldinQ-
(ara, ml^buft&ma. A feminine final I la shortened: thus, davltamS
(BV.), tajaavlnit&mft (K.).

ioy Google

471—] V. Nouns AND Adjbotivbs. 176

0> In UiB older luigDage, tlie iroTda of this fonnatloTi ut not maeli
more freqnent than those of the other: thas, In RT. tho itemB In tarn
and tama are to those In Itm and Iqtha u three to two; In AV., ooly
as six to flye: bnt liter the former win a great ptepondetanee.

47S. These compaTatives and BoperlatiTfls are inflected libe
ordinary adjectivefi in a, forming their feminine in S.

473. a. That (espeolallr in the Veda) some stems which are
nouns rather than adjectives form derivatives of comparison is natural
enough, considering the uncertain nature of the divieioD-line between
substantive and adjective value. Thus, we have vir&tora, vir&tama,
T&hultama, m&t^ama, nftamo, maruttoma, and bo on.

b. The suffixes tara and tama also make forms of comparison
from some of the pronominal roots, as ko, ya, 1 [see below, 6S0);
and from certain of the prepositions, aa ud; and the adverbially used
aconeatlve (older, neuter, -taram; later, feminine, •tar&m] of a com-
parative in tara from a preposition is employed to make a corres-
ponding comparative to the preposition Itself (below, 1119]; while
•tax&m and -tamiLm make degrees of comparison from a few ad-
verbs: thus, natarim, natamim, katbaditarSm, kutaatarKm,
addh&tam^m, nleaistarlim, etc.

o. By a wholly haTbaiona_ combination, finding no warrant In tlie
earlier and more geuuloe DSiges of the laogaage, the snfllXBS of compariMD
la their adverbial feminine form, -tarftm and tamBm, are later allowed
to be added to poTBonal forma of verbs: thna, aidatetarim (R. : the only
ease noted in the eplos) i> more detpondmt, vyatbayatltarSm ditturbs
more, alabbBtataiftm oitaintd in a higher degree, hasifyatitarKm will
laugh more. No examplol of this nse of -tam&m are quotable.

d. The gufflxea of secondary compariwn aie not iDfceqnently added
to those of primary, (ormtng double comparatlTee and snperlatfTes : thus,
lariyaatara, Qreftbatara and ^^(hatama, pKpiyaatara, pftpi^flia-
tara and -tama, bhuyaataram, eto.

e. The use of tama as ordinal suffix Is noted below (4B7f J ; with
this value, it is accented on the final, and makes its feminine in I:
thus, qatatami m. n., qatatami {., hurtdredth.

474. From a few words, mostly prepositions, degrees of com-
parison are made by the briefer suffixes ra and ma: thus, &dbaro
and adbomi, &para and apamA, Avara and avami, 6para and
upamli, &ntara, &utama, param4, madhyami, oaram&, antltna.
Sdima, paqoima. And ma is also used to make ordinals (below, 487).

ioy Google

CHAPTER VI.

NUMERALS.

476. The simple oaidinal numeials for tbe first ten
numbers [which are the foundation of the whole class),
with theii derivatives, the tens, and with some of the higher
members of the decimal series, are as follows:

ipl

..^

.00

UltT

ikA

di,.

qat4 C*t- ■

t

«i*i%

1000

fl^W

dv&

vlAfatl

aah&Bra

ft

30 fsfUR^

10,000

agFT

trl

trlAqit

aj&tti

WR-

loamf^

100,000

5Rt

oatiir

CBtTfiriA^&t

lak^

TO

60 yyiwr^^

i,ooo,o«

0 ^TOtT

pU<n

pafia&9&t

ppayiita

■^

80 q%

10,000,000 ^Ifi;

«i«

wti

k6ll

im

10 Rnf?!

IflS

^

..pti

saptstl

aibuiU

^

80 M!*TlfH

10»

H-tlM<

•?ti

agltl

mabilTbadA

=H

..■1*

10>°

m

n&va

oavati

kharri

^

iooUTFT

10"

fiOT

dif.

fat&

nlkbarvB

Tha aoMnl

: sapti iDd mk li thtt

beloQgiDS tt

> theie woT4a In all

Mti texta;

re B&pta and i^\t,

In tbe later laDgnige. aee below, 483.

b. The series of decimal numbers maj be carried still further;
bnt tbere ue great differences smoiig the different authorities with

Wkiti*;, anrnmiir. U. id. 12

L.,j,i,....,LiOogle

476—1

VI. NOMBRALB.

178

legard to their names; and there is more or leas of diBCordknce even
from ayi^ta on.

c. Thna, In tb« TS. and MS. we find ftyuta, oiydta, prayuto,
&rbuda, ny^buda, lamudrd, m&dhya, Anta, parftrdh&; E. iBTeno
the ordei oF alyiita and prayuta, uid Imerts badva >ftei nyarbuda
(reiding njrarbudha): these ue piobsbly the aldett lecoided aeriea.

d. In modem time, the only numbers In pnetlcil nas abate thoutand
■IB lakfa (lac or lath) and koti (crore); and an Indian sum ia wont to
be pointed thus: 123,45,67,890, to signify 123 erorts, dS laJAi, 67 Uou-
taiid, eight hundred and ninety,

0. Aa to tbe alleged ilem-forma patLoan etc., aee below, 484. A*
to tbe roim ^akQ tuatead of ;af , aee aliove, 14S b. The alem dva appeara
in compoiition and derivation alao u dva and dvi; oatur in compositian
la accented o&tur. The older (oim of aqta Is a^i&: see below, 488.
Forms in -qat and -gatl /or the tens are occialonally interchanged: e. g.
TlAQat (MBh. R.), trlAQatl (AB.), pafioB^ati (itT.).

f. The other numbers are expreaaed by the varioua compoBition
mid ayntacticftl combination of those given above. Thoe:

470. The odd Dnmbera between the even tens are made by
prefixing the [accented) unit to the ten to which ita value la to be
added: bnt with variona inegalarlties. ThtiB:

a. eka in fl becomea ekft, bnt la elsewhere unchanged;

b. dva becomes everywhere dv&; bnt in 42-73 and In 92 it ta
Interchangeable with dvi, and in S2 dvi alone ia uaed;

0. for trl U snbstltnted Its nom. pi. maac. tr&yaB; but tri ilaelf la
alao allowed In 43-73 and in 93, and in as tri alone Is need;

d. eaf becomes ;o in IS, and makes the inlUal d of daqa llngval
(199 d); elsewhere Its final undergoes the regular conversion (336 b, 198 b)
to t 0' 4 or ?; >nd fn 96 the a of navfttl It assimilated to it [198 o);

e. aq(a becomes Bf^K (488) In

succeeding combinations.

1 ia-38, and has <

either form In the

f. Thus;

u ekadaqa
11 dvada<fa

31 ^katriiqat
31 dvatpiiijat

«i Akafa^ti
^/dvitga^li
'Mdvifa,ti

31 ikSfitl
Bl dvy^ti

13 trdyodaqa

33 tr^aatrU^at

JtriyahqaHi
Mtri^a^tl

B3 try4qitl

14 o&turdaqa

15 p&fioadaqa

IK ^bi^B.

IT BBptddaqa

31 B&tuBtTi&Qat
3 a p&fioatrlAQat

36 ^ttrlAqat

37 Bapt&trlJiqat

«i o&tnbfaftl
es p^oaqaffi
U 9&t9a9tl

«7 Mpt&Wti

81 oituraqltl
30 p&aoftoitd

37 aapt^ti

IS ft?5^aqa

38 aft^triA^at

"Cg:;s

S8 aftS^iti

le navada.;a

3» oivatrii<!«t

BB ii&Ta?a^l

Bii n&vSflti

Dij.ieo, Google

179 Odd Huubeks. [—478

g. Tbe nmnbacs SI-29 ue mide llks thole foi 31-39; the nanbets
4l-d9, il-59, 71-79, and 91-99 ara mide like thoee for 81-69.

h. The fanns mtde with dirS ind trayas up more usual than ihose
with dvl and trl, which are hardlr to be quoted From the older literature
(T. and Br.). The forms made with aqtd (initead of a^td) are almoit ei-
clntlvely used In the older Uteritote (48S), and are not Infrequent In the
Utei.

477. The above are the DortanI ezpresaioDa for the odd niim-
bera. But equivalent BabBtitatea for tbem are also variously made.
Thus:

a. Br oae ot the adjectives Qua deficient and adhika redundant. In
composition with lesser uomberB whlrh are to be subtracted or added, and
eiUier Independently qnalifrlng or [more usually) in composition with larger
onmbers which are to he iiicreaaed or dimlnUhed by the others: ihue,
tTTuaafaiftl^ lixty deficient by three (1. e. S7); a^t&dlilkaiiaTatlh
nwty increaeed by eight (i. o. 98); ek&dUkaih fatam a hundred tn-
ereaeed by one (i. e. lOl); paficonaifa ^ataia 100 let* 6 (1. e. 9S). For
the nines, eapeclally, inch subitltutes aa ekoiiavlAQati^ SO hee I, or 19,
are not unoommon ; and later the eba 1 U left oiT, and QnavlAQatl etc.
have the same value.

b. A caae-ronn of a smaller number, generally Aa one ii connected
by ok not with a larger number from which It Is to be deducted: tll^^l,
iikaji ni trliLf&t ((B. PB. KB.) not thirty by one (30); dvitbhyfiih
a& 'qliim (QB.) not eighty by two (7S) ; pafie&bMr ii& oatvari fat^
(^B.) not four hundred by Jive (396) ; ehasmfia n4 paSoa^&t (in ordinal)
i9 (TS.); HkMayU [abl. fern.: 307 b) oipaacil^t ^» (TS.); moat often,
akia (1. e. i'ktt, irregular abl. for dkaamAt) nil vldfatfl; 19i 4k&ii ii&
Qat&in 99. Thii last torm ie admitted also In the later language; tbe
others are found In the Brahmanas.

o. Instances of multiplication by s prefixed number are occasionally
met with: thus, trl^ptA thrice seven; trinavA thrict nine; tridai;&
thrice ten.

d. Ot coarse, the numbsts to be added together may be expressed by
Independent words, with connecting and: thus, n&va oa navati? oa, or
n&Ta navatiq oa ninety and nine; dvtu ca viA^atf^ oa tioo and
taenty. Bat the connective Is also (at least, In the older language) not
seldom omitted: tbna, navatfr niiva 99; triA^&taifa trih 33; aqitfr
a^tftn 88.

478. The same methods are also variously used for forming tbe
odd numbers above 100. Thus:

a. The added number is prefixed to the other, and takes the accent:
lor example, ^ki^atam 101; a:^ttia.ttaa 108; tri&f&cobatani ISO;
aft&vififatlfatam 1^8; o&tu^aabaaram (RV. : unless the accent is
wrong) loot; o^tleahasraan 1080.

12*

Dgil.zecy Google

478—] VL NVHBKAi^. 1$0

b. Or, ihe aoiuber to be added i» compoanded with adhUu rtdundatU,
t.ni tha compauiid ii elthac made to qualify tbe other niunbai or la fnithet
compounded vlth it: thus, pa&o&dMkaifa ^atarn oi pafioSdhikaqaUun
lOi. Of coune, una deficient [ai alao other woida eqiUTalant to ana oi
adblka) maj be used lu tbo »udo way: tbni, pafioonadi qatam 95,
qa^ti^ paiiaavarjitfi 5S; qatam abhyadtalkaifa f&ftltal^ 190.

O. Syntactical cambiiiatlons ate made at cou-venience: for example d&fa
gat&ih oa no-, gat&in dkaib oa 101.

478. Anotber OBiial method (begioning in the BrAhmaoaa) ef
forming the odd numbera above lUO is to qnalify the lar^r nniober
by an adjective derived from tbe smaller, and identical with the
briefer ordinal (below, 488): thus, dvOdaq&ih qat&m. Hi (lit'ly a
hundrtd of a IS-iorl, or eharaeUritadbj/ 12); oatuqoatv&ri&f iib f atdm
idd; fat^aqt^di ^at^m IBS.

480. To multiply one number by another, among the higher or
tbe lower denomiuationB, the simpleat and least ambiguous method
ia to make of tbe multiplied number a dual or plural, qualified by
the other as any ordinary noon would be; and th I a method b a com-
moD one in all agee of the language. For example: pAfioa palLoK-
ijAtoB Jive fi/liei {S50}; niva aaTatAyaa nma nituliti (810); aqltibUs
tlB^bhia with Ihree tigMie* '\:H0); p&iioa ffttitni ^ve hundredi; trlfl
aah&ar&i^ three thoutaadt; ^a^tlifa. aah&arfi^ 6I),000; daqa oa aahaa*
rai^ af^u oa qat&ni 10,800: and, combined with addition, tri^i
9at£ni tr&yaatrl&qataib oa 333; aahaare dve pafkoooaiii qatam ova
oa 3095.

a. In an excepUonal caie 01 two, the ordinal form appean to take
the place of the cardinal aa mnltlplicand in a like combinaUou ; thna, ^\-
trtiiflaAq oa oatdra^ {KV.) 3ex4 (lit. /our 0/ the thirU/tix kind);
ttiAt ek&daqan (KV.) or traya ekadaqjbM^ C^. Till. t\. i) iJxS.

b. lly a peculiar and wholly Illogical conetmetlon, iuch a combination
as tri^i qai}tiQatanl, which ooght tu aignify jau (3x100 + 60], la repeat-
edly us<!d In tbe Bnhmanaa to mean 360 (3x100 + 60); >o alao dvA
oatuatriAq^ qaXb S3t (not 768); dvi^mt^hai trlnl qat&ni 3eS; and
other like cuei. And even K. has trayah qataqat&rdli&h 360.

461. But the two factors, multiplier and multiplied, are also,
and in later uaage more generally, combined into a compound (accented
on tbo final] ; and this is then treated as an adjective, qualifying the
numbered noun; or else its neuter or ftminlne (in I) singular is used
aubstautively: thus, daqaqataa looo; qafqatftih padfttlbbil^ (UBh.)
with 600 foot-aoldier»; tiaraatriiiqat trlqata^ qa^ahaar£^ (AV.) 6333;
dvlqaUiia oc dvlqati 200; a^t&daqagatl tsoo.

Oi Id the usual absence of acnentnatlon , there ulsea (ometimet a
queatlon ai to how ■ compound nam bet shall be nuderitood: whether aft*-
qatam, foi example, is afft&qatam lOa 01 a^ta^atAm WO, and the like.

Digitizecy Google

/

181 Intlbction. [ — 46S

4Sa. Inflection. The inflection of the cardinal numeTals
is in many respects irregular. Gender is distinguished only
by the first fooi.

a. Bka one is declined after the manner of a pronominat adjec-
tive [like B&rva, below, 6S4); its plural is used in the eenae of tome,
certain ontt. ItB dual does not oocnr.

b. Oi'.cMlonal formi of the ordinirj declensicn tf« metirfth; thai, 4ke
{loc. ilng.), 6k(lt C477 b).

a. In the Ute literatnrp, eka is nsed in the sense of a certain
or even Bometimes almoat of a, as an indefinite article. Thus, eko
vyBghra^ (H.) a certain tiger; ekaamln dine on a certain day; haste
doq^am ekajn idftya 'H.) taking a itick in hit hand.

d. I>Ta two is dual onljr, and is entirely re^lar: thus, N, A. V.
dvin (dv&, Veda) to., Avi f. n.; I. D. Ab. dT^hySm; G. L. Av&yot.

e. Trl three is in mnsc. and nent. nearly regular, like an ordinary
stem in t; but the genilJve is as if from tr^& (only in the later
language: Ihe regular ti^&n occurs once in RV.). For the feminine
it has the peculiar stem tis^, which ie Inflected In general like an
f-etem; bat the nom. and accns. are alike, and show no strength eniog
of Che r; and the j is not prolonged in the gen. (excepting in the
VedaJ. Thus:

m. n. f.

N. tr&T-aa tri^l tiarAa

A. tnn tn^i tlar&a

I. trlbtals tiatbhis

D.Ab. trlbfa7&8 tia^bhyaa

0. tray&^&u ttap^im

L. trlt^d tU^

f The Vada h>B the Rbbtevlated neat, nom, and >cen». trl. The
acrentDatlon tispbhie, tiarbhy&a, tls^nSm, and tlsni^ ■• aaid to be
alao alloved In the lat«r laegiiage. The item tlBf occnra in comi>ogitioD
In tlardhaav& (B.) a bou? with three arroxoe

g. Oatdr four baa oatvar |[be more original form) in the strong
csees; in the fem. it aubatitotes the stem o&tasr, apparently akin
with tlaf, and inflected like it (but with anomatoug change of accent,
llke^that in the higher numbers: aee below, 483). Thus:
m. n. f.

N. catvtras oatriri o&tasraa

A. osturaa oatv^ o&tasras

I. oatuTbhis oatas^bhls

D. Ab. oatdf bhyas oataatbhraa

O. oatar^itm oatasf^ttm

L. oat^TQU oatasftn.

Digitizecy Google

48S— ] VI. Numerals. 1S2

h. The uae ot a berors Km ot Hie gen. taaac. and neat. 4fl«i > Bnil
conBODATit of the stem is (w in ^oq: below, 463) a itiiklng IrregoUiltf.
The maiB regalir gen. tern. oatasf^Sm Ubo sometlmea oecnre. Id tbe
later language, the accentuation o( the final eyllable Inalead of the penult
l9 eaid to be allowed In initr., dat-abl., and loc.

463. The nnmbera from S to 19 have no distinetion of gender,
Dor any generic character. They are inflected, Bomewhat irregularly,
as plurals, save In the nom.-acc., where they have no proper plural
form, but show the bare stem instead- Of f&q (as of catdr), nam
is the gen. ending, with mutual assimilation (108 b) of etem-final and
initial of the termination. A;(& (as accented in the older language)
has an alternative fuller form, aqt^ which is almost exclusively used
in the older literature (V. and B.), both in inflecUon and in compo-
sition (but some compounds with aff^ are found as early as the AT);
its nom.-acc. is a^^k (usual later: found in £V. once, and in AT.),
or ofta (BY), or oft&u (most usual in RV.; also in AT., B., and
later).

a. The Bcrent is in many respeota peeollai. In all the accented teits,
tbe stiesi of voice Ilea on the penult before the endings bhls, bbjas, and
BU, ftom the st«nia in a, whatever be the accent of the stem ; thna, pafL-
o&bhla from p&fioa, nair&bhyaa ftam n&va, daq&su from d&qa, nava-
daq&bhlB from n&vadafa, ekfida^bhraa from ^ksdafa. dTftda^&sa
from dvida^a (according to the grammailaiu, either the penalt or the
llnal li accented In these forma in the later language). In the gen. pi,,
the accaut is on the ending (as in that of 1-, u-, and f-Btems): thus, pafi-
oadaqftnam, Baptadaf&r^n. The caaea of ^a^ and tiioae made from
tbe Btem-furm aft^, have the accent thioaghoat npon the ending.

b. Examples of the ioRection of these words are as follows:
N. A.
I.

piflca

^\

a^tsi aft4

pafLC&bhlB

^a^bbis

a^tabbis a^bhia

paiicAbhyas

gadbhy&a

a,t»bbyiB a^tibhyaa

pafioftnSm

9aW*m

aftan^

^tad

aftaafi aft&sTi.

0. SaptA (Id the later language s&pta, at dL^^a for af^) and n&TR
and d&Qa, with the oomponnda of d&qa (11-19), are declined like pAAoa,
and with the Bame shift of accent (or with alternetlTe shift to the endinga,
aa. pointed ont above).

484. The Hindu grammarlana give to the Btems for 5 and 7-19 a
final n: thus, pafioon, aaptan, o^tan, navan, daqan. and akada^an
etc. Thii, however, haa nothing to do with the demonBtrabl; oilglnil llnal
nual of 7, 9, and 10 (compare stptem, novem, decern; ' eeven, nwie,
ten); It Is only owing to the fact that, starting from suf^h a stem-form,
theli InQectlon la made to asBume a more regqlac aspect, the nom.-icc.
having the form of ■ neut. sing, in an, and the Inatr,, dat.-abl., and loe.
that of a neot. or maae. pL In an: compare nluna, n&aabhlfl^ xiiaui-

ioy Google

183 Imflbotion. [—487

bhyaa, tUtmun — the gen. alone being, nllieT, like tbit of >d ft-item:
eompue '<'m;*'"^"' *itl> {ndrfti^ftiD tnd namnSm oi Um&n&m. No trace
whktsTBi of > Bnal n is found uiywhaie In the Uofnage, In Inflection oi
derlTMIon ot comporition, ^m any of theie voidi (tboogli 9B. hM twice
dAftufadK^, (oi the U8ua] doqodiM;!!!),

4S6. a. The tens, viAqftti hdiI tiifiq&t etc., with their compuunde,
are declined regularly, as feminine atema of the same endings, and in
all numbers.

b. 9at4 and sahiiara are declined regularly, as neuter (or, rarely,
in the later language, as masouline] stems of the same final, in all
numbers.

o. The like Is true of the higher nnmbers — which bare, Indeed,
DO proper nnmeral character, but are ordinary nouns.

486. Conatrnotlon. As regards their construction with the
noons enumerated by them —

& The words for i to /A are in the main used adjecdvely,-
agreeing in case, and, if they distinguish gender, in gender also, with
(he nouns: thus, daq&bMr Tirftif ""'^ ''" h^oei; ji devtt diyy
ik&dafa Bth& (AV.) what eleven godt of you are in heaven; pafio&su
j&nequ among the five trihea; oatasfbMr glrbbll^ tci'M four eongi.
Rarely occur such combinations as diqa kal&qSnftm ^KV.) ten pitcher*,
rtenfiih vat ;E.) six seatong,

b. The numerals above IB are construed usually as nouns, either
taking the numbered noun as a dependent geuItiTo, or standing in
the singular in apposition with it: thus, ^atadi dfts^i or qatadi
dlaiuKm a hundred tlavet or a hundred of tlaves; vi&qaty^ hirlbM^
teith twenty bagi; qaffyaih far&tBu iii 60 autumne; ifatiaa, p^&l^
teiOt a hundred fellera; qat&ih aab&sram KTutaih ny^bnd&ib ja<
gh&ia qakrd d&aynn&m (AV.) the mighty [Indra] tlexv a hundred, a
thoutand, a myriad, a hundred million, of demone. Occasionally they
are put in the plural, as if used more adjectivelyi thus, pafic&^od-
bhir b&QiU^ uiith Jifty arrows.

o. lu the older language, the numerals for 5 and upward are
sometime used in the nom.-acc. form (oi as if indeclinabty) with
other cases also: thus, pafioa Iq^tf^u among the Jive races; Bapt4
rfiqSifa of seven hi^ds; aah&aram ^Ibhl^ with a thousand barde;
$at&ib pOrbbl^ with a hundred itrongholde. Sporadic instancea of a
like kind are also met with later.

487. Ordinal s. Oi the clasBes of derivative words
coming &om the original oi cardinal aumerala, the ordin-
als are by far the moat important; and the mode of their
fonnation may best be explained here.

ioy Google

487—] VI. NUMBRALB. 184

Some of tho first ordloAlfi are irregularly owde; thus,

a< 6ka l forms no ordinal; instead is used praQuuaii (i. e. pra-
tama foremo$t); ftdya (from Odl beprnting) appears fint in the Sutras,
and &dim& much later;

b. from dvk 2, and trl 3, come dTttlra and tftij* (seooudarily,
through dvlta and abbreviated trlta);

o. oatdr 4, f&f 6, and aapti 7, take the ending tha: thus,
oaturtb&i fsfthd, aaptitha; but for feuriA are used also tnriya and
torya, and aapt&tha belongs to tbe older language only; pa&oatha,
tor /iflh, is excessively rare;

d. tbe numerals for 5 and 7 usually, and for 8, 9, 10, add ma,
forming pafioami, aBptai]i&, af(am&, navami, dafami;

e. for nth to I9t/i, the forms are ekAda^A, dvSdaqi, and so
on (the same with the cardinals, except change of aooent) ; but akK-
da^ama etc. oocasiooally occar also;

f. for the tens and intervening odd unmbers fh>m 50 onward,
the ordinal has a double form — one made by adding tbe full [super-
lative) ending tain& to the cardinal: thus, viAqatttami, trlA^attami,
aqltltamii, etc.; tbe other, shorter, in a, witb abbreviation of the
cardinal: thus, viA^A 90th; tTlikf& 30th; oatTftrlA9& iOth; paiLoftfi
6olh; faft& eoth; aaptati ?Oth; aQitA 80th; navati 90fh; and so
likewise ekaviA^^ 2iit; oatiutriAg4 34th; a)f\lMKtvirUii}k 4Sth;
dTftpafioftq& B2d; eka^a^fd etsl; and ek&nnaviAfA and OnavlAqi
and ekonaTifiqA /9M; — and so on. Of these two forms, the latter
and briefer is by far tbe more cossmoD, tbe other being not quotable
from the Veda, and extremely rarely from the Br&hmanas. From iOth
on, the briefer form is allowed by tbe grammarians only to the odd
numbers, made up of tens and units; but it is sometimes met witb,
even in the later language, from the simple ten.

g. Of the higher numbers, 9at& and aahAara form gatatamA aod
aabaaratamii; but tbeir compounds have also the simpler form: thus,
ekaqatd or ekagatatama lOUt.

k. Of tbe ordinals, pratbami (snd Ura), dvltiyat tptiya, and
turiya (with t^rya) form their feminine in i; alt the rest make it

488< Tbe aidlntls, u in other langnagea, have other than erdlnsl
offlcee to flit; and in Sanskrit especiillr they are general adjectives to the
cirdlnale, with a conilderable Tartety of meanlnfs, as fraetlonala, a« lipilf
fying compottd of to many porta or so-mam/-/old, or eetOatntng to many,
or (b8 wm seen «l>0Te, 478) having to many added.

a. In B fractional seme, tbe grammariaiu direct that their aeceat be
shifted to the first sf liable: tbne, dviOynhalf; tftSytk thirdpart; O&tur-
tba quarttr; and bo on. But in accented teita ouly t^lya Mini, and
c&turtha ((!B.) and tArIra guart«r, are found lo treated; for half ooouis

ioy Google

185 KUHERAL DEHIVATITIS. [—481

only ardhi; and o«tnrth& (M8. et«.}, pttltoam&, and lo on, ue woented
u in theii oidlnil ue.

488. There are other nnmeral dsrivatiTeH: thus —

a. moltiplicative itdverbs, ae Avia tviict, tria fhriet, oat6a four

b. adverbs with the snffixeB dhft (1104) and 9H (1106): for
example, ek»dhA »i one may, g&tadha in a hundred tcoya; ekaqaa
one by one, i;ataq&s by hnndredi;

o. colleotives, us dvftaya or dva^i a pair, d&fataya or dag&t
a decade;

d. adjectives liico dvlka eompoied of two, paiLoaka comitting of
fiee or fives ;

and BO on; but tlieir treatment belongs rather to the dictionary, or
to the chapter on derivation.

CHAPTER VII

PE0H0UN3.

480. The pronouDs differ from the great mass of doudb
and adjectives chiefly in that they come by derivatioa from
another and a very limited set of roots, the so-called pio-
□ominal or demonstrative roots. But they have also many
and marked peculiarities of inflection — some of vrhich,
however, find analogies in a few adjectives; and such ad-
jectives will accordingly be described at the end of this
chapter.

Personal Pronouns.

481. The pronouns of the frrst and second persons are
the most irregulai and peculiar of all, being made up of
fragments coining from various roots and combinations of
roots. They have no distinction of gender.

ioy Google

Vn. Pronouns.

a. Their inflectioQ in the
Singnlu:

later language is a follows:

3d p

A. TP^ITT

m^, mft
I- TOT

loUiyam, mft
Ab. t^

m&ma, me
L- Rfil

miyi
Diul:
N. A. V. qiEim^

r.D.Ati. WTT^UFl^
Svabbyftm

a.L. srraatH^

uidA.D.O. ^
nSn
Plural:

vayim
A. WfHR TO^

asm&i, nas

I. mwtPiti

aemtbhlB

tvtaa
tr^, tvft

Sin

tv&ya

t^bhytfnit te

3^
tr&t

t4Ta, te

3%

tviyl

yuvibhySm
vfim

yugnUtn, tm
yufm&bhia

Digitizecy Google

Fbbsonal Fronodns.

»r.^

3^

asm&am, nas yuqmikam, vas

asmisn yuftnasu

b. The briefer second forms for accus., dat., and gen., in all
numbeis, ure accentieaB; and hence the^ are not allowed to stand at
the beginning of a sentence, or elsewhere where anj* emphasis is laid.

O, But th«y may be quallQed by icceated sdjaneta, u adjecUTeB: e. g.
te JAyata^ .0/ Ihte wh«n a conqueror, vo TTtabhyalb for you thai tcere
confined, naa tribbyi^ to ut three (all RV.).

d. The abUUie mat is tccentleiB In ons or two AV. pMiiges.

482. Forms of the older language. All the forms given
above are found also in the older language; which, however, has alao
others that afterward disappear from use.

a. Thus, vre 'Bud a, few timee the luBtr. alog. tva (only RV.; like
manifa for manif&yfi); fnrther, tbe loc. or dat. ling. md (only VS.)
ind tv6, and the dtit. or loc. pi. aam6 (which ia by fii the commonest
of these e-formsj and yi^md: their Biial e la uncombinable (or pra-
gl^lTai 198b). The TS. makas tirice the ace pi. fern, yl^m^ (as if
yu^niMi were too diitinctiTely a masculine form). The datives Id bhyam
are In ■ number ot cases written, and la yet others to be read as if written,
with bhya, irlth Iota of the final naial; and in a rare Instance or two wo
have In like manner aomika and yOfinaka In tbe gen. plural. The asnal
retolotions of semlvawet to vowel are made, and are especially frequent in
the forms of (he second person (tii&m tor trim etc.).

b> But the duals, above all, wear a very different aspect euUer. In
Veda and Brahmana and Sutia the nominatives are (with occasional
exceptious) &vfcm and yaT&m, and only the accusatives Bivtia and ynTlun
(but In RV. the dual forou ot Ist peis. chance not to occur, uulesi In
viin[f], once, for Sv&m); the luetr. in SV. is eltber ynv&bhj&m (occurs
also once In AfS.) or yaTtbhTftm; an abl. ynv&t appears once in RV.,
■nd a,vkt twice In TS.; the gen.-loc. Is In RV. (only) yuv6s Instead of
ynT&yoB. Thus we have hero a distinction (elaewbere unknown) of five
different dual cases, by endings In part accordant with those of the olfaer
two nnmliers.

488. Peculiar endings. The ending am, appearing in the nam.
sing, and pi. (and Vedlo da.) of these pronouns, will be tonnd often,
though only In ting., among the othsr proDDUns. The bhyam (or bTam)
ot dat sing, and pi. ts met with only here; Its relationship with the
bhrKm, bhyas, bhls of the ordinary declension Is palpable. The t (or

j,i,..;..,LiOOJ^IC

4B3— ] TTI. Pronouns. 188

d) of th« sb1., though hen pTseaded by > ihort lowel, I* donbtlei) the
«une irilh that of the ft-decleoiioD of nonm md idJeollTca. Thit the nom.,
dat., and abl. ondinga ihonld be the same Id slag, and pi. (and Id part
In the earllei da. alio), only the item to which they are added being dif-
ferent, Is DDparalleled elaewheie la the language. The elenient nnti appear-
ing tn the ploral forniB will be fonnd frequent In the inflection of the
etngnlai In other ptonamlnal words: In bet, the compooDd stem uma
which underllea the plnral ot ahAm Memg to be the game that fntnUhes
part of the elngnlu forms of ayam (EOl), and ita valae of ice to be a
apeclalliatloii ot the meaning thete ptrtoiu. The genltWes aingnlar, m&nut
and tAvA, have no analogies elsewhere; the detlTatloD from them of the
ndJeeHTes m&makn and tjlvaka (below, KlSb) ioggeete the poaelblUty
of their betn; themseW^s stereotyped stems. The gen. pi., asmitkuil and
yTiynftcBin, are certainly of tbls character: namely, nenter ring, cueforma
of the adfect<Te Btema aamSka and ynfmfika, other cases of which are
found In the Yeda.

40^ Stem-farmB. To the Htndu gcammsriftiiB, the Btems of
the personal pronoons kre road and a«mad, and trod and mfnuul,
because these are forms nsed to a certain extent, and allowed to be
indefinitely nsed. In derivation and compoaicion (like tad, kad, etc:
see below, under the other pronouns). Words are thus formed from
them even in the oldpr language — namely, loitkfta and "'^^■■*''*
and aamitsakhl (RV.), tvkdsotd and matt&a (A7.), tvAtpltp and
tv&dvtvftoana (TS.j, tviitpraautii and tvaAd»VKtyk and yuvad-
devatyk and fnfmaddevatrh (QB). aamaddevatya (PB.j; but much
more numerous are those that ahow the proper stem in a, or with
the a lengthened to fi: thus, mivant; aamatr^ aamadr&h, etc.;
tr&yata, trttvant, tritdatta, trSnid, tvitvasa, tr&ata, etc.; jvuf-
m£datt«, Tu^miflta, etc.; ynvltTaiit, yuvjLka, TtiT&dlilta, yavt-
datta, ynviulta, etc. An-I the later language also has a few words
made in the same way, as m&drt;.

a. The Tedaa haTe certain more Irregular romblnatlons, with complete
forme: thua, tvitdilE&ma, trftm&buti, mftdipaqyA, mamaaat7&, asm^
hlti, abadipfkrT&, aluimiittar&, ahaiiiTii, abaihsana.

b. From the stems of the grammarians come also the derivative
adjectires madl^a, tradiya, asmadira jiifma^djra, having a pos-
seseive value: see below, 6iea.

e. For Bva and narfcin, aeo below, 61S.

Demonstrative Pronouns.
496. The simplest demoD strati ve, rT ta, whioh answers
also the purpose of a personal pronoun of the third person,
maf be taken as model of a mode of declension usual in

ioy Google

189 Deuonstrative Pbonoums. [ — 466

•o manf pionouos and piODominal adjectives that it is
iaitly to be called the genera) pronominal declension.

a. Bnt this root hu also the special iiregulurity tbst in the
nom. siog, luaac. and fem. it bu a^ (for whose peculiar euphonic
treatment see 176a,b) and ai, instead of t&e and ta (compare Gr.
o, is, JO, mnd Goth. «a, «o, tkaia). Thus:
Slnrilar:

m. a. t.

H. WI flfl^ HI

A.

a^ fiH

m^

t4m t&t

tin

I.

^

trai

t&na

tly>

D.

H^

fl^

tA^U

"W"

Ab.

(TFn^

ntuiH

t^at

"K""

G.

?THT

f1*-UI«

t^ya

tigfia"^

L.

fiit*i\

HUIIH,^

■w

tA^im

Dd*J

N. A. V.

* s

S

ttn tk

t4

I. D. Ab.

rTP^UFI^

HI'-QIH^

tibhysm

UtbbT&m

0. L.

riuln^

HUiWL,

tiyos

tiQTOB

■ Plnw

N.

ff fT#I

FTT^

M Utnl

t&

A.

fiH mft

??n!^

tin ttni

tib

I.

*t

mftH

tXe

t£blila

D,„i,i.o, Google

vn.

Pronoiinb.

tAbhyaa

tibliTu

r

b. The T«du show no othei Irreinluttlea of inflection thin theae
nhlch belong to aJI Btoma in a &Dd S: nunely, Ud& iDmedmai; DsnaUy
tt ht t&a, dn.; often tA lor titni, pi. nent.; ntnally Ubhis for tsfs,
InstT. pi.; and the ordinary lesolutlona. The RV, haa one more cAge-roim
from tlie toot aa, iiame1>- B&Bmin (occniring nearly half as oft«n as t^
mltl)i and OhU. has once BBBm&t.

466> Tbe peculiarities of the general pronominal deolenaion, it
wilt be noticed, are tliese ;

A. In the singalar, the use of t (properly d) aa ending of nom.-ace.
neutj the combination of anether element ama with tbe root In maac. and
neat, dat., abl., and loc, snd of By In fern, dal, abl.-gen., and loo.j and
tbe mass, and neat. loc. ending In, vhlch is rastiicted to thla declension
(eiecpt in the anomilouB y&dtfmin, RV., once). The inbatilution in B.
of U for fis as fern, ending (307h) was illuatiated at SSSd.

b. The dual Is piecisely that of noun-atema in a and S.

o. Ill the ploral, the irregnlsritieg are limited to tb tar tits in uom.
masc, and the iDsertioa of s instead of n before Km of the gen., the stem-
final being treated hefore it In the same manner as before an of the loc.

497. The Htem of this pronoun is by the grammariaQS given
na tad; and from that form come, in fact, the derivative adjective
tadiya, with tattvfr, tadvat, tanmaya; nnd numerous conipoandfl,
such as taoobtla, tajjfia, tatkara, tadonantara, tanm&tra, etc.
These compounds are not rare even in the Veda: bo t&danna, tadWd.
tadvai;&, etc. But derivativen from the true root ta are also many:
Hspecially adverbs, as t&taa, t&tra, t&thft, tad^; tbe atyeotiveB tJE-
vant and t4tl; and the compound tsdf^ etc.

498. Though the demonstrative root ta ia prevailingly of the
third person, it is also tVeelj need, both in the earlier language and
in the later, as qualifying the pronouns of the 6rst and seoond person,
giving emphasis to them: tbna, ad 'b&m, thit I, or I h«re; bA or aa
tv&m. thou there; te vayam, tee A«r«; taayamama o/me Aere, taamlfia
tvayi tn thte there, and so on.

490. Two other demonstrative stems appear to contain ta aa
an clement; and both, like the simple ta, subBtitute aa in the nom.
sing. masc. and fem.

ioy Google

191 Dkhohbtrativi: Pronouns. [ — BOl

m. The one, tya, is tolerably common (although only a third
of Its possible fonna occnr) In RV-, but r&re Id AV., and almOBt
noknown later, its Dom. ring., In the three genders, is ajiAs, ayd,
tyit, and it nutkes the accna&tlves tyAm, tjtja, ty&t, and goes on
throngh the remainlDg crhob in the same manner aa ta. It has in
BV. the Inetr. fem. tyi (for ty&yji), loBtezd of ayft as Dom. sing,
fern, is aleo fonnd ty&.

b. The other is the osual demonstrative of nearer position, tht>
here, and la In freqnent nse throngh all perlode of the laognage.
It prefixes e to the siiople root, forming the numinatives eqis, e^a,
«t4t — and BO on thiongh the whole in6ecdon.

c. The stem tya haa ni'Uher couiponnda oor derivativea. But
from eta are formed both, in the same manner aa from the simple
ta, only much less nnmerone: thus, etaddj (QB.), etadarttM, etc.,
from the so-called stem etad; and et&d^ and eUEvuit from eta.
And ofm, like aa (408), is used to qualify pronouns of the lat aud
2d persons: e. g. e^K "ham, ete vayam.

600, There is a defective pronominal atem, eoa, which is accent-
tess, and hence used only in eituationa where do emphasis falls upon
it It does not occur elsewhere than in the accusative of all numbers,
the Instr. sing., and the gen--loc. dual: thna.

Slog. A. enam enat enftm

I. eaena etia;&

Dd. a. enln ene e&e

Q. L. enayoa enayoa

PI. A. enSn en&ni en&a

a, Th« BV. bu enoa iasteul of enayoa, and in ons or two InsUnces
Mcsnta K form; tlin*, en^m* enJbC?). AB. aaee enat ilao as nom. neut.

b. As ena ia alwi>ys osed Bubst&ntively, it hu more nettl; than ta
the value of a tbtrd penontl pronoun, unemphatlc. Apparent eiamples
of its adJeetlTal nae here &nd there met with are donbtlesa the reeult of
confusion with eta (409 b).

o. This Btom forms neither derivatives not componiids.

BOl. The declension of two other demonstiatives is so
inegulatly made up that they hare to be given in full. The
one, mm Biyim etc., is used as a more indefinite demon-
strative, this or that; the other, SI^ asSii etc., signifies
especially the remoter relation, yon oi yonder.

a. They are as follows:

ioy Google

VII. Pronouns.

^^ V^ ^^ ^ ^^ ^^

i^m Idiun H&m tuOA ad&a aai&.

Wl Wl^ Wi. ^fl. ^^ ^i^

IfnAfn id&in <TnjtT¥i

i^mi^tT) ad&a nmrtTn

I.

?^

SHUT

?IW

qgnT

anfrna

aniyft

amnnt

amdyK

p

wSt

^

y^"^

sgiqj

W

aaysf

amdfmU

ama^yii

Ab.

5?infi_^

Mt-OT+l^

^gnrif^

swEOiq^

■TO*'

UIJ&.

amdain&t

amufyfis

O.

tmr

MfUl^^

OTpJ

sgKin^

U7&

aayiU

am^ya

ama^yfta

L.

MfRH

*wiiH^

ggf^^

agsnTT^

i^ml."

urim

am&fmiiL

am&fyftin

dE

W. A.

^ ^

^

«?.

im&fi im6

lm«

amlt

I. D. Ab,

5P-im

OT-niT,

abbyXm

amAbhram

Q.h.

anAyos
Plnitl:

amnyott

N.

5^ ^Rlft

?Tra

a« a^

^.

Imi tmitnl

imftB

ami amibil

amda

A.

^^ 5*nft

^RTH

5^^ «(^

9^

Im^ Imtni

imiM

amAn amftnl

am^

1.

^^

9tP(^

aiftftRT^

OTjftH^

«blliB

Sbhb

amtbhlB

amtohU

D. Ab.

levUT!^

«i*-y«

«*n*-yH

^Tm^

ebhy&s

KbhyiB

anoibbyas

amdbhyaa

0.

^KTW

flimi^

«Hlm4^

wn^

e^

ia&m

amif&m

am&flm

L,

^

9TH

««5

^

«^

&a^

amffu

amtl(|U

j,i,....,L-'OOJ^IC

193 Dbhonstbatives. [—603

b. The same foiau ue nied In the older Unguage, vlthont variation,
except that (as nraal) ima ocean roi im&ii and ''nff#'><, and Ktai for
amdiil; amnyft vhen iiaed adverbially 1b accented on the final, omurd;
as&u (with aeceat, of oourge, on the fliat, 4b&u, oi vlthout accent, aafiu:
314) la need alto as vooatlTe; ftml, too, oci-nra u vocitlve,

602. a. The fotmei of these two pionoDoa, ay&m etc., plainly 9how«
Itself to be pieced together from a iiDmber of defective etems. Tba majority
of forms come from the mot a, vlth which, aa In the ordinary pronomlDil
declension, bhul (f. By) Is combined in the slngnlar. All these forms fiOQi
a have the pecnlUrlty that In tbelr substantive use they ate either accented,
as In the paradigm, oi accentiess (like ena and the second forms from
ah&m and tv&m). The remaining forms are always accented. From nn&
come, with entire regularity, an^na. au&yS, an&yoB.^ The ationg oases
In daat and plnral, and in part in singular, come not leas tegnlarly from ■
stem imit. And ay&va, ly&m, Id&m are evidently to be referred to ■
simple root 1 (iiUm being apparently a double form: id, like tad etc.,
with ending am).

b. The Teda ha* frem the root a also the instrumentals ena and aylt
(nsed In general adverbially), and the gen. loc. dn. ay6B; from Ima,
im^Bya ocsars once In RV., Imasm&l in AA., and imSla and ime^u
later. The RT. has In a email number of instances the Irtegnlar aocen-
toation iamal, Aeya, abtiis.

0. In analogy with the other pronooaa, Id&m la by the gram-
mariaoB regarded aa repreBentative stem of this pronominal declen-
sion; itnd it is actoallf fonnd ao treated in a very small number of
compounds (Idamm&ya and Id&dirupa are of Brabmana age). Aa
regarda tbe actual atema, ana furnishes nothing further; from Ima
comes only the adverb im&tbft [RV., once); but a and i fumisb a
number of derivatlveB, mostly adverbial; thus, for example, Atas,
Atra. &tha, ad-dba (?|; IUb, id [Vedic particle], IdB, il^, ftara. im
(Vedio particle], tdf9, perhaps ev& and ev&m, and others.

603. Tbe other pronoun, aafi4 etc., hts amu for itj leading stem,
which In the singular takes In combination, like the a-stema, the element
ama (f. ay), and which shifCe to ami In part of the maso. and neat,
plnial. In part, too, like an adjactivs n-stem. It lengthens its final in the
feminine. The gen. stng. amu^ya is the only example In the Unguage
of tbe ending aya added to any other than an a-stem. The nom. pi. ami
is unique la form; its i is (like (hat of a dual) pragfhya, or exempt
from conblaatlon with a foUowlug vowel (188 b). Aeftu and adAa are
also without analogies aa regards their endings.

a. The grammarians, as usual, treat ad&a. as representative stem
of tbe declenaiOD, and it ie found in this character in an extremely
small number of worda, as adomnla; adom&ya is of Brahmana age.
The QB. bas also aaftunaman. But moat of the derivativea, as of

Wtaitn.y On.n.i.u». S. »d. 13

DijiiLc. ..Google

the cues, come fromamu: thus, am^tas, amutra, amdthfi, amudl,
amurbi, amuv&t, amuka.

b. Ill the oilier Ungaage ocean tbe root tvB (icceiitleta), meaning
one, many a one; It U oftene«t fonnd tepetted, u one and aaotier. It
fallows tbe ordiDsry pionomin*! decleasian. Fiom II Is uisde the (alBO
iceentlese) adiatb tvadftidm (MS.).

o. Fri|menta of mother ilemanstratlTe root or two are met with: thus,
dmos he occurs in ■ tormuU in AV. and in Bishmsnu etc; avdfl ss
gen, -Ion. dual is tOnnd in EV.; the peiticle a poiuti to a root u.

Interrogative Pronoun.

604. The characteristic part of the interrogative pro-
uomiaal root is ^k; it has the three forms ^ ka, 1% ki,
sR ku; but the whole declensioDa] inflection is from ^ ka,
excepting the nom.-acc. sing, neut., which is &om 1% kf,
and has the anomalous form 1^71 kJm (not elsewhere known
in the language from a neuter i-stem]. The nom. and
accus. sing., then, are as follows:

^.

ta

m

k&B

klm

ki

^

K

^•.

k&m
deolen

1dm

ision is

Utm
precisely like that o£ FT

ta (above, 498).

a. The Veda bu its n«ual varlstlona, ki end k^bhis tor kiai and
k&Is. It ntsa has, aloug with kfin, (he pronominal I y tegular oenter k&d;
and k&m (or kam) l9 a frequent particle. The masc. foim kia, oorreB-
ponding to klm, occurs as a atereotypud faae in the comhtnatlens n&kis
aud mltklB.

BOB. The grammarianB treat kim aa repreBentative stem of tbe
interrogative pronoun; and it is in fact so used in a not Urge nnmber
of words, of which a few — klmm&ra, kbhkara, klifakHmya, kiifa-
devata, klihQlli, and ttie peculiar kimyu — go bacl( even to tbe
Veda and Btahmana. In closer analoj^y with the other prononna, the
form kad, a couple of times in the VeUa (katpayi, k&dartha), and
not Infrequently later, is found as first member of compouTtde. Then,
from the real roots ka, ki, ku are made mnnj derivatives; and
from kl and ku, eBpccially the latter, many compouDds; thus, kfcti.

j,i,....,LiOOJ^IC

Ids ' Relatives. [— B09

luith^ hath&m, kadJt, katar&, lutaiii&, k&rhl ; kiyant, kid^ ; kUtas,
kntra, kutaa, krk, knoarii, knkarman, knmuitria, etc.

BM. VarlouB forms of this pronoun, u kad, kirn, and ka land
rarely, ko), at the beginning of componndi, have passed from an
interrogative meaning, through an escliuiiatory, to the value of pre-
fixes signifyiDg an unuBual quality — eitlier something admirable, or,
oftener, something contemptible. This use begios in the Veda, but
becomes much more common in later time.

507. The interrogative prononn, as in other languagus, turns
readily in ita independent use also to an exclamatory meaning.
Moreover, it is by various added particles converted to an indefinite
meaning: thus, by oa, oanik, old, 4pi, vi, either alone or with the
relative ya (below, Bill prefixed: thus, k&g obii& any one; nk k6
'pi not am/ dim; yitnl klini oit tckaUotvgr\ yatamiit katam&a oa
whatever one. Occaaiooally, the luterrogBlive by itaeif acquires a
similar value.

Relative Proneun.

'60S. The loot of the relative pronoun is TJ ya, which
from the earliest period of the language has lost all trace
of the demonstrative meaning originally (doubtless) belonging
to it, and is used as relative only.

609. It is inflected with entire regularity according to
the usual proootninal declension: thus,

Sinsular. Du»l. Plunl.

m. n. f. m. n. f. m. d. t.

N. jjB|^ TifT^ UT 1 & mft Tira^

y&s y&t 7± I nt !T Q T^ y^i y^

A. xp\^ iXH^ oitT j y*"^ y^ y^ hr^ trrf^ nra

jkta ykt y^ I yan y&ni yits

ytaa yAya nT^TTm ^^ y^bh^

D. OT^ n^ ya y m ^.jjq^ UP^jq^

yimi&l y&sy&l y^bhyaa yabhyas

a. The Ved* ihovB ita ueu&l latiationa n( these forjiis: yS to
•ml for yini, and ydbhls Tot y&{B; y6a lor yayoa also occnra
yteB, wilb prolonged flnal, U In KV. twir^ as common ne ytaa.

D,j,i,...., Google

609—] VII. PKOHOnuB. 196

latloQB occur In y^biu, *ad yifosm and yisMun. The eoninnotioD
yat Is in ftbUtiTe foim ucotdlng to the ordinate declanilOQ.

610. The use of y&t as representative stem begins very eaily:
we have y&tkSma in tbe Veda, and yatkBrln, yaddevatya in the
Biahmans; later it grows more general From the proper root come
also a considerable series of derivatives: y4t(w, y&tl, y&tra, y&th&,
y&dfi, ykdi, y&rhi, jivant, yatar4, yatamii; and tbe componnd
yadfq.

611. Tbe combination of ya with ka to make an indefinite
pronoDD baa been notioed above (fi07). Its own repeUtion — aa
y&d>yat — gives it sometimes a like meaning, won through the dis-
tributive.

Sia, One or two marked pecnliarltes in the Sanskrit ose of the
relative may be here briefly noticed:

a. A veiy decided pieference for putting the relative clansa before
that to which ll relates: thus, y&h BOnvatA!^ S&kbft t&Bmft fndrfiya
gSyata (RV.) who M the friend of the loma-pruaer, to that Indra ting ye;
y&di yajli&di paribbfir ^i ■& Id dev^^n gaoetaaU (RV.) tchat Buffering
thou proieeteet, that in truth goeth to the godt\ yi trlfapt^ parly&Dti
b&l& t4f&di dadhStu me (AV.) tohat thrice eevan go oiouf, their ttrength
may he attign to me; as&d y6 adhariid grhia t&tra aantr arSyyal^
(AV.) what houte is yonder in the depth, there let the wttekee he; sata&
y&D me istl t^na [TB.] along with that toAtcA it mint; baAsiaSdi
vaoanaiii yat tu tan madi dahatl (MBh.) hut what the wordt of the
swana were, fiat buvTu me; aarvaBya looanadi QOatraifa yaaya nK "aty
aadha eva aa^ (H.) who doe* notposieet learning, the eye of everything,
blind indeed ii he. The other amngement, thoagh, frequent enough, la
notably leas usual.

b. A frequent conveiaion of the tubject or objaot of a verb b; an
added relative into a snbttantlve clauie: thui, mi "milh pri '^at p&4-
nifeyo Tadli6 y4h (AV.) may there not reach him a human deadly
weapon (lit'ly, what ie such a weapon); pfiri no pahl y&d dhAnam
(AT.) protrct of ui what wealth {Utere is]; ap&iiiSrB6 'pa ruftr^t^
k^etriyiifa fap&thaq oa y&fy. (AV.) may the cleansing plant cleanse
ateay the diteate and the curse; pu^are^a Iqtaih r^yadi yao oK
*ayad vaau kiihoana (UBh.) by l^uhkara was taken away the kingdom
and whatever other property [tAara wa(i\.

Other Pronouns: Emphatic, Indefinite.

618. a. The isolated aud uniafleoted pionominal woid
HQH avayarii (from the root ava) signifies self, own aiif.
By its form it appears to be a nom. sing., and it is often-

ii.zecy Google

197 Phonominai, Dbrivatitbb, [—-816

est used as QominatiTe, but along with wotds of atl peisone
and numbeis; and not seldom it lepiesents other cases also.

b. Svaynm ie also need as a stem in oompositioD: thus, sra-
yathji, sra^ambbli. Bat sva itself (osually adjective: below, Bide)
has the same value in composition; and even its inflected forms are
(In the older language very rarelf) used as reflezive pronoun.

o. In RT, alone are found a few examples of two indefinite
prononns, sama (accentless) any, every, and slmA every, all.

Nouns used pronominally.

514> a. The noun KtmAn loul is widely employed, in the siU'
gular (extremely rarely in other numbers), as reflexive pronoun of all
three persons.

b. Tbe noDQ tanA bo^ li employed In the ume manner (bat In ell
numben) la tbe Vsds.

0. The a4jeative bhavant, f, btaavati. Is used (as already pointed
out: 4IM) In respectful addreas as snbBtltute for the pronoun of
the second person, TtB couHtruction with tbe verb is in accordance
with Its true character, as a word of the Ihiid person.

Pronominar Derivatives.

616. From pionominal loots and stems, as well as from
the la^ei class of loots and from noun-stems, are foimed
by the ordinary suffixes of adjeotive derivation certain words
and classes of words, which have thus the character of pro-
minal adjectives.

Some of the more important of these may be briefly noticed here.

614. Poasessives. a. From the representative etema mad etc.
are formed tbe adjectives madlya, asmadlra, tvodlra, yaqmaiUTa,
tadlyn, and etadiya, which are used in a possessive sense: relating
to me, mine, and so on.

b. Other posse ssives i
t&Taki, from tbe genitives

O. An 4iialogoas deilittlTe from the genltlTe am^^ya Is ftmn^yj^
ya^i (AT. etc.) de*e»n4<tnt of eueh and meh a one.

d. It W4B pointed oat ebOTe (498) that tbe "genltlTCB" asmakam
end jofinjtkam ire really itereetyped caies of posieMive adJectlTet.

ioy Google

6ie— ] VII. Prohodkb. 198

e. Correspond lag to BTay&m (618) is the poasesBivo bt&, meaning
own, aa relating to all persons And numbers. The RV. baa once the
correspondiDg simple poasesBivc of the second person, tri thg.

f. For the uie of Bvft as lefleilTe pioDOnn, aee aboTe, BlSb.^

g. All these words fonn tbeli feminlneB Id &.

b. Other deiliBtivea of a like value hare no claim to be mentlonBd
here. But (eieeptlng BTCi) the poasesslTes are so rarely used as to make
but a sDisU figure In (he language, vhloh piefera generally to Indicate the
poBSMsive relation by the geniUte case ot the prODOnn Itself.

S17. By the suffix vaat aro formed from the pronominal roots,
with prolongation of their final vowels, the adjectives movant, trit*
vant, yu^mitTant, yuvavaiit, tarant, etitvant, yavant, meaning of
my tort, like me, etc. Of these, however, only the last three are in
use in the Ittter language, in the sense of lantue and qaantut. They
nre infiected like other adjective stems in rant, making their feml-
ninea in vatl (462).

a. Words of similar meaning from the roots 1 and ki are {yant
and klyant, inflected In the aame manner; aee above, 461.

618. The pronominal roots show a like prolongation of vowel
in combination with the root d^ »te, iook, and its derivatives -dr^a
and (quite rarely) dfkfa; thus, mad^, -dfqa; tvadpq, -dffa; yu;-
m&dfq, -dr9a; t&d^, -dfi}a, -d^k^a; et&dtq, -dfqa, -d^kfa; ylUlff,
-d^a; id^, -d^a, -d^kfa; kidfg, -d^a, -d^rk^a. They mean «/ my
^ort, like or reuembling me, and the like, and tftd^Q and the following
are not uncommon, with the sense of lali$ and qualit. The forma in
drf are unvaried for gender; thoao in dfqa (and drk^a?] have fe-

618. From ta, ka, ya come t&ti lo many, k&tl koto numyt ji$i
as many. They have a quasi-nnmeral character, and are Infiected
(like the numerals piiflca etc.: above, 4BS) only in the plural, and
with the bare stem as nom. and accns.: thus, N.A. tAti; 1. etc. t&tl-
bhia, t&tlbbyaa, t&tiDbn, t&tiqu.

830, From ya [in V. and B] and ka come the compsrativee and
superlatives yatard and yat&m&, and katar& and katami; and from
i, the comparative {tara. For their inflection, see below, 538.

631. Derivativee with the auffix ka, sometimes conveying a
diminutive or a coDteraptuous mciining, are roade from certain of the
pronominal roota and sterna (and may, according to the gr^immarians,
Im made from them all): thus, from ta, takim, takiit, tak^s; from
aa, ntHsi,; from ya, yak&a, yak^ yak4; from aasA, aaak&u; from

amu, ftwrtiilra..

8. For the numeroaB and freqnanlly used adverbs formed from pio-
nomiual roots, soe Adverbs (belo?, 1007 ff.).

ioy Google

PRONOUIHALLY. [—526

Adjectives declined pronominally.

622. A number of adjectives — some of them coming
from pronominal roots, others mote ot less analogous with
pronouns in use — are inflected, in part or wholly, accord-
ing to the pronominal declension (like FT ta, 496], with
feminine stems in S. Thus:

623. The comparatives and BDperUtives from proDOminal roots
— namelj, katar& and kntami. yabuA and yatomi, and ftara;
Also ajiyi olh^r, and Ub comparative anyatarft — »re declined like
ta througliout.

a. Bnt even boia these voHb fonns mide ici'aidlng to tbe sdjective
declciuion are (paiulically met with (e. g. itarfty&in K,].

b. Anya ttkes ooculonally thu foini anyat Id compoiltloD : thug,
anyfttkBma, anyatsth&na.

624. Otber words are so inflected except in the nom.-aco.-voc.
sing, neut, where they fa»ve the ordinary adjective form am, instead
of the pronominal at (ad). Snch are B&rva atl, vfgva aU, every,
4ka on«.

a. These, also, its not wlthoDt exception, >t letit in the etiller
lanfuge [e. g. vi^Kya, v{fvat, vjgre KV.; 6ka lot. sing., AV.).

626. Tet other words follow tbe same model usually, or in some
of their ai^i&catioDB, or optionally; but in other senses, or without
known rule, lapse into tbe adjective inflection.

a. Snch ne the corapuidTes and inperlatlieB from piepositlonal stema:
Adliaia uid adtiam&, &ntara and 4iitama, 4para and apami, &vara
and avam&, uttara and uttami, upara and upam&. Of theae, pro-
nominal forms are dscldedly more nameiDue tiom the compatatlves than
tiom tbe BupeTlatiyes.

b. Further, the «aperUtlTes (fllthont conesponding comparativea)
paramA, oaramA. madbyamA; and also anyatama (whoae poaldve and
eomparatlye belong to the clasa first mentioned : 528).

O. Further, tbe word* p&ra dittant, other; ptilva, prior, east; dikqiija
right, touth; paqoima behind, tcettern; ubhAya (f. ubhiiyi or ubhayi)
of both kinds or parties; nAma the one, half; and the poaaesalva svA.

626. OecailoDal forms of the pronominal declenslen are met with from
numeral adjective!!; e. g. pTatbam&syAs, trUyasyftm; and from other
wordi having au Indefinite numeral character: thna, &lpa feie\ ardta4 half;
kAvalaotf; dvftaya o/ <A« two kinde; hiixsa, outeide — and others. RV.
baa once saminismSt.

ioy Google

VIIL COHJCOATIOH.

CHAPTER Vni.

CONJUGATION.

627. The subject of ooDJugation oi verbal infleotion
involves, as in the othei languages of the family, the dis-
tinctions of voice, tense, mode, numbei, and person.

A. Further, besides the simplei oi ordinary conjugation
of a verbal root, there are certain more oi less fully de-
veloped secondary or derivative conjugations.

828. Voice. There are (aa ia Greek) two voices, active
and middle, distinguished by a difference in the personal
endings. This distinction is a perrading one: there is no
active personal form which does not have its corresponding *
middle, and vice versa; and it is extended also in pait to
the participles (but not to the infinitive).

628. An active form is called by the Hlndn gntmm&rianB
parasm&l padam a icord for another, and a middle form is called
fttmane padam a word for one'a self: the terms might be beet para-
phrased by trantitwe and reflexwe. And the diatiDOtii>D thuH expressed
is doubtlesB the original foundation of the difference of active and
middle fonnsi in the recorded condition of the language, however,
the antithesis of transitiTe and reflexive meaning is in no small
measure blurred, or even altogether effaced.

a. In the epics Iheie Is mncb etbcement of the dliHnctloQ between
■ctlTB and middle, the choice of voice being veiy often dUeimined b]i
metrled consideration b alone.

680. Some verbs ate conjugated in both voices, others
in one only; sometimes a part of the tenses are inflected
only in one voice, others only in the other oi in both; of
a veib usually inflected in one voice sporadic forms of the
other occur; and sometimes the voice differs according as
the verb is compounded with certain prepositions.

'. oyGoogle

20t Tenbb ahd Hodb. f— 633

6S1. The middle £oim8 outside the present-syetem (for
which there is a special passive iaflectioD: see below, 768 ff.),
and sometimes also withia that system, aie liable to be
used likewise in a passive sense.

682. Tense. The tenses are as follows: 1. a present,
with 2. an imperfect, closely related with it in form, having
a prefixed augment; 3. a perfect, made with reduplication
(to which in the Veda is added, 4. a so-called pluperfect,
made from it with prefixed augment) ; 5. an aorist, of three
different formations : ■. simple; b. reduplicated; o. sigmatic
or sibilant; 6. a future, with 7. a oondidonal, an augment-
tense, standii^ to it in the relation of an imperfect to a
present; and 8. a second, a periphrastic, future (not found
in the Veda).

a. The tenses here distingiiiflbed (io aecordance with pTeTsiling
naagej as imperfect, perfect, pluperfect, and aorist receive those
names fh>m theii corraspondenoe in mode of formation with tenses
so called in other Ungnsges of the &mily, eBpecittllj' in Greek, and
not at all from differences of time designated by them. In no period
of the Sanskrit language is there any expression of imperfect or
pluperfect time — Dor of perfect time, except in the older language,
where the "aorist" has this value i later, imperfect, perfect, and aorist
are BO many nndlBortminated past tenses or preterite: see belov,
under the different tenses.

833. Mode. In lespeot to mode, the difference between
the classical Sanskrit and the older language of the Veda
— and, in a less degree, of the Bt&hmaniae — is especially
great.

a. In the Veda, the present tense has, besides its indicative
inflection, a subjunctive, of considerable variety of formation, an
optative, and an imperative (In 2d and 3d persons). The same three
modes are found, though of much lees frequent occurrence, as belong-
ing to the perfect; and they are made also from the aorlsts, being
of especial frequency from the simple aorist The future has no modes
Ian occasional case or two are purely exceptional).

b. In the classical Sanskrit, the present adds to its in-
dicative an optative and an imperative — of which last,

ioy Google

583—] VIII. Conjugation. 202

moteoTer, the first peisons aie a lemnant of the old sub-
junctive. And the aorist has also an optative, of somewhat
peculiat inflefltios, usually called the piecative (or bene-
dictive).

584. The piesent, perfect, and future tenses have each
of them, alike in the earlier and later language, a pair of
participles, active and middle, sharing in the various pe-
culiarities of the tense-formations; and in the Veda are
found such participles belonging also to the aorist.

636. Tense-systems. The tenses, then, with their
accompanying modes and participles, h.\l into oettain well-
marked groups or systems;

I. The present-system, composed of the present
tense with its modes, its participle, and its preterit which
we have called the imperfect.

II. The perfect-system, composed of the perfect
tense (with, in the Veda, its modes and its preterit, the
so-called pluperfect) and its participle.

III. The aorist-system, or systems, simple, re-
duplicated, and sibilant, composed of the aorist tense
along with, in the later language, its "precative" opta-
tive (but, in the Veda, with its various modes and it«
participle).

IV. I'he future-systems: 1. the old or sibilant
future, with its accompanying preterit, the conditional,
and its participle; and 2. the new periphrastic future-
636. Number and Person. The verb has, of course,

the same three numbers with the noun: namely, singular,
dual, and plural; and in each number it has the three per-
sons, first, second, and third. All of these are made in
every tense and mode — - except that the first persons of
the imperative numbers ate supplied from the subjunctive.

ioy Google

203 Vbrbal Adjeotivb8 and Nouns. [—1^0

6S7. Verbal adjeotives and douds: Participles.
The paitioipleB beloogiiig to the tenBe-eystems have been
already §poken of above (684). Theie is besides, coining
directly &om the lOOt of the veib, a participle, prevailingly
of past and passive (oi sometimes neuteij meaning. Future
passive participles, or gerundives, of several different for-
mations, are also made.

638. Infinitives. In the older language, a very con-
siderable variety of derivative abstract nouns — only in a
few sporadic instances having anything to do with the tense-
systems — are used in an infinitive or quasi-in&nitive sense;
most often in the dative case, but sometimes also in the
accusative, in the genitive and ablative, and (very raiely)
in the locative. In the classical Sanskrit, there remains a
single infinitive, of accusative case-form, having nothing to
do with the tense-systems.

680. Gerunds. A so-oalled gerund (or absohitive) —
being, like the infinitive, a stereotyped case-form of a de-
rivative noun — is a part of the general verb-system in
both the earlier and later language, being especially frequent
in the later language, where it has only two forms, one
for simple verbs, and the other for compound. Its value
is that of an indeclinable active participle, of indeterminate
but prevailingly past tense-character.

a. Another gemnd, an adverbially used accasative in form, ie
found, bat only rarely, both earlier and later.

640. Secondary conjugations. The secondary or
derivative conjugations are as follows: 1. the passive; 2. the
intensive; 3. the desiderative; 4. the causative. In these,
a conjugation-stem, instead of the simple root, underlies
the whole system of inflection. Yet there ie clearly to be
seen in them the character of a present^ystem, expanded
into a more or less complete conjugation; and the passive is

D,j,i,....,LiOOglc

640—] Vin. CoNjnaATioN. 204

BO puiely a preBent-system that it will be desoiibfld in the
chapter devoted to that part of the iafleotion of the veib.

a. tinder the same general head belong! the subject of
denominative conjugation, or the conversion of noun and
adjective-stems into conjugation-stems. Further, that of
compound conjugation, whether by the prefixion of prepo-
sitions to roots or by the addition of auxiliary verbs to noun
and adjective-stems. And finally, that of periphrastic con-
jugation, or the looser combination of auxiliaries with verbal
nouns and adjectives.

641. The characteristic of a proper [finite or personal)
verb-form is its personal ending. By this alone is deter-
mined its character as regards number and person — and
in part also as regards mode and tense. But the distinc-
tions of mode and tense are mainly made by the formation
of tense and mode-stems, to which, rather than to the pure
root, the personal endings are appended.

a. In this chapter will be given & general account of the per-
Bonal endings, and also of the formation of mode'Stems from tense-
stemB, and of {bose elements in the formation of tense-stemB — the
aagment aod the reduplication — which are found in more thfui one
tense-aystem. Then, in the following chapters, each tense'System
will be taken up by itself, and the methods of formation of its Btems,
both tenBe-atems and mode-atema, aud their combination with the
endinga, will be deecribed and illuBtrated in detail. And the com-
plete conjugation of a fen model verba will be eshlbited in syate-
matic arrangement in Appendix O.

Personal Endings.

643. The endinge of verbal inflection are, as was pointed oat
above, different throughout in the active and middle voices. They
are also, as In Greek, naually of two aomewhat varying forms for
the same peraon in the aamo voice: one fuller, called primary; the
other briefer, called aecondary. There are also less pervading differ-
eneea, depending upon other condltiona.

a. In the epica, exchanges of prlmuy »nd wcondirf tctlTo endlnp,
(eipeddlly the BubetUutloii of ma, va, ta, far mas, vas, tha) ire not
infrequent.

i, Google

205 Pebsonal Endihob. [— M5

b> A condeDBSd atttement of til the vutletlM o( endtog toi ewb pei-
son and nnmbet here folloirs.

643. Singular; First peiaon. a. The prim&ry ending in
the active is ml The Bubjanctive, liowever (later imperative), liaB
ni instead; and in tiie oldest Veda this ni is Bometimes wanting,
and the person ends in K (as if the ni of ftni were dropped}. Tbo
secondary ending is properly m; but to this m an a has come to
be so peraisteutly prefixed, appearing regnlaily where the teDse-stem
does not itself end in a [Tam for Tarm or vanun in RV., once, and
abhiim HS., avadlilm T3. etc., sanem TB., are tare anomaliesX that
it is convenient to reckon am as ending, rather than m. Bnt the per-
fect tense lias neither ml nor m; its ending is simply a (sometimes
ft; S48o]-, or, from ft-roots, fto.

b. The primary middle ending, according to the analogy of the
other persons, wonld bo regularly me. Bat no tense or mode, at
any period of the language, shows any relic whatever of a m in this
person; the primary ending, present as well as perfect, from a-stems
and others alike, is e ; and to it corresponds 1 as secondary ending,
which blends with the final of an a-stem to e. The optative has,
however, a instead of i; and in the subjunctive (later imperative]
appears ftl for e.

644, Second person, a. In the active, the primary ending
is Bi, which is shortened to e as secondary; as to the loss of this
B after a final radical consonant, see below, &&B. Bat the perfect
and the imperative desert here entirely the analogy of the other
forms. The perfect ending is invariably tha (or thft; 248o). The
imperative is far less regular. The fullest form of its ending is dhi;
which, however, is more often reduced to hi; and in the great ma-
jority of verbs (including all a-stems, at every period of the language)
no ending is present, but the bare stem stands as personal form.
Id a very small class of verbs (722-3), ftna is the ending. There is
also an alternative ending tfit; and this is even used sporadically in
other persons of the imperative (see below, fi70-l).

b. In the middle voice, the primary ending, both present and
perfect^ is ae. The secondary stands in no apparent relation to this,
being thSa; and in the imperative is fonnd only sva (or avS; 248 o),
which in the Veda is not seldom to be read as sua. In the older
language, ae is sometimes strengthened to a&l in the subjunctive.

546. Third person, a. The aetive primary ending is ti; the
secondary, t; as to the lose of the latter after a final radical con-
sonant, see below, 66S. Bnt in the imperative appears instead the
peculiar ending ta; and in the perfect no characteristic consonant is
present, and the third person has the same ending as the first.

b. The primary middle ending is te, with ta as corresponding
secondary. In the older language, te is often strengthened to tftl in

L.,j,i,....,LiOOgle

646—] Vm. COKJBOATION. 206

the subjunctive. In the perfect, the middle third person hu, like the
active, the enme ending with the Gret, namely e simplj; and In the
older langu&gc, tbc third peruon present also often loses the distinctive
part of its tcrmioation, ami comes to coincide in form with the first
land HS. has adnha for adngdha). To this e perhaps corresponds,
as secondary, the i of the aorlst 3d pers. passive (848 ff.). The Im-
petatlTe has t&m (or, in the Veda, rarely Am) for its ending.

640. Dual: First person. Both in active and in middle, the
dual first person Is in all its varieties precisely like the correspond-
ing plural, only with substitntion of v for the m of the latt«r: thus,
vaa fno vaei has been found to occur), va, vahe, vabi, vahSl. The
pprsoQ is, of coarse, of comparatively rare nse, and from the Veda
no form in voa, even, is quotable.

547. Second and Third persons, s. In theactive, the primary
endlog of the second person is thaa, and that of the third is tas;
and this relation of th to t appears also in the perfect, and runs
t!irou(;b the whole series of middle endings. The perfect endings are
priniHTy, but have u instead of a as vowel; and an a has became so
persistently pre6xed that their forms have to be reckoned as athna
and atus. The secondary endings exhibit no definable relation to
tho primary in these two persons; they are tarn and t&m; and they
arc used in the imperative as well.

b. Id the middle, a long a — which, however, with the final a
of a-stems becomes e — has become prefixed to all dnal endings
of the second and third persons, so as to form an Inseparable part
of them (lUdhltliSm AV., and jlbltham pB., are isolated anomalies).
11)0 primary endings, present and perfect, are fttlie and Ste; the
secondary (and imperative) are Btbjbn and SUbn (or, with stem-final
a, etli« etc.).

o. Tbe Rig-V«(U hu a very few forms In jUthe uti Sit«, appuently
from athe and ete with iDbjanctive atrangtheDiDg (ttey are all detailed
below: Bee 616, 701, 737, 762, 880, 1008. 1043).

648. Plural: First person, a. The eariiest form of the
active ending is maai, which in the oldest language is more frequent
than the briefer maa (in RV., as five to one; in AV., however, only
us three to four). In the classical Sanskrit, mas is the ezolnsive
primary ending; but the secondary abbreviated ma belongs also to
the perfect and the subjunctive (imperative). In the Veda, ma often
becomes mft '248 o\ especially in the perfect.

b. Tho primary middle ending is mabe. This is lightened In
the secondary form to matal; and, on the other band, it is regularly
liu the Veda, not invariably) strengthened to mah&l in the Bubjnnctive
(imperative;.

549. Second person, a. The active primary ending is tba.
The secondary, also impciativo, ending is ta {in the Veda, tK only

Digil.zecy Google

207 Perbonal Endikos. [— SSO

once Id impv.). But In the perfect an; characteristic canBonaut is
wanting, and the ending is simply a. In the Veda, the syllable na,
of problematic origin, is not infrequently added to both fonjis of the
ending, making thaua (rarely thanft) and tana. The forma in which
this oconrawill be detailed below, under the different formaUons; the
addition la very rarely made excepting to persons of the first general
conjngation.

b. The middle primary ending is dbve, which belongs to the
perfect as well as to the present. In the subjunctive of the older laQ'
gnage It is aometimeB strengthened to dhvU. The sncondary (and
imperalavej ending is dhTam (in RV,, once dhva); and dhv&t is
once met witb in the Imperative (S71 d). In the Veda, the t of all
these endings is aometimee to be resolved into u, and the ending
becomes disayllabic. As to the change of dh of these endings to 4h,
see above, SS6o.

660. Third person, a. The full primary ending is onti in
the active, witli ante as corresponding middle. The middle second-
ary ending is anta, to which should correspond an active ant; but
of the t only altogether questionable traces are left, in the euphonic
treatment of a final n (307); the ending is an. In the imperative,
(uita and «nt&m take the place of anti and aote. The initial a of
all these endings is like that of am in the Ist sing., disappearing
after the final a of a tense-stem.

b. Moreover, anti, antu, ante, ant&m, anta are all liable to be
weakened by the loss of their nasal, becoming ati etc. In the active,
this weakening takes place only after reduplicated non-a-stems (and
after a few roots which are treated as if reduplicated: eSBS.i; in the
middle, it occurs after all tense-stems save those ending in a.

0. Further, for the secondary active ending «a there is a sub-
stitute us (or ur; 16&b; the evidence of the Avostan favors the
latter form), which is used in the same reduplicating verbs that
change antl to ati etc., and which accordingly appears as a weaker
correlative of an. The same as is abo used universally in the per-
fect, in the optative (not in the subjunctive), in those forms of the
aorist whose stem does not end in a, and in the imperfect of root-
stems ending in ft, and a few others (621).

d. The perfect middle has in all periods of the language the
peculiar ending re, and the optative has the allied ran, iu this per-
son. In the Veda, a variety of other endings containing a r as dis-
tinctive consonant are met with: namely, re (and Ire) and rate in
the present; rata in the optative both of present and of aorietj;
rite in the perfect; ranta, ran, and nun in aoristB (and in an im-
perfect or two); r&m and ratfim in the imperative; ra in the imper-
fect of dub (MS-)- The three rate, ratftm, and rata are found even
in the later language in one or two verbs !6&d).

Diaii.zecy Google

6B1— ] VI. Conjugation. 208

651. Below are given, for convenience, to UbnUr form, the
Bohemes of endings ae accepted in the clafiBical or later language',
namely, a. the regular primary endlnga, used in the present indicative
and the future (and the subjunctive in part) ; and b. the regolar
secondary endiags, used in the imperfect, the conditiooat, the aorist,
the optative (and the subjunctive in part); and farther, of special
schemes, o. the perfect eudings (chiefly primary, especially in the -
middle); and d. the imperative eudings (chiefly secondary). To the
so-called imperative endings of the first person is prefixed the B which
is practically a part of them, though really containing the mode-sign
of the subjunctive from which they are derived.

662. Further, a part of the endings are marked with an accent,
and a part are left unaccented. The latter are those which never,
under any circumstances, receive the accent; the former are accented
in considerable classes of verbs, though by no means in all. It will
be noticed that, in general, the unaccented endings are those of the
singular active; but the 2d sing, imperative has an accented ending;
and, on the other hand, the whole series of 1st persons imperative,
active and middle, have onaccented endings (this being a characteristic
of the subjunctive formation which they represent).

S63. The schemes of normal endings, then, are as follows:
«. Primary findings.

viia

m6a « vJJie

m&be

thlM

tbk ai ithe

dhv6

t&B

&iiti, ku u, iu>

date, Ate

b. Secondary Endings.

vi

mi. I. k v41il

m&bl

t4ta '■

' "• t& thoB atbSin

6hvim

t&mr

'-, << ^ Os t& atfim
c. Perfect Endings.

intft, &ta, r&o

vi

m& e Tibe

tn&fae ,

Athua

& Bi i,the

dhv6 X

AtuB

UB e' ite

•r6(

d. Imperative Endings.

1 &ni SiVa ama ill Svotiai ftmaliSi ^

2 'Stti, bi. — t&m t& av4 ath&m dhv&m

3 tu t^ Antu, &ta tiim atftm &iit&m, &t&m .

E64, Id general, the rule ia followed that an accented ending, it dls-
syllalilo, iB accented on Its Ant ejrllable ~ and the oonstant nnlon-vowels
aie regarded. In this respect, aa integral parts of the endlnga. But the

Diail.zecy Google

209 Febsonui EKDraoH. [—667

3d pL ending ate ot the piea. Indio. middle liu in BY. the acMDt tA6 in
■ nombM of Tub* (lee 618, 686, 660, 718); and m oeoulonU InsUnee
U met with in othei eDdiugi: that, m&h^ (tee 718, 73B).

C66. The leeondaiT endings of the seoond uid thlid pettODi dnfolat,
u eonalittng of en tdded conioaant wlthoat vowel, shoald legnUdr (IBO)
be lost wheoerer the loot oi item to irhich they eie to be added Itself ende
in a contontnt. And thli rule ia In geneial followed; yet not without es-
eeptioni. Thna:

a. A Tool ending in » dentU tnnte aomeUniM diopa tUa Snal mnte
Instead of the added fl in the second person; and, on the other band, a root
OT stem ending In B sometinieB drops this B instead of the added t in the
tUid penon — in either ease, establisblng the ordinary relation of ■ and t
in these persons, instead of b and b, and t and t. The examples noted are :
2d sing, ftvae (to 8d sing, avet), Yvid, AB.; 3d ling. akat, ykr, ^B.;
agbat, Vghao, JB. AfS. ; acakSt, yoakUi, RT.; aqfit, VqtM, AB. HBh.
R.; aarat, ywraa, VS.; ahinat, i^hiAB, (B. TB. OB. Compare also the
B-aorlst forms ayfiB and btSb (146 a), in which the same Inflaence is to
be seen; sod fnrthei, t^Utetc. (888 a), and preoatlTe r&t fotyBB (637).
A similar loss of any other Bnal conMnant is escesslvely rare; AV. hae
onee ablianaB, for -nak, f/hhalti. There are also a few eases where a
In sing. U Irregularly modeled after ■ Sd sing. : thu, atr^am (to atf^at),
ytfi, S.V., aoohlnam (to acohlnat), yohid, UBh. ; compare farther
the 1st sing. In m Instead of am, 643 a.

b. Again, a union'TOWel is sometimes Introdnced before tbe ending,
either a oi 1 or I: see below, 6B1 b, 631, 818, 880, 1004 a, 1068 a.

a. Id a few isolated cases in the older langaage, this I ie changed to
U: tee below, 804 b. 836, 1068 a.

666. The ohangeB of form which roots and stems undergo in
their combinatioDS with these eodingB will be pointed out iu detail
below, under the varioua formations. Here may be simply mentioned
in advance, as by far the most important among &em, a disUnction
of stronger and weaker form of stem in large classes of verba, stand-
ing in relation with the accent — the stem being of stronger form
when tbe accent falls upon it, or before an accoutiesa ending, and of
weaker form when the accent is on the ending.

a. Of the endings marked as accented in the scheme, the ta of 2d pi.
la not infreqnently In the Veda treated as nnaoeented, the tone reating on
the stem, wbleh la strengthened. Unch less often, the tam of Id da. is
treated in the same way; other endings, only sporadically. Details are given
nnder the Tariona formations below.

Subjunctive Mode.

6B7. Of the subjnnctive mode (as was pointed out above) only 1
fragments are left in the later or olasdcal luignage: namely, in the i

WliltDST, Omamar. 3. ei. 14 I

ioy Google

B67— ]

VIIL CONJUQATIOH-

210

Bo-called fint pereonB imper&tiTe, and in the nee (679) of Iha imper-
fect and aorist perBons without augment after mi probibitive. Id
tbe oldest period, however, it was a very freqoent formation, being
three or four times as common aa the optative in the Big- Veda, and
nearly the same in the Atharrao; but already in tbe Br&bmanaa it
becomes comparatively rare. Its varieties of form are conaiderable,
and sometimes perplexing.

658. In its normal and regnlar formation, a special mode-stem
is made for tiie subjunctive by adding to tbe tense-stem an a — which
combines with a final a of the tense-stem to 3. The accent rests
npon the tense-Btem, which accordingly has tbe strong form. Thus,
from the strong preeeot-stem doh (|/duli} is made the snbjnnctive-
Btem d6hai from Jah6 tyh-a), Juli&va; from yim^ iVToi), yimija;
from 8un6 (v'BU), BuuiiTa; from bh&Ta (i^hfl), bhivS; from tudA
(>^tadj, tndi; from uoy& (pass., v'Tae), noya; and so on.

S68. The stem thns formed is Inflected in general as an a-stem
would be inflected in the indicative, with constant accent, and S for
a before the endings of the first person (73S 1) — but with the follow-
ing peculiarities as to ending etc.:

660. a. Id the totive, tbe lat dog. has nl la eudlog: thus, dohltiu,
yun&jBui, bh&T£aii Bat in the Rig-Teda somettmes S slmpl;: thns,
kyA. br&Tft.

b. Id lat do., let pi,, and 2d pi., the endings aie the seconduy : thus,
dohKva, d6ltfima, ddhau; bbivSTa, bh&vftnia, bh&T&n.

O. Id 3d and 3d du. and 3il pi,, the endings are piimaiy: thna,
dohatbaa, d6Itatas, d6liattia; bbiivftthaB, bh&TStas, bb&vfitba.

d. In 2d and 3d sing., the endings are either primary or aecoDdaiy:
thns, dohaal or d6ItaB, d6hati or d61kat; bh&TOsl or bh&T&a, bh&T&tl
m bh&vKt.

e. OcoasioDally, forms nlth double mode-algn ft (by aasImilatioD to
the more numeroQB eubJuaetlTea from tenie-stemg (□ a) ue met nlth from
nan-a-stenu; thus, iafttha from as; Ayfts, 4y&t, iyfiu from e (yi).

661. la tbe middle, forms with seoondaiy instead of primary encl-
Ings are very rare, being found only iu the 3d pt. (where they are more
freqnent tban the primary), and in a case or tvo of the 3d alDg, (aDd AB.
has once aayftthfiB).

a. The striking peculiarity of sabJunctiTe middle iDHectlon is the i^
qnent strengthening of e to fil in the endings. This is less general in the
very earliest language than later. In lateing., Ki alone Is fotud as ending,
even In RV, ; and in 1st du. also (of rare occniience), only &v&h&l la met
with. In 1st pi,, ajnabftl preyalls In BV. and AV. (ftmahe li found a
few times), and is alone known later. In 2d eing., sfti for ae does
not oecnr in BV., bat Is the only form in AV. and the Biahntanas. In
3d slug., tU for te occors once lu BV., and ia the predominant form

Digitizecy Google

211 Sdbjunotitb Mode. [— 68S

In AV., aad the oa\j one liter. In Sdpl., dllTii foT dbTe It found In
one woid In RT., uid t few times In the BAhnunu. In 8d pi., nt&l
for iit« is the Brihrnua form (of fu fiam Sequent occnnence); It occurs
neither In RT, nor AT. No inch dail endings ss th&i and t&i, for tbe
•nd te, sre uiywliere fonnd; bnt RV. bis in i tew words (nine: abore,
647 o) Utbe ind ftlt«, wUoh ippeii to be a Ube lubjnDctiTe itreDgtfaeulng
at etbe and ete (slthongli found In one IndlcitWe form, ki^T&ite). Be*
fore the Sl-endlngs, the vovel it regularly long &; bat antSi Instead of
ftntU ii two or three time! met with, and once or twice (TS. A.B.) atfil
for it&i.

663. The subjunctive endingB, then, Id combination with the
BubjonctiTe modc-nign, sie as followB:

l&TAhU /AmahU
IKvahe iKmahe

/aal foae fadhve

tftdlivU

attaan attaa { Uthe

(ati . lata ... fante, anta

a. And in farther oombinatlon with final a of a tODBe-Btem, the
initial a of all thoBO endings becomes &: thus, for example, in 2d pers,,
aai or So, athas, fitha, Sse, &dhve.

068. Besides this proper subjunctive, with mode-elgn, in Its triple
form — with prlmuy, with strengthaned primary, and with leeondary end-
ings— the name of subjanctlva, in the forms ^'imperfect sobjuncttve" and
"improper tnbJancUTa", his been also given to the Indieatlve forms of Impar-
feot and aorist when used, with the augment omitted. In ■ modal sense
(below, 687): rach nse being quite common in RT., but rapidly dying out,
so that in the Brahmana language and later It la birdly met with except
after m5 prohibitive.

a. As to the general uses of the lubJunotlTe, see below, 674 IT,

Optative Mode.

664, a. As baa been already pointed out, tbe optative is of com-
paratively rare Dccnrrence in the language of the Yedae; but it gains
rapidly in frequency, and abeady In the Brahma^aa greatly out-
numbers the sabjuDctlve, and still later comes almost entirely to take
its place.

b. Its mode of formation is the same in all periods of the
langnage.

666. A. The optfttive mode-sign is in the active voice a dif-
ferent one, according as it is added to a tense-Btem ending in a, or

14*

Dgil.ze.., Google

666—] VUL CoNraaATioM. 212

to one ending in lome other finkl. In the Utter eue, it is ylt, Moented;
tUB yR is ftppendBd to the weaker form of the tenao-item, and taket
the regular series of secondary endings, with, in 3d plnr., as in-
stead of an, and loss of the a l>efore it. After an arBtem, It is i,
nnacoented; this 1 blends with tiis final a to e (which then is accented
or not according to the accent of the a); and the e is maintained
unchanged before a vowel-ending (am. oa), by means of an Interposed
enphonlc y.

b. In the middle voloe, the mode-sign is I thronghont, and Uikm
the secondary endings, with a in Ist ning., and ran in 3d pi. After
an a-stem, Uie rules as to its combination to e, the accent of the
latter, and its retention before- a vowel-ending with interposition of
a 7, are the same as in the active. After any other final, the weaker
form of stem is taken, and the accent is on the ending (except in
one class of verbs, where it falls npon the tense-stem: see 646); and
the I (as when combined to a) takes an Inserted y before the vowel-
en dinga [a, AtUbn, Stam).

O. It Is, o[ eoane, ImpoMlble to tell from the form whethei i or i 1*
comlslned with th« flntl of in a-item to e; bat no good reuon •ppeua to
eiiat for uiaming i, r&thar thui the I whiBh showi Itaelf In the other clags
of Btetni In the middle Tolce.

660. The combined mode-sign and endings of the optative, then,
are ai follows, in their double form, for a-Btems and for otfaere:
a. f«r Bon-a-ateBB.

—tr. T- ■■ <"■

P-

;4°

yItTR ytmn fci IvAhl
yHtam yitta ifhiU ^thSm
yitam y6B. it4 Mttam

Im4hi

^

Idttvam

5?-..

Ir&n

i-

eva ema eya erntii

emabi

etam eta ethfis ^tham

edhvam

et

•tain Ua eta ^jbtam

•ran

C, The yfi is la the Tedii not leldom leiolTed Into iS.

d. The contMotod aanem, foi eaDeyam, it fonnd In TB. uid Apast.
CeittiD Vedio 3d pt middle formi In rata will be mendaaed below, under
the vailoai foimatlont.

667. Precatlve. Precative forms are Bnoh as have a sibi-
lant inserted between the optatlve-Bign and the ending. They are
made almost only &om the aorist stems, and, though allowed by the
grammarians to be formed from every root— -the active preoative
from the simple aorist, the middle from the sibilant aoiiit — are

ioy Google

213 Optativb Modz. [—670

prustioally of nre occDrrenoe at every period of the language, and
especiall; later-

B. The Inierted B todb In tbe 4CtlTe through the vholo Boitea of per-
>oi»; Id the middle. It li Ulowed only In tbe 2d and 3d penoDS elng, md
dn. and the 2d pL, and Is qnotible onlr for the 2d and 3d Bing. In the
2d Jing. act., the preutlTe form, by leuou of the neMBiuy loss of the added
B, It not diftlngnitbtble from the almple optatlTe; in the 3d ting, act., the
aame la the cue la the later langoage, irhlcb (oompua 666 a) aavei the
penonal ending t Initead of the procatlTe-Blgn a; bat the RT. aiually, and
the other Vedlo text* to some extent, haie tbe propei eodiog yfts [for
7iat). Ab to 4I1 In the 2d pi. mid., see 336 o.

b. Tbe accent 1b bb In the ilmple optative.

MS. The precative endtogB, then, accepted In the later lanpwge
;inclading, In brackets, those which are identical with the simple
optative), an as follows:

actiTe, middle.

B. d. p. 8. d. p.

1 yaaua yiava yiUma [iy&] [Iv&hl] [ImAhi]

1 [yan] yintam yiata Iqthia ly&tbSm l^vAm

1 [yif] ylbt&m yiboo i^ iy&t&m [ir&n]

a. SeipecttDg the precative, Bee farther 891 IT.

b. As to the general ueee of the optative, see below, 573 IT.

Imperative Mode.

669. The imperative has no mode-sign', it ia made by
adding its own endings directly to the teoBe-stem, just as
the oAei endings aie added to fona the indicative tenses.

a. Hence, in 2d and 3d dn. and 2d pi., ita Ibmu are Indlstlngnlsbable
I with its angmeDt

b. The iDlee u to the nee of the different endings — espeetallv In
2d elng., where the variety U coUBlderable — will be givan below. In connee-
tioD with the variens lenBe-ayatenis. The ending tfit, however, has ao moch
that 1« pecDiiar to Ita ose tlut it cbUb for a Ultle eipUnaHon here.

670. The Imperative in t&t. An imperative form, usually
having the value of a 3d pera. elng., but sometimes also of other per-
sona and numbers, is made by adding t&t to a present tense-stem —
In its weak form, if tt have a distinction of strong and weak form.

a. Eiamplea are: brtltfit, bat&t, wlttltt; plp^tftt, Jahitst,
dliattat; kr^aMt, knnitfit; gr^M^tat, J&nitit; &vat&t, r&kfat&t,
vaaat&t; vl4;at&t, s^jatftt; asyatSt, naqyatit, ohyatSt; krlyatftt;

Digitizecy Google

670—] VIIL COHTOOATIOH. 214

gftmayatfit, oy&vaytttBt, v«ra;sUt; IpMt&t; JigftOt. Ho esimplw
h>Te been found fiom & naul-cluB yeah (690), dot tny other thui thoM
bete given from ■ peitlve, intenjiTe, oi deaidan^Te. The few aeoented
caiet indiMte that the foniiatlon folloiri the fenetal rule foT one made with
ail accented ending (662).

b. The impeiatlTe in t&t is not a Ter; »Te rormatlOD in the older
language, being made (Id T., B., and 8.) tram about flft; loota, and in
toTard a hundred and fifty occnrreuces. Later, it ii very unufnal: thu,
only a elngle siimple haa been noted in HBh., and one in R. ; and corree-
pondlngly few in yet more modern texta.

S71. As regardB its mesniog, this form appears to have pre-
TailiDglf Id the Br&hmarLu, and tracesbly bnt mach less diatinctlf in
the Vedio texts, a specific tense-value added to ks mode-yalue — as
signifying, namely, an injunction to be carried oat at a later time than
the present: it is (like the Latin forms in to and tots) a posterior
or future imperative.

a. Eiamplee are: ihti 'vi ma tlq^bantam abhyehi ti briilii
tadi tu na igatSifa pratipr&br&tftt (9B.) *ay to her "coma to meat I
stand jiul here," and [^aftertcard] announce her to ue a* having come; y&d
urdhT&B tfqtbi drivi^e 1i& dhattat (RV.) when thou thalt atand up-
right, \(hen\ bettow rtchei here (and limilarly in many cases); utkfilain
udvalk6 btaavo 'duhya pr&tl dtaftvatftt (AT.) 6s a carrier up the aeeent;
after having carried up, run hack again; vimaap&tiT &dhl tvfi Sth&syRtl
t&B7a vittSt (TS.) the tree will ateend thee, [then] take noU of it.

b. Examples of its nse as otlsr than 2d slug, are ae foUovrs: islaing.,
avyuf&ifa JKgft&d ah&m (AV, ; only cue) let me tcatch till day-break;
as 3d sing., punoT m^ "vifatSd rayl^ (TS.) ^^ viealth come again to
me, a7&m ty&aya rl^ift mOrdhlUaih vi pBtoyatfit (^B.) the king here
ekall make hit head fly off; u 2d da., naaatya? abruvan deva]^
punar tt vahatSd itl (RV.) the gode said to the two A^ini "bring tliem
back again^; as 2d pi., ipal^ . . , d«v^|a naib euk^ bratat (TS.) ye
Koters, announce us fo &e gods as well-doert. In the later laugaage, the
prevailing value appear* to be that of a 3d sing.: thus, bbav&n praaftdadi
koTutftt (HBh.) may your toorMp do the faoor, anaih btiavta
abtalrak^atfit (DEC.) let your exeeUency protect him.

a. AocordlDg to the natlTe grammarians, the Imperative in tftt la to be
used with a benedlotlve Implication. No Initance of such nse appears to
be quotable.

d. In a certain passage repeated severa]. times in different Brahmanas
and Sutras, and containing a number of forms in t&t naed as 2d pi.,
TSrayadhvKt Is read instead of T&rayntfit in some of the texts (K. AB.
A^S. <;<;S.). No other occnrrence of the ending dhvSt has been anyvhete

itizecy Google

Uses of thb Modes.

Uses of the Modes.
672. Of ihe thiee modes, the imperative is the one
most distinct and limited in office, and most unchanged in
use throughout the whole history of the language. It signi-
fies a command oi injunction — an attempt at the exercise
of the speaker's will upon some one or something outside
of himself.

a. This, howevei (in Sanskrit as in other languages), is by no
means slvays of the same force; the command Bhades off Into a
demand, an exhortation, an entreatf, an expresBion of earnest desire.
The ImpeTBtiye also BOmetimes eignifies an assumption or conceBaion ;
and occasionally, hy pregnaat constractioD, it becomes the ezpTcssIon
of something cooditionBl or contingent; but it does not acquire any
regular uae in depend ent-oUnae-maki ng-

b. The ImpflratiTe Is nov and than used in an InUrrogatlte seDteDCe:
thua, bravihi ko 'dySi Va mayft vlTi^yatfim. (R.) *peak! who thall
rtoto be ttparaltd by mef katbam ete gu^vantah krlyantam (H.)
how are they to be made viiiuouet kasm&i pi^^Ui^ pradlyatAm (Vet)
to whom shall the offering be gioent

573. The optative appears to have as its primary office
the expTession of wish or desire; in the oldest language,
its prevailing use in independent clauses is that to which
the name "optative" pioperly belongs.

a. Bat the expression of deBire, on the one hand, pasBcs naturaily
over into that of requMt or entreaty, bo that the optative becomes
a softened Imperative; and, on the other hand, it cornea to signify
what is generally desirable or proper, what should or ought to be,
and so becomes the mode of prescription ; or, yet again, it is weakened
into signifying what may or can be, what Is Itkely or usual, and ho
becomes at last a softened statement of what is.

b. Further, tbe optaUve in dependent clanses, with relative
pronouns and co^jnnotlons, becomes a regular means of expreasion
of the condiHonal and contingent, In a wide and increasing variety
of use*.

O. The Bo-MllBd pTeeittie foimi (667J ue oidintTil; med in the
proper opIatiTe leuie. But In the Uter language they are occailonall; met
with in the othei Die* of the optative : thus, na hi prapa^yftmi mamft
^anudyftd yao ohokaum (BbG.) /or I do not perceive what ekould diipel
my grief; jnA bhuytonr vibhataya^ (BhP.) that there ehculd be
changea. Also raiel; with mS: lee 678 b.

ioy Google

674—] Vin. COKJUaATIOK. 216

674. The subjunctive, as has been pointed out, becomes
nearly extinct at an early period in the history of the
language ; thete are le£t of it in classical usage only two
relics: the use of its first persons in an imperative sense,
or to signify a necessity or obligation resting on the speak-
er, or a peremptory intention on his part; and the use of
unaugmented forms (670), with the negative particle ITT mi,
in a prohibitive or negative imperative sense.

a. And the geDeml value of the subjnuctive from the beglniiing
was what those relics would seem to indicate: its fundamental mean-
ing is perhaps that of reqaiBition, less peremptory than the imperative,
more so than the optative. But this meaning is liable to the same
modiflcationB and tranBitions with that of the optative; and sub-
junctive and optative run cloeely parallel with one another in the
oldest language in their use in independent clanaes, and are hardly
distingnlshable in dependent. And instead of their being (as In Greek)
both maintained in use, and endowed with nicer and more distiDctive
values, the Bubjnnctive gradually disappears, and the optative assumes
alone the offices formerly shared by both.

676. The difference, then, between imperative and sub-
junctive and optative, in their fundamental and most char"
acteristic uses, is one of degree: command, requisition, wish;
and no sharp line of division exists between them; they
are more or leas exchangeable with one another, and com-
binable in coordinate clauses.

a> Thus, In AV., we have in impv.: qat&ib. Jiva ^ar&dal^ do
thou live a hundred autumna; ubli&ii tl& Jlvat&ih jar&daf^ let &«m
both live to attain old age; — in Bubj., ady& jiTfinl let m» liv4 Oiia
day; qat&ih Jivfttl qar&da^ lie ehalt live ahtoidred autumns; — in opt,
jivema far&d&di qatani may we live Aundreda of aulumiu; airvam
iyxtx JIvyiEaam (prec.) I teould fain Uve out my whole term of life.
Here the modes would be interchangeable with a hardly perceptible
change of meaning.

b. Examples, again, of different modes in cotirdlnats construction
are: ly&m ague nitn pitiih vldeffa . . . navfiua pntrin m&hi^
bhavStl gatvi p&tidi sabhigft v{ ri^atu [AY.) may thi* wmnaa,
'0 Agni! _find a ipotue: giving birth to tont the thali become a chief'
fatnttt; having attained a tpouee let her rule in AopjWMw; KOpftyi
nah BTast4;« prabi^dhe na^ punar dada^ (T3.) watch over ut for

ioy Google

217 Uses or the Modes. [ — B78

our a^^fm■»; grant unto ut io wakt again; myta na3f Bfinali . • . Bn te
uumaXii bhatv aami (BV.) may Hurt be io ut a ton; Ut that favor
of tkine be our*. It iB not veiy Beldam the cue that versloDs of
the ume pBHSge in different tezta ahov different modee as varloaa

0. There is, in &ct, notliing In the earliest employment of tbeee
model to prove that they might not all be specialized luea of forms
originally equivalent — having, for instance, a general future moaoiog.

&7fl. As examples of the less charaoterlatic use of subjunctive
and optatJve in the older language, in Independent clauses, may be
quoted the following: it shS ti gaooh&n nttarK yug^ (BV.) Ihote
tattr agte teitl doubtlett eomt; y&d . . . ok marft {tl m&nyaae (RV.)
if thou lhinke»t "I thatt net die" ; n4 til nagantl n& dabhStl t&akara^
(BV.) thtg do not become lost; no thief eon harm them; k&smfil derliya
liav{^vidheiaa(RV.] to what god thall wa offer eblatioat asndlS rayfm
a^navat . . . div6-dive [BV.) by Agni one may gain taealth efery day; '

utftl "nfiifa bralim&9e dadyKt t&thA Byonlt qivS ayKt [AV.] one
thould give her, however, to a Srahman; in that eale the will be propitious
and favorabh; ^bar-ahar dadj^t (^.) <m» should give every day.

677. The obos of the optative in the later language are of the
utmost variety, covering the whole field occupied jointly by the two
modes in earlier time. A few examples from a single text (MBb.)
will be enough to Illustrate them: uoclii;taiii nftl Va bhaSJiy&di na
kaiTilh pidadbtTanam I wiU not eat of the remnant of the tacrifiee,
I wiH net perform the foet-lavation; jfifttm vrajet let her go to her
relative! ; nfil Vaiii sK barhloit knryllt the thould not act thut at any
time; kathadi Tidy&di nalBith nppam how can I know king Nalaf
ntaai^e sadigaya^ sy&t tu Tindetft 'pi tokbadi kvaoit but in case
of her abandonment there may be a chance; she may aleo find happiness
somewhere; katbaih vfiso -rikarteyaifa na oa budhyeta me prly&
how eon I cut off the garment and my beloved not wakef

678. The later use of the first persons subjunctive as so-called
Imperative involves no change of construction from former time, but
only restriction to a single kind of use: thus, divySva let u* two
play; klih karavK^l te what shall I do for theet

S79. The imperative negative, or prohibitive, Is from the earliest
period of the language regularly and nsaally expressed by the particle
mt with an aagmentlees past form, prevailingly aorist

R. Thus, pr& pata mi tik raifaatlift^ (AV.) Jty away, do not stay
here; dvlf&A^ oa m&byaih radhyatu mi o& li&ih dvi;at6 radluua
( AV.) both let my foe be subject to me, and let me not be eubjeet to my foe ;
niv hfyfim Abbayadi jyotlr indra mi no dlrghi abb{ naqan
tamlsrt);! (RV.) I would win broad fearlets light, O Indra; let not the
long darknetee* come upon ut; mi na i^nh pr& mofl^ (BV-) do not

Digil.zecy Google

679—1 Vm. COHJlliAl

218

tteal away our Ufa; sanil^vveihi mi ^aoab (MBfa.J bt tiomforUd: do
not grieve ; m& bhftifl]^ ot bhfti^ [MBb. R.) dot not be afttad; mft bhut
kUaaya paryayal^ (R.) let not a change of time take place. EsampleB with
the imperfect are: ma bibber ni. marlfyasi (RV.) do not fear; thou ailt
not dig; n^ Bm&l 'tint fli^hin kurutbftti (AY.) do not make friendt
of them ; mfi putram tmatftpy&tbih (HBh.) do not sorroui for My ion.
The reUtiou of the imperfect to the aoriet conBtrnotiOD, in point of
freqaenc;, is in BV. about as one to five, Id AY. atill less, or abont
one to six; sod though instaaces of the imperfect are quotable from
all the older texts, they are exceptional and infteqaent; while in the
epicB and iater they become extremely rare.

b. A BlogU opt&tlve, bhujema, Is need prohibitively with ma in
RV. ; tha older Uognige preaenti no other example, uid the coDBtmctlan
ie very lue aleo later. la en eiemple or tvo, ileo, the preeative {bhOT&t,
R. PeSc.) follows ma.

o. Tht RV. ha« once appiirently ma with an Imperative; bat tha
passage is piobably corrupt. Mo other Buch cue ia met with In the older
langnege (unlets sppa, TA. L li; doabttess a bad reading for afpaa); but
in the epics and later the eonatmction begtni to appaar, and becomee an
ordinary torm of prohibition: thai, mfi prayaoohe "9vare dhanam (H.)
do not beitow trealth on a lord; aokhl mSi 'vaih vada (Vet.) friend,
do not ipeak that.

d. The (B. (li. 5. 1'] appesie to olTer a single example ot a Crne
subjunctive with mi, n{ padyftaii; there Is perhaps something wrong
iboot the reading.

«, In the epics and later, an aorlst form not deprived of augment ii
ocoaaionally met with after mfi: thus, mfi tvftdk k&lo tyagfit (HBh.)
let not the timepaei thee; ma v&llpatliam anv agfi^ (B.) do nolfoUoui
V^lCe road. But the same anomaly occurs also two or three times in the
cider langnage: thus, vyiipaptat (9^.), agfia (TA,), anRi^at (K8.).

B80. Bat the use also of the optative with ni not in a prohibitive
sense appears in the Veda, and iMComes later a familiar construction;
thus, n& ri;yema kad£ oan& [BY.) may ica suffer no harm at any
time ; ak oK 'tisf J^n n& Juhnyftt (AY.) and if he do not grant permierion,
let him not taciiffce; t&d u t&thil nk kuryfit (^B.) but he muei not
do that 10; na dlvfi gayita (^S.) let him not sleep by day; na trfidi
vidyuT Jaafil^ (HBh.) let not people knoie thee. This in the later
language is the correlative of the preBCriptive optative, and both are
eitreuelf common; so tliat in a text of prescriptive character the
optative forma may come to outnumber the Indicative and imperative
together (as is the case, for example, in Hann).

S81. In all dependent constructions, it is still harder even Id
the oldest language to establish a definite distinction between sub-
junctive and opUtive; a method of nae of either is scarcely to be
found to which the other doea not furnish a practical eqalvaleot-—

ioy Google

219 Uses op the Uodes. [—681

and thoD, In the later language, anch wna sre repreBOnted by the
opUtaye slone. A fev ex&mplee will be eafficleDt to illuBtrate this:

a> After relative proDOQDs and ooDJQDctlooe in general: ji
vyfl^ar yaq oa nUn&ih vyaedhia. (RV.) tchieh have shone /orth ihith-
erio}, and tehieh thai! hereafter ihin» forth; j6 'to Siy&tB. aamjkadi
B& 6ko 'aat (TS,) whoeeer *hall be bom of her, let him be one of ut;
yo Tfti tin vidyit piaty&k|aifa b4 brahm^ v^ditK ayfit (AV.)
tehoever thail know them fac* to fact, he may poet for a knowing priest;
pUtr^Slh . . . jataBBdi JanAyftf oa yan ( AV.) of tone bom and tchom
Mow mayett bear; yisya . . . ititbix grhia Sg&oohet (AV.) to whote-
loever houee he may come ae guett; yatamAtbA kSm&yeta t&tha kury&t
(Qfi.) in whatever way he may choose, eo may ha do it; y4rlii h6tS yija-
mftnaoya n&oa gr^U^^t^ t&rhl brOy&t [TS.) uAeh the laerijicing
priest ihail name the name of the offtrtr, then he may speak ; BTorupaiii
yada dra^tum ioobetbJU? (HBh.) when thou shall desire to see tJiine

b. In more distinctly coodiUonal cone true tione : y&j&ma devan
y&di 9akniTfiins (BV.) we will offer to the gods if we ihaU be able; y&d
ague eylba aUiifa tv&ifa tvUb vfi gha syn ab&di syn? t« satjit
ihi "({^a^ (BV.) if I were thou, Agni, or if thou wert I, thy withes
should be realised on the spot; yo dyam atlB&rpftt par&atSn ait b&
muoyStai T&nujaaya r^fialji (AT.) though one steal far away beyond
the sky, he shall not eteape king Varuna; y&d &iifif vftn upav&Mt k^-
^ih-niTMh ayftd y&d aqmyad rudrd 'eya pa^liii abhi manyeta (TS.)
if he should continue without eating, he would starve; if he should eat,
Sudra would attack his cattle ; piirtbayed yadi mSih keloid dajj-dya^i
■a me pumftn bbavet [HBh.] if any man soever should desire me, he
should suffer punishment. These and the like conatmetioDB, with the
optatiTe, are rery common in the Brahmanae and later.

c In final clanees: y&th& 'b&ih ^atrnho "sSnl (AV.) that I may
he a slayer of my enemies; gr^&ni y&th& pibfttbo Ai^ilh^h (RV.) that
being praised wiOi song ye may drink the draught; urftu y&thft tAva
f&rmam m&dema (BV.) in order that we ry'oice in thy wide protection;
&pa JSnlta y&tbe 'y&m pdnar Sg&oobet (^B.) contrive that she come
back again; kfpfiib kuryftd yatha mftyl (UBb.) so that he may take pity
on me. This Is in the Veda one of the most freqaent ueea of the
subjunctive; and in its correlative negative form, with n6d in order
that not or lett (always followed by an accented verb), it cootinnes
not rare in the Br&hmanaa.

d. The IndlOkUie ia also very commonl]' used tn RntX cliniet after
yathfi: thai, ;itb&] *7kii pum^ 'DtArikfam anuo&ratl ((B.) in order
that this man may traverse the atmosphere ; yathS na vigbnab kriyate
(R.) so that no hindrance mag arise; yatba 'yaili naqyatt tathft vidhe-
yam (H.) ■( must be so managed that he perish.

Digitizecy Google

881—] VnL COMJUOATION. 220

e. Vitli tbe eonditloQ&I me of inlijaDcUTe and opUtiTe Ls fnithei ttt
be cempaied that of the M-eallod cODdittanal tenie; Bee below, 860.

f. As li indicated b; many of the examples given above, It is naoal
in a conditional eentenoe, oontalnlng piotaiii and ipodosls, to emplo; always
the same mode, whether subjauotiie or optative (oi oondltional}, in each
of the two oUueas. For the older language, this Is a lole well-nigh or
qnlte without exception.

682. No distinction of meaning baa been ettftblished between
the modes of the preseDt-stem and thoae (in the older langnage) of
tbe perfect and aoriat-aystems.

Participles.

688. PaiticipleB, active and middle, aie made &om all
the tenee-Btems — ezoept the periphiastic future, and, in
the latet language, the aoiist [and aorist participles aie lare
&om the beginning).

a. The psTtidples aaconnected with the tense-ayetems aie treated In
obap. XUI. (863 ff.).

684. The general participial endings ate QtT ant [weak
foim 9(7 at; fem, Qrft anQ oi Qrf) Ml: see above, 448) fot
the active, and 9H Bna (fem. ?1HT 5nB) foi the middle. But —

a. After a tense-stem ending in a, the active paiticipia] aafGx
is virtually nt, one of tbe two a's being lost in the combination of
Btem-final and sufSx.

b. After a tenge-atem ending in a, the middle participial suffix
IB mSna instead of &na. But there are occasional ezoeptlone to the
mle as to the use of m&na and &iui respectively, which will be
pointed out in connection with the variona formations below. Such
exceptions are especialiy frequent in the cansativer see 1043 f.

o. The perfect has in the active the peculiar suffix vfifia (weakeat
form n^, middle form vat; fem. u;l: see, for the inflection of this
participle, above, 4S8ff.).

d. For details, as to form of stem etc., and for apecial exceptlona,
see the following chapters.

Augment

686. The augment is a shoit Q a, prefixed to a tense-
stem — and, if the latter begin with a vowel, combining with
that vowel irregularly into the heavier or vfddhi diphthong

ioy Google

221 AudKHNT. [ — B87

(136 a). It is always (without any exception) the accented
element in the verbal form of which it makes a part.

a. In the Tedk, Uie angmaQt la In & few toxmt long f. thai, ixiA%,
avar> Kt);^, avr^ak, Kvldtayat, Syunak, iyulcta, iyok^fitSiD,
tri^ak. IbUk, (ud y&a ta tvldliat, ST. 11. 1. 7, 9?].

586. The angmeDt la a rign of put time. And an aagment-
preterit is made &om each of the tense-Btems from which the system
of coiyi^B^o^ <s derived: namely, the imperfect, from the present-
stem; the plnperfect (in the Veda only), from the perfect-stem; the
conditional, from the f\itnre'item ; while In the aorist snob a preterit
stands withont any correspondiDg present Indicative.

K87. In the early langoage, especially in the BV-, the occarrence
of forms identica] with those of sngment-tenses save for the lack of
an augment is quite frequent Such forms lose in general, along with
the augment, the specific character of the tenses to which they belong;
and they are then employed in part Don-modally, with either a pres-
ent or a past sense; and in part modaily, with either a sabjunotive
or an optative sense — especially often and regolarly after mfi pro-
hibitive (676) ; and this last mentioned ose comes down also into the
later language.

a. In RV., the tngmentleis forms are more th*n hUt m common u
the togmeoted (abmit 2000 and 3300), ind are made (lom the present,
perfect, and aorltt-syitems, bat eonsldenblr over balf from the aoriat
Tbelt non-modal and modtl use* ue of nearl)' eqtul freqaenoy. The tense
valae of the non-modally uasd foims is mora often psst than present. Of
the modall; used foima, nearly a third are constrned with mt piohibltlTe;
the reit have tvloe at often an optative as a proper inhjunctlTa value.

b. In AY., the numerical relations ate Tery different. The augment-
less forms are leas tban a third at many as the angmented (about 476 to
14(iO), and are pieialllDgly (more than four flfUks) aoristlc. The non-modal
uses aie only a tenth of the modal. Of the modaily oied forms, about
foor fifths ate construed with mS ptohiblHTe; the test are cbieD; optative
tn Tslne, Then, la the langaage of the Biihmanas (not Inclndlng the
mantea-miteiial which they contain), tbe loaa of augment la, save in
oceaslonal sporadic cases, restricted to the prohfbitiTe eonitrUBtion irith mfi;
and the same continues to be the case later.

o. The acoentnatlon of the angmsntless forms is thioDghont in accord-
ance with that of unaDgmented tenses of similar formation. Examples will
be given below, under the Taiions tenses.

d. Besides the angmentless sorlat-forms with ma prahibttive, there
are also found occistonally in the later language augmeutless imperfeet-forms
(totj rarely sorist-forms), whieh have tbe same Talna as if they were aug-
mented, and are for the most part examples of metrical license. They ue
especially fteqnent In the epies (whence some seores of them are quotable).

Digitizecy Google

688—] Vni. Conjugation. 222

Reduplication.

688. The deiivatioQ of coajuga,tional and declensional
stems from roots by i^duplication, either alone ot alon^
with other fotmative elements, has been already spoken of
[260], and the foTmations in which reduplication appears
have been specified: they are, in primary verb-inflection,
the present (of a certain class of verbs], the perfect (of
nearly all), and the aorist (of a large number]; and the in-
tensive and desideiative secondary conjugations contain in
their stems the same element.

688. The general principle of reduplication is the pre-
fixion to a root of a part of itself repeated — if it begin
with consonants, the initial consonant and the -vowel; if it
begin with a vowel, that vowel, either alone or with a follow-
ing consonant. The varieties of detail, however, are very
considerable. Thus, especially, as regards the vowel, which
in present and perfect and desiderative is regularly shorter
and lighter in the reduplication than in the root-syllable,
in aorist is longer, and in intensive is strengthened. The
differences as regards an initial consonant are less, and
chiefly confined to the intensive; for the others, certain
general rules may be here stated, all further details being
left to be given in connection with the account of the sep-
arate formations.

690. The consonant of the reduplicating syllable is in
general the first consonant of the root : thus, ^US papraoh
from V^f^ praoh; WTJf 9i9ri from yfST 9ri; a^U bnbudh
from yWJ- But —

a. A non-aspirate is substituted in reduplication for an
aspirate: thus, ^ dadhs from yfJl; f^ blbhy from y^bh^.

b. A palatal is substituted for a guttural or for ^ h :

ioy Google

223 Rbduplication. [—698

thus, ^^ cftky from ym kj; Rffaj oikhid from I'fej kMd;
giM Jsgrabh from yzpt grabh; s!^ jahr from y^ hj .

O. The occuioQil retenion, on the othei hand, of a pil&lsl In the
iadic*l lyllible to guUuial form bu been natieed above (S16, 1).

d. Of two initial consonaQtB, the Becond, if it be a
noQ-naaal mute preceded by a sibilant, is repeated instead
of the fiist; thuB, rTRT tastr from vTfT sty; HFIT taatlUi from
yreif sthS; ^Ri-f oftskand from yHi-^ akand; ^f^^T
oasktaaJ from yV^vi akhal; ^^j^ oufout from yWl 9aut;
qpW paapfdli from yPJ^ Bpfdh; qftfij poaphuf from y^^JiZ
Bphut: — but Tt^ saanS from y^ anS; Tt^ eaamr from
y^ amp; ;w aoaru from ^^ arn; fulfill M fi^U? from yftn'
9U9.

Accent of the Vert>.

681. The statements which have been made above, and those
which will be made below, as to the accent of verbal forma, apply
to those cases in which the verb is actual 1 7 accented.

a. Bat, according to the grammarians, and according to the in-
variable practice in accentnated texts, the verb is in the majority of
its occnrrences unaccented or tonelesa.

b. That ia to uy, ot couiee, the verb In itf proper rarma, ita personal
or lo-called finite formg. The verbal uonua and adjecllvea, or the infinitives
and paitlclplea, are BDbject to precUet; tbe aime laira of accent as other
nouns and adjectives.

692. The general rale, coveting most of the cases, is this: Tbe
verb iii an independent claoae is nnaccented, unless it stand at the
beginning of the clause — 01 also, in metrical text, at the beginning
of a pida.

a. For the accent of the verb, as well as for that of the vocative
case (above, 314 c), the beglaniug of a pftda counts a* that of a lentencs,
whatever be the logical connection of the pSda with what precedes It.

b. Eiamplea of the nnaccented verb ars: agnlm I^ pur6hitam
Agni I praise, the houte-prittt; sa id dev^n gaochati that, Hubf, goet
to the godt; Ague aupayaa6 bhava O Agni, be easy of aeeett; Idiim
indra ff^tilil somapa thU, O Indra, loma-drmker, hear; o&maa te
rodra kp^ma^ homage to thee, Rudra, tee offer; y^amftnasya paqlhi
pUii the taerifieer'i eattU proteei thou.

o. Hence, there are two principal situations in which the verb
retains its accent:

ioy Google

B88— ] VIII. Conjugation. 224

69S. First, the verb ia accented when it stands at the beginning
of a clause — or, io verse, of a pfida.

a. Extmplet ot tbe vaib accented at the bead of the aeuteiice me, Id
proBs, q&ndlutdhTtufa dsivyS^& k&rma^e he pure for Iha tUeitu
ceremony; &pn6ti 'mUi loUm ht iciiu (hie tcortd; — in verte, *heig
the lieul of tbe sentence Is also ttiat of the p&da, ayamd 'd Indrasra
fjixtaaifi may u>» be in Indra's protection; darf&ya mft yStndhanftn
thou) me the toreerere; g&road Tl^ebbir t n& nah mat/ he come milh good
thingi to tt>; — In verae, vheie the head of th« cUaie is within the p&da,
t^fitb pftbl Qrudhi hivam drink of them, hear our call; B&stn mftti
B&Btn pita B&stn (va B&atu vlfpAtih hi the mother »le»p, let the/other
ale^, let the dog «iup, tat the matter eteep ; vifrakarman nAmaa t«
pKhy aamlln VicBokarman, homage to thee; protect us.' yav^. ■ .r^jtia
Qoe duhlti pf aohi v&ih nar& the king's daughter taid to you "I pray
you, ye men"; vay&ib te T&ya Indra vlddlil ^u ^al^ pr& bharftmatae
tee offer thee, Indra, ttrengthening ; take nott of ut.

b. Eitmplea of tbe verb accented at the head ot the pftda when this
is not the head of the aentenee are: &thB te &ntamftnSil) Tldyaiaa
somatln^ >o may we enjoy thy motl intimate favori; dhtti 'aya
agruvU p&tiifa d&dhKtu pratikamykm Dhatar beeUno upon thia girl
a huehand aecording to her leiah; yfitndhdnaaya Bomapa Jahi pndim
tlay, 0 Soma-drinker, Gie progeny of the toreerer.

&94. Certain special cues under this hesd aia as followe;

a. As a vocative forms no sfottcdcal put of the sentence to vlilch
It ia attaohed, but Is only an externil appendage to it, s veib following
an initial vocative, oi more than one, l9 accented, aa if it were lUelf initial
In the clause or p&da: thus, ttqmtkar^a ^rudhf hAvam 0 tium of
liatehing eart, hear our caU! Bite T&nd&malie tvil 0 Sita, we rtvermca
thee ; viqve devS visaTO rAkf ate 'm&m all ye gode, ye Vatue, protect
Ihia man; ati "go^ oakr^adi derS dfrvA JivdyathS piinah likeuiiie
him, O gods, leho hat committed crime, ye gode, ye make to live again.

b. It more than one verb follow a word or words sjnttetlcally con-
nected with them all, only the Arat ioaea its accent, the others being treated
as if they were Initial verba In separata clauses, with the same adjuncts
understood: thus, tor&qir IJ Jayatl k^dtl pu^yatl aucceiaful he eonquera,
rule), thrivei; amittin . . . p&rSoa indra pr& mf^ Jalil oa our foea,
Indra, drive far away and alay; aam&bhyaifa Jeql y6tBl oa for us
mnquar and fight; &Kiiifoinfi havif^a^ pr'4sthltaBya vit&lfa b&ryataiii
vna^ft Juf^thftm O Agni and Soma, of the oblation aet forth partake,
etyoy, ye mighty onti, take pleaaure.

C. In like manner (but much less often), an sdjnnct, as subject or object,
standing between two verbs snd logically belonging to both, la teokoned to the
tint alone, and the second has the Inllisl accent : thus, Jahl praj&il D&yaava
ea slay the progeny, and bring [itj hither; fp^tn n&l^ anbhigK bddbatn
tm&Q& may the bleiaed one hear ue, [and may she] kindly regard [iw].

ioy Google

225

ACOflKT.

[—686

d. It hu even come to be > (onnal mie that a verb immediately
followlDK aootker verb li accented: thoa, b& 74 ttkm vv&m npltste
ptUy&te pr^&y& pa^iibhil^ (9^0 whoever worMpt km (Aim it filkd
toith offipring and eatlU.

696. Second, tbe verb ii accented, whatever its position, in »
dependent clanfe.

a. The dependency of a clauie ia Id the very great majoilty of caaei
conditioned by the relative pronoun ya, oi one of its derivittvea oi com-
poands. Thus: y&ifa ya|&4iii parlbhiir 4si tchaf offering thou proteeUtt;
6 U yontl jh aparl;u p&qySn they are coming who shall behold her
hereafter; sabA y&n me Aatl t^na along ictth that tchieh i» mine; y&tra
no^ ptb-ra plt&rah pareyulb whither our fatheri of old departed;
adyi moriya y&di y&tudhiao &aad let me die on the epot, if I am
a toreerer; y&thit "hADy anupUrv&ih bb&7aatl a> daye foUow one
another in order; yivad id&ih bh'^vonaih tI^tojii 4stl how great thi»
iohole creation ie; y&tkftmfta te Juhum&B t&n no astn what desiring
we taerijiee to thee, let that become oura; yatamAa tftfpaSt whii^ever
one deeire* to enjoy.

b. Tbe pretence of a relative word In the aentence does not, of conne,
accent the verb, nnle«a tbia la really the predicate of a dependent dauae;
thus, &pa t;6 tfty&TO yathft yanti they make off like Ihievee {at thieve*
do); y&t atha j4gao oa rejate whatever [is] immovable and movable
tremilee; yatbfikamadi n{ padyate he liee down at hi* pleasure.

e. The particle oa »ben It meana if, and obd (oa + id] if, give an
accent to tbe verb: thne, braluna o6d db^Btarn Agrablt if a Brahman
has grasped her hand; tv&ih oa soma no v&qo Jlvatudi ok marSmabe
if thou. Soma, willeet u* to live, toe shall not die ; i oa g&oobftn mitrim
e&B dadbSma ■/ he will come here, we will make friends with him.

d. There are a very few paeaagea In whlrh the logical dependence of a
danae containing no tnboidinatlng word appeara to give the verb Itg acoant:
thaa, nbxa i>Qvapar9&9 o&raatl no n&ro 'amakam indra ratbino
Jayantn when our men, horie-winged, coins into conflict, let the chariot-
fighters of our side, O Indra, win the victory. Barely, too, an imperative
EO followlna another Imperative that Jtg action may seem a consequence of W* ^ ^** cteX*.
the lattec'a Is aocenled: thne, ttiyam A gaU kio^vefu b4 a&oK p(ba A -»*ywK>^rM
come hi^er quickly/ drink along with the Xanvas (l. e. in order to drink), art yyt^^ U,^

e. A few other particles give the verb an accent, in viitae of a alight ^ -
anhordiaating force belonging to them: thne, especially hi (with ita negation
nabi), which In Its fnllest value means ^ttr, but ahadea off from that '"to^^
a mere aseeveratlve aense; tbe verb or verba connected with It ue alwayevr''
accented: thua, -vi t^ mnScantSib vimaoo hi 8&nti let them release
him, for they are releaeere ; jke old dbi . . . anK^astii ira Bm&ai if
we, foreooth, are as it were unreitowned; — also n6d (ni + id), meaning
leet, that not: thai, nSt tvft t&pSti Bfiro orol^a that the tun may not
bum thee with his beam; vir^aib oAA Tlocbln&dfini tl saying to himself,

Wbltiaj, Onamar. 3. *i. IS

J ..__., Lioogic

896—] Vin. CoNJUOATios. 226

"Imt I cut off the viraj" (inch cuee us fteqnent in the Brihmanai); —
kod the inttnogative kavid toltethirf thus, uktbibtal^ kavfd Sgiunat
leiB he eome hiiier for our praiiett

B86. Bat further, the verb of k prior cUdbs is not iafreqnentlf
accented in antithetical ooDstnioUon.

a. Sometimei, the reUtion ot the two oUnies ti iskdil? etpsble of
bslDg TsgtTiled >9 that of pcotMi* and apodoais ; but often, tXso, lach a
TelatioQ Is tbit indistinct; and the cues of antltheata shade off Into ^ote
of OTdtnsiy coSidination, the line between them appeadng to be nthet
arbltralilr dravD.

b> In many cs«eB, the antitbeals is made distinctei by the picaence In
the two clauses of conelatlve woids, eapeciUly onya— anya, eka — eka,
Tft— vft, ca— «a: thna, pp&-prft 'ayi jkati p&ry aayi fisate tome go
on and on, oOttra tit about (u IF it where u>hile eoma go etc.); nd v&
BiiiofcdhTam &pa vS pr^adhvam either pour out, or fiU up; a&ib oa
'dhy&avft 'gne prii oa vardhaya 'm&m hoth do thou thyself become
kindled, Agni, and do thou increase thie person. But it U also made with-
oot suoh helpi thas, pra 'JatAh pr^a janiyati p&rl prAjStt gflu^tl
fAe unborn progeny he generates, the bom he embraeet ; &pa ynfmAd &kra-
mln ni 'amitii upavartate [<Aouf;A] she has gone aicoy from you, she
does not eome to uf; na 'ndli6 'dhvaryur bh&vatl Jt& yajtiaih rakfSAai
gboantl the priest does not become blind, the demons do not destroy the
taerifice; kina e6mft grhy&nte k^na huyante by whom [on the one hand]
are the somas dvpped outf by whom {on &e other hand] are they offeredt

597> Wbeie the Terb would be the same In the two antithetical cUaies,
it ta not infreqaently omitted In the second: thns, beside complete expres-
glons like urvi att "bI t&siti eft ^1 hoth thou art broad and ^u art good,
occai, much oftenei, incomplete ones like agofr amnpnlA lokA ielA
yam& 'amfn Agni was in yonder world, Yama [u>iu] in this; aBtbna
"n^^ praj^ pratlti^thaiiti mSAB^nft 'iiy£^ by bone some creatures
stand ^rm, by Jtesh others; dvipao ca s&rvaih no rik^a o&tuqp&d
y4o oa na^ BV&m both protect everything of ours that is biped, and
also whatever that is quadruped belong* to us.

a. AccentnittDU of the *etb in the formet of two antithetical clansee
la a TQls moie itiictty followed In the Brabmanaa than in the Teda, and
least strictly In the RT.: ihaa, in EV., abbi dyidl melllnll bhuvam
(not bbi^vam) abht 'm£ih pf tblviih mahTm J am superior to the sky
in greatness, also to this great €arth; and e^en {ndro vidur ifiginuw;
oa gkoT^^ Indra knows, and the terrible Angirates.

6eS. There are certain more ot less donbtfal cases in which a
Terlhfonn ia perhaps accented for emphasis.

a. Tbns, sporadically before oan& in any wise, and in connectton
vlth aaseTetatUe pBrHclea, as klla, K&gk, evi, Md (In (B., repilarly)
h&Dta: thus, b4iite liUbfa pfthlvlih vlbhU&maliU come on! kt us
share up thie earth.

ioy Google

IX. Pbssbkt-sybtbm.

CHAPTER IX.

THE FBESENT-SYSTEH.
509. Thb present-system, oi system of forms coming
iiom the piesent-stem, is composed (as was pointed out
above] of a present indicative tense, tt^ethei with a sub-
junctive (mostly lost in the classical language), aa optative,
sn imperative, and a participle, and also a past tense, an
augment-preterit, to which we give (by analogy with the
Greek) the name of imperfect.

a. Tbeae tormi often go Id Sanikrlt gTMnmug br the name ot
"ipeclil tenses", while the other tenM-systems ace styled "geneTkl tsnaes"
— u If tlie farmei vere made ^om i special tense stem oi modifled root,
while the Utter came, all alike, rrom the root Itself. Thets Is no reason
why end) * dltUnetion and notoencUtnra should bo letained; ilnce, on the
one hand, the "Bpedal tenses" come in one set of verb! directly from the
root, and, on the othei hand, the other tense-sy stems ate mostly made from
stems — aDd, In the case o( the aoiist, from stems baling a variety of fonn
comparable with that of present-steias.

600. Practically, the present-system is the most prom-
inent and important part of the whole conjugation, since,
from the earliest period of the language, its forms are very
much more frequent than those of all the other systems
together.

A, Thus, In the Veda, the occurrences ot personal forms of this syetem
are to those of all others about aa three to one; in the Aitareya Brahmana,
a* five to one; In the Hitopadega, as ali to one; in the Qakuntala, aa
eight to one; In Hann, aa thirty to one,

601. And, as there is also great variety in the manner
in which difTerent roots form their present stem, this, as
being theii most conspicuous difference, is made Ibe basis
of their piiaoipal classification; and a verb is said to he of
this 01 of that conjugation, or class, according to the way
in which it8> present-stem is made and inflected.

itizecy Google

eos— ] IX. Preshmt-btbtbk. 228

602, In a Bmall minority of verbs, the piesent^tem ia
identical with the root. Then there are besides (excluding
the passive and causative) seven more or less different meth-
ods of forming a present-stem from the root, each method
being followed by a larger or smaller number of verba.
These are the "classes'* or "conjugation-claases", as laid
down by the native Hindu grammarians. They are ar-
ranged by the latter in a certain wholly artificial and un-
systematic order (the ground of which has never been dis-
covered); and they are wont to be designated in European
works according to this order, or else, after Hindu example,
by the root standing at the head of each class in the Hindu
lists. A different arrangement and nomenclature will be
followed here, namely as below — the classes being divided
(as is usual in European grammars) into two more general
classes or conjugations, distinguished &om one another by
wider differences than those which separate the special

608. The classes of the First or HON-a-CoNjoGATiON
re as follows:

I. The root-class [second class, or ad-class, of the
Hindu grammarians) ; its present-stem is coincident with
the root itself; thus, af ad eat; ^ i go; f^IH Ks sit; UT
y5 go ; fi:^ dvif hate ; 3^ dnh mHi.

II. The reduplicating class [third or hu-class);
the root is reduplicated to form the present-stem: thus,
^^ juhu from y^ hu sacrifice; ^^ da6& from y^ dft
ffive; f^ bibhr &om yij bhr bear.

III. The nasal class (seventh or radli-class) ; a
nasal, extended to the syllable 'I na in strong forma, is
inserted before the final consonant of the root: thus,
"^^ rundli (or "^HR ruQadh) &om y^ radh ohstrucl;
g^ yufij (or n^ ynnaj) &om vTOf yuj Join.

uiaii.zecy Google

229 CONJDOATION-CLABSKB. [—606

IV. a. The nu-olass (fifth oi bu-oIius]; the syllable
f nu is added to the root: thus, TR budu from yQ su
press out; ^ffS Spnu &om yWI &p obtain.

b. A ret; small numbei (only half-a-dozen) of roots
ending already in ^ n, and also one very common and
quite iiregulaily inflected root not so ending ^ kf make),
add 3 u alone to foim the piesent-stem. This is the
eighth or tan-olass of the Hindu grammarians; it may
he best ranked by us as a sub-olass, the u-olass: thna,
ag tanu &om yrJ^ tan stretch.

y. The nft-olass (ninth or krl-class); the syllable
^ nB (or, in weak forms, Rt nl) is added to the root ;
thus, ^fttnr krli^B (or ^hft krlvl) from yuft tel Jwy;
WJl BtabhnB (or frlHt stabhni) &om yTt^ Btabb estab-
lish.

eOi. These classes have in common, as their most found-
amental charaoteristic, a shift of accent: the tone being
now upon the ending, and now upon the root ot the class-
sign. Along with this goes a variation in the stem itself,
which has a stronger or fuller form when the acoent rests
upon it, and a weaker or briefer form when the accent is
on the ending: these forms ate to be distinguished as the
strong stem and the weak stem respectively (in part, both
have been given above). The classes also form their opta-
tive active, their 2d sing, imperative, theii 3d pi. middle,
and their middle participle, in a difl'erent manner &om
the others.

605. In the classes of the Sbcobd or a-CoirjuaATioi*,
the present-stem ends in a, and the accent has a fixed
place, remaining always upon the same syllable of the
stem, and never shifted to the endings. Also, the optative,
the 2d sing, impv., the 3d pi. middle, and the middle

ioy Google

606—] IX. Pbesbnt-svsteil 230

paitioiple, are (as just stated] unlike those of the oUiez

noQJu^ation.

606. The classei of this oonjugation are as follows:

TI. The a-olass, oi unaccented a-class (first oi
bhn-class); the added claas-sign is a simply; and the
root, which has the accent, is (if capable of it] strength-
ened by gu;^ throughout: thus, H^ bhiva from yHf bhtl
he; •RT n&ys, &om y^ nl lead; ^f^ b6dha from y^
badh wai«; ^ vftda &om y^ Tad tpeak.

yn. The d-olass, or accented a-olass (sixth ot
tud-olass) ; the added claas-sigu is a, as in the preceding
class; but it has the accent, and the unaccented root
remains unstrengthened : thus, ^ tudi from y^^ tnd
thrust; ^ s^ji firom yTn a^j let loose; ^ suvi &om
y^ sfl give birth.

VIII. The ya-class (fourth or div-class); y» is
added to the root, which has the accent: thus, ^t°lX
dirya iiom y1^ div (more properly ^cf dlv: see 766)
plat/; R^ n&hya from y^ nah bind; "^^ knldhya
from y^i^ kmdh be angry.

IX. The passive conjugation is also properly a
present-system only, having a class-sign which is not
extended into the other systems; though it differs mark-
edly &om the remaining classes in having a specific
meaning, and in being formable in the middle voice
from all transitive verbs. Its inflection may therefore
best be treated next to that of the ya-class, with which
it is most nearly connected, difiisring from it as the
i-class from the a-class. It forms its stem, namely, by
adding an accented yd to the root: thus, ^PS adyi from
yVp^ ad eat; "^E? mdhTi from y^ rudh ohstrvet;
^^JS bndhyd &om 1'^^ budh ieake ; H^ tadyi from
yH^ tad thrust.

,t,zec.y Google

231 GOMJUQATIOlI-OLAaaES. [—81 1

607. The Hindu grftUDurians reckon t, tenth clau ot onr-clua,
having » clus^ign &r« added to a etren^hened root (tbos, oor&ya
firom yonr), and na inflection like that of the other n-stema. Since,
however, this Stem is not limited to the preaent-atem, bnt extenda
alao into the rest of the ooqjngfttion — while it also has to a great
extent a causative value, and may be formed in that valae firom a
large inmber of roots -- it will be beat treated in full along with
the derivative oonjngatloiis (obap. XIV., 1041 ff.)-

608. A small number of roots add in the present-system a oh,
or Bubatitnte a oh for their final consonant, and form a stem ending
In oha or ebk, which is then inflected like any a-etem. This Is
historioalty, doubtless, a true olaas^ign, analogooa with the rest; bnt
the verbs showing it are so few, and in formation so irregular, that
they are not well to be pat together into a class, bnt may best be
treated as special oases falling nnder the other classes.

a. Roott addiDg oh ua f ind yn, whlnb mske tlie st«mB rooh& and
y&ooba.

b. Roota inliititiitlng oh for thetr floil uo If, Tiq (ot van thint),
gam, yam, vhloh make the atemi iochi, nooh&, g&ooha, y&ooha.

O. Of the (o-ullfld root* endiog In oh, seTenl ue more or leii
desdy atami, whoie nta bw been extended from tlia preaent te othei ayatenu
of tenaea,

608. Boota are not vholly limited, even In the liter Ungnage, to
one mode of (ormitlon ot their pieaent-item, but ub aometlmes reckoned
at bolonglng to two oi more dlffnent conjngation-etiaaea. And aueh yariet;
of fonnatlon is etpecially fMqaent In the Teda, being exhibited by a
ooDtiderable proportion of the roots there oecQTring; already In the Biihmanaa,
howeiBi, a conditlan Is leached nearly agreeing In this respect with the
olsMlcal langnage. The different present- formadDns sometlmee have diOei-
ence) of meaning; yet not more Important ones than »re often found belong-
ing to the aame foimatloD, nor of a kind to (how olearly a diffeienos of
vftlne as otigtoilly belonging to the sepante elatsea of preeents. If anyflilog
of this kind ia to be eittblUhed, it must be from the derivative eoujngatlooi,
whieh ue sepanted by no Aied line horn the present-iyftems.

610. We take up now the different classes, in the order in which
tbey have been arranged above, to describe more la detail, and with
llluetrstion, the formatioo of their present-stems, and to notice the
inegutarities belonging under each class.

I. Root-oUss (second, ad-olau).

611. In this claw there is no olaas-aign; the root itself
is aln> jaesent-vtem, oad to it ate added dizeotly the pei-

ioy Google

flll— ] IX. PSE18BNT-eS8TBH. 232

eonal endings — but combined in subjunctive and optative
with the respective mode-aigns; and in the impeiCect. the
augment is prefixed to the loot.

R. The accented eadlo^ (fiSS) regnlulj take the Kocent — except
in the imperfect, where it falta on the augment — and before tbem
the root remaina unchanged; before the nnacceated endings, the root
takes the gufa-Btrengthening.

b. It ia only In the fltst three oluBei thiit the endings eome Imme-
diately In contact with a llnal conBOnant of the root, and tliaC the mlea for
conaonant combination have to be noted and applied. In these ctiaaBB, then,
additional patadigmi will be gl<en, to lllustiate the modei of combination.

1. Preaent IndioatiTe.
612. The endings aie the piimaiy (with ^g^ ^te in 3d
pi. mid.), added to the baie lOot. The root takes the accent,
and has gui^, if capable of it, in the thiee persons sing. act.
Examples of inflection: a. active, root ^ i yo;
strong form of rootr-stem, ^ 4; weak form, ^ i; middle, root
Rs tit, stem Sb (irregularly accented throughout: 628).
aetlTe. middle.

1 ^ ^=IH ^^^ 51^ ?ITtJf% ^1FT%

Ami iv&s im&B ose asvahe asnuthe

69I lth&8 itliA asae aaUhe addhve

3 ^ ^fTlT^ 11% 5n^ MIHIr? SIHFT

6tl It^ yfcnti Ute i^te Jaate

b> root dvi; hate: strong atem-foru), dv6q; veak, dvlq. For
rules of combination for the final ;, see 226.

1 dv^fmi dvl^v&B dvlfinds dvi;6 dvi^viihe dvl^m&he
3 dv^kql dvi;tIi&B dvlfthi dvlkfg dvlq^Uia dvi^^vd
s dvd^ti dviqt^a dvifinti dvi^t^ dvi^^te dvif&te

o. root duh milk: strong stem-form, ddh; weak, dah. For rotes
of combination for the final h, and for tbe conversion of the initial
to dh, see 2B2a. 1B6. 160.

i d6hiiil duhT&B duhm&B dubd duh.v&he dutamUie

3 dh6)c9i dugdta&B dugdhi dlra^^ dnl^the dhiigdliv6
3 d6sdhi dogdb&B duh&nti dngdlii dnh^ dnh&ta

ioy Google

233 HOOT-OLASS (HBOOND, ftd-OLASS). [—016

d. root lib Uek; strong Btem, lih; we&k, lib. For roles of
combinatioD of the final b, see SBS b.

1 lAhmi liiiv&B litun&e; HhA llbT&be llbmUie

1 Itefi U^b&a 114b& ' Ukf6 lib^tbe liijbTg
a U^bl U^b&fl llb&ati U^hi llhite lib&te

61S> Exunples of the 3d (tog. mid, colnddeDt in form vith tbe Ist
■Ing. are not tn« In the oldsi langaiige (both T. and B.) ; the m09t fteqaent
eztmplei ue fffl, dub^, vldi, Q&ye; moTe Bpoialie ue dU, brave, bav6.
To tha of the 2d pi. Is added na In stta&na, p£thin&, yBtb4na.
The iriegnlu aceent of the 3d pi. mid. Is found in RV. In rlbatd, dnbat^.
Eianplei of the tame peiton In re and rate also oocnr: thus (beeidea
those mentioned beloir, 628^0, 63S), vldr^, and, ultti auxiliary fovel,
Arbire (nnleit theas tie to be lanlied, rather, at peifeot focma vithont
ndnplleatlon: 780 b).

2. Freeent SubjnnotlTe.

614, Snbjanctire fonns of this clua are not untwmmon in the
older language, and ne&rif all tbose which the formation anywhere
admits are quotable, from Veda or from Brihmana. A complete
paradigm, accordingly, is f^ven below, with the few forms not
actnally quotable for this elaes enclosed In brackets. We may take
as models (as above), for the active the root 1 go, and for the middle
the root Sa ait, from both of which numerous forms are met with
(although neither for these nor foi any others can the whole aeries
be fonnd in actual use)-

a. The mode-stems are 4ya (6 + a) and £aa (ia-f-a) respectively.
setlTe. middle.

.g:f 4^tb« *^tba { J- [^.tbei f^:2

\i^tit »'***■ "i"^ l&jfttai I aatotai

615> The KT. has no middle foime in Si except those of the flnt
penon. The Ist sing. act. in ft oecon only in KY., in ayS, bravK,
otAvK. The 2d and 3d sing. act. with primary endings are Teiy unnsail
In the BAbmanas. Forms Irregalaily made with long ft, like those bom
pTMODt^stems in a, are not nn In AT. andB. : thns, arfts, e^it, iyftn;
&«ftt, br4vBt; bravfttbaa; asfttba, ay&tbA. brav&tba, baastha;
&dftn; dobftn. Of middle forms with secondary endings are found h&nailta,
3d pi., and iQftta, 3d slog, (attei mi prohibltlTs], which is an Isolated
example. The only dnal person in tlte is br&vfilte.

ii.zecy Google

IX. Prbsbkt-btbtbm.

3. FrsBent Optative.

616. The perBooal endinga combined with the mode-
signs of this mode (7T 7ft in act., ^ I in mid.) have been
given in full above (866). The stem-fonn is the unaccented
and unstrengthened toot.

utlvB. mIddlB.

1 ^UTR ^J\^ ^UIR MIHly MIHleji^' WH^tf^

iyom lyava Ijr^a istya iaiTabl ^matal

s ^DTT^ 5mrT\ ^HTfT MrahJTC|^ MwluiBim yiHluH^

ijt& iyittaa iyittt italthAs asIrfttliKm aaidbvam

lyjt Irit&m ly^ taitA ieHyitSia ieiinui

a. Id the same manner, from ydvif, dvi^jim and dviqiyi; from
ydxih, dubylCm and diilil7&; from yUh, lili;£m and lUuy4. Th«
infleotian is so regular that the example above given is enougb, with
the addition of dvlf^i, to show the nonnal accentuation in the
middle: thus, sing. dviqlyA, dviqlth^. dvli}It&; da. dTiflv&hl,
dvlQlytoiSin, dvlqlyitsm; pi. dvlfim&hl, dvl^dliT&m, dvi^ErJtn.

b. The RT. hu ODce tana in 3d pi. act. (In syBtMia).

4. Present Imperative.

617. The impeiative adds, in second and third peisons,
its own endings [with yHH atftm in 3d pi. mid.) directly
to the loot-stem. The stem is accented and strengthened
in 3d sing, act.; elsewhere, the accent is on the ending
and the loot remains unchanged. The first persons, so called,
of the later language are &om the old subjunctive, and
have its strengthened stem and accent; they are repeated
here from where they were given above (614 a). In the 2d
sing, act., the ending is regularly (as in the two following
classes) iv dM if the root end with a consonant, and i^ bl
if it end with a vowel. As examples we take the toots
already used for the purpose.

ioy Google

ad

lUm

Ittm

3& Boot-class (second, ad-oLASs}. [—619

a. Thus, from the roots ^ i and ^STH &b:

letiTt. middle.

*(UfiH ?niR ?raT7 ^ tllHIsi^ MIHTn%

Ar&ni &T&Ta ArKma is&l is&v&bSl ivKmahU

lt4 isBva £astlism ^dlivun

yjmtu itatftm itafttfim UsaULm

b. From the roots dvlf sod dnh i.ai llh:

I dvifft^ dT^f Rta dv^Bmft dv6f Si dvdf (iTahU dTdf&mabU

1 dvl^^ dTlftim dTi4t& dvlkfT& dvl^ltthSm dTl44bvim

3 dviftn dTi;(jEm dvlfintu dvlttliim dvifitBm dTifitSm

1 d6hKnl d6hSva d6h&ma dbhU d6hSvahU d6hSmfthfil

1 diigdhl dagdh&in dogdliA dhiihfv& duIiithBm dtmgdhT&m
S d6(dlin dugdliim doliinta dngdliAm doliltuuii da2i4t(Un.

i lUbMni lih&v& l^ibBma UhU ItiUvahU libSnutb&l

2 n^iti It<pi4m U^hk Ilk9v4 lltiithSia lii^vim

3 Id^liu H^liium UMnta ll^ikim UlLat&m libit Km

618. The 2d ling. >ct ending tKt li t«niid in tbe oldei lungnige tn
> few T«ibB ot thia oliu: namelr, vltttt, rttftt, brfltit, hatSt, yUBt,
■tntfttt Id 3d alag. mid., two ot three ^erbs baie In the older linguege
the sadtug Km: thni, dnlLim (only BV. cue), Tldfim, qt^Sm; and In
9d pi. mid. AV. hu dnlurjni and dohmtAm. Tlie uie of tana tai ta
In 2d pi. aet. 1b qnita frequent In tlie Veda; thni, Itana, y&t4na, attana,
etc. And in Btota, ita 6tana, bravltana, QSst&na, hantana, ve haTe
exunplM In th« aamc pgtiod of a ttrong (and accented) stem.

6. Freaeiit Fartioiple,

619. a. The active paitioiple has the ending ^1? &nt
(veak stem-fonn CIrT at) added to the uaattengthened lOot.
Mechanically, it may be foimed &om the 3d pi. by dropping
die final ^ i. Thus, foi the veibe inflected above, the active
participles are n? y&nt, ^^^T duh&nt, i^NH dvlt^t, i^I^tT
Uhint, The feminine stem ends usually in 5fft ati: thus,
Hfft yati, i«(.d1 duhati, \i,nS dvi^ti, fe^fft llhati: but.
from loots in &, in En# BntI oi SHrft Bti (449 gl

Dgil.zecy Google

eie— ] IX. PRHSENT-SYflTEH. 236

b. The middle paitioiple has the ending ?H Kn^, added
to the imstrengtheiied root: thus, ^ITRly^ni, T^H duhSni,
fiMHn dvij^d, fe?^H lihSni.

o. The root aa forms the anomalooi and isolated ittina (in BY.
alBO laSn&l.

d. But a number of these participles in the older lanpnage have
a double accent, either on the ending or on the radical syllable:
thus, l9fiiiA and iqRna, obSnA and 6hULa, dnli&iiii and duliSna (also
dnghiaa), rUift^A and tih&^a, vldSni and vidina, sa-ritni and
BuvSna, BtuT&n& and staTftnii and at&VBna — the last baring in part
also a strong form of the root.

e. Imperfect.

620. This tense adds the secondary endings to the root
as iQCteased by ptefixion of the augment. The root has the
gui^s-stiengthening (if capable of it) in the three persons of
the sittgulai active, although the accent is always upon the
augment. Examples of inflection are:

a. From the roots ^ 1 and ^n^ Kb :

aetlTe. middle.

1 STTTH^ "^ "^ arfti cnt^f^ Miwf^

Ityam &{va sfma itsl favabl itsmabl

tie ftftam &{U isQiBfl as&Ui&m addbvam

nit slt&m ayan iatat asKtam asata

b. From the roots dvi^ and duh and llh;

1 idva^am Advi^va AdTl^ma &dvl;l &dTi;vaIil &dvlqmahl
1 &dvet 4dvl;tam dd-visfa AdvifthSs &dvi;fitham advl^^vam
s 4dv»t &dvl9(&m iidvifan Advi^fa Advlf&t&m idvl^ata
1 Adobam Uutava &dubma Adohi dduhvahi Adnhmahl

1 &dbok idugdbam idugdlia &dugdhfta AdubfithSm AdhofcdliTam
3 &dh<dc &dngdhKm &duhaii &dusdba Unhttfim Adnlista
1 Uetiam Uibva Uihma Uihi AlihTahl AiihmnW

1 aiet Ui^liam Ul^a ill^bfia aUh&tbBm ili^hvam

3 Uei au^ftm Uihan ail^ba ililiKtSm ilihata

621. a. Roots ending in a may in the later langoage optionally
take UB instead of an in 3d pi. act (the s being lost before it); and

Digil.zecy Google

237 Boot-class (second, ad-cLAss). [— flSfi

in the older they alwaja do so: thus, kyan from yji, &pUB from
yp& protect, (ibhuB from ybh&. The ssme ending is also allowed
and met with In the case of a few roots ending in coDsonsnts: namelf
vid know, oakf, dvif, duh, inrJ- RV. has atvifiiB.

b. The ending tana, 2d pi. scL, 1b found in the Teda In iyBtana,
isastaiiB, filtans, ^bravitoiui. A rtrong ilem H leeo in the lit pi.
homa, and tbe 2d pi. abravlta ind Aliravltana.

o. To Mve tbe ehsTMteristia endings In 2d and 3d sing, act,, the root
ad inaerti a: thus, idaa, iAati the root as Inserts i: thtu, jisia, ttSX
(see below, SSd); compare also 031-4.

628. The use of Iha peieona of thii tenae, withonl ingment, in the
older liDgaege. ^^u been noticed tboye (687). Aagmentle«B imperfect* of
thii clui are rather ancommoD In the Veda; thus, b&O, t^ 2d aing.;
ban, vet, stftut, d&n (?), 3d sing.; bruvaa, dtUtuB, cakfus, 3d pi.;
vasta, Bilta, 3d sing. mid.

ea3. The first or root-form af aoriet is idenlieal in its formation with
this imperfect: see below, 8S9fr.

624. In the Teda (hot hardly outside of the RV.) are found certain
2d ling, farms, having an imperative tsIdb, made by adding the ending si
to the (accented and strengthened) root. In part, they aie the only lool-forms
belonging to theiaota from which they come: (hue, J68i (for J6;9i,^m yju^),
dh&kfl, p&r^l (ypr pas'), praai, bhak^l, ratal, o&tal, ho^; but the
majority of them hue foiroa (one or more) of a loot-preseat, or sometimes
of a rool-aarlst, beside tbem: thus, k;6;i (ykql rule), J6fi, d&T;l, nakfl
(ynaq attain), ak^i, m&tsl, mftsi (y'mfi measure), y&k;l, y&disl, ySSi,
76tsi, raai, v&kqi (/vah), t^;!, froqi, aakffl. Their formal oharicter
la eomewbac disputed ; bnt they ire probably indicative peraona of tbe root-
class, used impetatiiely.

6SS. Forms of this class are made from nearly 150 roots, either
io the earlier language, or in tbe later, or in both: namely, from
about 50 through the whole life of the language, from 60 in the older
period (of Veda, Brafamana, and Sutra) alone, and from a few (about IIJ)
in the later period (epic and classical] only*. Not a few of these
roots, however, show only sporadic root-forma, beside a more usual
coDJugatiOD of some other oIhss; not is it in all cases possible to
separate clearly root-present from root-aorist forms.

a. Many roots of this class, as of the other classes of the first
conjugation, show transfers to tbe second or a-conjngation, forming
a conjugation-stem by adding a to their strong or weak stem, or

* Soch statements of nnmbete, with regard to Ibe varions parti of the
system of conjugation, are in all cases taken from Ihe author's Supplement
to tiiia grammar, entitled "Kaota, VoTb-Formi, and Primary DerlvatlTet of
the Sanikrit Language", where Kata of roots, and details m to forms etc.,
are alio given.

i, Google

636—] IX. PaBsanT-srsTBH. 238

even to both: thus, from |^m|j, both m&ijft (027) and mfjft. Snob
tansfers are met with otod Id the oldest Ungoage; but they iiBOally
become more frequent later, often esUblishing a new mode of present
infleotioo by the aide of, or in aubstitation for, the earlier mode.

b. A nnmbei of roots offer irregnlaritiea of inflection; these are,
in the main, pointed out In the following paragrapha

Irregularities of the Boot-ola&a.

630. Tbe roots of the ctasa ending in a have in their strong
forms tbe v^ddhl instead of the gima-streagthening before an ending
beginning with a consonant; thus, from yata, atfiiimi, &atsnt, and
the like: but Aatavtun, st&Tftnl, etc.

a. Root* found to exbibit thie pecQlUrlt; in •ctaal nae uc kq^U, yn
unite, BU (or aft) impel, eku, atn, ana (these in the Birllet Ungoage),
na, ra, and hnn. RV, hu ones Btoql and anSvan. Comp&re alio 638.

627. Tbe root mji also baa the TTddhl-Towel in its atrong
forms: thus, mlt^fml, iim&rjain, 4m&rt (160b); and the same streng-
thening is said to be allowed in weak forms before endings beginning
with a vowel: thus, mSiJantn, amKrJao; but the only quotable case
is m&^ta (LCS)- Forms from a-stems begin to appear already
in AV.

a. In the otb«r Unse-Bystems, also, and in derlTation, tufj shows oftan
the TTddbi Inatead of the gnna-itrengtheniug.

628. A number of roots accent the radical syllable throughout,
both in strong and in weak forms: thus, all those beginning with a
long vowel, fia, i^ Ir, li^; and also oak;, tak;, tr&, niiiB, tob cloth*,
qljlji 9I tie, and afi. All these, except takf and trS (and trll also in
the Vedic forms), are ordinarily conjugated in middle voice only.
Forms with the same irregular accent occur now and then in the Veda
from other verbs: thus, m&tsva, y&k^vtt, B&kova, sik^va, fdbat.
Middle participles so accented have been noticed above (616 d).

629. Of the roota mentioned in the laat paragraph, ^ lie baa
the gu^a-strengthening throughout: thus, 9&7«i f ^9e< f^v^n, g&y&na,
and so on. Other irregularities in its inflection (in part already noticed)
are the 3d pi. persons q^rate (AV. etc. have also qAto), Qdratim,
itforata (RV. has also Aqersn), the 3d sing, prea q&;e (R.) and impT.
^AySxa. The isolated active form A^ayat is common in the older
language; other a-forms, active and middle, occur later.

0SO. or the same roots, i^ and 19 Instrt ■ nnion-TOvel i before
certala endings: thus, 19!^, iQldhve, i^^va (these three being the only
forms noted in the older langnage); but RV, has ikfe beside ifiqe; the
9tU. has once I^lte for i^\e. The 3d pi. Iqlre (on account of Its aooent)
ti also apparently present rather than perfect Tbe MS. btt ones ths 3d ilnf.
Impf. &i9a (like adutaa: 6Sft).

ioy Google

239 EOOT-OLABS (SKOOND, Bd-«LAfiS). [—680

681. The roots rud weep, Bvap akep, an breathe, and qvaa hlour
insert a onion-TOwel i before all the endingB begioDing with a con-
■onsnt, except the b and t of 2d and 3d sing, impf, where they Insert
Instead either a or I: thas, Bv&piml, ^Aeiql, Juiltl, and anat or
inlt. And in the other fornB, tbe last three are allowed to aecoDt
either root or ending: thus, sT&pantu and ^vAeantu (AV-)t or
Brapiutu etc. The AV. huB aviptu instead of BV&pltn.

a. In ths older Ungnage, yvaia inikea the same Inscrtlona: thug,
vamiti, avanut; tiid othei cues occasionaily <hcqt: thns, Jfcui^Ta, vasifva
(yvM cloiht'), 9natliUii, aUnihi (»11 RV.], yamiti (JB.), goolnii (MBh.).
On the other hand, y'an early makes forma from an a-item: tbns, &aatl
(AV.); pple inant (^B.); opt. anet (AB.)-

932. The root bru tpeak, eaii (of very frequent use) takes the
union-Towel I after the root when strengthened, before the initial
consonant of an ending: thns, br&vimi, brkVi^, br^viti, ibrayis,
&bravlt; bnt brfim&a, briiy£m, &bravam, &bmvaa, etc. Special
occasional Irregularities are bruml, bravlhl, abruTam, abrQvan,
brajr&t, and sporadic forms irom an a-stem. The eubj. dual br&v&ite
has been noticed above (61B); also tbe strong forms abravita,
ftbravitana {631 a).

633. Some of the roots in u are allowed to be inaecCed lite bru;
namely, ka, tu, ru, and atu; and an occasional instance Is met wfth of
a form so made (in the older language, only tavitl noted; in the Jatsi,
only Btavimi, once).

634. The root am (hardly found in the later Ungnage) takes I ai
nniou-vowel; thus, amlfl (RV,), amltl and Smlt and amifva (TS.). From
y^am occur ^audgva (VS.; TS. qami^va) and ^amldhTam (TB, etc.).

63&. The irregularities of i/^Ub in the older language have been
already in part noted: tbe 3d pi, Indlc. mid. dnbatd, dotard, and dutarita;
3d sing. Impr. duh^m, pi. duhram and duhrat&m; impf. act. 3d sing,
idotaat (which is found also in the later langoage), 3d pi. aduhran
(bealde iidutasui and duhiis]; the mid. pple dugli&ika; and (quite un-
exampled elaewheie] the opt. furms dubly&t and diibiy&ii (RV. only).
The MS, has adntaa 3d sing, and adutara 3d pi. impf, mid., apparently
farmed to correapond to the pree. dntae (613) and dnhre as adugdtaa and
adnliata correspond to dogdtae and duhate: compare fttga (630), related
in like manuer to the 3d sing. l<je.

Some of the roots of this class are abbreviated or otherwise
weakened in their weak forms: thus —

686, The loot 9H as be loses its vowel in weak forme
(except where protected by combination with the augment).
Its 2d sing, indie, is i^i^ isi [instead of aaai]; its 2d sing,
impr. is 1^ edhi [iiiegulaily &om aadhi}. The inseition of

Diaii.zec.y Google

-]

IX. Pbesbmt-ststeh.

240

^ I in 2d and 3d sin^. impf. has been noticed already
above.

a. The forms of this extiemely common veib,
as follows:

:e, then,

IndiMtive.

OpUUT«

4aini

avis

amiB

Byiva

raw
.;tm.

5rfH

Bth&s

sth&

By£taiii

.yit.

Bt&a

s&ntl

B7itt

BTQB

Imper»ti*e.

Imperfect

«Hr=(

W(R

yiHH

m^

aim

AsSnl

&e&va

&«&ma

*»m

Un

jnu

^

FR

?tT

trraTri^

51FPT

arra

edh{

Btim

Btk

iBia *"

iittn

t>u

iMtU

Btltm

B&ntu

mihIhi

bum

Participle Hrl s^t (fern. T^ satl).

b. Besides the forms of the preBent-syBtem, there ie made from
this root only a perfect, Jaa etc. (800), of wholly regular inflection.

c. The Vedle tnbjnnctlie form* are the ainsl onea, made npon the
>teiD 4fl&. The; are In IVeqaent use, and appear (asat especially) eTen
in late teita where the BDbJanctiTe li almost loat. The resotntlon aUtm
etc. (apt.) Is common la Vedic Terae. Aa 2d and 3d Bing. impt. li a few
time* met with the more normal Ss (for IIb-b, as-t). Stb&na, 2d pi., wu
noted above (618).

d. Middle fotoiB from yas ate aho given 1); the grimmsrians aa allow-
ed -with certain preposltlong (vl + atl), but the; are not quotable; smohe
and ByKmahe (0 occar In the epics, bat are merely initancsa of the ordl-
narr epic coQfnslon of voicea (BS8 a). ConfuBlana of primar; and Becondaiy
endinga — namely, Bva and sma (not rare), and, on the other hand, sfftvaa
and ByBmaa — ace alao epic. A middle present indicatlre U aaid to be
componnded (in lit and 2d persona) with the ttomen egentii In tp (tar)
to form a pertphraatlo fntore In the middle voice (bat lee below, 047).
The 1st ting, indlc Is he; the rett Is In the nsual relation of middle to
active forms (in 2d pera., oe, dhve, bta, dbvam, with total loia of the
root itaelt).

ioy Google

241 BOOT-OLASS (eBCOND, ad-OLABfi]. [ — 940

687. The root has tmtt«, <&iy is treated aomewbat after the
manner of DOUD-stemB in an in deolenaioD (421): in weak forms, it
loBes its n Iwfore an initial coDBOuaQt (except m and v) of a peraonal
ending (not in the optative), and Its a before an initial vowel — and
in the latter ease its b, in contact with the n, is changed to gh (oom-
paro 40S). Thai, for example:

PreaODt Indiettlie. Imperfect

1 h&iunl hanv4B hanm&a A>i't"ai" iJianva Ahannut

1 bUal batiiiA tiath& &Iuui ihatam Uiata

3 hAntl hat&a gbntoti ihan &hatlm i«hiuui

a. Its participle is ghn&nt (fern, gtmatf). Its 2d aing. Impv. is
Jah£ (by anomaions dissimilatiOD, on the model of reduplicating
forms).

b. Middle form* from thli not ue frequent Id the Biifamanu, iui.
thoae tlut ooctti ire foimed In general iceoiding to the ume lalea: thus,
lutt*, haruoabe, glinate; ahata, aghnfttSm, agtmata (in AB., alio
ahata); ghnlta (but Ueo hanlta). Foimi rrom tranifei-stams, hana and
ghua, are met vlth ftom an eaily period.

638, The root va^ be eager Is in the weak forms regularly and
nsually contracted to uq [as Id the perfect: 704 b): thus, ugm&al
(V.: ODce apparently abbreviated in RV. to fmaai), uf&ntl; pple
nqant, n^ftnA. Middle fonoe {except the pple) do not occur; nor do
tbe weak forms of the imperfect, which are given as Au^va, Kn^tam, etc.

a. KT. has in llbe manner the participle u^Ki^ rtom the root vaa elciht.

830. The root 9&a order shows some of tbe pecnliarities of a
rednpHcated verb, laoklog (046) the n before t in all 3d persons pi.
and in the active participle. A part of Its active forms — namely,
the weak forms having endings beginning with consonants (iocluding
the optative) — are said to come from a stem with weakened vowel,
^ [as do the aoriet, 864, and some of the derivatives); bnt, except-
ing the optative ($l^&m etc, U- 8- and later), no such forms are
quotable.

a. The 3d alng. impf. Is aqftt (665 a), and the Mme form i* said
to ba allowed alio aa 2d alng. The 3d sing. Impv. la (Sdhi (with tetal
loaa of the a); utd RT. Iiaa the atrong 2d pi. gfiat&na (with auomilona
accent]; and a-farma, from ttem ffiaa, oecaalonall; oceni.

b. Tbe middle inflection Is regnlar, and the accent (apparently)
always upon the radical syllable (Qiste, qltaate, giaftna).

a. The root dSq tcorihip has in like manner (RT.) the pple diEfat
(not d&qant).

640. The doolie lO-callad root Jakf m(, laugh la an evident ledn-
plioatlon of gbaa and has rMpecHvely. It baa the abnnee of U In act.
WkitniT, Onanu, 3. »i. 10

ioy Google

640—] IX. PEBSHNT-flYBTBlI. 242

3d penoDi pi. *nd pple, and flie uicent on the root bafora lowel-eDdlngi,
which belong to radnpllutad Terba; ind It also takes the onfou'vovel 1
In the nunoei of rod etc. (abore, 631). For Its fonuB and derivatlTe*
made with nlt«i Iom of'the final dbtlant, ■•« SS3C

041. Certain other obTioaaljr rednpltcated verbs ue tre»ted b^
the native grsmmariuis as ff simple, >nd referred to this conjngstioB :
raeb are the intenatvely rednplic&ted Jigr 11090 a)> daridrfi (1024«),
and Ten (1094 a}, dldl^ etc. (676). and oaUs (677).

II. Reduplleating Class (third, ha-elaM).

642. This class forms its pieseat-Btem by prefixing a
reduplicatioa to the root.

648. a. As legards the oonsonant of the reduplication,
the geaeral rules which have already been given above (890)
are followed.

' Xi. A long vowel is shortened in the reduplicating syl-
able: thus, ^ dadS from v^ dS; f^Ht bibhl firom y^ bhi;
^ jubll from y^ htt. The vowel K r never appears in the
redapUcation, but is replaced by ^ t: thus, ^^ blbhr from
VH bby; ftq^ pipTo from jTR pto,

O. For verbi In which a and ft also are inegnlaily repreaantad In the
rednplicatlon b; 1, lee below, 660, The root vpt (V. B.) make* vavarttt
Btc; oakr&nt (RV.) is Tory donblful.

d. The only root of this class with initial vowel is j (or ar);
)t takes as redaplicatloD 1, which ii held apart irom the root by aa
interpoaed 7: thos, lyar and iyr (the ]att«r has not been found in
actual nse).

044. The present-stem of this class [as of the other
classes beloogii^ to the first or non-a-conjugation] has a
double form: a stronger form, with gunated lOot-vowel;
and a weaker form, without gnva: thus, from y^ liu, the
two forma are ^f juho and agT Juliu; from y>ft bhI, they
are ^^ bibhe and f^^ bibbl. And the rule for their use
is the same as in the other classes of this conjugation: the
strong stem is found before the unaccented endings (SS3],
and the weak stem before ihe accented.

ioy Google

RBDDPLIOATJKa CLA86 (THIBD, hn-OLABB).

[-647

040. According to all the wtalogieH of the first general ooi^a-
gatioD, we Bhonld expect to find the accent upon the root-syllable
when thU is stiengthened. That is actnallj the case, however, only
in a small minority of the roots composing the class : namely, in hu,
bbl [00 test-fonns Id the older language], hri (no test-forms found in
the older langnage), mad (veiy rare), Jan (no forms of this olass
found to occur), ol notica (in Y.), yu ttparaU (in older laogaage only),
and in bhf in the later language (in V. it goes with the minority:
but RV- has blbbArti once, and AV, twice; and this, the later
accentuation, is found also in the Brithmanas); and RV. haa once
IrArfl. In all the rest ~ aiqtareDtly, by a recent transfer — it rests
npon the reduplicating instead of npon the radical syllable. And in
both classes alike, the accent is anomalously tbrowD back upon the
rednplioation In those we>^ forms of which the ending b^ns with
a TOwel; while in the other weak forms it is upon the ending [but
compare 666 a).

a, Appaisntly (tlhe ouea iritb written ucent tie too few to detarmlne
the point Mtlifactoiil;) the middle optttiTO endinga, tya ato. (B66), ire
iMkoned thiODghoat u endings with Inttltl vowel, ind throw back the
■cc«nt npon the lednplleition.

646. The veibs of this olass lose the ^n in the 3d
pi. endings in active aa well as middle, and in the imper-
fect have 3H OS instead of ^Pf an — and before this a final
radical vowel has gOQa.

1. Present Indicative.
647. The combination of stem and endings is as in
the preceding ola««.

Examples of infleotioa: a. y^ ha sacri^e: strong
stem-form, g^ jah6; weak form, ^gr jubu (or jdba).
■edTo. middle.

^H^ gs^^iH^ |^w*i^

Jobiioi JnliavAs JulminfaT

ivhb^i iubuth&ajubuthi

^•^id sJ^HH^ 5^fii

Jidi6tl ialiat4a J^vaU

J&hve Juhuv&be Jnbnjniba
JubofA J^vfttba Jubudbvi
Jnbntd J&hvftte J^vate

Digil.zec.y Google

647—] IX. pREeEKT-BTSTEIf. 244

b. Boot H bbr l>^'"' (given with Vedic accentuation):
stion^ stem-form, fsp^" bibhar; weak, fspT blbhj (or bibbr).

> Isprfrf f^^HH^ ^^'?^ ^ ^JR^ f*WH^
bibharmi blbtiTiri« blbhrm&a blbtare bibhrv&li» bibbrm&he

bfbharql bibbptbAa blbbftbi blbb|^« btbbrftths biUiT<UiT«

3 isprfif Imhhm^ ^^ fii>^ f^aj^ fea^

bfbbartl bibhrtis bfbbratl blbhrti bfbbrtto bfbhnta
O. Tha n or hu (like that at tlie elus-ifgnt nu and a: we below,
607 a) ll mli to be omlulble before v &nil m of the endings of lit dn.
ftnd pi.: An*, Juhv&B, Jobvibe, etc.; but no Rtiah toima ue qnoUbls.

2. Preaent SubjunotlTe.

648. It Is not poeaible M ptoient to dn« & dittlnot line betweon
those Babjqiicdve fonui of the older Isngnage which ihoald be reckoned w
belonging to the pTeaent-ayitem tnd those which should be uilgned to the
peiteet — or even, In some ct«es, to the rednpllMted Mrltt uxi iotsnalTe.
Here will be noticed only those which most cleuty belong to this clsi'^i;
the mora donbtfnl rases will be treated nndei the perfact-iystem. Except
Id Dnt penons (whioh contlnne In □■« is 'HmperetlTeB'' down to the later
lingnafe), sabJuncUves from ioot» htvlDg onmlstikebly ■ redaplieated
present-systsm ate of far from frequent occairence.

648. The subjunctive mode-Btem ia formed in the saoal manner,
with the mode-sign a and cnna of the root-vowel, if this is capable
of snoh strengthening. The evidence of the few accented forma met
with indicates that the accent is laid in accordance with that of the
strong indicative forms: thoB fWim yhu, the stem wonid be Juh&va;
from ybbf. It would be bibtaara (but blbb&ra later). Before the
mode-sign, final radical & would be, In accordance with analogies
elsewhere, dropped : thus, d&da trom Vda, d&dba f^m i^dht (all the
forma aotnallf occurring would be derivable from the aeoondary roots
dad and dadbj.

eso. Inatead of giving a theoretically complete scheme of
InflectiOD, it will be better to note all the esamplea quotable from
the older language (accented when fonnd bo occurring].

a. Thus, of i(t persons, we h&ve in the actlTO JnbivSnl, blbbarii^,
dadini, dadbKni, JabUd; Johavftma, d&dbbna, J&bSmai — in the
middle, dadbftl, mlmU; dadbfivab&l; JnbavamabU, dadSmabo.
dadbuablli, Hajihgir^Ahgi .

b> Of other persons, wa hsTe with primary endings In the active
blbbavisi (with double mode-sign: 660«), d&dbatbaa, Jubavatba (do.)

ioy Google

245 BBDUPUOA-nno Class (TBntD, hn-OLASB).

and JuluTBthai in the middle, d&dhase; dAdhnte, r&rate, 6
dftdUAl;— with MconduT ending*, d&dhfla, vivafOB, JohaTat, blbharat,
yny&rat, d&dliat, dodh&nat, bsbluuMt; dadliau, yusravan, Juhavon.

S. Freaent Optative.
661. To fonn thU mode, the optative endings given
above (566a), as made up of mode-sign and peisoaal endings,
are added to the unstrengthened stem. The accent is as
already stated [646 a). The inflection is so regular that it is
unneoessaiy to give here more than the fiist persons of a
single verb: thus,

Mtlre. middle.

1 sJ^UIH^ ^^UH d^UW ^<^1U sJ^IhPj 5^ftR%
Juhnr^ Jnhnriva JabnylEma ji^vlya JAhvIvahl J^vtmahl

4. Present Imperative.
662. The endings, and the mode of tbeii combination
frith the root, have been alieady given. Id 2d sing, act.,
the ending is f% M after a vowel, but f^T dU after a con-
sonant: ^ hn, however, forms d^flT Jolindbi (apparently,
in order to avoid the recurrence of ^ h in two successive
syllables): and other examples of fv dhi after a vowel are
found in the Veda.

668. a. Example of inflection:

kotlTe. middle.

■■ ^ d. p. •■ ^-^ P-^

sJ«tNliH g^^T^ 3^PT ^^ sJiJeHel^ sj-^ojllj^

JoIi&vBnl JnhAvKva Jub&v&ma Jnli&vKl Jub&vSvahU Jaliiiv&maliU

Jnliudbl Joliut&m JobutA jQliiifv& Ji^vJtthftni Jnhudbv&m

jnbAtu Jnliutiin Jiibvatu JnliutAm JfihvfitBia j6hvatSm

b. The verbs of tbe other diThion differ here, as fa the indicative,

in tbe aoceotnation of tbeir strong forms only: namely, In all the

ioy Google

ess—]

IX. PaEBBNT-aTTEK.

346

first persona [borrowed sntaJnaotiTes), and in the 3d alng. ut: thus,
(In the oldsr Ungiuige) bibharOqi etc., bibhftrtu, bibharU etc.

664. Vedlo liragolultles of inflection an: I. tke oocwioiud vm oC
itrong foiMi In 2d penoDB : thus, yuyodbf , flQKdhi (beilde fi^Ihf) ;
ynyotam (bMlde yuratim); {yorta, dAdftts uid dHdfttuu, dj&dhftta
and d&dbStana (ne below, eSB], piputona, Juli6ta ^nd jnli6t(ULB,
mrota Mid ymrotUUi MUftBira (066); S. the nge of dlii iiut«*d of
bi *ttu > Towel (only In the two iBittncei Jnit qnoted)) 3. Uie endlag
tana In 2d pi. act', nunelf, baddes those Joit glran, In Jigitana,
dbattaan, mamAttana, vivaktana, dldlgtaoa, blbhltana, Jojnffuut.
Johatana, vav^-ltana: the caM* aM proportienall; mDch more naauMV*
Id tbla than in anjother olaw;- 1. the ending tfit In 2d (lug. act. In
datCAt, dhatttt, plpptst, JabltU.

8. Freaent Fartloiple.

686. As elsewhere, the active particdple-atem may be
maie mechuiioally £tom the 3d pi. iadio. by dtopping ^ i:
thus, sr^fT jdhvat, firSrT bfbhrat. In inflection, it has no
distinction of strong and weak forms (444). The feminine
stem ends in ^(^ atl. The middle paitioiples are r^olarly
made : thus, ^tJH JahrSna, (m^IUI bibhrSi^.

a. RV. ihom u Inefnlat aooent in plpftoi (VpS drtnA).

6. Imperfeot.

686. As already pointed oat, the 3d pi. act. of this
olass takes the ending 3^ns, and a final radical vowel has
gniM» before it. The strong fonns ate, as in present indio-
ative, the three singular active persons.

687. Examples of iafleotion:

a«ttre. middle.

UnbaTam ijuhnva djohuma
AJnlLOB ^ohutam Uahuta
Uubot i^J&lintBni &}mhaTUS

UubTl ^obavabl AJabnmabl
^ubuthKa AJnbvatham J^utandtaTaai
ijuhuta AJubvAtam ijohvata

ioy Google

247 BEDDPLioATUia Ci.ua (tbibd, lin-oLASS). [— ees

a. Fiom vH bbr, the 2d and 3d aing. act. are of^HT
ibibbar (foi ftbibbar-6 and abibhar-t) — and so in all other
casea vheie the strong atem ends in a consonant. The 3d
pi. aoi. is QHH'^H ibibbarus ; and other like oases are
ibibhayna, aoikayiu, amifaTiiB.

b. In H8., ODce, ablbhmfl li donbtlM* i filie iMdln;.

688. The DMul Yadto InegnlultlaB tn 2d pi. tct. — stiong fonui,
■nd tbe fendiiig tana — ocom In tUi WiuetlH: thoj, UadBta, idadUUa;
Uattana, J^ahatana. The BY. hu alio odm aplprata foT apip|ta
In 3d ting, mid., and aUblunui fbi ablbharoa in 3d pi. Mt BumplM
of uignantleu formi tie flQla, tIt^, jIsAt; jOdtM) 9lfna, Jitaata;
ud, with InejDlu •iiengtheiUac, mroma (AV.), TojotbMt, rnrota.

669. The roots that form their present-Btem b; redapUcatioQ are
a very imall olass, especiall; in the modem language; ther an oalj
50, all told, aDd of these only a third (16) are met with Uter. It is,
however, Tei; difficult to detenniDa the precise limits of the claas,
becaUBa of the impoesibility (referred to above, under sabjanctiTe: 648}
of alwaya distingaishing its forms from those of other redoplioating
eonjngations and parts of ooiuugationB.

a. BMldM the Impilulttei In teiue-lnO*etlon (liMd; pointed ont,
othecs m>; b« notl«ad as follovs.

Irregnlailtles of the BednpUoatlng Class.

990. Besides the roots in j or ar — nameljr, r, gbf (asnallr
written i^iar}, tp, pp, bbr, sf, bif, pfo — the following roots having
a or B as radical vowel take i instead of a in the rednpHoating
sylbble: gA go, ma meantn, mB btJtow, fB, liB remove (mid.), vac,
aao; vaq has both t and a; rS has 1 once in RT-; for stbB, pB drwk,
ghrB, ban, hi, see below (670-4),

661. Several roots of this olaas in final fi change tbe R in weak
forms to I (ooeaslonally even to i), and then drop It altogether before
endings beginning with a vowel.

a. Thli it In oloBB Ukalog; with the tieatment of the vowel of the
elus-ilgii of the nB-oltu: below, 717.

ThMe looti ue:

661. qB nWpon, ut. mud mid.; tbtu, flqatl, ^fOnasi. ftfltal (aJw
^fSdbi: abOTe, 654), flqBto, a^iQBt, qlflte, ^{flta.

663. mB beUoto, aot., and mB mtanurt, nld. (taialj alao aoL): thnt,
BibaBtl« voimlyBt; minmia, ubuate* iunlndtat minHilt niniBtu.
KV. hai oooe mimanti 3d pL (for mlmatl).

ioy Google

604—] IX. PaBBBHT-sraTBif. 24S

604. h» remove, mld.i thm, j{liJta, Jlbldhve, J&iate; JUtlqva,
Jlluttfim; UihIU. ^Jlhat*. QB. bu JUutta&m (foi JlUthAm).

60fi. hS ^i(, Mt. (oitglTully identical with the formei), may farther
shorten the i to 1: thai, Jahftti, jaMtft. JftbitAt (AT.); jahlmas (AT.),
Jaliltu (TB.), jt»tait«m (TA.), ajahitam (T3. AB.). Id the opUttTe,
the Ttdietl Towel 1« loit altogethei; thai, jRh7Siii, jRhTiu C^T.). The
2d ling. ImpT., Mcoidlng to the stammariani, 1« JahUil or JaliUll oi
JaliSbl ; only the lint appean qnotable.

a. Farmi bom an a'Stem, Jali&, are mads foi this lOOt, and eten
deilvatlTes from a qnasi-root Jab-
SOS. r& gtot, mid.: thai, mldhTtua, ruithia [tmpf. without
angment) ; aod, with 1 In tedaplloaUon, rii^hL But AY. hat ntrWra.

a. In thoH TMbs, the aeeent la generally conitant on the redapIlEaUng
ayllable.

607. The two roota dS and dh& (tbe commonest of the dUm)
loM their Tftdioal vowel altogether in the weak forms, being shortened
to dad and dadh. In 2d sing. impv. act., they form respeotiTely
dahf and dbehL In combination with a following t or tb, the fin^
dh of dadh does not follow the special rule of combination of a
final Eonaot aspirate [becoming ddh with the t or Ol: 100], bnt —
as also before a and dliv — the more general rules of aapirata and
of enrd and sonant combination; and its lost aspiration ia thrown
back upon the Initial of the root (IBB).

608. Tbe lofleotioD of ydhs is, then, as follows:

Present Indicative.

actlTe. middle.

s. d. p. a. d. p.

1 tJAHhftnii dadliv4B <<iii^hm^i> dadhd d&dltvahe diUlunahs

1 didliSal dliatth^ dhatthA dhata^ dadh&tlia dhaddhve

3 dAdhfttl dhattiia d&dhati dliatti dadlitte d&dhate

Present Optatire.
1 dadlir&a dadtartva dadtaritma didbiya didhivahi dAdMmahl

•te. otc etc. eto. Mc. et«.

Present iMf entire.
1 didhtnl didhftva d&dh&ma d4dh&l d&dhBvabU d&dhamaJiM
S dhehl dbatt&m dliatt& dhatara dadhAtta&m dhaddbvam
s ditdhAta dliattim d&dhata dhattOm dadhfttftm dadlutsm

Imperfect.
1 &dadliKm Adadhva ibdadlwia Madhl Adadlivahi Adadbmahl
3 Adadbfta &dtaattam 4dhatta Adbattliaa &dadbathBm Adhaddlivniii
3 idadh&t idhattba &dadliiu &dtiatta fcdadbStSm Adadhata

itizecy Google

249 REDUFLI0AT1N& Clasb (THIBD, bU-OI-ASS). [—476

Putioiples: kcl. dAdhat; i

a. In th» middle (except Impf.), only those fonoi are here iceeoted
foT irMcb tbete li ■ntbority In the wcentnated tezta, u tliBie 1> dUeoiduice
between the aotDU tcoent and that which the tnalogleB of the cIub would
leid oe to expect. BT. bw ones dbitse : dadbi and dmdhitte might he
peitecta, bo fai ai the feno !■ coDoeined. BT. Mcente dndhltA once
(d4dliltft thrice] J aeTeial other teit* hsTC didblta, d&dUran, d&dlte.

b. The root dS is Inflected In precisely the ume vay, with
change everywhere of (radical) db to d.

009. The oldei language hat inegnlarltle* aa follow*: 1. the nanal
ntoDg foima in 2d pi., didhfita and AdadtaSta, d&data and idad&ta;
2. the nsiial taoa endings in the urns peraon, dhattana, d&ddtaua, ete.
(6B4, 668); S. the 3d dog. Indlo. act. dadhi (like lit ilog.); *■ the 2d
ling. impT. act. daddli£ (foi hoth dehi and dhehl). And R hai dadmi.

670. A number of roote have been traneferred from this to the
a- or bhit-claSB (below, 74B), their reduplicated root becoming a
Bteieotyped stem inflected after the manner of a-etems. Theae roota
are aa follows:

671. In all periods of the language, from the roots etlUi stand,
pB drink, and ghrS tmtU, ire made the presents t£ffPiSml, plbftml
(with irregular sonantlzing of the second p), and JigbrSml — which
then are inflected not like «"<"'«■»'. bnt like bbAvfiml, as If from
the preseDt-flteme tfqthn, pfba. jCgbra,

678. In the Tedi (eepeelally; alio later), the ledapUcatad toota dB
and dh& are lometlmai tBraed into the a-itema d&da and d&dba, or
Inflected at It roots dad and dsdb of the a-dua; and single foms of the
same character are made from other roots: thns, mlmantl (ymA btthui),
rirate (^rft givt: 8d sing. mid.].

673. In the Teda, also, ■ like secondary stesa, Jlghna, is made from
yban (with ornisslan of the radical Towel, and eonTenlon, usual in this
root, of h to gta when in oontaet with d: 687); and aone of the forms
of aaqo, from J^aae, show the same conversion to an a-stem, sa^oa.

674. In AB. (vlU. 28), a similar seoondu? form, Jisbya, U glTen to
(/hi or hft: thoB, Jighyatl. Jlghyatn.

676. A few lo-oalled roota of the first oi root-olus are the prodaots
of redapllcatloa, more or leas obilons: thus, Jak; (040), and probably
qla (bom Vfaa) and oak^ (from yk&q or a lost root kas lee). In the
Teda fs fonnd also eaqo, from ^Boe.

676. The grammarians reckon (as already notioed, 641) Bereral roots
of the most eTidently reduplicate character as simple, and belonging to the
root-class. Some of theae (JSgf, daridrft, Vtvt) are regular IntenslTO
•terns, and will be described below nnder lotensiTes (lOflOn, I024a)i
^dbl iUrs, together with Tedic didl Mat and pipl tweU, are sometimes
also clasMd aa intensiTes; bat they haie not the proper rednplieatlon of

itizecy Google

070—] IX. Prmbut-ststbii. 260

•Doh, uid in*y paihapE 1w 'bett noticed hen, m ndopllcUed pMMmt-ttems
witli inesQlulf long ledupllcktlag voweL

a. Of piea. Indtc aecnn In the otdsi Iingnt^e onlr ^dyatl, S4 pi.,
wlUi the pptoB didyat ind didliyat, ind mid. dlil7«i dldli7«, dldli-
yKtbSm, vltli tba pplei dfdy&ao, didhrKoat ptprKna. Xbe nibj. lUnis
are did&ya, dldhi^ra, pip&ya, and tram thsm us made fOrma wltb both
primary (bom did&ya] and aeeondary eadlngi (and the Irrafnlatly aeoented
didyat and didijat and didliayaa). Ko opt. oocori. In impv. ve haT*
iUdih£ (and dldlh£) and pipihl, and ptpyatatn, pipyaUba, plpyata.
In impf., adidea and plpeoi &dldet and &didhat and aplpct (with
angmentlMi fonni), aplp«ma (uttli ttiODg form of root), and adldliariu
and (Inegalu) aplpyan.

b. A lew fonni from all the three show tranifei to an a-lnSeedon:
thni, dldliaya and plpaya (Impi.), Aplpa^at, etc

0. BlmtUt forms from yml btUoto ate amlmat and mlmvat.

077. The item oakBs ehme (sometimBi oiJcfif) it also regarded by
the grammailaQB as a root, and inpplled u ineh with teneea oatdde the
preeent-syttem — whlob, however, hardly occur In genaine n«e. It ie not
known In the older langnige.

678. The root bliaa chea loMi Iti radical >owel In weak forma,
taking the form bape: thus, b&bhastl, bat b&psaU (3d pi.), b&psat
(ppla). Fat babdliam, *ee 833 f.

070. The root bU fmr U allowed by the gtammaiUni to ehorton
ii« vowel in weak forms: thus, blbt^maa or bibhlmaat btbUrim ot
bibhiTftmt; and blbhlySt etc. are met with in the later language.

06O. Forme of this cdaea (Tom )/Jan givt hiriA, with added i — thai,
JaJtU^e, J^J&ldliva — ue giisn by the grammailana, bnt have neToi been
foaad In Die.

081. The tooti ei and Oit have In the Veda rerenion of o to k in
the toot-eyllable after the rednpllcatton: thai, ollt^l, olkithe (anomalooa,
for eUETttha), oikltim. aoikat, ofkyat (pple); oiUddlii.

681. The root vyaa hat 1 in the rednpllcation (from the y), and !■
coDbaoted to rlo Id weak forme: thna, vlvlktAa, dtvlvlkt&iii. So the
root tavar (If it> forme are to be reckoned here) hu a in rednpUoatlon,
and contraeti to bar: thai, JnHflrthfia.

II). Natal Class (seventh, rodb-class).
683. The loots of thu olans al] end in oonsonants. And
theit class-sign is a naaal preceding the final consonant: in
the weak forms, a obmI simply, adapted in chaiacter to the
consonant ; but in the strong foims expanded to the syllable
1 nd, which has the accent.

ioy Google

2!»1 Kas&i. Class (bevhnth, radb-cLAiis). [— aS6

a. In B bw of the veibt of thi clut, the qh*1 aitendi tlw Into
other ttnie ttamt: they ue afij, bhftlU, hlAa: hc belov, 004.

1. Freeent Indioatlve.
684. Examples of inflection: a. the loot ^ 7uJ
join: strong stem-fotm, n^yunij; weak, Q^ ynAj-

Foi the nlM of oomblnition of Bn»l J, lee S19.

MdTB. middle,

i. d. p. I. d. r-

> gniiM 3^^ 3^^ 3^ u^$ ^^

jmiijmi jrafijv&s ynfiJm&B mllji yaajvAhe ynltjinUu
ytm&kfl ynfiktli&e yuakthi yuOkfA ynfUtthe yuAgdlivi

3 gnfrti g^^ gsfn gi^ g^ar^ ^^

Ttmiiktl ynaktis mlUbiti ynflkM TnfiJJk* yuiU&t*

b. the root "^U mdh obstruct; bases pnu roi^dta and
"^ftT rondh.

For the rales of combliutloii of final dh, see IBS, 160.
i ■^tlrfBT "pH^.^ ^-Mffj^ "^ t^y^ (i-W)^

ni9&dlimi randhv&o randhmJui randlid mmULvilie mndlim&lw

Tu^ittl raxkddbim moddbi runtsA mndhiJthw ronddbT^

3 "^mfe "5*?^ "^=3% '^'^ ^)*yiS t»-y{)

mj^Jtddhl mnddliAa nuiiUt&ntl randdhi nutdliiEta rtuidli&t«
o. Instead of rnBkthaa, ynficdhvo, and the like (bera and in

the tmpT- and Impf.), It is allowed and more nanal (SSI) to write

rnAthas, Tiifldhve, etc.; and, in like manner, rondhns, rondbe, for

mnddhast mnddlwi aad so in other like cases.

606. Vedlo Inegsluidet of InBeotloD *re: 1. the ordlnuy nte of ■

3d tins. mid. like the lit ling., u TT&]e; 2. the eccent on ti of 3d pi,

mid. In alUati, indhati. bhiifijat&

a. Tnnoai^l, In BhP., It doabtloM & felte re»dtng.

2, Present SubJnnotlTa.
686. The stem Is made, as nsnal, by adding a to the strong
present'^tem: Uiiis, jrmija, ra^^idba. Below aie given as if made

ioy Google

eSfl — ] IX. PKB8MIIT-8T&TUL 252

froDi KT^f ftU the forau for which esimplM hara been itot«d u
actiwllj occuriog In the older Unpiage.

■ctiTe. middle.

1 ynniijaiil ToniyBTa ynn^Sma jnnajfil yuni^jbiuliSl

1 ynniJttB ynnajKdlivli

3 Ttuijat ynnijatu TOnAltui ynnijata

687. The KT. hw once -*)»»«, irUeh 1* Knomaloaa u being made
from the weak teow-rtem. Forma with doable mode-aign ue met -with:
thai, tniAhtn (AY.), ridhaiTit &nd ywuO&n KB.]; and the only
qoeuhla example ot 3d dn. *et. (betidaa oBJatia) Is hlnABltan ((B.).
(IB. has alio hltUtoSvaa u lit dn. act: an elaewhsie nneiampled Rmn.

8. Present OptatlTe.

688. The optative is made, as elsewheie, by adding the
compounded mode-endings to the weak form of piesent-
stema. Thus :

aettra. tniddle.

I «sm*i^ gfuH g^iF? ^^lu (jaTc(f^ t^lni^

TnAJyim yxiSijivii ynQjjltms rnfijlvi rufijlv&bl yofijim&hl
et«, etc. eto. etc. et«. etc.

a. AB. hat ones the anomalont 1st aiag. act. v^f^Iralii. And fomiB
like bl»ilUi7Si& -rSt, Tofijirftt, are here and there met with in the
eplci (bboSJIr&tSm once In OOS.). MBh., too, has onoe bhaOJttAm.

4. Proaent Imperative.
688. In this class (as the roots all end in consonants)
the ending of the 2d sing. act. is always fu dhL
active . middle.

OHsnPi ^HdM gHstiH g^ g^isn^ y^m^

ymi^Jfinl Tnn^&va ynnj^ftma ynn^Kl yua^Avahftt ynn^iAmatiU

WW 3^ 3^ W\ a*iwiH, H^jf^

yniiAktii yuakt&a ynmintu roAkUtin jn&iit&ia TnOi&tSia

i, Google

253 NiBAL Clabb (sbvbnth, radli-OLA£B). [—094

690. Theie Is no oecunenM, so hi u noted, ot the endlDg t&t in
Terba of tbi* oIs«i. Thi Teda bu, u usniJ, gometiiDeB stiong foima, uid
■omedmet the eoding tana, In the 2d pi. &ot. ; thni, un&ttit, ynnikta,
anaktana, plna^tana.

6. Present Fartlaiple.

691. The paiticiples aie made in this olass as in the
pieceding ones: thus, act. irgH ynfijdnt [fem. H^r\\ yufijatf);
mid. iJyn ynfijSnA (but RV. has indhOna).

092. The example of the legular inflection of this tense
needs no introduction:

5g=rair «a53 sigsn ^15% ?igf^i%

i^naaitaa irufijTa JtTofiJma iiynfiji dyniijvahl Ayui^mahi
Ayrmak &ynfiktam iyuakta &ytiakth&s&7^ftth&m&7Ufi«dtiTai&

iyuiiak Ayuilkt&m iiyufijan ftyufikta iyuiij&tftm AynfUata

a. The endings a and t are necesaarily lost in the nasal olaas
throngfaont in 2d and 3d sing, act., nnless saved at the ezpense of the
final radical consonant: which is a case of very rare occnrreDoe (the
00I7 quotable examples were given at BEtBa).

693. The Tedi ihows no irregnl4rltlea In Ihla tenae. Occarrannee at
anfmentleaa forma ate round, eapeelttllT In 2d Kud 3d sing, aot., ihoiring
«n aoBent Ilka thu of the preasnt: foi ezunple, bhlnit, p)^94k, vp^&k,
pijjAk, riij&k.

a. The lat gin|. act. atp^am and aeohlnam (foT atr^^adam and
aocMnadam) were noted abOTe, at BBS a.

694. The roots of this class number abont thirl;, more than
half of them being fonnd only in the earlier language ; no new ones
make their first appearance later. Three of them, afij and bbafij and
talAa, carry their nasal also into other tense-systems than the present.
Two, fdli audnbh, make pre Bent-syBtemB also of other classes having
a nasal in the class-sign: thas, r<llmotl (nu-olaas) and ubhnSti
[o&^laes).

ioy Google

a. Hut of tba roota Make fonuB [tok MoandM; k-fMniB: thu, bom
ftfija, nndB, ambUi, cblnda, tpfihi, piA^ PffioA, bhaSJa, randha.

IrregulATities of the Nasal Claw.

OOB. The loot tfh Mmblnet tf^^ab with tl, tn, etc. Into tT^ofliii
ty^^^ui and, MCDidlng to the grimmulMu, hu alio nich fauna u
tr^ebml: Me above, 824 b.

686. The root blAs (by oHgln *ppiTentl]r a desldeTUlve from ybui)
Mcentt irregaUily the root-syllable Id the weak forms: (liiu, bibMmtl,
biAata, biAB&na (but blnAaot etc. and blAayltt (B.).

IV. iTn- anil a-elasies (fifth and eighth, an- and tan-elatSM).

6B7, A. The present-atem of the nu-olaaa is made by
adding to the loot the syllable ^ nn, which then in the
strong foims leceirea the accent, and is Btiengthened to ^ n6.

B. The few toots of the u-olass (about half-a-^ozenj
end in ^n, with the exception of the later inegulax ^ kp
(or kar) — for which, see below, 714. Hie two clawes,
then, are olosely coirespondent in form; and they are wholly
accordant in infiection.

a. The n of either cluB-sign ta allowed to be dropped before
V and m of the lat du. aod let pi. endingB, except when tiie root
(nn-claaa) ends in a consonant; and the u before a Towal-ending
beoomea v or uv, aooording aa tt is preceded by one or by two
oonaonants (ISO a).

1. Present Indicative.
BBS. Examples of inflection: A. nu-clasa; root
n Bii press out; strong form of stem, ^t Ban6; weak form,
^ sunn.

aottTO. middle.

1 g^ ^m^ ^qR ^ ^it ^!%

aaii6iiii Bannvia snnnm&s Bxmvi anDUT&h« mnmaihe
Bui6(l sanaOi&a atmntbi nmafft mmvitbe BBswIbrt

ioy Google

255 Nn- AMD n- (futh and biohth, bu- and tan-ci,A8BE8). [—700

3 HHlin HHH^j^ h-^Ih g^ g^^i^ g=^

Baii6tl Baniit&B "^ ilWSftH Bnnut^ aoavit* Btmv&te

a. The fonui simv&a, amun&Sf Bonvilie, aiuuii&h« are alter-
native viA tboBB given here for let da. and pi., and In practice are
more common. From yVp, however [for example], onl; the forms
with n can occur: thus, Spnavia, kpnnmiha; and also only ftpuu'
v&ntl, ftpiiuT^, SpnaT&te.

B. u-class; root WJ tan stretch: stiong form of stem,
fH? tanA; weak, fTT tann,

i fRlft ffMH^ rf^H^ ?T'^ rp^ ^7"?%

taii6iiil taiiT&a tatim^ tanvd tanviiha taum&ba

eU. etc etc. etc. etc. etc.

b. The inflection is so precisely like that given above that it
Ib not worth writinfr oat Is fnll. The abbreviated forma in lat du.
and pi. are presented here, instead of the fuller, which rarely occur
(as no double consonant ever pieoedes).

608. a. In the older Unguage, no itiong 2d penons da, oi pL,
and no thana-endlng, obtnee to ocboi (bat thay ue nnmerona In tbe
tmpT. iDd impt.: lea below). The BT. hu leveial cubs ot the Irregiilii
secant In 3d pi. mid.: thn*, kp^vat^i tanvat^, manvat^, vf^vatd,
BpT^vat^.

b> la RT. oooni ilio leveiil 3d pi. mtd. In ire ftom pcesent-alenu
Of this olMi: that, Invlre, p^vire, piiLvlre, iff^viri, aimvlri, hlnTlri.
Of those, pluvlre, utd hinvlrd might be peifeoti without lednpUctdiin
from the samnduy roota plnv *nd hlnv (below, 716). Tbe 2d sing. mid.
(with puslve valne) fffvlqi (R^O is cf inomslotu and qnestlonable
ebaneter,

2. Freeent SnbJunotlTe.

700. The lubjunctive mode-atom is made in the nsual maoaer,
hj adding a to the gnnated and accented elass-Bign: thus, aaniva,
tani-va. In the following scheme are given all the forms of which
examples have been met with in actual nee In the older language
from either division of the claas; some of them are qnite numerottslf
represented there.

active. middle.

1 vtmkrKai mm&vSva anniTSma waakvtl Bnn&vftvahSi BwUiTfiiaaliU
) annAvaa aonAvatha BunAvase aunA-vUtb*

fannAvate aunivanta

tBim&vfttIi

9 BOnAvat Biin4van

itizecy Google

701—] IX. Frbsukt-stbtbu. 256

701. Of the briefer 1st ling. set., BY. bM krfftVt and hlnttTi.
Fonnt vltb double mode-tlfn oeenr (oot Id BT.): thiu, kpqiv&t uid
kuavKt (AT.); aqnavBllia (E.), knWTBtb* (VS.; bat •Tfttba in
Ki^Ti-text), karftvfiiUia KB.). On the otber huid, a^navatfil Ib found
once (Id T3.]. Fdidib like SpnUT&nt. udhni^Tttt, aqnavat, met with
now and then in the older t«xt«, ue donbtleaa to be reguded u filie
r«&dinga. BT. hu In i ■ingle putage kfi^TSlta (inite(d of kf^AvUta);
the only form in iithe ii »{n&vUthe.

8. Present Optative.
702. The combined endings (688) aie added, as usual,
to the weak tense-Btem: thus,

ictive. middle.

1 IJj^UIH^ ^^^ HHIIR y*=ftU tJ-=)icTf^ ij-c|ii((^

snnnyim snnuytva annu^bia avnviyk eunvlv&hl sunvlmilii

a. Froo) yhp, the middle optative would be Kpnaviyi — and so
1 other like oases.

4. Freaent ZmperatiTe.
703. The inflection of the impeiative is in general like
that in the preceding classes. As i^aids the 2d sing, act.,
the rule of the latei language is that the ending ^ hi is
taken wheneret the root itself ends in a consonant; othet-
wise, the tense- (or mode-) stem stands by itself as 2d pet-
son [foi the earlier usage, see below, 701). An example of
inflection is:

active. mlddlo.

5*RlfH ^RR g-wlH W^ g5RR% (j>MIH%

sunivani aonAvSTa sim&vSma soojitU Bon&vftTata&i aoniTtmaUl

sand Bunat&m Biumt& BniiiifT& sanTi^hSin stiniidhTAiii

aan6ta sunubtm sunv^tu sounbtia sunvitfiin BunvitBrn

ioy Google

257 Nn- AND U- (FIFTH AND EIOHTH, BU- AMD tan-) CLASSES. [—706

a. From ytp, the 2d sing, aot- wonld be ftpnuhl; from ya^,
afiralif; from fdhr;, dhrf^ulii; and 80 od. From y&p, too, would
be made Spnuv4ntn, ftpnuvaUiftni, ftpnuvlitsm, fipnuT&tani.

704, Iq tlie ettllut linguoge, the idIb ib to the omlailOD of bl
tftei ■ toot with Anal Towel does not hold good: in BV., luoh formi u
Inohi, krvolif, olnnlil, dhOnnhl, ^^9°^ app^nhl, hlnuhl, and
taDuhi, BftTiiihl. ate nearly thrice aa fieqnent in Die as Infi, QP^Q,
Bund, tanu, and thelt lite; in AV., howoTer, the; ate odIt one siitli
as flteqnent; and in the Brahma^as they appear only ipotadkaUy; eiea
979Udb{ (with dill] ocears eeveral timet in BV. RV. haa the Ist eing.
act. hlnavi. The ending tSt Is found In kp^utSt and hinutftt, and
kurut&t. The rtrong atem-fotm ia found In 2d dn. aet. In hlnotam and
kpnotam; and in 2d pi. act. in kf^dta and kpi^dtaila, g^ota and
^r^otaca, Biui6ta and sundtana, hta6ta and hlnotana, and tanota,
kardta. The ending tana occdib only la the fotma Just qnoted.

6. Present Parttoiple.
706. The endiDgs QtT &nt and )3H Smi aie added to the
weak foim of tense stem: thus, from v^ sn come act. UHrl
suLVint (fern. HMrfl BunTsti), mid. T^RIR simvSnil; from yrm
tan, fFSfrt tanv&nt (fem. H-^fffl tanvati), cl^R t&nvbiB. From
y^Sfm 5p, they are CIT^TT Kpnuvint and Om^TH SpnuvSni.

e. Imperfect.
706. The combination of augmented stem and endings
is according to the rules already stated: thus,
active. middle.

5g=i^ q^p g^H sihP^ ^33^^ ^^^

iBtmavam &annaTa iennuma JMunvi Aaunuvabl to"iTiniahi

5g^q^ ^^^ *wjtT yjjjsnt^ Mg-^ierni^ ^35^

AsunoB &8iinutam Asimuta AannathSs iBunvftthSm ieunudliTam

Asimot &Bim\it&ia Aannvan &Bunuta &aimTat&m Aflnnvata
a. Here, as elsewhere, the briefer forms isunva, Asmima, Aaun-
vahi, &Biuunahl are allowed, and more neoal, except from roots
with final consonant, as dhn= which makes, for example, alwajB
Adbf^qoma eto., and also Adb^^^uvan, &dfan9UTi, idbr^ijuvKthlm,
Adhr^uvfttitm, Adbn^nvata.

WbititT, Onmrnar. 3. cd, 17

ioy Google

707—] IX. PRKfiBNT^rsTEx. 258

707. Strong Btem-roniu and tana-ending are foond only Id RV., In
akf^Ota, akfi^Uuia. Aagmentleae tormt wlib acceot sk tainvka,

708. About fifty roots make, slthei exclnaiTely or is paxt, their
preeent-formB after the manDer of the ud-oUbb'. half of them do so
only in the older language; three or four, onlj in the later.

ft. A« to truiifan to the »-conjng*tlDn, tee b«loT, 710.

709. The roota of the other diviaion, or of the n-olaaa, are
extremely few, not exceeding eigrht, even iodnding tf on acoonnt
of tarutA BV., and ban on acoonnt of the oocanenoe of hanoml
once in a S&tra (POS. i. 3. 27). BR. refer the etem iau to In of the
u-clasB instead of 1 of the nu-elass.

IrregularitleB of the nu and a-olaBBea,

710. The mot tfp be phated Is uld by the grammuriini to rstiln
the n of Iti clMi-atgn nallQpi&ltzed in the later luignage — whera, however,
fainis of conjugation of tbti oIub are vet; nre; while in the Ted* the
regnlai change la made: thue, t^P^tl.

711. The root ^ruhmr is oontraoted to 9r before the claoa-aign,
forming <}pt6 and ilf^n as stem. Its forms qpfviqA and ^f^-viri
have been noted above (698 b).

712. The root dhS ahak« in the later language (and rarely in
B. and S.j shortenB its vowel, making the stem-forms dboiid and
dtanna (earlier dhiiii6, dhnnn].

713. The *o-ealled root ilri^ii, tceited by tbe nttlTe grammariani aa
diuyllabie and belonging to the Toot-claia (L), ia propeHy » present-Meni
Of this claaa, with anomalooi con&actlon, from the root v^ (or var). In
the Teda, It bai no formi wUch are not tegululy made aocordlng to the
nD-claiBj bnt in the Bribmana language are found aometlmea snch forma
as Or^autl, as If from an u-iool of tbe root olasi (686); and the gram-
marians inita n>T It a perfect, aoilst, futate, etc. Ita 3d alng. impr. art.
Is firjfn or Ori^nlil; iti impr., sdrpos, Sur^ot; Its opt. mid., aii;iavita
[E.) or ur^TitA (TS.).

7L4. The extremely commoa loot ^ kr (or kar] maie
ia in the later language inflected in the present^etetn ex-
olusirely according to the u-olass (being the only root o£
that olau not ending in ^ n) . It has the insularity that
in the strong form of stem it (as well ae the olass-eign) has
the gu^a-stiengthening, and that in the weak form it is

Digitizecy Google

259 Na- AND u- iPIPTH and eiqhth, bu- abd tan-j CLAaaES. [—714

changed to km:, so that the two foims of stem aie ^f!JJ kRT6
and ^^ karu. The olass-sign 3 u is always dropped be-
fore cF T and R m of the 1st du. and pi., and also before
JT y of the opt. act. Thus:

1. Present IndioatiTe.
active. middle.

a. d. p. B, d. p.

EfJ^tPr ^^ 5*'^ ^ =W^ ^H^

kardml karv&a knrmiM kurri karr&he karm&b*

*jtfR) ^r^TO^ j^ 5^ ^n^ ^^

kar6ql kaTatli4a karath& fcnm;6 kurr^the komdlivd

^ijlifl 4|))rm jqfti jfirt ^i-^irl ^^

k»T6ti kornt&B fcanr&nti kuruM knrrite kiirv&t«

z. Fresont Optative. -'

JIIF^ ^dw JOTR 5=(Tu ^i4ftf^ 5i^ft%

kur;^ kuTT^vR ktur^a kurri7& knrriv&hi kurvlmihl
etc. <tc. etc. etc. etc etc.

3. Preae^t Imperative.

E?rf^lfm *t=(H ^it^TR ^il^ i^I^% <*^m?
kar&Tft^ kar&vSva kariTftma karivftl kar&T&vahSI kar&vBmah&i

kuni korat&m kurat& kam9T& karrSthftm knmdhv&m

kar6tu kurutltin knrv&ntu i korutam knrTatllin kvirT&t&m

4, Freaent Participle.

^c^rT kurvAnt (fern. ^3rft knrvati) ^4lUI kurvSni
6. Imperfect.
M*(e(H 3^3 3^1^ 5(5R^ U<4)c]f^ Q?i4f%

Akaravam Akurra Akurma &kurvi iktuvahi &kunnahl
55iftl^ *J*t>HH^ «*JirI M^^W MiJi^lEIIM U4i^MM

ikaroB UEoratam &koruta &kurathSa ikortrsthSm UmrudhTam

ikarot iLknraULm Akurran iktiruta iknrr&t&m &karvata

itizecy Google

Tl6— ] IX. PaBBEKT-BTTTEM. 260

71&I In BV., (kit root U legululy inflecMd in th« pr«wnt-«y(Um
■ecotding to tbe na-clut, mtkiDg the atem-foinu k)n6 and ^ija; the
only siMptiong ue kormaa onee and kom twice (>U in the tenth book);
In AT,, the Da-tormB in Mil more than tix timet u fteqoant u tlie
a-form* (nttrly Iwif of which, moreoTet, ue in pioM p4si4ge(); bnt in
the BribmuM UDgn«ee ud Itter, the u-fonns ue ued (o the escliMtoii
of the others.

a. As lat (ing. piea. art. is foand konai In the epos.

"b, Whit inesolu totmt boot kf w a verb ot the na-cltis occdi in
the older langnage have been already noticed abore.

O. The iiotated form tamtA, from ytf, shows aa apparent analog
with these a-formi from k^.

7 Id. A. few Tflrba belonging origin&llj to Utese oUsses have been
shifted, in put oi altogether, to the a-olasa, their proper clua-tign
having been etereotypod ae a part of the root.

a. Thai, tn BY. we Hud formB both from the stem Inu {yi or in),
and also from inTft, representing a deiivaHve qnaai-rool inv (and these
litter alone occnr In AT.). 60 likewise fonns fioa a stem p^va l»eslde
those from ^a (Yf); and from hinva beside those from hina (v^t).
The M-oaUed coota Jinv and pinv are donblleu of the ume origin, ilthoDgh
no forms from the stem pina are met with at an; period — aolesa plavlre
(ibOTe, 6SSbJ be so tegatded; and AT. baa the participle piUT&nt, f.
pinvatl. The giammarius set up a root dhlnv, bat oolr forma tZont
dhi (stem dhinu) appear (0 occot In (he present- BTslem (the aotist
adhln-nt ii fonnd in PB.].

b. Oocalional a-forms are met with also from other roOU: thus,
cinvata eto., diuiTBsva.

V. ns-clast (ninth or kri-dass).

717. The olasB-sigD o£ this class is in the strong forms
the syllable ^ nft, afibented, which is added to the toot;
in the weak foima, oi where the accent falls upon the end-
ing, it is ^ nl; but before the initial vowel of an ending
the ^ I of ^ nl disappears altogether.

1. Present Indicative.

718. Example of inflection: root sfil krl buy: strong
form of stem, Wt^ krl^S; weak form, c^toit krO^ (before
a vowel, gftal krii).).

ioy Google

ITS-CLASS (NINTH, kri-CLASS]-

1 t+TlUlliM 5lpl!li"=(H^ stillliiHH^ ^fffit 4ti1llT|c(^ tti1inH$
kri^lbnl ktij^lvie krli^Im&a : lui:^6 kri^v&lie krDjlm&he

i ^R^unftr ehiuniiiH crWIh s^OuflN sfrluiia stTiuilQ

kri^lttl ki^Qlt&B kri^iintl kr^j^t^ krl^Jte krli^te
718. In the Veda, Ibe 3d linf. mid. hsi the game foim wltb tbs lit
In K^s; the pecaliai tCMDl of 3d pi. mid. Is seen Id puofttd *Dd rl^at^;
And TTVlmahd (bBBlde Vfulm&he) ocean once In RV.

Z. Freeent Sabjimotive,
7S0. The SDbjnnctive fonns whtch hare been fonnd exemplified
in Veda and Brahmans aie given below. The snbjunctive mode-stem
is, of conrae, Indiatin^ishable in fonD from the strong tenee-stem.
And tho 2d and 3d stng. act (with secondary endings) are indistin-
gDishable from angmentless imperfecta.

■ctlie. middla.

1 b^Snl ki^£m& krli^&l kri^fivalifii kri^fimaliili

2 kiii^ae kriQfttha krlf&BAl

3 krl^tt kri^an ki^StSi kru^ntai

3. Present OptatiTe.

721. This mode is foimed and inflected with entiie

tegulaiity; owing to the fusion of tense-sign and mode-sign

in the middle, some of its persons ate indistinguishable fiom

augmentless imperfects. Its first persons are as follows:

Active. middle.

1 ^luftuiii^ ^oihTR stiluiluiH ^fhrftu ^Tuiferf^ ^fhrfNi%

kriiji?^ krtpiyaTa kn^Iylma krmir& ki^vihl kri^^m^hl

1. Present ImperatiTe.
722. The ending in 2d sing, act., aa being always pre-
ceded by a vowel, is l^hi [never fu dhi}; and there are no
examples of an ofyssion of it. But this peteon is forbidden

Digitizecy Google

728—] IX. PBESBHT-SySTBM. 262

to be formed in the classical language fiom loou ending in
a consonant; foi both class-sign and ending is substituted
the peculiar ending ^ETH Sni.

sctlTS. middle.

I fehlii?Pi ^luiH thhinn ^Wt ^tnnsi^ cfOinH^

Innwitnt TtpTw aqu kll^RIIia kTl^Sl Irri-^itirnhltl kril^JtmallU

TryTnThf h-Tinit-ATn krl^tA krinlfri kn^thfim kri^dtiv&m

» ^fhnR yiluilHiH^BtniiTj siftoflrn^ ^fhni?n^ ^fhncnR^

k^^itn knnltim kri^&ntu krl^ldun kriQatSm kH^&t&m
a. Examples of the ending &a& in 2d sing, act are a9ftii«,
gfh&9&, badbftnji, atabUni.

7S8. Tha ending ftna U knowa lUo to th« eullMt luisotc*; of tbe
exunpiea Jnat elven, nil are found Id AV,, uid the Itiit two iu BV.; other*
ue ifS^a, moffi^, skabhftna. Bnt AY. hu also g^bb^ibl (alsoAB.),
and even gfh^&hi, with Etroag stem; BhP. has badlmlhi. Strong (teioa
sie fnrthei fouod in KT^Uli and stj^hl (TS.), PI'i^Uil (TB.), and
QTjjp&hi (Apatt), and, with anomalong lecent, punUii and ffi^Shl (ST.) ;
and, In 2d pi. act., Id pimita (RV.). The tndlng t&t of 2d sing. act.
occnn in gfbi^t&t, J&nitat, pumtftt. The ending tana is fonnd in
punlt&na, pj^itana, 9ri9itana.

5. Present Participle.
724. The participles are tegulaily foimed: thus, foi
example, act. sliimtl krT^&nt [fem. ^luirfl kitfarf); ^^•
sblmw krl^ni.

e. Imperfect.
726. There is nothing special to be noted as to the
inflection of this tense: an example is —

•eUTe. middle.

^' ^ '> ^ '^ ^'^ ^ ^ ^ ^ V «*^

Utri^Km ikriijlva ^Ttri^jima Url^l Akri^lvahi AkrlQlmahl

Ala^ftB &kri];kltam Url^Ita ^kri^ltliBB Akri^thftm ikrlqidhvam
iikru^t 4ki^t&m Ucra^an &krl^ta Ak^fttKm Umpata

ioy Google

263 Tlil-CLABB (NINTH, kri-CLASBj. [— 78«

726. It hu bean pointed oot >bo«* tbst aagniaDtlen penoiiB of thli
tenie tie In part IndiitinguiBhable Id fonn from snbjanctiTO >nd opUttve
penont. Sacb u cartatnly belong heie uo (Id V.) kfi^im; a^ui,
rl9&n; gfblu^tn, vf^ata. The AY. bu once minlt inatead of miuiL
MBh. hu ftfnlfl aftei xai.

a. AB. haa the false fonn aiioBnas, and in AA. ocean avf^ita ai
3d plual.

797. Tbe roots which form thoii piesent-fijstemB, wholly or in
put, After the mkniter of this cUu, are over fifty in QDmber'. bat, for
about three fifths of them, the forms are qnotable only from tbe older
language, and for half-a-dozen they make their first appearance later;
for less than twenty are they in nse through tbe whole life of the
language, from tbe Veda down.

a. Aa to aeeondar; o-atems, eee 731<

IrregulEuitlds of the nB-olaaa.

7SB. a. Tbe roots ending in a shorten that vowel before the
class-sign: thus, from yp% pnuiti and punlt6; in like manner also
JO, dhfl, la.

b. The root vll (B.3.) foims either vlmfi or vlinS.

7S0. The root grabb or grata (the former Vedlcj is weakened
to grbta or sr^.

a. As the perfect alao in weak forms baa gfbta or gp'^ '* '^ v*
easy to sea why tbe grammarians abonld not faaTe written p Inatead of ra
in tbe root.

730. a. A few of the roots have a more or less persistent nasal
in forms outside the present-system; such are without nasal before
the class-sign: thus, gratta or graatli, badh or bandta, math or
mantta, akabh or skambh, stabh or Btambta.

^bJThe root J&S also loses its nasal before the class-atgn; thus,

731. Not rarely, forms showing a Iranefer to the a-oODJngation
are met with : thus, even in BV., minaCi, mlnat, amlnanta. from
ytDi; in AV., fiT^a from Vft; later, grb^a, Jftna, prii^ mattana,
etc. And from roots pj and vaj are formed the stems pf^ and
m{^, which are inflected after the manner of the i-cUss, aa if from
roots pf9 and 11179.

782. Id the Veda, an apparently denominative inflection of a
stem Id &y& is not infrequent beside the conjugation of roots of this
class: thos, grbbaji, mattaST&tl, a^rath^aa, akabhSy&ta, aatabb-
Kyat, pmfar&nte, mufSyAt, and so on. See below, 106eb.

ioy Google

7S3— ] lIX. Pkbskkt-«tbtem. 264

Seetnd or ft-CtnjugatiAn.

783. We come now to the clawes which compose the
Seooad ot ft-Coajugation. lliese aie more markedly
nmilar in theii mode of inflection than the preceding classes;
their common characteristics, already stated, may be here
repeated in summary. They are: 1. A final a in the present-
stem ; 2. a constant accent, not changing between stem and
ending; 3. a briefer form of the optative mode-sign in the
active, namely I instead of 7ft (combining in both voices
alike with a to e); 4. the absence of any ending (except
when tst is tued] in 2d sing. impv. act.; 5. the conversion
of initial B of the 2d and 3d du. mid. endiogs with final a
of the stem to e; 6. the use of the full endings ante* ante,
ant&m in 3d pi. mid. forms; 7. (he invariable use of an
(not na] in 3d pi. impf. act.; S. and the use of mBna instead
of &na as ending of the mid. pple. Moreover, 9. the stem-
final a becomes S before m and t of Ist personal endings —
but not before am of Ist sing, impf.: here, as before the
3d pL endings, the stem-final is lost, and the short a of the
ending remains (or the contrary): thus, bhdvanti (bhiva-|-
anti), bb&vonte (bhiva -(- ante , Abbavam (ibhava-(-am).

«. All these chaiacteristicB belong not to the indecdon of the
a-present-ayBUm alone, bnt &lso to that of the a-, rednpl lasted, sad
sa-aorista, the s-fdtnie, ftnd the desiderative, caosstive, and demon-
inatlve preaent-stems. That ia to aa^, wherever in conjugation an
a-atem ia found, it is Inflected in the same manner.

VI. A-c)ass (first, bbft-ciass).

784. The preaent-stem of this class is made by adding
9 a to the root, which has the accent, and, when that is
possible (2SB, 240), is strengthened to gu^ia. Thus, ^
bh&VB from y^ bbD; sHT jAya from v^ ji; ^^ bodha from
V^q budh; Wf s&rpa from yw\ syp; — but ^ vida from
V^ vad; ?Rte kri^A &<>" V^^ krl^.

ioy Google

A-CLA8S (FIRBT, bha-CLASS).

1. Present Indiofttive.

736. The eodingB nod the rulea for theii combinatioQ
with the stem have beea alieady fully given, fot this and
the other parts of the pieseDt-system; and it only lemains
to illostiate them by examples.

ft. Example of inflection: lOot T bhil be; stem HS)
bhivft (bho+a: 181).

MtlTe. middle.

>. d. p. 1. d. p.

1 ^^\^ H^Rg^ H^Fin^ >R H^ra% H^n%

btk&vBml bh&T&TOS bh&vfimM bh&T» bh&TftTaha bh&vfimah«

bh&vMl bh&vathoa bb^vatba bh&TaaebbiTetha bhdvadhve

bhiivati bh&TRtas bb&vantl bh&vate bMvete bh&vante
b. The Y. hu but a Bingle eiiniple of tlie Uiana-Bsdlng, nunely
T&datbana (tod no othei in lay cIub of tbls eonJagtUoD). The l«t pi.
mid. manSmahA (RT., oncej U piobtbly id error. RV. }iu f6bho once

I 3d alngnlar.

2. Present SubjunotiTe.

786. The mode-stem Is bh&v& (bb£va+a). Snbjonctire fonDB
of this coDJngation are very numerous in the older language; the
following soheme Instaaces all that have been found to occur,
■dive, middle.

bh4vanl bb&vSva
(bh&T&Bl
' Ibh&vftB
Ibh&vfiti
Ibli&Tat

bbftvatbas bfa&vStba

bh&vfttas bh&T&n

bh&vama bhivai bhAvfiTiibU bb&v&mali&i
Ibb&vase

Ibh&T&Bfil

ibhivatal »i^v«to IbbAvtotal

bhiivadbT&i

737. The 2d da. mid. (bh&Tftithe) doee not cbHnce to occm in tbig
clua ; uid y&tUte Is the only example of the 3d penon. No aach pi.
mid. forms u bhivfidbve, bh&Tftnte ate made ttom any ctua with item-
flnil a; inch » bh&vanta (which are very common) are, of eonrse, prop-
erly aogmentleu imperfects. The Biiibmanas (especially (B.) protei the
2d sing. act. in ftBi and the 3d in at AB. ha« tbe 3d iing. mid. baraUU;
and a 3d pL In antfti (Tartantfii KB,} ha« been noted once. BY. has
examples, areft and madS, of the briefer 1st tlnf. act.

itizecy Google

7S8— ] IX. Prebbht-«y8tbu. 266

8. PreMBt Optative.
788. He scheme of optative endings a« combined with
the final of an a-stem woe given in full above (See).
■etlTe. middle.

l^UTT >fe ^R >1^ H+jf^ *WIlf^

bh&veyam bh&veva bb&vema bb&veya bh&vevahl bbivemahl

bh&v*a bhivetam bhiveta bbivethfta bh&vey&thKm bh&vedb.vain.

bh&v«t bhivet&m bh&veyna bb&veta bh&veyat&m bh4ver&n

a. Tbe RT. hu once the 8d pi. mid. bhorerata (for one oUiei
•iMuple, ice 763 b). AV. h» udeyam tiom y'vad.

b. A. faw Initanoes are met vith ot middle 3d penoiu from a-stemi
In Ita >nd (very tardy) Iran, Insteiid ot «ta and eran. Foi conveiilence,
they ma; be pal logethei here (eiceptiag the moie nauetoua cantatiTe
tarmi, for which tee 1048c); they are (to fu as noted) theee: oajita S.
and later, faAaita S., 9ra^ta S. ; dliaylta S., dtayayita U., hvajita

., dhmSylta V. An active fonn qafialyftt C. is

4. Present Imperative.
788. An example of the imperative inflection is:

acttTO. middle.

H^nft JTsn^ JHPT ^ H<4N^" H=(IH^

bh&vsnl bb&vava bh&v&ma bh&vU bh&v&vahKi bh&vSmahU i

bh&va bhiivatam bhiiTata bb&vaava bh&veth&m bb^Tadhvain
>1^ H^rTFI^ J|^ HNHIH H^HIH^ M^lllM^

bb&vatn bh&vat&m bhivanta bh&vatftm bh&vetftm bbAvantCm

740. The ending tana la 2d pi. act. Is u lue Id this nhole conjuga-
tloo u la thana in tbe pteaent: tbe V. afforda only bhaJatana Id tbe
a-oliH (and nahyatana la the ya-clsss : 760 o). The ending tfit o( 2d
alng. act., on the other band, la not tito; the RV. tau avatftt, Ofatftt,
dahat&t, bhavat&t, yaecbatSt, ySoatat, r&k^atat, vahat&t ; to which
AV. adds Jlnvatftt, dllfivatSt; and the Brahmanaa bring other eiuBplec.
MS. has twice Bvadfttu (parallel teita both tliae« svadfitl): compare
almllar cases In the &-clasa: 7KSa.

ioy Google

267 A-0I.A88 (FIBST, bbO-CLASB). [—744

S. Freaent Participle.

741. The endings ^ ant and ITH mSna ate added lo
the pteBent-stem, with Iosb, before the foimer, of the final
Stem-Towel: thiu, act. H^fT bliivont (fern. Hcflfl bbdvana);
mid. H^IIH bhivamSna.

(k A small nnmbei of middle pirtlclplea tppetr to be made from
sterna of tliU clatB (m of other a-elaiaea: aee 763 e, 104S f^ b; the
snffli l&« inatead of mftna : thna, namlna, pao&nn, f Ikf &Qa, STaJ&na,
hTa;ftua (all epk), mi^ftna and ka^ll^a (later); and theie «e Vedlc
examples (aa oy&Tftna, prath&nfc, y&t&na oi yatftni, (i&mbh&iia, all
RV.) of which the character, vhethei piesent or aorlat, ia doubtful: compare
B40, 863.

6. Imperfect.

742. An example of the imperfect inflection is:

aetlve. middle.

HOWl ^^^ W^(\^ 5PR gH=IRf^ SIHMIHf^

AbhATam AbhaTava &bhavfima dbbave ibhavaTatii Abhavsmabi
^iism^ ^>1^?T^ ^^l^rT SpigSira^ 5H^I^ ^il^ia'J^
^bbavas &bhavatam dtbbavata AbhaTathAs AbbaTAtb&m AbbBTadhTam

Abbavat Abbavatim Abbavan Abbavata dtbbavst&ni Abhavanta

743. No forms In tana are made In tbia tense tiom any a-c1ala.
Examples of angmentleBa forma (which are not ancommonj are: oyfcvam,
ivas, d&baa, b6dbat, bh&rat. o&ran, niiqan; b&dhatbKe, v&rdhata,
g6oanta. The aabJonetiTely u«ed forms of 2d and 3d sing. act. are more
frequeot than those of either of the proper subjunctive persons.

744. A far larger Dumber of roots form tbeir preBent-syetem
accordiog to the a-olasB than according to any of the other claasee :
in the RV., they are about two bandred and forty (nearly two fiftfaa
of the whole body of roots); in the AV., abont two hnndred (nearly
the same proportion); for the whole language, tbe proportion is still
larger, or nearly one half the whole number of present-steins : namely,
over two hnndred in both earlier and later language, one hnndred
and seyenty-five in the older alone, nearly a hundred and fifty in the
later alone. Among these are not a few transfers from the classes
of tbe first conjogatioD: see those olassce above. There are no roote
ending in long & — except a few which make an a-atem in some
anomalons way: below, 749 a.

ioy Google

■746 — ] IX. PRE8ENT~STSTEH. 268

Irregolaritlea of the a-olaes.

745. A few Terbe have irregQlar Towel-cbaoges in fonaing the
present-stem: Urns,

n, Qh comider )lu Eu^-ittengthenlns (•gtlngt 240): thiu, 6tiate.

b. kfp [or krap) lament, on the contiuy, remslna nnchingad: thus,
k^pate.

o> KUb hide hsi prolangatlon loetead of KU^a: that, gdbatL

d. kram stride lesnluly leDgthena iu Tovel in the BctlT«, bat not
Id the middle: thus, knbnati, kr&mate; but the TOwBl-qnaotltlfls are
gem«wh&t mixed ap, evan fioin the oldest liDgnage down; — Uam. lire li
■aid to Fonu klSmati etc., bnt la not qnotable; — cam with ths piepo-
■itioD B rtnia the mouth fotmg aoKmati.

•. Id (he Utei language are found oceasloQal fonns of thli elasa torn
mfj u^e ; and thef show the lame vfddM (Instead of ffu^a) which belongs
ID the root Id its more proper inllectlaii (627): thna, mBljaava.

f. The giammarlaas giTe ■ nombei at tools in urr, which the; declare
to lengthen the n in the pieseat'Btem. Only three are foand in (quite
limited) use, and they show no forms anywhere with »hort n. All appear
to be of Bccondary formation from roots In f or ar. The root maroli or
m&rotl coagulate ha« likewise only a Id quotable foimi.

g. Tfas onomatopoetic root f}\iuv epew is wdtten by the grammarians
as (thlT, and declared to lengthea It) Tovel Id the present-ajstem : com-
pare 240 b.

746. The roots daAf bite, rofu color, nafij hang, svaiU embrace,
of which the Dsaa] is in other parts of the conjugation not constant,
lose it in the present-ay stem: thus, d&qatl etc.; eafij forms both
aajati and aajjati Iprobably for sajyati, or for aasjati from aasa-
Jati]; math or manth has mathatl later. Id general, as the present
of this class is a strengthening formation, a root that hu snob a nasal
anywhere has it here also.

747. The rooU gam go and yam reach make the prosent-stems
g&ocha and y&ooha: thns, gfcaahftml etc.: see 008.

748. The root sad lit forms aJda (conjectured to be contracted
from Biada for aisada): thus, sid&mi etc.

748. Tranefeis to this class from other classes are not rare, as
has been already pointed ont above, both throughout the present-
system and in occasional forms. The most important oases ate the
following :

a. The roots in I, eth& eland, p& drink, and ghifi tmell, form
the present-Btems t{ftba (tifth&ml etc.), ptba (plbfimi etc.], and
jfghra (j{ghraml etc.): for these and other similar cases, see 671-4.

b. Secondary root-forms like Inv, Jlnv. pinT, from simpler roots

ioy Google

269 Accented &-ctASB (siith, tud-CLAss). [—763

of tbe hu-cIbbs, are either foand nloDgude their originals, or have
crowded these out of use: see 716.

7B0. Oq the other hand, tbe root dham or dhm& blow farmB
its present-Btem ^om the more original form of the root: thue,
dh&mRtl etc.

VII. Accented i-class (sixth, tud-class).

761. The piesent-stem of this class has the accent on
the class-Bign ^ i, and the root remains unstrengthened. In
its whole inflection, is follows so closely the model of the
preceding class that to give the paradigm in full will be
nnnecessaiy (only foi the subjunctive, all the foims found
to occur will be instanced).

762. Ilzample of inflection: root ^^ VI9 enter; stem

I. Present Indioative.

■etiie. middle.

i ieJWlfi f=15II=(H fejailH+i ^15f fil5FR% ^RITR^
viQ^mi vl^ltvaa vlgimas viq6 vlf^vahe vlqamahe

etc. etc. etc. etc. el''. etc.

2. Present Subjunctive.
1 vl^ltnl vlfjva vigitina vi^ii vlqavabU vlq&nahKi

■ C5? "'*'» -'" KsSi "'•"• "'*•*"

a, A single example of tbe biJefei Ux elng. ict. is mifk^a. The only
forms in ftitlie and Bite ue p^^filtbe and yuvlite.

3. Present Optative.

vlq^am viq^va vi^dma viqeya vlq^ahi viqtoiahi
etc. etc. etc. cfc, et«. etc.

b. The BV. bu tbe ending tana once In Hretana 2d pi. act, and
rata in jofeiata 3d pi. mid.

ioy Google

76S— ] IX. Present-system. 270

4. Present Imperative.
The fiiBt persona having been given above as subjunc-
tives, the seoond aie added heie:

vigil vlq&tam vlqiita vlq&ava vlgitliSm vlQ&dlivain

flic. etc. etc. etc. «ta. etc.

0. Tbe ending tat Is found In RV. and AV. In mr^atftt, vrhat&t,

suvat&t; otber eumplei aie not Intreqnent in tbe BnbmiiDa languaige :

thus, klildAtftt, ebyat&t, proohatAt, viqatftt, B^jatsti and Uter, npi^a-

t&t. The 3d slug. act. audfttu and muiloStu oocqj In 8utrai (ef. 740).

G. Present Partioiple.
The active participle is fc)HIH vl9dnt; the middle is

d. The feminine ol the actlTe participle it asnallT made from the
strong Etem-fotm: thns, vig&ati; but aometimea l^om the weak: thus,
Blfio&nU and alfioati (RV, and AV.), tad&nti and tudati (AT.): tee
■boie, 449 d.e.

e. Middle participles in &na instead of m&na aie dbuvftni, dhrfA^&i
Uqana, gy&na. In the older language; kpqKna, muilo&Da, sp^^&na in
the later (cf. 741a).

e. Imperfect.

i qiysiH ci^Rira sri^'sniT ^i^ qfaroR^ tii^simi^

&vlqam &vlQfiva Avlfftma &viQ« ivlfSvahl &viQSmahi
etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.

f. Examples of angmentlesB form« accented ue ttjiko, apjit, tirinta.

g. Tbe a-aorlit (846 ff.) ia In general the eqniyalent, aa regards Ita
forma, of an Imperfect of this class.

763. Stems of the A-cIsbb are made from nearly a hundred and
fift}* roots: for aboat a third of these, in both tbe earlier and the
later language; for a half, In the earlier only; for the remainder,
nearly twenty, only In the later language. Among them are a number
of tranafera from the otABsea of the non-a- conjugation.

a. In some of these ttanafen, aa pff and ni|^ (731), there takes
place almost a setttng-np of Independsnt roots.

b. The atoms looliii, uoob&, and jocHkit m reckoned aa belonging
reipecttiely to the roote 1; Jttire, vas ehine, and j go.

0. The roots vrllten b7 the Hindu grunmariana witb final o —
namely, tiho, do, qo, and ao — and forming the preeant-itemi 0b7i>

ioy Google

271 AOCBNTBD A-CLAS8 (SIXTH, tud-CLABS}. [—'69

<l7&> <}yk, B7&, ara more propeily [u hiilDg ui ucraUd it In the «tem)
to b« tMkoned to thii cUu than to the jK-claia, where (he natlTe elaail-
flMtlon pati them (tee 761 g). They appear to be analogoiu with the
ilemi k^ya, SVB, hvm, noted beloir (766).

764. The loota from which &-(temi ue mad* hare certain noticeable
pecularitlea of form. Hatdlf any of them hiTe long Towala, and none ha*e
long Interior Towela; very few have final tdwcIi; and none [aaTo two ot
three tranafers, and ylaU ba athamtd, which doea not occur In any aoean-
tnated text, and la perhapt to be referred rather to the ft-clais] hare « n
radical rowel, except aa thli forma a combination with r, which li then
ledneed with It to f or aomo of the nanal labttltatea of j.

IrregularitieB of the d-olaes.

7&fi. The roots in 1 and a toA n change those vowels into I7
and OT before the oluB-sigo: thus, kfiT'ii jrawi, mvA; saT&, etc.;
and BVB, hvk oocar, instead of auva and htiva, in the older language,
vhile TS. has the participle kqy&nt. K. has dbfiva from |<'dhQ.

766. The three roots Id x form the present-stems kirft, eiri
(also glla), tlT&, and are sometimes written as Ur eto-i and eat. Jar,
tur are really oolf varieties of wCi Jf> Ti and blinr and sphur are
evidently related with other ar or r root-forms.

a. The common root praob atk makes the stem prcohi.

767. Aa to the atema -driy& and •prlya, and mrlyi and dhriyi,
(omeltees reckoned a* belonging to thU elaa«, lee below, 773.

768. Although the preeent-stem of this class shows in general
a weak form of the root, there are nevertheless a number of roots
belonging to it which are strengthened bjr a pennldmate nasal. Thus,
the stem mnfLo& is made from ymuo reUtat; aiiloi from yslo tprirMa;
viadi Irom yviA find; kputi from yt^ cut; PIA9& from ypiq
adorn; tfinp& from v'tTP "V'oy; lnmp& from ylup break; llmpA from
yllp *maar\ and occasional forms of the same kind are met with from
a few others, as tnnda from /tud thnut; hjthk from ybfb »trength«n\
A^fiiik (beside dfAha) from y'dfh make firm; <fam.bhit (beside qumbha]
from yqnbh ihint ; TS. has fpithatl from i^qratb (instead of f rathn&tl) ;
nfioha, vindbi, aombba, are of donbtful character.

&. Nasalized &-alemi are *l)o In isTeral Inttancea made by tianafer
from the nasal clati: thni, unda, nmbha, jiik, piAf&, ynflja, mndlia,
qififla.

VIM. Ta-orass (fourth, divdass).

769. The piesent-stem of this class adds TS ya to the
accented but luutiengthened root. Its inflection is also pte-

ioy Google

769—] IX. PRMEKT-BYSTBlf. 272

cisely like that of the ftHslass, and may be pieaented io the
same abbieviated fonn as that of the i-class.

760. Example of infleotion: loot ^ n*lt bind;
stem ^^ n&hya.

1. Freaeut IndloatiYe.
■ctiie. middle.

i H<^iiH R?iraT!^ -RariH^ r^ -wjm^ 4^m^

n&bTtmi nUiy&vaa DUirftmaa natara nihrtTaha nibriinaha
2. Present BubjonotlTe.

nUiyBsU n&hyftdlivCf

nUyfitas n&hy&a nUi^atfii n&hrintU

I n&hr&ni n&hyftma nJihyfii nUirkvahU aUiyi

fnUutai
In&hyBa
rnUiTltl
InAbyftt

a. A 3d pi. mid. in antftl (JXyant&i) oocare once Id TS.

3. Present Optative.
1 R#OT^ =1^ R^ R^IT H-S-Mf^ H'SmI^

nAtayaTsm nihreva nihyema nibyera nitayevahl nibysiaalil
etc. eto. ato. etc. etc. etc.

b. Foi two or tliie« 3d ting. mid. Itnmt !□ ita (foi eta), see 788b.

4, Present Imperative.

nihra niiliyataia n&hyata n&hyasva n&hyetliSm n&hTadlivaia

etc etc. etc, et«. etc. etc.

0. Of the ending tana, RV. hu ooe ei^mple, nahyataoa; tb« end-
ing tat ii found In aayatSt, khySyatftt, na^yatAt.

6. Freaeat Farttolple.

The active participle ia q^itl n&liyant (fern. R^Jrfl nih--
yantl); the middle is R^iTTH aihyamSna.

e. Imperfect.
1 fcH-WH^ MH-SR SR^iT SR^ tW^Rl% HH-AIIMf^
&nahjram ^natayftva inahyBma iuahya &nahy&vabi Anahylmabl

ioy Google

273 ■ya-CLlM (FOURTH, dlv-CLASS): [—761

d. EitnipleB of angmentlBas foims ghowtng the Moent belonging to the
pTwent-iytteiii ue gt^Rt, p&^rftt, p&q7ui, J^atbSa.

701. The 7ft-claBB Btema are more than a hundred and thirty id
nnmb«r, and nearly half of them have forms in ose in all periods of
the langnage, about forty occurring: only in the earlier, And abont
thirty only In the modem period,

a. Of tbe toot) making yft-Btemi, i yery ooniideitble part (OTei flfty}
tignlfy a Bt4te of feeling, or t oondition of mind ot body: that, kap b»
<mgTy, klam b« leeary, k^ndli be hungry, mnh b» confuttJ, lubh be
hatful, qof be dry, etc. etc.

b. A fnithei numbeT bMe ■ more or leu dliUnctly pustre mdh,
dnd are In part evident and In pait pielumable transfeca train the paasire
or y&-clatB, with change of accent, and sometimeg alto with aaBOmptioa of
teOy* endings. It it not poailble to diaw precisely the Umila of the divi-
■lon; but there are in the older langnage a nambei of clear oaaea, In which
the accent vaTers and changes, and the othen ace to be Judged by analogy
with them. Thna, ymne forms m&oyata once or twice, beilde the nsnal
mQcy&ta, in BY. and AY.; and in the Biihmanas the former is the
regular accent. Similar changes are found alio in ya-foims from other
roots: thus, bom k(i dettroy, JI or JyS Hirwre, t^ hwt, d^ makt firm,
ptto cook, px fi^' »^ damage, rio have, lup break, hft leave. AetiTa
fonos are early made tcoia aome of these, and they grow more common
later. It Is worthy of special mention that, {torn the Yeda down, Jtfyate
M bom et«. Is fonnd as altered piuire or original ya-Cormatlon by the tide
of i^aa gioe birih.

0. A conElderable body of loola (about forty) differ from the above in
having an apparently original transltlTe oi neater meaning: example* ire
as throtB, nail bind, paq tee, pad go, glif claep.

d. A nnnber of roots, of rattans meaning, and of somewhat doabtfnl
character and relationa, having preaent-atems ending In.ya, ate by the native
grammaiians written with flaai diphthongs, U or e or o. Thos:

e. Boots reckoned as ending ia ti md belonging to the a- (or bhil-)
class, aa ffU >mg (gityati etc.). As these show abandamly, and tor the
most part exclnsively, O-forms ontalde the ptesent-syitem, there seems to
be no good reason why they sbonid not rather be regarded as A-roeta of
the ya-elasB. They are kf^K bwm, gS »ing, gift be aeary, tr& itae, dbyB
thiuk, ■py&JiUup, mis relax, r& bark, t& be blown, 97ft coaguMe, fr&
boil, ntyS ttifflui. Some of them ate evident eitensiona of simpler roots
by the addition ot II. The secondary roots tKy rireieh (beside tan), and
dy obiertte (beside ei) appear to be ot dmilar character.

t. Roots rsckoaed as ending in e and belonging to the a- (or bhtlO
class, u dhe tuc/t [dh&yati etc.). These, teo, have i-forms, and some-
times I'forms, outside the present system, and are best regarded as ft-roota,
either with ft weakened to a before the class-sign ot this class, or with ft

Whitasy, Onmiiiar. >. ti. IB

D,j,i,...., Google

761— J IX. PRBBBNT-BreTBM. 274

weikeiiAd to i or 1 and InllecMd UMndlng to tha a-clui. The; ue dhi
tuck, mS exchange, V& weaoe, vji envelop, hvft call (leixiiidary, tram
htk). Ai of kladred form mi; be mentiooed day ehare tnd vyoy sxpantf
(pTobtlilT denoiniaUiT« of TTft;a).

g. A tew tooU ■nlfldilly written vlth flnil o uid reckoned to the
jtb-diM, with ndictl vowel lost before tbe clus-elgn: thm, do cut, bind,
pres, dy&ti etc Theie, u haTlDg in icceated A In the lign, h»e
pUiDly no right to be put tn thia cImi ; &nd they ire better referred to the
JkeUiB (lee >bOTe, 768 o). Outalde the present-Byitem they ihow ft- and
i-formt; (Dd In th*t system the ya la oRen Teaolved Into la in the olde*t
Jingaige.

7€8> The ya-olua la the only one tbas far described whioh ahowa
any tendency toward a reitrictloD to a certain variety of meaning. In this
tendency, le well aa In the form of Ita (Ign, It appsan related with the
claia of distinctly dsflned meaning which is next to he taken Dp — the
paaslTe, with y&-algn. Thongh very far bom being as widely as»d as the
Utter beside other present-iystecDs, It la In some cases an IntranaltlTe
conjugation by the side of a tranaltlve of aome other class.

Irregularities of the ya-olasB.

763. Tbe roota of this olass ending in am lengthen their rowel
in forming the present-steiii: they are klam, tam, dam, bhram, qam
be quiet, Qnun: for example, Utmyati, gramyati. From tcqam, how-
ever, only k;amyate occurs; and fam Mor makes ^amyati (B.).

764. The root mad has the same lengthening: thne, mitdyatl.
76B. The roots in iv — namely, dlv, aW, anv or ^riv, and

ijtliiT [from which no forms of this class are qnotable) — are written
by the grammarians with Iv, and a similar lengthening in the present-
Bjstem Is prescribed for them.

a. They appear to be properly dlQ etc., alnoa their vocaliied flasl
in other forms le always a-, dlv Is by this proved to have nothing to do
with the aaanmed root dlT ehine, which changes to dyn (S61 d): compare
840 b.

766. pTom the roots J; and tf (also written as Jnr and tlr or tnr)
come tha stems jirya and tirya, and Jirya and tiarTa (the last two only
in RV.); from pf comes plUrya.

767. The root wyadh la abhrevlated to vldb; thus, vidhyatl. And
any root which In other forms has a penolttmate nasal loses It here: thus,
df hya from d^Ah or d^h ; bhrafya from bhraAf or bbraf ; rskiy% Iron
ralU or raj.

oy Google

275 ACCHHTBD yd-CLA8S (PASSIVE). [—771

IX. Accented ra-class: Passive conjugation.
768. A certain foim of preseat-stetn, inflected with middle
endings, is used only in a passive sense, &nd is formed
from all loots fot which there is occasion to make a. passive
conjugation. Its sign is an accented U yi added to the
root: thus, ^^ hanyd from y^ han slay, W^ 5pyi
from v5iq Sp obtain, IRET ex^^ fto™ V^ gTh {or grab)
seize: and so on, without any reference to the class accord-
ing to which the active and middle forms are made.

760. The form of the root to which the pasBive-sigD Is added
is (BiDCe the accent is on the sign) the weak one: thus, a pennltim&te
nasal [e dropped, and any abbreviation which ie made in the weak
forms of the perfect (794], in the aoriat optative (929 b), or before
ta of the pusive participle (964), is made also in the psBsive present-
system: thns, b^j6, from yaftj, badliy& from )<l)andli, aajk from
Vvao, ijyA from VyaJ.

770. On the other hand, a final vowel of a root is in general
liable to the same chaoges as in other parts of the verbal system
where it is followed by y: thus —

a. Final i and u are lengthened^ thuB, miy& from yml; a&yi
from yen;

b. Final S is usually changed to i: thus, diy& from ydl; hiy&
from v^ft: but jiUyi from j/ifiKi and so Uiy&y&, kIiKy&, nmSyi, etc.;

o. Final r i" i" KCoeral changed to ri: thns, kriyi from ykp;
bat if preceded by two consonants (and also. It is claimed, in the root
f), It has instead the gu^a-strengthening: thus, smaryi from ytmf
(the only qnotable case); — and in those roots which show a change
of r to It and ur (so-called ^verbs: see S42), that change is made
here also, and the vowel is lengthened: thus, qlry& from ytj^; pOryi
from ypf.

771. The inflection of the passive-stem is precisely like
that of the other a-stems ; it differs only iu accent from that
of the olasB last given. It may be here presented, therefore,
in the same abbreviated form:

a. Example of inflection: root ^ Ilj make; passive-
stem f^m kriyA:

ioy Google

771 — ] IX. PBEeEHT-STSTEH. 276

1. Fresent IndioatiYe.

». i. ^ p:

kriri ki4;itvalie krly^Klie
etc. etc. etc.

a. pTSBent SubjunotlTe.

b. The forms noticed u (MonrriDg ia the older lasgokge ue alone
here inatanced:

d. p,

1 krlTll kriy^ahU

3 kriyidhvU

' CSi '^''-"^

0. The 3d pi. ending antfit l» foand ouoe (uoyant&l K.).
3. Present Optative.

kriyAya kriy^Tahl kriyfenutlil
ete. etc. ate.

d. No toimt of the puaiTe opt&tive chince to occur In BV. or AT.;
th*T ate toead, howoToi, In the BnhmkDU. GhD. hu once dhmi^ta.

4. Freeeiit ImpertttiTe.
kriyftava kriy^th&m kriy&dtavam

B. Freaent Farttoipld.

e. This is made with the suffix ifR mftna: thus, f^UMim
kriydmS]^.

f. Id Dse, thli putlcipla Is wall dtstlngaJBhed ftom the otlieT putlve
putlclple by iu dUttuottTetr pieaeni meaning: Qtm, kft& done, bntkrljA-
mft^a in proee** of doing, oi being don«.

e. Imperfflot.

&kriye AkrlyKvalil UrlyBmahi

g. The pitiiie-Blgn ie ne^ac leaolTed into la in the Tedi.

77S. The roots tan and khan oBoally form their paBiivea from
parallel roots in &; thus, t&y&ta, khSy&te (but alio tanyate. kbaa-

ioy Google

277 So-called Tbnth or aut^Lxae. [ — 77B

Tftte) ; and dluun, in like muiDer, makes either dlutmyRte or dtamKrite.
The correapontUng fonn to VJwi, namely J Jtyat* (above, 761 b}, ii
Appareotlf a trsnefer to tbe preceding elaaa.

773. By their form, miijkte diet, and dbriy&te matntaint itseff,
it ittad/oft, are pMsives from the toots mj die mi dtaf hold; although
neither is used id a proper passive sense, and mj is not transitive
except in the derivative form jtvp^ (above, 731). With them are to
be compared the stems ft-(Iri7& heed and &-prly& be buty, which are
perhaps peculiar adaptations of meaning of pasBivee from the roots
d^ pitree and pf JiU.

77i, Eitmplea of the tnniteT of stems bam the yi,- m pwiiM
clwa t« the ya- di iatnnsltl*e class were gtven sltoTe (761 b); and it iru
also pointed mit that acUva Instead of middle endlnfB are occaitoBall;, evui
in the eadlei laofnafe, asanmed by forau pi^erly pasalTe; examtilas ate
i dtamftyatl and vy hprnqyat (QB.), bbOyatl (UIID.). In ths eplca,
however (as a paK of thalt genaral coufniioQ Of aetlTe and middle fonna:
BSSft), active endlnga ai« by no m««nt infteqnently taken by the psi«iv«:
thus, Qakyati. QrOyanti, bhrlyantn, IJyimt-, ate

The BO- called Tenth or our-OlMs.

77S. As was noticed above (607), tlie Hindu grammarians — and,
after tbeir example, most European also — recognize yet another
coqjngation-clasB, coordinate with those already described; its stems
show the eUss-sign iya, added to a generally strengthesed root (for
details as to tba strengtheDlng, tee 104S). Though this is no proper
class, but a seoondary or derivative conjugation [Its etene are partly
of causative formation, partly denominative with altered accent) an
abbreviated example of its forms may, for tlie sake of accordance
with other grammars, be added bere.

a. Kxample: root oint think, meditate; stem clnt&jra:

setiTs. mlddlp.

Pies. Indlo. otat&ySiai elnUya

Subj. otnU^&nl oint&yU

Opt. clat&yeyam olnt&yeya

Pple. olnt&yant ointiyam&na

Impf. Aolntayam Aointaye

b. The ^nfleeilon, of eouise, la the tame vith tbit of other tormi from
*,l.i.i(7SS.).

o. The middle paiHciple, in the later language, ia more often made
with Sua IniCead of m&na; thtie, clntayOna: a«e 1043 f.

ioy Google

Tie—] IX. PBESEKT-STflTEK. 278

Utts Of Ihe Present and Imperiect.

776. The naw of the mode-foraiB of the preBent-STfltem have
been already briefly treated In tbe preceding chapter (672 ff.)- The
tense-uHH of the twQ indicative tenaes, present and imperfect, call
here for only a word or two of eiptanation.

777. The present has, besides ita strictly present nse, the same
subsidiary nsea which belong in general to the tenae: namely, the
expression of habitnal action, of fnture action, and of past action in
lively narration.

a> Examples of fataie msftnlng are: itnilh oAd vA imi dnv&te
t4U eri no 'bhlbhavanti (^R.) verify if t&Me build thit up. Dun Otg
uiili itraightteay gei the better of m»; agnir Stmabhavadi pr&d&d yatra
Tft&ohatl nftifadha^ (UBh.) Agni gone hi* ovm pretence lehereeer the
Xitftadhan should desire ; Bvigatadi te 'Stn Ulh karomi tava (R.) vd-
eome to thee; tehat thall I do for theet

b. EiRiDpleB of paetmMntng sre: 4ttar& sAr idhara^ putri tud
dbili^ faye aab&Tatail a4 dheno^ (KT.) the mother woe over, the eon
under; there Dinu lie*, lUce a eoto toith her eatf; prahaaanti oa t&ib
keold abbyaanyanti oK 'pare afcurrata daySdi kecit (MBh.) *oine
ridicule her, aome revile her, tome pitied her; tato yasya vaoanU tatrft
Valambltaa tadi earve tlraakurvanti (H.) thereupon they all /all to
reproa<Aing him by uthoee advice they had lUighied there,

778. Id connection with certain particles, tbe present has rather
more definitely the value of a past tense. Thus;

a. With ptu:^ formerb/: thus, Baptarfin u ba ama vftl pari
rkf ft ity acakfate ((IB.) the *ecen tagee, namely, are of old called the
bear*; tanmstram api oen mahyaih Da dad&ti porS bbavKn (Hfih.)
if you have never before given me even an atom.

b. Wltb the uieTentlve puttde ama: tbna, qr&meqa ba ama v&i
t&d devi jayantl jkd BtfBib jiyyam £a4 r^ayaq ca (^B.) in tmlh,
both god* and eages were icont to win by penance what wa* to be won ;
ftvlft*^ kallBS dyQte Jlyate ama ualM tadft (HBh.) then Nolo, being
poieeteed hg Kali, woe beaten in play.

0. No enmpla of thts last conUiuction la found In either BV. or AT.,
OT slsevheie in the metiiol p*rt* of ths Vedi. In tbe Bnhmuiu, ODljr
habitual action la expiHted by It. At all period! of tbe Ungnige, (be use
of ama *Uh > verb ae pure aiseveratlve particle, with do effect on tbs
teaae-mesnlng. Is very common; and tbe examples later are hardly to be
diitlnguished ^m the present of liielf narration — of vblch tbe vfaole
coDBtrnction la donbtleas a form.

778. The Imperfect has remained unchanged in value through
the whole history of the language: it Is the tense of narration; it
expresses simple past time, without any other implication.

a. Compare what is said later (end of chap. X, and obap, XI.) as to
tbe taluB of the other past tensea, the perfect and aoriat.

ii.zecy Google

Characteristics of the Pehfeot.

CHAPTER X.

THE PEEFECT-STSTEM.

780. Thb petfect-system in the later language, as baa
been seen above (B3B), consists only of an indicative tense
and a participle — both of them in the two voices, active
and middle.

a. In the oldest language, tbe perfect has also its modei and
its augment -preterit, or pluperfect, or is not less full in its apparatus
of forms than is the preBeDt-Bystem (see SOS CF.).

781. The foimation of the perfect is essentially alike
in all veibs, differences among them being of only subord-
inate consequence, or having tbe character of irregularities.
Tbe chaiacteristics of the formation are these:

1. a stem made by reduplication of the root;

2. a distinction between stronger and weaker forms of
stem, the former being used (as in presents of the First
or non-o-conjugationj in tbe singvl&i active, tbe latter in
all other persons;

3. eadiogs in some lespecta peculiar, unlike those of
the present;

4. tbe frequent use, especially in the later language, of
a union-vowel ^ i between stem and endings.

7S2. Reduplication. In roots beginning with a con-
sonant, the reduplication which forms the perfect-stem is
of the same character with that which forms the present-
stem of the reduplicating conjugation-class (see 648] — but
with this exception, that radical Q a and ^ ft and ^ r (or
5^ ftr) have only sj a, and never ^ i, as vowel of the re-
duplicating syllable: thus, from )/q PT_fill comes the preaent-
.stem f^q pipr> but tbe perfect-stem tpn papr; from yij\ mS

Diaii.zecy Google

78a—] Z. Perfeot-ststeh. 28tf

mstaure comes the piesent-Btem fifljf mimS, but the perfect-
stem ifiTT mamK; aad so on.

a. IcieguUrltles of TooMTKhlnitlsl coniiHiaDti will b«gl<enbe)o«, 784.

7S8. For roots b^Qniog mth a vowel, the tules of
reduplication ate these:

a. A root with initial 9 a before a single final consonant
repeats the ^ a, which then fuses with the radical vowel to ^&,
(throughout the whole inflection): thus, iffl^' ftd horn v^ »d
eai; and in like manner CfH ij, ETR ftn, tTTH Sb, sn^ Bb. The
root ?? T forms likewise throughout STF^ Br (as if from ^ ar),

b. A root with ^ i or 7 a before a single final conso-
nant follows the same analogy, except in the strong forms
(sing, act.); here the vowel of the radical syllable has gu^,
becoming ^ e oi ^ o; and before this, the leduplicatii^
vowel maintains its independent form, and is separated bam
the radical syllable by its own semivowel : thus, from i^
if comes ^ If in weak forms, but ^(^ iyep in strong; Irom
yZ^ uo, in like manner, come ^Si^Qo and 3?)? uvoe. The
root ^ i, a single vowel, also falls under this rule, aad forms
^ ty (y added before a vowel] and ^ iya.

o. Roots which begin with vowels long by nature or by
position do not in general make a peifect-system, but use
instead a periphrastic formation, in which the perfect tense
of an auxiliary verb is added to the accusative of a verbal
noun [see below, ehap. XV.: 1070 ff.).

d. To tbtg nde, howeveT, y&p oilain (pratubly crlgiiuJlr ap: 1067 f)
eonBtitute* tm eicepUoii, maUog the eonaUnt peifect-sMm ftp (u if from
ap; Kbove, a). Alio are met irith 1^6 (BT.) and I<^re from yl^ and
Irip* (V.) f"" y^-

e. For the peealiu ledoplioatlon ftn, helonglng to eetttin wots widi
Initial Tovela, aee btlow, 788.

784. A nnmber of roots beginniag with va and ending with a
single coQsoiunt, wlitch in various of their verbal forms »nd deriv-
stivea abbreviate the va to u, do ft also in the perfect, and an
treated like roots with iaitial u (above, 788 b), except that they retain

ioy Google

281 Bedupuoation. [—788

the full form of root in tbe strong peraonB of the Biognlu active.
ThiiB, from y'rao ipeak come uo and avao; from yv»a Aoeil cone
flf and avas; and bo on.

»• The roots showing this abbreviation are tao, ts^ vad, ro^i
vaa, Tabi and tB Keavt Is said to follow tbe same role.

b. A single root beginning with ya, namelf j^ ojf^, has tbe
aame oootraetioD, fonning tbe stems lyaj and U-

O, OccMioiuI ex<ieptlani ire met wltb ; m, vaTftea and Tavakfi
(RV.)i vavfipa ind Tav&ha and vaTSbatua (E. and i»ut); yeji (T.).

785. A namber of roots having ya after a first initial coDBonaut
take 1 (from the y) instead of a in the reduplicating syllable: thus,
from v'vyao comes vlvyao; from WJt comes plpyK.

a. Tbeae tooti are vyao, vyath, vyadh, vyil, jy&, pyft. syand;
and, In the Teda, alao ty^, with oyn and dyut, irhich hare the lOM-
Tovel n. Other iporadlc cues occur.

b. A single root with va is treated in the same way: namely
Bvap, which forma sofrap.

o. Tbne rooti arc for the moat pan abbrerfated in (be weak forma;
Me below, 794,

7B6. A considerable number of roots have Id the Veda a long
vowel in their reduplication.

a. Thnt, of roots redapllMtlng with ft : kan, Up, gf^b, tfp, tpf,
drb, dbf, dbn< nam, mab, mfj, mi^, ran, radb, rabh, vafio. Tan,
TAf, vaa elotht, V&9, v|j, vft, vrdb, vj^, <)»Aprtoaii, aah, skambh.
Some of tbeae occur ouly in taolaled cases; man} bave alio (onna wilb
ahoit vowbI. Host ue Vedic only; but dSdbiira fi common alio Id the
Brghmana Ungaage, and la eTen foand later. Aa to jfigf, see 1030 a.

b. or roots reduplicating witb i : the so-called loots [676} didbl and
dldl, which mske the perfect from the same stem «lth the present: thus,
dlditba, didtya; didbima, tfidbyns (alio dldbljrua, dldiyua). Bat
pipl has plpye, plpyns, etc., tdtb ehort 1. In AY. occur* once JDu^a,
and in AB. (^and AA.) bibblya.

O. Of roots lednpllcating with tl: to, JO, and ^ (or QVS).

767. A few TOota beginning with the (detlTative: 4S) palatal mote*
and uplrttlon show a reTersion to the more original guttural in the radical
ijllable after the rednplUation : tbaa, )/ol forma «ikl; yoit forms oikit;
yji form* jigi; ybt forms Jighl; yiitca forme Jagban [and the same
reTeialoaa appear in other rednpllested forms of these roota; 816,1). A
root dft protect la said by the grunmarlane to form digl ; but neither root
nor perfect Is quotable.

788. A small number of roots witb initial a or r (Bx) show the
anomalons rednplicatlon Sn iu the psrfect.

a. Thus (the foimi occarrlng mainly In the older Ungnage only):

ioy Google

788—] X. Pbrpeot-btsteii. 282

t^afij 01 aj, which foiniB the piei. an&ktl, bas the peifnct Snaflja
&nd finnjd etc. (with (uu^& ind an^r&t};

yof ottotn (from *hlch coiaee odc« in RV, aa&^Kinahftl), hu the
veik loratn Aiaqtna etn. [with opt. Snafyfiin), Saa^d etc. (and LgS.
hu finaf adhve), and (he aliong fome ftn&Aqa and finSf a — along irith
the regular B/jO, etc.;

Y^^ ((torn which cornea once p^idliat) haa ftnfdliaB and ftnrdhe;

y^fo 01 arc hw Knro&s and &aja6, and Utec fiiiaroa and Saarooa;

yarb haa On TS.) Snrh&s;

RnBIia (RT., odcb) has been teferaed to * root all, eliewhere ouknown,
and explained aa of thia faimation; bat with altofetbei doabtfal piopriety.

b. The latei grammar, then, acta ap the rnle that roots begnnning
with a and ending with more than one oonaonint have &n aa their regular
rednpHcation ; and aueh perfect! are taoght from roots like akf, Uj, and
aiic or aO; bat tha only other quotable forms appear to be Suarohat
(HBh.) and Onarfat (TA.) ; which are arcoidlngi; nckonsd aa "plaperfeots".

788. One or two indiTidnal cases of irregalarity »re the followingi

a. The extremely common root bliu be has the anomalODS redn-
plication ba, forming the stem babhfi; and, in the Veda, f'an forma
in like manner eaaQ.

b. The root bhf bear haa In the Veda the anomalons lednplieatlon Ja
(aa also In Intenilve: lOOS); bat RV. haa once aleo the legnlar babhre, and
pple babhrft^.

e. The root ((hiv ipmo forma either tllfthlv (^B. et tl.) or (ifthlv
(not quotable).

d. Tlvabv^ (KV., once) 1« doabtleas participle of /rao, with
irregntar lednplicatlon (aa In the preaent, 990).

780. Absence of reduplication is met with in some oases. Thus:

a. The root vid hum has, from the earliest period to the latest,
a perfect without reduplication, but otherwise regutarlj made and
inflected: tbna, vida, v6ttha, etc., pple vldviAa. It has the mean-
ing of a present. The root vid ^nd forms the regular vlvAda.

b. A few other appnentl; perfect forms lacking a tedapUealion ate
found in RV. : they are tak^athua and takqna, ram&tua, akambb&tbna
and akambbuB, nlndlma (roc nlnldlma P), dbi^e and dhlre (P ) dh&),
and vidti and artalxe (P see 618). And AV. ST. hiTc oetatoB. The
participial words dUqvaAs, miipivaAs, SftbT^S are common In the oldest
Ungoage; and RV. has once Jftniifaa (v'Jfift), and kbldvas (toc), perhapa
for olkbidvas.

o. A few aporadlc cues alio ate qnotabte from the later langnaga,
especially from the epics: thus, kar^atue, oe^f ""^ oeffatuB, bhrS-
jatus, earpa, qaAaua and fafiaire, dtav&Aalra, Bra&slre, jalpire,
edhire; also the pplee faABlTftfts and dar^lvKfis, the latter being not
Infrequent.

ioy Google

283 Stronh akd Weak Stbm-fokms. [—798

791. Fat to uiomtlong cue oi vo of Tedaplkitsd piepoBittoD, eee
beloir, 1067 f.

792. Stioug and weak stem-foTtna. In the three
peisons of the singulai active, the lootrsyllable is accented,
and exhibits usuallj a stronger form than in the rest of the
tense-inflection. The diffeienoe is effected paitly by strength-
ening the toot in the thiee peiaons leferted to, paitly by
weakening it in the others, paitly by doing both.

793. As regards the strengthening:

a. A final vowel takes either the gn^s oi vrddM change
in Ist sing, act., gu^a in 2d, and vrddhi in 3d: thus, fiom
1^ bbl, Ist ^ hitihi 01 f^ bibldi; 2d ^ hibh6; 3d
fsp^ bibbRi; from v^ ky, Ut tJc^,^ oak&r or *l*l^ oakfir,
2d Tjtfi^' oak&r, 3d -f\4\\\ oakSr.

b. But the u of fbha remains uDchaaged, and adda v before a
vowel- an ding: thas, babhttva etc.

o. Medial ^ a before a single final consonant follows
the analogy of a final vowel, and is lengthened or viiddhied
in the 3d sing., and optionally in the first: thus, from yrJ'J
tap, Ist rra^I tat6p or fTrH'^^tatSp, 2d FTrP? tatdp, 3d ?THTO^
tatSp.

d* In the suiter langaige, howeTer, ibe vesker of the two forma
kllowed hj tbese mloa in the But person U almost escluaivetT in use: thus,
lat only blbhAya, tatipa; 3d bibbitya, tat^po. Exception* tro oakftra
*nd Jagr^a (donbtfnl resdlog) In AT., oak&ra in A^S. tnd BAL'. fgB.
eakars), jlgaya In A(S., u drst persons.

e. A medial short vowel has in all three persons alike
the go^a-stiengthening (where this is possible: 240): thus,
from y^ drub comes ^<i^ dudT6h ; from yf^ vl^ comes
f^c^l viT^9 ; from y^iH krt comes ^^ oakart.

f. An iDitial abort vowel before a single final conaonant Is to be
treated like a medial, bnt the qnotable examples are very few: Danely,
lyafa from yi^ letk, uvooitha and uvooa from yao, uvofa from
yof. Aa to roota 1 and p, wboae vowels are both initial and final,
see above, 783 a, b.

g. Theie ralea ite said by the griDuntiitin* to apply lo the 2d king.
4lir*;s when it hu simple tha u ending; if It lia£ itha [below, 707 d).

L,j,i,.ec.y Google

199—] X. PBRPB0T-8T8TEIi. 284

the accsnt la ftllowed to fall on any one of tli« ByllsUw of the word, uii
the loDt'Bylltble If ansc«ented hu eomstkines the weak rona (nuaety, Id
contisRted etemB with a (oi medi&l a: below, 794 a-, and Id ceitala otber
leibs, Bs viidjitha]. The esTliBi Ungntge, howeiCT, affoide no example
of a ^ sing., what«T«r Iti ending, aocented on any othai than the ladinl
■Tllabla, oi raiUog to conform (o tbe (olei of itrengtheniDg as glvaD abofs
(I. ^ o, .).

b, Ocuilona] Inatancea of BtFengtheoing in other th&n the slngnlu
pereona are met irlth ; thoa, yuyoplma and -vive^us (RV), paspkTfoB
(ReU.), and, In the epici, ookartus and otOurtlJta, Mtkarf&tua, Jn^iu^
bire, nan&mira, blbbedtu, TftTUiatOB, viva^atuB, v-avarfiui. The
loots df, pr, and 7r, and optionally Jf, are aald by the grammariana to
ba<e tbe atrong atem In weak fbrna ; but no examplet appear to be quotable.
AV., howeieT, hu once Jabarua [probabl; a falae reading); and in the
later langaag* occur oaakara (f^ scatfer) and taatare.

i. The root mfj hae (ae In tbe proient-syatem : 637) vrddbl tnateul
of ipuja In strong forma: thna, mam^Ja; and v'gob (aim u In pteaant:
746 o) haa Q Inatead ot o (but also Jagnbe E.).

794. Ab regards tbe weakening in weak forme;

a. It has been seen above (788 b) OuA roots beginning with i or
n foM rednplicating and radical syllable together to I or q in the
weak forme; and (784) that roots contracting va and ya to a or 1
)n the reduplication do it also in the root in weak forms, the two
elements here also coalescing to Q or I.

b. A few roota hsTing ya and va after a first initial conaonant, and
reduplicating from the aemivowel (IBS'), contract the ya and va to 1 and
a: thoa, vlvio from j/vyac, vividb from yvyadh (but vivyadbus
UBh.), sn^np from i^arap. The ettnnded roota Jy&t pyS, vyft, qvi,
hT& abow a aimilai apparent contraction, making their weak forms tiom
the almpUr roota JI, pi, VI, fil, bQ, while bvS maet and fvA may get
their atrong forma slaa from the aame (and oaly jUyK& 1° qa»table from
the othert).

C. The root grabh or grata (If it be written thoa: eee 7B8a) con-
tracta to Krl^i making the three forma of «tem JagrUi (1st and 2d slag.
act.), Jagrib (3d), and JajTh; but praob (U It be so written : see 768 a)
remains unchanged thioogboni.

d. Soma roota omit In weak forms of this tense, «r la songe of tham,
a naaal which le found ia It^ atrong forms; thus, we hare 0&kra<i6 etc.
(RV.) from vtrand; tatasr^ (RV.) from ytaia; dada^viAa (RV.) from
ydaA;; bedh^, bedb6, etc. (AV.) from )/baiidb; aejae (^B.) Crom
VsafUi oaakabb&ni (AV.) from i/ekambb; tastabhus etc (T.),
tastabh&n& (V.B.), from y'stambb. Compare alio 786 a.

e. A number of roots having medial a between single oonaonants
drop that Towel. These are, in the later laogaage, gtun, kban, Jan.

ioy Google

285 Strohq akd Wbak Steu-fobhs. [—796

hKD, ghM; the^ form tbe weak stems Jagm, cMiUm, Ji^O. Jaghn
(comure 8S?), }alai (eoBpan 640]: but RV. bu onoe J^anua.

CtJJn tbe old ItDgnage ue foand in like mumei manm&tlia >nd
ma%zkSt« fiom y^non; ya-ra* ttom >'t(ui; tatne, tatniqe, tatniro
rtom ytcm (boBlde tatane, and tate, u If ttam ytS); paptlma ind
pt^Ub iDd pkptiTlEAB (ram Vpat (bciida pet-fonoB ; below, g) ; papn6
from ifan; Baqolma uid bb^oub, aaqoe sod safoirA, tiom Vsao.

(g.) Roota In gODeral having medial a before a aingle final con-
sonant, and beginning also witti a single consonant that is repeated
onobanged in the ledaplicaiion — that is, not an aspirate, a gattuial
mate, or h — contract their root >nd_rfldnpli-C*t'9.''. together into one
ay liable, harfng e'^fi'lts vowel: thus, yaaA forms the weak stem eed,
ypao Torms peo, yyttm forms yvm; and so on.

h. Gertiln looU not baving the form here deflned ue decUted by the
giammBiliD* to andetga the eune contrtatlon — mait of them optlonallyj
•nd examples of them are tn general of very rare occnrteQce. They are as
follows: r^ (K.C.) and rSdh (radhf), notvlihitanding thelt long Towel;
put?, pbal Obelire 0.), bhtO (occurs ftam RV. down), thongb their Ini-
tial is changed In lednpllcatlon; trap, tniB (timuE.O.). QTatb, Byam,
Bvan, thongh thej begin with more than one eonaonant; dambb (debb&e,
BV., from the weaker dabh), thoogh it ends with more than one; and
bhram (btaramoB etc KSS.). btarft], Krantli, btsIU, in iplte of more
reasons than one to the oontnry. And fB. has aeJOB from VBBiU, and
EB. bas qremiis fitom y^ram. On the other hand, RT. haa onca rarabb-
mk, and R. has papatua, for petos, tioja /pat.

L This contraction Ig allowed also In 3d ting, act. when the ending
1b Itha: thtia, tenltha beside tatantha (bnt no examples are quotable
fnini the older langnage).

J. The roots qa; and dad (from dft: 872) are said to lejeot the
contraction; bat no perfect forms of either appMC to have been met with
In nse.

k. From ytf (or tar) occurs teras [R.)i and Jeros from yjf Is
aathorizcd by the grammarlaaB — both against the general analogy of roots in f.

1. Boots ending in S lose their ft before all endings beginning
with a vowel, including those endings that assame the nnton-TOwel 1
(788) — nnlesB in the latter case it be preferred to regard the i aa a
weakened fonn of the ft.

795. Endings, and theii union with the stem.
The general scheme of endings of the perfect indicative has
been alread)^ given (55S c]; and it has also been pointed out
(643 a] that toots eading in ^ A have ^ Su in Ist and 3d
sing, active.

ioy Google

796— J X. PBKFBCT-B7BTEN. 286

a. Tbe ending maB Inste&d of ma Is fonod Id ^nqrumaa (E.G.).
Foithe alleged (MscmreDce of ^ve Insteul otdbv* In 3d pi. mid., eeeSSe c

796. Those of the endings which b^n with a con-
sonant — namely E[ tha, ^ va, IT ma in active ; H se, sj^
Tahe, R% mahe, 3 dhve, ^ re in middle — are veiy often,
and in the later language usually, joined to the base with
the help of an interposed union-vowel ^ i.

a. The nalon-ioirel 1 is found wtdel; otei also in otbet ptkrU of the
general leibsl syitem : namely, in the aiUluit aorlEt, the futnies, and the
lerbal noani and adJectiTee (as also In other clasaea of derliatlTe ttcms).
Ill the later langnage, a certain degree of ooReapondence i< seen amoug the
different part^ of the same veib, ae regarda their oae or non-nae of the
connective: but thla corteapoD deuce is not ao close that general rules res-
pecting it «an be glien with advantage; and it will be beat to treat each
fonnation by itieU.

b. The perfect is the tense in which the use of 1 bu establisbed
iteelf most widely &Dd firmlj in the later language.

797. The most important rules as to the use of ^ i in
the later language are as follows:

a. The "^ re of 3d pi. mid. has it always.

b. The other consonant-endings, except ^ tha of 2d
sing, act., take it in nearly all verbs.

o. But it is rejected thronghoat by eight verbs — namely Icp make,
bhf bear, sf go, vf dtooee, dm run, 9ra hear, stu praite, srajlou)]
and it ie allowably (not nsnallyj rejeet«d by some others, in general
accordance with their nsage in other formations.

d In 2d sing, act., it is rejected not only, by the eight
verbs just given, but also by many others, ending in vowels
or in consonants, which in other formations have no ^ i;
but it is also taken by many verbs which reject it in other
formations; — and it is optional in many verbs, including
those in StT fi (of which the ^ S is lost when the ending
is ^ itba), and most of those in ^ i, | I, and 3' u.

e. The lulea of the grammartaua, eapecially aa reguds the nae oF tha
or itba, lun out Into infinite detail, and are not wholly oonHatent with
one anothei; and, as the forms are very Infrequent, it la not possible to
criticise the statements made, and to tell how fai they are founded on the
facts of uaage.

i, Google

287 Endinob. [— SOO

f. With tbia i, a final radical i or i is not combined, bnt chang-
ed into y or iy. The Q of ybbH becomes Qt throughout before a

798. Id the older language, the usage is in part quite other-
wise. Thus :

a. la the RV., the anion-^owel i ia taken by moti ending In cod-
■onantt proTided ths last gyllablc of the Etem it t heiTf one, bat not other-
wise; thua, iaitha, uTooitha, viv^ditba, bat tat&nttut and vlvy&ktha;
ncim&. paptiml^ aedima. ynyopimi, but Jaganma, Jagrblun&, ynrui-
ma; aoif^, Ji^fii^d, sastthlqe, bnt vivitae and dad^k^i ; babboJmUie
and ija^admahe etc. (no example* of Ivabe oi Imalie ebance to oeeni,
not any of either idhT« or dtave); ijiti, Jaj&lr^, yetird, tatakqlri,
but c&k}pr6, vividr^, duduhrd, pasprdhr^, tatasrd (and ao on:
tneety-twa forou). The only exception in BT. ia v^ttba riom j/vid,
withoot i (In Bt., also Sttha from yali: below, &01 a). Th« otbei Vedic
teita present nothing tncoDBistent with tbia tale, but In the Bcabmanas 3d
pi. forma in ire aie made after light ayllablea also: thua, sasfjire, bubadh-
ire, rnyujlre, mradhira.

b. In roota ending wltb a vowel, the early Daage la more.neuly like
the later. Tbnai for roota in & the rale la the aune (except that no 2d
alng. in itha ia met with), aa dadlilm&, dadlLi;^, dadhldhvi, dadliird
(the only peraona with 1 quotable from RV. and AV.; and RY. baa dadhre
twice); — roota in ^ *ppe" also to follow the later rale; aa oakffi,
papFfe, vftTTf^, vavpoUie, bat dadtari^e and Jabhrl^, and in 3d
pi, mid. botb oabTli4 and dadbrire-, — yhbA hu both babhritba
(uanally) and babhtivitha, but only babbaTlm& (AV.). Bat there are
found, againat the later mlea, su^uma, olcytiqe, Jutauri, and JataOrA,
without i: the tnataneea are too few te fonnd a role upon.

79B. The ending riti of 3d pi. mid. la found In RV. in aix forma:
namely, olMtrlta, jafcbhrlr^, dadrire, bubhujrlrd, vlvldrlre, eaaiij-
rlre; to which SV. adda dudultrire, and TB. dadrfrlre.

800. Examples of inflection. By way of illustra-
tion of the rulea ^ven above may be given in full the per-
fect indicative inflection of the following verbs:

a. As example of the normal inflection of a root with
final consonant, we take the root STI bndh &notc: its strong
form of perfect-stem is <^4l^ bub6dh; weak form, ^^
bnbudh.

babddha bubadhlvi •dhim& bnbadbe -dhlT&he -dtaim&tae

ioy Google

800—] X. PBSFB<7r4r8TKH. 288

bal>6dbitlia -dh&tbnB -dbk bnbadhlf^ -dhJUia •dhidtavi

babbdha -dbAtiu -dbAa babndb6 -dbit« -diitri

b. Tbe UMrted i&iiet]' ol posilble aecsDt to 2d ling. »t. (iboTe 788 g)
needs to be noted both Ln tfali Uld li) the lemiinlng ptndlgmi,

0. As example of the noimal inflection of a root with
final i or u-vowel, we may take the root ^ nl lead: its forms
of stem are i^FRT nlndr or ft^ni nii^y, and ^^ atid.

nin&ra, nlnitTa ninrlvi ninyimi ninyi nlnytT&lM uinrimihs
nln^ths, nln^ltha nlnrAthns nlnyA nlnyl;^ nlnylttba ninyldlivi

ninitya ninyitiui niity6s ninr^ ninyito nlnjiri

d. Tlie root krl would mnke (129 aj in weak fonns oUcrl;lvi,
olkrlr&toB. olkriyns, etc.; and yhbXt is inflected u follows in the
active (middle forms not quotable):

1 babhdva babbuvivi babhtlvlm&

2 babhiitha, babhAvltha babhQTithoB babhaT4

3 babhdva babhQ vitas babhilT^

Other roots Id a or n change this to nv before the initial vowel of
an ending.

e. As example of the inflection of a root ending in ^ 8,
we may take ^ dS ffive: its forms of stem are ^ dadS and
^ dad [or ^ dadi: see above, 784, 1].

^ ^

^

t

^^ ^it'%

dadS& dadtri

dodimi

dad*

^^■^ ^^^

^

(t*

^ ^

daditha. dadlthi dad&thus

dadi

dadif^

d«diUu dsUcUTi

^ ^^^

^.

^

ws <©

dadftvi daditus

dadua

dxU

d»dtt« d«dir«

f. The BY. ku on» papri t«i pq)Tt& (and •)«&* fttr JaUiP).

ioy Google

289 fixAJO'LBS OF Inflection. [ — 800

1"^ As example of a loot with medial Q a showing fusioD
of loot and leduplicatioD, resulting in medial ^ e, in the
weak foims (794 g), we maj take FH tan stretch: it£ forme
of stem aifl ^rR tatto oi RrTH tatKn, and ^^ten.
> FTfPT. fTfTH ^ftej rri^tr ^ ^ft^^" ?rf-I*1%

tat&na, tatiuia tenivk tenlm& ten6 tenlv&he tenlm&he

tat&ntha, tenitU tan&tliiu ten& tenif^ tenitbe tenidlivi

tatina ten&tna tenua ten6 tenSt« tenir6

h. The root Jan, with the others which espel medial a id weak
fonas (7640), makes Ja)&ntha or ji^filtha, Jajfiivi, JaJfLdBi Jajfli,
JaJfUmihs, JajfUrd; and ho od.

i. As example of a root with initial cf va contracted
to 3 u in the reduplication, and contracted with the ledu-
plication to ^ Q in weak forms (784J, we may take ^ vao
speak: its forms of stem are 3^^uv&c or Jc(|tl uviU), and
3^ tic,

nv&ca, uT&oa noiTii Qolmi Oai aolT&he aolmUia

uv&ktha, nv&oitha Qo&tlinB flo& aolqd uo^tha noidhT^

3 3STra ■3i^^^ '^^-, "^ >A^irt -A (^7

UTROR ncatas uoub ao4 Qcite Qoird

j. In like maDDer, yjai forms iy&ja oi lyaJa, iy^tha or iyUitha;

I}Ai Ql^i and BO on; ^^nc has avoca and UT6cltIiR in the strong

forms, and all the rest like vno.

(t) Of the four roots in H r mentioned at 797 o, the

inflection is as follows:

oak&ra, o&kara oakfvA oak)rm4 eaikxi oak^&he oakrmAhe

s g^ ^shy+1 ^isTT ^^ ^rara ^I^

oak&Ttha 0&kr4thuB oakrit oakf^ 6 cakiathe oakrdhv^

oak£ra oalcr&tuB oakrus caiire oakrate cakrir6

Whitney, Gnmiur. 3. ed. ' ' IS

D,j,i,...., Google

800— J X. Pbkfbct-ststbm. 290

1. 0£ the lootB ID n r in general, the first persons are
made as foUows:

dodliAra. dAdbAra <Udlinv4 dmdhHmA dwUirA dadhrlT&h* dadlirlmibe
m> We miT fartheT add here, Badly, the iietiTe laflection (the middle
i« not In nie) ot the peirect of as bi, irhleh (like babhltva and oaMbi^,
glTsn above) is freqaently employed u m ■nxfUuy.

1 ixA ftBiv4 Katmi

2 ialthn U4tbuB ia&

3 asa Bs&tos Uus

801. A few miscellaneous iiiegulaiitiee calr still (or
notice:

a. The root ah »peaA occare onlj in the perfect iDdicstive, and
only in the 3d persone of all Dumbers and in the 2d alug. and dn.,
in active (and in 2d eing. the h is irregularly changed to t before
the ending): thus, Kttha, jEha; Ahathue, fihatua; £h&B (in V., only
£ha and ShAe are met with),

b, t'tom yv& weave, the 3d pi. set. fivua OEonra in BV., and no
other perfect farm appesra to have been met with In nse. It li allowed
by Che gramiDariauB to be Inflected regularly as vS; and also kb way (the
preient-Btem U w&ya : 761 f), with Gontracllon ofwa to n in weali torms ;
and further. In the weak fome, as simple u.

0. The root vyft envelop has in RV. the peifMt-tOTou vlwyatltils and
tItit^, and no otberg have been met with In uae; the pammariins leqalre
the strong fonna to be made from wyay, and the weak from tI

d. The root i go forma In RV. and AV. the 2d alng. aet. iy4tha
beiide the regalar ly6tlia; and beilde iiird from ^^, RT. baa ureral
times erlrd.

e. RV. hat an anomalous accent In d^d^qe and didpfre (beaide
dadfkqd) and the pple d&dTf&na- And ciketa (once, beaide dkita) la
paihapa a kindred anomaly.

f. Peraana of the perfect from the ir-foima ot rootB in changeable f
(S48) are tltlrua and tistire (both RV.); and tbey have cortoiponding
paiticlplea.

g. The bastard root iir^u (Tt3) is said by the giammariana to make
the perfeet-atem vLn^unn; the roots m^JJ and nog are said to Insert i
nasal In the 2d sing, active, when the ending Is simple tha: tbna, ma-
maaktha, nanaAftha (also mamajjitha and neqltlia).

h. Farther may be noted Basajjatue (MBh.: yeafij, which has In
passive the aeoondary form saJJ), rurundhatus (R), and dudubaa (BhP).

1. The anomalans ajagrabbfii^aiii (AB. vl. 3b) seema a farmatian on
the perfset-atem (but perhaps for ajlgrabbif^ail, deeld. ?).

ioy Google

Ferfeot Participle.

B02. The ending of the active participle is ^fH tSAb
(that is to say, in the ationg foims: it is contracted to 3?
lif in the weakest, and replaced bj ef?J y&t in the middle
foims: see above, 468 ff.). It is added to the weak form
of the perfect stem — as shown, for example, in the dual
and plural of the active inflection of the given verb; and,
roeohanically, the weakest participle-stem is identical vrith
the 3d pi. active. Thus, ^tiUlH bubudhvSAs, fMHl^lfl
ninlvi&B, g^jcftn cakrvR£kB.

903. If the weak form of the perfect stem is monosyl-
labic, the ending takes the union-vowel ^ i [which, however,
disappears in the weakest cases): thus, FTf'i^n tenivSA,a,
■JTRinIh noivSAs, nf^Rt? JajfiiT5]^, Qlf^eilH ftdivK^ (from
y^ id: 788a), and so on; ^1^1^ dadiviA^ and its like,
from roots in ^ &, are to be reckoned in the one class or
the other according as we view the ^ i as weakened root-
vowel or as union-vowel (794, 1).

a. Bat piTtieiples of which the perfect-aUm Is mouoarlltbli; hy 4b-
sence of the redapllcsdan do not tike the union-towel; thns, vidvaAs,
Slid in v.. dft^lt&B (SV. (UqivaAs), nu^v^B, aShv^B, khld-
v&Ab(?); uid R. bt» (Im dadv^fia (AV. dadivaAs and oace dad&v^AB)
horn ydft (or dad: 872); sn &ii-a9vSAB Cv'aq eal) occnn in TS. and
TB. B«t AV. baa viqlv^As and varjivll^ (la negative fem. ivarju^i).

804. Other Vedic iTragularitiea calling for notice aie few. The long
vowel of the radopIUatlan (786) appeirg In the pirtleiple ii In the iiidlcatiTe:
thug, vavfdhTttAB, B&aatavlbbs, JQJuvlbbB. RV. and AT. have BasavifiB
from i/san ot bS. RV. makes tbe ptiTtlclpUI foims of ytf or tar from
different modlflcitions of the root: thns, tttirvAAa, but tatar&^BB. Re-
specting tlie occasional exchange! of strong and weak stem in Inflection,
see above, 482 o.

SOB. a. From roots gam ftud ban the Veda makeg the strong stems
jngaavaAs (aa to then, aeeSiSa) and jacbaavltAs ; the later language
allows either these or the more regalar JagmlvKAB and JaghuivaAs (the
weakest atem-fonns being ererywheie Jafmuf and jagbnuq). RV. baa
also tatanvi&a.

19*

Digii.zec.y Google

806—] X. Pbrfbot-btsteu. 292

b. Fiom thiee looU, vid ,^nd, viq, ind dfq, the lalei Unguige tUoni
ittODg puticipl«-iteia« to be mide vitli tbe nnlon-vowel, u veil u in the
TcgBln manner wlthoat tt; thua, TiviglvSAB or viviQTSAs; dadrQlTtbha
occara In KtbU. PB. bu once oloohidiTfiAB.

80e. The ending of the middle participle is Kna. It
is added to the weak form of perfect-stem, as this appears
in the middle inflection: thus, ^3UH bubudhftnd, (+^JH
ninyftnd, ^^ dadftnA, rHR tenSni, sT^H jajfiKni, ^'^H

a. In the Veda, the long rednplioating vowel li shown by many middle
putfoiplei : thus, TaT7db&n&, vftTaBftnA, dKdfh&fii, tiltnjftn&i etr.
HT. baa 9aqa;&n& tiom yi;t (nlth irregular ffu^a, aa in the preient-
Byatem: SSSJi UatiriL^ from yatr; and oace, with mSna, aaB|iDft9&
from Ybj, a tew participles witb long Tedupl. vowel ba<e it trregululy
accented (as !f lather Intenaive: 1013): thua, tlituJSiia (alio tatnJAnil,
b^ibadb&na, q^adfina, QlSQi^&na, giifuv&ua.

807. In the later language, the perfect participles have nearly gone
out of use; eren the active appears but rarely, and is made from
very few verbs, and of the middle hardly any examples are quotable,
save such as the proper name ynyudhSna, the adjective anuoKna
Uamed in icripture, etc.

Uodea of the Perfect.

808. Modes of the perfect belong only to the Vedic langasge,
and even are seldom found outside of the Big- Veda

a. To diaw the line sviely and distinctly between tbaae and the
mode-forms from other lednplicated tense-stems — the present-ttem of the
rednpllcating clus, the rednplloaled aorlst, and the intensive — is not pos-
sible, since no criterion of form exists which does not in gome cases faii, and
sluce the geueial eqnlralence of modal forma &om ail stems (582), and the
nommon use of tbf> perfect u a present In the Veda (823), deprive na of
a criterion of meaning. There can be no reasonable doubt, however, that
n conaiderable body of forms are to be reckoned here; optatives like &aa-
QyBm and babhOyOs and babhilyat, Imperatives lilie babhQta, sQbJanc-
tives like JabhArat, show such dUtinctlie characteristics of the perfect
formation that by their analogy other similar words are confidently classed
as belonging to the perfect

809. The normal method of making such forms would appear
to be as follows: &om a reduplicated perfect-stem, as (for example)
mnmuo, an imperative would be made by simply appending, as
usual, the imperative endings; the derived enbjunctive mode-stem
would be mum6oa (accented after the analogy of the strong forms

ioy Google

293 Modes, [—818

of the perfeot lodioative), uid would take either primary or secondary
endiugB; and the optative mode-atems would be mTunuoya in the
active, and miunu<d (accent on personal endiogs) in the middle-

And the great majority of the forms io question (about three
qnartera) are made in these ways. Thus:

810. Examples of the regular subjunctive formation are:

a, with secondary endings, actUe: 2d ling., papT&thas, oftk&nas,
m&inUuui, pipr&yae, bnbodhas, rftr&^BS; 3d ilDg.,oftk&nHt, jnbh&rat,
r&r&^at, B&s&hat, paep&ifat, pipr&yat; lit pi., cftk&nSma, tat&QSma,
9ng&viina; 3d pi., tat4naii, papr&thnii (other penouB do not occdt).
This ii the Urgett clus o[ cue»,

b. witb primary endinga, acdie: here aeem to belong only dftdhAr-
fatl and vav&rtatl: coiopaie the formation with different accent below,
81) a.

o. of middle forms obcdi only the 8d sing. taUtpate, faQ^otate,
Tuyojate. Juj6^te (SV. ; BV. haa JiUo^ate); and the 3ii pi. cftUtnanUt
tat&nanta (and psihapg two or three othera: below, 811 b, end).

811> Bot not a few anbjnnctiies of other formation occur; tbaa:

a. With Btrengthened root-syllable, as abOTe, bnt with accent on the
leduplieation (as In tbe majority of pTMenl-rorms of the reduplicating clua:
above, 646]. Here the forms with primary endings, andTS, preponderate,
and are not very rare: for example, jujofasl, Jojofatl, J^ofathas,
Jnjo^atha (other persona do not occur). With secondary endings, J^oqas,
jAjo^at, and JuJOf an are the form* that belong moat dlstinrtly bnie (since
dAdJ^as and afif&das etc. are perhapa rather torlsta]. And there Is no
middle form but Jnjo^te (RV.: see above, 810 o).

b. With unstrengtbened root-syllable occur a small body ef forma,
which are apparently also accented on the redaplicatton (accented examples
are found only in 3d pi. mid.); thua, active, for example, mnmuoaBi
wavptat, vlvidat, ^uqavat; the only middle forms are dadhf^ate,
viTpdhata, 3d sing.; and c&kramants, didh^^anta, ruruoanta (with
dadabhanta, paprathanta, mftmahanta, Juburanta, which might also
belong elsewhere; BlOe).

0. Accented on the ending are vKvpdb&nta and cakpp&nta (whloh
are rather to be called aDgmenllets plupetfecta).

d. As to forms with double mode-sign, or transfers to an a- conjugation,
aee below, 81ft.

819. Examples of the regular optative formation are:

a. In active: lat sing., ftnaqTam, Jagamy&m, pappcyftm, rirlO'
ySm; 2d slag., vavptySe, viviqyaa, fUfrOy^, babhOyfta; 3d slug,,
Jogamyftt, vavptyftt, tatiiJyAt, babboyit; 2d du., jafpnyltam, qn^rQ-
^tam; lat pi., eBsBhy&ma, waTrtyftout, faqay&mai 3d pi., tatanyua.
vaTpjyufl, vavptyuB. The forms are qi

ioy Google

81S — ] X. PsRFEcrr-STSTEH. 294

b. In middle, the loima ue few: namtlr, lit sing., TayytlyOi 2d
•Inf., Tftvrdblth^, oakfunithSs; 3d aJng., Jogrufitft, TavTtit&.
m&mrJita, dtidhuTita, qngnoltai l(t pi., TavfQnwtai. And sSsa-
h'fthB* uid rirlqifta ippear to fainiih exunplM of pT«ektiTe optattia
forma.

o. There 1> no IrregaUi mode of fotmaCloii of perfect optidTec. Indl-
Tldual irregnluitieB ice aho^n by eertilu tbrme: thui, oalo^lyis, p&plyftt,
qnfruyaa »nd fu^ruy^taia, witli tteitmeDt of the flnd u before the
paeBire-ilgn 74 (770) ^ onaJySt with Ehort initiil; fl^rlti from yifri;
JftkqiySt 1« tnomalous: rirl^B ia the o&ly form that ebowt a tinlon-Towel
a (nnlesa also sifst, from y»B,).

818. or regnlir InpentlTe forms, only > very im).!! number are to
be quoted: namely, acCive, cfikandhl, rArandhi, oiklddhl, titigdlii,
mumogdlil, gaquKdbl, and plpnhi ; o&kanto, rfirautu, momoktu.
and babbatu; mnintiktam and vBTfktajii; jnjuftaaa and vBTTttana
(nnleis we are to add mamaddbi, mamatta, mam&ttaiia) ; — midrtle,
vaTTteva and TavrddhTom. AT. has onca dadrfrtm.

814. At Irregular ImperatlTes may be reohooed eeveial which ahow
a union-TOwel a, or have been trantferted to an a-oonjagitton. Such are.
In the active, mumAoatam and Ji^o^tam (2d dn.), and miiia6oata
(3d pi.); In the middle, pipr&yaBva (only one foand with accent), and
■aftmobaavH, vSTrd^asTa, Tfivrfasira (2d alng.), uid mftmabantftm
(Sd pi.: probably to be accented -Asva and -4at&m).

816. Snob imperatlTei as these, taken In oonneRtlOD with some of
the snbJnnctlTes given aboTe (and a few of the "pluperfect" forms: below,
8tt}), SDggeat as planaible the sisumptlon of a double preaeot-aten, with
redDpUeatlon and added a (with which the deaideiatlva steme wenld ba
comparable: below, 1020 ff.): for example, JvOoQB ^om KJu;, from which
wonld come J^o^aal etc. and Jiijofate [811a) as indlaative, J^o^a*
etc. as subjuactiTely used angmentleas Impeifect, and Ji^o^tant as im-
peiatiie. Host of the forma given above as anbjanotivea with primary
ending lack a marked and constant snbjanatlve eharactet, and woald pass
falrl; well aa Indicatives. And it appears tolerably certain thst from one
root at least, vplb, such a doable stem la to be recognized; from vAvrdliA
eonie reidll)' T&TTdhate, v&vrdh&ata, and from it alone can come regu-
larly v&vrdhaeva, vftTrdhdte and vfivrdli&ti (once, RT.J — and, y^t
more, the participle TaTrdbint (RV. j AT. vSvfdb&nt: an Isolated case):
yet even heia we have also vSTrdbith^B, not vUvrdbMhfia. To utsme
donble piesent-stems, however, in all the cases would be highly implau-
sible; It la better to reeognlie the formation as one begun, but not car-
ried ont.

a. Only one other aabjnnctlve with donble mode-sign — namtdy,
PftPToSai — la found to set baslde vtwrdbftti.

816. Forms of dlBerent model are not very seldom made from the
same toot: for example, from ymno, the subjnnotivea mum6oH) i

Uiail.zecy Google

^

oati, >Dd mumuoaSi fcom ydhn^ dadli&rfati and dadhnate; fnm
ypii, tbe tmpcutlTei piprDif *Dd plpr&TUva.

Plaperfeot.

817. Of KD AogmeDt-preterit from the perfeot-Btem, to whioh the
name of pluperfect is giren on the ground of its fotmatioD (thongb
not of Its meaoing), tbe Veda preaents a few examples; and one or
two fonuB of the later language (mentioned above, 768 b) have alao
been referred to it

a. Then U mach of tbe nme dlfDculty In dlitingalihlng the ploptifecl
M the perfect model fioca kindred redupUosted foimatlona. Betveen It and
the urbl, howerer, a ditference of meaning helpi to make > seputilon.

818. The normd plupeTfdct ihonld ihow a itroni item in the sincniar
■ctlTe, and a weak one eliewheie — thui, mnmoo and mumao — with
angment preflied and Becondary endings added (us in 3d pi. act,, ata in
3d pi. mid.]-

a* Of forms jnado kccordlog to thla model, «e have, In the aotlvs:
iat ling., ^agrabbam and aoaoakftun (vtbicb, b; ita form, might be
■oilit: 880): 3d ling. ^agan; 3d ling., Rjagau and aolkst-, li do..
».mi-niTiir»jm ■ 2d pi. i^agftiita, and i^jagantana and tOabltaitana (■
atrong fonn, ai often in thii penou: Efi6a); 3d pL (perhapf), ama>
mandiia uid amamadno. To tbeie may be added tbe augmeDtleaa cSk&n
and rSr&Q, oibitam and oakaxam. in the middle, the 3d pi. aoakrlrau
and ^lagmlran |_wlth Iran Inatead of ata), and the aagmentlesi 2d sing.
JngOrthAa and Bti;upUila, are the moit legnlu fonni to be fonnd.

818. Sevenl foimi from rooti ending In oouMUiDti me the endings
In 2d and 3d ling. act. by laierting an i (566 b): Uids, 4bxibbOj&l.
avlTa^lB; artreoit, Ajagrabhlt (avftvarit and aTava9ltftm aie rather
iotentlTM); and the angmentleai jibl&flia (accent?) aud dadliar^t belong
with them.

&SO. A few forms show a item ending in a: they a-e, la the active:
3d ling., asasvaJat, aolUtat, aoakrat; In the middle: 3d sing., Aplp-
lata; 3d do., ApaaprdhettlKlD; 3d pi., atltvlffaata (which by its form
■i^t be aeiiit), Adadrhaot^v; and oatoadat, oak^p^ta, TtTTdh&nta,
jnlmraiita, wadM perhapi be beet elaiilfled here as augmentleia forms
(eompaiB 811, abors).

UtM of tfie Perfoct

881. Perfects are quotable as made from more than half tbe
toota of tbe language, and tbey abound in ase at every period and
in almost all bianehes of the literature, thongb not always with the
same valne.

a. Accoiding to the Hlnda gnmmailan*, the perfect li naed In the

ioy Google

Stl— j X. PnracT-ttTVrKM. 2%

••fnii'iB •( latu mM wixmtmti tj the aamtx; tat Ikac u no eiUtnra
•( iti Will! <^tb^ esdviinly «r ditttoctnclr *• cafUfed it lay pnlod.

b. la the later bnfnafe. it ia h^It a preterit or pest tenw,
•q«iT«lent with the imperfeet, aad freel; teterekSMgtAble or coJh-
dinated with iL It U od the whole Icm tommom thaa the inperfeet.
altbongh the prefereatea of differeat aatbora are diTerse, aad it soBe-
tlaea exceedj the iBperfeet in (reqacaej compare 9S7 .

e. The perfects rada and iha are everjrwhere tued with preseot
value. In the Brahmanar. also otbere, eapeeially dAdhira, also dtdlya,
Mbhftja, etc.

82S. Id ibe Brikmkiiu. the dlitioctioD of teate-Tsloe between per-
fect and Imperfect ii almoft tttog^thcr loft. u ia the litei languce. Bat
In molt of the text* the impeifeel U the ardinuy teaie of nuntion, the
perfect bdn; only eieepHomny nud. Tkoi Id PB., the imperfects ue to
tbe perr*rts u more than i handred lo onai in the BAhmani puts of TS.
■ud TB., u oTci thlrtj-font to oae: and in thoM et MS. In aboot the
lame proportion ; in AB., ■• more than foai to «n«, the perfect appearing
moitlr in certain pawagea, where it take* the place of imperfect It ia
only In (^B. that the perfaet It mneh more eommonlj nsed, and eTon, to
■ coniili-riblc extent. In roordlnatlon with the imperfect. Tbiongbout tbe
BAbmanii, bowcTet, the perfect pirtldplea Iuto in general the true *^r-
fed" Talae, iodieatlDe a completed or proximate puL

823. In the Teda, the eaae la very different. Tbe perfect I* Died
as paat tenae in narration, bat oDly rarely; sometlmfa alM it hu a tme
"perfect" lenae, or atgnlflea a completed oi proximate paat (like the aoilet
of the older language; 938); but ofteneat it baa a Talne hardl; or not
at all dlaUDgniahable in point of time from tbe present. It ia thna the
equivalent of Imperfect, aorist, and present; and it oceai* coordinated with
them all.

a. Examples are : of perfect with present, n& ^rSmyantl nil vf
mufioanty it* T&yo tJt paptnh (RV.) iha/ uieary nol nor tlop, theyfiif
like bird*; ni 'd n rtEjS k^aratl car^ai^inMO arin ak nami^ p&ri
tit babhfiva (ItV.) ht in truth rule* king of men: he tmbraet* Uitm all,
a* the wheel the epokee; — of perfect with aariat, dpo runioe yuvatlr
I1& jb^ . . . ibnad agii£l;i aajnidhe mllniiq&^ftm &kar ]y6tlr bidh-
amKnB t&mHAsi (BV.) *he u come beaming like a young mtudtn; Agni
hath appeared for the kindling of mortal* ; *he hath made light, driving aieay
Ike darkne**; — of perfect with imperfect, Uumn Uilm kav ttpka tatarda
(BV.) he *le%c the dragon, he penetrated to the u>ater*. Such a coordination
u this lut Is of conalant ooonrrence in the later langnige: e, g. mnmude
'pfUayao oU 'iibn(B.) he tea* glad, and paid honor to her; waatrftnte
Jagraha akaadhadefft 'arJat toajra srajam (MBh.] the took hold of
the end of hi* garment, and dropped a garland on 6it ihoulder*.

ioy Google

Varieties of Aorist.

CHAPTER XI.

THE AOEIST SYSTEMS.

624. Under the name of aoiiat aie iacluded (as was
pointed out above, 532) three quite distinct fotmations, eaoh
of whioh has its sub-Tarieties: namely —

I. A SIMPLE AORIST (equivalent to the Greek "seoond
aorist'^, analogous in all respects as to foim and inflection
with the impeifeot. It has two varieties: 1. the loot-aotist,
with a tense-stem identical with the root (coiiesponding
to an imperfect of the loot-class); 2. the a-aorist, with a
tense-stem ending in Q &, oi with union-vowel Q a before
the endings (coiresponding to an imperfect of the ^lass),

n. 3. A REDuFLicATiNo AOBI9T, perhaps in origin iden-
tical with an imperfect of the reduplicating class, but having
come to be separated from it by marked peculiarities of form.
It usually has a union-vowel Q a before the endings, or is
inflected like an imperfect of one of the a-claases; but a
few forms occur in the Veda without such vowel.

III. A 8IOUATK' or SIBILANT AORIST (corresponding to the
Greek "first norist"), having for its tense-sign a n b added
to the root, either directly or with a preceding auxiliary
^ i; its endings are usually added immediately to the tense-
sign, but in a small number of roots with a union-vowel
Q a; a very few roots also are increased by H b for its
formation; and according to these difietenoes it falls into
four varieties: namely, A. without union-vowel 9 a before
endings: 4. a-aorist, with T\ s alone added to the root;
5. i«-aoiist, the same with interposed ^ i; 5. sif-aotist,
the same as the preceding with ^ s added at the end of
the root; B. with union-vowel ^ a, 7. sa-aorist.

ioy Google

SaS— ] XL A0R18T-8YSTBM8, 298

826. All these vaiieties aie bound together ajid made
into a single complex system by ceitain coriespondences of
form and meaning. Thus, in regard to form, they are all
alike, in the indicatire, augment-preterite to which there does
not exist any corresponding present; in regard to meaoiag,
although in the later or classical language they are simply
preterits, exchangeable with imperfects and perfects, tfaey
all alike have in the older language the general value of
a completed past or "perfect", translatable by /lave done and
the like.

8S6. The w)ri«t-i;8Mm la b fOTmaiion of iufieqaent occotTenas in
ntDcb of the dwalul S&iukiit (iu forma mo foand, for eiunple, only
twenty-one tlmeB in the Nils, eight in the Hllopadofk, geren in Uanu, tU
Mch Id the Bfaagkvtd'Oita and ^ikantsla, and iizty-eli times, from tour'
laen roots, in the Ant book, of about 2600 linn, of the Samaya^a: com-
pare 037 b), and It poaaeises do psiticiple, nor any model (^excepting ia
the probibidTe nae of ite aiiKmentleaa forma: aee S79; and the Bo-c>11«i
piecatiie: see 921 ff.); in the older language, on the other hand, tt I*
quite common, and has the «boIe variety of modes belonging to the present,
and sometlmea partioiplei. Ila desoription, tcooTdingly, must be glTen
mainly as that of a pari of the oMet language, with dae notice of Its res-
triction in later nae.

827. a. In the BV., neuty half the looia occurTing ebov aorUt form*,
of one or aneiber claasj In the AV., rather lesa than one third; and In the
other texts of the older lingnage comparatively few aorlsle ocenr irhlch an
not found in these two.

b. More than llfty roots, in BV. aud AV. lagether, make aorlM forns
of more than one class (not taking into account the reduplicated or "canaa-
tive" aorlst); bat no law appears to underlie this variety; of any relation
■neh as la taagbt by the granmarlsns, between active ef one daaa and
middle of another as correlative, there la no trace discoverable.

o. Examples are: of claetes 1 and 4, adh&m and dhBans from
|/clta&, aynjl and ayukfata from yyMi; — of 1 and 6, BBrabham and
■grabUfma from ygrabh, mnU^AB and oiBrQifthSfl from v'mn! —
of 1 and 2, ftrta and irat from y'f; — of 3 and i, ntrldam and avltsi
from y-rid find, anljam and an&ikflt from yolj ; — of 2 and &, Ba&6-
ma and aaAnl^am from ysau; — of % md T, arubam and amkfat
bom yrtili; — Of 4 and 6, amataus and amsdi^oa from t^mad; —
of 1 and 6, bftsmahi and bfisl^us from f^bK; — of 1 and % and 1,
atnata and atanat and at&n from y'tan; — of 1 and 4 and fi, abudb-
nm and Abbatai and b6dhi^t from j/bndb, &atar and s^^lTa and

itizecy Google

290 1' ROOT-AOKIST. [—881

aotkrls bom yvtf. Otteo the second, ot teeaiid and thltd, ilasa ii rep-
Tuentad b; onl; >n IsoUted ronn ot two.

1. Simple Aorist.

8S8. This is, of the three principal diTisions of aorist, the one
leut removed fiom the analog of forms already explalQed; It U
like an imperfect, of the root-olaM or of the A-claas, without a coireB-
poudiog preBOnt indicative, but with (more or leas fragmentaiH;) all
the other parte which go to make up a complete present-ayBtem.

1, Root-aorlst.

829. a. ThiB foimation is in the Idter language liuited
to a few loots in ^ & and the loot ^ bbO, and is allowed
to be made in the active only, the middle using instead I
t^e s-aorist (4), or the if-aoiist (5). - — \

b. The roots in QT ft take 3TT na aa 3d pi. ending, and,
as usual, lose their W S before it; ^ bhQ (as in the perfect:
788 a) retains its vowel unchanged throughout, inserting
? Y after it before the endings W\ am and ^ an of 1st
sing, and 3d pi. Thus:

5^

&dfiTa

&dSma

&bh&TBm

&bh&va

JmUb

&dfttam

MatR

5m

&bhOtean

&dU

4d&t&m

idUB^

AbhQt

ibhaUtm

iibhaTaD
For the classical Sanskrit, this is the whole story.

880. Is the Veda, these same roots are decidedly the most fre-
quent and oonspicDOQB representatives of the formation: especiaUf
the roots k^ 6a, 6iilL, pS drink, sths, bbQ; while sporadic forms
are made from J&t. prt, sS, bft. As to their middle forms, see
below, 884 a.

a. inatetd ot abbuvam, KV. h»9 twice abbnvam. BhP. has agan,
3d pi., Initcad of affua.

881. But aorlsts of the same class are also made from a nnm-
ber of roots in r, and a few In i- and n-vowels (short or Ion;) —

itizecy Google

881—] XI. AoRiBT-srsTEMS. 300

with, M required bj the ADftlogj of the tense with an Imperfect of
the root-clftBS, gu^a-BtrengtheDiDg in the three persona of the Biognlar.
a. Thus (In the nctiTe), bom Vqra, &fr«Taiii >Dd &<}Toti from y^ri,
Agree >nd &gret; from y^ make, iikaram led &kar (for akara and
akart]; fiaai vj enelote, avar (686a); and so fcatac, aepar. D nil and
plural foima are mach leas i^qDent than ainfulir; but for the moat part
they aleo abov an irregalar atrengthenlng or the root-Tovel : thus (inclndlne
aagmeaUeiB farmi), &karma and karma and ikarta, T&rtBm, HparCami,
&hama and Utatana, bhemo, agravan; legnlar are only avran, Ucran,
ah7aii> and igrlyan.

832. Further, from a few roots with medial [or initial) vowel
capable of icn^a-strengthening and having in general that strengthen-
ing only in the Blngular.

a. Tbni, &bhedam and abbet from f/bhld; Amok from y/muo;
yojam from yyaj ; rok (VS.) tnm ymj ; arodham and aradtanut from
yrudb; avart from yvft; v&rk fmm VvfJ (AY. hai once aVTk); adar-
gam from ydp}; irdhma from y^dh; and adrfan, aTTJan, agvibuk.
Itut chedma, with gui^a, from yohld, and adarqma (T3.) from ydjq.

833. Again, from a larger number of roots with a as radical

a. Of ikwe, gam (with n form when flnal or followed by m: 14Sai,
SIS a) ii of decidedly most frequent occurrenee, and ehowa the greatAd
variety of forms: thug, Agamam, &gaii (2d and 3d alng.), Aganma,
aganta (itrong form), frgman. The otber caaea are akrau from ykram;
itan from ytKa\ abhr&t from )/bbT&)i askan from >'BkaiLd; asrat
l^om i/arafia (P VS.); dhak and daghma from ydagh; £iia( (G8Ba)
and ana^fSm from ynat} ; iighaa or aghat, Aghaetftm, aghasta, and
&k;aii (tor aghean, like agmaii) from VKkas; and the 3d pi. in as,
Akramae, ayamue, dabhua, nftna (pf.?). mandua.

634. So far only active forms have been oouaiderad. In the
middle, a considerable part of the forms are such as are held by the
grammariane (B81) to belong to the a-aoriat, with omiaalon of the a:
thej donbtleaa belong, however, mostly or altogether, here. Thna:

a. From loott ending in vowela, we have adbitbfis, adhlta (aleo
ahita), and adhlmahi; adlttuta, adita, and adlioahl (and adimaU
from yd& cuf) ; &qtta(7); sim4hi; iathithSB and Aathita and AathiraD,
form) of K-Toota; — of ^-loots, akri, Ultbfia, Akpta, akrStfim, ikrata
(aTid the anomalous kr&nta); avri, av^thSs, avpta; Arta, firata; mrth&a,
amrta; dhrtbas; adfthU; aetata; ah^thaa; g&rta;~of i and u roota,
the only exaoiples are ahvl (? AY,, onc^-O, 4bumahi, and 4aldbvam.
The ibaeaoe of any laalogies whatever for the omiiBlOQ of a S In aueb
forms, and Ihe oFcuirence of avri and akri and 4krata, shoir that their
reference to the s-Bariat U probably without sufflciont reiBon.

b. As regards lOOts ending iu conaonante, the case is more qnestian-
able, since Iota of a after a flnil canaonant before thSa and ta (and, of

ioy Google

301 '- HOOT-AOBIST. [ — 836

conne, dhvam) would bs in msriF euet required by euphonic rale (9S3 o fT,).
We And, howeTer, inch nnmlBtikable middle ioDectlon of tbe Toot-ioriat ui
ayaJU iynkthfts, itynkta, aTnJmalil, &yugdhvam, Ayuiraii; i^
uid ^ata; niAfl; apadi (1st sing.) and apadmahl and apadran;
Amamnahl; g&nvahi and &ganmalii and igmatn; atnata; AJani
(111 ling.) and ^fiata (3d pi.) ; from ygasa are mads agathBs and agata,
(torn >'taii, atath&e and 4tata, and from yman, amata, with ttestinent
of the Bnal like that ot ban in present inllection (637). The ending ran
It eapeolally fteqneni In 3d pi., being taken b; a nnnibei ot vecbe vbinb
hare no other middle person of this aorlst: thus, agrbhran, kefgrBXi,
adr^raD, abudtaran, &v|tran, t^fu^ran, ak^ran, asprdhxan, avas-
ran, &Ti9raii; and ram ii found beside ran in ^dp^ram, ibudbram,
Aargram.

o. FiDm roote of which the Unal vould corablne with a to k;, It
seems more probable that aorist-Forms abawlng k (Instead at ^) before the
ending beloog to the root-aorist: such aie amnkthfia (and itmugdhTam),
BpTkthSs and aprkta, ibhakta, avrkta, aaakttaOa and asakta, rlk-
tbfia, vikthOa and vikta, arnkta; apraffa, ayaffa, Aapa^tBi asntl><^
and &Kn%m, and mpfthfts would be the same In either case.

d. There remain, as cases of more doabtfnl belonging, and probably
to be ranked in pan with the one formation and In part with the other,
■ceordlng to their period and to tbe occurrence of ether perEons: OhlttfaAs,
sattluU and inntta and inuddhvam, patth&s, bhltth&a, amatta,
atapthSa, alipta, aa^pta; and dually, &mbdba, alabdba, aruddba,
abnddba, ayuddba, and drogdh&e (MBh. : read drngdhia): see 88S.

Hodea of the Boot^aorist.

83B. Subjunctive. In «ubjanctlTe use. forms Identioal with the
augmentleea indlcallYe of this aorist are much more treqnent tlian the more
propel BubjanctlTei, Those to which no corresponding form witb augment
occurs hsTe been given above; the others II is unnecessary to report in
deull.

836. a. or Crae snhjunotivea the forms with primary endings are
quite few. In the acllvp, k&rft^i, gSni, gambii (for bbuT&ni, eee be-
low, o); k4raai; athfttl, dati and dbati (wblch are almost indicative In
Talne), karatl, Jofatl, padftti, bbMati, rftdliati, varjati; ath^tbae,
karathas and karatae, darqathas, qravathas and ^r&vatas; and
(apparently) karasti, gAmaatl. In the middle, Jo^aoe; idbat^ (f),
kArate, bhojate, yojate, T&ijate; dbdtbe and dh&ithe; kirfimabe,
db&mabe. g&m&mabfti.

b. Forms with secondary endings are, in tbe active, d^rqam, bho-
jatn, yojam; k&ras, t&rdas, piiraaB, yamas, rfidbfts, viraa; k&rat,
gamat, garat, jo^at, daghat, padst, y&mat, yodhat, rftdhat, varat,
virtat, qrdvat, B&ghat, ap&rat; kitr&ma.gamSma.r&dhmnai g&maD,

D,j,i,...., Google

886—] XI. Aoiu»T-8TSTBH8. 302

gafftn, iktijaSL, 7Uaan< No lulddle foimi u« clMilfltbla with confldence

c. The series bbuvam, bhi^Tas, bhi^vat, bbfrvaji, &nd bbartni
(comptte ftbhoTam; 830 a), >nd the isolated cravat, an at donbtml
belonglnfi; nlth a different icceot, they vould >eem to be of the nan
elat*; hoTe, a gtU^-itrengthening woold be more legular (but note the
abaence of gu^a io the toilit IndlcatiTe and the perfect of j/bbn).

837. Optative. The apUtiTs active of this aorirt conetttutea, with
a i Interposed betweeo mode-ilgn and pereoDa) endtDga (567), the pnea-
tive active of the Hindu ^ammsrlana, and la allowed b; them to be made
from evefy vatb, they Tecognlilng no eonneetlon between It and the aotUt.
Rut In the 2d sing, the Interposed b Is not dlitingnlshable from the person^
ending) and, after the earlleBt period [see 838), the endlog crowde out the
sibilant In the 3d sing., which thns comes to end la y&t Instead of yta
(compare 665 a).

a. In the older tangnage, howerer, pare optative forms, wlthont the a,
are made ftDm this tense. From mots In ft oeeur (with change of ft to e
before the y^ 860 d) deyftm, dbeyftm and dbeynB, and Btbeyftma;
111 u-vavele, bhQyima; In f, kriyftma; In consonants, aqyim and
aqy&na aiid a$yua, TTJyftm, qakyim, ynJySva and yi^jyitftm, aftbyt^
ma, and tpdyuB.

b. The optative middle of the rooi-aarljt Is not recognized by the
Hindu grammarians as making a part of the precatlve formation. The RV.
has, however, two preoailve forms of 11, namely padlffi and mncl^.
Hnch mote comiDon In the older langaage are pare optative forms: namely,
eifljk and aflni&bl (this optative is especially common), indbiya, gmlya,
intiTiya, ruolya; arlta, ubita, vurlta; idtalmahl, naqimabi, nad-
mabl, proimahl, mudlmabi, yamlmahi; and probably, from a-root«.
suniihl and dMmahi (which might also be angmentless Indlcstivs, slDce
adblmabl and adhitftm also oeonr). All these forms eicept the thiee
In 3d ling, might be preoative according to the general undentandlog of
thai mode, as being of persona which even by the native authorities are not
olalmed ever to eihlblt the inserted nibilant.

8S8. Prerattve active forms of this aorlst are made from the eariiest
period of the language, in ST., they do not occur from any root whleh
has not also other aorist forms of the same class to show. The RV, forma
are^ lat alng., bhOyfiaam; 1i sing., avyfia, Jfieyfts, btaflyaa, mfdbyia,
aabyfts; 3d ting. (In -yfts, for-yftet; RV. has no 3d slug. In jlX, whieti
if later the unlveraal ending), avy&B, agyAs, f dbyfts, gamyia, daghyfts,
peyfia, bhOy&s, yamySa, yiiyiks, vrJyBa. ^riiy&B, sabyfts; 1st pi.,
kriyftama [beside krlyfima: 837 a), AV, has six 1st persons slag. Id
-ylsam, one 2d in -y£B, one 3d In .yftt (and one in .yfts. In a RV.
pastago), throe 1st pi. in -j&natt (beside one in yftma, In ■ KV. passage),
and the 2d bhayftstba (doublteas a falae reading; TB. has •Bta in the
corresponding passage). From thia time on, the pnr* optative A>nBi uenlr

ioy Google

303 1' RoOT-AOEUBT. [—640

dlwppew (the eieaptlDDB are ilren iu 687 *). But the pieoiitlT* farms 4rB
nowhare eommou, ezecpdns *a mtde from >'1)liQ; ind rrom no other root
li »ajth<ng Itka & complete leriea of peiioDB quottble (only bhilyftava
aad bhOrSstftm 1>etng wiDtlog; *ni) theee two panons have no repreaeiit-
itWe from any mot). All together, actiTO optatlTe oi pTecatfTO formi ^re
mkdo in the older Ungntgo from over fifty roota; and the epic and claealcal
tKita add them tiom hardly a dosen more: aee fnrlher 9S6.

889. Imperative. Imperative forms of the root-aorist are not rare
in the eaily langaage. In the middle, Indeed, almost only the 2d sing.
oeeuTs: It U accented either regularly, on the ending, ae k^vA, dhlfri,
jmkfvi, or on the root, as mUsvn, y&kfva, vifisra. r&va, B&kfva;
dlfva and mKoVB are not found with accent; the 2d pi. is repraaenled
by k^dhTKiDi vo^vun. In the acllTe, all the peraona [ii and 3d) are
ftiiind in use; eiamplea are: 2d sing., k^dbf, T^^dM, qagdhl, frudhl,
gftdhl, yadidlif, galil, mfthl, B&hi, mogdhi; 3d sing., gaditu, dStu,
a^fn, 9r6tu, sAta; Id du., d&tam, Jitam, qoktain, ^rut&m, bhOtAm,
apftkm, gat&m, rikt&m, vo^bam, sitam, sut&m; 3d dn., only gaih-
t&ni, d&tftm, vo^bim; 2d pi., K&t&, bbat&, Qruta, kfta, gata, dsta,
dbStana; 3d pi., only dbftnttt, gruvantu. These are the most legulic
forma; but irregnlaritieg aa to both accent and strengthening are not infre-
quent. Tbni, strong forma In 2d du. and pi. are yadit&in, varktam,
vaitam ; kirta, g&iiita [once gadit&), y&ibta, vartta, beta, grdta, B6ta ;
and, with tamti k&rtaQa, giafatana, yaditana. ootana, and the irregular
dbetana Cv'dbK); In Sd do,, gKifatftm. Much more iirepilar are y6dbi
(Instead of ynddbl) from f'jrudb, and bodbi from both )/budb and |/l>bil
(inatead of buddl^ and bbndbf). A single form (3d stng.) in Ut is
fonnd, namely gaat&t. We find krdbl also later (MRh. BhF.).

a. Aa to 2d penons aingulat in ai from the simple root used in an
imperative sense, aee above, BS4.

PartiolplflB of the Boot-aortot.

640. Id the oldeet language, of the RV., are found a number of
paitioiplea wbleb moat be reckoned ae belonging to tbiB fonnadon.

a. In the active, tbay are eittemely few: namely, kr&nt, dt&nt (f),
Ciu4nt, Bthint, bbidtuit, v^dbint, dyutant- (only in composition),
and probably ^dbint. And BhP. has nLffant (but probably by error, for
mnyant).

b. In the middle, they are in RV. much more numerous. The accent
is uinally on the final of the at«m: thus, Brll9&, tdbSni, krSni, jtifb^
tnt^ii, aldand, pigftnA, p)-<!&°^> pratbSa&, budbSni, bbiy&ii&,
DumBni, mandftni, ynJUni, ruosni, Tip&ni, vtBjfk, urS^, fubb-
ftnik, Baa&ii&, Buv&n4 or BTSnii, B^jBuA, BprdbilD&, blyBnii; — but
sometimes on the root-syllable; thus, oftSna, oyavftaa, rub&na, ilhSna
(prea.?), T&sina, gumbhina; — Tibile a few show both aocentuatioua

Dgilize. ..Google

840—1 ^I' AORIST-eTBTBHS. 304

[compu« 018 d)r thna, (lT9aii& and dffftua, d7Tit&ii& ■nd dr^tfinai,
yatftnA >iid yitftna ; and oetbia ind hrnyS^a ocenr only In eomposltloD.
A jety few of tliei« >re found once oi twice in othei tatU, nimely oltiiM,
dyntftna, mhS^A, Taa&aa, snTftna; and -kup&na oceius once tn
Aput. (liv. 18. 4).

841. All toother, the roots exhibiting in the older langnage
forms which ue with fail probability to be reckoned to Hie root-
iMiia [-system are abont a hundred and thirty; over eighty of then
make such forms in the RV.

Fafisive Aorist third peraon singular.

843. A middle third pereon singular, of pecnliar formation and
prevailingly passive meaning, Is made from many verbs in the older
Uoguage, and has become a regular part of the passive conjagatioo,
being, according to the grammarians, to be substituted always for the
proper third person of any aorist middle that is need in a passive

848. This person is formed by adding ^ i to the toot,
which takes also the augment, and is usually strengthened.

a. Th« ending 1 belongs eliewheie only to tba Qnt person; and thla
third petBon appiienily standi in tba game reUtion to ■ Brat In i u do,
In tba middle toIcg, the regular 3d sinii. perfect, ind also the fteqneot
Vedlc 3d alng. pieienl of th« root-claia (613), which are identical In fonn
with their respective Orst pereona. That a fuller ending has been lost off
it extremely Improbable; and henoe, aa an aotlst formation from the aimple
root, this is most properly treated here, in connection with the ordinary
leot-aOTiBL

844. Before the ending ^ i, a final vowel, and usually
also a medial Q a before a single consonant, have the vrddhi-
strengthening ; other medial vowels have the guna-stiengtheD-
ii^ if capable of it (Z40]; after final ^ S is added JJ y.

a. Eiunpleg (all of them quotable from the older langoage) u»:
liom Tooti ending in S, ^fiBfi, iidh&yi, Ap&yl; in other vowels, fifrfiyi,
iistfiTi, 4hftTl, jikftrl, Aetftri; — from loote with medial 1, n, j, aoetl,
&oohedi, aqe^, &bodbi, Itmooi, ^oji, &darql, asarjl, vaibi; from
roots with medial a atrengtheued, agKmi, ApSdl, dyjlml, avftoi, TSpl,
isBdl (these are all the earlier caaea); with a nncbanged, only fcjani (and
RV. has once Jjuli), and, in hexy syllables, imyakfi, vandl, Qafiai,
ayandl; with medial K, AbhrOjl, &r&dlil ; — from moU with Initial
Towel, firdbl (only ease).

b. According to tbo grammarians, certain roots in am, and >''Tadh,
retain the a unchanged : qootable are i^jani (or lOIni), agaml (or agjtml).

ioy Google

^05 SiupLi AoftiBT: 3. a-AOKisx. [ — 840

Mtranli avodhit >Uo araol; uid there ue noted beddei, trom root*
■omstiine* ihowtne & Baul, KdaAgi) antmbhl, araiidlii, i^jambhi,
«bh&aji or abhajl, alunbhi (alwayi, irith ptepcwItioM) or ftUbbi,
Htftmbbli Qh. hM OM&JL

a. AagmeDtleu toima, m in itl othei like euM, >re met vlth, with
eltlkat IndlettlTe oi mbJunetlTe iklae; eiunplM (beiidet the two oi thiee
klready flTen) aie : dh^yi, qtIItI, bhtri, real. v6di, rool, J&nl, pftdi,
sidi, ftrdbl. The ■<»«», when pieient, it »lw>ya on the root-eyllible
(8V. dlUtfi >■ doubtlwi * t*Ua leading).

S4ft. Thate forms ue made in HT. from forty roots, and all the other
«atller tnti oomblned add only about twenty to the number; from the
later languaE* are qnot^l* thirty or forty more; In the eploi they ara
nearly unknown. When they come ftom roots of nentet meinlDg, aa kbul,
pad. Bad, bhrBj, rftdta, ruo, ■aflj, they have (Uke the ■o-called paatiie
paiticipls in ta; 659) a lalne eqnlTalent to that of other middle forms;
in a e»»e or two (BT. Til. 73. 3 [T]; VS. xivili. Ift; TB. it. 6, 10*) they
appeal eren to be used ttaniitiTely.

2, The a>aoriat.
846. a. This aoriet is in the later language allowed to
be made bom a large number of roots (near a hundred).
It is made in both voices, but is rare in the middle, most
of the roots forming their middle according to the a-olass
(878 ff.) or the if-claes (898 ff.).

b. Its closest anal<^y is with the imperfect o£ the &-^lass
{761 fr.]; its inflection is the same with that in all partieulars;
and it takes in general a weak form of root — save the roots in
^ r (three or four only), which have the gu^a-strengthening.

o. As example of inflection may be taken the root
ftra aio pour. Thus:

actiie. middle.

i sft^ srirpira wfw^rH ^ft% aftqrsrf^ afentr^

Asloam AsloftTa fwlcSma ftsioe &BloAvatai Uoftmohl

1 aftra^ ^ftrarTT^ sftPifT wRiyEim^ yftwmiH,^ ^ftraan^

AalOMS ielcatam &aicata iaioatbia 4aloatbftm ^loadbvam
Aaioat AsioatSm toioan AsioBta Asloetflm Asioanta

ioy Google

847—] XI. AORIST-BYSTBKB. 309

847. Th« n-toilit makes tu the BT. i imall flgnte bMlde tii< root-
■orlit, being repreaeuted by lais tban half the lattoi'i nnmber of root*. It
become!, howeTer, more common latei (It ii the only tonn of aoritt wUah
la made from more verba in AT. than in BT.]; ■"•^ In Teda and Brihmana
together about eighty root* eiblblt tbe tonoatlon more or lata folly. Of
then a laige nombei' (fully half) are of the type of tbe loot* vhich nake
theli pieaent-ayatem according to the &-ela*i, haTlng a vowel capable of
gn^a-strangtheDlng before a final conaonant (754): thns, with 1, obid,
bbid^ nlj, no, Tl;, lip, Tld, Ifif (fia), 2i}l^ qri^, i;llf, bIo, uidh;
— with a, krudh, kfadli, gab, duf. dyat, drnk. puf, badh, bbuj,
muc, mmo, jmj, rao, rud, mdb, muli, mh, quo; — with f, rdb,
kft, grdta, gfh, tn>, tff, tph, dn>, drq, dtaff. ur*^ mrdh, mn. Tft,
TTdh, vn, Kfp, kff . A anall nombec end In Towela ; thna, f , kf , sf
(which have the gui^a-itrengtheaing thioDghaut), hi (? ahyat once la
AT.), and several in ft, apparent tranafer* freu the loot-claaa by the weak-
ening of theii S to a; the*, khyS, b-vft, V7&, ^B, and dA and dh&j
and fidthmt, regaided by the giammariana aa aoilat to ^as thrmo, la donbt-
lea* a like formation from f/sthB. A few have a penultimate naial in the
preacnt and elaewhera, which in thla aorlat li lost: thas, bhrafl^ taAa,
dhvftAa, srftAB, krand, randb. Of lest claaalflable cbaraclei an ftf,
kr&m, gam, Rbas, tain, gun, from, tan. Ban, nad, &p, das, jnM,
9ak, dach. The roots pat, nag, tso form the tenae-etems papta, ii«f a,
TOOa, of which the flrat la palpably and the other two are probably the
resolt of lednpli cation ) but the language has loal the aense of thelt being
inch, and makes other redopllcated aoriats from the same roots (lee be-
low, 8U>

a. Many of these aorlits are almply tiansfeis of the root-aorist to an
a-lndectioQ. Oonaplcuoos eiataplai are akarat etc. and agantat etc. (In
the earliest period only abar and agan).

848. The Inflection of this aorlst U la general so regnlar that It will
be suffldent to give only examples of Its Yedlc forma. We may take aa
model avidam, from jiMd^^nd, of which the varlona persons and model
are more frequent and In fuller variety than those of any other verb. Only
the form* actually ijnotable are instanced; those of which the example*
found are from other verba than vid are bracketed. Thua:
aotive. middle.

1 &vidam &Tldftva &vld&ma &Tide [&vidftvabl] ividftmahl

1 &vidaa [&Tldata] [Avidathfta]

» &Tldat iivldaii [avidata] [avidet&m] Avldanta)

a. The middle fonos are rue in the earlier language, as in the later:
we have Uive etc., &kh;e etc., Avlde (7) and aridanta, avooatbAa
and aTOOSvahi (and avidSmabe QB. and aelofimahe KB. are doubtless
to be amended to •mabl).

ioy Google

307 Simple Aoubt: 3- h-aorist. [— 8BS

b. Angmentleu farmg, with Inillc&tlTe ot subjunottie Talse, an not
tnfreqnent. Eismplw, ihoirlng aecGot on the tenie-slgD, iMOrdlag to the
general maloglet or the formttlon, us: mb&m, Brpaa, bbnj&t, Tid&t,
KnttSm, TOoatA, qaikAn; vldata mA vy&ta (3d iln|.), arSiaalii,
flfamabi, vldinta, bndli^ta, mntuite ((or eiceptiona u tegudi
ucent, aee below, 8B3}.

Uod«B of ihe a-aorist.

848. The tubjuncttve foTiDi of tUi loHit are fev; thoie nhtoh occoi
m ln>t4DMd below, in the method which w»s followed foe the IndlcatlTO:
1 [vldava] vidsma [vld&mahe]

1 |lj^ vidsthlta vldaUift
s TldAt [TidUai,P]

a. The endlpg tliana is fonnd once, In riffithana. Of middle forma
ocoor oul<r gifttU (AY.: bnt doobtleee mtgrBidlng for flqr&tfti) and
fiQKmahe (AT., for RT. flfftmtthl). The form B&dathas aeema an Indic-
ative, made from ■ leeondair prasent-atem.

BSO. The opUtiTei are few In the oldest Ungnage, bnt become more
frequent, and in the Brahmanaa are not rate, Eiamplei are: In artive,
bhidayam, Tid^yam, eandyam (TR. odco sanem); vid6fl, camea;
garnet, Tooet; gametam; gam^nia, fahdma, san^ma; vareta; in
middle, (onlr) vidsya; gamemahl, vaaomahi: robethfta etc. In the
•plea muBt be ilewed rather as preient forma of the &-olaM.

a. A ilogle middle preoatlre fbrm oceuri, namely vldef^a (AT.,
once); it t* lo laoUted that how mnch ma; be iDterred from it it lery
qaeetlonahle.

8K1> A complete leriee of active ImperatiTe forma are made froin
y^ad (Including sadatana, 2d pi.), and the middle sadantSm. Othet
impecaUves ate Terjp rare: namely, B&na, B&ra, raba, vldA; rub&tam,
TldAtam; kby&ta. 13. has once vrdbfita (compare 740).

Fartiolples of the a-aorist.

86S. a. The active parti cipl ea ■ t^pint, H^ant or riqant, vfdhtot,
flf&nt, 9ao&at, B4daiit, and (in participial oompoanda, 1309) k^taat-,
gobaot-, Tidant- (all RV.), are to be aaalgned with planaibliltr to this

b. LIkewiae the middle partlclplea gab&mfina, dbff4mS9a, d&sa-
m&tia (?), nftiunftna, gao&mSaa, and perhaps vfdhBJi&, erldhftii&.

IrregularltieB of the a-aorlst.

8B3. A few inegnlaritiea and pecnliaritles may be noticed here.
The roots In f, which (847) show a atrengiheuing like that of the

D,j,i,...., Google

8B»— ] XL A0KI8T4TSTEMS. 30g

present of the niue«ent«d ft^lui, hiT* liknrlte the seetTit apon tba
radiral (yUibls, llk« tiiat eUw: thm, ft«m Yf, iranfai (ansmentlwa 3d
pi.). sArftt ami aArk, Tke root skd fiillowi tka ume ial«: tboi, a&d*-
tam; nd from >/s«ii ue foDnd a4lUM lod vinat uid BineaM mui
■4n&, bulde •antrun md Mninut. It !■ qnutionablc v1i^«r tkew
ue not tms antlofne* of tfa« bhQ-clu« (anMcaiitcd a-clut) pietent-irftan.
On (he other hand, rdhat (bMlde mhAm, rali«ra, rohAtam), fl^t
■nd ^{fttU (T), and rffutt or rtfutt are more iMiited cues. In Tiev
of inch u these, the foimi from the item bbdva and f ruT& (886 o)
ue perhapa to be lefaned hither. From y-vma, the optatire ii Mc«nted
vooiytuu, Toote, Toeima, voo^jiu; elsewbera the accent U od the nwt-
lylUble: thus, v&0«, T6eHt, vAoati, viatatm.

8B4. ». The etem Toe hai In Yedic me ireU-nifh aeaaned the
Tilae of a root; it* forma aie tbt; Tartona and of freqnent Die, in BT.
aipoeially far ODtaoinberfng In occnirencai ^I other farm* from y^raa.
Bealdei thoao alraad; given, we And tooA (let alng- impi.) and vooSti,
mo&TahU; voce*, Toa«7a, vooemahl; vooatU (2d aiug.), vooAto,
Tocatam, vocata.

b. Of the stem De^a only na^at occnta.

0. The root qfis (w In soma of ita preient forma: 688) i* ireakened
to Qif, and make* a^ifam.

S68. Isolated forma which haTfl more or lew completely the
upeet of iDdieative presenta are made in the oldest laognage from
tome roots beside the aorist-sjstems of the Grat two classee. It must
be left for matorer research to determine how far they may be relics
of original presenta, and how far recent prodoodona, made In the way
of conversioD of the Aorist-stem to a root in valne.

a. Such forms ue the following: from ytcf makt, Urfl, k^tbao,
kftba, ^n^i from Vgam, gat]i&; from yei ffathtr, aetii from y'dS
fine, d^tl, dStn; from ^dbS put, dhfttl; from yp& drini, pSth&S,
pftntl; from yhbx, bhartli from ymao, mue&ntl; from ymdh, radb-
maa Q); from v'vrt, Tftrttl.

II. (3) Reduplicated AorlsL
SB6. The reduplicated aorist is different from the other
fotma of aorist in that it has come to be attached in almost
all oajei to the detiTatiTB (causative etc.) conjugation in
WI ijBi, as the aorist of that conjugation, and is therefore
liable to be made ftom all roots which hare such a conju-
gation, beside the aorist or aorists which belong to theii
primary conjugation. Since, howerer, the connection of

ioy Google

309 3' Reduplicated Aokist. [ — 868

the two 18 not a formal one (the aorist being made directly
from the root, and not from the oauaative stem), but rather
a matter of established association, ovring to kinship of
meaning, the formation and inflection of this kind of aorist
is best treated here, along with the others.

8B7. Its chaiaflteristio is a reduplication of the radical
syllable, by which it is assimilated, on the one hand, to
the imperfect of the reduplicating class (6BS ff.], and, on the
other hand, to the so-called pluperfect [817 ff.). But the
aoiist reduplication has taken on a quite peculiar character,
with few traces left even in the Veda of a different con-
dition which may have preceded this.

868. ». As r^ards, indeed, the consonant of the re-
duplication, it follows the general rules already given (680).
And the quality of the reduplicated vowel is in general as
in the formations already treated: it needs only to be noted
that an a-vowel and x (or arj are usually (for exceptions,
see below, 860] repeated by an i-vowel — as they are, to a
considerable extent, in the reduplicated present also (680),

b. But in regard to quantity, this aorist aims always at
^tablishing a diversity between the reduplicating and radical
syllables, making the one heavy and the other light. And
the preference is very markedly for a heavy reduplication
and a light root-syllable — which relation is brought about
wherever the conditions allow. Thus:

S60. If the root is a light syllable (having a short
vowel followed by a single consonant), the reduplication is
made heavy.

a. And this, Qaaally bj lengtheDing the reduplicating vowel, with
I for radical a or p or } (in the single root containing tliat vowel):
tbna, arirlfam, adudufuo, ^ijanam, avivrdliam, a(iIk|pRm. The
great m^ority of rednplicated aorlBte are of this form,

b> If, however, the root begins with two coDBODants, so that (he
rednplicating sfllable will be heavy whatever the qnanlltr of its vowel,

C

j,l,ze..,LiOOglC

SftB— ] XI. AOKIBT-SrSTEHB. 310

the Towel renutiDB short: tbtu, aolkf Ipuo, ftookradtuun, aUtrasun,
mvimpf^am,

860. If the root is a heary syllable (tkaving a long
vowel, or a short before two ooosonante), the vowel of the
redupJioation is short: and in this case Q a or ^ &, and
ff p (if it occurs), are Teduplicated by Q a.

a. Thus, adidikfam, abubbOfam (not quotable), adadakfam,
adadhfivam. atataAsam. And, in the caseg in which a root sttotild
both begin and end with two oonsonants, both ayllables wonld be
necessarilj beary, notwithstatidliig the short vowel in the former;
thne, apapraoobam, aoaskaadam (bat no suob forma are found in nse).

b. A medial j li allawsd by the gnmrnarluu to retiln the itrenKtben-
Ing of the eanntlTe ttem, togethei with, ot mutib, lednpUeitlon by ar thw,
aoakarfat, avavartat (beside atdk^fat, avivrtat); bat no rach form*
hire been m«t with in lue.

o. These torlMt u« not dlattngnlibable In fntm from the so-ulled
pluparfecu (817 ft.).

861. a. In order, howeveT, to bring al>ont the &vored relation
of heBT7 TeduplicAtion and light radical syllable, a heavy root is
sometimes made light: either by shortening Its vowel, as in ariradham
from yrKdli, avivaqam from Vv&q, a^adbam from yMdh, ^JyiTam
from yjiv, adidlpam (E. and later: RV. has didlpas) from ydip,
abibMfam from ybhi^ aailBuoani from ysilo; or by dropping a
pODUttimate nasal, as In aoLkradam from f'kraiid, asifyadam from
ysyand.

b. In those oases in which [1047) an aorist is formed directly
from a causal stem in Sp, the & is abbreviated to 1: thus, ati^ftalp-
am etc., ajlJiUpat (but ESS. ajljfiapat], jitaipas, ajijlpata (but VS.
^yapata); but from frap comes afl^rapftma (QB.)-

86S. Examples of this serist from roets with initial vowel aia very
raiej Ibo older language has only Kmamat (or amamat) from yam,
ftplpan (^B. : BAD. Bptpipat) from yip, and arplpam (aogmentleM)
fTom the Musattve stem arp of yf — In which lattsr the root U aieess-
iTely abbievlMed. The fiammaTiana give other similar formatlona, u Srai-
oam ^m yaro, SnbjlJani from yubj, Brjlbam from yarb. ftlolkfam
from V^ti ■fdidham from ypdb. Compare the similar redaplication In
desldeiatlie Btema: 10S9b.

803. or special irregularities may be mentioned:

a. From ydyut la made (T.B.) the stem dldyuta, taking Its redu-
pUcaUng Towel from the radical eemlTOweL From yftap, Instead of JOcn-
pa (B.S.), JB. hu Jugupa, and aome tens (BS.) have Jognpa; ud
Jlbvara (B.) li met with beside the legatai Jlhvara (Y.B.).

ioy Google

311 3. Bbduplicathd Aorist. [ — 867

dft (Nli-)i "*^ *^^ "*"" "' ^'** •lonbtfol paipr&tlu uid fOfraoA tod
Baav^ft (BV.) we have a lusMul of i in the rediipUcatlon.

b. In gnpport of thelt hlw Tlew of this loriat u made from the
MOMtlTe Item ln«te»d of directly from the root, the natWe giamnuriuia
taach thit loola ending in in a-TOwel mey rednpllute with 1, >■ repieunt-
Ing the i of the atrentthened stem; thne, blblMTa tana bh&T-aya, ai
well u bflbhava from bhIL No example of (ueh a formation, howoTer,
ii met with except AplplaTam iQB., once); igalnat It we And dndtuva,
bfibhuva, rdraTa, ^afraTO, and other*.

o. Aa to ftpaptUD, avooam, and ane^aiii, aee aboTC, 847.

884. The inflection of the reduplioated aoriat is like
that of an imperfect of the second general conjugation: that
is to say, it has ? a as final stem-vowel, with all the pe-
culiarities which the presence of that vowel conditions (7SS a).
Thus, from I'SR jan ffiee birtA (stem jljaua):

aetiie. middle.

ijljaoam ^^antva ^^anbna AJ^ane Ajijan&vahi iijyaa&mtthl

AjyanoB jj^anatam iKJ^anata AJIJajtathJU JJXJanath&m ^yanadbvam

ijyanat AJiJanat&m ikj^anaa lijijaiiata 4]UanetSin AJlJananU
8a&. Tbe middle forms are rare in the older langnage (the 8d
pi. IB decidedly the most common of thein, being made from eleven
roots; tiie 3d s. from Beven); bnt all, both active and middle, are
quotable except lat and 2d du. middle and Ut dn. active.

a. Atitape ippeara to be onco naed (ftT.J aa 3d stng., with paulTO

866. A final f has the cu^a-etrengtbeDiDg before the endings:
thus, ai^karat, aplporam, atitarai, didaras, adidbarat, amimarat,
avivaran, JihTaras. Of similar strengthened forms from I and u-roots
are found apiprayau [TS.j, ablbbayauta (BV.}, aplplavam IQB.j,
aoQoyavat (K.), aQu^ravat (MS.), atuftavam (RV.). Not many roots
ending in other vowels than j make this aoiist: see belov, 868.

867. Forma at the Inflection ullhoat nnlon-iowel are occaalanally
met with: Damely, from roots ending In conionanl», af^ap (2d aing.,
angmentleai) from ysvap, and aqiqnat from |/qnath; from roots In f
or ar, didhar (?d aing.), and ajigar (3d and 3d sing.); for rootg In t-
and tt-Towela, see 868. Of 9d pl. In na are fonnd almost only ■ form

ioy Google

887—] Xr. A0KIBT-»78T«1IB. Zit

ot tiro ttom 1- Mid a-TiMt», with gnifm before the ending: thiu, A^qrayiu,
AoDOTaviu, afngrainu, uo^Toe; but tUo ablbh^nB ((B.), uid
Dinaf oa (HBb.).

808. In the later Isn^Etge, ft few roots are uid by the gram-
marians to make this aorist as a part of their primary coDJagatioa:
they are gri and qvi, dm and arn, kam, and dlift *utk (ijvi and dbs
optionally).

a> In ths oldn langnage ire found nrom Vqrl aqifret >nd a^^rarns
(noticed in the preceding paragiipb) uid a^l^rlyat (^B.); from y&to,
adndrot uid adudravat (TB.: not nscd u loriit)-, fiom v'aru, asnarot
■nd (lugmeDtleii) BOflToa uid aaaroti fiom yktaa, aolkamstsiii uid
-manta (B.S.)' Of forms anUogoiu with theie occai > nambec from rooti
in u or Q: that, anOnot uid nOnot from yaa; TQyot from yyn
teparate; dfldliot ftou ydtaa; apapot from v'pQi tOtoa and tfltot from
yta-f aaufot from f^fl; — uid one or two from roots in 1 or I: (hut,
alfflt from yei (or aft) hind; amtmet from yiai beUoie ; apiprea (wiih
i^iprayan, noticed above} from yplA (and the Hmperfects" from didhi
etc., 670, are of corresponding form). And from yaya are made, with
nnlon-TOwel I, aanoyavlt and aauoyaTltana. Few of these forms pcuei*
a necessully cansstlTo or a decidedly aoriitle value, and tt la ver; donbtfo]
whether they should not be atslgned to tbe perfect-ajiitem.

b. From the later language are i^notable only aqifrlyat etc. (3d iL,
-yan or -yua) and adudiuvat.

UodeB of tbe BedupUoated Aoiist.

869. a. As in other preterit formationa, the augmentleea indicative
peteenB of tbia aorist are used labjanctively, and they are very much
more frequent than true anbjanctlyeB.

b. Of tbe latter are found only rixadhft (1st slug.); tjtaploi;
oiklpRtl and fllfadhfttl, and piap^fatt (aa if oonespondlng to an indlC'
ative aplapf'k, like afi^nat); and paihaps the lit slag. oild. gafvaosf.

o. The augmentless indleatlTe forms are accented In genaral on the
rednplloatlon : thus, didliaraa, nina^as; J^anat, piparat; jijanan;
also aifwapj bnt, on the other band, we bsTe also pip&rat, ^fr&thas
and ql^n&that, and dadrivat and tnqt&vat (which may peihepa belong
to Uie perfect: compare 810). According to the native grammarlana, the
accent rests either on the radical gyUable or on tbe one that fallows it

870> Optative forms are even rarer. The least qaestlonable oase 1*
the middle "precadve" ilriqifta (riri^|ta hat been ranked above with
ateahigta, as ■ perfect; 819 b). OucyuTimahl and onoyavlrata be-
long either here or to the perfect- ay stem.

871. Of impeiatlves, we have the Indubitable formi pQparanta and
^gratbantu. And JlgftAm and jlgilA, and didhftam and didtaTti,

ioy Google

313 Sibilant Aorist. [—876

and JajuUm (lU RT. onlr}, ind peihapi BtUfttiUta (AV.), aie to be
TBtened hither, as coTTespondtng to the IndiutlTOi [wlthoDt nnlon-Towel]
i^lxgar andadidliAr; their ihart ledaplieatlng vowel and tb^li accent
•HlmlUio them closely to the rednplleated Impetfeett (9M It.), with which
wo aie probably to tegaid tbU aoitit ai Dltlmataly related.

879, Ko puticiple is found belonging to the redaplioated aorist.

87S. The nnmbet of roote from whicb tblB ftoriet Is met with
in the earlier langnftge ia about a hundred and twenty. In the later
Sanskrit it is unusual ; in the eeiiee of later texts mentioned above
(8S6) it oecQTs onlj' twice; and it has been found quotable from hardly
fift; roots in the whole epic and classical literatnre.

III. Sigmatic or Sibilant Aorist.

874. a. The commoQ tense-siga of all the varieties of
this aorist is a H b (convertible to tf 9: 180) which is added to
the root in forming the tense-Btem.

b. Tliia aibilant baa no analoguea among the olaaa-slgD* otthe pteaent-
■yatemj bnt it Ib to be campared with that which appears (and tlkewUe
with or withODt the tune anlon'iowel 1) Id the item* of the lature tenae-
tyBtam (888 11.) and of the desjdetaiiie coojogatlon (1087 fl.}.

o. To the root thus increased the augment is prefixed
and the secondary endings are added.

876. In the case of a few roote, the sibilant tense-stem
(always ending in ?! k?) is further increased by an CT a,
and the inflection is nearly like that of an imperfect of the
second or a-conjugation.

876. a. In the vast majority of cases, the sibilant is
the final of the tense-atem, and the inflection is like that
of an imperfect of the first or non-a-conj ligation.

b. And these, again, fall into two nearly equal and
strongly marked classes, according as the sibilant is added
immediately to the final of the root, or with an auxiliary
vowel 5 i, making the tense-sign ^ i^. Finally, before this
^ if the root ia in a very small number of cases increased
by a H B, making the whole addition TTT^ sig.

ioy Google

877—] XI. A0BIflT-8TBTEM8. 314

877. We have, then, the following olasnfication (oi the
varieties o£ Bibilaot-aoiist:

A. With endings added directly to the sibilant:

4. with Hs simply after t^e root: a-aorist;
h. with ^ i before the ? s: i^-aorist;

5. the same, with TT a at end of root: siv-aoiiat.

B. With S a added to the sibilaot before the endings :

7. with sibilant and 9 a: sa-aorist.
a. Aa legarda the distinction ^etveea the fouilb uid flfth fonni, It
may be sild in a genenl wtr that thoae roots Incline to t^e tbe (nxllUty
1 in ttie lorbt which take It also In other forrnktlonei bat it la impoadble
U) lar down any atricl inlaa m to this accordance. Compare 803.

4. The B-aorist.

878. The tense-stem of this aorist is made by adding
IT 8 to the augmented root, of which also the vowel is usu-
ally strengthened.

879. The general rules as to the strengthening of the
root-vowel are these:

a. A final vowel (including If? t) has the vrddbi-ohange
in tbe active, and (excepting ^ x] iu^ in the middle: thus,
from y^ lead, active stem 5^^ anSi^, middle stem ^l^^ane^;
from y^ 9ru hear, USflH a^r&u^ and MVll^ a^rop; from
y^ kr make, *mi\fi ak&rf and SRi^ akff.

b. A medial vowel has the vfddhl-change in the active,
and remains unaltered in the middle: thus, from ya-^ ohand
leem, active stem yc*lr+1 aooh&nts, middle stem M<%^
aoohants; from y^ rio leave, ^^ arUk^ and ^tj^ arik^;
from v"^ rudh obstruct, Q^fH arRute and W^r^ amts;
from vTlsT Sri pour out, UHM aBrSk? and ER151 asfkf.

880. a. The endings are the usual secondary ones, with
3TI us (not ^{ an) in 3d pi. act., and ^ ata (not^ antaj
in 3d pi. mid.

ioy Google

315 Sibilant Aobibt: 4. b-aori8t. [— S8S

b. But before R b and FT t of 2d and 3d sing. act. is in
the latei language always inserted an ^ I, making the end-
ings ^ Is and ^It,

O. This inaerUon li nnknoim In th« ttfliest linfntge (of the RT.) :
•M below, 688.

861. R. Before endings beglnoiDg with t or th, the tenBe-sign ■
is (898 a-«) omitted After the fiDXI coDsonsnt of a root — unlesa this
be r, or n or m (converted to anaavSTft).

b. The same omiialan li at eoune made before dbvun after a con-
Mnant; aod after a totoI the libiUnt Is either omitted ot siBimilatad (tho
equlTalenee ot dhv and ddhv io the tiieorlet of the grammiiUae and the
ptaetJM of tbo maDiiacripts makea It Impoeilble to aay which: SSB); and
then the endlDg bceomea ^hvam, prorlded the sibilant, if retained, would
have been ^ (886 0): thus, uto^vam and Avj^vKm (beside aatof-
ata and avTfata); dr<^T«m (>'dx regard: (B., onee), whlah 1* to
dfthfta (2d slog.) as KV^^VKca and av^ata to avTi and aTTthU; and
kr^vam (H.).

O. According to the- grammsiians, the omlsilon of a before t and th
takes place also after a short vowel (the case can occur only in the 2d and
3d ilng. CDld.); bnt we bare seen above (884 a) that this Is to be ilewel
rather aa a substltutlDn In those persons of the forms of the root-sotlst
Neither in the earlier nor In the later language, howeier, does any example
occur of an sorist-form with b retained after a abort vowel before these
endings.

d. After the final sonant aspirate of a root, the sibilant before the
same endings is said by the Hindu grammarians to disappear altogether, the
oontblnation of the aspirate with the th or t of the ending being then
made iccotdlng to the ordinary rule for such eases (160): thus, from the
•tern arHnts, for ar&ndh-s, is made arftuddha, as If from nr&udh •(- ta
directly. No example of such a form Is qaotable from the literature; but
the combination Is established by the occurrence ot other similar cases
(883 f). In the middle, in like manner, aruts + ta becomes amddha,
u if from arudh + ta; bnt all sach forms admit also of being understood
as of the root'aorial. Those that have been fonnd to occur were given
above (884 d); probably they belong at lea«l in part to this aorlst.

e. From the three nasal roots gam, tan, man are made the 2d and
S4 ling. mid. persons ngathia and acata, atathSa and atata, and amata
(amathBs not quotable), reckoned by the native grammarians as B-aorlst
forms, made, after loss ot their flnal root-nasal, with loss also of the sibilant
after a short vowel. They are doubtless better referred to the root-aorlst. Bnt
JB. haa a oorreiponding 1st sing, ataal bom I'tan.

882. As examples of the inflection of this variety of

ioy Google

-]

XI. AORIBT-BTBTEIIS.

316

sibilant aorirt we may take the toota Hi nl lead, and f^^
ohid cut of. Thus:

mctlTB. middle.

1 #fN^ ^^ ^^ ^ft M^ai^

inftlf&in inftlfva inU^ma &n«fi AnOfTRhl Aa«fm«fai

^Sl^ inUftain Anftlfta AnSfthOs Ane^Kthlm. 4iie^Tain
3 fcflHtft^ tR?;i'^ *filj*i^ ig^ WHHIHTH^ tf^^H

Aufil^it &n8lQt^ &naifus &ne^ tee^tftm ineqata

^ «• ^1- ^ P-

1 *f4^rHM^ «l^rH M^rW

&col)&itBain &aohSitBva ioohUtama

ioohtitelB iooliUttam 4ooliiitU

I y^'rHlH M^tIIH yc^'rWfl

AoohftltBlt &ccIi&itUm &ooh&itsua
mldille.

iootaltsl icohltBTahl icohitamahl

iioohlttha* ioobitaathixa &ooblcldliTtua

&oobltta &oohitsfttam ieohltuta
a. From yr\idh. obtbtiet, the 2d and 3d du. and id p). set sod
the 2d and 3d eing. mid. would be Ar&addbaiii, ^taddliaiii,
irladdha, &raddIiBe, iroddba; from ytfi pour out, iuSftam.
iarB^tAm, aarftqtai aant^^ aar^; from ydfq im, idrftftam etc.
(aa from bi-J). But from yk^ do the same pereoDB in tlie active are
ikSr^^am, ikarfffim, Akftr^ta; from Vtau ttreteh tbey are AUUiatam,
iULOetftm, &tUsta.

689. The amliiian of a Id the ictlve penons (&oollUttain, iooUlt-
tarn, 4oobaitta) 1b ■ cue of nrj Tire ooouRence; til the qnottble eius-
plea vere giveo above (938 e). Aa to the like omiulan In middle parHna,
■ee 881. The OhU. ha» twice AvKstam for avita-tun (yvM dtBtOi:
thia may be Tteved aa anothar case of total disappearance of (he elbllant,
and eonaoquent leatoratlon ot the final radleal to tta origliial form.

ioy Google

317 Sibilant Aorist: 4. s-aokibt. [—888

8S4. Cortain roots io & weaken thA & in middle Inflection to i
(u also in the rooc-aorist: above, 834 a): these are said to be atbB,
41, and dbB; in the older language have been noted Adlql and adifata
fVom ydt giv» (and adlfl perhaps once from yH bindj, adM^ and
Adbifata (with the optkUve dhi^iyai] from ydh& put, and aathi^ta;
>lBO ftcl9(hfia and «e3t»tti from ygi go (with adlil).

R. The middle inflection of the aorist of ydi would be, then,
-Moording to the grammarians: Ul^i, 4dithflB, &dlta; A&i^vSd,
idifftthAtn, idlffttftm; Adl^mahi. fcdi^Tua, idl^ata.

88B, Root* ending in ehanguble f (so-oalled roou in f: 242) are
Mid br the giftmnurtsDi to eonisrt thl* vowel l« Ir In middle farmi: thns,
-astlr^ ast&-qthBa etc. (bom Vatf); of anoh forms, honevar, hu been
ionnd in the older Ungoige only amr^ata, PB.

686. The a-aorist is made in the older language from abont a
hnndred and forty roots (in RY., from about seventy; in AV., from
about fifty, of which fifteen are additional to those in RV.J; and the
epic and classical literature adds but a very small number. It has in
the Veila certain peculiarities of stem- formation and inflection, and
.also the fall series of modes — of which the optative middle is re-
tained also later as a part of the "precative" (but see 026 b).

887. Inegularities of stem-fomiaUon are as follows:

K. The itrengthentng of the rooc-eylisble U now md then iiregalBTlf
made or omitted: thus, ayok^t (AB.), obetaia (B.3.; Uao oecnra In
HBh., ohlEb hM tuiUieT rotAs), rottia(KU.)i amatooB (KY.^ arSifaBi
■nd arSntol (AB.), ulkqi etc. (T.B. : Keah), mUsta (AT.) ind mSABtAm
(TA.); lopMra (v.); and HBb. has drofldbSB. From yani Is made
Blfik;It (V. etc.), >nd from ymtiii, amgflt^t (not qnoUble). The form
aTaflkqinabi (BhP.J is donbtleei i falae reading.

h. A ndicil flnil nuil ia lott In agaamaU (RV.) and gaa&UiKm
(TA.) from Vgam, and In the opUtiTee mat^a and vaalmahi (BT.)
from yjuan and van.

O. The rooU bu, dba, and iiQ haTS d Instead of o in the middle:
thai, abufata, adbo^ata, emOfi and anilfStSm and anQf^ta; f'dbur
(or dbuTv) makes adbOrfata.

d. (JB. has once atr&Bat&m for atrAatfim (yttft).

8SB. Tbe principal peculiarity of the older language in regard
to inflection is the frequent absence of I in the endings of 2d and
.3d sing, act., and the consequent loss of tbe consonant-ending, and
sometimes of root-finals (150). The forms without I are tbe only ones
foDud in EV. and E,, and they outnumber the others In AV. and
TS.; Id the Brahma^as they grow rarer (only one, adrSk, occtirs in
QB.; one, arS^ in KB.; and two, adxfik and &yi\. In QB.; PB. has
pone).

ioy Google

S6e— ] XI. Aobibt-btbteus. 3i8

88B> If the loot ands In ■ vowel, only the eousoiiiiDt of tba ending
ii neeeiBirll; Itut: thus, aprfis (for both aprSa-S ftnd sprlft-t) bom ypAi
»Dd in Ilka mtnner abb bom yliftj — aJUa (fOi aJUf-t) from yii; tad
in like mannei ac&is from yol, >nd nftio (oijiaBntlMB) fMm >^m; — and
7&UB (for ayHtif-t) from v'yn.

a. Bnt (aa In other like oaaee : BBS ■) the ending la aometimec preacr-
Ted at the eipenae of the tenaa-ilgnj and we haie In Sd ilng. ^Slt (Ira-
aide oj&ia and i^U^t) from yH; and in like manner kcBit, afrSit,
ah&lt, nSit (no examples have been noted except fiom loota In i «nd I):
compare Kris and BTto, 2d sing., 890 a.

800. a. If the root (in either ita simple oi itiengthened form] esda
in a conaonuit, the tenae-algn is loet with the ending. Thna, ablulr (for
abhftrf-t: beside abhSr^am, abhSr([{fttIl) from ybhj; other like cases
ate obfir, and (bom roola in ar) akfir, ata&r, aevir, bvKr. Farther,
trUk (B8Ba; for ar&ikf-t) ftom yiio; Uke case* are a^Ut bom
ytfvit, and (bom root* with madid a) adfftut bom ^dynt, ariat bom
y^dh, and mfiiUk bom v^nc. Further, bom roots ending in the pUt-
tall and h, aprftk from yp^o, aorftk from yn^, abhftk bom ytihai,
adrfik from y^Ji}' n^^^f^ f""" l^dab; bnt, with ■ different change of
the Una], ayS( bom v'yaj, aprftf from t'PT'^i avfif ftom vVab, and
aarfit bom ysfj; and (above, 146 a) btKb appeara to stand twice in AT.
fbr BTfif-8 from ytfi; RT. has also twice aySa bom yj»i. Further,
from reota ending in a nasal, atSo bom ytan, khftn from yUian, aySn
and an&a bom yyjfm and nam ^143 a).

b. If, again, the roots end lu a double conaonant, the latter of the
two is lost along with tense-sign and ending : thna, aooban (for aoohftnta-t;
bealde aooh&Otta and aocbKntsun] bom ych&Ddj and other like oaaea
are akrOn, aak&n, and nay an.

891, A relic of this peenliaiity of the older inflection hat baen
preaerved to the later language in the 2d sing. bhSlB, from ybhl.

UodeB of the s-Aorlst.

88S. The indicatlTe forma without anient are ased in a sub-
junctive seoae, especially after mi prohibitive, and are not QncommoD.
Examples with accent, bowever, nre extremely rare; there has been
noted only tr&Aai, middle ; jadging from this, the tone woald be found
on the radical syllable. According to the Hindu grammarians, it may
be laid on either root or ending.

893. Proper subjunctive forms are not rare in RT., bnt are
markedly less common in the later Tedio texts, and very seldom met
with in the Brahmanas. They are regularly made with gu^a-atrength-
ening of the radical vowel, in both active and middle, and with accent
on the rooti

ioy Google

319 Sibilant Aorist: 4. b-aorist. [—698

a. The forms with prim»iy sndlngtarei la aotlve, stog^il; dar^aal;
ii«(atl, parf ati, pftanti, m&taati, yo^ti, Tak^tl, aak^ati; dAiattau,
dhftBatbu, pir^athaBi vakfathaa, vosTfathM; pfiaataa, yuhsataa,
yakfatas, vafc^ataa; dhaaattia, nOQatha, p&r^atba, m&taatha; —
Id middle, naifasftl, m^Aaftl; m&ABaae; kradiBatc, trtaate, dar^ts,
m&Asate, yakfate, r&sata, vaAaatA, s&kfate, Usate; trasSthe (not
ttAaUthe, u we Bhould rsthsi expert); u&ihaaiite, m^LAsaute: and,
with the fnller ending In 3d sine-, miallt&i.

b. Tbe foims wlih BMonduy endings ire (Ktlie only) : J^M, vikfas;
lUrf at, ii6fat, p&kf at, p&n^at, pri^t, y&k;at, y6^t, viiAaat, rUq^at,
v6fat, 84taat, ohantBat, etc. (some twenty othere); yakfatftiBi viJi-
BSma, eti(9&iiia, stOfSma; part[aii, yadiBan, yo^an, rasan, vakfan,
fdfan, qToqaa. Of theia, yakfat and vak^t ire found not itiely in
tbe Briliniinia; iny others, hirdl; more thin spaiidiolly.

894. Of inegntiTltiei lie to be noted the rollowlng:

a. The fotmi dfkqaaa ind pfkfafs (3d sing, mid.) lick the gu^a-
atiengthenlDg.

b. Je^am, ato;am, ind yofam (AT. ynfam, with Q for o i« in
an&fata etc.) ippeir to be flret penong formed under government of the
inilogy of the lecond end third — nnlell they ire lellcg of i itite of
tbingi interior to the v^ddlii-strenethenlng: in whti^h cue Je;ma is to
be compired vith them (we Ebonid expect IKi^ma or Je^ftma).

C. From root* in K ere mide ■ few formi of pioblemitic chiricter:
nimely, yefam (only cue In RT.), khye;am, Jfiet[ain, ge^am lod
ge^ma, detfma, sefam md aet, Bthefiam and sthequa. Their vilne
le optatiTO. The inalogy of Je^am ind Jeqma suggeite the poasibllity of
their derltatioa from 1-form* of the a-roots; or the sibilant might be of
a preeative cbiiacter (thaa, ya-l-B-am). That Ihey really belong to ths
i^iorlat ippeiT* highly Improbable.

d. The RV. bat a (ew difflcalt Brat peraoni middle in ae, which in
perbipa best noted here. They are; 1. fhim the simple rrot, kffe, hl^
(and olii^eP), Bta^i; % from preaent-atems, aroase, fnjaae, y^jaae,
gftyife, gF^^ and ptmi^d. They hive the Talua of indicative present.
Compare below, 897 b.

895. Optative rorms of this loriet ire mide in the middle only, and
they have in Id ind 3d sing, always the preeative b before the endings.
Those fonnd to occur in the older language are: dlflya, dhlflya, bhak-
^A, ntaslya (for maAsiya), mukflya, rialya, lop^ya, e&kf^a,
stfflya; moA^t^fis; darfma, bhakfifitA. maAeifta, mpk^ffa;
bhftkqjtmahi, dhakflm&hl, maABim&hi, va&Bim&hi, vaslmatat,
sakflm&hi; maAairata, PB. bu bbuk^iqiya, which (honld belong to
a slf-iortBt. The RV. form tr£iBlth&m (for trfislyath&m or trOsftthftm)
is an isolated anomaly.

a. This opiitlve makes ■ part of the accepted "ptecadve" of the IMer"
liDgvige: see below, 983, 926 b.

ioy Google

886—] XI. AORtBT-STBTEHa. 320

896. ImpuitiTe perrons bom thli urUt uc extcemelT ma: wt flnd
th« 3d aiDg. a«t. n«fa >ud par^A uid the 2d pi. ytuhBat& C^m a-itama,
and ihowing lathei, thetefare, > tieitment of the aoriit-item u > root],
»nd the 3d ilng. mid. rBBat&m kod pi. rSMuitftm (of which the wioe
may be Mid).

Participles of the s-aorist.

867. tu AetWe particlplat 4r« dikf«t oi dbikfst, ud ■4kfat
(both EV.).

b. It flUaM (above, 8M d) It to be teokoned m xn B-aoTiat fom,
ffljM&il4 la an B-aoriat participle; and of a kindred oharact«T, appuendy,
arA ArQctB&uA, 61iasbm, jwtymjw 4^ Hh4yfiaftn^j wmfcwrt^inftTiftj yaniA-
■ftii&, rnbhuAu^ vrdhaoSni, Mtliaa&iii, qavu&nA, all in RV.; with
namoaSni, bhl74sbia. In AY. In RV. ocean aUo onoe »ihi^»m«Titt
apparently an a-foixn of an B-aoriat of ydhi.

S. The If-aoiiat.

898. The tense-stem of this aoiist adds the, general
tense-sigD H s by help of a piefized auzitiaiy voirel ^ i,
making ^ if , to the toot, which is usually sttengthened,
and which has the augment.

899. The rules as to the strengthening of the root are
as follows:

a. A final vowel has rrddhi in the active, and ga^A in
the middle: thus, <9m^? apftvif and Ui^JMN apavi^ from
y^ pO cleanse; UrTlfj^ at&rlQ, act., firom v?T tr ptus; Q^lf^H
a^aylf, mid., from y^ 9I lie.

b. A medial vowel has gu^a, if capable of it, in both
voices: thus, i^f^HT alefif, act. and mid., from y%ts U9
tear; ^ji^^ arooiQ from V^ ruo ahine; Uc^f^tl avarfif
from CoW vTf '■<»i ; but flsUNH ajlvi* from ysf^^jlv live.

o. Medial Q a is sometimes lengthened in the active;
but it more usually remains unchanged in both voices.

d. The loota in the oldei langaage wblch show the lengthening are
kao, tan, ran, stan, svan, ban, vraj, sad, mad, oar, tsar, svar,
jval, das, tras. From ran, san, kram, vad, rak^ and aah oecnr form*
of both kinds. From ]/tnath or nantb aie made the two atema mattdq
and iwnTiflii^

i, Google

321 Sibilant Aorist: 5. iq-AOiusT. [—808

900> «• Of eiceptloDi ma; be noted: Yiaji hu (■■ elMwh«ia: 6S7)
vrddbl iDsCesd of gn^n: thai, unftrjlfom; i^str Iub ostarla, sod y^
hsi ftQailt C>1bo «;arUt Id AT.)i "^f' KolfA Id KcHve.

b. The root grabh or grab hu (u In fataic «tn., below, 9369, 066)
long I instwd of i befaTo the •Ibllant; thiu, aftrabblqiDS, AgrRbiqta,
Bgrabhi^nta. The loota In ohaagaKble f (ao-called roots in f: 84S), and
yin[ ue iBtd by the griminirlins to do tbe ume optionally; bnt no foims
with long I fiom meh roots have beea foand quot»blo. A Sutr* (PG3.]
baa once uwyl^fa from i<'iii (doablleai a false loading).

eoi. The endiags are as in the preceding Coimation
(3^ UB and W{ ata id 3d pi.]. But in 2d and 3d aing.,
the combinations if-s and if-t aie &om the earliest period
of the language contracted into ^tflB and ^ It.

a. The 2d pi. mid. shonld end alwai^ in l^IiTaiii (or 1441>Tam,
from i^^dbvam: SSS); and this is in Tact the form Id the only exam-
ples quotftble, n&melf ajanl^bvain, arti^liTam, WtiJhijhTam, ve-
pl^bvam; SB to the mlea of the native grammsrianB reepeDting the
matter, see 236 a.

902. As examples of the inflection of the i^-aorist may
be taken the loots ^ pll cleanse, and ^ budb wake. Thus:
actlTe. middle.

i grni^ftm s^ri^ yqiJ^iH tiTMpjf'ii srri^9i% *44i=(^H[^

&pSvlqam &p&Tlfva Apftvl^ma ^pavlfi Apavlfvalil ApaTt^mabi

a SHRtH^ MMlftfet^i^ ^fTliW ^mfirWTH^ ^^^^T^nsITH^ qnf^bH^

&pKTt8 ^pSviitam ApSvlfta tpavlf p*^ Apavl^fttbKm ApavlfbTam

ApBvIt ip&Tift&m Apftvlfus Apavifta &paTlf&t&m Apavl^ata

1 g^tfcraii^ sratftra' sRtRiKq a^fuft Msi^fu«i% yih^iHf^

Abodbl^am ibodbifra &bodhifma &bodbifi &bodbif vahl &bodbif mohi
eto. etc. etc. etc. ets. etc.

908. Tbe nnmber of roots from which forms of this aorist have
been noted in the older language is Dearly a haodred and fifty (io
BT., abont eighty; in AV., more than thirty, of which a dozea are
additional to those in RV.^ tbe later texts add lees than tweoty.
Amung tbeae are no rooCe in K; but otherwise they are of every
variety of form (mreat la final 1 and I). Active and middle persons
are freely maile, but sparingly from tbe same root; only about fifteen

WbltiitT, Siammar. 3. ad. jt

Dij.ieo, Google

80S—] XI. AORIET-BTBTEHB. 322

roola hAve both Mtlve mud middle formB In the older Imngiuge, and
of these « p«rt onlj exceptionftllj In the one voice or the other.

a. No tale appears to goTem the choice of nuge between the
If- and the ■•aorlst; and in no small number of cases the same root
flbows forms of both classes.

904< TrrefQlultiei an to be notlud u follovc

a. The Mmtruted farms {tkram&n, ograbhlm, xnd a-vadbtm (vltli
ingm«ntle» v&dUtn) ue roqnd Id lit alng. act.

b> For fcqarlt octms Id AY. i^arUt; &1io (in » part of the mtDiiicripti)
<}arKla for ^ails; agrahUfain Is ronnd Id AB. (alio the monrtroDi form
t^JagrabbJUfam : tee 801 1). AJaylt, with short i in the eodlng, occnn

in xa.

o. AT. hu ODce nadi^^ta, *ithoot gta}A.

d. The formi atSrima (RV.), &vSdlran (AY.), ind bKdblthia
(TA.), thongh they lack the aibiUnt, ara pechapi to be refeiied to thl*
aorist: compare avlti, 008. A few elmllar caies occur Id the epics, and
are ot like dODbtfal character: thai, jSuitliSs, mSditUo, vartithBa,
qa&kitbia, aod (the eaiuatlTe: 1048) aghStayithiB. Agrbitbn and
gfhlth&S and (Cpmta, If not falie readlnji far gflml-, are probabl;
Irte^lar present-formatloDB.

Modea of the if-aorUt.

806. Ai DBQal, anfmentleu Indicative formi of thle aortut are more
common than proper labJnnetiTei, Example!, of all the peraoni fonnd la
occnr (and indadlnf all the accented woidi), are. In the actiie: qUslfam,
v&dtalm; mitUs, tr&dhls, yavls, s^tIb; Avlt, jdrvit, m&tlilt, vUb-
It, veqlt; mardhi^tani, doft^tam, hiAsiftam; aviif^Siii, J&niftam,
b&dhlft&mi framtfiiia, T&dlqma; vadblffa and vadhi^tana, math-
Iftana, blAelfta; bTSrifiiB, grahl^ns; — in tlie middle: rKdhlfii
J4nlftli&8, marflfthfts, Tyatblftbfta; kr&mlffa, J&niffa, paTl^ftai
pritbiffa, m&iidi;ta; Tyathifniahi, The aeoejit la on the root-iyilable
(tSrl;6B, AT. oDce, ii donbtlesi an errot).

806. a. Of iDbJnnctlTe forms with primary endlagi aecnr onlr the
Ist ling. act. davlf&^i, and the lit pi. mid. (with nnsttengthened e)
y&dflmabe and Bani^lmabe.

b. Formi with seeondarr endlagi are almost limited to 2d and 3d
■ing. act. There are fonnd : avl^aa, kinl^as, t&ri^«B, rak^^aa, T&db-
Iqaa, Titdl^ae, viqifaa, gaAelqaa; karl^at, Jambtd^at, Jd^l^at,
takflqat, t&rifat, D{odifat, parliat, b^dhlqat, mirdbl^at, y&oifat,
yodhlqat, rakfi^t, vaniqat, yyathi^at, ^afialqat, sanifat, sKvlqat.
They are made, it will be notkeil, with entlie regalarlty, by adding a to the
tenie-etem lu if before the endings. The only other peraoni fonnd to oocnt
ai« the 3d pL ac:t. aanifan and mid. B&nifanta (and T8. hai vanlfanta.

ioy Google

323 Sibilant Aorist: 5. I^aorist. [—©II

foi the pToblematio Taanfaata of RT.), irblcb are alio TegvUr. BhRvlfSt
(AB. onae) !■ m iciliUry siampU of a taim with doable mode-ilgD; o&ni^
fbat (KT. ; BY. iottaad J&nif (bat) leen* hopeleealy coinipt. Tbe ladlul
■yllable tlwayi liu the Accent, and ita rowel aeoally accord* with that of
the iQdlrittTa; bat ve bare man- in the labJonctlTB agatnit aB&nlfam
(as to oay- and ran-, lee below, BOS).

907. The middle optative of this aoriat alio fonna a pait of the ac-
cepted "preeattTa" of tbe later Ungnage (OSS, 926 b). It la veiy rare at
all periodi, being made In RT. flKim only Ave lOota, and In AV. from two
of the «ame and tiom three additional one* (ili of the eight have other
Iif-forma); and the remaining leila add, to far ae noticed, only fonr other
roots. All tbe forms found to occnr are as foUowa: Jftnl^ya, iDdhiflya,
sdhifi7&, ruoli^R and rooIflTa, gmi^lyKi modl^thBs; Janiql^tft;
Tuni^ts; Bahiflvahl; Idhifunahj, edbl^Im&hJ, Jani^Imahi, tSri^I-
mahJ, mandl;lmahl, Tandl^lm&hi, vardhl;Im4hl, aabi^Imatal and
afihiflm&hl. The aoeent la on tbe ending, and thia would lead na to ex-
pect a weah form of root throagboot; bnt the nsage in this respect appears
to be TSTioiu, and the oases are too few to allow of aetttng up any rule.
The forms Juiifeyua and -70, ffom a secondary ft-stem, occnr in E.

908. Of imperative forms, vb have from y^v a series: namely,
avl^^hl, avif^, avlft&ill, avitA (if this, as seems probable, staads
anomalonaly for aTlf{&) and avl^f^bia; two of theae ate of unmistakably
ImperatiTe form. Other forma occnr only In 2d dn. and 2d pi., and are
accordingly snch u might also be aabJnnctiTea used imperatlTely (which
is further made probable for two of (hem by their accentnatiDn on the
loot-Byllable) : they are kramiqtAia, gaml^fam, oanlq^m, oayi^t"')'
(agtinat acftTii^ain), titriftam, rodhl;tam, vadblq^am, 9nathl jfHP ;
riL^iffana (againgt arS^ifUB), qnathiftitna.

909. Ko words baviDg a participial eDdiog after if are found
auTwbere to occur.

910. This is the only aorist of whicli formB are made io the
teoondaiy and denomlDatlve conjugations: see below, 103B, 1048,

6. The Blf-oorlBt.
911. According to the giammaiiaDa, this aorist is made
from loots in ^ S [including j^ mi^, ^mi [01 ml] damage
and ^ IT cling, which substitute Eorms in B), and from
•IIT nam iow, Tra7am reach, and ^l? ram he content, and is
used only in the active; the oonesponding middle being of
tbe a-foim (878 ff.) . Its inflection is precisely like that of
the i^-aorist; it is unaecessary, then, to give more than

Sl«

ioy Google

911—] XI. AORIST-STSTEHS. 324

ita first persons, which we may form from the roots TJ\ yS
ffo and sm nam bote. Thus:

■- i. p. •. a. p.

AyKslfom ArOeifva &7fiai;ma AuufaBi^Am inaiheifTa AnadkHtftna
etc. etc. etc. etc. et«. etc.

91fl. The sif-MTlit U propeilj only * sub-foim of the if-wiUt,
bavtDg th« tenae-iiso uid ending* or the Utter «dded to a fonn of loot
increued b; vi added s. It la of extreme tully In the older Ungutge,
being made in RY. only from the roots ga ting and jft go, and In A.V.
only from hft Itava, *nd doabtleM alio from pyi/Ul up »nd van wm
(«ee below, 914b)i the remaining older teiu *dd JfiS inov (B.), jjft ocer^
pote»r, dbji think (^B. once; the edition reads -dhft-), and ram be con-
ttnt (ST.; a bad Tarlant for BV. riaiya); other Biahmana forms wbloh
migbt be also of the s-aorist are adrftalt. avfi^t, and ahvaait; and bhnlc
fllflTa (FB. S.} must bo regarded as an anomaloni tonaation from yhhVij,
nnless we prefer to admit a secondary root bbuk;, like bliakf from bhiO-
In th« later langnsge have been fonnd quotsble from other roots only glSale,
adtamSait, anaifaelt, apsalt, mUsIs, and amnKslf us.

a. Tbe participle hihaiiiKiia and caDsatlTe hftsayanti (KY.) show
that li&S had assumed, even at a lery early period, tbe valne of a secon-
dary root beside bA for other forms than tbe aotlst.

013. The whole lerles of older IndlestiTe forma (omitting, as donbt-
fnl, the 2d and dd alog.) Is as follows: agialfam, aj&&8tfam, aria-
tiam, adhTialfam; ^rBaiftUn, ayaai^tom; aja&siqma; aJfiSalfta,
Ayfiaifta; agfisl^iu, ayBalfOB (Kkfifaa is from y^ak; attain).

a. Forms wlthoat aagment ere Uiese; JfiSalfam, radtsi^am, hBsl-
;am; hOai^m; hisl^timi baalffa; hftaiqua, gfisl^ns, JUal^oa.
The accent would doubtless be npon the root-syllable.

914. a. Of proper subJonctlTes are fonnd two, gdstfst and yftaii}at
(both KV.).

b. OptatlTOS are not less rare : namely, rlsiBl^thaa and py&8i|Fimalil
(tor which the AY. mamucrlpts read pya^lfTmalil, sltered in the edition
to pyfiylf-); and doubtless vaAqlflya (AY., twice) is to be corrected to
vaAfli^a, and belongs hare. As to bhnkql^Iya, see aboTe, 912.

O, The accent of yaaJqt&m (like aTi^t^m, 908) ikow* it to be a
ttne ImperatiTO formt and yfial^fa (BY., once) is doubtless the same, with
anomalous t for L

915. Middle form* of this sorist, it will be noticed, oocnr from the
optative only; but, considering the great rarity of the whole formation, wa
are hardly Juitilled in concluding that In the ancient language the middle
persons in -sl^ -BlqtbfiSi etc., were not allowable, like those in -ifl,
-IfthftB, and the othor* of the Iq-sotltt

ioy Google

325 SiBILAMT AORIST: 1. BVA0RI8T. [—919

7. The sa-aoriflt.

916. In the latei language, the toots allowed to foim
this soiist end in 31 9, ^ 9, or ^ h — all of them sounda
which in combination with the tense-sign make vf kp; and
they have ^ i, 3 u, ot ^ ^ aa radical vowel.

a> They &ie- ta followB: dig, rif, ilq, vlq, kUq, kruf, ruf, mff,
spfq; tvlf, dvi^, glif, t1^ krf ; dih, mlh, llh, gUh, duh, nlh, tph,
v^h. Btfb; fiom (bout faiir al them aa-foinK, aiilier or lalar, ub quotibla.
Some of them may, or with ceitiln memingi most, tike loiitt* of olhar fonnf.
And B few are allowed to drop both tenae-sign and nnlon-vowel a la cei-
talu persons of ths middle; that Is, they may make Instead forma of the
root-aorisl.

917. As the tease-atem ends in Q a, the inflection is
in the main like that of an imperfect of the second general
conjugation. But (according to the grammaiiaDs: the fotms
unfortunately have not been found quotable} the Ist sing.
mid. ends in ^ i instead of 1^ e, and the 2d and 3d du.
mid. in ^g(M SthBm and ^TrTR St&m, as in imperfects of
the othei conjugation. Both active and middle inflection
is admitted. The root is throughout unstiengthened.

816. As example of inflection we may take the root
1^ dl9 point. Thus :

actlTe. middle.

idik^ua &dikqftva idlk^Kma fcdlkql &dikfSvahl Adlk^SmaM

wi^irtH^ 5l^irtf<*i^ flf^iHH Mi^eriaif)^ Mf^miR^ Mi^rfUH^
MUtfas &dlkfatam 4dlk(ats fcdlk^thSa &dlkfBtliKm Adik^adhvam

idikqat &dlkfat&m' &dlk;an Adlk^ata Adlk^UBm idik^anta
819. In the euUai laogaage, the forma of the Mt-aorlat are hardly
nne than apondle. They are made in BV. froia Mien roota; iu AT.,
from two of these >nd from two otfaen; *nd the ramalning tnta add ten
more, making nlnetceo in all (the Ikler laognsge makea do addHlons to
this ntunbei). A* later, all have i or U 01 p u rMt-nwel, lud a final
ant which oombiDeB with s to ks; bnt tbwe ate in the lilt alio two

L.,j,i,....,LiOogle

91S — ] XI. AOEIST-SYBTEHS. 326'

ending Id J, nimely mf] uid t^J. All the ezamplw noted tie ginn

A. So fiT u the middle ronni ue conoeined, thlt loilit would be fnlljr
eipUia»d 4» * tnntfei of ceit«in ■•wtlets to an a-inllection. The miiked
difference In the itiangth ol ledlcel TOwel Id t)>e letlTe, howeier, ittndi
in the way of the incceHfuI «ppUc*tioii of ineli an tiplanation to Ilia aoll«a

820. A. In the IndleatiTe, we find, In the actlre : av^k^am; mimfcqiiiti
adhuk^aa, anilqkaB, aknik^aa, aeprk^aa (and HBh. adda amrkfM);
odlkfat, amlk^at, Kllk^at, avik^t, &krnk^t, aghuk^t, adukfat
and Adhuk^at, druk^t, av^kfat, akfk;at, 4mfkfat, 4apfk^t;
asbukqatbn; arnkflma, amrkftma, avrkfftma; ftdhak^an, aplk-
^ait [v'pl;)i nrukfao, aappk^an; — in the middle, only ak^k^atliU
(ykf^), Adhukqata, atid amfkfaiita (and UBh. adda om^kfataP).

b. FDrma without anient (no tcne «ntijunetiie« ocenr] ate, in the
aGtiTe: drlcfam, mpk^am; dnk^as, ruk^aa, mrkgaa; dvlkfat;
m^k^ta; dhtikf&n and duk^ia; — In the middle, dvik^ata, dakfata
and dhlUcfata, dbukq&iita.

o. Tbeie are no optative forma.

d. ImpsratiTe are: in the acttte, m^k^tam; in the middle, dbob*

f&BTft.

e. The few aceented lonna witbont angmeot wUeh oeonr haie the
tone on the tenae-eigD B^ In analoey with the a-aorlat (2) and the Imper-
fect of the &-claH: a alngle axceptloD la dbdkfata, which probabiy needa
emendatioD to dhnkf&ta.

f. The aapiratlon of Initial d and g, after loat of the aspirated qnalitf
of the root-flnal (16B), la aeen tii forma from the roola duh and gub, bnt
not bom drub (eal; a ilagle case, AB.); BV., howerec, hu alto adokfttt
and dnkfas, dnkf&n, dukqata.

Pracative.

981. Ae the Bo-oalled precative ia allowed b^ the grammarians
to be made in the later lan^oge from eveiy root, and in an inde-
peDdeDt way, without reference to the mode of formation of the
aorist from the same root, it is desirable to pnt together hare a brief
statement of the rules glTen for it.

022. The precative aotire is ma^le b^ adding tbe active
pieoative eodingo (above, 668) diieotly to the root. But:

a. Of final rool-7owela (aa before the paMlvB-algn yi: 770), I and
U are lengthened; j la nanally changed to ri, but to Sr and Gr in thoao
loota whieh elsewhere ihow ir- and ur- forms (so-oalled f-ioota : 242}, and
to ar in T ""d smf, R 1» changed to « In tha roota di, dbK, atb*, p»
drink, gft ting, and a few others, in part optlonaUy.

ioy Google

327 PBBCATiYa. [— M4

b. Tbe loot In geneikl utnmei Iti weiAeit form : > pennltliDKU d*m1
i< loit, u fa badbyBaun from ybKadb; the loou Khieh ue kbbieTUted
In the whIe penoDi of tho perfect (TM) hare the Hme ibbiaviitioD here,
u lo neytanin, JJrBsBLin, vidhySMum, tnirylniin. grbyftwun; V9KB
foimi i^yiawn (compue 68S, 8(Mo); uid to dd,

O. It ku been pointed out tbOTe (887) that the aetlTe preoadTO U *ii
Dptatlre of the n>ot-ioriit, irlth > problemttic Intertloii of > ■Iblltnt betmen
mode-iign and endlos.

928. a. llie pieoative middle is made by adding the
middle precatire endingB (abore, 668) to the loot inoTeaaed
by n s or ^ if — that is, to the tense-etem of an B-aorist
01 of an if-aoiiat (but without augment].

b. The root is 8tteI^;thened accoidiug to the rules that
apply in forming the middle-stem of the b and of the if-
aorists reepeotirely : in general, namely, a final vowel is
gunated in both formations; but a medial vowel, only be-
fore ^4-

o. A* wu pointed out above (667) the middle preoatife ii letUy the
t^tatlTo of oeitalu aotiiti, with the inutiion ot a itbllaol between mode-
tiga and endlnf onl; (*0 far »« anthenticaled by use) in the 2d and 3d
■tngnlar. Id tlie older laD^iugo, lueh fotmi are alteneit mado Aom the
«-aorlat (886) and the Iq-aoilat (807); but alio from the lool-aorlat (837 b),
the R-aoriEt (860 a), the redopUoatad aorlit (870), and the slf-aoilat
(014b); and even Itom the peiToet (SlSb).

924, As example of inflection, we may take the root
H bbtt he, which is said (no middle aorist or piecative from
it is quotable] to form its middle on the ff-stem. Thus:

bhOrlUjuD bhOyisva bbOy&ima
bbfiyfa bbOy&atam bbflyista

bhilTAt bhOyJetam bbttf^UB

ioy Google

XI. AORIST-SYSTEHS.

bbnvl4ly& bhavl^vUil bhKTi^Im&hi

bhATl^ftb'^ bhavlflyltstbKta blxavifl^liv&m

bhavl;If(& bhsvlfiylUtam bhavlfirfcn

ft. Tbe foimi given by the gmnmailBDi u 2i &nd 3d dual are of

very qnestioDable value, aa rsfardi tbe plaee ueigned to the ilbllant

Tboia pMionB, and the 2d pi., have uevei been met with Id nae. Far the

qautlOD teapactlQg the ending of the 2d pi., as dbvom oi i^v'am, we

siee.

826. ft. The piacatlve active is a foim of varjr rare oeciut«iee to (he
elatilcal laagaage. In e»«h of the teiti already more than once Teterred to
(Hanu, Nala, Bhagavad-QTta, (akontali, Hltopade9a) It oecort once and no
moie, and not half-a-doten torm* have been foood qnetable traoi the epia.
Ai to Ita value, see 673 o.

b. The pieeative middle is ylrtnally nnkoown in tbe whale litei
lit«t>tare, not a single oecmreDce of It having been bioaght to lleht. Tbe
BhP. his onoe rirlfl^fft, whloh is also a BV. form, belonglDg probably to
the rednpllcated loiist: see 870.

Uses Of the Aorist.

9Se. The uses of tba aoTiBt mode-forms [fts bu been ftlreftdj
pointed out: 68S) appear to accord with those of tbe mode-formB of
the preBeDt-BfBteiD. The predilection of the earlier language, cod'
tinaed sparingly in the later, for the augmentlees forme in prohibitive
expression afier rai was aufficiently stated and illiutrated above
(679).

ft. The tense-value o( the aorlil indicatiTe haa alio been more than
once referred to, and oall* only for somewhat more of detail and for illut-
tratlon here.

927. The aoiist of the later languag^e is simply a pret-
erit, equivalent to the imperfect and perfect, asd frequently
codrdinated Tvith them.

a. Tbui, tato^ aa gardabbaib lagu^eua tA^arSin&Bft; ten&
'bBu pafioatvftm agamftt (H.) tk^M^on Ae beat tlu donkey with a ttid ;
and hereof the latter died; tata^ aS vidarbhUa agamat puna^; tSih
tn baiidhiijaiia^ aamapl^ayat (UBb,] thereupon the toent back le
Vidariha; and her kindred paidher reoerenee; prltlm&n abbQl, uvAOft

ioy Google

329 UsBa OF the Aorist. [—889

oU *Dun (HBh.) he watJilUd ui'tA affection, and laid to him; tarn, ftda-
bat kftfthiil^ so 'bliad dlvyavapas tftdft [B.) As bunted him with
aood, and he became then a heaeeniy form.

928. The aorist of the older Unguftge hu the valae of a proper
"perfect": that Is, it elgnifiee somethiDg past which is viewed aa
completed with reference to the preBent; and it lequirea accordlDgly
to be rendered hy our tense made with the anxiliary have. In general,
it iadicateB what has just taken place; and oftenest Bomelhing which
the speaker has experienced.

a. Eiunples bom the Tsd> are: p&ri 'mk gtia anefata p&ry
agnim ab^f ata, deT^qv akrata qr&va^ k& ImiA i dadharfatl (KV.)
iheee here haoi ted lAout a eoic, they have carried around the Jire, they
have done honor tc the godi — who thall venture anything againtt ihmtf
y&m siob&ma iiiiiiiaa& ad 'y&m it 'g&t (Etv.) he ichom we (formerb/,
Impf) taught teiih our mind hat {now, aoi.) eome; y^iia "ndro havifft
kptvy Abhavad dTOiniiy ilttaiii&^ Id&ifa t&d akii derS aaapatni]^
klli'bbavain(RT.) that libation by which Indra, making it, became {iaft.)
of highett glory, I have now made, yegode; I hone become fi-eefiom ettemie*.

b. Exunplei ttOBi the Briihnii^a luigaage ire: oa hft 'amlfl J76K
UT&ea... t&to ha gandbarrt^ a&m ddira: Jydg va iy&m urv&^i
manii^dfV avfttalt (^B.) the lived with him a long time. Then the
Oandharvtu taid to one another, "thie Vrvaci, foreooth, hat dwelt a long
timt among mortah"; taaya ba dantft^ pedlra: taifa hoVBca; apat-
aata vft aaya daut&^ 1^3.) hie teeth fell out. Be taid to him: "hit teeth
truly have fallen out"; Indraaya TTtr&lfa Joghn^a indriyiuh viry&ili
pfthlvfm inu vy krebat t&d d^adbayo virudho >bbavan ti.
prajApatlm ap& 'dbftvad v^tiiih me jaghnoqa indrly&ih viryhih
pfthlTim &11U vy irat tkA &;adhayo virddbo 'bbuvann fti (TS.)
of Indra, when he had ilain Vritra, the force and might went away into the
earth, and became the herhi and plante; he ran to Prajapati, toying: "my
force and might, after tlaying Vritra, have gone aaay into the earth, and
have become the herbt and plante"; BTay&m enam abbynd^tya brilyftd
vrd^a kvi 'vS.t^ify (A.V., in proao passage) going up to him in person,
let himeay: "yratya, wh«reha*t thou ahod^f yk& idjtnrdi dTftuvlv4da-
m&n&T eyitSm ab&m adar9ain ab&m aqr&u^am ftl jk evb, brOylid
ab4m adarqam Itl t&smft avA fraddadbySma ((B.) if now two thould
come dieputing with one another, [tt« one'] toying "I have teen", [the other\
"I have heard", we thould believe the one who taid "I haee tetn".

929, a. Thli dlslinctlon of the aoiiet bom tbe Impeifect and perfect
M tenses ot nsnatlon is Tsry common in the Brahmana langasge (iucladlng
tlie older Upaniahads and the Siitns), and is closely obterved; violation at
it is Ter; rare, and is to be regarded a* either due to corruption ot text or
IndlcatlTe of a late origin.

b. Id the Yedlc hymns, the same distinction is prsTalent, hot it both
less clear and lets strictly maintslned) msny pttsagea would admit an

Dij.ieo, Google

9S0— ] XII. FuTUBE-aTSTEiia. 330

iDtarpreUtlDD Implying elth«t teuo; tind erldAUt Miiit-fonu ue •omMlmte
Died nutUiiely, vhlle Imperftiat-fonni ue also aceuion4llr employsd Id
tbe wriit tense.

880. The baaodaTy betireen wh&t hu Jnit been >nd what li Ifl ut
BTineMtot ooe, and U ■omvUmei oieiitapp«d, m that an aortic ippaan
when a piaieiit migbt lUnd, ot was eTsn ratbar to be eipected. Thm:
■rKsoBtho bhavfttam indave it& Itl eomo vil rlUa 'ndo^ aomO^
yU 'vU 'no etsd rlJBa iaada -olklpKt (AB. I. 18. 7] "£« ye comfof ■
tahU teati for oar Indv", ht tm/i ; Inda it kmff Soma ! bg this nuotw ha
hat mada thtm (iiiitaad of nuiAwi thfm) laitabhfor king Some to sit upon;
Tftm^ii ipo y&d adbhfr abhi^c&ti vkra^Mn ovBi 'nun akar
(HB. It. 3. 10) the watert art Varuna'i; in thai ha bepourt him with teaUn,
he hat mada him Vanma; pa&o&bhir vyigbftrayati p^fikto yi^lL6
yliTkii «T& yajfiia Um ilabdfai 'tho yivftm *vk yajfiia tAamU
rikfUay &pahanti (MS. Ul. 2. 6) A« (nuor* v>Hh Jive i _fivefoU it Ih* ogtr-
itig; at great at it ^t offering, of it ht hat {ihtrehjf\ taken holdi then, a*
gnat at it iht offeriiig, from it ha tmitet awm/ the demont. Tbi* Idiom ta
met vltb In all tbe Bnbnufai) bat it ii eapeolalty fre^oeat Id th« HS.

CHAPTER XU.

THE FIITURE-STSTEM8.
981. The verb has two futures, of veiy diffeieot age
and character. The one has for tease-sign a sibilant folloired
by Tl y*, and is an inheritance from the time ot Indo-
Euiopean unity. The other is a petiphrastio formation, made
by appending an auxiliary verb to a derivative noun ot
agency, and it is a recent addition to the verb-system; i(a
beginnings only are met with in the earliest language. The
former may be called the s-future (or the old future, or
simply the future]; the latter may be distinguished as the
periphrastic future.

ioy Google

331 The a-FUTORE. [—984

I. The B-future.
982. The tense-sigQ of this future is the syllable ^ aji,
added to the^joot^either_diiBcUy or by an auxiliary vowel
^ i (in the latter case becoming ^iqr iVJi]- The root has
the gu^a^tiengthening. Thus, fiom y^ dft give is formed
the futuie tense-stem ^THT 6t»jit; horn y^ 1 go, the stem
JffHI e^yi; fiom kJ^ du^ mtlt, the stem ^t^ dhokn^;
from yil bbn be, the stem Hf^UJ bh&Tifyi ; from y'^ rdh
MrtDe, the stem crf^TCZr ardhif^i; and so on.

a. But fiom yflv live the stetu is JIvlfyii, from y'okq *prinkl« it
is nk^loTi, and so oo (940).

b. There *re budly toy Tedlc cuea o( raMlutlon o[ the tengg-slgn
B;a into sia) BV. bu k^e^Uoitas onoe.

883. This tense-Stem is then inflected precisely like a
piesent-stem ending in !| a (second general conjugation:
788 a). We may take as models of infleotiou the future of
y^ dft give, and that of ym Iq^ make. Thus:
*cdf«. mlddla,

dsayiml dfisy^vas diayiimaa dAsyi dftayttvabe daay&naho
dlay&ai dAayitbas daay&tha dOsyiaa dlajAtlie dBsy&dbve
dOsyiU dssyitas dieyintl dBay&ta dBay^te dftay&nte

1 ^ifi^n#T ^lliuiwH^ *!("yjinH^ ■*i|w) ^f^KtiH^ *!^aoiM^

barifjiml karif yivas katiqyiunas karl;yA karlisriTabo karlf ytmalie
•to. etc. etc. eto. etc. etc.

a. Id tbe tplci >re found occuional cieei of Ist du. and pi. In va and
ma: e. g. radiByftTa (R.), bhak^yftTa tunutite: HBh.); sqyama
(UBb.), Tatayama (R.].

984. With regard to the use or non-nse of the aoailiarf vowal
i t>efore the Bibilant, there is a degree of general aooordanee betweeo
this tense and the other future and the desideratire ; bnt it is by oo
means absolute, nor are any definite roles to be laid down with re-
gard to it (and so much the less, becanse of the iafrequeDcy of the
two latter fonnations in actual use): between this and the aorist

itizecy Google

884—] XII. FurnRE-BYSTBus. 332

(■••oriit on tfae one Bide, or if-aoTist on the other), toy coTretpondeDce
is Bttll less traceable. Practically, it ii neceeBary to lean, u a nut-
ter of UBage, how any given root makea theae varioas parte of its
coDJogational Bjetem.

08K. Belov ia added & lUtomeDt of the auga, u legudg the anzUiarr
Towel, of &I1 the loots foaod qnotible — foi the moit put, Id the form of
■ ipeulflMtion of thoie which utd the tense-ilxn dlreotly to the loot; io
bnrketB >te rurther menttoned the other tooEb which tec«rd)ng to the gnm-
muluu ilso lanice the •uxlllary Towel.

tt. Of TODtB ending In rowelt, tha great mtjotitij (excepting those fa
j) ttke no 1. Thne, all in & (nDmeroae, and DOnaceuary to sped^: bnt
oompare o betow); — thoae In 1, as kfl poit4t, ol g^h*r, ol note, ml, b1
or B& fti'fuf (alfya), hi; from 1, kfi dtttroy, and Ji occur forms of both
elMsei; qrl [and <jvi.] has 1; — those In I, as krf, bhli ml, t1i; bat fi
tit and nl have both forms [and ^I takea 1]; — those in n, aa oyn, dm,
pin, 9ra, ha; bnt au prui out and ata hare both forma [and kfU,
kf^O. no. yn, ro. anu Uka i]i~of those in a, dhil and bhu take i;
bQ hu both forme. Bat all In p (namerona, and nnneeesaar; to apeclfy)
take 1 [those In ohsngeable f, oi ao-called f-roots (24S), are aald br the
grammartaea to take either 1 or I; no I-torma, however, are qnotable].

b. or roots ending in mntes, about half add the tenae-algn dttectlr.
Thus, of roots ending in gutturals, q(tk; — In palaUls; in O, pao, mac,
rlo, vao, vie, vraqo, aio (but y&o takes 1); in eh, praeh; in J, bhofi},
mrJ (m&rkfya and mrakfya), jtti, bhuj, yuj, ttJ, erJ [alao bhr^,
rafij, aaiy, arattj, nij, ruj], white (yaj, bh^, and ma,U (mailkfTa and
m^lJifya) hare both forma, and vij (viji^ya and vajifya) and vr^
lake 1; — in dentals: in t, kpt eat and vrt [»'*" o^t and nft] make
both forma ; In d, ad, pad, qad fall, akand, syand, ohid, bhld, wld
^nd, nad [also had, khld, avid, k^ad, tod]; white aftd (aataya and
■idlfja) and vid knotc make both forma [also ohfd and tfd], and vttd
has i) in dh, wyadh (wetaya), rfidh, aldb tuccttd, budh, yadh, radh,
TTdh Talao aftdh, kradh, k^adh, fodh], and bandh and eidb rtpil
have both foimi; In n, ton, while man and ban have both forma; — in
UMala: In p, Sp, k;ip, gnp, tpp, afp (arapaya and aarpsya) {alto
9ap, lip, lap], while tap, vap, avap, dfp, and k)p ba*e both forma;
In bh, yabh and rabh, labh having both forme ; In m, ram, while kram,
fcfam, nam, and yam make both forma.

O. Of the roots reckoned by tha grammarians as ending in teml*ewel*
(761 d-g) all Uk« 1. And wS oi vl wtme, vy& or Ti enveiop, and liTi
or bQ cal4 take a y-form, aa In theli pteaent-syatem, to which then i Is added:
thus, wayl^ya, vyayi^ya, hvayi;ya (but also hvaaya).

d. Of root! ending in spirants, the minority (about a third) are with-
out the auxiliary »owel. They are: roota in q, iiq, wlQ, dji) (drakfya],
api^ (aprakfya) [also daAf, rig, lif, kruq, mrq], while na^ ba hit
has both forms (na&kqiya and naqifya); — tn 4, pi;, TI9, ^if [alio

D,j,i,....,CiOOJ2lC

333 The s-FnrDRB. [— 9S8

trlf. dTi(, QUf, tU9> Axuh pn;, qof], wbile k^ bu both formi (kmk-
fya aod karftfya); — In ■, vas (Airw, vas c^[><A« [lUa ghats], while vaa
daeU hM both lorms; — tn h, mih, doll, drnh [alio oaJi, dlh, lib],
irbile dab, vah, aah uti rah b>Ta both fonns.

•. In the older language, > mijotlty (aboat Ave nintha) of simple nuts
add the aya wltboat auitliur i; of tbe fntarea occnTrin; In the later
laognafe only, nearly thiee quarteii have the 1, tbia being fenetally taken
by any loot of late origin and derivailTe charietu — aa It li alao nnlfonnly
taken in (ecoodaty conjngatlon [1019, 1086, 1060, 1068).

886. Aa ti>« root is Etrengtbened to form the item of thle future, ao,
of a root that baa a itroDger and a weaker foim, the stronger form la naed :
thus, frem vlwndh or badh bind, bhantSTa or bandbl^a.

a. By an Irregnlst atrengthening, naUfya (beside na^lfya) is made
from ^Da9 he loit, and mafikfya (berida majjifya) from ymajj sink.

b. Bat a few roots make fatare-atems In the later language wltboat
atrengthening: thus, UUiifya, mUioya {also TS.)> vljl^a (also vejlfya),
aifya (KsS or b1), Mfya (988 b), aphnt^Vra; and f^adb make*
VAtaya from the weaker form vldh.

o. The (B. hae once tbe monstToni form afnavlfytinabe, made
apon the preaani-atem af ml (607) of y'a^} attain. And the later language
makes i^dlfya and Jabifya from the preaent^tema of yaaA and yb&.
Compare farther hTayiffa etc, B36 e. Alto kfayfiyi^ya from ykhyfl
(beside kbyOsya) appears to be of similar obsracter.

d. A number of roots with medial ^ strengthen it to ra (S41): tbaa,
krak^jra, trapeya, drapsya, drnk^a, mrakqya (beside mKrkfya),
sprakfya, arak^a, arapaya (beside aarpsya), and mradlfya (beside
mardlfya); and y'k^p forms klapaya (beside kalpifya).

ft. The root grab (also Its doublet glah) takes I InatMd of 1, as It
doea also in the aori*t and elsewhere.

987, This fntare Is eomparaUiely rare Id the oldoat langnage — in
part, apparently, becaase the uses of a fntaie sre to a large extent answered
by sobJunctiTe forms — bnt becomes more and more common later. Thns,
the RV. haa only seyenteen ocenrrencea of personal forms, bom nine diffneni
roots (with participles from six additional roots); the AV. haa flfty oconrreneea,
from twenty-Hie roots (with participles from soTen more); bnt the TS. has
occurrences (peraoaal forms and partiolplea together) from orer sixty roots;
and forms from more than a hundred and Qfty roots are quotable from the

Hodee of the s-fatore.

B38. Hode-forms of the tutore are of the utmost rarity. The only
example In the older language is karl^ia, 2d dug. snbj. act., oecnirtng
once (or t«lr«) in RT. (AB. has once notayftTShtl, and GB. has efyft-
puthii, taAsybnabU, sthfiayKmahSl, bnt they ue ionbaen fdae

Digitizecy Google

938 — ] XII. FrrnKE-arBTEMs. 334

TMdlags for -he. Tvo or three opiaihe feioii >r« found In tbe epics: thni,
dhsk^yet tai maAsyeran (MBb.), and drskqjata (K)j ileo >n Imper-
ative patB7antV (Bai.). And aeTeial 2d pi. mid. In dhTnni ne quotable
from t1i« eplca: thus, vetayadhTun, savl^yadliTam, uid (the caiuatlTe)
kUs^qyadhvam (PB.) and Jivaylqyndhvam [M6h.: and ona text has
mokgyadhvftm at 1. 133. 13, wheie the othei leidi mokfafftdhvnm],
and bhRTigyadbvam [HBb. B.): it li a matter of qneatlon whether these
are to be accounted ■ real tmperatWe formation, or an epic aabatitntion ot
Mcondary for primarr endfngt (compare B4S a).

FartioiplflB of the s-fatare.

939. Faiticiples are made from the futuie-atem precisely
as from a piesent-stem in ^ a: namely, by adding in the
active the ending fT nt, in the middle the ending ITH mKoa;
the accent remains upon the stem. Thus, from the yeibs
instanced above, 3.inJM dfisy&nt and <^|'HIHR d&syAmftna,
^if^mn kari^yAnt and ^i^HIQI karify&ml^a,

a. According lo the grammarlani, the feminine of the active participle
li nade either In &ntl 01 la vtS; bat enty tbe former bai been noted ai
OCCDtrlng In the older langnagp, and the latter ia avenrwhere extremely
rare : aee above, 449 e, f .

b. In RT. oreura once sflfyanti, ftom yoU, with inomalon* accent-

Preterit of the B-future; Conditional.

940. From the future-stem is made an augment-preterit,
by prefixing the augment and adding the secondary endings,
in precisely the same manner as an imperfect from a present-
stem in Q a.- This preterit is called the conditional.

a. It atanda related to the fotnie, in form and meaning, u the French
conditional auraii to the future aural, or as tbe English would havt to
Kill have — nearly as the Oeiman Kitrd» haben lo teerdt Aoftm.

b. Thus, from the roots already instanced:

active. middle.

i. d. p. s. d. p.

1 H^mjiT SRTRJTcI S^TTtTTT ^IV^ 55JHIT^% ^?7FIIPT%
idSayam idftayavti idSsyftma Adfiaya AdasyftTahi &<UayKmaM

ioy Google

335 Tub Comditiohal. [—848

3 S<IVUV1^ Si^lHJHM^ tl<ll-Ua «<IfUe)IH^ 5RTF&EIFT^ WiITWIIi^
kdB»j»B iAaajAtaxa fcdbyftta Mbyatbfts AdAsyetliftni idftsymdhvatn

idioyat idMyatfim &diayan 4dftayata &dAByetKm ^dftoyanta

) fl*f(mH w+ft^uM «4i[|iwjm a^f^ M+fi'wjwr^ q^if^wjwl^

ikaxi^jaxa Utarlfylva Akarl^fina iklrl^ye AkarlfyftTahl Ucari^yftinRhi
etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. eto.

841, Tbs conditional i* tbe nreit of ill the ronni of the Stnikrit
Teib. The BT. hat bat > tingle eiusple, ibltari^yat was going to carry
off, and none of the Tedio texte rnrniihei another. In the Brahmanaa it
la haidly more common — eioept In ^., where It U met with more than
BRy tlmei. Not does It, like the fntore, become more freqacut Utei: not
•n example oeetira In Nala, BhagaTad-Oiti, or Hitopade9>; only one In
Mann; and two In (akontala. In the whole HBh. (Boltimann) It ta tovnd
aboat twenty-llTe time*, from thirteen T00t«. The middle forms ate ei-
liemely few.

II. The Periphrastic Future,

Ma. ft. This formation contaioB 0DI7 a single indicative
active tenae (or also middle: see 647), without modes, or
paitioiple, ot preterit.

b. It consists in a derivative nomen ageniu), having the
value of a future active participle, and used, either with
or without an accompanying auxiliary, in the office of a
verbal tense with future meaning.

948. The noun is formed by the suffix r{ tf (or rT^
tar); and this (as in its other than verbal uses: see 1182
is added to the root either directly or with a preceding
auxiliary vowel ^ i, the root itself being strengthened by
gnna, but the accent resting 00 the suffix: thus, ^TrT d&t^
from v^ d§ give ; ^ kartf &om v^ ky make ; Hf^ bhavitj
from y>T bha be.

a. Ai regarda the pteaenee or absence ot <he vowel 1, the naage la
said by the gtammiilaQs to be generally the same as in the a-futnre from
the game root (above, 98B). The moat ImporUnt ei<-eplion la that the
root* in j take no 1: thae, kart^ (against kariqya); toota ban and gam.
■how the lame diSetenee; while vft, VTdb, and ayand have 1 here, thnngh

itizecy Google

943—] XII. FtrrOKB-BTBTEHB. 336

not in tbe B-fotare. Tlie fsw fono* irhlch oecDt Itl the oldei li]kg«M«
agree with thue italementi.

944. In the third persons, the nom. masc. of the noun,
in the three numbers respectively (S73j, is used without
auxiliary: thus, HfllfTT bhavitS he or she or it mil be;
Hferrft bliftTltarftu both will he; >rikfnpi bbBvitiraa they
will be. In the other persons, the first and seoond persoos
present of v^9H m he (ese) are used as auxiliary; and they
are combined, in all numbeia, with ihe sin^lar nom. maao.
of the noun.

a. Thus, from V^ dft ffive:

^IHlPw

dfttMvaa

dstiomM

STfllBl

dKtiUi

d&tdathaa

3T?TTW

ditit

dSUbfin

dStliraa

b. Occaiionally, In the epl«B 4nd liter (almost nsTei in the old«t
lingaege), the norm of the tanse aa giTen abova Is in Tuioni letpectt de-
parted from: that, by we of the anzUlary In th« 3d p«r«on alto; by iti
omiulon in the lit or 2d penon; by iDTertlon of the order of uodd and
anillilTTj by intarpositlaa of other wordi between them; by nie of a dual
or plnral nom. with the anxlliaTy ; and by naa of a feminine form of the
Donn. Examptei are: vaktA 'stl (MBh.) he u>iU ipeak; nllumtl (BIBh.)
I thaU 01 thtm wilt itrike dovm, yoddlift 'ham (H.) I ihall Jight, ohadi
draft* (HBh.) I shall tet, kartS "haih to (BhP.) I miU do far thtt,
Crtuh bhavltft (HBh. Hegb.) thou will b»; aami KantS (HBh.) / thaB
go; pratlgrahits tSm aaml (HBh.) I uiill rtctivt her, hetntft tram aal
(HBbO tJ""' viilt tlay; kart&rSa ava^ [MBh.) tct Iteo thall do; draftT
asml (HBh.) I (f.) thatt tee, adbhavitrl (Nal;,] the wiB inereate,
(Cantrl (T.) *he vjtU go. AB. ha* onca sota ai 2d ting., thou wit pre**;
JOB. makei the combination gma^&a&nl bbaTltSraa the etmeteriet

O. An DptatiTe of tbe auxiliary appeara to be once uaed, In joddlift
arSm I tOBuld Jtght (R. 1. 22. 26 P«ter*on; bnt the Bombay edition readi
yoddtmifa yftayftml).

04B. Tb6 accent in these combinationa, as la all tbe ordinary
,oa>eB of oollooation of a verb with a preoeding predicate nonn or

ioy Google

337 Pbhiphrastig Future. [—948

ft4Jee^^o(B82J. ia on the noan itMlf; itnd, unlike all the tnie verbal
forms, the combination retains its acceot everynhere even in an in-
dependent olaose: thus, t&rhi vt atlnB^trA bbftvltasml (QB.) thm I
thall be out of danger (vhere bliaTifyftml, if need, would be acoent-
lees). Whether in a dependent clause tbe auxiliary verb woald take
an accent (B86), and whether, if so, at the expense of tbe accent of
the nonn (as in tbe caee of a preposition ooiepoiiBded with a rerb-
form: 1088 b), we are without the means of determiniDg.

946. In the Veda, the nomina agenti$ in ^ or tor, like tuIodi other
derlTkttve nouns (S71), but with eipecial heqnency, are naed fn partlelplil
conattoetion, govarolng the accusative If the; come from roots whose verbal
Carma do so [1 18S}. Often, alio, tkey are naed predieatUelr, with or without
accompanTing copula; yet wllhoat any Implication or ttme; they are not the
begtnulDgs, but only the foierannera, at a new tenst'tonnaUDn. Oenerally,
when they hare > participial Tilue, the root-tyllable (or a prefix preceding
it) haa the accent. The tenie-nae beglne, bat rather apariDgly, Id the
Biahmana* (from which about thirty tornu us quotable); and It grows more
common later, though the perlphraatlo future is nowhere nearly so treqaent
as the B-future (it ii quotable later from abont thirty additional roots).

847. a. A Few iaolated attempts are made in tbe BrihnaDaa to form
by analogy middle persons to this fntnre, with endtnge CDrreaponding after
tbe niual faihlon to those of tbe actlTB persona. Thna, TS. bas once pra-
7okt&e I toill apply (standing related to prayobtftaml aa, for eiample,
Qftse to fioml); C^B. has Qayltioe thou thait lie (similarly related to
qafitOai) ; and TB. has yaf tiamahe v>e witt make offering. Bnt in TA.
is fonnd (1. 11) yaffle as lit sing., showing a pbonetlo oorreapondonoe of
a problemaHo character, not elsewhere met with In the language.

b> On the baais of ancb teutatlTe formations as these, the naUte
grammarians set up a complete middle Inflectloa for the periphrastic future,
aa followe:

s. d. p.

I d&t&e datiawabe dst&mahe
1 d&taee dsttta&the dttadbve
3 dfiUi d&tirau dat&TM

O. Only a single example of such a middle baa been bronght to light
in the later language, namely (tbe cansattTo) daT9(^tUie C^alf.).

Uses of the Futures and Conditional.

948. Aa the a-futore is the commoner, so also it is the ooe
more Indefinitely used. It expresaea in general what is going to take
place at some time to come — but often, as in other languages, add-
ing on the one band an implication of will or intention, or on the
other hand that of promise or threatening.

Whitmy, Qrammir. i, ti. 32

ioy Google

94e-] XII. FUTURE-STSTEMB. 338

a. A few extmplei are: varflfyAty M;Amah p&ij&nyo vffflmAn
bhaTl^TRtl (9B.) it it going to rain .- Parjanya it going to be rich in ratn
thiiytar; ykm tka nJi vdds klm jai ktwlfyati (RV.) tohomer doet not
knoui that, iohat will he do with vtriet t vti vayjun agni dtiBaySmkh^
tha yuy4ih k(ih karln^tha (58.) we art going to build the Imojirat;
then tchat laill you da f t&m Indro "bhyltdadrBvA lutalfy&n (QB.) Aim
Indra ran at, intending to elm/; y4dy era kar^y&tha Bftk&lh dar&ir
ya^tiyiiBo bhRvify&tha C^^) >/ J" "'^ ^ *^'< V ■Anti bt viorthj/ 0/
the eacrifiee along with tht godi; dintfla to qataymntl (AT.) thg tetth tciU
fall out; 11& mari^Ml mjt bibhe|;i (^T) thou thail not die; be not
afraid; brKhl kva ySsyasl (MBh.) tell ut; tehere are you going to got
yadl mftih pratySkhyftsyacl viqam asthftsye (HBh.) if you ihallr^'ecl
me, I icill retort lo poiton. \» in other UognigeB, the (enie la tlao lome-
timei uaed for the expreaslou ot a conjectare or presumptton : thns: ko

^'yaifa devo gaiidlutrTO tS bhavifyati (HBh.) toho it thit t he is doubtleu
a god, or a Oandharva; adyaavapsyaiLtl(MBh.)(A«yniu9f be tieeping now.

b. Tb« «phere« of fatare uid de«tdei«tiTe border npon one uiother,
uid the one ia lometlmel met with where the o^er might be expected.
EiimpW of tbe flitiire taken In > qnwi-dealderatlTe aeme ne w followt;
y&d dft^&fe bhadriifa kwrlfyial t&vi t t4t saty&m (RV.) ■"'^
favor thou wHlett to bettotc on thy worshiper, that of thee becomelh actual
[ie surely brought about}; yAthft *ny&d Tadlfy4nt b6 'aykd v&det
(9RO as if, intending to eay one thing, one were to say another,

949. The periphrutio future ts defined by tfae gnmmarians as
eipresalag something to be done at a definite time to come. And
this, thoQgh but faintly traceable tn later use, is a distinct aharaater-
iBtlo of the formation in the language where It first makes Its ap-
pearance. It iB especially often uaed along with fria tomorrow.

a. A few examples are: ady& Tar^i^yatl ... qvo TTaf^(HS.} ii it
going to rain today 1 it aill rain tomorrow; yatarftn vft ime qva^l kaml-
tftraa te JetSrae (K.) whicJiever of tmo parties these thaU ehooss tomorrow,
they will conquer; prftt&r yaft^bmalie (TB.) we shall taeri/tee tomorrow
morning; ltyah6 vah paktiUml ^B.) on such and such a day I wilt
cook for you; t&n ma ^kOih ratrlm into 9ayitlUe JfttA a to "yidi
t&rhi pntr6 bhavitlE CV-) '^"i y^" '^"^ '■' '"^^ "" ""^ "■j'^'i "i^ o'
that time this son of yours will be bom. lu other casee, thl» deflnitenes*
of time 1* wanting, bat an emphtsia, aa of apecial eerlatnty, leemi perhapa
to belong to the form; thna, blbhFbl m& pSrayit^yami tvi ti: k&smftn
mft pSrayi^yftsi ty fttigbA lm£h aArrafai pn^lt nlrro^blt, titas tvK
p&rayltfami 'tl d^.) support me and I will save you, said it. From
what will you save met said he. A flood ie going to carry off all these
creatures; from that I will taee youi said U; parldewayBih oakrlre
mabao ohokabbayaib prSpt&ama^ (OB] thoy set up a bmmtation : "we
art going to meet with great pain anddrea^; y^e "yakfl yaf^ha oa
(TA.) I sacrifice, I hoes mcrifieed, and I shall saerifiee. In yet other oaies,

ioy Google

339 U8B8 or THB FtmiKBS ahd Conditional. [—860

In tlie Dldai lingnige even, and yet more in the Uter, thli (ntare ippean
to be oqniTilent to the othei; Ihoi, pr^JlTam anadi T^JtUttSsmo JtM
vldvSii tB Jnhoty ftvldTftii vl (AB.) in.Au chtUrtn tee thaU kmne him,
lehether ha u on» that tacrifieta loith knaaUdge orieifhout hnoicledgt; vak-
tluno vft Idoih dsvebhya^ (A.B.) w thaO itU thit to the god*; yadi
•Ttrtho mAmft "pi bhaviti tota svodL BVKrtluidi karlqySml (M8h.)
i/ later my own affair ahall coma up, Uian I teiU altand to my oum affair;
katbaih m bliavltaBr eka, lU trKdi n^pa qooiml (HBh.) but Aote miU
you get along alonet that, O king, it the eaute e/ my grief about you.

960. The cooditional would aeem to be most originally and
properly used to si^lfj tfa&t something wm goirtg to be done. And
thiB valne it baa in Ita only Vedio oconnence, and ocMsionally elae-
vhere. Bnt Dsnally it has the Bcnae ordinarily called "conditional";
and in the great mfyority of its occarreocea It tg found [tike the sab-
JDnctire and the optative, when used with the same valne) In both
clausea of a conditional eeotence.

a, ThiiB, y6 Tftrtra abiam Atri "bharl^yat pr& t4ili J4nltrl
vlddqa nv&oa (RT.) him, whc tfoi going here to carry off Vritra't weallh;
hit mother proclaimed to the knmoing one; Qatftyiuh gfim akarl;yam
(AB.) / tea* going to make (ehould have made) the eotc live a hundred yeari
(in other i«rfjan« of the lams itory U mdded the athei clanae, In vhlch the
conditional hu a value more romoved tram Ita original: thna, In OR., if
you, tillain, had not ttopped [prKgrablfyah] my moulhY, t&ta aril *aya
bhay&ih vl VSya k&am&d dhy Abha^yad dvltiytd vti bhayAdi
bbavati (9^-) thereupon hi* fear departed; for of whom tea» he to be
afraidf otcation of fear arieee from a eeeond pereon; ntpapftta oir&di
t&n mene y&d visa^ paryAdbftayata ((B.) he leaped up: ha thought
it long that he ehould put on a garment; fl4 tAd avA ni Vlndat
pr^tpatir j&trt "taofyat (H3.) Pr<^apati, verily, did not then _find
where he wa* to {ehoiUd) tacrifiee; evadi cen nft Vak^o milrdbB t«
vyapatlfyat (OB.) if you ehould not epeak thue, your head would fiy
off; bA yAd dbai tivad o-vt "bbavlfyad yivatyo hU 't< 'gre praj£^
■nt^ titvatyo hU 'vi. 'bhavl^yan oA pHt 'Janlqycmta (QB.) if he
had been only eo muth, there would hajie been (mly eo many living creaturei
a* viere created at Jiret; they would have had no progeny; Ulfa v&
'bbavl^yad Bm^aa tamaaBjh vibhatui taifa oet aahaarakira^o
dhorl n& "karl^yat ((.) would the Dawn, foreooth, be (he tcatttrer of
the darkneti, if the thouiand-rayed one did not aet her on the front of
hit chariot f

Digil.zec.y Google

Xin. VfiBBAL ASJBOTIVBB i

CHAPTER XIII

VERBAL ADJECTIVES AND KOUHS: PARTICIPLES,
INFINITIVES, GERUNDS.

961. a. Thosb verbal adjectives, or partioiplee, which are made
from teQae-BteiDB, and so coDBtitnte a psit of tbe various tense-
syatema, have been already treated. It remaina to deacribe certain
others, which, being made directly from the root itself, belong to the
verbal system as a whole, and not to any particular part of it

b. The infinitive (with a few sporadic exceptions in the older
language) also comes la all cases from the root directly, and not from
any of the derived tense-BtemB.

o. Tbe same is trne of the so-called gerunds, or indeclinable
participles'

Passive Participle in t& or n&.

962. hj the accented sufEx rT t^ — or, in a compar-
atively small number of verbB, =1 ni — is formed a verbal
adjective which, when comii^; from transitive verbs, quali-
fies anything aa having endured the action expressed by
the verb: thus, ^ datti given; T^ ukti spoken. Hence
it is usually called the passive participle; or, to distinguish
it from the participle belonging to the passive present-
system (771), the past passive participle.

a. When made from aa intransitive oi neuter verb, the
same participle, as in other languages, has no passive but
only an indefinite past sense: thus, TH gatd gone; HcT bhati
been; ilfdR patiti fallen.

968. In general, this participle is made by adding rT
td to the bare verbal root, with observation of the ordinary
rules of euphonic combination.

a. Some roots, however, require the prefixion of the auxiliary
vowel 1 to die But^x. For these, and for the verbs that add n&
instead of t4, see below, 966, 967.

ioy Google

J41 Passive Participle in ta or na. [— 9BB

b. Aa to the accent when the root is preceded hj a prepoBition,
see lOSBa.

964. The root before FT t& has usually its weakest form,
if there is anywhere in the verbal system a distinction of
weak and strong forms. Thus:

a. A penultimate nasal fs not seldom dropped: examples are
akt& (Va&j;, baddhi (vttaadh', frabdba (v'qrambb], daffi (v'daAq),
arosta (i/BraAsJ, bft^ba (>^afib}.

b. Roots which are abbreviated in the weak forms of the per-
fect (784) suffer the same abbreviation here: examples are uktA.
iyvtiO], aft& (yVaa thme), npt& (|/vap: also vapta), Q^b^ (v'TSh),
«npt& (i/srap), IftA iYs^], vlddtaA (yvyadh! ; — and, hj a similar
procedure, y^r^tih (or praq) makes Prft4i Vbhrafif makes bh^ft^
(beside the regular bbra^fA), and y<jTi boil makes 9^ [beside frat&).

{^^Flnal 4 li weakened to i in gitA (/gft >uif), dhlt& ((^dhK *uc(J,
Plt4 (l/pft drink), Spbita; and JIti, vlt^ qlt& are made from the looti
Jy4> tt4> Qy4, (01 JI ete.); — and farther to i in ellit& (beside oh4t&],
dlta (ydA divide and di bind), drita (P ydii tUtp), bltk (y'dhftjittO-
with b^ for db ; bat dblU aUo ouara In V.), mlt4 i^niA meature), qlU
l^aiso Qftta), Blt&, StbiUt.

d. A final m Is lost after a in fati. nat&, yatA, r«t& (hom ygnxa
etc.); and a final n In kqata, tat&, mat&, hat&. Aa to the other roots
in am and an taking ta, lae 9BK a, b.

a. Hare isolated cases are -flta (RV. : yar), nt& or tlta (yvi wtaoe),
giqti (al«o qSata: KQ^s), mfatk (refeTied to ymflrob). As to -gdha
and jagdb&, «ee 233 f.

f. Oil tbe olhet hand, ^avad makaa Bvitt4.

ess. Of more irregular character are tbe following:

a. A number of roots ending in am retain the nasal, and leogtben
the radical vowel (as also in some others of tlielr verbal forms: thus,
kSibtA, krbbt&, USibtA, k^&tbta, oidita, t&iht&, dKiiit&, bhrSihta,
vSiiitA, QBjht& {; qam be quiet], grftifat& {from ylcam etc-); and one
in an, dbvan lound, makes dhTfintA.

b. A few loota In an nuke their partlefpla from another loot-funn
Id ft: tbna, kbftti, J&t&, -vfita, sAt^i dbam hai both dbamlti and
dbmRtA.

O. Certain rooti in Iv Uke their yQ-foim (76Ba): thua, dyfit4 (ydiv
flag), ftbrDta, BjrftU; but ynuv makea -mata.

d. From roots in changeable x (geneiallr taking na: 9B7b) are made
also panfc (_yvi fiS- l>edde Pfta), qlrta and ifOxtA, (y^ cnuk); and
9lrta Is tnitber made from V9ii mix.

i, Google

066—] XIII. Vbrbix Adjrotiveb and Nouns. 342

•. Doubl« foimt (re mngdhi and ma^lUki Stfl^ "'^ ao^lM, dhOrtft
■>nd dhruta, hv^ta tod hrati.

f. Tlie loot dB give makes datt4 (ftom the secondarr lOot-focm dftd;
but data alw Id T.), Bat tbt anomaloail; cantraet«d form -tta (a* If
tor dftttt, witb th« radical yowal loit) ta also fieqaent in eompoaitlon, ei-
peeUltf wltbprepoaltLona: thui, iua, AnuttA, pirltt», Fr&tta,priiUtta;
rarelT with other elemantt, as dev&tta, punutta, mftrdtta(T). And the
aame abbieTiated fbim eomea from yH dmidt \a Avattk.

g. The root! maUng parUotplM In both ta aod Ita, or ta and na, or
In all thne, will be noted In the next two puagnphi.

966. The suKx with ^ i, ot in the foim ^ Iti, ib
used espeoially with roots having finals that are only with
difficulty, if at all, combinable with (T t acooiding to the
1UU&1 analogies of the language, and often with roots of a
secondaiy, derirative, or late chaiactei; but also not seldom
with oiiginal roots.

a. Thai, of root* piewDting diffleultlea of combination: — 1. all that
end In two consonanla (eaie those of whloh one eonionanl la loat by 4 weat-
enlng piocess: 964 a, b); e. g. gaflk. Talc, vKfiob, 1«J]. nbj, oaft,
Khtt>9, katth, oind, Jalp, oumb, nmbh, kball, plnv, ;aAt (aiw
9BBt&), rakf, ItlAa, satb (In all, over flit;); but takf makea tofta; —
3. all that end In tingoals (Inolndlng 9 after a 01 K): e. g. af. truf, pafh,
luth, I4> Tm^i bha^, kaf, bbSf; — 3. all that end In nud ^iMott:
e. g. llkh, ((ral}i, tiKtb. kntb. ripbi gi^pb ; — i. all that end in 1 : e. g,
oal, gill mill lull kbel; — 6. all that end In othet paniaient aemlTOwela:
namely, oarv (alio oOr^), jiv (for the oth«T loota In It, see 9S6 o),
db&v run, urn, day, vjay, pllr; — 6. u]h. — Thli daw iDoladet mote
than halt of the whole nombei tb*t take only Ita.

b. Of other tooti ending In ooDaonantt ; — 1. in guttarala, oak, ^ftuk
({ak haa both ta and ita); fUgh; — 2. In palaUla, ac (al«a akui),
ne, kno, kbao, rfto, mo; a\V, kOJ, vraj, also ty^j and mpj In l>t«
text! (naually tyBkt4 and d>ct{&); — 3. In dentaia, at, pat, qoat, alio
yat io epos (eliewbeie only yattji); krad, khftd, gad. end, nad, mad,
mfd, rad, rod, vad, vid hnofn, brad; alio nod in epoa (elaewhen
nutti and nunna); mad haa both matt& and madlt4 (the mtjorlty
of loou in d take na : 857 d) ; adb, k;udb, gadb, dndb, nSdh,
bftdb, Bpardb; an. In, kvan, dbvan, pan, ran ring, van, atan,
avan, and dbwan (aUo dbvftuti); — 4. in labials, cap, ynp, mp,
aud aiaally kup (knpta late) and lap (lapta epic), oecaaionally kflp,
gup, tap, dfp. Tap, qap, while Jap has both ta and ita; grabh
(g^bbltA), 9ubb, Bkabh, and occaalonally lubh, while kfubh and
■tabb have both tarmB; tim, dbam. {am ItAor, atlm, and kfam in
epo* (alto kfiiiita);— d. In apiianti, af «ot, Iq, ktq, kfq. Ttq, qaq.

ioy Google

343 Passive Participlr in ta or na. [— 9B7

irblle piq hu both foimi, and mqr9 Ukei Ita only Iste; If rand, I;, kn;,
tn, tvlf , pmq, mlf , ra;, httf, bre;, aUo moq eirept Ute, irhila dhn,
roq, and hff ahow both tormt; ta, bhM, bhfta, ratt, lag, vas cfoMa,
has, also aa throw occasionally, «hile kaa, graB, yas, vaa ihme, vas
dwell, qOs (witti i;i;{4 and qllta), gvaa, and hras make both forms;
lb, frail (gi4dt4). Jab (iccondair form of hi), mah, rah, and occsslonalljr
ah rtmotie, wbile (Ctb has both forms.

o. Of roots eiidlug In vowels, only qi lie, which makas qa^ta (vlth
gui^ of root, as elMwhore: 629).

d. Id geD«ril, a root malntalna ita fall form before Ita; but thaie
are a few exceptions: thus, g^bblti and gfUti (the loot being reckoned
as grabh sad grab: see 729), udlt& (also vadita in the later language).
Of ita [yvae ihine; beside a;t^), n^ta [yVas dwell : also iporsdloally
TUita and aqfa), uk^ti [y'vak; inereate), qfihitk (f/qratb). From
ymfi ate made botb miJlta and m&rjlta (with strengthenlag a» in present
and elsewhere: 8S7), beside mnt^.

e. Instead of 1, long I Is talien lo glftAdtk and gfblti.

967. The sufjix ^ n4 (always without auxiliary ^ i) ie
taken instead of FT t& by a Dumber of roots (about seveDty).
Thus:

a. Certain roots In &: Ibne, k^ft, gift, drjl run, drft tltep, (also
drltaP), mis (also ml&tA), Tft blow (also T&ta), qyft [also qini), styft,
hft Uave (also hln& and hftta), hi go forth; and dft divide mshei UnA
(also dlta and -tta). Farthar, cerUln roots in 1- and u-voweli: thus, kfl
dftiroy (kfiija; also kfltA), ^ pi, II ding, vU, ql or qyft coagulate
(beildo ijyilna and qlta), hri (beside hrlta)i dtl bum (also duta), IQ,
qQ; and diT lamtnt makes dyOna (compare 766).

b> Koote in f, whirh before the suffli befomes Ir ot vkr: the forms
are, ar^a (late; bealde {t&), kln^ Cv^ scatter), (fieifh (v'KT «toiifioic),
Jln^ and JiLn^ (yij watte atcay), XSn^ and titr^ (also tuTt&), dlr^A
iV^ pi*rt»- >>■<> <lrt<^), pfLr^i (.VW^- >1bo pSrti and pfta], mOr^i
(ymr erutK), qir^i iVfi crush: aleo qlrta and qart4P], sOrj^ (atao
■tfta). Of like chaisctei with these are Ir^A from y\i, olrqa (beside
oarlta) ftom f'aar, g&n^ (beside gurt4) fram i^gur, a secondary form
of gf, and oQn^a (beside carvita) from >'oarT', which is also plainly a
■econdary root

O. A few tools ending In j (which becomes g before the bdUi againtt
the Dsnal tale of Internal combination: 218 f): thus, bhagna (^hafij).
bhngiia (v1>baj bend), magni (ymi^), rng^A, vlgna (betide vlkta).
Fortiier, two oi thtee ending in o (similarly tcealed): thus, akll& ()^ao
OE atio: alto aolta and a&elta), vrkfi (f'vraqo), and apparently -pntpo
(BV., once: with doubly irregnlar change of root-Hnal, from V'PFO). And
one root in g, lagna.

ioy Google

QS7— ] XIII. Verbal Adjzotitbb amd Houms. 344

d. A eoQatdeisUe number, (ome of them lery cemmon ones, of loott
in d (wtileli, *g>lnit erdlnirr rule, becomes a befoie the inffli: lB7b).
The forme are: oniia (alM ntte), KHftfAf, kllima, iryiwni^, kqrli^K.
wii<iiii»^ cbumot ohlBnii, cbfi^ijA, tiumi, tp^i^A. ntuuia (>lio nattii
■nd nudlta), p«iiii&, bhtnnA, vlnna (v'vld ^nd: t,\so Tltt&), fonna
[/^ad/aU), Buinfc (ilio Batt&), skannfc (y'skond), sTumi (ywyxaA),
BTI1111&, htuma. And kanA /'ood. In epite of lie different vxeni, >ppe*n
to be B Ilko foimalion (lom y'ad «al.

9BS. The DAtlTe gTAmiiuttianB leckoD u participlea of this for-
mation a few miBCellaDeoua derivativfl adjectirM, coming from roots
which do not make a regular participle: Buch are kqlaui burnt, k^Qi
emaeiaied, pakT4 r^e, pholU eicpanded, QJifka dry.

Fast Aotive P&rtloiple in tavant [or navant).

9B9. Fiom the past paasiTe participle, of wfaatevet
foimation, is made, by adding the possessive suffix 31?
Tsnt, a secondary denTatiTe having the meaning and coo-
sttuotion of a perfect aotive paitioiple: foi example, ^rT
eTiH°rH tdt krt&Tbi having done that; taih niglrQavftn having
awallotced him down. Its inflection is like that of other
deiivativea made with this suffix (4S2 ff.) ; its feminine ends
in cTrf^ vatlj its accent remains on the participle.

860. DeiintiTe woide of Ihla formadon t» found In RT., bat withont
uijtfalng like * pirtlclpl&l valaa. The AT. be* a elngle OEtunple, with pu-
tlclpitl meuilng: a^lttvaty &tit)ita on«'i gtitti having taten (loo. abe.).
In the BAhmaQai alio It le hudlr met Mth. In the later langaage, howoTot,
It eomea to be quite oommon. And there it li ehiedy naed predloattTely,
and ofl«nect witbovt copnU eiproMed, or irlth the Tain* of a persona] TOib-
fOrm in a paet teoee: primarily, and not leldom, elfnifring immediate p*«t,
or lu<rlns a tra* "perfect" Talne; bat also (like the old perfect and the old
aorlft In later nee) oomtng to be freely need for lodeflnlte time, or Mth the
Tatae of the imperfect (779). For example; mfiih na bagoid dfffavfin
no on* hot teen (or 1010) dm; sa nakuladi vyKpAdltavSn ha de»tro^»d
iht iehatumon; or, with oopnla, mahat k^eolirBih prSptaraty osl Mou
hatt fali«n i^on great mietry, Althongh originally and piopeily made
only from traneltlve verbB (with an object, to which the participle in ta
Btandi in the relation of an obJectiTO piedleaiive), It fi flnally foond alto
from intranaitlTes: thne, odtena aath^tavaH (9,) Am bacome united
wtih Ma mango-tret ; gatavati (lb.) the hat gone.

a. The rame participle ia alio made in the secondary oonjugatlone:
e. g. daiqitavant having ^unon, prabodhltavant having atoakaned.

ioy Google

345 Gerundives. [—863

b. PoMMllTBi klio Id In nude from pulive ptrticipteB tie eams'
limes found Q)ed In to kntlognos iDiQiieT, Dearly ■■ partect tctlTe partlcl-
plM: e. f. Iftin having ittcriJUtd, vljltbio mui7ambi&^ (AB.) thinking
th«mt«het to have conquered.

Future pMBlTe Participles: Gerundives.

961. Certain derivative adjectives (foi the most put
more oi less clearly secondaiy deiivativee] have acquired in
the language a value as qualifying something which is to,
ot which ought to, auffei the action exptesaed by the root
&om which they come; and they aie allowed to be made
fiom eveiy verb. Hence they are, like mote pTOper pai-
tioiples, sometimes treated as a part of the general verbal
system, and called future passive participles, or gerundives
(like the Latin forms in ndua, to which they correspond in
meaning).

662. The suffixes by which such gerundives are regu-
larly and ordinarily made are three: namely Uya, rTc?7 tavya,
and fl4l(J MUlya.

a. DerlTUlveB in ya biting tbii VKlue >r« made tu all pBriods of the
luigntige, ftom the eultest down; the othei tno are of moie modem origin,
being entliely wanting in the oldest Yedi (RV.), and hardly known In the
later. Other dariTatiTei ot * similar character, which afterward disappear
from nae, ate foand In the Veda (960).

96S. Tbe suffix 7a in Its gemndive use bas notbiog to dia-
tiD^ieh it from the Skme saffix as employed to insks adjectives and
nouns of other oharaoter (Bee below, 1313). And it exbibits tXm the
Mine variety in tbe treatment of the root.

a. The original valne of the snffli Is la, and as such it hag to be read
Id the Tery great mijorlty of Its Vedlc occuiiences. Hence the conTersion
of • and o to ay and av before it (see below).

b. Thus: 1. Final & becomes e before tbe suffis: Ahj% dliyeya,
khy^TS, mdya (perhaps dlt-ia et«., wtth eaphonic ; interposed]; but
RV. baa onoe -Jftftya. — 2. The other vowels either remain unchang-
ed, or have the gu^ or the vrddhi strengthening; and e usually
and o always are treated before the ya as they wonld be before a
vowel: thoB, -kfayya, J&yya, bhiyya, l&yyai n&vya, bMvya, bAvya,
blL&vy&; virya: and, in the later language, nlya, j«ya, dhtiya (such
cases are wanting earlier). In a few Instances, a short vowel adds t

L.,j,i,....XiOogle

969—] Xm. Tbrbal ApnonvES and Nouhb. 34Q

before tb«BnfBz: thus, lty&, mityA, fr&tTft, Bt6t7a, kf^ra (the oaly
Vedic ezuDplea). — 3. Hedi&I n rem&inB unchkoged or is lengtiiened:
thns, lUbhya, vAndya. s&dya; mtdya, v^laya. — 4. UedUl 1-, «•>
and f-Toweli are unchaaged or have the cn^-Btrengtlieniiig: tbu,
i^ja, guhja, dhf^a; dvifya, 76dli7a, miijya.

e> Tbe BY. hM »boDt forty eiimplet of thta gamadWe, uid the AV.
Kddi litlf u muT mors. Kscept in bhSrlA (one«), the koe«nt in RV.
U ■.IwiT* on the not; AT. h&a uTenl cum of leeent on the 1 of th«
rani (beoM written idjk, tqyl^ -vyidhyli, -dbarfyk). According (0
the gnmmtniuii, the lueiit Is on the loot ot eUe the ending Is oirenm-
fleied: tlviji the temei, if Iha ya fbliow t Towel.

9d4. a. The aufSz tavya is a secondar; adjectlTe derirativa
from the iDfiDitival dodh in tu (below, 868], made by adding the
nffiz ya (properly ^ wheooe the aooent yi), before which the final n,
aa maal (ISOSa), has eo^a-Btrengthening, and is reBOlved into av.

b. Hence, as regards both the form taken by the root and the
nu or omisalon of an aQxitlary vowel i before the tavya, the rules
are the eame as for the formation of the infinitiTe (below, 968).

O. Ko nunple of thU fonnttion it found in HT., ind In AY. oocdt
only tvo, Janitavyh and hlAsltavyh. In the Bnhmsnt Isngatge It be-
gim to be not rue, and is mtde both from the simple root snd fnm the
d*Tl*ed conjDgationsI stems (next obspter); In the duiles] Ungnsge It is
still more frequent. Acooiding to the grimmariaiis, the scc«nt of the word
Is either otrcnmaei on the flnil or scute on the pennit: thus, kartavyk
or karUvya; Id the scoenlasted leiti. It is tlwsTs the former (the Mcent
t&Tya glren to certain gemndlvei Id the Petenbuig Uiicona is sn error,
growing out of the •mhlgaons arcentnitlon of QB.: 880].

eeb. a. The snf&x anlya ia In like manner, the prodact of
secondary detiTation, made by adding the adjective snffiz lya (ISIB)
to a nonun aetionit formed by the common snffiz ana.

b. It follows, then, se regards its mode of formation, the mlea
for the suffix ana (below, 11 BO).

O. This deriTslWe also la unknown In RV., and in AY. la found only
in npt^lTaniya snd AmantaraQlya (in both ot which, moreoTer, It* dis-
tinct gerundlTe value admits of qnestlon). lu the Br«hmanas (where less
than a dozen examples of it have been noted), and in the later language,
it is lets oommon than the gerundive in tavja. lu accent, a« in all the
derivatives with the sntflx lya, ft on the penatt: thui, kara^iya.

866. Other formatioBs of kindred value are found in the Yoda at

a> Gerundive* in tna 01 tva, tpparently made from the Influitlval
noon In tn with the added autflx a (1208). They are kirtfla (In two
<t k&Ttva), •gaihtraf.Jfuitiu^ Jitua, n&ditaa, v&kttut, a6taa.

ioy Google

347 INFINITITHB. [—968

■nttofti bintna. hAtuft, botva; uid, with auxUiaiy i (or I), J&nitva,

b. QernadlTst In enlB ot enya (compue 1817): they are Oi^Qitt,
I^^nlA, oari^la, dfqinU, -dvlqa^la, bbflfi^TB, Tudh^ola, tj^tk^Ik
(and bbftlBliyB BhP.) ; with one aiample from an apparent aoiist-stem,
TUfaBtoyo, and thiM oi ftmi from aecondaty TetVit«ms [>ea betaw, 1016,
1088, 1068 a).

O. GerondlTBs In l^la (onoe Ayya: compua 1218): tliey are dak-
ftylai panJtTla, vidtyla, <}TKvtjimi hnnv&yla; with a few from aeeon-
daiy oonJngadan-atema (below, 1018, 1088, lOKl, lOeSa); and ItOfiylH
la of elote Undted with them.

d. A few atDeotttei In ellma, as paoelima, bhldelima (only tb«sB
qootable), aK lookoned ae gOTDndiTea b; the grammariana.

867. The dlriBion-line between participial and ordinary a^ec-
tivM is lesB itriotlj drawn in Sanskrit than in the other Indo-Euro-
pean langnagea. Tbua, adjeotives in u, as will be Men later [1178),
from Becondaij oonjngational Btems, have participial ralue; and In
the Br&hmanai (with an example or two in AV.) is fonnd widely and
commonly naed a participial adjective formed with the suffix oka
(1180].

Infinltivfli.

868. The later laoguage has only a single infinitive,
which is the aooueative case of a Terbal noun formed by the
suffix ^ tn, added to the root usually directly, but often also
with aid of the preoediog auxiliary vovrel ^ i. The form of
the infinitive ending, therefore, is ^tl turn or ^tT itmn. The
root has the guva-strengthening, and is accented. Thus, for
example, ^^T ^tom &om f^ i; tf^ kdrtum &om ym kp;
tjftHH oirltum from y^ oar ; HleTrR bhivitum from y^ bhO.

a. Ab regards the nae or omisBion of 1, the infinitive (aa aleo
the gemnd in tvK; 991) followB in general the analogy of the pasaive
participle (666). Ezamplea are (with the gerand added) as follows:
rtagdh^ digdbtun, dagdbvjt from ydahi bbinni, bbittum, bbittrit
from )/bbid; mat&, m&ntoin, matri from v'man; a^bi, vA^nm,
&4bTit from I'vab; patltA, pititnm, patitva from v'pat; yftolt&,
ytoitnm, yftoltvl from yyio; Qarlt4, 9&7ltum, ^ayltva from v'fi.
Bat certain exeeptionB and speoial cases require notice. Thns:

b> Of loota haTing no quotable paitlolpl*, inflnltiTe stems In tu ate
made ttosa ad, saghi in Itn from nfiobi ilb eontider, kfap, In^tb,
lok, Bvar; and in both from yabb.

ioy Google

868 — ] SIII. Verbal Adjectives and Nouns. 348

O. Ot iMt( miking piitlelpUi of both forma, an inOnltlve Btem in
tn only is quotable for k^p, kfubh, tap, tya]. loffi lubh, vas Mute,
Qkk, aUbh; only in itu for gKb, oarr, Jap, mad, yat, van, 9afiB,
qvaa; In both fOi as throw, Oil remove, gup, oar, mpj (mkr^fa, mJUr>
jltu), lap, vaa dwtU, ^ap, f&a.

d. Alio In 1 nQmbeT of othei cues {berideB thoie ilietdy natic«d) ui
iiiAnltlve alem la made both vlth ind irlthont i. Thai, In addition t« th«
more legnlu tmm, > »Km In itn I* occadonally met vltb from n»U a^
attain, 1; eeek, baadh, bbaj, yi^ (^itnm), mdh oMrua, mh, vn,
sad (■Idltum), Bah, ban, bf ; and one In tn from roots fta, bbSf, vid
httow. Both forms oocur alio from certain am-rool«, namely nam, yanii
ram, and, with ft before tn a* in the pple, kram and bhram (kfam
haa only k^adttn, against the analogy of k^Sihta); farther, from certain
roots in larlable ^, namely tf (tartu, taritu], vf cover (T&rtn, varitu),
and atr (Btartn, ataritu, Bt&rltn) (but from Qf ctimA occur only ij&rltn,
farita, and from -vT dutote only vwitn ; while gp luiallow and pf Jilt
make their inflaltlve ^m other root-forma, namely glrltnm, pfiritnm);
farther, from a few Towel-roota, namely nl, cyn, BH (Bllttn); and flually
from kn, npt, fno.

fl. Against the analogy of the participle, Inflnttiie-atems In Itu after
a final conaonant are made from the rooU av, kqan, kban and Jan (the
pplea coming from ktaS and Jft), gnb, Jabb, tarn, diT play and div
tontent (both devitu], m(OJ> vjt, vjAh, Bfp; and after a Anal vovel,
from roots In Q, namely pil, bbfi, bQ (alao sQtu), and from 9ri and fri;
aa to roots In variable f, see Just above, d.

f. Aa the Inflnltive Is made from the (aocented and] etrengtheaed
root, so It naturally haa, as a rule, the stronger or foller root-form where
a weaker or contracted form ts taken by the participle (and gerund in
tvi): e. g. vUitu against alct4 (and aktv^, y&tfu against l^fa (and
i;tvA), banddbom agalnet baddtaii (and baddhva}, and so on. Deserv-
ing special notice are gStn (V'B^ '"'g) against gtt^ and db&u ()/dhft
tuck) against dlllt&; and eo from dft give and bft leave are made only
ditu and h&tu; but dbft put, mB,meaeure, and Btb& add to the regotar
dbfttu, mfttn, athfttu the late forms -dhitn, -mitu, •Sthitu; and sS
ot ai has s&tu, aitni and -eitn; vft weave (pple ut&) haa both vitta
and 6tu; hfk or hvft baa havitu, hvJ^tu, and hvstn. The root vyadh
makea Its only qnotable infloltive, veddbum, from Its Tidb-form; from
■alU or Baj occur both Bafiktn and gakta. The anomalous epic forms
lyitnm (>'yaj) and sidittum (Vead), were mentioned above. The root
grata makes gr&hitum.

g. In the later language, the Influltlve-steDi forma poasesslTe com-
pounds with kftma and manaa (especially the former): e. g, araptu*
kftma having the leitk to tleep, yaf(ukftma deiiroui of lacriJUing,
vaktomanaa minded to speak.

b. In very rare inetancee, dalive infinitives In tave or tavOl are

j,i,....,LiOOJ^IC

349 Infinitives. [—970

mid« bom the inflnttire stem la the Utec Unfnige (ii ibundtntlr In the
esiUer: e70b): tbiu, pratUiartava (BhP.). And JItkm (97S a) U
OD«a rooDd In UBh. [1, 3. 67 =: 732), in a quail-Vedlc bymii to the A9t1ni.

900. Id the Veda and Brabmana, however, a DQiuber of verbal
DouQB, nomina actionit, in varioQB of their cases, are used in con-
structions which assimilate them to tbe infinitive of other laDgrnages
— although, were it not for these other later and more developed
and pronounced infinitiyes, tbe constractloiiB in question might pass
as ordinary case- constructions of a somewhat peculiar kind.

970. The coans thas need infinitively are the following:

a. The root-DOun, without derivative suffix, is so used In its
accusative in am, its dative in e oi (from i-roots] U, its genitive
and ablative is aa, and its locative in 1,

b. The verbal noun in tu is so used in its accusative in tiua,
its dative in tave or tavftf, and its ablative and genitive in toa.

Of othei nouns only single cues, genermlly datlTei, lie reckoned ss
nfed with Inflnitire vilne; tbui:

a. From the verbal noun In as, the dative in aoe; and also, in
an extremely small Dumber of instances, a dative in se (or ^}, from
a noun formed with s simply.

d. Prom Doans in man and van, datives in mane and vane.

e. From nouns in ti, datives in ts^e, or (from one or two verbs)
in tyU.

f. From nouns in 1, dttives in dye.

K< From nouns in dhl and fi, datives in dby&i and fySl.

h. A few Infinitives in ^ai^ are perhaps locatives from nouns in
an added to a root increased by a.

i. From a single root, dhr, are made InSnitively used forms in
t&rl, of which tbe grammatical character is qnestionable.

J. Among in these, the forms -wblnb hiTe best right to apsctsl treat-
ment M Inflnltiyet, on sceoant of being of pecnIUr formation, or from
snfQzes not found fn other nses, or for both reaaone, sre thote In ^, ^tu^
tarl, dhyfii, and tav&i.

k. Except the various cases of the derivative In to, and of the root-
DODO, these inBnitlYeB are almost wholly unknown ontside the Rlg'Veda.

L Other safflzes and forma than those notioed above might be added;
for It Is imponlble to draw an; Bied line between the nies classed as
lullnltlie and the ordinary esse-nsee: thus, prt^ipatlih praqiL&in UtSm
(T80 tA«^ went to oik Prq/'l^aii; rffvaifa Jlv&ih pruuv&nU oariyU
(ItV.) quKkming every living being ta motton; apA^ a&rmftya ood&ytm
(RV.) impelling the watm'a tojloui; qaknuy^ sr&ha^Sya (Instead of the
oinal gr&liltiua: ^B.) mta/ be abk to apprehend; S tamanSt (Instead ot
tbe usual tamito^: 8.) luidV exhaustion. And the so-called inflnltlTes

D,j,i,....,LiOOgle

970— -1 Xni. TiRBAL Adjectives and NouNe. 350

are fannd coSrdtDtted In tlis iiima HoUnce witli common aomu, and eren
with componnd nonni: e. $. uirltsTe . . . Sbboc4ya ]|tA7B rlyi O^O
to go abroad, to anjoy, to $tek teeaUh; Srtfttr&i^l7« na pralurtnm
anicui (^) /or &« ruea» of iht dittreutd, not for hurling at M«

Hon spedil ralei u to the vuion* foimttloni are u tollowi;

671. Tli« loot-Donn nsed u infinitive hw the urns form (eioeptthat
It doei not take an added t; 388 f), and the eame aeeent, Iioth when tlnple
and vhen eomblned with piapoiltloni, at In Itt otlier naei. In the Tery
great majoiit; of initanoea, It 1» made fiom loota ondinB in a ooniODant;
but alio l^om ■ reir In & Qchyft, di, ShK, pftP, mft, rft), from two or
thiee In 1- and u-TOWel* (ttl, ml, bbfl), and from one or two In changeable
f, which takea the ir-fDin (Ur, Stir).

ft. The roots in ft [oim the aecna. In fim, the dat. In U, the abl. In
U (undertlanding avaai beloie A u toi &▼«»& and not ktmAI in RT.
111. 53.20), and the localtTO In • (only two ezamplei, of which one ii per-
hapi better nndantood *■ datUe).

67S. Tbe inflnltlTe nonn In ta )i made freely from looti of aTeir
form. The toot takei the KU^a-etiengthening, If capable of It, and often
adde the aQiiliary towoI i befoie the infflx (ucoTding to the ralea already
■tated, 968). The mot ia accented, anloM the noan be combined with a
prepoiltlon. In which caae the later haa the accent Initead: thus, Urtnia,
dtave, h4ntoB; but nikartum, nlrAtave, nlrhantoe.

a. The datlie in tavU ig In two respects anonuloai : In having the
heavy feminine ending U along with a ittengthonad a; and in taking a
donble accent, one on the root or on the pieflxed prepoiltlon, and the other
on the ending It: thaa, iXtevii., hintATSf, AtyeUrit, ipabhsrtaTif.

978. a. The Inflnltlve In u« ia made In RT. from abont Iwenty-
flve root*; In AT. and later there hare been noted no other eiamplei of
It. In nearly thiee qaartere of the eaaea, the accent la on the infBi: e. g.
(lljiae. Jlvise, bhijr&a«, CdJ&m; the eiceptloni are oAkqane; dta^Tacs
(with y inserted before the anfflx: fl58); and i^tMn, bh&roee, Bpirase,
hiroae (with ga^a-atrengthonlng of the root). Strengthening of the root
it alto shown by Jbv&m, doh&so, bhoj&m, Qobhiao. In pofy&se It
■een, apparently, the piestDt^tem Instead of the root.

b. The ending ae It extremely rate, being fonnd only in Jifi and
perhaps Btn^, and one or two still more doubtful ease?.

974. Inflnittvea in mana are made from only flre roots: thni, tc&-
mo^e, dimaoa, d&Tmaqe, bbJoma^a, and (with diffetenl accent) vld-
m&na. From ydft comes dftT&iie ; tturril^e may oome directly from ytf,
or through the secondary tool tnrv; dbdrra^a la talhei from ydhltrv
than from )^dhT^.

97B. a. The loflnltivet In tay are Ifffcys {yi^), plt4ya (|/pfi
drink), TlU^e, sit&ye, and perhaps Qt^a (flt4ra n^ to hdf hit m*n:

Digitizecy Google

351 Infihitites. [—981

S7.). In t3«i, the only eumplM noMd no Urii (RT.) ind sd^brU
(M8. AB.).

b. With h;« tie roTmed If&ye, ti^Aye, df^&ye, mahiya, yndhky,
■aniya; end oiUja (T9.)i STbaya (K.).

976. The ending dbyU 1«, more than tn; other, liregalu uid rari-
aus In Iti treatment. It ha> alvaya an a befbre it; and in tb» majority
of cuea It 1* aceented apon thia a, and added to a weak form of root:
thni, Qao&dtayOi, pp^AdbrlU, dhly&dhyftt. huv&dhySl. But the form
of root ii the itTOng one In a fow caaet: name!)', Qay&dliyU, BtaT&dh>
;ai, tarfcdliyU, Jar&dbyU. mandidhrU, Tand&dhyU. In half-&-
donen fonna, again, tha root bas tbe accent: namely, kqiiradhyU, g&madl)-
yU, yJOadbySl (bat once oi twioe alio yi^idhyU), v&hadhyU,
Bibadhyll, bhiMdhyU. In a single Inatance, plbadhyU, the anfflz
la added dlatlnetly to a present-atem ; and In ons, vXv|41i&dliy&i, to a
perfect atem. Finally, In a number of Inalaneea (ten), thti InSnitlve ti
made from a oaaaatWe atem In ay: thna, m&dayUhy&i, ri^ay&dliyll, etc

a, Thla mflnitiie ia by no meani rare In RV., balng mado In thlrty-
nT« different form* (with terentr-two oocnrreneei). Bot It ia hudly known
ODtalde of tbe RV. ; tbe AV. bai It bnt once (in a pauage fonnd alao In
RT.}; and eltewhere b*lf-*-dozen examples have been noticed, in mantra*
pataagea (one ot them T3. faldely reads gimadhyo); in the Bnhmana
language proper II appeira to be entirely wanting.

977. An example or two ara mat with of an InftaiUvB in ;yU: thus,
t6U^U(TS.), aT7atht9yU(K. Kap.; US, avyittaife; TS. Tyathifat],
and perhapi -dbSayU (PGS.).

978. Tbs inflnltlva 1° 9&9I *'«■ if&^i C) f""^ /W f"*^. -bhOfiifi
from ybtaQ; qOfi^^i trota j/fa 01 fvS; naf&i^l from yni; aakfi^
from t^Bah; par9&9l ^m yfj, ttaeif&I}! from ytf; and gp^Ilffagd and
-stp^f&fl from V'v'ET *"d "tp — the last containing eiident preaent tenae-
stgna (compare the lat alng. gf^^fi, 884 d).

979. Tbe only InflnlliTe In taxi la dhart&rl [with Itt oomponnd
TldhaiiAri), from ydhp.

Uses of the InflnitiTefl.

980. The uses uf the so-called Infinitirea are for the most part
closely accordant with those of the correBpondiiig cases ftom other
abstract soniia. Thus:

981. Tbe acoasalive, which is made only from the root-nonn and
the nonn In to, is used as object of a verb.

a. Gapecially, of forms ftom the root fak bt dbU, and arh b* icorthy,
Aofa the right or the power. Thas, ^akdma tvh aamldham (RV.) may
to* (Keompliih thy hmdiing; xai ^akaii pratldta^ {qam (AV.) may they
not ba able to Jit the arrow to the ttring; mAno vt imidi aadyi^ P&ry-

u,j,i,._.., Lioogle

881—] XIII. VutBAii Adjbotives and Nouhs. 352

iptum ftrbati m4na^ p&ribll&Tltum (TS.) Me mind, fortooth, eon at
oaet attain and turpait her; k6 by iti»jA 'rhatl gdliyatfa nlboa cr&-
bltum (QB.) for who u worthy to takt hit iteret name T la the Y«da, Iha
conttroctiOD with ihe«e Terbg 1b only od« tmoDg Mhen; Id the Bnkmtoa,
it bacomei the greatly pretslent one (thiee qasrten oi mon of all the cue*).
b. Further, of lerbs of motion (next moit rieqnent cue); thaa,
dik^ftni hittua stl (T9.) h» got* to taeriJUe thing! pertaining to
tacrijicial gtfti; indraifa pratlram omy jfu^ (RV.) / go to Indra for
(I, e. hiMtch of him) tht Ungthening out of life; ^of ydhf peritit m,
undertake: as, ak id&ih Jftt&ti s&rvam ovk digdhtuh dtMlbre ((B.) he,
at toon at bom, began to bum thit untoerte; — of vecba meaning datire,
hope, notice, know, and tbe like: u, p&fSn vlo^aiij vettlui B&rr&ii
(AV.) thou knowett how to looten all bonde ; t&amfid agnidi ai " drijeta
p&ritaantuin (VO therefore one thould not be careful to rmother tkt
_^r<; — and of others.

96fi. Of the iafinitiTfl datives, the fandamental and uaoal sense
is that expressed by for, in order to, for the purpote of

Eiamplea are: viijvaA Jiv&ih oar&sa bodbiyuitl (RV,) awakening
every living creature to motion; titn Apa ySta plbadhyKl (RV.) come
to drink them; nsi t&ifa te Aevi adadur fcttavs (AT.) the gode did
not give her to thee for eating; pr&f "d yndb&ye d&syuili {ndra^
{yi.\.) Indra went forward to fight the demon; C&kfor no dbehl Tttbyftl
(RV.) give ui tight for looking abroad.

Some pecnliar eaiiatmetloDi, howeTsr, grow ont of thU me of the In-
floltlTe datlTe. Thui:

a. The nonn which i( iogic&Uy the aabject or itbe ot^ect of the action
•ipretsed by the InflnitiTe \t frequently put beside It in the d»tlTe (by a
conatmctien wbl«b i« In part a perfeotly simple one, bnt vhloh is stretdiad
beyond It* natnral boundwies by a kind of attraction): thus, oakira
atiryftya p&ntbfim AnvetaTit n (RV.) he made a track for the tun to
foUow (made for the eun a track for hit foUtrwing'); fiqit* qt^^C^
r&Itqobhyo vlnfkfe (RV.) he wheit hit home to pierce the demont;
mdraya dta&nur t tanoml brahmadvlfe q&rava taintariE a (RV.)
/ ttretch the bow for Mudra, that with hit arrow he mai/ ilay the hrahma-
hater; BSm&bhyath d^qiiye sdrySya punar dStftm &amn (RV.) mojf
Iheg grant life again, that we mag tee &e ran.

bi Ad inllaite with y'kp make U uied nearly in the aence of ft
cauiatlTB Terb: thna, prit "ndb&ih gro^&ih oAkqasa 6taTe bftba^ (RV.)
jfe make the blind and lame to tee and go; agnlth aamidbe oaUrtba
(RV.) thou haet made the fire to be kindled. Of almiUr cbaraeter la an
occasional constmcUon with anothei verb: as, y&d im u^m&ai Urtava
Uurat t&t (RV.) what we with to be done, mag ?ie do Uof; kavtbr
iecbfiml aaifadf f « C^V.) I deeire to tee the lagee.

a, A dative ioflnltlTe 1« not soldem nsed as a piedlaate, aometline*

ioy Google

853 Uses of the Inpihitives. [—984

wltli, bnt mora luutllT wltbont, > copuls eipnuedi thus, ogidr IvK n&
pratldta^ bhaVHti (TS.) likt Jire, he m not to be resitUd; mabimA to
auytaft n& fluhnA^e (YS.) thy graOnttt it not to ht attaintd by anothtr;
nAUm {ndro nlkartsTO ait qaktUf p4rlf&ktaT« (RV-) Indra i» not
to b* put doum, &t mighty ont it not to he overptneertd.

d. aometlmM ui inflnitlva aa naed wlthoat ■ copula hu quite neaily
the itloe of an Imperative: thua, tyi me yofdeft . . , KaqlJ6 liuv&dh;&l
[astl] (RV.) thttt glorious one* thaU the son of Ucy invoke for ms;
sOktAbbir va^ . . . {ndrS nv ogni &vaaa bnTAdhyll [Bta^] (RV.)
with your hymni thall ye call now on Indra and Agnifor aid; TUadidhy &
■gniiii ii4iiiobM^ [BBml] (KT.) Ut me griet Agni with homage ; asmakO-
•■9 Oft BBjriyo vit^vi a^fis tariffci^l (RV.) and let our laerificert erou
aU regioni; tin nii VAih k&rtBT&I (HS.) that mutt not be done to;
brnbinadvlfa^ ^rave h&ntava u (RV.) let the arroui ilay the brahma-
haiera. The liiflnitifes in dhySl and ^a^l (which latter is io all Its asei
aecoidant with dttlvei) ara thoie iu which the ImperatlTe lalae Is most
diitlDotly to bs reoognited.

a. In the Btshma^ai and Sutras (especially In ^B.) the dative in tavU
is not iBldom used with s vetb signifying y>eak (brQ, vao, ab), to sipreis
the orderinf of anything to be dooe : thns, tAamU Afadbln&m wk m^llLny
Aoobettav&I brttyfit ((B.) therefore let him direct the roott oftheplantt
to be eut up {ipeak in order to l?ieir cutting up : ct. y^ ywjtjt &dftiijlya
T&daaU who ditmade from giving the cow : AV.).

888. The ablative Infinitive — which, like the accusative, ia made
only from the root-Douo and that in tn — it fonnd especially with
the preposltlonB i until and port b^ora.

a. Thna, t timlto^ (TS. etc.) until eoAouttion; puri Tftoitk pr&-
Tftdlto^ (TS.) before utterance of the voice. In the Biahmans langaage,
tUs ii the wetl-ni0 exclnsive conslnictian of the sblatiTe (it ooonrs also
with pTSkt-arrBlc, etc); in the Yeda, the lattec is nsad also after ^
without, and after several verbs, as trft and pft protect, yn teparate, bbl, etc.

b. In a f^ir instancei, by an attraction similar to that illnstisted
above for the dative (982 a), a noun dependent on this inflnltive is pnt in
tha ablative healie It; thns, purS vBgbhyah aampravadito^ (PB.)
before the utterance together of the voieet; trodbvaih kart^ avapida^
(BT.) taee ue from falling down into the pit; purK dokfi^bhyo aeto^
(Apaat.) before the gifti are taJeen away.

884. The genitive infinitive (having the eame form as Che ab-
lative) is- in common use in the Brahma^a language as dependent on
I^rarA lord, matter, employed adjectlvely In the sense of capable or
likefy or expoted to.

a. Examples are; td [devUV?] Igvari enoiii pradihah (TS.)
they are likely to bum him up; itba ba vt IqvarA 'gniifa tAtvi kiih-
old d&tirlt&m jtpattor vf vi hvUito^ (QB.) «o m truth ht it Uable,

Wkitmj, Onmmar. 3. ed. 33

d,j,i,....,L-'OOQIc

884—] XIII. Verbal Adjbctivbb amd Nouns. 354

after piling the Jiri, to mtet miffi tome miAap or otA<r, or to ttaggtr;
IfTKT&ih tU rattaanUiram ndgfttoQ cakfu^ prunfttUtob (PB.) tht
rathaniara it Hahle to Anoeit out tht tya of the chanter.

b. Tha dtttia la nied In gB. iDpt«*d of tlie genitive In & iliifla
plitue (I^arK& J^ATltaT&Ol *^^> li ^^ lUar l&ngnaga, lometlmM tke
ucQiattn in torn. In 1 cue or two the ntao. ring, nam. I^Tftrah i*
Qied, wlthoat regiid to tlie gander or nnmbei of the iraid vhleli it qoallflei:
thai, tAcye "^ari^ prajA ptpiyASl bh&vito^ ((B.) hit progvng ii
UtAh to deteriorate. And in ■ very few initances tha word I^ram li
omitted, and the genftlTe bai the aame lalne withoat It: thai, dTB nudhy-
^ThiUnfctw abhi pnttyato^ (AB.) two mag b* added to the noon i^ation ;
ttto dlkfiU^ pfimanA bhAvlto^ ((B.) then the comterated m liabU
to get the iteh.

0> This oonatmctlon with Igvara, which is the only one for the geni-
tive inflnltiTe In tha BtEhmana, ia unknown In the Yedi, where the genl-
tlTB is fennd in a vsiy amill anmber of eiamplea with madhyi, and with
tiie root Iq: thug, madliyi Urtol^ (RV.] in the midef of aetion; jfe
rSr& ^tol^ (If^-) ^ M maater of the giving oftotatth; Iqa y6to^ Ot^O
M (Me to keep away.

686. UnleM (he inHntttvea In (ai^ and tari are locaUTe In form
(their naei are those of datlTea), tlie locative tnflnitive ii *o tare, and haa
10 little that ia pecnliat in its use, that it la hardly worth making any
account of. An aiunple U Of&so bndhl (RV.) at the awakening of the

8S6. In the Teda, tbe dative infiDttlve forms are very macli
moie ntunerona than the aecaBative (In RV., their ooonrreDces an
twelve timea as many; in AV., more than three timet); and the ac-
ouMtlve in torn Is rare (only fonr formB in RV., only eight in AV.).
Id the Brahmanas, the aoeiuative bat risen to comparatively much
greater freqnenoy (Ita forms are nearly twice as many as those of the
dative]) bnt the ablative-genitive, which is rare in the Veda, has
lUso come to fnll eqaaiil? with it. The disappearance in the olassical
language of all excepting the acousative in turn (bnt see 868 h) is a
matter for no small anrpriae.

887. The later infinitive in torn is ofteneet used in oonstmctlong
oorrMponding to those of the earlier acoosative: thns, na vifpam
aqakat so^tun. he could not rutrain hie feari; tuii drnftom arhoai
thou oughteet to tee him; pr&ptma iochanti they de»ir» to obtain; saiii-
khy&tuia ftrabdham having begun to count. But also, not infrequently,
in those of the other cases. So, especially, of the dadve: tbns,
avaathfttuih sthKnftntaradi ointoya deeita another plate to ttay in;
tvftm anve^tuni ibS "gata^ he hai come hither to eeek for thee; —
but likewise of the genitive: thus, samartbo gantiun eapabU of
going ; aadidhBtaiD I^vara^ able to mend. Even a construction as
nominative Is not unknown: thus, yuktaih tasya mayK aamaqvK-

j,i,....,LiOOylC

355 GBRmnDS. [—WO

Mtyittah bUUTltn (HBh.) it it proptr for me to comfort hit wife;
na tuptlraifa avayaih nyATraifa 9aptiim eT«m (R.) it it not luitable
thut to cur*« one't eten grmdton; t»d vaktiuh na pftTTate (Qatr.) H
it not poisibie to say tiuf.

ess. In the Utei liDguag*, u la the etrlter, the InflnltiTe Id eei-
Uio counimtlaDB hu whit we look npon >i e puitTe vilae. Thai, kmrtnm
irftbdhtt^ beffutt to he made; qrotudi na ynjyftte it it not ^ to ht
heard (for hearing). Thla it eipedillT frequent ilong vlih the putiTa
fomi ot y<}ttk: thni, tjaktmh na qakyato )f eatutat be abanAmtd;
faky&T ihS "netnm M<y two can be brought hither; na oa vlbbfltaya)^
qakyam avftptum orjita^ nor are mighUf lueeeteei a thing capable of
being attained.

Gerunds.

888. The so-called gerund is a steieotyped case (doubt-
leas instnimeDtal] of a reibal douh, used geoeially as ad-
junct to the logical subject of a clause, de&otiug an accom-
panying oi (more often) a pieoediog action to that signified
by the verb of the clause. It has thus the virtual value of
an indeclinable participle, piesent or past, qualifying the
aotoi whose action it describes.

a. TfanB, for example: <}TutvU 'va oft *bmvaii and hearing (or
hatting heardi they ipoke; tebhya^ pratlJ&ByK thU tin parlpa-
praoAa haoing given them hit promite, A« then quettioned them.

890. The gerund is made in the later language by one
of the two suffixes ^ tvS and U ;a, the former being used
with a simple root, the latter with one that is compounded
with a prepositional prefix — or, rarely, with an element
of another kind, as adverb oi noun.

a. To thie dtstiibntioii of uaei betweea the two suniiei tbeie ire
oeeulonal exception!. Thvi, gerund« In ya from •imple root* m not
Ter7 rate In the epic languags (e. g. grhya. X^Jt^ IV^** dwell], ar^a,
Ikfya, dn^a, tynjya, lah^ya; sI»o from Mui*tlT«s and deaomlnttiTet,
u Vftoya, yojya, pUVTB)> and "^ not anknown elievheie (e. g. aroya
uti ikfya H., prothya AQS., sthftpya QvD.). And gamndt ia tvS.
from compounded looti eie met vltli In conelderable numben from AT.
(oalj pratyarpayltvJl) down: e. g. samlrayltTit HS,. virooayltvA
TA., utkftptvK U., pratyiiktvs S., pra^aaltvS S., prahaMtTft
HBh,, saihdarfayltvft HBh., vltnuktrft R., nivadayltvK R., prsktrS
Psiic., anupltvl TBS. : the great mijoilty of them ue made from tlie

23*
Dgii.ze.., Google

eoo— ] Xlll. Verbal ADJEO-rivsa and Nouks. 356

b. Tbe pretliton of the negatire psrtide, a oi Kn, doet not oaute
the gerund to take the form In ;■: thus, lAftvft, &mrayiWft (bat R.
has aeln^a)- Of eompouiidg with other than veib>I prefliei, BV. hu
punardirt^ karpag^byBi ptdag^hya, haatag^bya, araifakftya.
akkhalik^yB, mithasptdliya; AV. bia further aamaak^jra.

881. The suffix ^ tvB has the accent. It » ustullf
added diiectly to the root, but often alao with iutetpositioo
of the auxiliary vowel ^ i — with regaid to which, as well
as to the form of the loot befoie it, the fotmatioD nearly
agrees with that of the participle in ?T ta {8BZ if.].

a. Examples of tbe general accordance of pauive participle, in-
finitive, and gerund in regard to tbe nse of i were giveo above,
SflSa; farther Bpecifloations are called for, aa follows:

b. The quotible roots In virfibla p (S4S) change it to ir: tho*,
tartvi. aUrtri (alio atrtvtji and oar makea alio oirtrS (like cSn^);
— loota Id S ihow in general tJie lame weakening aa in the partlelple; bst
from db&put ii quotable only dhltrlt (MtrS), from m&meaturt mltwi
and ml tv a, tiomda^io« only dattv^ from ohfi obl^tTfti — of roots in
am, kratn. and bhram and yam make foinu both with and without i
(u in the laflnltiie), bnt ram haB ratvit and raihtrS, and dam and Tain
make damltrft and TamltT&.

C. The auxiliary vowel la taken by loota gras, muf, fap, and (Ba
(qSaltTB) (vhoie participle* have h«th forma); alto by oSy, nft [nar-
titT&), lag, and Brai (agalnet analogy of pplc); and foo makei fcxritrk.
On the other hand, from ruj (rug^) and vraqo (vrk^a) come raktri
and Vfft^^ And both forms are made (as alao in Inflnltlve or partioiple)
ftoni oar, vaa duell (u^^vK, o^tri), ni (nltvA, naritvft), and m^J
Cmnfv^ mSTjitrft).

d. While tbe formation ia In general one requiring, like the ptiaiTe
participle (e. g. Qptrft, like upt4; odltvi, like udlti), » weak or weakened
toot, there are lome caaea lo which it ia made from a atrong or stiengtli-
ened root-form. I^hna (beeidea the Instancea already given; ohX^Cvf,
raditvA, gfisitrfi, c&yltTft, fooltTfi, naTitrft, mBrJltrt), w« And
oharditTfi (Apaat.), daAftrft, and epharitvft, and, from a nnmber of
Toats, a second strong form beside the more ragnlar weak one: namely,
a&ktTft, bhai^tra, bhufiktrS, syanttva (beilde aktvA etc.) ; oayltrS.
BmayitvB, BmaritTft [beside oitrlE etc.); rodltrft (beside mdltvaj,
and BiAoltvft (beaide siktTS). Tbe last shows the Inflnence of the
preaent-stem ; as do also mBijltrji (above) and JlgtirltrS (yghrt). The
form ffhutra (Apast.) U doubtless a false reading, for fthyiltTa.

892. The suffix ? ya is added direotly to the lOOt,
which is accented, but has its weak form. A root ending

ioy Google

3fi7 Gerqhd in ja. [—993

in a short vowel takes flT tya instead of IT ya: thus, %f7I
-jitya, H^rU -stiitya, ^ItTI -ktty*-

a. Roota in Tulable f (S4S) change that Towel to Ir or Or: thua,
klrra, girya. ttrya (and tArTa), dizya, pOrya, qlrya, Btiiya (also
Btftya); — roots In ft have for the mo*t pin •ftya; but dbft >uol makes
dl^a, and doable fbrmi ue foDnd tiom g& awi^ (gfiya, glya), p& rfrin£
Qpltya, piya), dft giee (dtja^ d&dya), dft dioide (d^a, dltya), ma
maamrt, txchaitgt (nUtjra, mitya), b& bind (elEra, aya); li c/iVijr baa
l^a or Uya, m It an ft-vetb; and kban and dbam maha khSya and
dlunltya, trom their R-forma; — the roots In an and am making their
participle in ata (954 d) make the gerund in a^a, bnt also later in anya,
amya (e. g. gitya, gamya; h&tya, hanya; but tan makes as aeeond
form t&ya, and ^m ram only ramya Is qnotable); — the roots In it
add ya to their Iv-form; that, tfthlTya, aivya; — a few loola In i and
a add ya to the lengthened vowel bealdea adding tya: thne, 1 go (lya,
I^a; alao ayya), ol giOhtr (dya, oi^a). and plu, yu unite, bh, atu
(pl^ya, plQ^a, etc.); while b^l dtttroy baa only k^iya.

b. Thia gerund, though accented on the loat-ayllible, Is generally a
weakening formation: thus are made, without a strengthening nasal fonnd
In some other forms, Aoya, Uya, idbya, udya, ubhya, sratbya, t4oya,
da^ya, bidhya, bhajyo, lipya, liipya, vl&gya, ^rabbya. aajya,
sk&bbya, stibliya, syodya, Bvajya; with weakening of other ktndi,
K^hya and g^bhya, proobya, lioya, udya, upya, ^ya (tab dirdl),
6hya, vidtaya, viya, v^qoya, Bp^dbya, hfiya; — but fram a nomber
of roots are made both a itroDger and a weaker form: thus, maathya and
m&thya, mErJya and m^Jya, mndbya and rddbya, qaAsya and q&a-
ya, fSaya and qlfya, sk&ndya and skidya, ST&Asya and araaya; —
and only atrong fonue are tound from raote aro, av, ofty, 91 (qayya), u
well u from certain roots with a constant nasal : e. g. uflob, kamp,
nand, lamb, qaftk; isolated cases are oijya (y^nq burn), prothya (alao
prdthya).

0> Other gpeclal eaaw ate nllya and tlbya (V'uh remove), guTya and
gtbya, gnhya and giUiya, rubya and rOhya, bhramya and bhrSmya,
&yya (beside {tya, lya), gbrSya and Jighrya; and ilr^utya (beside
vftya).

ess. The older langnsge haa the same two gerund formations,
having the same distinotion, and used in the same way.

a. In RV., however, the Bnal of ya la in the great m^oilty of In-
atanses (fully two thlrda) long (at if the Inatrumental ending of a derlv'
ative noun in i or tl). In AY., loug ft appears only once in a RV.
paatage.

b. Instead of tvK (ilone, the Veda has three fbrms of the anfili, namely
tv^ tv^a, and tvl. Of these three, ttri 1> decidedly the eouiinonast in
BV. (tiilTty-flTe oocnrreneei, against twenty-one of tvS); but it la unknown

Digitizecy Google

raS— ] ZIII. Verbal Adjbotivbs and Notnts. 358

In AT., ud *eTT rute elnvhere In the oldei luigatgB; tvtya li fosnd nlns
timet Id RT. (enlr onc« onUtdt the Centh Book), twice In AT., >nd but hair->-
dozen times elaevhete (In QB., onee from » eiQMtlie tiem; Bpft^ayltT^rs).
The hiitoriul reUtlon of the thiea formi Im obscnie.

O. T>o other gerund infSzei, trftiuun and tvlnam, ue ueDHonod
b7 the gnmmirluia m of Tedic nae, bnt they hiTe noirhera been bmnd

894. The nse of this gerund, tboofrb not ch&ngliig !a Its chtr-
Kot«r, becomeB much mora freqaent, and even exowaiTe, In the liter
IftDgnage.

». Thni, In the N&ta *nd BhagsTtd'Qiti, vhlch hiTe only one tentii
u many Tetb-fonns u KV., theie >ia more than three timea m many es-
amplea of the geiand u in the latter.

b> In genera), the gemnd ts an adjunct to the anbjeet of a aentenee,
and expreaiea an act or condition belonging to the anbjeet: thai, T&Jre^a
hatrlt nfr ap&^ eaearja (BT.) smiting teith hia t\undtrboll, Ae pourad
forth the wattn; pltvf sAmura vtTrdhe (RT.) having drvnk of the
soma, hs waxed strong; th ji^fi&aya r&eaifa dtaltra TldoliTa y^tUjfa
Tllpina yopayltTit tir& 'bhavan (9^0 ^^ing sucked out the sap of the
offering, hoeing miiked the offering dry, having blocked li teith the saerifieitd
post, they disappeared; fratrll 'va Oft 'brnvan (HBh.) and having heard,
they said; taib oa dOre drftvft gardabhl 'yam Iti iftatvS dbSvita^
(H.) and having seen him in the distance, thinking 'it it a the-ats', he ran.

a. Bnt if the logical lableet, the real agent, 1> pat by the conatmotion
of the Mntenofl In a dependent caae, It la atill i^ntllfied by the gernnd:
thai, Btrlyaih drffv^ya kitav&lil tatXpa (RT.) it distresses the gambler
(i. e, the gambler is distressed) at seeing hie ujife; tkia li&i ^ladl dntri^
bhir Tlveda (^B.) fear came upon Kim (I. e. he was afhiid) when he
Sato him; TldlLfiya pTOQlte vfttlm [U.] when he stay* away after provid-
ing for her nyipori; kiih na ms a;ad idaifa k^ft (HBh.) vihal, I
iconder, teould happen to me if I did this; — and oipecially, when a paaiive
form la given to the aeotence, the gerund qnallOea the agent in thelnatmmental
caie (ass a): thna, tat«t> Qftbd&d abhijtkftya ea vrBahre^a hata^ (H.)
iherei^on he was slain by the Itger, who recognised him by hit votee;
trayK sa rWi yJrontaHUfa paraakfty^ vakta-rra^ (^.) presenting
(^akuntala, thou mutt say to the king; ha&atoftifa vaoanaih fratvS
yatbt me (gen. for initc.) nSlqadbo vrtal^ (HBh.) at the Nithadhan
was chosen by me on Hearing the words of the swans: thla eonetractlon
Is extremely eommeo In mneh of the later SanikilL

d. Oeoaiionally, the gerund quallllea an agant, eepecially an Indellnlte
one, that ia Qnezpretied : thus, tada trU *v« paktvt kmUUtawTal;
(H.) then A« shall bs eaten [by im] cooking him on the spot ; yad anyacya
pratiJiUya punar anyaaya dlyate (H.) that, after being promised (lit
when one has promised her) to one, the it given again to another ; anotntTa
00 'ktaib aavloilya yat kftam (H.) what one says after mature thought,

ioy Google

359 Obe& of thh Gbrumd. [— OdB

and Ami afttrjiill MA*ration. Henca, itiXt mora slUptloUr, ifter alam:
Ihns, aluil TlaBrrft (^.) tnough of httilation; tad altufa te vanub
- Bmtvft (R.) to hoot dong tmM jrom; to tkt fortti.

•. Otkot 1«M isgoUT BoiutiDctiDai HB mat Tltb, eipeeUllf in tha
■Idac Uapuca: thnt, in tha maoiiat of a partlelple witli man *nd t)i« lllie
(see a), u Udi lilAaltTA 'va men* ((B.) h» Oouf/U kt had luirl him;
M adbbir abhlfloya aijItsrU 'vR 'maajrata (AB.) hoeing tprinkUd
then with icattr, Aa btlitvad himttlf to have gxhauittd them; — In Iha
Dioaat of a putleiple faimlag a ovotinnoai tanie «lth yi (1075 a), aa
Indram erU tftlr KrabbTa yaatl (AB.) by meam of them they kt4p
taktitg hold of Indra; — aa qnalifjlng a saboidtnaU mamber of tha ientsnoa,
aa poro^ltqam wb. kOrmAtb bbtltrlt B&rpaatam (^B.) to th« taori-
fieial eake creeping lAotU, having become a tortoiti; ^odtaj&m . . .
saphsnKih BBaTantih bltQtva Jalormlm Iva (B.) into Ayodkya, Uke a
eurge that had been foamy and roaring; — even abaolatelr, at atithytaa
vti dovi Iftvi t^t Bam&d avlndat (f B.) when the gode had laeri-
Jiced with the gttett-offering, ttrife befel titem.

t. At In the two examplti btforajthe lait, a ptsdloate word with
bhatvA is pat In the lame oaae with the Bubjaot: thna, faitfaat, t4d If&m
OTti t&d bbQtvi yt^atl ((B.) to having thvt bteomt thit earth he
maltM offering; yena vSmaaenS *pl bhatvft (Vet) by whom, even toAen
At had become a dwarf. The coultnictioa li a laie one.

g, A numbeT of gemtida haie theii meaning attenoated ionietlmei to
the temblanee of a piepoaltlon or adTub: inch art adhikftya making a
tu^««t of, 1. «. retpeeting, of; Uiya, apBgfhya taking, 1. e. leiih; ud-
dlfya pointing toward, 1. e. at; SaSdja, arriving at, 1. a. along, by;
Irabhra beginning, 1. a. from; BatnbhOya being with, i. e. with; sadihatya
ttriking together, L t. in uniton; prasohya tuing force, 1. e. violently;
tyaktrK, parltyajya, mnktrK, vlbBya, uddh|^at TarJaTltvt leaving
out etc., i. e. excepting, withotU; and othtia. Eiamplea are: faknntaUm
adhlkf tya bravlml (y.) I am epeaking of fakuntala ; tam nddif ya
kqiptalagufal^ (H.) having thrown the cudgel at him; nlmittaih klifaold
Ssftdya (B.) for tome reaton or other.

b. The geniDcl la Id the later langaage aometlmea fonnd In compo-
aitloD, aa It a nonn-stem: a, g. praaabyaliara^ taking with violence;
pretyabhSva exiifence after daath; vlbhaJyapStha eeparate enunciation;
Kam'tiixviyhgiaaKa.ti going together. It la alio often iiipeated (ISdO). tn a
dlatribntlTt teote: e. %. b4 vk{ ■ammfJya-BanuiiiJya prat4pya-pra-
tapya pr& yaoobati ((B.) in eaeh caie, after wiping and warming them,
he handt them over; gfhltv&-gfMtv& (K^iS.) at aocA taking; TUUUUnyo-
*iuuuiiya (PaKo.) mery time that Ihey arite.

Adverbial Oenmd in am.

WB. The aoonMtive of a derivative nomen actionit in a, naed
adverbially, BMomea aouetiiues a value and conatrvotion ao aeeord-

ioy Google

998—] XIV. BscoNDAxr CoNjnaATioH, 360

Knt wltb tbftt of tbe ninal gerund that it oannot well be called by
a different Dame.

a. No ei4iDple of 4 paoDltai geiondltl eomtiactlon wllh (uch > foix
oecnn either in RV. or AV., altbongh i doien 4dvetbl>l (coaiatiTea ue U
be clu«ed u repteienting the formitlon: thni, abhy akrittn am , pr(Lt&&-
kam, pra96dsm, nUltr<U>l> abMak&ildam, etc. Tbis genind la fonnl
etpecimr io tbe Bribmau** end SQtru, wbeie It ii not nre; in tfae epia
It ia eitr«melr Infreqaeat; Utai, eUo, It ocsnn -very ipulnglr,

b. A floU TOwel h» TTddtal-attengthening before the anttx: tliot,
n&Tam. qrivam, kSrtun; fln*! ft edda j: thai, kbTayun, rBT^m; a
medial Towel hu gnvti (if oipable or it: 940): thoa, kfepain, kroqun,
TUtam (bat Ikfuu, pOrain)! > medial a before a aiogle eontonaiit i«
lengthened: thna, kramam, oKraiD, gHUutm. BVldam (but Entutliaia,
lambham). The accent la on tbe radleal lyllable. No nnoompoanded ei-
emplea are found in the older langaage, and eibemeif few in the later.

O. Ezamplea aie: k^aih vi tmioj Ugftni vjfttT^e&ifa fete
((B.) ht lit changing tAa poiition of that limbg at pleaaurt; ^ttarfim-
Qttar&b fAkhSiii aamMAmbhaifa r6het ((B.) be aould climb, talcing
hold of a higher and ever a higher litrib; apari^n mahfaiftgfan ivft
■bhlBaduiraiti didfkfitba^ (9^.) hareaftor, rvnning together at it tuere
about a great snake, th«g toiB with to tee htm; nltmSn; fta&m ettoi
ngmagrfamm (9^0 filh teparate naming of (AeM their namet; 76
▼ipaijAaam &Tag6hati (^B.) tahoevtr buriee it t^tide doton; hilhfltV^e
padi krandittuh praTrttA (^.) the proceeded to cry, throteing tip her
armt {wiOt arm-totting') ; navaofltapaUATftnl darf adi-dar^aiii madha-
karSQiih kvai^ltftni {rSvadi-frRTaih parlbabhrftma (DEC.) he
wandered about, constantly teeing the young thoott of Q^e mango, and hear-
ing the humming of the beet. Bepeated fonna, like thoae in the tut «s-
uatile, are appiofed In the later langnage; they do not ocent earlier (bat
inatead of thetn the repeated ordinaiy gennd; 994 h).

CHAPTER XIV.

DERIVATIVE OE SECOKDAET CONJUGATION.
996. Sbcomdart oonj ligations are those in which a
whole system of forms, tike that abeady described as made
from the simple root, is made, with greater or less com-
pleteness, from a derivatiTe oonjugation-etem ; and is also

ioy Google

361 Piiwm. [— OM

usually ooonected with a oertaia definite modification of
the original radical ienae.

ft. We luTe Hen, Indeed, th«t Ui« tente-aratetnt ue *lio tot the moat
part made tnm dsrtiatlTs-steiDt; eed e*en that, In lome otiei, aoch stenu
■Mnme tke appeuuice and -ralae of looti, and aie made the baifa of a
completB ooojagatlonal gyitam. Nor ia there any dlatlnet dlvUfon-llna to
be dravn between tenta-cratenil end derlTBtlTs oonjngationa; tbe Utter tie
praent-aytteDU which have heen expanded into eonJngatloDi by the addition
of other tonne, and of parUolplea, InflnltlTei, and lo on. In the eaiUeat
language, tbelr forma ontalde ef the preaenl-ayatem ace still qnite raio,
hardly more than apotadlo; and eien Utei they are — with the exception
of one or two formatlona wUoh attain a comparaHie freqnenoy — maehleae
common then the correapondlng forma of primary eonjugatlon.

907. The secondary conjugations are: I. PaMive',
II. Intenme; III. Deaideiatire; IV. Causative; V. Denom-
inative.

a. The paatlie la olaited here ti a aeeondaiy oooJogatlon became of
Ita analogy with the othen In reapsot to tpeciflo valae, and tteedom of
formation, altbongb It doea not, like them, make ita foima outaide the
present eyatem ftoro Ita preaent-atem.

I. Passive.

SOB. The paBsiTe conjugation has been abeady in the
main described. Thus, we have seen that —

a. It has a special ptesent-syetem, the stem of whidi
is present only, and not made the basis of any of the le-
mainJDg forms: this stem is formed with the accented class-
sign IX r&,- and it lakes (with exceptions: 774) the middle
endings. This present-system is treated with the others,
abore, 768 ff.

b. There is a special passive 3d sing, of the aorist,
ending in ^ i: it is treated above, 842 ff.

o. In the remaining tenses, the middle forme are used
also in a passive sense.

d> Bnt the ptailve nae of middle forma la not common; It la oftoDeit
met with In the perfect The participle lo a great extent takea the place
of a paat paMlTo lenae, and the geiandlie that of a fatnie. On the other

D,j,i,...., Google

998—] XIV. Secondary Cohjuqation. 362

hand, In the oldeat Unguige (RV-)i middle fonna «f other pi«Miit-«;tMiBE
ue In a «OD«lder>ble nnmbei of caaei emplored with ptssiTo meuifDg.

«. AocordlDg to the gnmmariMkB, there majr be formed from Bome
verba, for ptMive nao, a apeoUl item for the urlit (nd the two foMue
syatema, colDctding in form with the peonlUr 3d aing. u)riat.

f. ThuB, from yM (loi. 3d alng. adiyl), beside AcUtBi. dia^,
dfttb». alao idlTlfl, dRyijr^i dfiyltJEhe. The permiwion to make this
double farautlan extend* to ell loot^ ending tn towoIs, and to Ersb, d^
and lum. No inch paaalTo form* ooonr in the older langnage, and not half-
a>doien are qnotablo ftom the later (we Hod adhjlyl^i and astblylfi Id
DKC, and anJIyltMa In KnT*].).

g. Aa to the alleged paialve inlleciloii of the pertphnede perfect, «ee
below, 1079.

h. Besides the participle Irom the piesent tense-stem
(771. 5j, the passive has a past participle in rT ta (062), or
^ DB (9B7), and future participles, oi gerimdiTes, of various
foimation (961 ff.), made directly from the root.

S99. As already pointed ont (28S aj, the laogu&ge, especinllr
later has a decided predilectioD for the pusive form of the eentence-
ThJB IB given In part by the use of finite passive forms, but oftener
by that of the passive participle and of the gerandive: the participle
being taken in part in a present sense, but more nsaally in a past
(whether indefinite or proximate past), and eometimeB with a copula
expressed, but mnch oftener without it; and the gemndive represent-
ing either a pure fatura or one with the sense of neoesaitf or duty
' added. A further example is: tatrU "ko ynvB brUuna^o dpyt*4*
taib dntvS k&mena pl^itA aaibjfttft: Bakliy& agre kadtitam: uklii
pnru^ "yaih g^hitvK mama mfttii^ aamlpam inetavra^ (Vet)
thtrt ihe tatc a young Brahman; at lighi of him $lu ftlt Me pang* of
Umt! tht laid to her frimdi "friend, gou rmut take and bring this man
to my mothtr^. In some styles of later Sanskrit, the prgvailfaig ex-
pression of past time is by means of the passive partioiple (thns, in
Vet., an extreme case, more than nine tenths).

a. Ai ill otber langntgee, a 3d aIng. puaive la treel; made from
iDtraDBltive aa well as tranaitive verba: thua, ih& "gamyat&m eome AsfiUr;
tvaya tatrftl 'va sthlraUtm do you ttondjtut there; oarvflir JUau
jUUyo '4^atftni (H.) Ut aU fiy up wifh the net.

II. Intensive.

1000. The intensive {sometimes also called frequent-
ative) is that one of the secondary conju^^ations whiefa is
least removed from the analogy of formations already

ioy Google

363 Ihtbnsite. [— lOOS

described. It is, like the piesent-system of the secocd con-
jugation-class (642 ff.), the inflection of a reduplicated stem,
but of one that is peculiar in having a strengthened redu-
plication. It is decidedly lew extended beyond the limits
of a present-system than any other of the derivative con-
jugations.

a. The intensive conjugation signifies the lepetition or
the intensification of the action expressed by the primary
coajngation of a root.

1001, According to the grammarians, the intensive
conjugation may be formed from nearly all the roots in the
language — the exceptions being roots of more than one
syllable, those conjugated only causatively (below, lOSe],
and in general those beginning with a vowel.

a. In fact, howBTaT, ioteDBiTss to the lat«i Uagutge are very ttn,
■0 tUB tti*t 11 li burd to tell pi«at)«lr what tbIhb ia to Im glveii t« the
iale( of tlia natlTC grammii relpectiDg them. Nor are the; at all commoa
aailier, eioapt foompiratlTely) In the RT., whtch containa about aix leTtntha
of tbe vbole nuinbei [lathei over a handled] ijDotable from Veda aod Btah-
mana and Sutra-teitti AV. haa leaa than half ai man; aa RT., and many
of them In RT. paaeagea ; from the later language aie qaotable about twenty
of theae, abont forty mote, bat toT the moat part oulf Id i

b. Hence, In the deicilption to be gl*eii beloir, the aotnal aapeet of
the formation, aa exhibited in the older langaage, will be had primaiUy and
eipeciilly In view; and tbe eiamplea will be of forma fouDd there in nee.

1002. The strong intensive reduplication is made in
three different ways:

I. a> The redapIiOBtiiig syllable is, as elsewhere, composed of a
single ooDsoDsnt with rollowing vowel, and, ao far ae the consonant
is concerned, follows the miss for present and perfect redaplfcaljoD
(B90); bat tbe vowel is a heavy one, radical a and r (<>r ar) being
radaplicated with t, an i-vowel by e, and an a-vowel b; o.

Eiamplea are: vkvad, babadta, qa^vas, rSrandli; dftdf, dJblbr;
e«kit, tetlj, neni, vevU; qofno, popratb, oofkn, joha.

II. b. The reduplioatiog syllable has a final coDgonant, taken
^m the end of the toot With an exception oc two, tbiB coDsonant
is either t (or its substitute 1] or a nsaaL

ioy Google

lOOS— ] XIV. SeOONDART CONJUQATIOH. 364

Extkmplei are: ooToar, oaloal, suvp, rnarmrJ. Jnrhnt oaOkrun,
Jft&ghui, t»ABtui« dftadaq (ydaAq or daf), Jftl^abli (vJambli ar Jatth).
tamtu ()/(«&■ or taa), niMiiiiun (_ynam), yubyun (yyam). The (mmI
li >MiiDlUi«d to the inlttkl ooDionini,

d. IrregnlaT fDimatlons of thli slua aie: irith > final othei than r
01 n Id the itdnpIlcattoD, badbndb; with a Anal naaal in the redopll-
eatton which ti not found in the loet, Jafigab (RV.), jafijap (QB.; and
jaflgOyat PB, ii pethapa frem yga; the latei langaage haa fnittei
dandah); with an aDamaloiu initial contooant In redaplt cation, jarbhni
from i^bbor (compare the Tedlo peifeot Jabllira fiom ClibTt 789 b),
galgal from ygtd ; with lariou tteatment of an ^ or KT'element, dardar
and dardir, oarkar and oarklr, tartar aod tartar, oaroar and ear>
our, Jargnr and Jalgol

a. The roota 1 and f are the oDljr onai with Towel initial ronning an
inteoiiTe item: i makes ijB^ (t PU., ODoa); f m»kea the iTTegalar alar
or alf. A« to the ttem ^a, see below, 1031 b.

III. f. The reduplication is dissyllabic, an i-TOwel being added
after a float oouBonant of the ledaplicating syllable. This 1-TOwel ii
in the older langnago short before a doable consOQant, and long be-
fore a single.

Examples are: ganigam (bnt g&nlgmatam), Tarivft, TanJvUi,
oanifkad, aanifTau; navlna, daridTut (aDd tbe ptitidplea dividhvat
bat ti-vltnat). A single exception as to the qnantltr of the 1 la d«Tl>
db&va.

g. This method of lednpll cation Is followed in the older langaafs
by abont thirty roots. Thus, of roots haTing final or penultimate n (once
m), and n in the rednpllcating syllable, pan, pban, san, avan, haa;
gam; krand. qoand, akand, syand; ot roots having final or medial f,
and r In the tednpUcating syllable, kf tnuita, tf, bh^i VT> mfj, mni
V|j, Tft, Bfp; alio mine (malimlno); — fnrlher, of looti scsnming ia
the reduplioation a n not foond In the root, only vah (QB.: tke gram-
marians allow also kaa, pat, pad; and panlpad Is qnotable later; and A{$.
has oanlkbadat, for whlek TE reads kJmikbunat) ; floaUy, of now
haling u or Q aa radical Towel, with kv before the l-vovel, to, dhfii
au. dTUt.

h. In this class, the general rales as to the farm of the redapUeatipg
eoniontnt (B90) are Tiolated In the case of ghanlghan and bbarSbbf.
and ot ganigam, karlkf (bnt the regular oarlkr also occnra), kaai-
krand, and kaniipcaad (bnt also oanlqkand occurs) j tlsc In tntfiiHinn-

i. The reierslon to more original guttural form after the rednplieallm
In oekit, and Ja&ghan and ghanlghan, Is In accordance with what takea
plue eliewbere (31 e, 1).

ioy Google

365 Intensive. [—1004

1008. The Bame root Ib allowed to form ita inteiiaiTfl stem Id
more than one way.

Thns, in the oldei lan^oaga, iidf aod dardf; d&dlir «nd dardbr;
oMal and oarottr (and ottrour); tartar (and tartar) ud torltr;
JafigNii and gtmlgam; Ja^hns and ghut^han; pamphan >nd
panlphan; marmrJ and marlmiij; nuurmrg and maHmrgi Tarvrt
■Dd TarlTTti Jarbhf and bbarfl>hT; dodhQ and davldhn; nonn >nd
navlnu; b&badh and badbadh.

1004. The model of normal inteneire infleotion ia the
piesent-system of the leduplioating ooajugation-class (642 If.} ;
and this ie indeed to a consideiable extent followed, in
lespect to endings, stiengtheniag of stem, and accent. But
deviations from the model are not taie ; and the foims aie
in general of too infrequent occurrence to allow of satis-
factory claasifioation and explanation.

a. The most marked irregularity is the frequent insertfon of an
I between the stem and ending. According to the grammarians, this
IB allowed in all the strong forma l>efore an ending beginning with
a consonant; and before the I a final vowel has ffu^-strengthetiiDg,
but a medial one remans unchanged.

Freaentr^lystem.

1005. We will take np the parts of the preseat-syatem in their
order, giving first what is recognized as regnlar in the later language,
and then showing bow the formation appears In the earlier t«xts. As
most grammarians do not allow a middle inflection, and middle foims
are few even In the Veda, no attempt will be made to set np a par-
adigm for the middle voice.

1006. As example of inflection may be taken the root
icl^ vid know, of which the intensive stem is ^f^i vevid,
or, in strong forms, ^1^ vived.

a. Neither from thit nor ^m any oltier root are more than a few scat-
tering rormi Bctaally quotable.

1. Present IndioatiTe.

T&vedmi, T^vl^ml vevldv&a vevidm&i

ioy Google

1006—] XIV.- Sbcondarv Cohjuqation. 366

T^Tetai. T^Tidlfl veiritth^ vevlttU

i ^cnrT, ciH<;iif? eirclflH^ =lT*l<ia

vbvatti, r^Tidfti vevlttia v^vldati

b. From )^ha, the singulai foims with auxili&iy Towel
would be sfi'^efifM i6hftTlml, Mt<^'^fl| jShnvl^i, sn^cj)^
j6tiaTlti.

1007. a. The fatmt found to the alder Unguiga *giee iiu-generil
witb tbe pukdigm. Kxanplai in: l>t tiag., tsKXkarmi, Teraqmli 2d
■lug., ftlw^. d&rdwfi; 3d ling., Uartl, dfidhartl, vevvO, ii«nekti,
jBfighantl, Unlkraatti, ganlgaihtl ; 3d da., jKrbhft&a; let pi., nonu-
maM; 2d pi., SsgiaOM; 3d pi., dStUmU. n&nadatl, bharibhraU.
v&rvrtatl, d^Tldyutatl, n^nijati, aad, IrregnlBily, v«vlfanti; uid, vfib
the kuiilUry yowbI, johavlini, oSka^Imli oika^IU, nonavitl, darda-
Iltl, jarbhnritl. No item wttli dlMjUabio raduplleitloa UkM th« >uU-
Ut; 1 In mj of ite foimi.

b. A alnfle dD*l fonn with I tnd atrong •tem oeean: nunelr, ta^
taHthaa.

o. The middle forniB found to oocor >Te: Itt dug., J&fnrre, nen^e;
8d ling., nenlkM, aararto; uid, with ImgnUr Mceat, MtUcta, AMi^;
with InegnUr loei of flnal ndiol nuil, n&imatei with ending e liutMd
of ta, ciklt«, JiAgalie, j6ffiivo, yoyaT«, btbadhe, and (with iiregaUt
acMut) badbadbd; 3d da., ■arsr&tei 3d pi., d6dlqata.

2. Fresent SubjunotlTe.

1006. a. Subjoncttve focms with primarj andinga am extremely me:
there hsTe been noticed oiil; Ja&gh&iiSnl, JftgarBsl (AV.); and. Id tbe
middle, tantaa&Ite (3d da.).

b. ForcriB with aecoDdary eodingi are more fKqneot; that, 3d (ing.,
Ja&gbanas, Jalgolaa; 3d ting., jfigarat, oikltat, bobhavat, oArknat,
J&flghauat, b&rbrhat, minnrJat, mkrmj^at, parpbarat, dardirat,
oani^adat, davidyutat, Banl^va^t; lat dn., JafigbaniiTa; lat pL,
oarkirama, vavldftma; 3d pi., pipatan, 96gaoan, oarklraa; and,
wllh double mode^ign, oakaqSn (AY.). Of the middle are lonnd only
3d penona plural : tfaua, JiSghaoanta, Jarbrfanta, marmrJanta, aona-
vanta, f o^oanta.

3. Present Optative.
lOOS. This mode would show the unstrengthened Btem,
with the usual eudiags (B66), accented. Thus:

ioy Google

I iM^'dW clicf^M ^ftyiH

TOVldyim vevidySva Tsvldyama

a. The opUdva U rapiesenled b; odI; an ezampla oi t«o tn Ihe older
lufDif": tlini, actlTs, vavify&t (AV.), Jftgryaa (KB.), Jiffrly&t (AB.),
JigfTiiM (VS. HS.; botJSerlyimaTS.); RV. huanly oftkanyftt (pft.?);
middle, nsnljlta (K.).

4. Present Imperative.
1010. The regular forms of the impeiative, including
the usual subjunctive first persons, would be as follows:

v6vid&al

^&<N

T6vidtana

vovittAm

vevittk

T^Tsttn, v^Tidltu vevitt^

v6Tidfttu

Oldei imperitlTe

(oTma are les«

ire than opb

1011. a. Oldei imperatlTe (oTma are les« rare than opttUve. The
DtbC peiGonB hare been given above (JaAghiui&Di, the only aecented ex-
ample, daei not conMpond with the model, but la Id eonroimlty with the
BnbjFincdie of the reduplicating p[e«ent)i the propel Imperativea are: 2d
■Ing., dldrbi, dardi-lii, oarkrdlii, J&sr'i*' nenigdhi, rAranddtal ; the
ending Ut li fonnd in oarkTtftt and jKRrtflt; and the Utt«r [sb waa
pointed oat abore, 671b) ia nied In AV. u Ant person aiag.; barbrlli
ahowa tn ebewhere nnpuallded lou of h before the ending M; 3d alng.,
d&dliartu, TBTe^tn, dordttrtn, murmaxttn; 2d do., JfigftSiin; 3d do.,
Jitgrtftm; 2d pi., JigflA; oafiknunata (RT., once) hia an anomaloua
QDion'VOwel. In the middle Toice la found only nenlk^va ((B.).

b. Of imparitlve tormi with aaxiliary i, KV. hu none; AV. baa
vftvaditu and Jofaavitn, and aoch are eometimea foond In theBrihmanaa;
AV. haa alio, againat rule, taAatanltai and Jafigbamht; TS. haa oftka^Ibi.

5. Present Fartloiple.

1012. The intensive partioiples, both active and middle,
are comparatively common in the older language. They are
formed and inflected like those of the reduplicating present,
and have the accent on the reduplicating syllable.

uiaii.zecy Google

lOlS— -] Xiy> Secondary Cohjooatiom. 368

EiuDplcBin: icUve, oakftqftt, ninadat, oikitst, m6in;»t, fd^n-
cftt, rAmvat. dardrat, in&rmfjKt, J&aghanat, n&iuiamat. p4nl-
phBnat, Utolkradat, d&vtdrutat; — middle, bj^adta&na, mteorijia.
odkltftna, 76yav(Uia, tdmoSuA, Jirbhnrt^m, s&rsrfiijA, Ja&JabUiu.
n&nnam&na, djindaflliia. No middle puttdple ihowi tbe dlJtrUsUi
ladapllutloD.

1018. a. On ■ceonnt of theli accent, rSrahK^A, rMnk^M^k, ud
jahff Ki^^ (betide JirhrfA^*) *re probtblf to be regttded u poifect puti-
ciplea, ■Uhcmgb no othei perfect tonni with heaiy ledapllcaUoD from A*
B«me rooti ocoot. Tbe iQfeienM Is, bo«e*er, rondeied nBOeittln by tbe
unmistikibljr intensiTe badbadhlnA and menufibik (beilde minnpjina).
Ai to qdqaoSiia etr,, aee 806 a.

b. Tbe RT. bu onoe JifiolmataB, gen. sing., with Toot-Towel cut
oat; k&nlkrat ippeui to be med oare tat ktnikradati l( oSk&t ii to
be Nterted to f^S (Oiuamann), )t la the only example of an iDtentiw
(nm a root Id ft, and Ita tcoent it aDomalooi. JCarmrfantas (AB.) Ii
peibipa a tain reading; but fonna with the nual Inegnlsrly retained are
found repeatedly In tbe eplca aad later: tbtu, lalUian, dadlpyanOm
(HBh.). jiJvaUnt (HBh. R,), Barlarp^ntiBu (BhP.), riratanU (R-)

6. Imperfect.
1014. The imperfect is legulaily inflected as follows:

I. d. p.

Arevidam ivavldTa ivevldma

ivevet, iravldls &Tevittaiii ivavltta

3 S^^rJ. 5Rf^^^^ *fif=(HIH^ «l^i"H^

itTevet, ^TSTldlt &vevlttfim &Tevldiu

101B> The Imperfect fonna foond In tbe earlier texti ue aot nnmec
ons. They are, looludlng thoae from which tbe angment la omitted, a*
follows: In actWe, lat alng., aoSkaqam, dadlgam; 2d atng., ^Ig^,
adardar, d&rdar; 3d slog., adardar, adardbar, avarlTar, dardar,
k^lqkan, diividjrotin&vlaot; "id dn., odardfiam; lat pi., marmpjmt;
3d pL, anannamne, adardinu, a«arknu>> ^ohavna, anonawaa;
■nd, wttb •nxlllirr I, In 3d ilag., avftV»Mt, ivftTO^Itt irSTSlit,
iyoyavlt, iroravlt, i^ohaTlt; and, frreguluty, Id 3d dn., avftwafitftm.
The middle forma are eitremely few: namely, 3d ling., idedlffa, inaa-
nata (with loia of the final radlotl in ■ weak form of root)) 3d pL
marmpjata, and avftTB^aiLta (Khkh, If It belonga bore, ibowi a trantfti
to ail a-atem).

ioy Google

369 IMTENSIVE. [—1017

loie. Derivative Middle Inflection. Ftom every
intensive stem, as above described, may be formed in the
piesent-system a further derivative conjugation ivfaich is
formally identical with a passive, being made by the accented
sign U y&, along with middle endings only. It has not,
however, a passive value, but is in meaning and use in-
distinguishable £iom the simpler conjugation.

a. A final vowel before this ya is treated u before the paasive-
sign ya (770).

b. The inflectlOD is precisely like that of any other stem ending
in a in the middle voice: thus, from yxaji, intenefve stem marmfj.
Is m»de tbe present iDdicative mannrJy^, iiiarm|'jy4Be, marmrJy&te,
etc-; optative marmriy^ya, mann^jyittaia, marmijy^ta, etc.; im-
perative marmfjy&Bva, marmfjy&tam, etc.; participle maTm{'Jy&-
m&nai imperfect &marmfjye> imarmTJyathOB, Amarmfjyata, etc.
BobjuDctive formB do not occur.

o. Id a very raw aportdlc cues, thete y&-foTniB are glien a pusWe
v*lne: thua, jafighanyamfea In MdD.; bambhramyate, dadtunfi-
yam&na, peplyamftna in tie later linguBi;e. And active participles
(CSS a) ats not anknown : thae, detUpyanUm (UBh.), dodhOyant
(MBh. BhP,}.

1017. This kind of intensive inflection is more common
than the other in the later language; in the earlier, it is
comparatively rare.

a. In RT., y^foims are made from right roota, Bve of which have
alao fatms of the glmplei conjugation; the AT. addi oae mote; the other
earlier texts (ao fai aa obaerved) aboat twenty more, and halt of them have
likewise form* of the simpler conjugaiion. Thaa: from ym^U marmij-
jr&te etc, and marlm^Jyeta; from ytj[, tartnryante; from yvtx,
oaroury&mil^a; from yu, neniy^ran, etc.; from yvi, veviyate; ftom
yrih, rerihy^te etc.; ^m vii, Tevijy4te; fiom v'aku, co^kOyise eic.j
from ydiif, dedigyate; from ykit}, cSka^y^ts etc.; from yvad,
. vfivady&mSaa ; from ^nom, nannamyadhvam; from f'vah, vaniv&h'
y^ta etc. (wlih lengthened loot-Towel, elsewhere anknown); frum flrand.
kanlkradyimSna; from yvjt, varlvarty&maaa (9^'' should he
▼arivrty-); fiom yiaxq, amarlmr9yanta (9B. ? the text reads amarimrt-
■yanta); from i^ynp, yoyupy&nte etc.) from y^nd, anonadyauta;
ftom yvli, avevllyaata; from y'Jabh, JaiUabliy&ta etc.; ftom yjap,
Jaiyapy4mllna ; and so on.

WhitBST, Onnmar. 3. >d. 34

ioy Google

1018 — ] XIV. Secondakt Cokjuqation. 370

Perfect.

1018. The giannDariana aie at vanance as to whether
a peifect may be fonned directly &0111 the intensive stem,
01 whethei only a peiiphtasUo perfect (belov, 1070 ff.) ii
to be admitted.

K. Ho eximple of ui lotensive periphruUc peif«et hu larwhcni com*
to light (except h'DDi Jigf : 1020 a)- A few anmiitaksbla perfect tonnt us
mide from the inlensiTely ledupliMtAd root in RV. : namely, daTldbin
and ndnKTa, 3d »iag,, and nonaToa, Sd pi.; and thve oecni futiicr
dodrftva (IS.), yoyKva and leUya (HS.), and lel&ya (? ^.), ta wed
In the aenie of pieaents. To them ma; be added JKgara l«t ling, and
Jfigira 3d sing.: bat as to tbeie, see below, lOSOa.

Aoriat, Future, eto.

1019. Ab to the remaining parts of a full verbal con-
jugation, also, the grammarians are not agreed [oocuirencee
of such forma, apparently, being too rare to afford even
them any basis for rules); in general, it is allowed to treat
the intensive stem further as a root in filling up the scheme
of forms, using always the auxiliary vowel ^ i where it is
ever used in the simple conjugation.

a. ThuB, from v'vid, iDtensive stem wvid, would be made the
aoriat avevidiqam with precative v»vidyieam, the fntnres vavld-
Ifyiml and vevldltiami. the participles vevidita, vevidiUvya, etc,
the ioGnitive vevldltuin, and the gerunds vevlditvA and •vevldya.
And, where the intensive conjugation is the derivative middle one,
the aorist and futares would take the corresponding middle form.

b. Of all thU, in the iDcient Uagnaga, theie Is baldly a trace, Ibe
RV. has o^k^e, 3d sing, mid., of a fotmatlon like hl^ and StUfi
(8Q4 d), and Ibe geiundlTes vltantasayjra, and marmrJeDya and vKv^-
dhdnya; and (B. has th* participle vanlvahit^ and the Inflnitlie d^dlyl-
tav&{, As to j5gari;y&nt and J&garitA, see the next paiagispb.

1020. There are systems of inflection of certain roots, the in-
tenaive character of which is questioned or questionable- Thtis:

a. The root gf (or gar) woAe has from the fltit no present-system
gsTo one with tntenslve rednpUoatiou ; and its intensive stem, jigf, begiss
esrty to aisnme the Talue of a toot, and totm a completer conjugation;
while by the grammadans this stem is reckoned as If simple and belong-
ing to the loot-olasB, and ie inflected throughont aocordlngly. Those of
Its forms which occur In the older language have bees given along with

D,a,i,zec.,Gooylc

371 Intensive. [—1024

tbe othec tntendTW *bo*e. Thej m, for the preisnt-tTStAin, the suae
with those uknoifledged a> lefuIaT Utei. The older perfect is like the
othei intenelTe perfects found in RT.: nemely, Jigara eto., vltb the
partldple jBg^vita ; and a ftatuie Jfigari97&-, » piulre putlclple JI[gaTlt4,
•nd > gemndiTo Jig&ritavyk, ne met with is the Biibmiisai. The old aorlst
(RT.) iB the luakl tedaplkBted OTBO-called ceiuetlTe uiist: thnn, ^igar. The
pammulMi* gfTs it la ihe UteT Ungnege a peifect viih additional redapU-
calioD, JEOftSifft etc., in i§-aorlst, ^j&garlfam, with pieeiUveJfigaryftsani,
and everything etge that ie Deeded to make Dp a complete conjugation.
The perf. JaJBgSra ia quotable from the eploe and litet, ag aUo the peti-
phraatlc Jagar&m iaa. And MBh. hai the mntilated Jfigpnl, and alio
a-torma, as JSgaratl and JakgramSj^.

lOSl. a. The stem lr^)ya (active only) rtgulaft, from which a
nnmher of forma are made in RV., has been Tisvred aa an Intenaive from
yr^ 0^ TJ' It lacks, however, any analogy with the intenaive tormatloa.
Tbe same is true of iradli propitiate (only iradhanta and ir&(Ui;&i,
■ppuently for iradhadhy&l).

b. Tbe middle item iya, not Intreqaent In tbe oldest language, 1<
often called an Intenaive of yi go, but wlthoat any propriety, as it has no
analogy of form whatever with an intensive. Tbe isolated lat pi. Imahe,
common in RY., Is of queatlonable character,

1029. The root U totter, ifitb constant intensive reduplication, Uli,
Is qulto irregnlai in inlleotion and accent: thua, piea., lelayati and lelll-
yate, pples lelfty&ntl and lel&yatas (gen. aiag.) and lelSyamSiia, Impf.
alelftyat and alelet and aleUyata, perf. Ul&ya and lel&ya (?).

1029. Tbe RV. anomalous form dart (or dard), 2d and 3d aing.
from |/df or dar, Is doobtfally referred to the intenaive, aa if ahbrevlated
from dardar. KV. baa once avariVUB (or -Tur) where the aenae reqaire*
a fonn from V'v|t, aa aTariTftaa. The form rarft^&tft (RV., once] seema

10B4. A marked intensive or frequentative meaning is not always
easily to be traoed in the forms classed as intensive ; and in some
of them it is qnite effaced- Thns, the roots oit, nij, vif use their
intensive preBent-aystem as If it were an ordinary conjugation-class;
nor is it otherwiBe nitli g^ J&gi'). Tbe grammarians reckon the
inflection of nlj and vlf as belonging to the reduplicating preaent-
system, with irregularly strengthened reduplication; and they treat in
the same way vio and tU; JSgr, as we have seen, they accoant a
simple root.

a. Also darldrS, intenaive or [/dri run, ia made by the grammarians
• simple root, and furnished with a complete set of conjngatlonal forma:
aa dadarldrftu; adaridrfislt, etc. etc. It does not occut in tbe older
langasge (duIbss diridrat TS., for which VS. HS. read dAridra). The
so-called tool vevi flutter it a pure tnteniive.

24*

D,j,i,....,^ioogle

1085—] XIV. SeOOMDARY CONJTIOATIOH. 372

lOSB. It it tillowed hj the gnmmtriuii to make from tbe futeDdTs
Item also ». pitalve, deaideraltve, cauMIive, and ao on : tbiu, from Tttrld,
ft»a. TBTidyd; deild. vdvidlQ&mi; ciui. vevid&yilmi; desid. of caoaa-
tin, T^vid&yiffimi. Bnt lucb foimatlong ars ezceaaiTelr ran; qnotable
are rulTarj&yuitl AT., Jfigar&ya&t TB.. •!«.; d&dliftrayftti JB.,
dandafayitrft DKC.

III. Desiderative.

1026. By the desiderative ooDJugation is signified a de-
siie for the action oi condition denoted by the simple toot:
thus, (MsHfn pibftmi / clrm&, desid. fl|M(HliH pip&a&ml / wish
to drink; sft^Tftr jiTSml / live, desid. ftsftftinftl jijivi^Bini
I desire to live. Such a conjugation is allowed to be formed
fiom any simple root in the language, and also fiom any
causative stem.

a. Tbe desiderative conjagation, although Its forms outside the
pre Bent-system are extremely rare in tbe oldest language, is earlier
and more fully expanded into a whole verbal ByBt«ni thau the ioteo-
sive. Its formB are also of increasing frequency: much fewer than
the inteoBiveB in RV., more numerooB in the Brabmanae and later;
not one third of the whole number of roots (about a hundred) noted
as having a deaidetaclve conjugation in Veda and Brahmapa have
such in RV.

1027. The desiderative stem is formed from the simple
loot by the addition of two characteristics: 1. a reduplication,
which always has the accent ; 2. an appended Tl b& — which,
however (like the tense-signs of aorist and future], sometimes
takes before it the auxiliary vowel S i, becoming ^ i^s.

a. A few inaUnces In tbe concluding part of f B. in which the acc«n(
i( othetHise laid — thns, tifttiaset, yiyfis^tam, vividi^&atl, ips4at«a
— must p 10 b ably be regarded as eiToii.

102S. The root in general remains unchanged ; but with
the following exceptions:

a. A final 1 or a is lengthened before aa: thus, oik^fa, ciklfa,
Jigifa; fuqra^a, JnliDfa, cuk^ufa.

b, A final X becomes ir or ur before sa: thus, olklr^a, titSrqa
(also irregularly tQtOr^a RV.), didliirfa, sisirfa, tiBtirfa (also tn-
BtOrqaj, JUiIr^a; bnbhfir^a, mumQr^ (the only examples qaotable}.

itizecy Google

373 Dbbidbrative. [—1020

0. Before Ifft, ft final i- or u- or r-vowel necessarily, and a
penultimate i or u or f optionally, have the gnna-strengthenlng:; no
«xampleB are qnotable from the older texts; later occur gl9ayifa,
flfarifia; elkarti^a, nliiartlfa, mimardifa, vivar^i^R, fuqobhl^;
but Turudif a.

More special exceptions are:

d> A few roots In & weaken tbig vowel to i or eien 1 : thus, Jigifa
trom yei go; pipifa (beside plpOaa) from ^pS drink, jUiifa (AY.)
from yhft remove QU^ite: 604); dldbi^a (bet[de dhitsa) from yAhR.

«. A few tooM In an or am lengthen the vowel : thus, jig&Asa (beside
Jigamlfa) from j/gam; JlgbUsa from yhaxii mun&bBa from f/man;
and tltabaa trom ytva.

r. Reversion to gnttuial foin of in Initial aftec the reduplication is
Men in oikl^a from yd, oikitaa fiom ^cit, jlgi^a from yji, Jlgh&flsa
item ylXKO; and J^lli is said to make Jigblfa (no Dccnnence).

g. The lOots van and aan make tIvSbb and ai^&aa, from the root-
fotms Y& and Bi.

h. The root jiT forms Jajyu^a (9B.: JtJiTi^a, VS.); »nd Hie other
roots in Iv (760) ire leqalred to make the same change before ga, and to
■lave gu^a before l|a: thus, sosyafa oi BiBevi^ from >^bIt. Bvap
forma Bu;aps&. DhUrr forms dudhOr^a.

1, Initial B is nsnallj left unchanged to if after the redapliution
when the desiderative sign has ^ (184e): thus, aiBflLiikqa (gB.: ^'BaSJ),
and BUBTuqa and alBOniQa, acoording to the grammarians; but tU^tOqa
1* met with.

J. Further may be meDtloned as prescribed by the grammarlanB:
nina&kfa (oi nlnafifa) from ynBiq be loit; mlma&k^a from V'maJJ
(occurs in mimaikkfn) ; mim&rjtqa (or mimj-kf a) from v'mf],

1028. Tbe consonant of the reduplication follows the
general lules (880] ; the vowel is ^ i if the root has an a-
vowel, or H X, or an i-vowel; it ia 3 u if the loot ha^ an
u-vowel. But:

a. A few roots have a long TOwel in the redapllcating syllable: thna,
blbhataafrom ytiadhorbftdb; mim&fisa from )^man; andtatur;a(RV.)
from |/taT; dadblfu (AV.) and dadaflkf u (C.) are probably false forme.

b. From yaq is made (^B.) aglqtfa, and from )/edb (J3.)
edldhi^a (with a mode of reduplication like that followed aometimei in
the reduplicating aoiitt: 862). In the older language, these aro the only
roots with Initial vowet which form a desideratl>e stem, eieept ftp and
fdb, which have abbreviated stems : see the next paragraph. In the later
language occur foitbor efiqlqa (|^lf ««tA) and loikglqa (^Ik;); aud the
giammarians add others, as arjlhl^a (V'arh), undidi^a (Viind), ardi-
dhlfa (Vrdb).

ioy Google

1039—] XIV. Secondaky Cohjugation. 374

0. BV. has the items fnak^a and fyak^a, legtided as dMicloittiTu
rrom v'v'aa; attain snd y^, with matll&ted ledupUuUon.

1030. A numbet of TOOU, including some of very com-
mon use, form an abbreviated stem apparently by a con-
traction of leduplication and root together into one syllable:
thus, ^ Ipsa from yWi 5p ; ^rH ditsa from y^ dB.

a. Snch abbieTlated stems are rooad in the oldet Unguige ss fnlloTi :
dbitaa (besido dldtiifa) trom ydbS,; ditaa (beside did&sa) from f'di;
dipsa (dldpBB JB.) from i/dabh; gib^a fiom y<;ah; uk^a from yaaii:
these lie foand la RV.j in AY. ire added ipsa from y&p (RV. baa apaa
oDce), and irtsa from yjdh; the othti texts rnmlsh lipaa (^B.) or
llpsa (TB.) from yi&bh, rlpsa (QB.) from yrabb, pitaa ((^B.) from
ypad, and dhlfe^a (^B.] fcam f'dah (not ydlh, sin«a no toots with 1 as
medlU Tovel show the contracted form). In the later laDguage are farther
fonnd pltsa from f/pat also, Jilipsa from the cansatlTe qnasl-root jfiap
(below, 1042 J), aod the anomalom mltsa from ymK mtaiure (allowed
also from toot* ml and ml) | and the grammBrians give ritsa from yvBdb.
Also mokfa la (lety qneationably) sieved as a desideratiTe stem from
ymuc.

108X. The use of the auxiliary vowel ^ i is quite rare
in the early language, but more common later; and it is
allowed or prescribed by the grammajians in many stems
which have not been found in actual use.

a. It is declared to follow in general, thoogh not without ex-
ceptions, neoeBsary or optional, the analogy of tbe fntnres (934,
943 a|.

b. No eiample of tbe a»e of i Is found In RV., and onlj one each in
AV, (pipatli^a), TS. (jljivi^), and TS. (Jlgamlfa). The other ezamplea
noted in the earl; texts are a^ifli^. oltramlyt, Jlgratalqa (with i fot i,
ai elsewhere in this root), oloarl^, edidhi^, jUanl|a, didlkqi^n,
bibBdbl^ia, rumoifa, vivadlqa, vivldifa, qigOBifa, tl^figlilqa, jllil&-
alfa: most of them are foaiid only In ^R. Sterna alio withoot the aniil-
lary vowel are made from roots gam, grab, car, J!v, pat, bSdh, vld.

1082. Inflection: Present-System. The desider-
ative stem is conjugated in the present-system with per-
fect regularity, like other o-stems (733 aj, in both voices, in
all the modes (including, in the older language, the sub-
junctive), and with participles and imperfect. It will be
sufficient to give here the first persons only. We may take

ioy Google

375 Debidbratite. [— 10S8

u active model ^ ipsa seek to obtain, from yWJ Sp ohtain\
as middle, frlldH titikfa endure, from yfrTsI tij be sharp (see
below, 1040).

1. Preaent Indicative.

mHts. mlddte.

i. d. p. a. d. d.

tpflSmi ipsSTfts ipBlmaa titLk^e tItlk|ftTaIie t{tlk;&mahe
etc etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.

3. Present Subjunotlve.

1 ^:f\t^ \mi4 ^t-HIH fHid^l iniHidlsi^ fniddlM^
fpsBni IpB&va Jpaftma tftlkq&l tltlk^STahai tftik^amaliai
etc. etc, etc. etc- ete. etc.

3. Present Optative.

ipseyun ipaeva ipsema titibfeya tftLk^etrahi titikijemahi
•te. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.

4. Present Imperative.

a |cH ^CflfTT ^cnfT frjlaiHW iflfrl^lH^ frT^<^a^
ipsa ipeatam ipsata tftlk^aava tltikqethim t(tlk;adhTam

ete. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.

5. Present Participle.

^^Hrl ipsant (f. ^(44Tn JpsanH) Idfrli^HIUl titlkfsma^a

6. Imperfect.

'"^"^^ "^^R \'MW 5%f?l% MfniVldHi^ qfrrfHcinrf^
&[psun ilpsftva K[pBKma atlUk^e Atltik^ftTahl Atttik^ftmaht

a. There ue almott no iiregnkiltlea of inflection to be lepoited tiom
the older langiuge. No lit pi. In masi, or 2d pi. In thana or tana, i*
met with; ot the ImpT. in tftt, only Ipaatftt. The quotable rabjuaetlio
feimi ue Ihoie in sjtnl, sSt and sat, a&n, and santa. KBU. haa JtJtLfialta
(ef. 7S8b). Bat the fem. pple sifBaatf (Initead of SlifBoantT] eccDn
once or twice in the elder tetta; and RT. hia didhlfS^a.

b. In the eplcj and later are found ipotadlo formi of the non-a-

ioy Google

loss— J xrv. Sboondaby Conjcoation. 376

coDjagttlira; thus, gisyk^mas (BhP,), tltikfinalis ind bnbhfifate 3d
pi. (HBh.); *ad tbe fern, putlnlplea lipaatj uid oil^ni^tj [MBh. : tgUnat
440 b). The anomklans jlghftAaifit ocean kIbo in MBh. tnd Vm.

1038. a. Desideratire fomiB ontaide the preaent-ByBtem &ie
extremely rare in the oldest language. The BY. has only perfect
forme from a stem mioilkf — thui, mlmik^tbos, mlmikf&tas,
mlTnllcjfia; mimlkfe, mimlkfire — along vich the preBent fomu
mlmlk'^fttl, mlmlkf a etc., mlmihyint (ppte] : they show tbat wiirw<fc^
or mik; has taken on the character of an independent root la AV.
are foond two aorist forms, irtaia and oolbltalB, and a participle or two
^m mlmfiAaa (see below, 1037a, lOSBa} — all of them from atena
which have lost their distinct desiderative meaning, and come to bear
an independent valae. The forms noted from the other earlier teiU
will be given in full below.

b. Id the later language, a complete Bystem of verbal
foims is allowed to be made Id the deeideiative conjugation,
the desiderative stem, less its final vowel, being treated aa
a root Thus:

1084. Perfect. The desiderative perfect is the peri-
phiastic (1070 ff.}.

a. Thus, ipalib oakSra etc.; titik^ftm oakre etc. Sach foraiB
are made in ^B. from v'V'kram, dhurv, b&db, mb; and in ChU.
firom maa.

b. Apparant perfect formg of tbe oidlnuy kind made from mtmiln
in BV. haie been noticed In the preceding paragraph. And A6. (vtU. 21. 10)
haa once didiaitba thou haii detired to gtee.

10S5. Aorist. Tbe aoiist is of the i^-form : thiu
^iuiqq^ftipBi^Bm, l^iratdfsr Atitikfipi.

a. The AV. has aoikltsis, and IrtalB (logmeDtlesa, with in& pro-
hibitive: 678]. TB. hu Upsltj ^B. airtait, aolkiTfis and aJIghSAaie,
and amIm&fisiqitbiB; KB. Jijfi&slfi; JUB. Upalfma; and AA. adblt-
■Ifam. No eiamplaa have been found in the later langcage.

b. A preoatlTe is alio aliased — thot, IpeyasaiD, titik^lftya; bot it

1036. Futures. The futures ate made with the auxil-
iary vowel 5 I: thus, ^iUiVllfH IpsifySmi and ^fUlHltVfl
IpBltiami; (dfrfldsS tMl^i^ji> and raidRlHI^ titik^it&he.

a. The QB. hae titikqi^yate and dldrkfltiraa. Sach foims as
JiJfiioy&inaB (MBh.), didbak^yKmi (B.), and tnlmlAByant (OOS.) are
donbtleii preaentB, with -ays- blanderingly for -an-.

ioy Google

10S7. Veiba.1 Nouna and Adjectives. These too
ate made with the auxiliary vowel ^ i, ia all cases wheie
that rowel is evei takeo.

a. Id the older Ungnage b*ie be>D noted: p&rtinlple In ta, mltnSfl-
Bit& (AT., OB.), Jljyaflta (AB.), qnijriiflU uid cUukfit4 (9B.)i —
gernndiTe in tavya, UpBitavya (AB.), didhyfiBitavy^ (fB,); in ya,
Jtjfilayk (9B.)i — geiand in tra, mimAAaitrB (K.).

1088. Of other decli'itble atema dariied from the desideTitive stem,
by tai the most comiiion are the adjeottve In u — e. g. titUc^U, dipslk,
bibttatsA, alffian (RV. once did^kfu) — and the abatiact nonn In ft —
e. g. ipsft, bibhatai, mlmSAs^, ^ufrfi^S — both of which are made
«ltb incieaslng tieedom ^om an eaily epoch of the langnige: especially the
former, which hat the value and coiiBtrnetlon (S71 a) of a ptesant pSrtl-
elple. A few adjeetlvea la anya (having a gaiaodlve character: 96Sb)
occur in the eailtet language: thna, dldrkfj^^a (RT.), ^uqrfiqd^ya (T9.),
nlDlfia^ya (P6,), jijilaaeiiya (AB.), and, wlib Iriegutai ledapUcatlon
(apparently) papr^^^nya (BV.), dadlil^e^ya (JB.); and dld^k^a (RV.)
fs ■ almllai formation. RV. has also Bifftfl&nl and mrak|&^, and sifB-
a&ttl(P). In the later language, besldea aome of the formatloni already
iastanred (ihDae in u and ft. and In sya and sltavya), are found a tew
derivatives in aka, as oikltsaka, bubbufaka; in uka, aa Jljfiiaana,
dldbyftaana; and, very rarely. In anIya(oikitBanIya)and tr(i;agrufltT);
further, secondary derlvailvea (doubtleta) in in from the noun In S, as
ipsln, Jislfbl (one or two of these occur In the older language). And of
an adjective tn a we have an example In bibbatii4 (B.S., and later), and
perhaps in avallpaa (AVP.) ; auch words aa aju^psa, da9oikitea, are
rather to be undentood as poiseulve eompoands with the noun in S. A«
to nonn-atems in is, see 392 d.

10S9. Oeiivative or Tertiary Conjugations. A
passive is allowed to be made, by adding the passive-sign
IT yi to the desiderative loot (oi stem without final aj: thus,
i^UrtSH Ipsyite it is desired to be obtained; — and a causautive,
by adding in like manner the causative-sign WJ &ya (1041):
thus, ImUliM IpaiySmi / cattse to desire obtainment.

a. Of these formstione iu the older langnage are found mimUayi-
nUtna (donbtleaB to be read for -a&mftna, AV.), llpByimfina (^B.), and
raratayainSna (R,). Half-a-doien suoh passives are qootable later, and
one or two causatlies: e. g. oikltsyate, vlvak^yate, Jijfiaayata; clklr-
yayant, olkitaayi^yati.

b. Pot the desiderative conjagation formed on causative steins,
which is found ai early as the Brsbinanafl, see belov, 106Sb.

Digitizecy Google

1040—] XIV. Secomdabt Conjcgation. 378

1040. Some stenu which kre desiderative in form have lost the
peonliaritj of dOBiderative meaniog, and aBBnmed the valne of inde-
peDdeot roots: eiamplea are dklts eurt, jngope etupue, tltikq mdwrr,
blbhata abhor, mlmiAB pondtr, ijxitpf^ obt^. Donbtlete Bome of tie
apparent roots in the language with sibilant final are akin with the
deBideratives in origin: e. g. glkf, desiderative of gak.

a. On (ccoanl of the nan ralation of dmldantlfe >nd fatnn (cf.
848 b), the fomeT li occulonalty fonnd wfaece the litier wu uthei (« W
•xpected: thus, r^Snaih prayiybuuitaiii (^B.) a king about to i^mrt
prfii^a nooikramlfan (ChU.) the breath on the point of expiriitg; imn>
mtlrqur iva 'bhavat (H.) he urm fain to dif.

IV. Causative.

1041. a. In the latei language is allowed to be made
from most roots a complete causative conjugation. The
basis of this is a causative stem, formed by appending the
oausative-sign SRT Aya to the, usually strengthened, root.

b. But by no means all conjugation-stems formed by
the sign ^(U &ya are of causative value; and the grammarians
regard a part of them as constituting a conjugation-class,
the tenth or our-class, according to which roots may be
inflected as according to the other classes, and either alone
or along with others (776j.

o. In RV., the ptoponioo -witboot oaasatlve Talne i« folly one tbitd.
The formUiOD U » more obilonsly denomioitlTe one thui tiiy of the other
conJngttioD-cluaaB, ui iDteimediate between then) ind the proper deaom-
Inatliei. h. cauiatlve meaning hia eitibUshtd itaelf In eonnedioD witk
the fonnatioD, and become p red oml riant, though not eielnilve. A number
of TDots of late appearance and probably dirlTatiTe cbaiacter are Incloded
tn the ctati, and tome pUpable danomlDatives, which lack only the anal
donomtDiliTo accent (belon', 10B6).

d. The cauMtive fomiKlOD ia of much mora frequent nae, and nore
decidedly etpanded Into a fall conjogation, than either the iatentiTe oi the
dedderatlTe. It la made from more than three hnndred looti In the early lan-
guage (in BV., from abont one hnndred and Oftj) ; but in the oldeat. Ha
formi onteide the preaent-iyatem are [apart from the attached rednpllnted
aortet: 1046) exceedingly few.

1042. The treatment of the root before the catisative-
sign WX aya is as follows:

ioy Google

379 Causative. [— 104S

ft. Hedial or ioitial i, u, r, 1 have the Ku^a-streagtheiiiiig (if
capable of it: 240); thus, vedaya from v'vid, oodaya from ymxd,
tarpaya from ybfp; and balpa^a from ykfp (only example): but
olntara, gulpbaya, dfAbaya.

b. Bat X few loota lick the etrenglhening: Ihete uc. In ths older
Ungusge, oit (oitaya 'od cetaja), U), 11, rlf (rifaja and rsQaya),
vlp (vipaya uid vepaya), toj, tur, tuf (tufaya >nd to^aya), dyut
(dyntaya ind dyotaya), rue (ruoaya and rocaya), fuo (^uoaya uid
Qooaya). gubb (Qubbaya and qobhaya), krP< "'V^' 'Prb i ">■' S^abh
makes in RT. Kfbhaya. Zhi^ and glib leugthea the lowel initead. UrJ
aometiin«i hu vrddhl, as in alher faima: thns, mftrjaya (beilde mar-
Jaya). On the other hand, gwfa ippaare Irregularly (240 b) In aravaja
(beside frivaya), be^aya, mek^aya. Similar irregntarltles in the later
Isnguage are giraya. tulaya (ako tolara], ohnraya (also oboraya),
mufaya, apburaya. No Toims made without atrengthening bave a cansstive
Tslee In the older Isngoige.

0. A final vowel has the vrddbi-Btrenglheiiing; thus, oByaya,
fSyaya, oySvaya, bbKvaya, dbftraya, aSraya.

d. But no root in i or i baa vrddbi in the Veda (aulesB pOyaya
[k, below] cornea from pi rather than p&] — as, Indeed, tegnlu caoaa-
tifti from Bseh roota are hardly qaotable: only RV. hu k^ayaya (besldo
kfopaya) from ]/kfl pogtem; for i few alternatlTely permitted forms, aee
below, 1. In B, and 3., however, occur (ftyaya and aayaya {yi or aS);
and later -Oyaya, aayaya, amftyaya, AAy^et, nByaya.

e. A few loota have a form lUo with gu^a-atrengtbening : thna, oyu.
dru, plu, yu separaU, ^ru, pil, sta, aru; Jr watte aieay, df pierct, ay,
amr, bf; v^ ehoote makes varaya later (it U not found in V.; epic alto
vftraya).

f. A medial or initial a iu a light syllable iB Bometimee teogth-
ened, and sometimea remaiDs anchanged; tbos, bbfijaya, sripaya,
ftdaya; Janaya, qratbaya, auaya (but mandaya, valgaya, bbak^ayaV

g. The roots in the older language which keep their abort a are Jan,
pan, avan, dban, ran, atan, gam (gftmaya once in RT.), tam, dam,
raj (usnally rafijaya), pratb, fratb, gnatb, vyatb, avad, obad pletue
(alto obandaya}, nad, dbvaa (also dbvaAsaya), rab, mab (alio
maAbaya), nabb (also uambbaya), trar, avar, bvaL In the later
langDtge, further, kva^, Jvar, trap, day, pKf, ra<r, ran ring, vadb,
val, vaf, flatb, akbal^ ntbag. Both forms tre made (either in the
eyllat or In the later language, or in both taken together) by ad, kal,
kram, kfam, khan, gha(, oam, oal, Jval, tvar, dal, dhvan, nad,
nam, pat, bbram, matb, mad, yaxo, ram, lag, lal, vam, vyadb,
qam be qaitl, ^ram, fvea, avap. The roots which lengthen tba vowel
are decidedly the more nnmeroui.

h. If a uaaal Is taken in any of the strong forms of a root, it nanally
■ppaara in the caiuMiTe item: e. g. dambbaya, daAqaya, Imdlwya,

ioy Google

104S— ] XIV. Secondary Conjuqation. 38o

llmpayo, rondbarOt ^undhaya, kpntaya, df&baya. From m Dombet
af Toota, tUiDM batb with lod vitbont the nsBal ara madai thne (besidet
tho«e mentioned ■boie, g), kufioaya and kocaya, sranUtaya and gratb-
aja, bp&haya and barhaya, bhraAfaya and btirSfaya, Qundbara
lud 9odbaya, safijaya and sajjaya, sificaya and aeoaya. In a few of
thege 1« aeen the infloence of present- it? ma.

1. Host roots in fioul &, and the root j, add p before the con-
jugation-sign: thoe, dBpaya, dhSpaya, ethSpaya; arpaya.

J. Such stem« are made in the older langoage from the looti kfft,
hhyfi, ES (in^ (alao g&yaya), glfi, gbrS, Jfi&, dS giee, dft divide, dr&
run, dhA j)uf and dbft sucA, mS mtature, mlft, yft, tS 6bui, athfi, anS,
bft remove; the later language adds kqmK, dbmS, and b& leave. From
JB& and enft are found in AV, and laler the ghoitened forma Jfiapaya
and anapaya, and from qrS only Qrapaya (not in RT.). Alio, la the
later language, glS forms glapaya, and ml& forms mlapaya.

k> Stems from fi-roote ahowlng no p are, earlier, gSy&ya (also gKpa-
ya) from f e& ting, obSyt^a, p&yaya from y^pfi drink (or pX), pySy-
aya from ypyB. or py&y; efiyaya from yall (or al); also, later, bvRy-
aya from yhv& (or bu); — and further, from roots vS weave, vyK, and
93 (or qi), according to the grammarians.

1. The same p is taken also by a few i- and i-toot», with other
accompanying irregalarities : thai, in the older language, k^paya (R'V-,
beside ksayaya) from yk^ posaeei; JSpaya (VS. and later) from yH;
lApaya (TB. and later; later also l&yaya) from yS cling; frftpaya (V3.,
once] from f'frl; adbyfipaya (S. and later] from adbl + yli — in the
later, kfapas^ (beside ki^ayaya) from yk^i deitroy; m&paya from
yml; amKpaya (beside smSyaya] from ynni; brapaya from ybxi;
— and the grammarians make further krBpaya from y'krl ; o&paya (beside
oftyaya) from yoL gather; bbSpaya (beside bbByaya and bbiqaya)
from ybbi; repaya from ]/rI, and vlepaya from yvli. Horeofer, f'rab
makes ropaya (B. and later) beside robaya (V. and later), and yiam
makes knopaya (late).

m. More aoomalODs easee in which the eo-ealled caDeative li palpably
the denominatiTe of a derived noun, are: p&laya from yp& protect ; prifaya
from ypxi; llnaya (aecording to grammarians] from yii; dhOnaya (not
canaatiTe in sense] bom ydbu; bhif aya from ytttu ; gb&taya from )^an ;
spbftvaya from yspba or spbfty.

n. In the Prakrit, the causative stem is made from all roots by the
addition of (the agnWalent of) apaya; and a nnmbei (aboot a doren) of
like foimatians are quotable from Sanskrit texts, mostly of the latest period :
bat three, kri^Spaya, Jiv&paya, and dik[|&paya, occnr to the epica;
and two, a^Spaya and k;&Upaya, even in the Suuas.

1018. Inflection: PreseDt-System. The causative
stem is inflected in the pieseot-system precisely like other

ioy Google

381 Caosativb. [—1043

steins in 9 a (733 a,) : it will be sufficient to give beie in
geneia.1 the fiist persons of the different foimationg, taking
as model the stem m^ dhSriya, fiom y^ dbr- Thus:
1. Present IndioatlTe.

'• ^ J- p.

1 m^uiSr yi(uii^H^ ui^RH^

dh&r&yfiml db&r&y&vas dh&r&yimMi

1 ^JfJTI m(lIN<f UT^HlH-t

dliAr&ye dh&r&y&TObe dbiriyftnuhe

etc. etc. ttc.

a. Tha 1st pL act. in mosl gieatly oatnumben (ii tm to ons) that
in mu in both RV. and AT. No eiampJo ocean ol 2d pi. act. In tbuia,
DOT at 3d sing. mid. In e foi at*.

2. Present SubjunotlTe. .
For the subjunctive maj be iDstaoced &1I the forms noted as
ocourriof; in the older language:

acHTe.

1 dtiSr&yS^l dh&r^y&va dh&r&ySma

) I *y ')h=>^''&thgts dliftriyatlia

dhftr&y&taa dta&r&yftn

tdbJLr&yaB
Idb&r&yfttl
Idhftrdiyfit

middle.
i dh&T&yU dhar&yftTab&l

j.^. , , fdh&r&ySdhve

. dliiriyaee idhariySdhvW

(dhSriyite ^^
IdhSriyfttii *^'*™J'"™
b. Only one dual mid. rorm In Kite occqib; mOd&yUte (RV.). The
onlT RT. mid. foim In U, except In Ist da., U m&dayfidhT&l. The
primary endings in 2d and 3d elng. act. ice maie common than iba secondaiy.

S. Present Optatdve.
dbftriyeyam dbftr&yeTa dh&r&yama

ioy Google

1048— J XIV. Secosdary Cokjiqation. 382

middle.

etc. etc etc

c. Optitiie toimt ue very rare in the oldeit lansnags (fani In RT.,
two Id at.) ; they become more e«mmon In the Btibmuu. A 3d elng.
mid. in ita tait«wl of eta (ct. 738 b) ocean once in B. (ULnuiTittt AB.),
it not Tery tub in B. (i (core oi two of eiimplea ue qttetible), uid
ii alto found in MBh. uti liter. Of ■ corresponJing Sd pL In Inn only
one or two instennea on be potnted «nt (kAmsTlran A(S., kAlpai;iTan
AGS.).

4. Freseat ImperatlTe.

UtlT*.

dbBLTiya dhftri^tun dli&riyata

etc. etc etc

middle.

I fJHUH mh13e)ih^ eihov^

dh&r&y^BVA dta&riyethSni dh&r&yadhvttm

d. Imperitiie persons with (he endicg t&t occiu: dbftToyKtat (AT.)
and oySTByatit (^B.) ire 2d sing.; pUayatat (1,'B.] la 3dBiag.; gam»>
yatAt ind cySrayattt (K. etc.), ind vftrayatat (TB.) ue used u 2d pL
VSrayadhTKt (K. etc.) It 2d pi., *nd the only knowii eiimple of Bnch
>n ending (sei above, 648 b).

5. Freaeat Participle.
Mlfyri^dhariyant UI^UMIUI dbfaiyam&^a.

e. The feminine of the active pirttclpls is regolirly ind usnilly inkde
in antt (440 0). Bat i Tery few eiimplea in ati are met with (one In
the oldsr langaige: namayati Apiat,).

t. The middle participle iu mana Is mide through the whole hlitery
of the language, from BV. (only y&t&yam&na) down, and is the only
one met with In the eitlier Unguige (for Iray&nas [aid], MS. ii. 7. 12,
is eridently a faUe reading, perhaps for Irasi tUtS). Bat decidedly more
common in the epics and liter i* one farmed with ftna: e. g. kSmay&ns,
ointayfina, pftlay&na, -vffday&aa. It is quotable from a luger nombei
of roots than is the more regular participle in mSaa. Ai it occurs In no
accentuated text, its locent cinnat be given.

i, Google

1 ^TttjH^ ^I^UM ^mTJTTW

Adhftrftyam &6hEraja.vti kihBxayamA

1 am^ sMuuwf^ ?wr(7iTn%

&dh&r^a idUray&Tahi AdhSrayftinKlii

1044. At iru ibDve pointed out, the tormttloDB ttom the c4iiutlTe
st«m Bya oataidA the praseut-iyitem »re in the oldest luigaige very
limited. la ET. are fooud two rorms of the fatuie In syfiml, one puiive
psrdciple (aodlt&), end teo inllDltlTeg In dbylU; >1bo one oi two derlv-
Mwe noDns tn tp (bodboylt^, oodayltrf), five In i^i^u, ssTen In Itnu,
and ■ few In a (atipBrayi, nldh&ray&i vftoamlfikhftri, vlfTuneJtiya),
>nd In a (dlifirayi^ bhfiToy^ ntandayn). In A.T., also two s-fotnia
fotiai and (oar genmde In tvi; and a few deriiatiTe noan-a(emB, trom
one of which is mads a petiphtattle perfect (gamaTibh cakSi»). In the
BrihmainM, verbal derliatlTe forms beoome more numerone and lariou, m
will be noted In detail below.

1046, Perfect. The accepted causative perfect is the
periphiaatic (1071 a) ; a derivative noun in S is made from
the causative stem, and to il« accuBative, in Sm, is added
the auxiliary: thus,

?J|^!l1 ^tRI^ dhftrayaih cakftra (or Baa; 1070b)
MTJUl ^^ dbftrayidi oakra

a. Of thti perfect no example occart la RT. or SV, or VS., only one
— CamayiEih cakftra — in AV., and but half-a-dozen In all the varloni
testa of tbe Black Y^ur-Veda, and these not In the numtra-parta of the
text. The; are alao by no meana treqaeat In the Brahmanl*, except in
QB. (where they abound: chiefly, peihapa, tor the reason that this work
ntes Id considerable part the perfect inatead of the imperfect aa lie nanatiTe

104B. Aorist. The aoiist of the causative conjugation
is the reduplicated, vrhich in general has nothing to do
with the causative stem, but is made directly from the root

a. It haa beeo alieady fally deactlhed (above, 858 S.).

b. Its asBOciatioQ with the oanutive is probably foiuded on an
original Intensive character belonging to it as a redaplicated form,
and is a matter of gradaal growth ; in the Veda, it is made from a

ioy Google

1(M6— ] XIV- Secomdabt Cohjuqation. 3gj

considerable number of roots (id KV., more than a third of its in-

staDces; in AV., about a Srtb) irhich have no cansative stem in aya.

o. The cauBative aoiist of yrj dlir, then, is as follows:

1 M^iyfH^ Q^NiTT^ y4lu|m

&dldliaram ididharfiva Adidharftma

Adldbare AdidharSTahi adidbar&malil

Ad example was inflected Id fall at 664.

1047. In a few cases, where the root haa asenmed a pecaUai
fonn before the causative sign — as by the additioo of a p or f
(above, 104Siff.]~the reduplicated aorist is made from thie form
instead of from the simple root: thus, atiffhlpam from ath&p (stem
Btb&parai for yotht. Aorist-stems of this character from quasi-roots
Id 8p are arpipa (Krl. JUapa or jTjlpa, jijflapa or jJjaipa, (Ifrapa.
ti^tbipa, JDilpa; the only other example from the older language is
bibhi^ from bhif for ybbl.

1048. BdI b few iporidio toixot of >n l^torlat from canutiTs con-
JngaUon-EteiDB »e met with; thai, dhvasayit (ftV.; TS. bM initead the
wholly enoiOBlons dtavanaTit), vrathayia »nd Ulaylt (AV.), py^Biylf-
(hfiB ind av&daylqtbSs (KBU.), tn the oia«t Ungnige (RV. hu alio
Qnayia from s denominitive stem); in the Ute^ ahlftdarlfata (DKC),
■nd probably aghatayitlifia [MBb.; for •Ifth&a: cf. B04 d). The ftasWa
3d Blng. aropi, from the oauEstiTe ropaya, his > late oGDnrreDee (9>tr-}.

1040. A preotlve is of conree allowed by tha gmnmariani to be
made for the cinaattre conjugation: In the middle, from tha oanaillTe atem
with the ftoxilisry 1 substituted for its ilQil a; In the sctiTe, from the
form of the root as BtTengtheiied in the cansitive stem, bat without the
OUiMiTe sign: thus,

^lUIMH dhiryasam ate. ^I(uJNIU dhSrayifiya etc

This formation is to be regarded as pnrely Bcttttoni.
1060. Futuies. Both futures, with the coaditioaa),
aie made from the causative stem, with the auxiliary ^ i,
which takes the place of its final 9 a. Thus:

yi{fymi(M dhtraylfyimi et«. EJI^fll^ dh&rayi^yfi etc.
CJTjfijsnTt dhSrayiflyAnt Ml^ni^HIUI dMrayifpyimiifla

ioy Google

Conditional.

?iyH (U^U H idhteiqri^yam etc. MMI(R|i^ AdtaKrAjrl^r* etc.

PoriphraBtio Potore.
En^lhfnfFT db&raTittnml etc.
a. It bM been neatianed sbovA tbat BT. 4Dd AT. «0Dlaln only two
eumpIeB euh of th« ■-fatore, and none df tke peilphiutio. The lOrmer
begin to appeu in iha Btihtiu^ts more nameionsly, bnt itill tpuingly,
with paitfciplGB, ind conditional (onlj adhArsyi^yKt (B.; ftlipajii^jra-
tbSa ChU.); of the Isltec, ()B. affoidB two tn«tiaces (pSrarltiUial and
janayit^). Eiunplei of both fonm-dODa are qnotable bom the later
Ungaage (iuclading the middle form darqayltUio: 047 a).

1061. Veibal Nouns and Adjectives. These are
made in two diffeient ways: either 1. &om the fuU causa-
tive stem (in the same maonei as the futures, just des-
cribed}; or 2. from the causatively stieogthened loot-foim
(with loss of the oausative-sign) .

a. To the latter claas belong tbe paaaive participle, u dh&rita;
tbe gerandive and gerund in ya, hh dhSira. -dh&rra; and the gerund
in am, as dbSrom; also, tn the older language, the root-infinitive,
as -dhbam etc, (870 a). To tbe former class belong the infinitive
and the gerand in tvS, as dh&rarltnm, dtaara7ltT&, and the gerundive
In tavya, ae dbftrayitavya (also, In the older language, the infioitivea
in tavU and dliy&l. as J&najrltavif. iray&dby&l, etc.)- Tbe auxiliary
1 in taken in every formation which ever admits that vowel.

b. Eiamplea of the pualTe parUdpU ate: teUk, vBalta, frtvltA.
Bnt tiom the qnMl-root JE^p (104SJ) la m»de Jfiapta, without nniOD-

o. Eiamples of the inflnltive and geinnd in tvl aie: Ji^ayltiim,
dharayltain; kalpajitvlt, arpayitvS. Bnt in the eplca, and even later,
inflnitlvefl are oeraaianally made *llh loae of tbe canaatlTe'Bign : e. g.
qe^lttun, bbSvitom, dh&rltnm, mooitum.

d. Examples of the gemnda tn ya and am are: -bb^;a< -Kblvyai
•pftdyn, -vBaya, nSyya, -athftpya; -bh^am, athftpam. Bnt atems
ahowlng in the toot-gyllable no diffeienca from the root retain ay of the
cansadve-Blgn In the gemnd, to diatlngolah It from that beloagiiig to 'be
primary conjugation: e. g. -kram&yya, -gamiyya. -Jan&yya, -Jval&yrs.
-balayya, -qamayya, -racayya, -ftpayya.

e. Eiamplei of the gerandive In tavya are; tarpayitavyli, gaxa.-
arltavya, hvftyayltavya ; of that In ya, sth^pya, tiirya, yl^ya; of
that in aniya, sth&paniya, bb&vanlya.

Wbltaar, Orammar. 1. ed. 35

Diaii.zecy Google

1061—] XIV. Secondart Conjuoation. 386

f, Eximplea ot otli«i foimatiODi DcnrriDg in tha older )ui|aife an
M follovs: lOOt-in&nitlTe, -BtlUlpain, -v&saa; — inflnttlTe In tu, otbtr
ctses thiQ accnutlTe, •JamtfitaTS ; j&nAyitaTS£, piyajitKvSi, -foot-
oyltavAl; f&mayitos; — infinitive Id dbyU, l^ay&dhy&l, ira}-4dhyU.
tafisay&dhyU, nftqay&dhr&i. manday&dhyU, i&&da;4dhy&l. ri^-
ay&dhyU, vartayAdhyftl, viinjkdiijtii, Byanday&dbySl (ill RT.);
— gemndiTs in Syya, pana^yra, Bpfbay^yya, trayayayya (? ytii).

g. Other Doan-derivatiTat ftom lh« Mnutiva stem in not iDrreqiient,
being deddedl; moie numerous and tuIoub thui from *ny oAei of tke
seceudarir eoi^ngatlon-neiiu. Eiunplei [of other klndt thin those InituiMd
la 1044] ue; fcrpa^s, dSpuiA, prl^AtiM, bldfaqft; JiUlp«ka, ropnlu;
patRyaiA. BprlurUu; J&DOyfttl, Jfiaptl.

h. All the oIuMt ot deiivitlTei, It vill be uotieed, follow In tcfud
to accent the tnalogy of limilsr fornikUoni from the limple not, and >hoir
no InDnence of the ipeolal aecoDt of the cavsatlvo-stem.

lOSa. Derivative oi Teitiaiy Co aj ligations.
From the causative stem are made a passive and a de-
sideiative conjugation. Thus:

a. The paasive-stem is foimed by adding the usual
pasaive-aign 17 y^ to the causatively strengthened toot, the
causative-sign being diopped : thus, umFT dbftry&te.

b. Such puclTea ue hardly fonnd in the Tedi [only bbftjyi- AT.),
but Bome tbiitjr Instanoea are met with in the Brahmanae and Suttu: ei-
amplee are Jftapyi- (TS.), sBdya- (K.), pUya- (AB.), vKdya- (TB.),
Btllftpya- (OB.); and they beoome qnlte common Uiai.

o. The desiderative stem is made by leduplication and
addition of the sign ^ i^a, of which the initial vowel replaces
the final of the causative stem : thus, I^UI^nj^fH didb&rayifati.

d. These, loo, are found here and there Id the Brahmaoaa and later
[about fort; Btema are quotable): example* are piplyayifS (E.), bibbftv
aylfB and olkalpayl^s and lulobbayi^B (AB.), didrfipayi^ and rirfidb-
ayl^ (^B.), and bo on,

e. A> to DsusatlTes made from the Intenalve and deslderatlTe atema,
«ee aboTB, 1036, 1038.

V. Denominative.

1058. A denominative conji^ation is one that has fot
its basis a noun-stem.

a. It ii a view now preiailingly held that moat of the preaent-
ayslenu of the Satukrit Terb, along with Mhat fonn»tlona «n«logoai with a

ioy Google

pteMot-syitem, >k in thelt alllmtte origin denomtnttlTe ; Mid that tahuj
appuent loota are of the same charactei. The denominatiTea which aie go
called differ fram theie only tn that their origin ia recent and nndlggnlsed.

10&4. The gTammarians teach that any noun-etem in
the language may be converted, without othei addition than
that of an Q a (as uniou-vowel enabling it to be inflected
according to the second geneial conjugation] into a present-
stem, and conjugated as such.

ft. But aach fonnaliona are rare in actual uae. The BV. hu a few
Isolated and doablfol eiamplea, the clearest of which U bhif4kti he healt,
from hbi^ phytician; It ia made like a form of the loot-claae; abhi^yak
eeeml to be Ita imperfect according to the Da»l olaiB) and p&tyate he
rule* appeals to be a deDominatlie of p&tt matter; other possible caiee
are i^a^as etc., k^pAi^anta, tarofema etc., vanufMita, bhun^anta,
vinanvati. From the other older teite are quotable bavy&at (TS.),
4>9lonat (JS.), uamfilati (^B), Bvadhfimabe (((3). And a consider-
able DDmber of instanoea, mostly isolated, are found in the later langDige:
e. g. kolahant (UBb.), arghanU (PaFic), abJaU (^atr.), gardabliati
(SD.), utka^fhate (SD,), Jagannetratl (Pru.), kell9TetaBahaBTa-
pattratl (Pras.).

lOSB. In general, the base of denominative conjugation
is made from the noun-stem by means of the conjugation-
sign tr ;&, which has the accent.

a. The identity of this ya with the ya of the so-called eausatlve
eoDjDgaUOD, as making with the final a of a nonn-etem the caasallTe-slgii
aya, la hardly to be qneitioned. What relation It SQitalns to the ya of
the ya-cliBS (759), of the pasaire (766), and of the dorivativa iDteasive
■tern (1016), is much more doubtful.

IOB0. Istermediate between the denominative and causative
coDJngations stands a class of verbs, plainly denominative in origin,
bnt having the caaBativ« accent. Examples, beginning to appear at the
earliest period of the language, are mantr&yate ^eake, take* counsel,
[ftom mantra, yman + tra), kirt&yatl eomm»maratea {from kirti,
)/kf praiei), arth&yati or -te mak»* an object of, leekt [from &rtlia goal,
o^ect), var^ayati depict* (from var^a color), katbayati or -te gives
the how of anything, relates (from katham howf), and SO on. These,
along with like forms from roots which have no other present-system
(though they may make scattering forms outside that system from
the root directly), or which have this beside other present-systems
without cansative meaning, are reckoned by the grammarians as a
separate oonjagation-olaeB, the our-class (above, 607, 775).

25*

D,j,i,.c.., Google

1067—] XIV. Secondabt Cokjuoatioh. 388

1067. Denominativea aie formed at evety period in the
history of the language, boxa the earliest down.

a. Tbey are frequent in RV-, which contains over a hundred,
of all varieties; AV. has only half as many (and personal forms from
hardly a third as many; from the rest, present participles, or deriv-
ative DOuns]; AB., leas than Inentf ; ^B., hardlf more than a doceQ;
and Eo OD. In the later language they are quotable by hundreds,
but from the vast majority of stems occur only an example or two;
the only ones that have won any currency are those that have assumed
the character of "eur-olass" verbs.

1068. The denominative meaning is, as in other lan-
guages, of the greatest variety; some of the most frequent
forms of it are: be like, act as, play the part of; regard
ot treat as; cause to be, make into; me, make application
of; desire, wish for, crave — that which is signified by the
noun-fltem.

a. The modes of treatment of the stem-final are also various;
and the grammarians make a certain more or less definite assignment
of the varieties of meanicg to the varieties of form; but this allot-
ment finds only a dubious support in the usages of the words as met
with even in the later language, and still less in the earUer. Hence
the formal dassificatioo, according to the final of the noun-stem
and the way in which this is treated before the denominative sign yi,
will be the best one to follow.

1069. From stems in a. a. The final a of a nonn-etem
oftenest remains unchanged: thus, amitray&ti plays tkt «nm^, u
hottile; devay4tt cuttinatM the godi, it piout.

b. But final a is also often lengthened : thus, agh&y&ti plaav
miiehief; prlfSyite holdt dear; a^Hy&ti leakt for horttt; a^anKyUl
dtiirea food.

o. While in the Veda the larioaa modes of denominatiTe fonnatloa
■le veil diitrlbaled, no one allowing > maikid pTepondennee, In the later
lingnage tbe vaat majoritr of deDoninativei (fully aaven eightha) are of
the two kind* Jaat noticed: namely, made fiom a-atema, and of tbe form
aya or Sya, the former predominating. And there li seen a decided ten-
dency to give tbe denominativea In ajra an active form and tianaltiTe mean-
ing, and those in &ya a middle form and intranaittie or Tefletive meaning.
In >not a few caaM, parallel foimationa from tba aama stem illuatrita dila
diaUnction: e. g, Icalnqayati makt» turbid, kolofSyate m or frawnwt
turbid; tani^ayati ref'u nmo^M, tami^Sy ate u rtfuvenattd; qittallayati
lootetu, fitbilftyate gr<no» iooie. No dtaUnct traces of this diatinctoD ua

itizecy Google

389 Dbnohinative. [—1064

MMgDluble in the Toda, illhoagli there alio coneipondlug [onns itith abort
a and irith long R aomettmea atuid aide hy aide.

d. Final a U sometimes ch&nged to 1 (ver^ rarely i); thus, adhTttriT&ti
performi the tacriJUt ; tavlfly&tt ■« mighty ; patrl;&tl or patrly&ti deiiret
a ton; mkhsiyiM erana JluK; Bi^iyats it rtady; oandrakKnOyati it
moonstorulikt. Not Bftr itema ot thia form ate quotable.

e. It is oecaaionally dropped (after n or r): thna, taraQy&tl >> rapid;
adfaTUT&tl performs (Ae laerifice.

t. Other modea of treatment are sporadie: thaa, the addition of s, ■■
Id etanaByatl leehi tht breatt ; the change of a to e, as In varey&tl
play a tht uiootr.

lOeO. From Items in ft. Final A ninallT remains, as in gopfty-
&ti pbtyt tlt4 htri*man, proUelt; vV^KaijaXA. fighU\ bat it it somettmea
treated la the other methods of an a-stem - thus, pftanTatl Jighti; tllottft-
mlTatl actt Tilotiama.

1061. From atems in 1, I, and a, d. Suoh items are (especially
those in u, u) very rue. They show regnlarly i and Q before 7a: thni,
arStlr&tl (also -tl7-) ploU irjjury; JaniyUl (also -niy-) tttk* a tei/e;
gakbiy&tl dttirtt fritndthip; nftiijats turtu urotnan; — qatrflf&ti ael*
the foe; rJOy&ti it ttraight; vasily&tl dtairtt tctaith; asEljriti frumiira,
i» diiconUnted ; with short n, gttuy&tl lett in motion,

a. More rarely, 1 01 a li treated as a (or else Is gnnated, with loss
of a y 01 v): thus, dimttay&tl eamtt tnorting; laghayatl makat eatier.
Sometimes, aa to a (abo«e, lOBBf), a sibilant is added; thni, avl^tl
M vehement; tirafy&ti tavet. From dhi, BV. makes dhlySyUe.

1063. From other io«el-stem«. a. Find r i» changed to ri:
thus, mitrlTiti Irtatt at a mother (only qnotable example).

b. The diphthongs, in the few cases Ihat oacar, have their Anal ele-
ment changed to a semivovel : thus, gavy&tl letkt cattle, goet a-raiding.

1068. From oonsonant-slema. A final conionant osually remalna
before ya: thus, bhlqajy&tl jiloya t&e phyeician, cures; iik^ai^y&ti actt
like a bull; apasy&ti itacliee; n&mtiay kU payt reverence; BumanasyAte
u favorably ditpoeed; tarnfy&ti Jighti.

a> But a final n Is sometime* dropped, and the pteoedlng vowel treated
as a final; thns, r^fiy&ta or r^tyiU m kingly, ftom T&jan; -korma-
yaU from •kanuan; evftmlyati treiUt at master, frocD avftmin: v^f^
y4ta bon vrfan is the only example quotable from the older langnage.
Sporadic cases oocnr of other final consonants similarly treated : thna, oJ&-
y&ta ttma ojas, -manilyate from -monaa; — while, on the other hand,
an a-TDwel is occasionally added to such a con aon ant before yai thus, ifa-
y&tl ftom I9, Batvanftyati from satran.

1004. The largest claia of conaonantal atems are those showing a a
before the ya; and, as has been seen abote, a albllanc ia sometimes, by
analogy, added to a Bnal vowel, making the denomltlie-sign virtnally sya

Digitizecy Google

1064—] XIV. Secondary Conjuqation. 390

— 01 eves, with ■ tlao Bddtd aflei ui i- or n-To«e1, uyRj and thli come*
to be Tecogaized b; the gfnmmiriuiB u tu indepsadanC atgn, formlag deaom-
initiv«( that expiegi de»lre: thni, Bum&khuy&te m merry; jIvanasyB-
(In •ayt /ace of life); vnasyati ifafirM <A« tTwie (the only qooUble eum-
ples); madhofTatl 01 madhvMyati loagt for honey; k^irasyatl cram
mi&.

1065. The grammiilinB leckoD ai » special clan of denominaiiTe*
in kllmya what are teslly only ordinary ones made (iDm a eompoond noun-
■tem having kSmK ai its Qnal member: thiu, rathakSlOTati long* for
the chariot (K, : only example foand iu the older lanpiage); artbaUm-
yatl deeiret wetdth; pntmk&myKti loithee a eon (the only quotable eiam-
plei); coming from the paiaeBiiTe compounda rathakSma etc And &rtli&-
pfiyati treate at property i» a (tele qootable) eiample of a atem kanng
the Prakrttle cauiitlve fonn (104Sii),

a. Sterna of anomalone formation are drliglutya from dirgha, dra^ll'
aya from dr^bft, and perhapa mradaya from mpdu-

1060. a. A anmber of denomlniti«e atema occur iu the Veda foi
which no correspoitding noan-Btema are found, allhoogh for all or nearly
all of them related words appear: thus, a&kuy&, Stabhuyi, ifudhya;
dtaiqa^yA, ri%B^4, ruvai^ya, hnvaDya, iqa^yi; ratharyi, gratharyi.
Baparya; iyasya ((B.), iraey&, da^aayi, makhasyi, panasyi, aa-
casy&. Those in aoya, especially, look like the beginninga of a ne«
con] Dgatton- class.

b. Having atill more that aspect, howeT«i, are a Vedic group of etemi
in Kya, which In general have allied themseWes to preaent->y*t«ma of the
nS-elaEs (7S2), and are fonnd alongside the forms of that clasa: thu«,
grbhfiy&tl beside g^bh^tl. Of sucb, HV. has gpblU^&, matfaiyA,
pru;fiy&, mu;By&. grathSya, skabbfiyi, stabhSyA. A taw others
have no nil-class RompaniDus: thus, dam&yA, gamfiy&, tudSy& (AV.);
and pon&ya, na^Sya, vr^Bya (KvrS rain), vas&y& (yvaa tiothe), and
perhaps a^Sya (Vaq attain).

o. Here may be mentioned also quasl-denomiuitlves made from ono-
DiatDpoetic combinations of sounds, geneially with repetition: e. g. kitaki-
^ya, thatatbatarAya, mi^ami^fiya, 9ara9arBya.

1067. The denocDinatlYe sterna in RV. and AT. with cauaatlve accent-
uation are: RV. a&kli&ya, artb&yo, i^a (also Ifayd), iirj&ya, r^^ya,
kfpiya, mantr&yo, mrg&ya, vavr&ya, vSJiya (also vfijayi), Tfl&ys,
BUf v&ya [also BUf vayA) ; AV. adds klrt&ya, dbup&ya, p&Utya, vlr&ya,
sabh&gJ^a.

a. The. accent of &iuiiya and li&staya (BV.) Is wholly anomalona.

1068. Inflection. The denominative stems aie in-
flected with regularity like the other ateme ending in Qa
(78Sa) throughout the present-system. Forms outside of

ioy Google

391 Denouinativb. [—1069

that syBtem — except horn the stems which axe leckoaed
to the causative oi our-olass, and which follow in all le-
speots the rules foi that class — are of the utmost larity.

ft. In RT. oecuM no form not belonging to the preaent-gyttem, aieept
ena^e (with mi piohibldTe), » if-totitt 2delng. (at. 1048]. Further
eiample* of thii loriBt ue KaOyit (9B.), ptpftyi^^a (TS,: pi., vlth mi
prohibitive), »nd Btqrf^fatH (VS. etc.). The form &AaparT&it (AV-
Tlv. 3. 20), with U for I (eSBo), might be *ari«t; bat, as the metre
*bow(, is probably ft corropt re»d<Dgi amanasySit, certainlf imperfect,
sppsars to occur in TB. (11. 3. &). Other forma begin to appear in the
Biahmtnu: e. g. the tntnres gopKyifyati ((B.), mesb&ylqyiuit, Ita^-
^nyiqy^t, qlkSrifrJait (TS.), the pirtioiplea bhi9aj;lt& (? JB. -jita)
and lyaaitii ((fi.), ka];k4ii7lt&, qlklti, >nd meshiU (TS.), the gerund
Hjfa^l&kq^a (^B.), and M on. In the later Uugmage, alao, forms out-
side the preBent-tfttem (except the participle in ta) ire only aportdie; and
of tertiary oonjngatlon forme there are hardly any: eiamplea are the caiisa-
tivea dliamaraya and aatlyaya (MBh.), and the desideratlTe abhi^e^a-

y^a (915.).

b. Honn-dertvatiiea ^m denominatlTe etemB totlow the andogy of
those from causative atema (lOSlg). In the older language, thoae in n
and & (especially the formtr) are much the most Dnmeroas; later, that in
ftna preTaiis over all others.

CHAPTER XV.

PERIPHRASTIC AND COMPOUND CONJUGATION.

1060. One peiiphrastic formation, the peiiphiastic
futuie, has been already described (042 ff.J, since it has
beoome in the later lanpiage a lecognized part of every
verbal conjugation, and since, though still remainig essen-
tially periphrastic, it has been so fused in its parts and al-
tered in construction as to assume in considerable measure
the semblance of an integral tense-formation.

By far the most important other formation of the
olasB is —

ioy Google

1070—] XV. PBHIPHttASTlO AND COUPOUND GONJITQATION. 392

The Periphrastic Perfect

1070. This (though almost uaknown in the Veda, and
ooming only gradually into use in the Brihma^as) ia s
tense widely made and frequently used in the olaaeical
Sanskrit.

a. It is made by piefixing the aousative of a deriva-
tive noun-stem in EIT S (accented) to the peifeot tense of an
auxiliary verb : namely, of ym kr maAe, moie often of
yC(Q as be, and very rarely of VH bha be.

b. In tbe oldei Ungnige ((m below, lOTSd), kf !■ tlmoat llie onir
aatiliu; oMd In making thii tanse, aa oeonnlng Tery few tImM, tnd bfaO
navBE. Later, also, bbQ ia qnite nre (it i» fonnd nine time* in HBh.,
tix timet In Bgh., and a fev timea elMwhete), but as gaini Tery gr«afl]>
in coiiancy, having bsMine tlie naual aniillary, irbila kf li only exeepUonal.

o. Somewtiat ilmilat formatloni irjtb yet other auxUUiiu ue not
absolntaly noknoitn in the later language: thni vaxajMx praoakramtta
(MBh.}. pflraySm (ete.) vyadhtu (VTncailtra), mrgs7«m avfttaTt (ib.).

1071. The periphrastic perfect ooouis aa follows:

a. It is the accepted peifeot of the deiivatire conjuga-
tions: intensive, desideiative, causative, and denominative;
Uie noun in SIT i being made from the present-stem which is
the general basis of each conjugation: thus, &om y^fj hndh,
intensive M HM I H bobudhSm, desiderative ^HrHIM bubhutsim,
causative Mt^J U IH bodha^bn ; denominative H ^ U (4 mantxay-
im.

b. The farmitlon from caaeative atema (Ineladlog those deDomlnativea
which have asiumed the aapeot of oaniatiTea: lOfifl) ia by far the moat
Tiequant Only a few dealderativea are quotable (1034a), and of intMi'
liTca onl; JSgarKm. ftaa (1020a; beside JsOBg&ra).

o. Most roots beginning with a vowel in a heavy syl-
lable (long by nature or long by position) make this perfect
only, and not the simple one: thus, <b|IMIH Ssftm from y^[ff
Ss sit; ^5IPl Dtfltai from j^_^Ik* see; 3«hT^ujjli&m &om
|/3(F Mih forsake; ^tfm edhBm from y^edh thrive (the
only examples quotable].

ioy Google

393 PEaiPHRABTic Perfect. [—1078

d. EsMptod >ie die loola Ap ind ilkotl, tnd tbote beslnniDg wllh ft
Itefote two conwointi (ind Ukiof Bn u redupUeMlon : 786).

•. The HWtt (thit It, «tem» reckoned bf the gniDiniriuis m iooU) of
mora thui one irUiblo have their perfeot of this formation; thnt, oftkSsltin.
But Hxipi (713] 1* add to Coim Or^onava ouly; vhile Jigf (lOSO)
nukei a perfeot of either fomation, and dftrldrft (1084ft) la add to do
the eame.

t. A ttw Dthar root) make the periphraatlo In addition to the lunal
reduplicated perfect. Thai, in the older language only are toond the atema
oB7lin, tSfftm, ailaytja, vBe&m (^yvoB dwell), vidim (f'vid knovi),
TJtts^aa, and the reduplicated ttema bibh&rtia and JuhftTim; the later
language adds ftyim, Jftyim, dfty&m, nftyKm, smajBrn, bvayAm, and
the reddpllMted biblinTlin; and the grammarlana teaob like formation*
from Of, kb, and the reduplicating bri. The alem la made in eyery mm
tzma the pteaent-ttem with go^a of a final TOwel.

1072, The periphrastio peifect of the middle voice u
made with the middle inflection of i^ kf. Foi passiTe
use, the auxiliaiiea ERT m and H bha aie said to be allowed
to take a middle inflection.

ft. One or two lata example* of bhfi with middle inflection have been
pointed out, but none of aa.

b. It is mmacesutry to give a pandigni of this fonnatiOD, aa
the inflection of Uie ansiliairiee ia the same as in their iadependeot
use: forthatofykr, see 800k; of y^bu, see SOOd^of ^as, see 800m.

o. The oonnectloQ of the noun and auiiliary ia not lO doae that other
word* are not occaalonailf allowed to come between them : thua, mlmfiA-
Bltm «v4 oakrA ((B.) Aa tntrely ipaculattd; vidftdk vK Idftm ayadi
oakfiTft (JB.) A« i>«rt7y hnew> ihii; prftbhr&fifoySib yo naghn^aih oa-
kSra who made Naghu»ha faU headlong (Rgh.)-

107S. The aboTO is an aocoant of the peripliraatio formatiOD
with a derivative noun in Km as it appears espeoially lo the later
language; earlier, its aspect is rather that of a more general, bnt
quite infrequent, combination of such a noun with various forms of
the root Iqr. Thosi

a. Of the periphrastic perfect occora only a atngle example In the
whole body ot Vedic texts (metrical): namely, gamayiih OftUia (AT.).
In the Brihmapat examples from cauaatlTe atoms begin lo appear more
freely, bnt are eTerjwhere tew in number except in ^fi. (which haa them
fk-om twenty-foDf roots, and a few of theae in leTeral oocunenoea). From
deaidetatlve atemt they are yet rarer (only aeven occnrtenoea, flve of them
in (jS.: lee 1034a); and from intenilTes they are nnknown. The peri-
phrastic perfects ot primary conjagatlou were noted above (1071 f; in (B.,

ioy Google

1078—] XV. PEEIPaaABTIC AHD COMFODND CONJUflATlON. 394

eight Btemi ind ibout eighty occuirancea, chleOy fmn ikf, bid, ind -rid;
tbst ttom vld ii found in tb« gieiteat number of text*).

b. Fornu with the u>rist of the •niilluy aie in the oldest Biihmanu
M nnmerout u tbotevith tbe perfect. Tha*, with Bkar oecnt ranuvwn
(K.J, Jaiuqribii and sfida^tm >nd avadt^bu end ath&payiia (H^.);
end Kith akran, vid&n (TS. TB. MS.). With tbe eoii*t optetlTe or pre.
fetiie bu been found only pSvayalfa krlySt (HS.).

o. Like combiuatlonB with other temet ute not entirely unknown;
tboa, JuhavSlfa karoti (^^S.). So alao in the liter Imngnaee, where heT«
been found quotable half-a-dozen inch caaea ai vldftdi karoti (Pifir.),
vldsib karotu and kurranta (Paric. etc,].

d. Only two or three caaei of the nae of ae Intteid of kf as aniil-
iary are met with in the older language: they are matitrftTKin taa (AB.
OB.), JanaykD Sbs (?<U.), and Ikfam Baa (^(S.).

e. A BlDgle example of an accented auxHiary ia met with in the aCMRl-
nated lexU; namely, atiraoayaifa oakrua ((B.). At was to be expected,
from the nature of the combination, the noun alM letaina Its accent (com-
pare 646).

Participial Periplirastlc Phrases.

1074. The frequent use, especially in the latei language,
of a past or a future passiTe participle with the copula (ot
also without it) to make participial phrases having a value
analf^ous to that of veib-tenses, has been already noticed
(899). But othei similar combinations are not unknown in
any period of the language, as made with other auzibaries,
or with othei participles.

a. They ocenr evan in the Veda, but ire far more common and
oonapicuotiB in the Btihminas, and become again of xnlQor iccount in the
later ImgDige.

107B. Examples of the various formations are aa follows:

a. A (uBuatly present) paiticlpis with the teneei of the Terb 1 go.
Thia ia the combinatioD, on the whole, of widest and moat ileqaent occur-
lence. Tbu»: iyajvano vibh&jann 6ti vMo^ (RV.) he eeer gieet mcay
the wealth of the tum-offarvr; yatliK B&cyA v&sa^ saihdadliad ly&d
evam erli tfibhir ynjflasya ohidraih sadidadhad eti (AB.) j%ut ai
one toould mend IkabituaUy] a garment tctth a needle, to utith thete one
mende any defect of the taerifiee \ agnir v& idaib T&tfvKnaro daliann
tit (PB.) Agni Vaicoanara kept burning thia creation; ti 'aorfth p&rfi*
jlt& y&cto dyivSpptliivi dpS^rayan (TB.) thoae Asarae, getting beaten,
took refuge toith heaven and earth; ti 'syag^hah pa9&va upamnryi-
mi^S iyu^ (^B.) the animale, his family, would be eontinuaUj/ destroyed,

ioy Google

39f> Participial Phrases. [— 107B

b. The ucDa with the retb oar go (continualfy or ItdbitvaUy) ilgnirying
■tUl moie distinctly thtn the pioeedlng a continued or habltnal sctton. Thai:
agn&v agnif cnuratt pr&vlffa^ (^^0 Agni it eonttantly prt$tnl in the
Jire; adBi;4yuh da^i^Da ghnanta; oarantl (PB.) tkey makt a practice
of beating taith a rod ^e/uit it undaerving of pvnithmtnt.

c. The aims with the veihs Ss tit aod Bthft (toni^, with a like nieen-
lag. Thni, JnliTata Bsate (K.) they continue tacrijicing \ te ■pakr&mya
prativlvodato 'ti^lh&n (AB.) they, having gone off, kept vehmtmtly
refuting. In the later language, Btb& la the verb ortenMt uced, wllb piedt-
ntea ot t«t1oui kind, to make a verbal phrase of contJaaauce.

d. A present or rnlnie or perfect participle with as and bli& be.
The parUdple la aftenest a fature one; em oalj I* need In the optatlie,
bhd oinally In other forma. Thus: yab pttrram anljfiiia^ ByU (AB.)
vhoever mag not have made laerijice before; samfivad evayi^&e kur-
vft^ ftsan (OB.) they did the tame thing at the lacri^ce; parlkrl^anta
Baan (HS.J they were playing about; y&tra euptvA pjinar lA Vadrfi-
uyka bh&VBtl (VB-) when, after tleeping, he ii not going to fall atleep
again; havysrii hi vak^yan bbavatl (AB.) far he it intending to carry
the lacrifice; dOsyant syKt (K.) may be going to give; y^na vahanena
■yantajriiit syjit (VB.) uith ujhat vehicle he may be about to drive. True
ezpreastona for perfect and plupeifecl and future perfect time aie capable
ot being made by su«h meana, and now and tlien are made, but in no
regalu and contlnawfaeMoo,

Composition with Prepositional Prefixes.
1076. AH the foims, peiBonal and other, of verbal con-
jugation — of both primary and secondary conjugation,
and even to some extent of denominative (ao far aa the
denominative stems have become assimilated in value to
simple roots) — ocoui very frequently in combination with
certain words of direction, elements of an adverbial character
(see the next chapter}, the so-called prepositions (according
to the original use of that term), or the verbal prefixes.

a. Practically, In the later language, It la aa If a compounded root
were formed, out of root and prefix, from whioh then the whole conjngatlon
(with deilvattvea: below, chap, XYll.) la made, Just aa from the aimple
root Yet, eren there (and gtlU more In the older language: 1081 a-o), the
combination ia so loose, and the members retain ao much of their independent
Taliie, that in most dictlonarioi (that of Sir Honlei Wlllluni la an eieeptlon)
the eonjagatlon of each root wltb proflzet is treated under the simple root,
and not In the iJpbabetie order of the pteHi. Deriiatiie words, however,

i, Google

lore—] XV. PBE1PBBA8T1C AND COMPOUHD CONJDQATIOH. 396

MB by unlventl tgTeeiiient giien In theli iDdspeudent tlpbtbetic pUca, like
alaipl« -woidi.

1077. Thoae verbal prefixes whioli have value as such
throughout the whole history of the language are given
below in alphabetic order with their fundamental meanings:

sin 4ti acroM, beyond, past, over, to excess; ■ n 'i-~

isf^ Adhi ahone, over, on, on to; I .

^p{ ktxa. after, alonff, tovxtrd; '■ ■'■ '-^ -.^'-^^

At! 51 *ot*J^ between, among, witMn; yii/^"^'

qq 4pa away, forth, off; '

^wk Api unto, close upon t>r on;

QTH abhi to, unto, against (often with implied violence);

515 4va dovm, off;

m t to, unto, at;
■ - 35" «d up, up forth or out;

:5^ lipa to, unto, toward;

H ni dovm; in, into;

f%?^^nia out, forth ; , .

qjT pirS to a distance, atoay, forth; ,. L '- <■ •"

qf^ pAri round about, around',

51 pt4 forward, onteard, forth, fore ; y^/ -

V^ prdtl in reversed direction, back to or against,
in return; .'•'

R vi apart, asunder, away, out; Hi^

W\fAm along, with, together.

a. Some ot tbase, of ooatte, ue naed much mote widely «nd fteqaently
than othen. In order of frequansy In the oldei languige (u eitlniated br
the nomber of loots with which they aie lOand Died In EV. and AT.), they
■uad aa followi : pra, A, vi, sam, abhl, nl, ud, part, ana, upa. pratl,
ava, nia, atl, apa, para, adbi, apl, antar. Apl la of very limited
uae aa pTcDx in the latu lingoage, having beoome a conjanotloa, too, alto,

b. Xke meanlngi given above ate only the leading onee. In oombinatlong
of root and piefli they nndetgo much modification, both llleial and flgutative
— yet aeldoai in euch • irty that Ihe atepa of tianaltion hom the fnnd-
■nental aenie aie not ewy to trace. SometlDiei, indeed, the Talue of a

ioy Google

397 Vekbal Pbefizeb. [—1081

root U hwdl} perceptibly modtded bj the eddltlon of tlie prellx. An Iri'
teadTi force is not infreqneatly glTen by purl, tI, and aam.

1078. Prefixes eaeentially akin with tbe above, but more diB-
tJDctly adverbial, and of more reBtricted nse, are these;

Aotui (or &eb(l) to, unto: tolerably frequent tn RV. {used with
over twenty roots), but already nnnsnal in AV. (only two roots), quite
restricted in B., and entirely lost In the later language;

Kvia forth to tight, in view, used only with tbe roots bhd, as,
and h^;

tlr&a through, erouujayt; out of gighf: hardly nsed except with
br> dbS, bha (in RV., with three or four others];

pnr&s HI front, forward: nsed with only half-a-dozen roots,
especially hf, dbftf 1;

prftdus forth to viete: only with bhQ, as, kf.

a. A few otben, >b bahla outtide, vinft teithitut, Alam (with bbQ
and kr) luffieienily, proptrfy, B&k;&t in vimo, tre itlU leu Temoied from
ordinary adrwbs,

1070. Of yet more limited nse, and of noun- rather than adverb-
Talae, are:

TTSd (or 9»thP), only vlth db& (in RT., once alio with kf):
^addbS believe, trtdit;

bin, only with kf (and absolcte in the cluilcil language): blfikf
make tlie tound hlng, low, murmur.

a. And beilde theie itand yet more fortnttoas combination a: lee

belDw, loei.

1080. More than one prefix ma; be set before the same
root. CombinationB of two are quite uBual; of three, much
lesa oommon; of more than three, rare. Their order is in
general detenuined only by the requirements of the meanii^,
each added prefix bringing a further modification to the
combination before which it is set. But EIT S is almost
never allowed, either earlier or later, to be put in front
of any of the others.

a. Tbe very rare caaes of apparent piefliion of K to anotfaet prefix
(» Svihanti HBh., ftvitaavftaftb BhP.) aie pethapa beat explained as
having tlie a used Independently, ai an adverb.

1081. In classical Sanskrit, the prefix stands immediately
before the verbal form.

a. Id tbe earlier langnage, however (especially In the Teda; In
the BrUiinana lesa oft«n and more restrietedly), its poslUon is qnite

ioy Google

1081—] XV. Pbeiphrastic asd Cohpoithd Comjdoatioh. 398

free: it may be sepanted from Uie verb by another word or wotAm.
and may even come after the form to which it belonga; it may also
Btand alone, qoalifying a verb that is nnderatood, or conjointly with
another prefix one that ia expressed. ^^^- -Ij-

b. Tbna, ai devofi i 1i& vakqyati ^V.) he »luill bring Hi* god*
hither; pr& 9a jtyQA^ ttri^t (A-T.) may ie lengthen out our licee; t&v
i T&tam upa dravit (RV.) do y« two comt Ai'tAar quickig; g4mAd
v^ebbir i bA na^ (R^O •'U'y A« eome teitk gift* hither to tu; piri
malb p&ri me prt^iib p&ri ^a^ pfihl y4d db&nam (AT.) protect me,
my progeny, and lohat weaUh we oien ; ^tal^ Bad;& t, oa p&rfi oa y&nti
(AV.) from tehence every day they advance and retire ; vj ib&ih BJurve^
ptpraiina [avftam] vl yUapaeiitt a&m lEyuffi (AV.) I have eeparated
from all evil, from diteate, [I have Joined mytelf} mith life; vi by
onena pa^yati (AB) for hy it he iee*\ vi vt 0^4 praj&7& pafubhir
fdhyate (TB.) he it derived of progeny and cattle.

o. Three or font iiuttnces I»ib been cited from the Utei lutfniige
o( a preflz Beparated from, or folloirliig, a vetb; perbapa thepraflx in erery
■iicb case admita of being resaided as an adverb.

loss. As regards the accent of verb-forms compounded with
prefixes, only the case needs to be considered in which the prefix
stands (as always in the later language) immediately before the verb;
otherwise, verb and prefix are treated as two independent words.

1083. a. A personal verbal form, as has been seen above [BBS),
is ordinarily unaccented; before such a form, the prefix has its own
accent; or, if two or more precede the same form, the one nearest
the latter Is so accented, and the others lose their accent.

r prefixes

o. That Is, in every case, the verb along with its normally
sitoated prefix or prefixes so far constitutes a unity that the whole
combination is allowed to take but a single accent

d. EiamplBB ub: p&re lii nAri piiaar i 'hi kqlprAm (AT.) go
away, woman; come again quickly; iMit 'stwh vlpAretana (i^^-) Asa
scatter ye amay to your home; Bamftoinu^vft 'nnaampT&yUtl (AT.)
gather together, go forth together after ; y&d Efb^ upod&ttL (AT.) when
he goee up to the houee; eva oa tv4tb sarama fijag&ntha (KV.) note
that you, Sarama, have thue come hither; yAnit "vi^fita^ pravivA^itliA
"p&tk (RV.) enveloped in which thott didet enter the water*.

1084. A prefix, however, not seldom has a more independent
value, as a general adverb of direotioo, or as a preposition {in the
nsusl modem sense of that term), belonging to and governing a noon;
in such case, it is not drawn in to form part of a verbal compound,
but has its own accent. The two kinds of use shade into one another,
and are not divisible by any distfoct and fixed line.

ioy Google

399 Verbal Pbbfizeb. [—1067

a. There Is In RV. i considenbls namlier of cues (tome thlrlf) in 1
vbicb the pada-tezt gtvea unneceuullj, mi piobabi; wrongl]', in lade- 1
pendent accent to > piellx before in aceeDted veib (or other preOs): n- I
Mhing, for exunple, imbat into t kruhok, TjAoBt into vi keot, 1
ftb&yivarflt into ftbhi &varflt, TyasKrst into vi i asarat (Initesd of
B-Amhat etn.).

lOSB. In combiDAtion with the noD-penooal p»rt8 of the verb-
BjBtem — with participloB, infinitiTes, and geraada — the general rule
is thkt the prefix loaes its accent, in favor of the other member of tlie
compound. Bnt the prefix instead has aometimee the accent: namely,
when combined —
I a. with the paasive participle in ta or na: thus, p4reta gone

forth; ant&rblta conceahd; ivapanna failen; B^mpflr^a eompktt
(cf. 1884).

b. But Bome uxcepdons to this rule aie met with; e. g., In RV., niolt&.
nl^kfta, pra^asti, ni^ttA, etc.; in AT., apakrltA.

«. with the infinitive in tu (679J, In all its caaee: thus, aiiiii-
taartom to collect ; iipidhfttave to covtr up ; ivagantos of descending.
The doably accented dative in tav&{ retains its final accent, but
tlirowg the other back npon the prefix: thus, Anvet&v^ for fallou-
ing; &pabhartaTft{ for carrying off.

1086. The closeoese of combination between the root and the
prefix ia indicated not only by their unity of accent, bnt also by the
euphonic rulea (e. g. !8B, 182), which allow the mutual adapUtions
of the two to be made to some extent as if they were parts of a
noitary word.

1067. A few special irregalarities call for Dottce:

a. In the liter luignaige, api, adhl, sod ava. In connection with
certain roots and their deriiatives, aometlmei loee the initial vowel : namely,
apt with nah and dht, adhl with ethi, ava with gUk ate.: e. g.
pinaddba, plhita, dblf fhlta, vag&hya, vataAaa, Tad&nya, vaqfabliya,
vamajjana, vekfa^a, valepana. In the Veda, on the other hand, I9
l9 in a few caieg toond initead (apparently) o( ida with Vkf-

b. The Qnal vowel of a prellz, eapeclall; an i, U (ofteneat In the
older language) tomelimes lengthened, eepeclall; In derivatiTe words: e. g.
pratikSra, nivft, paribftra, vlrildh, adblvAai, ipiv^ta, abhiwrtA;
anOrudh; av&yati, prSvff, i^p&Tasn. In the Teda, the initial of ann
ii Bometimea lengthened after negative an: e. g. aoanudi, anOnukftyi.

a. In combtnition with yl go, the prefliee parR, pari, and pva
■ometimea change their r to 1. In this way fa formed a kind of derivatlie
■tern pal&y _fiea, inflected acooriling to the a-claiB, In middle voice, which
it not nncommon ftom the Brahrnanti down, and has so loit the eoa-
ulonaDeiB of its origin that it somettmea takes the angment preflied: thns,
apalftylqtltO" (CV^.), apaUyata (R.), apallyanta (HBh.); tt makes

ioy Google

1087—] XV. PSRIBHRASTIC AND COKPODHD CONnlOATlOH. 400

the perEphnitic perfect pftUL^Kifa oakr«. Tile item palT«7. elmlUriT
inflected, ocenn only In one or two texts (gB. JB. JTJB.); >nd plfty bu
bent found Dowheie except In H8. Also the Imperfect nllByftta (TS. TB.;
not upuited Id tbe pada-tezl) and perfect nUayibh oakre (QB.) sra
doubtlew • corretpondlng toTmition from yi with els, tboagh ae*ily lUn
in form uid meaning with form* tiom yll -|- nl So eleo pftrl becomea
pali in the combiaation palyaOe (^B. ^QS.), whether viewed u a denom-
inative fonnailoQ or as yafig -)- P&ri- And HS. hai once pl^bfAn^ran
(iii.ll).2i in an etymology).

(di Tbe lOot kf mo^ sometlmea aaiumes (oi Tetaina ^m a mora
original eonditlon) an initial s after the preflxea Bttxa, P»t!, nls, and np&i
thna, sadiBkarutB, aamaBbiUTMi, Badishfto, etc.; parlfkr^wauti,
pari;kfta, etc.; n£r aekfta; upaak^a. And yk^ lealler !■ aald by
the grsmmarlini to add B In fb* esme manner, ander certain cticnmttailcea,
after apct and pratl (only apaahiramg^, pratioaBkare, both late, are
quouble).

e> The passive participle of tbe root) dS give and dft cut baa often
the abbreviated form tta after a preSx — of which the final vowel, if 1, la
lengtiiaDad (compare 0C6f, and the derivative la tl, below, llBTo).

f. In a few sporadic caaes, the augment la taken before a prefli.
Instead of between it and the root: thna, avafafUrflt (GB.); udapra-
patat (AB.); anvaaadicarat, pratyaaaifaliarat, pratravTobat, auv-
avlkqet&m, apr&ifit, aaambhramat (MBh.); abbranlmantrajat
(Bar.); Ty&vaBtbSpi (SDS.) ; rompire also the forma tiom palSy, above, o.
And AB. bag once ninijoja (for uiyuyoja, as read In the correapondlng
pasiage of (^S.]- Some of the apparent roots of the language have been
■naprcted of being reenllg of a simllu unifleation of root and preflx: e. g.
Sp fcom & + ap, vyao from t1 + ao, tyaj Tnm atl + 1^.

g. The loss of the initial a of stllft and atambh after the preflx
ud has been noticed above (S33o). Also (13Ta, c), eerUin peonUultiea
of combination of a prefix with the Initial vowel of a root.

I0B8. Ab to tbe more geneml adverbial usee of the prefixes,
and tbeir prepoBitioaal uses, see the next oliaptcr.

1069. Ab to tbe combiuatlOD of the particles a or an. privative, dua
m, and an well, with verb-forma, aee llSlb, g, i. Aa to the addition of
the comparative and saperUtive snntiea tarftm and *«mii.iii to verba, em
above, 473 o.

Other TeTbal Compounds.

low). It has been Been above that some of the piepositional
prefixes are employed In combinatioD with only very small cluseB
of roots, namely those whose meaoiiig makea tbeoj beat fitted for
aniiliaiy and peiiphrasUc uses — enoh as kr make, bhu and aa be,
dbt put, 1 -jro — and that the first of these are wide)}' naed in com*

ioy Google

401 Verbal Compounds. [—1098

binntioD with a deiiTatlTe iu Am to make a peripbraBtie conjag«tioti.
Sooh roots have alao been, from tiie eailiest period of the l«Dgaage,
bnt with inoTessing freqcency, need in somewbat analogons oombi-
nations with other elementa, substantive and adjective aa well as
adverbial; and this has become, in part, developed 6nsll7 into a
regular and indefinitely extensiblti method of increaetng the resoaroes
of verba] expression.

lO&l. a. The older lingmge hu a nnmbei of (mogtl;) TsdnplleitiTe
onoDisu.po^tlc cotnponncls with roots kp >nd bhQ, the pieQipd elemant end-
ing In fi or I (generally the fonnei): thna, in RT,, ftkkbaUkftya eroai-
ing, JafiJanlbh&Tiult ftimmtring, alnlabh&Tnnt making merry, klUrlt
kr^ii tear; Id AV., maqma^it 'karnm. / have cnuHed; Id VS., maa-
marit TaUo TS.; HS. mramire^) kora; In TS., malmalftbh&Tftnt; In K.,
manmaUbliaTant, kikkltsksra; in HS., blblbftbb&vant, bharbbarj
'bhavat; Id AB., bababSkarrant. The a>-cenlDatlon, where shown, It
lita that of a 'erb'form with accompanTtng prefix.

b. Further, eombinationa with ykf of ntteraneea naed at the aacriflce,
and mostly ending In B: thni, av^ft, avadht, svagi; alao T&^f. In
these, too, the aicentnatloD la generally that of a rerb with pralli : e. g,
evag&kar6ti (QB.j bnt Bvadb£ karitl [?] TA.)> vafatkarylt (HS.);
and, with another nrefli, anuv&fa^arotl ((B.).

o. An Initanoe or two alao ocoar of ordinary worda in inch combi-
nationa, pnt in correipondlng form: thna, q^i knirftt ((B.) may roast
on a pit (qAU); tmr^Kkartoa (AB.) of getting char of debt; fttkyft-
bh&vayant (AA.) uniting.

lOeS. a. The nonn namas obtiteenet, homage, in ■ atlll more pnrely
noan-ialoe, becomes i^omblned with yk?; Id the Veda, only with the gerend.
In namaak^a (beaide haatagfhya and kan^ag^hya: above, 000 b).

b. A aolttary combination with yi go la ahown by the aeeaaative- 4n>
tain home; which, appearing only In ordinarr phrases fn RV., It In AT.
componnded with the partietplea — In aatailiyint, aatamenrAut, Asto-
mlta (with accent like that of ordinary componnda with a piefli) — and
In the BAhmanai and the later laognage la treated qnite tike a prsflx:
thnst astam^tl (CB.)-

o. Other ordinary scensatlie forms of sdJeetlTei in combination with
verbal derlTattves of kf and UlQ are tonnd here and there In the older
langnage; thus, fftuhk^ya and n«gnnilikftya(Ta.)i n ngnambhllTtilM,
pSmaaambhliTiika etc. (TS. et al.)-, Jmamfkarotl ({IB,].

1008. In the early bnt not In the earliest laognage, a nonn-
stem thus compounded with kf or bha (and ver^ rarelj with aa),
in verbal noana and ordinary derivatives, and then also In verbal
fonns, begins to assume a constant ending I (of doubtful origin).

a. There li no inatuice of this In RT., unleii the I of akkhallk^ya
(ahoTo, 1091a) is to be ao eipUined. In AT., besides the obaeore
WhltasTi OraDaar. 3. »a. 28

itizecy Google

1093—] XV. PKRIFHRABTIC and COUFOIIND CktHJUOATlOM. 402

T&dkrte and TBUktri, It foond onir phalQc&rKQa. In tbe BriAunkna
Ungnige, eiunpl«a begin to ocmi mora ofteu; thna, in TS., qyotS, mlth-
umi, mufti; in TB., further, pbtUi, kr&rt, udTSsI; tn (B., beaidM
some of these, alio eld, UUvili, tlvil, dArldrl, brUunw^ miUmai,
mi; Mid aqr&bhldtaKni, ot vhlch (u ot mn^) tbe I might be that of
an oidfaaiT grammatical fonn; In K., drlj in QB., pravftQl; in SB.,
vaJTi; In AB., nuttl (rron HMtytt). Fiom Dpaoithad and Sutra an to
be added AvUtl (MD.), sami (KgE.), nmvt and kafftU (AQS.). Th«
aocent la ia general like that ot thealmilar combinationa treated above (1001):
e. g. kra^kaTTAnti, svikflTn, brUmui^IbhdTa, mithiuUbbiTan^tn.
plutlikftrtavsi, krOrikfts; bat aometimei a mere eollecatlou takea place:
tbaa, mitkimi bb&vutUa (TS.), ph*ll krljr&m&^&a&m (TB.), vt^ii
bbdtrj (TA.). Tbe I la vailoiuly treated: now u an oneemblnable final,
a* In fyetl akomta and mitbimi Kbhavan (TS.) ; now at liable to th«
ordinat? conTeralona, aa in mithuay in^ft aylm, mltliaily fcbbih
By&m, and aTybkurvsta (^B.).

b. Ont of each boBinnluga bai grown in tbe later langnage tbe telloir-
Ing rale:

1004. Any noun or adjective stem is liable -to be oom-
pounded with verbal forme oi derivatives of the roots ^
Tat and H bhil [and of CIH as also; but such cases are ex-
tiemely rare), in the manner of a verbal prefix. If the
final of the stem be an a* or i-vowel, it is changed to ^ I;
if as n-vowel, it is changed to 3' Q.

a. fiiamplea are: BtambhlbbKTatl b«eoma a pott; akacdttlUiaya
bteominffof ont mind; apahftrlkaro^ iMou mtAeit an offering; nakliapra-
haKVfaiJankrta torn to pitet* ioUh blow* of tie cknci ; flthlllbliaTBatl
bteome U>oie; ka^^^llkfta rtng-thapod; BOrablilkrta mada fragrmt;
UbOuuta^a pawning; ijttkftra ttraigktming; hstfikarana taking at
eauta. A> In tbe caie of the denomlnatlvM (lOfiOo), the combinationa
vlth a-atemi are (he Immenae m^odty, and ocioi abundantly (hardly lee*
than a thoaiand ue quotable) in the later language, but for the moat part
oal; onoe or twice each; Iboae made with 1- and U'Btema are a TSt; amall
nomber. In a few inatancea, at«ma In an. and as, with tboae flnala
Bhaoged to I, are met with: e. g. Uml-kr, mvl-bbli: onmanlkr,
amanl-bhfl; flnal ya after a oonaonant la contracted to i: e. g. kiAsl-kTi
and anomalous cases like k&iiidiQl-bbQ occnr. Final f Is said to becotoe
tT, bat no examples are qaotable. The eambinationa with kf ate abant
twice >s frequent as thoia wltb bbH, and examples widi as do not appear
to baie been biooght to light.

b. Similu combinations are ooeaaiODally made with elementa of ques-
tionable or altogether obscure cbaiaeter: e. g. nrarl-kf, ori-lEf.

O, Eiamplei ara not altogether wanting In tbe later laagnage of > u

ioy Google

403 Noun- and ADJBCTivB-ooMPonNrw. [—1088

llii*l of the oompoonaed nonn-atam (cf. 1001): tkus, doIkUiS-kr, ni^nlB-
kf, f ambS-bf, mi one or lira othen.

1096. Of &)1 the forms which constitnte or are attached to the
rerbal Bysteiu, the passire participl« is the one most closely aaaiini-
Uted in its trsatment ua a cmnbinable ei«iaeat to an ordinary adjective.
Next to it oome the gemnd and the geriudlveB- Gombinationa of the
kind above treated of we qsite ocnmnon with paamve partteiples and
geinnda-

CHAPTER XVI.

INDECLINABLES.

109,6. The indeclinable wotds are* less distinctly divided
into separate parts of speech in Sanskiit than is usiial
elsewhere in Indo-Euiopean langua^ — especially owing
to the fact that the olasB of piepositions hardly has a leal
ezistenoe, but is represented by oertAin adverbial words
which are to a greater or less extent used prepositionally.
They will, howevw, be briefly described here under the
usual heads.

Adverbs.

1097, Adverbs by suffix. Classes of adverbs, some-
times of considerable extent, are farmed by the addition
of adverb-making suffixes especially to pronominal roots or
stems, but also to noun and adjective stems.

a. Tiieie Ig no ultimate diffeienoa betraan «nch tnfflxe* and the caaa-
endlne* Id d««leiulon; 'aad the adisibi of this diTuiOQ iometimea are naed

10B8. With the Bnffix tas are made adverbs having an ablative
sense, and not rarely also an ablative cona traction. Such are made:

a. From pronominal roots, In &tas, it&S, t&tM, y&taa, k&tos,
am^taa, avataa (not found earlier); from the pionomlnal stemi In t oi

D,j,i,...., Google

lOeS— ] XVi. iKSEOLINABLEfi. 404

d (494) of tha penonil pTODonDi: thnt, matUs (aul; exaniple to T.),
trattas, namAttns, yn^mattaa; >ad frotn pronoiolnal derliallTei: fhm,
itftr4tas, kfttar&ta«.

b. From nonn *nil td)Mtl*e ttami of etery ciau, linu tbe euliMl
period, bat moTs ^ely Utai: «. g. mnUutUw, agnit&a, rbbatAs, rkt&a,
hfttAa. QlrqatiM, Jnnmatas, iuwUm, yiOnft**** pb&tsB, uiy&taa,
ftnyfttar&taB, sarT&taa, ilftlr^Tjftttit) abhlpaUs (ante, in RT., from &
cu»>fiiim: patsntia).

O. From > Cgv prepoilttang: thni, abhftaa, parltas, intitaa.

d. EzimpleB ot tblitlTe construction are; Uo bhAya^ (R^) fort
than thai; Utah Qaftblit (AY.) from Oaf lixtA; kto 'nytea (gB.) trtU
any ofAar Man fAit; Barrato bhayfit (AOS.) from aU ftar; kate^ oid
d«^Kd igatya (H.) arrxmrxg from some rtgirm or oihtr; purSd Ita^ (B.)
from Mit <n'<y; taam&t pntakSyata^ (KSS.) /rofn (Aot daod hoiy.

e. Bat the dlitlnrtiie abUtiTe meanlnf: la not tnfreqnentlr effaced, and
tbe adTerb bai a more genaral, wpeclallr a locative, value: tbna, agrat&s
in froai; asmaUamlpataa >n our f>rM«nce; dbarmataa in aeeordanrx
Kith duty; obBgataa (H.) with referatee to M« goat; gn^ato 'dlilkah
(M.) mperior in virUu.

1069. With the fluffix tra (io tha older lao^age often trS) are
made adverbs having a locatire flense, and occasionally also a loca-
tive construction.

a. Theee adierba aie vaiy fair, compared with tboao In taa. They
■re formed cbleOy fVom pronominal stems, and from other stems haTfng a
qaasi-pranomlnal diaracter: namely, in tra, Atra, Utra, yitiv, kdtea,
aindtra, anyMra, vlqv&tTv, Barvitra, nbliay&tra, aparatra, nttara-
tra, Itarfctra, anyataratra, pflrratra, paratra, aamiiiiitra, akatra,
aaekatra, eUUkatra; in trfi; aematri, satr^ pnrutrA, babntHt,
dakyi^atrC But a few in trft come trom ordinary nonni: thus, deva-
ttt, martyati^ pnrDqatri, manaqratrit, pikatr^ garatri. knm-
paAcUaWt Those In trS are dlstlngulsbsd rrom the otbera by tbelr

b. Eiamplet ot locative conatraction are: h&Sta t dakqiljatrj (RT.)
M th« right hand; jktii 'dhl (BV.) in tchieh; ekatra pomfs (MBb.)
t'n a tingle mati', atra m&r&tmake (H.) in thii murdtroua creature;
prabhutvaifa tatra ynjyate (H.) eovareignly hefiti him. And, aa the
loeatlYe case ti nted also to expieas the gosl of motion (804), so tbe ad-
verbs In tra bate sometime* an aeonaative as vejl as a looatlve Talne:
thus, tatra gaooha go there or Ihiiher; path^ devatri yioftii (BT-)
roade that go to the god*.

1100. One or two other enffiies of locality are:
a, bo, in IkA hare, kAba mhere t and the Tedlo vlgv&ha (also vlg-
T&hft, vl^tbM.) aUeagi (compare below, 1104 b); and Ui& (lUeitra et«.:

ioy Google

405 ADVEOBiS Bv Derivation. [ — 1102

1008b) la Bometfmei nied with lowttve-cue value: e. g. iha SBmaye
(H,) of ^i* coty'uncture.

b. t&t, which li added lo word* faiTlDg: already a local oi dliectlie
Talue: thai, to adToibliJ accniatives, pr£lrt&t, AdakUt, Utvfttt&t; to
BdiBTblal ablittvei, Ar^ttftt. uttarittftt. par&Utttllti and to pnpoaltional
adveibi, pa^o^tftt, uUiAatftt, av&atftt, p&r&stst, pur&etftt, bahiftst.
Apparently by aoalogy with thsie laat, the infllK haa the fomi Btfit in
upirl|t&t (aod BhP. haa odMtSt).

C. bi, In uttftrabl ((B.) and daX;il?lUll (not qnotaUe).

1101. By the bu^ tbK ore made adverbs of manneT, especially
from pronominal roots or stems.

a. Thus, ti.th&, y&ttaJti katbi and Ittbi (by the side of which atand
k«tb4m and Itthim; and QB. has itib&)i and the lare ImAthA and
Kinutbft. And &tba t^. oftsn iXhi) to than donbtlsaa bslongi with them.
FunheT, from a (ew adjective and noan items, mostly of qiuui-preiiominal
charaotec: thus, Tl9v&tb&. aarv&thK, an^'^thS, tibbarithft, aparathK,
ItairAthi, yataritbA, yatam&thft, kataratbS, fcatAmattUl, pui'vfctbft,
pratii4thK, urdbv&ttiS, tirago&tbfi, ebathft (JB.), (iiuthii, nam&thft
[once, AV.); and evAtb&.

b. f &tli& becomes uanally toneless in V,, when need in tbe asDis of
iva aftai a noon forming the sabjeet of comparison: thni, t&yAvo yath&
(RT.) Ukt thiwei.

lioa. One or two other suffixes of manner are:

a. tl, in iti thut, verjr commonly used, from the earliest period,
especially as particle of quotation, following tbe words quoted.

b. EismpUs are; brabm(0>yA "yAm Itl odd &vooan (KV.) if they
him* laid "Ihis is a Srahmm't wife"; tAm devd abmvau vratya kldi
nu tlfthoai 'tl (AV.) the godt »aid to htm : " Vra^/a, why do you tltmdf"
Often, tbe it! is uaed more pregnantly: thaa, y&^ qradd&dhftti B4nti
Aevi iU (AV.) ichoecm- hat faith that the godt txitt; toih vyftgbrufi
mnnir moqiko "yam Itl paqyati (H.) the tage looht upon that Ugtr at
being really a mouie; yOyaifi klm itl aidatha (B.) u>hy (HI. alleging
what reaion) do you tilt

a. But Iti la aometimes used in a leas epeclaliied way, to muk au
onomatopiBia, or to indicate a geatare: e. g. bahl^ (e aatu bal Itl (AV.)
M it comt out of you with a iplath; tty &gre kn&ty Ath6 ti (^B.)
he ploughs f,rtt thit way, then thit way ; or It points forvard to lomething
to be said: e. g. yan or ity ftbur any&nl oband&Aai varf lyftfisi kas-
m&d bfbaty uoyata iti (PB.) when now they tay thut: "the other
metres are greater; why it the b^bati tpakenf It alao makes a number
of derlvatlTea and compoundi: e. g. Itltba the lO-marty-eth; iUvat in thi»
faehion; Ityartham for thit purpoee; Itih&sa attory or legend (Ut flu*
foreooOt it was). Aa to the use of a nomlnstlTe with iti aa predicate to
an aecnaative, see 268 b.

ioy Google

IIOS— ] Xyi. Indeounablbs. 406

d. Vith tha aatfli otitl li to be eompued that at Urta etc (BIQ). The
word ii abbreriatad to tl two ot tbree time* la 9B.

a. va In iva (tonelus) like, at, >nd «tA (in T. often OTi£), euliei
Mia, liter ■ ptitiele emphatiztng ihe preceding word ; for lAut is aied later
tlie relttod vrim, vUcli hudlr oconra In RV., and Is AT. onlr wl(k yvid :
u, eriifa -vidv^ ktunoing thut.

t. In later Tedie (AT. ate., and tba later parta of RT.J Ira more often
connta ftir oolj ■ slii^e »yll«bl*, "Ta.

1108. a. B7 the saffix dS are made adrerbs of time, bntalmoat
only from pronominal roots.

b. Thoe, tadi, yad^ kadit (in RT. alio kida), iiU (only in T.);
•nd sfcdft, beside which la fonnd eadiei B&danl- Betidet theee, In the
Dldet langnage, only sair<radii later a few otbers, anrwlK. ekadS, nft-
ytuU. A qnaal-loeatlTe ca»e n«e is aeen oeeailonall} in inch phtaaea a*
kadfteld diTaa« (B.) on a certain day.

o. By the perhaps related dftnun are made idamm, tadintm,
Ti^adiEnlm, tvadKnlm. (tonelesB). TlQvad^nl occnn as adJectlTe In TB.

d. With rU are made, from pronomlaiil roots, t&rhl, et&rhi, yirhl,
Uu-hi, aii)6chL

e. The aoffli di, fonnd only in yfcdi if, la pethap* related with dl,
in form as in meaning. Badadi (H3.) is of donbtfol character.

1104. By the saffix SUA are formed adverbs especially from
nomerals, si^ifying -fold, timet, way*, etc.

a. That, ekadlia. dvidhli (also dvidhS and dvedbi), tridhK
(In the the older Ungaage nsaally tredtaa), ^a^^^ (alio f oijli^ >nd ^a^*
dhS), dvAda9ad]i^ ekSimavlAqatldh^ aahasradh^ and so on. Also,
naturally, from words hailng a qassl-numeral chaiactei: thus, anekadhK,
katldbit tatidba, bahudh^ pomdhi, vl^itdbK, qa^adbi,
aparimitadhO, yBvaddtaa, otAvaddb^ iiiBAadli&. In s very few cases,
also from general nonn and adjectlie items; thus, mltradl^ (AT.],
prlyadhft (XS. ; predhj, MS.), (Jadh^ (TB.). uradhft and ottradhK
(BhP.); and ^m one adverb, bablrdha.

b. The particle Adba or idhK, a Tedic equivalent of itba, probably
belongs here (puradhA and vi^&dka, with shortened floal, occur a few
times In BT.); also addhi in truth; and perhaps eabi wM, which has
an equivalent sadha- In several Tedlc ccmponnds. And the other adverbs
in ha (1100 a} may be ot like origin.

IIOK. From a few nnmerala are made mnltipllcatlve adverbs with s:
namely, dvis. trfa, and oatur (probably, for oatura]: 480 a.

a. The corresponding word for once, aakft, 1* a oompoond nthei
ihan a derivative; and the sune aharactei belongs (tiU mote evidently to
pafioakftvaa. navak^aa. aparimltakftvas, etc., though kft and
kftvaa are regarded by the native grammarians aa aaflUea; the eullar

L.,j,i,....,C-'OOJ2lC

407 I Adverbs bt Derivation, [ — 1108

texts (AT. (B. MS.) b>ve Bitpt& kftvas, dj^a kftvae. dvltdaf ■ kftras,
ftft&T ey4 k^tv&a, eto. AB. bu tbe redtinitant eombinitlaa trif k^va^.

b. The qnui-Boffli dyiu, ttom > ctae-torm of dlv day, is In >
limilu mannei iidded to varloaa deteminlng words, genenlly made U eod
In e; e. g. ftnyedyoa another day, ubh^edyua (AT. -yady^) on either
day, pfirredyuB th« daj/ be/ore.

IIOS. Bj the gnffix ffa are made, especiallf from oumeinl or
qnftntitative stemB, many adverbs of quantity or measure or maniLer,
generally used diBtribntively.

ft. ExamplsB >ie: eka94a otu by one, Qata^&a by hundred*, ftaijim
teaton by taaton, iiooohaB foot by fool, akfaraf&a eyllabU by sylMle,
Ea^ag&B in erowde, etamba^&B by bunches, paraf9&a litnb by limb,
UlTftOOhAa m «ueA and tneh number oi quantity: ind, in > mora genaril
-way, earrafia uholiy, makbyaQaB principally, k^hrs^sa ttingOy,
nuuiinKf&a m minded.

1 107. By the suffix v&t are made with great freedom, in every
period of the language, adverbs signifying after the manner of, like, etc

a. Thus, aagirasvit like Angirae, mauuqv&t (RV.) ae Manu did,
Jamadagnivit after the manner of Jamadagni, pBrraT&t or pratnav&t
01 purS^av&t a> of old, kftkat&Uyavnt after the fashion of the crow
and the palm-fivit.

b. Thia |g lealljr tbe adTerblsUy naed accntatlTe (with ad*eibial shift
of accent: below, 1111 c] of the snfBx vtuit (1238 f), whioh in tbeTeda
makes eartain adJerUve compcnnd* of ■ similar meaning: thos, triTant
Itke thee, mivont of my tort, etc.

1108. By the tnfflx alt are made from nonns qnaal-adverbs slgalfy-
tng in 01 into the eondition or the potte lion of wbst is Indlested by (he
nonii ; the; aie nsed only with Terbi ofbeinf, of beooming, and of making:
namely, ofteneit k^ and bhn, but abo as, gun, yK, and ni faod, accord-
ing to the giammarlani, aain-pad). Some twenty-flve eumplea ate quo-
table from the later litoratotej bnt none ^m the earlier, which also
sppean to contain nothing tbst casta light upon tbe origin of this fonnatlon.
The a of nKt la not liable to conreriion Into f. The connection with tbe
verb It not so close as to reiiaire the use of tbe gerand In ya Instead of
that in tvft (800) ; and other words are sometimeB Interposed between the
adverb and verb.

a. Examples aie: BaFvakarm&^l bhaamasSt knrate (HBIi.) redueet
alt deedt to athee; loko 'yaih dasyuftftd bhaved (MBh.) (Aw uiorld
would become a prey to barbariane ; yaaya brUimn^aB&t sarvadi vlttam
Aslt (HBh.) tchoie tchole property uiae given to Srahmane ; nlyat&ifa bhaa-
masftd yStl (Hat.) it it inevitably reduced to aehee; agnin fttansaSt
iLftvtk (Y,) having taken the firee to one't telf.

1108> a> Soffiiea, not of nonn-derlvatlon or of Inflection, may be
traced with more or less planalbillty in ■ few other adverbs. Thns, for

ioy Google

HOB — ] XVI. iNDECLlNABLEa. 40

example, in prftt&r earfy, >nd Bnnut&r auray; In dakqlQlt wiU rifM HokJ^
and dkltvit toiM cotuiJ«ratSm; la nQnAm now, and nlnftnAm oarvmify.
Bat the eatet *tt in the maiD too rare and donbtfoj to be word notice bete, f^

b. In the epio* begin (o be feand a imall cUh (about a dozen an
quotable) of adveibe haTtng the farm of a lepeaced nonD-stem with it* lint
ooeoirenco eodlng In K and lu second in i: e. g. liastOhasti hand If
hand, r&th&nitlil dmriot agavut chariot, kkn^&kan^ tar to ear.

o. The adverbs tfauB &r described ue almost never ased pre-
positionsli^. Those of the next division, however, are in manf in-
stanoes so ased.

1110. Case-Corms used as Adverbs. A laige num-
ber of adrerbs are more or less evidently oases in form,
made &om stems which are not otherwise in use. Also
many oases of known stems, pronominal or noun or adject-
ive, are used with an adverbial value, being distinguished
from proper cases by some difference of application, which
is sometimes accompanied by an irregularity of form.

^1111. The aocnsative is the ease moat freqneatly and widely
Dsea adverbially. Thus:

(a^ Of pronomlsal ttenit: m, 7&d if, lehm, that, etc; tid then, etc;
kim irAy, whether, etc.; td&m note, h«re; ad4a yoitdtr; aad m on. Of
like valne, appateutly, ue the (moitl)' Tedl«) partielM Ud, Um and
kain(P), {d, old (comnon at btot; period], Bm4d and smn&d, im and
wim (by gome regarded aa atill posteiiing pranonn-Talae), -kim. Com-
ponnda with Id are oM if, aid Ugt, id, avid, kuvid; with old, kAoid;
with •kIm, nAfc-Tin uid mikim, and iklm.

b. Of noun-itenu: ac, nama by name; aAUiam happily; fc^">fLm
at teiU, if you pkata; ntktam by night; eUitm iteretfy; Offcm quitUy
(V.) i and 10 on.

C> Of adjectlte etoma, la nnllmlted nnmbera: ai, saty&m truiy;
olT&ni long; pdnram form»rly; ni^am eomtantly; bhdyaa more,
ogam; viqrabdtaam eon_fidenth/\ praks^am openly; and •» on.

d. The neater alngnlar ia tbe caae oommonly employed Id thia wajr;
and it la so need eapeoially aa made tKm great nnmbers of oonponnd ad-
JecElTe etema, often f^m aaoh aa hardly occur, ot ate not at all found. In
adjective nae. Oettaln of these adTerbial eomponnds, having an Indecli-
nable aa prior member, are made by the Hindu giammarians a apaeial claas
of compounds, called avyayibhAva (1818).

e. Bat the feminine aingolai alao ia aometimea uaed, eapeclally iit
the to-called adTetblal endings of comparison, tarjbn and tamKm, which
ace atUched to partidea (cf, 1110), and even (478o) to verb-forma:

ioy Google

409 Case-fohus ab Advekbs. [ — lllfl

e. g. oMaJcixa, k&tluuiitarSm, aooUstar^. 9&n&litarba, Jyokta-
tnXm. Id tbe oldest Uoguige [RT. ind AV.}, the uenter iDttMd of the
feminine toim of thsM tufOxM la >lma«t Uone lu lue; ae 1118.

£ Haay tclvetbi of obfenre form ot conoactioD are to bs ezplalued with
probability u iccuaUlTea of obsolete noan oi adjective ilemi: eiamplea are
tOfQlm in tiUnce; sAy&m at gutning; fl&k4in thogtther, leUk (prep.)i
imaa or Uaia mffieimt (in tbe lator laognage lued irlth i^kf In tbe maDnn
of a piellx: 1078 a); prftyaa uauaUy; If4t $<m«Khat; unnAa unex-
paOedly; bahia ouUidt; mitba and mithto, m^Q and muhiu, jitn*
and BO on. M«dlik etc., and nl^ik (In BT.), are peihapa contracted
Conns of adjectlTei haTing yao or mSto aa their Anal (407 ff.). The pree-
ence of btber roota aa final meinben la aUo probable for uqiMllUik, Sun'
9&k and STOf&k, annqthi^ and BOftbn, jmgap&t, etc. ' Compare alio
tbe (bnns in am beaide those In ft, above, 1101 a, llOSs, 1108b.

g. In (Tedie) dravitt quiekfy la to be seen a change of accent tor
^e adTsrbial use (pple ddtvant rumang); and dntb^&t itouUy (KV.,
once) may be another eiamplo. The compaiatiTe and anpeilatlTe sufllxea
(above, e) show a like change; and it la also to be recogniied In the dorlv'
aiiTsa with -rkt (1107).

1112. The inatinmentftl is also often used witb adverbial
value: generally io the eiDgular, but HOmetimeB also in the pLarsl.
Thtu:

a. Of ptononinal sterna: as, mt and ay^ Uyft, ana, am^ amnylL

b. Of nonn-atema: aa, kqaqena inttantli/\ a9efe9S compleUly;
vi<j*^^ Mptcialfy; ^v&bj/ day; til^^jA /oriunattlt/; BiiuteAtudiUnlg;
nktubhlB by night; and ao on.

0> Of adjectiiea, both neoter (not diatlngiiishable from maecaline) and
feminine: aa, akbUana whoUy; prOye^a tnoitly; d&kql^ena to the touth-
dttar^a to the north; Autarei^ leithtn; clrA^a loiu/\ — gioSlB and
q&nakSla tlotoiif, uaoiSa on high; tuoJUo btiow; parftoftia afar;
t&vl^hlB mightily; and so on.

d. More donbtful cisea, moatly from the older language, may be in-
stanced aa follows: tiraqoiktB. dev&tfi, bUlAtfi, and aaav&rtft (all BV.),
homonymoaa inatramentals from nouns In ti; dvltlt, tftdltnSa irma,
mna, Ttthft. akoh, aathit(P)i mndliS (not T.), adbuai (B. and later).

e. Adterblally naed Insttamentals are (In the older langnage), oftenet
than any other eaae, diatlnguished from normal Inatromentala by differences
of form: thua, especially, by au irregular accent: as, ama and dfvS
(given above)-, perhaps g^hft; apftki, tmayi, kuhayi(P); naktay^
Bvapnay^ oamanai adatraylt. |t^^ ubbay^ annmayA (P) i dak-
ft^A, madbyA; aioi, pTioi, \xoo&, pa^oa, taraqca; Taa&ntS; — in
a few a-stema, by a y inaerted before the ending, which is accented: tbn*,
amoyit (given above), ft^uyi, aEdbuyi, roghnyi, dh^^uya, anof-

u,j,i,... ., Google

lllS— J XVI. INDE0IJKA&I.H8. 410

(hny^ mithnyi; — anil ur<riy& (lot nrvyi) uid vifrj^ (pnipeilr
vi^Bji) are more slightly Irregular.

1113. The dative has onlf very seldom an adverbial use.

a. Eiamplei aie apar&ya for the futura (BV.: with dungod iccent);
olrltira hng; (trthOyK for the iak» of; nbaSjA prateatiy.

1 1 14. The ablative Is not Id frequently need adverbially.
Thai:

a. Of proDomin&l ittini; *a, k&BmKt whyf akosmSt eatttalk/, un-
exptetedly; it, tit, yit (V.: normal tanas, inetead of th» pronominal
ana&t etc.).

b. or DODD-atems: *a, ftstt near; &rat afar; balfit foreSih/; knta-
halKt emulotufy; BaklfAt on the part of.

o. Oft^neit, of adteetiTeBtema: u, ixaitafar; m.o&thelou>; pafOJt
behind; ^l^it plainfy, aetuallj/; «aa»Xit>t completelj/ ; AoixBX not long;
pra^akqatamftt (AB.) mott obvtoutbf, pRktrantit (S.) fo the end.

d> In a tew faaUncea, adTerblally med abUtivoa likewlae «bov »
chniged accent In the early langnage: thnt, a!gSliit from afar;- amitji'om
near by; unit from of old (Unt Inatr, B&iUl); Mttattit _fl-om the norik;
(wUutrit belou>.

1116. The genitive is almost Dever Bsed adverbially.

a. In the older langnage oeenr «kt6« by night, and v&atoa fiy day;
later, oiraeya long.

1116. The locative is sometimes ased with adverbial value.
Thns:

a. From noan and adjective sterna; Oki n«iir; ftrt and AOxi afar'.
abijinvalA behind; a»taxi^Jth at home; ftA toiHiottt (^n^.y, igt^infyoHt;
■tbKne tuitablg; eapadt immediately; •arth« and-'kftt (common in com-
poiltlon) for tiie taJce of; aparf^n t» after time; ftdftn _firtt; rahasi
t'» lecrtt,

1117. Bren a nominative form appeara to be atereotyped into an ad-
varltlal value In (Tedio) kfa, intenogattve particle, and ita Bomponnda
n&kis and makla, negative particlea. And maec. nomlnativei from a&e-
atema (as p&rBfi AB., nyUL Apaat) are sometime* foond need by gab-
stitation tot neater*.

1118. Verbal Prefixes and kindied words. The
veibal prefixes, deeoribed in the pieceding chapter (1078 ff.),
aie properly adrerba, having a speoial office and mode of
use in connection with verbal roots and their more imme-
diate derivatives.

a. Their occasional looser oonnecUon with the verb has been
noticed above (1064). In the value of general adverbs, however,

D,j,i,....,CiOOJ2lC

411 Adtekbial Pkbfixbs. [— IlSl

tbe; only rarely occur (except ts &pl baa mainly changed its office
from prefix to adverb or oonjonotlon in the later laDgnage); bat their
prepositional nsee are moch more freqnent and important: see below,
llSBb.

b. In compoiltJon with nonna, the; (like otber ulTtibUl elementa) not
infrtqaently hsie in *d]ecttve iMue; Me below, 1281 B., 180K.

11 IB. Seyenl of the piefliei (u noUced iboTS, 478*4) form com-
puillTe and snpetlttiTe adjectives, by the lafflxea tara and tama, ot ra
and ma: thus, dttara and attaint, idhara snd adhamA, Apara and
apami, 4vara and aivssuk, Apara &nd apam^, and pratliamA Is
danbtlesa of tbe same.cbaTatteT; also, intara and Antama. And sccnsa-
tiTes of sneh derivative adjectives (foi the moat part not otbenrlse found In
use) have the Talne of eompaiatives, and rarely saperlattves, to the preflxea
themielica: thns, BUiqltadi oit saihtaHufa s&di ql^ftdhi (AT.) tehaUvtr
it quiekerttd do th«u etill further guicAm; vitar&ifa vi kramaBTa (RT-)
jfrwfa i>ati/et more widely; -pik t4di naya pratarijfa v&syo &oha (BT.)
Uad him forward etill further toward advantage; ild eaam uttar&ifa
niva (AT.) had him up stiU higher.

a. Besides those Instanced, are found also nltar&m, apatar&m, abU-
tarim, AvaXta&m, pamtar&m, paraatacAm. In the Biahmanai and
later (above, 1111 e), the feminine aeaasatlTe la used instead: thus, ati-
tar^ and atitamKin, abhltarim, anutamjim, gtamfcn, pratitar&n,
nltar&n, attar&n, pratarfEm and pratamam, vitarim, aaifatar^
(also RT., once).

1120. Kindred in origin and character witli the verbal pre-
fixes, and need like them except in composition with verbs, are a
few other adverbs: thns, ttvka down; adh&a below (and adhaataHtm);
parka far off (and paraBtaram)i pnra before; aatarlt [apparently,
ant&r-j-a] among, between; katinear; up&rl above; and Bfthi (already
mentioned, 1104 b) along, with, and a&oS together, with, may be notioed
with them. Tin± without, and vi^u- apart, appear to be related
with vi.

1121. Insep&iable Prefixes. A Btnall number of
adverbial piefixee are found only in combination with other
elements. Thus:

a. The negative prefix a or an — an before vowels, a tiefore
consonants.

b. It Is combined especially wHb Innumerable nouns and adjeoHTes;
much more rarely, with adverbs, as akutra and &punar (RV.), ftnara
(AY.), inadhaa (TR.), akaamSt, asak^tl in rare cases, alto with pTo-
nouns (as atad, akddtoit) ; and even, in the later langnage, now and then
irtth TBiba, as aaprbayanti (BhP. Qig.) ttey do not detire, alokayati
(SD.) he doei not view. Now and and then it U prefixed to lUelf: a. g.

nira, anaviprayukta, anavad7a(P).

Digitizecy Google

IISI— ] XVI. Indbclinablks. 4)2

o. In k T«ty few cues, tliG negatlie a tppean to be mtie long:
thua, ia^t non-t^ttni, idevtt godleai, lEr&ti eiumy, ft^ftaoa impurity,
£tura ill{?].

A. The IndependBnt negative tdveibB, ll& uid xai, sie only in ei^
oeptloii»l InitancM oied in eompoiltlao: see belov, 1122 e.

0. Tbe oomitative prefix sa, used instead of the prepoaitlon sam,
and interchangeably with sah&, before DoanB and adjeetireB.

f. The prefix of diapraiee due ill, badlg (identical with Kdof:
22&a}.

g. It li combined Id tba isme manner u (t or an. Of combluktion*
with a vetbil form, at least a ilngle example appears to be quotaoie:
du9oaTaiitl (B.) behavt ill.

h. The corresponding landatory prefix eu wtll is in geoeral to
closelj accordant in its use with the preceding that it is best men-
tioned here, thongh it ooours not rarel; as an independent particle
in the oldest language (in RV., more than two hundred timesi in the
peculiar parts of AV., only fourteen times), and even occasionallr
later.

1. The panicle en Bometime* appears In B. ftnd latei bafoie a vetb-
foim, and considering It* rapid loai of Independent uae In V., and the
analogY ot a and dua (above, b, g) it ia probably at leaat In part to be
regarded as In compoBltion with the verb. The pada-taxt ofAV. zlx. i9.
10 reads Bu-fcpj^ati, bat Ita teattmoiiy is of little or no value. E. has
na an vljfiftyete and na t&I bu vidu^. and KeD. has StI veda; TB.
has BUS&mbodh^atl (f) ; HBh. and BhP. have aapatasthe; R. has au-
Qakyante.

J. The eiclamatery and usnaUy depieclatlve pieflsed forms of tbe
Interrogative piouonn (506) are most analogous with tho Id separable

1122. MiscellaneouB Adverbs. Other words of ad-
verbial chaiaoter and office, not oleaily lefeiable to any of
the olasBes hitheito treated, may be mentioned as follows:

a. Asseverative particles (in part, only in the older language):
thus, afigi, h&nta, kdla, kh&lu, tu (rare is older language), vfii, vtvi
(in Brahmana language only), hi, blni, a. &ha, ha, gha, aamaba,
Bma, bhala.

b. Of theiB, h&nta is • word of assent and incitement; hi hat won
also an illative meaning, and accents the verb with vbieh It standi In
connection (&05 e)j ama sometimes appears to give a past meaning to ■
pieaent tense (778 b); u Is often combined with the Anal a of other pai-
tlclea: thus, itho, n6, m6, ntd, upo, prd; but also with that of verb-
totms, at datt6, vidmA. The final o thus piodaoed is pragfhya or un-
comblnable (188 c]. Particles of kindred value, already mentioned above,

D,j,i,....,L-'OOJ2lC ■

413 A&vBRBS. [—lias

ue Id, k&m or bun, old, J^tu, ev&> Some of the uiereiatlTe putlclei
ue mncli nied In the liter BTtlBeUI poetry «lth e purely expletlTe nine,
M derleea to help mike ont the metre (pKdnpQra^a veree-JilUri); to
eipeciellT bm, hi, tn, BIII&.

0. Negative p&rticles are: ak, sigQifying simple negation; mi,
signifying prohibition.

d. A« to the conitTDctlan of the verb irlth m^ tee tbove, 679. In
the Tedi, nu (or nti: 948 ■) hu ilsa aometlmei 1 negative memlng. Far
the Tedle' 11& o( eompaitaon, eee beloir, g, h.

«. In tuthl, nk 1b combined with Iii, both elements retaining their
full meinlng; also vith Id tn uM lett. It ta perhapi preient In nanu
and oan^ bat not in hini (RT., onr.e). In |eneia), neither ni nor id£
le nied in oompoaltion to make negative' eompannde, but, Instead, the In-
tepanible negative preBi a or an (1133 &); exoeptlon* are the Tedlo par*
tlolei niklB and vi^fels, ntVTm and miklm; alio oadnuu and mK-
otram, napniblttlut, and, In the later Ungoage, a nnmber ot others.

r. Interrogfttive partirles are only those already given : k&d, kim,
kuvid, «vid, nanfi< of which the last introduces an objection or ex-
pos tnlation.

g. Of particles of comparison have been mentioned the toneless
iTK, and 7ath& lalso toneless when used in the same way). Of fre-
quent oocnrreooe in the oldest language Is also ni, having (without
loss of accent) the same position and value as the preceding.

h. Examples at the nk at comparUoD are : ffldvf^ {puh ti& Bfjata
dTf^am (KT.) Itt loote your enmity Itkt an arroui at Ou enemy of the
*inger; vkgo ai. vTk|&m (AT.) at birde to Ote tree; gSar6 nk tr^U&fy
piba (RT.) drink like a thirttg buffalo. This nae la generally explained
as being a modification or adiputlon of the negative one: thai, {although,
to be aura] not [preeiiely^ a thirity buffaio; and so on.

1. Of particles of place, besides those already toentioned, may be
notieed kr^ loheret (in V., always to be read koa).

J. Particles of tlmo are: nfi now (also ni: nOnim was mentioned
above, 1109 a), adjk and aadyia and ladlvaa (R?., once) loday,
at onee (all held to contain the element div or drn), hji» yesterday,
qr&a tamorrovi, Jy6k lalso related with Aju) long; punar again.

k. Of particles of manner, besides those already mentioned, may
be noticed itana varitnuiy (for wKngHitiii^ itg derivative, see 1109 a);
WBvkt (RV.) seereOy.

L In the above ciutlflMtioni ire included all the Tedlo advecblat
worda, and moat of thoae of the later language: for the reat, see the dlo-
tlonaries.

ioy Google

11S8— ] ^VI. Ihdbcunablbs. 414

Pr«|Wtiiiont.

112S. Theie ia, as alieady stated, no proper clasa of
prepositioaB [in the modeiD sense of that teim), no body of
wotds having for theiz prevailing office the "government"
of nouns. But many of the adverbial words indicated above
are used with nouns in a way wbich approximates them
to the more fully developed prepositions of other languages.

K, If one ind inothei of sach woide — u vinfi, fte — oecois UmotI
solely tn prspoiltioual lue, thli la meiely toitaitoo* ioA nueasenti&l.

1IS4. Words axB thus used prepoutionall}' along with all the
nonn-oaaes excepting the dative. But ia general theii office ia dino-
tive ovij, deteimiuiiig more definitely, or strength suing, the proper
case-Dse of the nonu. Sometimes, however, the case-use is not easy
to trace, and the noon then seems to be more immediately "goveraod"
by the preposition — that is, to have its case-form more arbitrarily
determiDod by its association with the latter. This is oftenest tma
of the accusative; aad also of the genitive, which has, here as else-
where (SMb), suffered an extension of its normal sphere of use.

lias. a. The adverbs by derivative form (I'oeTff.) have least
of a prepositional value (exceptions are espeoiaUy a few made with
the snfdx tas: lOSB).

b. Host of the verbal prefixes (exceptions are nd, nl, para, pra;.
and ava and vi are almost such] have their prepositional or qnasi-
prepositional uses with cases; but much more widely in the older
time than in the later: in the clssslcal language the usage is mainly
restricted to prati, ann and ft.

c. Host of the directive words akia with the more proper pre-
fixes are used prepositionally: some of them— as aaha, v^iS. nparl,
antarA, pari — freely, earlier aiul later.

d. The case-forms used adverbially are in many instances used
prepositionally also: oftenest, as was to be expected, with the gen-
itive; but frequently, and from an early time, with the accusatave;
more rarely with other cases.

e. We «ill ttke np nov (he cuea foT > brief esposltion, beginning
with those that ue least fieely need.

liae. The Locative. This eaae is least of all used villi vords
Ibit can clsim tfae name of pieposition. Of diractiTeB, ant&F and Ita later
deilTatlve antarit, meaning loithin, in, are ofieneit added to it, and In the
classical language aa veil aa eailiei. Of frequent Vedic nse with it are i and
&dM; thus, mirtre^T & among mortalt; prthlvyam kdiiy dfadUl^
the plantt apart lAe tarih; t4jo miyl dhftrayi 'dbi (AV.) ettabHih glory

ioy Google

415 PsBPOsinoNa. [— 11S8

m mi; — &pl tni apa at mncli iubi : thiu, ji apitm &pi vraM [sAati]
(BV.) tcho art in lit domain of tha wattrt ; anoAx y& dpft sdrye [e&nti]
(BT.) aha are up yonder in Me tuit; — s4aS o^onp with ia not raM in
RV., bat ilmoit entlralr nnkninm I4W1: itint, pitri^ s&o& sftti ttaj/ing

1127. The In (,tiQ mental. Th« dlieetlTeB ased with this case ue
aljnoit only tboae vlileb contMn tlie usociatlTe pronominal root aa: u nallA
(moBt freqaent), BfikAm, Bardbim, Bam&m, saia&yS, Bar&thun; >nd. In
tli« Ted*, th« piefli B4m : u, te Bmnfttibblh B&ih pitnlbUr nA vf^aip
nMMTinahi (RT.) may tee be uniled leifh fAy /avori ae men wiih their
apoute). By mbstltation of the imtiumenC&l for the BbUtlve or septntlon
(S83 ■], vinft uiiMouf (not Tedic) takae sometimes tba Instnimentd; and
BO, In tbe Teda, aviie doum and pKT&s beyond, vllb nhich the abUliie is
alio, and mnch more normally, constraed. And &dlil. In RV., is naed with tba
inMtBmentals buuu& and snubMB, where the locatiye woald be expected.

1128. The Ablative. In the piepoaltioDsl eongtnictianB of the ab-
lative (ai was pointed ant and parll; illustrated above, 293), the ablattve
Tslne of the use, and tbe merely dlnctiTe Talae of tbe added particle, are
for the most part clearly to be traced. Han; of thn Tcrbal prefliea ars
more or Iobs frequently Joined in the older language with tblt use: oftea-
est, &dhi and p&rt; more spoiadlcally, inu, ApB, iva, pr&tl, and the
separatiTes nla and wl. Ihe ohange of meaning of the ablative with i
hither, b; which it comes to flit the office of Its opposite, -the aecosatlTe,
wa« snfflclently explained above (29S 0). Of dlreative words aUn wltb
the preflxea, many — as babfo, pnrJM, &T&e, adbiB, par^B, pnrlt, vlnS,
and tlr&B out o/hnotoledge of — accompany this case by a perfectly regular
conBtrnetlon. Also the case-forms arrak, prate, po^at, OrdllT&in,
pdrvam, p&rain, and ^W tottAoui, of irUoh tbe natnral construction wltb
an ablative is predominant earlier.

1129. The Accneatlve. Many of the verbiil prefixes and related
words take an accompanying accasstive. Host natnrally (since the accusa-
tlTe is essentially the to-caie], thoss that express a moUon or action to-
ward anything: as abhi, priti, &1ID, lipa, ^ iti and idhi In the sense of
orn- OR to, or aerou, beyond, UxiiB through, ant&r and antar J when mean-
ing between, p&rl around. Examples are; 7^ prad£90 abbi aAlyo
Tlc&ft° (^'^0 t^hat qtiartera the eun look* abroad unto; kboihj acni^
pr4ty Kyatim n^aaatn (RV.) jigni hai been atDokened to meet the ad-
earunng daunt; gaooliet kadOoit BTaJanadi pratl (HBh.) sA« might go
eomeuhither to her oum people \ Imaih prak^Sml nrpatlih prati (MBh.)
him I wiU aek vrith reference to the king; m4ma oitt&m Ann oittibhir
b ta {J^y .) foUow aJUr my mind with your minde; 6 "by 4 na^ (AV.)
come hither to ui; upa na 6 I17 arraS (BV.) come hither unto us; 76
dev6 m&rty&A &ti (AV.) the god v>ho ii beyond mortab; adhlQllidya
v&roaaa 'dhy anyan (^V.) excelling afrovt olhere in glory. Also abhitaa
and parltas, which bare a like vslne with the simple abbi and p&ri;

ioy Google

1186 — ] XVI, Ihdecuxablkb. 4|6

>Dd npfcli abovt (oftener vitb genitive). Leei tccordant widi ordtnaTy
■CQiwatlTe eowtrnetionR U the nie of this i:4ae with &db&B, paraa, pnr»s,
VinB. beiide other hum whlr.h aeem more aolted to the meuiing of thme
ptnlolei. And the >*ins mar be sild of moet ol the adveibUl oae-fbmiB
with which the ■ecDiatlTe is noed. Thae, a nombeT of iiutmnientaU of
altnatton oi dfrection: as 76 'vure^ "ditT&m, yi p&renS "dltytm
(TB.) fhaie who are below the tun, Mom ioAo are beyond the ran; intare^
y^nim (QB.) toithin the ioomb; t» hi 'dam. uitarei^ft Bornun C^^.) for
all thie univeree ie between them; dttare^a garhapatyam (9^.) to the
north of eA< houeehoUer'e fire; dAkfl^ena v^dim (QB.) to the eotOh of
the tacrificial hearth; dak^i^saa VTkfav&tiUm ((.) to the right efthe
orchard; nlka^i yanmnftm (Bar.) near the Yamuna. Similarly, -ordb-
vam and pOrvam have an accusative object ai well as an ablatlie; and
the aame Is true later o( fte. Abhlmilkhain toward haa a more natuial
light to coDstrni^tlon with this case.

1180. The Oenltive. The words which are acn^mpanlctd by tbe
genitWe are mostly caae-forms of noma, or of adjectlvea used snbstantively,
retaining enough of tbe noan-rharacter to take thla caae as their natnnl
adjunct. Bach are the locatlTea agre in front of, abbyftqe near, arttao
and krte for the take of Dimltte and hetUn by reason of, madhya in
the midet of; and other caaea, as arthKya, kSra^&t, iokSqJLt, hetoa. And
really, althaagh leia directly and obTiousir, ot tbe same character are other
adjective rases (some ot them showing otber constrnntlons, abeady noticed):
as adhara^a, uttare^a and uttarKt, dak^i^ana and dakqlQftt, paqoSt.
flrdhvam, aDantavam, Bamakfcm, a&kq&t. More qneatioaable, and
lllnstratlons lather of the general loosenesa of the nse of the genitive, are its
oonitnictiona (almoat wholly nnknown in tbe oldeat language) with more
propel words of direction: thns, with the drrivatiye paritaa, parataa,
and antitaa, and parantfit and poraatSt (these fonnd In the Brahmana
langnage: aa, BadiTataaraBya paraatSt after a year; BilktaBya ptirma-
t&t before the hymn [A.B.J); with antl, adhaa, avaa, puraa; with npari
aboDt (coigmon later); and with antar.

Conjunctions.

IISI. The oonjunctioQs, also, as a distinct clasa of woida,
aie almost wanting.

a. The combination of clauses la io Sanskrit in general of a very
simple character; mnoli of vliat In other Indo-Enrnpean iargoages is
effected bj Bubordinnting conjunctions is here managed b; means of
oorapoaition of words, by the nse of the gernnde (994), of itl jllOS),
pf abBtraot noans in case-fonns, and bo od.

1182. The lelative derivative adreibs, already given

ioy Google

417 COKJUNOTIONfl. [—1186

(1098 ff.), may propeily be i^arded as conjunctioDs; and a
few other particles of kindred value, as odd and nod (lllla).

1185. Pwely of conjunctive value aie ? oa and, and
^[ 'v^ or (both toneless, and never having the fiist place
in a sentence or clause}.

a. Of copulative value along with oa, le in the older laognage
especially ut& (later it becomes a particle of more Indefinite uee); and
ipl, t&tas, t&tha, khfa. oa, with other particles and combinatione of
particles, are need often as connectives of claueea.

b. Adversative is t& but (rare in the older language); also, less
stroDglf, a (tonelesB).

o. Of illative value is hf for (originally, and in great part at
every period, asseverative onlj'): compare above, llSSb.

d. To oa (as well ta to its compound cAd) belongB ocetilonally tba
munlng if.

e. It is needleu to enter into fDrltiei detail vith regtrd to tboie uaea
whieli may be not lesa ptoperlr, oi more properly, called conJuDctlve than
adverbial, of the paitinles already giren, andei the head of Advetb*.

Interjections.
1134, The utterajices which may be classed as intei-
jeotions aie, as in other languages, in part voice-gestures,
in- part onomatoposias, ajid in part mutilations and coiiup-
tions of other parts of speech.

1186. a. Of the claes of voice-gestures are, for example: &, hi,
h&hs, abaha, he, h&{ (AV.), nyl, aye, bay6 (RV.), abo, b&( (RV.),
baU RV.) or vata. and (probablj) biruk and huruk (RV.).

b. Onomatopoetic or imitative atteraaoes are, for example (In
the older language); ol^oa v>hh (of an arrow: RV.): klkiri (palpita-
tion: RV.); bil and phif (ph&f?! or ph&l tplaih (AV.); bbuk bow-
wow (AV. ; t)il pat (AV.); &§, hl^ as. and bas (FB.); and see the
words already quoted in composition with the loote kf and bbft,
above, 1081.)

o. Mouns and adjectives which have assumed an interjectional
'.character are, for example; bboa (for the vocative bbavaa, 466); are
or re (voc. of art enemy', ; dblk alaa! (may be mere voice-gesture, but
perhaps related with ydlh); ka^fam aoe it me! ditffyS thank heaven!
Bvaeti hail! suq^bu. Bfidbu good, excellent! None of these are Vedic
in interjectional use.

Whitney Oraniiuar. B. «d. 27

Dgilize.., Google

118B— ] XVII. DSBivATiON OP Declinable Stems,

CHAPTER XVII.

DERIVATION OF DECLINABLE STEMS.

1186. The formation from roots of oonjngable stems — namdf,
tense-etema, modd'SteniB, knd stems of seoond&rf oonjngktiOD (not
OBsentiftlly different from one another, nor, it b believed, nitimately
from the formatioD of declined stems) — wm most oonveDientlf treat-
ed above, in the chapters devoted to the verb. Likewise the for-
mation of advertw by derivation (not eaeentially different from ease-
formation), in the chapter devoted to paiticlea. And the fonoalion
of those declinable stems — namely, of comparison, and of infinitives
and participles — which attach themselves most closely to the sys-
tems of iofiectlon, bas also been more or less folly exhibited. But
the estenaive and intricate subject of the formation of the great body
of declinable stems was reserved for a special chapter.

a. Of cDDMe, only ■ 'brief and compeadloaa exhlbltlan of the itibjsct
Mn be Htenapted within the here nocessiry limits: no ezhtoBtiTe tracing
out of the foimstlTe element! of aveir period; still legs, > complete gt>te-
ment of th« Tiried n«eB of each elemontj least of tM, t dlBcnseion of ori-
gtni; bnt enoagh to help the stadent In that analjais of word* which man
form a put of hia Ubot from the outset, giviug a general ontUne of the
field, and pieparlDg for more p«D«trating iDToatigatlon.

b. The material ftam acoented texl«, &nd espedally the Vedic material,
irill be had espedallT In view (nothing that ia Tedic being Intentionally
left nnooDBidered); and the example! given will be, lo fU as la poaalble,
words found In snch texts with theii accent marked. No word not thns
TOnched toi will be accented nnleaa the fact la apedflcatly pointed ont.

1187. The roots themselves, both verbal and pronom-
inal, are used in their bare form, or without any addsd
suffix, as declinable stems.

n. As to this nae of verbal roota, see below, 1147.

b. The pronominal roots, eo-called, are essentially declinable;
and hence, in their farther treatment in derivation, they are tfaroagb-
ont in accordance with other declinable sterna, and not with verbal
toots-

1138. Apait £iom this, every such stem is made by a
suffix. And these suffixes fall into two general classes:

ioy Google

419 Primary AMD Secohdabt 3npnxE8. [ — 1140

A. Primaiy suffixes, or thoae which aie added directly
to roota; v

B. Secondary suMxee, oi thoae which are added to de-
rivative stems (also to pronominal roots, a6 just pointed out,
and sometimes to particles].

a. The dlviiloD of primair lafflxeg uBnly conwponda to the k|t
(moie regulu) and ui^adl (Im* Te|;nlar) lofOxM of the Hlndn gnmniulaDa ;
tho iMoaitiy, to theii taddtaita-BDlttiee.

1139. But this distinction, though one of high value,
theoretically and practically, is not absolute. Thus:

a. SnffiieB come to have the aspect and the nae of primary which
really contain a secondary ' element — that la to say, the earliest
words exbibitiog them were made by addition of secondary enffises
to words already derivative.

b. Sandrr eiamplei of thU will he pointed ont balow; thai, the
gernndlTal sufBies, tavya, an^^ etc, the Bufftiea nka and aka, tra,
>nd otheN. Thii oilgia ia probable for more cuei than admit of demon-
jitntion; md it la aamirable for others which show no dlatlnct sigDi of
eompoelUon.

o. Less often, a anffiz of primary nae passes over tn part Into
secondary, throagb the medium of use with denominative "rootB" or
ottierwise: examples are yn, Iman, iyaa and l^fha, ta.

1140. Moreover, primary suffixes are added not only
to niore origiiLal roots, but, generally with equal ^eedom,
to elements whioh have come to wear in the language the
aspect of such, by being made the basis of primary ooa-
jugation — and even, to a certain extent, to the bases of
secondary conjugation, the conjugation-stems, and the bases
of tense-inflection, the tense-stems.

a. The most conaptcoon* azample* of thla are the paitlolplea, pteaent
and tatoie and peifect, which aie made alike from tenae and oonjugatlon-
itama of eveiy toiD. The iDADtttTes (MB ft) attach themaelvea only In
apoTadlo Inatanoea to teDae-atemi, and eren from ooDjDgstton-itema ate made
iDt aparingly eaiUei; and the same ia (rue of the gemudlTes.

b. Qenelal adjectivea and noons ai'e lomewhat widely made from ood-
]ii^atlon-«tema, eapeeially bma the baee of cansatlTe oanjngstton; aee below
the iDfaxet a C1148J, k% B (11400, d). ana (l-lSOm), as (ilBlf),
»nl(llB9b), u (n78g-i), tlCllft'sJ. tf (1182e}, tmn (1 19»ti),
sun (1184b), oka (1180 d). ftku (1181 d). Sin (llWIb), ta(lieid).

27*

Digitizecy Google

1140—] XVn. Pbiuart Derivatiok. 420

0> From teme-iteint the estBtplea are fit fewer, but not nnknown :
'thoi, from piBMDt'Btems, ocuBJoDil deriT»tl<ei In a [1148J), ft (I140d. e),
aj^ (llSOn), i (llSSd), n (1178f), ta CH^Oe). ta (lieid), nka
(llSOd), tra (1186«), U(llBTe), Tia(oi in: ISSSb, 1183a); from
Btema in > B ipparentlj of aorlstjc cbsractrr (beside* inflnltlies and geniDii-
tTes), ocfaalonal dertiatiiei In a (1148J), ana (llEOJ), anl (llB9b),
an (lieOa), Kna (1176). as (IISU), i (UB6b), Iffha (1184a).
a (llTSf), us (llB4a), tf (1182e). In (1183a).

1141. The primary Buffixea aie added also to loota a>
compounded with the verbal prefixes.

a. Whatever, namely, may have been originall; and strictly the
mode of prodaction of the derlTatives with prefixes. It is throag{ioat
the recorded life of tbe langnage as if the root and its prefix or pre-
fixes constitnted a udUj, from which a derivative is formed in tbe
same manoer as from the simple root, with that modification of ^le
radical meaning which appears also In the proper verbal fonne ta
compounded with the same prefixes.

b. Not derivatives of every kind are thns made; but, in the maiit,
those classes which have most of the verbal force, or which are most
akin In value with infinitives and participles.

o. The oeemreDce of aneh derlTitlves with prefliea, and their accent,

vlU ba noted under each Bnfflx below. The; are cbleBy [In nearly the

order of theli rompuative frequency), beside* root-stem«, those in a, in

~ ana, in tl, in tar and tra, and in in, 7a, van and man, 1 and a, as,

and a few others.

1143. The suffixes of both classes are sometimes joiaed to tlieir
primitives by a preceding nu ion-vowel — that Is to say, by one which
wears that aspect, and, in oat ignorance or unoertaibty as to its real
origin, may most conveniently and safely be called by that name.
The line between these vowels and those deserving to be ranked as
of organio suffissl character cannot be sharply drawn.

£ach of the two great classes will now be taken np by itself,
for more particular consideration.

A. Primary Oarivatives.

1148. Form of loot. The form of root to which a
primary su^x is added is liable to mors or less variation.
Thus;

a. By far tbe most frequent is a strengthening change, by ffu^a-
or TTddbl-increment Tbe former may oconr ander all cironmstancM
(except, of course, where gu^a-change is in general forbidden: 885,
MO): thus, vMafrom yvid, m6da from >^nd,v4rdlia from y-rj^;

itizec^yGooylc

421 Form of Root. [—11.46

&yftaa from yi. B4vaiia from ymi, s&rai^ft from y»f; &Dd bo on.
But the latter Is only allowed nnder such circumstances aa leave long
ft as the resulting vowel: that is to saj, with Don-final a, and with
a final i- or n-vowel and f before a vowel (of the ending] : thus, nftdA
from yaad, grBbhk from ygji>h or grabb, vBli4 from /vah, nftr&
from ynX, bhSv& from )/bh11, k&r& from ykf ; such strengtheniug at
vould make vftida and m&nda does not aocompaoy primary derivation.

b. Strengthening Id darlyation does not stand in i,nj ench aiident
connection vilh accent u stiengthenins in conjngition ; noi: can any gene-
lal mleg be laid down as to IM occnneace; it ha« to be pointed out in
detail for each anffli. 80 also with other Towel-cbanges, nbich ate iu
general acMidanee with Chose found in infleotiou and Id the formation of
tense- and mode-atemi.

O. The reieijlon of s final palatU 01 h to a gnttaral has been abetd;
noticed (216). A flnal n or tn la occasionally lost, as in formations already
considered.

d. AfUr a abort final lowel is lometimee a^ded a t: namely, where
a loot is used as stem wltboat aDlHi (1147d], and before a following y
or V of van (1168), vara and varl (1171), yu once (1166a), and ya
(ISlSa). The preaeoce of t before these sofllLes appears to indleati an
originsi leoondary derivation tiom derlTatiTea in ti and tu,

e, Tbe root is somettmea reduplicated: rarely in the use wltboat sufflz
(1147o,e); ottenest before a (114Bk), 1 (11 66 a), ti (1178d); hnt
also before other sufllLes, as ft ()148e), ana (llBOm), vana (1170a),
van and vart (liesd. 1171a, b), vanl (1170b), vl (1193)/vlt
(lieSb), anl CllE9b), in (1183a), tnti Cn96a), ta (1176a), tt
(1167d), tba (llSSa), tf (llSab), tia (1186f), uka (llSOf), aka
(1181a), Ika (llSBo), ma (lieeb).

1144. Accent Ko general laws fgoveming the place of the
accent are to be recognized: each eufBx must in this respect be con-
sidered by itself.

a. In coDneMlon with a very few sofBieB Is to be recognized a cer-
tain degree of tendency to accent (he toot in cue of a nomen aelionu or
InflnltiTal derivative, and the ending In tbe case of a nomtn aganti* or
paitidplil derivative: see the snfBzes a, ana, aa, an, and man, below,
where the eiamples are coDslderd. Differences of accent in word< made
by the same bdMi are also occasionally connected with dffterencea of gender:
aee the snfBies as and man.

1146. Meaning. As regards their sigDificaCion, the primary
derivatives fall in general into two great classes, tbe one indicatlDg
the action expressed by the verbal root, the other the person or
thing in which tbe action iqipears, the agent or actor — tbe latter,
either substantively or adjectively. Tbe one class is more abstract,
infinitival; tbe other is more concrete, parUcipial. Other meanings

itizecy Google

1145—] XVII. PsuuaT Dbriyatiom. 422

may in tha mun ba viewed u modificationa or apeclallEatioos of
these two.

a. Eten the tmiii tndlutlng lecipieace of action, the puiWe puti-
dples, tie, as theli nje tlso at neuter or Tefleiive ihowt, only notably
modlfled wotdi of agency. He geiaodlTei ue, te vu pointed am aV>T«
(961 ff.), ieoonduy deTlvatlTet, originally indlcatiDg only coneamtd iDttk
fAe action.

1146. Bat these two classes, in the procesBes of formalion, ue
not held sharply apart. There is hardly a saffix by which action-
DouDB are formed which does not also make agent-noans or adjec-
tives; althongh there are not a few by which are made only the Istter-
In treating them in detail below, we will first take up the snfSxea
by which desivatives of both classes are made, and then those form-
ing ooly agent-noniis.

a. To facilitate the finding of the different suffliei la giren the
foUowlDg list of them, in their order as treated, «ltli referencea to paragraph* :

tas, nas, bob

1147

yu

1165

In

1183

1148

uee

lyaa, iftlia

1184

1149

ml

1167

tra

1186

1150

man

1168

ka

1186

1151

van

1168

ya

1187

1162

vana, -ni, -an

1170

ra

1188

1168

vara

1171

la

1189

1154

ant

1172

va

1190

1155

vSOs

1173

ri

1191

1156

mftna

1174

ru

1192

1157

ana

1175

Tt

1199

1156

U

1176

anu

1184

1169

na, ina, una

1177

Hna

119B

1160

u

1178

tnu

1196

1161

vl

1179

aa

1197

Ilea

uka

1180

aai

1198

1163

aka

1181

abha

1199

J 164

tr ortar

118S

1200-1

tha

1147. Stems without suffix; Root-woids. These
woids and theii uses have been already pietty fully oonsid-
ered above (328, 348 ff., 888 ff., 400, 401).

a. They are ased especially (in the later language, almost solely)
SB finals of compoaDde, and have both fundamental values, as action-
nonns (frequently as infinitives: 971|, and as agent-nouns and adjsot-
ives (often governing an accusative: 271e). Ab action-nouns, tbey
are chiefly feminines |864: in many iuBtances, however, they do not
occnr In situations that determine the gender).

itizecy Google

423 Boot-Stbhs; Stems in a. [—1148

b. lo a BmsU number of words, moatlj of rare occnrrence, the
rednplicated root Is lued wltfaoat Buffii.

0. The Tedlc cues ^re: nith ilmple TednpMotlan, ■BST&d, olhit,
dndfh, dld^A aud dldyit, Jnli^ and perb&pa KiAgd uid ({qq; vith
IntenilTB TSdupHcatton, -neni, malimlno, ynviyndli, and j6ku and
T&alvail Iwtth tbe iDtenalTe initetd of th« maal radical acaent). In
dAridra is seen a trantfoi to tfae a-dHlenilon. AsusA U probably to be
Dndeigtood as a oompoand, noQ-flA.

d. If the root end in a short rowel, a t is regslarly and OHnally
ftdded (38Sf-h).

e. Eiamplea haie been given at the place Jaet quoted. In Jiffat the
t is added to the mutilated form of ygam rednpllcated, and pftjit
(T8., ouoe) appeui to pat it after a long vowel. In a alngle instanoe,
qrdtkar^ (K^O *>/ liittning tara, a stem of this cliM oecnrs as prior *
member of a compoand.

f. Wordfl of this form in combination with vorbal prefixes are
very nameroua. The accent rests (as in combination of the same with
other preceding elements] on the root-stem.

g. A tev eioeptlDni in point of acceot oocor: tbua, Avaafi, upaatut;
and, with otbei Irregularities of form, p&rijrl, up&atlia, upari^fha.

1148. ? a. With the suffix 9 a is made an immeDaely
large and heteiogeneons body of deriTativeB, of raiious
meaning and showing Taiious treatment of the root: giupa-
streogtheniitg, vrddlil-stiengtheaing, letention unchanged,
and reduplication.

In good part, they are classifiable under the two nsnal general
heads; but in part they have been individualized into more special

1. a. With gui^a-strengthening of the root (where that is poss-
ible: 235, 240). These are the great minority, being more than
twice as numerous as all others together.

b. Many nomina actionit : as, qr&ma toearinesi, (p^&ba leizure, Aya
movemtRt, v^da knmetedge, h&va coil, krodlia toraU, j6qa tnjoymtnf,
ikrtt croumg, Birga emittiim.

o. Many nomina aganlii: as, kqami patient, evaj& eotutWetor, jlv&
living, meghi eloud, ood& inciting, .plavA boat, 8ar& brook, BeiTpk ter- .
pint, bhpj& gtnarout, kIiKd& devouring.

d. or the eiamples here given, thoie under b accent the radical ■;!-
lable and those under o the ending. And this is In perhaps a majorit;
of caaes the fsct as regards the two elasaei of derlvadvei; lo that, taken
la connecdon with kindred faots aa to other rafflxea, it hints at inch a ^
ditrersnee of socent aa a general tendency of the Ungnage. A. tew aporsdic

itizecy Google

1148—] XVII. PRIUAKT Dbbivatiok. I 424

Ai*t>Dce6 4ie met vlth ot ttie i>me (arm having tbe one oi the other Ttlae
•ccoTding to ita >ae«nt; thus, 6fa hattt, ef& hatting; qma order, fftaA
orderer (othei exMDplea ue coda, gfika, foka: compuB ■ ilmtlu differ-
ence with other deriTstWes ]n M, ana, an, man). Bot esceptioQa ue
nnmetODi — thna, tor eiimpte, Jayi. JavA. amar4, uttoa-noana; ^rtva,
m6gha, Btivo. agent-uoans — and the sahject calli foi a mDch wider
knd deeper iuTeatigatEon thao It haa yet reealTed, before the aeceutaatieD
lefened to can be eet sp as > law of the langnage la derivation.

2. e. With Trddhl-Btrengthening of the root — but only where
K is the resnltiDg rftdical vowel: that ih, [of medial a, and of final f
(most often), u or n, i or i (rare).

f. Examples of actioQ-noaDE tie: k^a love, bhftgi $hore, nid&
noiia, d&vi, jirt, tftr& eronmg. Very few foima o( oletr derirttioD and

'meanlDg ne i^uotable with ai«eTit on the root-iyllable.

g. Eiamplea of ■gent-DODn* are: ^fibh& taiting, T&h& otari/iitg,
Utyk hading, ]&r& Itmer.

3. h. With nnttrengthened root, the eiamples ue few : e. g. k^fi
lean, tur& rt^id, yngi t/olt, aruvi apoon, pri;4 dear, vri troop, qnek
bright.

i. A number 6t words of this class, especially as oecnrring In com-
position, are donbtleas lesnlta of the tranifer of root-Btems to the a-declen-
(foQ ; e. g. -ghiifa, -aphura, -tada, -dfqa, -vida, -klxa.

J. A few astern* ue made, especially In the older langoage, from oonjn-
gatlon-atams, mostly cansatiTs: thos, -ftmaya, llaya, -ifkkhaya, -ejaya,
-dhKraya< -pftrara, -mr^aya, -QSmaya (compare thet-stama, 1140o,d)i
also deslderatlTe, as bibhatsa (compare 1038). Oceational examples also
occur from tense-stams : thas, fhim liu>stems, or secondary stems made
ttom BQch, -htnvA, -Inva, -jlnva, -plnwa, •nlnva, •sonva, -agnava;
from others, -pp^a, -mri^. -atf-^a, -puna, -j&na, -pagya, -macya.
-daaya, -Jurya, -k^udhya, -aya, -ti^tha, •jighra, -plba; from fotare-
stems, kari;ya (JB,), Janlfya, bhavifya, ruoigya(?); Iipparently from
aoiist-items, ie^A, n6;a-, par^ pfk;4(?), -hoqa.

4. k> Deriiativee {in a from a rednplicated root'fonn ate a consider-
able daas, mostly occurring in tLe older language. They are somettmea
made with a simple ledupUcation: thus, oaoarA, oiklta, d^dbrA, dadb^fA,
babha^ -babhra, vavrt, qiqayi. qiqn&tba (an action-Doao), aaarA;
but oftener with an intenElfa reduplication: thus, merely sttengthened,
c&kqtni, oHoala. jBgara, n&nada, Iftlasa, Tiradb&O'), -meml^a,
rerlbA and leliha, vtvijk, nonuva, >nomagh&, -roruda, lolupa; with
consonant added, -eafika^a, [-oaflkrajoa, Jafigama, oafioala, -Ja&-
Japa, dandtavana, •nannama, -Jarjalpa, jaijaia, -tartura, -dardlra,
m&rmura, gadgada; dissyllabic, -karlkra, kanikradi, earftoar& and

,oalftcal&, maruufqi, inalimluo&, vanvrtA, saiJBfp4, Ipanifpadi,
Bani^ad4, aaniaraB4, patftpata, madftmada, -vad&Tada, ghanA<

ioy Google

ghftlUi. M>D7 of thflie (N to be tegirded i>i from an intsnsiTe cODjagattoo'
sum; bat eome of tbem show » foim not met irltti Id intoDstia conja-

5. L DerivatiTM with this enffix from roots ae compounded with
the verbal preflzea are qaite common, in all the modes of formation
(in each, in proportion to the frequency of independent words): con*
Btttntlng, in fact, considerably the largest body of derivatiTO stems
with prefiieB. They are of both classes as to meaoiDg. The accent
Is, with few exceptions, on the ending — and that, without any re-
ference to the value of the stem as action-noun or agent-noun.

m. EiKmples are: Ba]iitcam& attembly, nimefii toink, abliidroh4
enmity, anakart attittanet, nd&nA impiration, pratyfigrKvi re»p<m»e;
— pario&ri tcmultrmg, Baibjay& eictarious. Tiboclh& toakeful, atirfiJA
over-pious, adfifi inciting, elevated, Uttudii routing, aadiKirA ttoalloving,
£dardiT& crvthing, Bdhieaokrain& climbing.

n. The onl; deflnfte claai of exceptions in regtrd to icceat ippeare
to be that of the adTerbiftl gernnds in am (aboie, 096), irhtch ue accent-
ed on the loot-ay liable. A Tery few other etems htie the lame tone; for
example, nti^ta 'portent, O^r^fa platpu. A fev others, mostly sRent-
nonnt, have the acoent on the pretli: foi example, vT^fA ('■ e. vi-Ofa)
horning, piAtivefa neighbor, ^bhaga aharing; bm aUo a&ihkSfa o^
ptaranee.

O. For the remaining componnds of these derlTatWei, with the insep-
arable prefliei and with other elements, see the next chapter. It may be
meiely mentioned heie that inch cemponnde are nnmeious, and that the
ft-derivative has often an actlTe participial Talne, and is fraqaently preceded
by a case-form, oftenest the accneitiie.

p. Many words in the Ungnage appeal to end with a snffix a, while
yet they are lefeiable to no root which can be othsTwlse demonstrated

1,149. 5T S. The vaat majority of sterna in 5T R are
feminine adjectives, cotrespondiDg to masculines and neuters
in Q a (332, 334). But also many suffixes ending in 9 a
have coiiesponding feminine fotms in long ^ S, making a
greater ot less number of action-nouns. These vrill be
given under the different suffixes below.

a. There is further, however, a considerable body of feminine
action-noons made by adding ft to a root, and having an independent
aspect; though tbey are donbtless in part transfers from the root-
nonn (1147;. Usually tbey show an unstrengtbened form of root, and
(sach as occur in accented texts) an accent«d snfGz.

ioy Google

1 148—] XVII. Friuart Derivation. 426

b. Exunples »a itjilordthip, ^riii plag, Anyipitj/, nlndi r^iwocA,
Q&akit doait, hi£.sB injury, kf amfi patience, k^ndhS hangar, bU^t
speech, sarft eervict. BpfhK iHijr«rn«u.

a. Bat eepeoiallj, such nonng in & are mftde in la^e nambers,
sod with perfect freedom, from secondarj oonjogation-Btems.

d. ThuB, upicially tiom deildentlTB Btama, u jlglfit, bhikfi,
Tirta^ blbbateil, etc., (les 1038); in the foniutlon of peripbrudc
p«rfecti, MpedtUr ttom unsiitlve at«iiii, bat alio rrom de«ld«tittTa snd
InteniiTe, and eren from prlmaiY pTonnt-ilamB (1071o-f); fram denomlna* '
tl*e Btems, in the older langaage, m a^^i, Bnkratn^ apa^^ nxn-
iffi, aan7i^ Ofumyt, Jlvanaayi, etc., and ^nite larely in the later,

e. The only example tiom a lednplioated stem is the late paopaqfti
for ni^i, J&nghft, and JlliT^ whicb have ■ ledoplteated aapact, are of
doubtful origin. From pceBent-Btemi come IcohB and piobably ^ochA.

IIBO. ^ aoa. With this suffix (aa Wtth ? a) ate fotm-
ed iunutneiable derivatiTes, of both the principal classes o(
meaning, and with not infrequent specializations. The root
has oflenest guqa-strengthening, but not seldom vrddhi
instead; and in a few caaea it remainB unstiengthened.
Derivatives of this foimation ate frequent from loots with
prefixes, and also in composition with other elements.

a. The normal and greatly prevalent accent is upon the root-
syllable, without regard to the difference of meaning; bnt cues ooenr
of accented final, and a few of accented penult. The action-nonns
ate In general of the neuter gender. The feminine of sdjeotiTeB is
made either in K or in I (for details, see below). Aod a few feminine
aotion-nouns in atkS and anl occur, which may be ranked as belong-
ing to this BufSx,

1. b. With strengthened and accented root-syllable. Under this
head fall, as above indicated, the great mass of forms.

0. With gu^a-slreftglhening : examples of iction-nonnB are a&dana
*eat, r&kga^ protection, daaa giving, o&yaiia collection, vMaua pro-
perty, h&vaDft eaU, bhAJana enjoyment, k&ra^ deed, T&rdliaila inertOMV, ■
— of igeat-Doans, t&pana huming, oAtona vieible, eodana impelling.

d. Witb vrddbl-stiengthening (only In auch clicnmstanoei that S
remains as Toirel of the radical syllable): examples are -catanai nafana,
midaoa, -vaoana, •v^saua. -vltliaiis, -eidana, •api^ana, ei^tdana.
-ayanoi -yivana, -erava^a, -p&ai^a.

e. From toots with pieflies, the derlfatiteB of tblB fonnation are T«ry
numetoiu, being exceeded In fte^ueney only by those made wltii the anfllx

ioy Google

427 Stems IN ft, ana. [— IIBO

a (*1>0Te, 11481, m). A tew eximplu itb; ft]irfanai?a itnding on,
udyltna ingoing, nidbiina ree^tabh, prAi^ana expiration, vlmAoana
raleaie and reltating, saihg&mana (u*»n(/y «nd ouemAIer, adhivlkirtana
eutting off, aTaprabhT&Aqana falling ateay douin. For other componndi
or these deiivitiTcs, showing the umc accent (uid tha e>m« feminine
Stan)), Bse the next chapter (beloir, 1S71}. A few exeeptiona oi^oor:
TJoaliyap A, gparl qayant, and the feminine* pramandaniiad nlrdahanl.

f. The sdJeetiTea of (bla formation, eimpla or componnd, make th«tr
feminine ninill; In I: tbns, o6danl, pdqanl, Bp&rai^ J&mbh&iil;
prajfi^l, prdk^ai^i, aaifagr&ha^, abbj^&va^l, TJdhArayi (oetant
la of doDbtful meaniDg: below, 1), An adJectiTe cooipoaad,' hovcTet,
having a Dono in ana as final membei, makei its feminine In ft: thna,
■iipaaarpa9J of ta«y approach, f&^vldhSna of sextuple order, anapavft-
oaBlt not to be ordered away.

2. The more irregular formationB may be clssBed as follows:

g. With accent on the. final; ■ nnmber of agent-nonna and adJeetlTM,
•a kara^A active (againat kira^a ael) Iqrpa?^ miierable (sgaioat k^piu^
tnitert/), tvarai^ halting, rooan& thining, too^Aok gelling, svapanA
sleepy, kf aya^i hiAiiable.

h. These, onllbe the preceding daaa, make their feminine in ft: e. g.
traraqA, iqjandanit A. few famine tetloD-nonna in the older Isngnsge
haie the aama form: thus, afai^ oeatti, numaai. drotana, rodhaa^
^etani, haaani (and compate kapan^ raqani); those of the later
Itmgnage In onft (rather anmerona) are donbtfnl aa regards accent.

1. Beside these ma; be meationed a tew femlnlnes In ani, of more
or leas donbtfQl charaeter: arfft^l, oetani (to c6tana), tapani (to t&p-
ana), ppfani, vrjonl (with TfJ&na), rRjani, tadani.

J. Wllh accent on the pennlt: a amall nnmbei of adjeclives: as
toriija hasting, doh^a milking, manAna contiderate, bhand&na and
mandAna rg'oicing, aakf&i^ overcoming, and perhaps vokffc^ carrying
(the- last two with aoriatic B) ; aod a still smaller nambet of nenter aetlon-
nonna: daAa&na great deed, Tfjfuut enclosure, Unen, ve^A^ twice,
tfpk^ misery, (against kn>a9& mieerable), with the mascaline TiisisfA dutf.

k. The only noticed example of a feminine 1* In ft; tar&9&. And
a few feminine nonna have the same form: arh&nft, jarA^fi, barhA^S,
bhandAnft, maAhAnA, iii«fa4iift, vadh&nO, vanAnft, Tak^&^S. (And
compare the aaomalons maao. name uqAna: S6Ba)

1. Without BtrengtbenlDg of the root are made a small nnmber of
derlTatiies: thna (besides those already noted, kfpA^a and kfpa^A,
TtJAna and vrJaal, kiiA^a, tarA^), fnrther accented examples are
tizsqa, dliuTana, pf^ana, bhuvana, vfjana, vf^a^a, -sAvana; and
later are fonnd aphnra^a, Bphutana, aprha^a, -bnnvana, Jlkhana,
' rudana, etc. SV. makes denominatlTaa from rlfa^a-, mva^a-, vlpana-.

ioy Google

1160—] XVIL Pkihart Deeivation. 428

m. Stems in anft ue made t\eo from necoDdsr)' ci>n]iigatiaii'it«in< :
thna, from deilderstiTei, ij oikltsRila (lee 1038); frocD canutlTea, ts
hftpnna, bhlfa^ (see 1061 g]; from denominaUTes, nith great fraedom,
In the later language, as &karq(tna, onmOltUlft, glakf^ona, cilmanK;
from luWnilvea and other reduplicated stems, ouIt ooakranuina, jaA>
gamai^a, Jfigarai^ yoTupana.

n, A few ifoUted caiet may be fartbei mentioned: from teiue-iteiDi,
-Jighra^a, -fln^vana, -paqjraaa, yaootuma, -aiiiaana; from prape-
■llloiia, autarai^a and s&manai aBtamana from the qnaai-preflx (1099b)
astam. Femininea in aii& of donbtful coniieotioa are y&fa^a teomat
(betide yd^on, yoqfi, etc.) and p^anli.

1151. Wt as. By this aufAx are made (usually wiUi
gu^a-stiengthening of the loot-Towelj especially a laige claas
of neutei nouns, mostly abstract (action-nouns), but some-
times assuming a oonciete value; and also, in the older
language, a few agent-nouns and adjectives, and a consid-
erable number of infinitives.

a. The &cc«nt in words of the first oUsb Is on the root, and in
the second on the ending; and In a few instances words of the two
olasssB hBviDs the same form are distingaished by their accent; the
infinitives have for the most part the accent on the suffix.

1. b. Examples of the first and principal class are: ivos aid,
favor, t&pas toarmth, priyss pleaiurt, tijaa splendor, gr^vas famt,
dobaa minting, k&rae dted, pr&thas breadth, o6taB and m^nas mind,
c&k^B eye, Biiras pond, v&oas tpeeeh.

O. A few voTds of this claia are of Iriegnlar fonnation: |thDl, without
etrengthening of the root, Juvaa qutekiutt (beiide j&vaa), 'uraa hrtati,
m^dhas oonttmpt; and Iras- (iraay-) and vipas-, and the adverbi tdr&s,
mith&B, boras-, also ^ras head, are to be compated) — with vfddhi'
BtiengthealDg, -vaoaa, tsbbb, vahaa, -Bv&daa, and, of doubtful oonnect-
ioDs, p^as, pitbas, and •hftyas; — peihapB with an aoristlo a, h^faa
mi»lile; — pivas eoatatna a v apparently not radical.

d. After final S of a root li usually Inserted y before the sntlli
(S68): thus, dh£yas, -gayaa. But there are in the oldest language appar-
ent remaina of a formation in which aa was added directly to radical ft:
thai, bhita and -dfis (often to be pronounced as two ayllablei), J&aS,
m^l and -dhaa and -das, from tbe roots dbS and d&.

2. e> The Instances In which an agent-noun is differentiated by its
»«Mnt from an acUon-noau are: &pas leork, and ap&a aetiDt; y&qas
beauty, and yagde beauteout; t&raa guicknew, and t&r&s (VS., once)
quick; t&vaa itrength, and tav&s strong; d&vas worthip, and dnv&B '
lively ff); m4baB greatnev, and mah&S great; between r&kfaa a, and

itizecy Google

429 Stems ih ana, as, tu, naa, aas. [— llES

rak^&s PI., both meaning dtmon, and between ty&Jas n, abimdotimetit{^:'\
and ty^&S m. deteendtntfl), the tntlthegis ta much le«i clear.

f, Adjectiyes in &b withoat coneepondlng ibttractt are : to^&a he-
ttowing, 7^&B offering, veShka pioiti, prpbibly fthanis heady, and a few
other -words of Isolated occurence, as veq&s, dhvar&a. From s denomlDa-
tlTB stem Is made Tafgagia tcUd atitttutl (RV., once).

g. But tbne tie also a rerj few easel of abstract nonna, not nentet,
accented on the ending: thus, jaT&s old age, bbiy&O /rnr; and donbilesa
also hav&a call, and tve^As impuUe. The femlne uf&a daum, and doq^
night, might belong eitbei here oi nnder the last preceding head,

h. Apparently containing a snfSi aa are the noan ap^ lap, and
eerlatn proper namee: inglras, nodh&a. bhalin&a, aroan&niiB, naoi-
ketas. The feminine apear&s nymph Is of donbtfal deriTstion.'

L The trtegnlar formation ot some of tbe words of this dlTlslon kUI
be noticed, without spetial remark.

3. j. Tbe infinkfTea made hy the snf6i as have been expluned
above (B7S]; they show varioas treatment of the root, and various
accent (which last may perhaps mark a difference of g^eoder, like that
between aUiaa and Jai^As).

4. k. The fonnation of derlvativei in aa tiom roots compounded with
prellies is very restricted — If, indeed, it is to be admitted at all. No inDn-
ItlTB in aa occurs with a prefli; nor any acllon-noun; and the adjecdve
combinations are in some Instances evidently, and In most others apparently,
posaessiTe compounds of the nonn with the predx used adjectirely : the
most probable exceptions are -iiy6baB and vlfpardliafl. Aa in these
examples, Ibe aocant Is always on the preQi.

1. Certain Vedic stems in ar may be noticed here, as more or less
exchanging with stems in aa, and apparenlly related with such. They were
reported aboTe, at 169 a.

In connection with this, the moat common and Important saffix
eotKog in a, may be beet treated the others, kindred la office and
pOMibly also io origin, which end in tbe aame sibilant.

1158. rTH tas, RH uaSi HTT sas. With- these suffixes are
made an extremely small number of action-nouns. Thus:

a. Vilh taa are made rMaa eeed, and er6taa ttream.

b. With nas are made ipnaa aequmtion, in^aa icaee, -bb&r^aa
offering, r^k^aa riehm; and in driTi^aa wealth, and p&rii^aa fulntti
li apparently to be seen the same aufQi, with profiled. el emenia having tbe
present value of union-voweis. - Probably the aame ii trne of d&milnaa
hoiua-friend, and (JonaB (RV.) n. pr,, uqinaa (or •nS) n. pr,

c. With aaa is perhaps made v&pBaa heaaty; and t&rQ|^B may be
inentiouad with it (rather tarua-a?).

Digitizecy Google

1 158—] XVII. Priuary Derivation. 430

1163. ^ U. With the saffix is is Coimed a small auai-
bei [about a dozen) of nouns.

a. The; ue in part noDDi of tctioD, bat most are used raiiereteljr.
The radical syllable haa tbe gH^a-itrenfthentng, and the accent 1> on tfa>
inrdz (ezoapt In Jy6tls light, TT&thia, and ixala raw mtat). Examplei
are: arole, roofs, and fools light, ohadfe or obardiB cotxr, barhls
ttrme, vartls track, sarpis huttar, havia oblation, dyotia UgU, and
kravii raur Jinh. Avis-, pathie, blirijia-, and m&Ma- are iaolatsd
Tarlantt of Bteia« in aa; and tdvia-, queia-, and anrabhls- appear in-
organically I^' tUTl etc in a few eemponnda or derirattvea.

1154. 3^ oa. With this suffix aie made a few wotda,
of Taxious meaning, root-form, and accent.

a. Tbef are worda slgnUylag lioth action and agent. A few baTS
both meaninga, withont dltTeranoe ol accent; thas, Upna htat and hot;
&rua toound and tore; oUuftu brightness and seeing, eye; vapua loonder-
JiU and tconder. The noana are moitl; aenter, and accented on the root-
•yllable: tbna, iyua, tArua, porus, m&haa (? only adverbial), mitlias
(do.), y&Jus, qasna; ezceptiDns are: in regaid to aoceat, jan^ birih; ta
regard to gender, m&ituB man, and uiliiiB p. pr. Of adjectiioi, aie
accented on the ending Ja;^, VIUI^ and dakqua burning (which
appears to attach lUelf to the aoriit-atem].

1166. ^ i. With this suf&x ate formed a laige bodj
of derivatives, of all genders: adjectives and masculine
agent-nouns, feminine abstracts, and a few neuteis. They
show a various foim of the root: strong, weak, and re-
duplicated. Their accent is also rarious. Many of them
have meanings much speoialiied; and many (including most
of the neuters) are hardly to be connected with any root
elsewhere demonstrable.

1. a. The feminine aotion-nonna are of very yarioaa form: thai,
with weak root-form, riioi brightna$, tvl^i them, krfl plcugUng, nrtf
donee; — vlth giuja-stiengtbentnE (where possible),- r6pi pom, focfAsof,
vaiii and aani gain; — with vrddlii-Btrengthening, gltbi eeiaure, dbr&ji
course, iy£ race; from ydOf comes dti^i (compare dOqajratl, lOUb].
The variety of accent, which s«ems rsdnelble to no rale. It UloBtrited by
the examples given. The few luflnltlvely need words of thia formation
(above, 97&b) have a weak root-form, with aocont en the ending.

2. b. The adjectives and masculine agent-noun* exhibit the ume
variety. Thua:

o. With nnatrengthened root: ijtuA bright, bhfmi Uvslj/ (ybhnm),

ioy Google

431 Steus in U, ua, 1, L [—1166

d. With B]utreDBth«D*d root (oc root laMpihls of gUQA-chsnge): mrl
«n«(ny, m&bigrtat, Aral beam, granthf Anof, kn^ playing; with v^ddhi-
inoKment, Utr^i, Sinl, -dldri, qari, bAo£, s&dl, sfthi, ind a few woide
of obscDre connwtloiu : ttma, drApI nwiRtfc, Xft^i A«(>f>, pBi^ Aand, ete.
The iMUted -ftnaqi appeui to come fiom the peifect-at«ia (788) of yaq.

e. Wltli ledaplictted root. TUt 1b in the oldei luigiiaga > conaidn-
able cUm, of quite Tarioai fomi. Thas: with «Mk oi abbTeviatod root,
oUrl, J&gbxi, (yghor), p&pri, s&srl, -mftmrl, bnbhH, vftTrf, J&gmi,
-JUlii iyiBn), -tstnl, J&slml. B&sni. bi^vI, -qi^vi; and, with ditplaoe-
ment of Unal i (ot iU treakcnlng to the lembUnee of the safSx], dadi,
pap{> 7ay{ (with ■ case oi two from yayl), -JoJM, dAdhi; — from the
n^form of loota in chingaable 7, J&gurl, titurl, p&parl [pdpurl ST.);
— wltb ilmple ledapUcatlon, ofkiti, yuyndld, vivioi; — with stiength-
«ned ladnpllsatlon, -o&ooli, tatrpi, dadh^^, TltrBhi, BfiBohf, tdtnjl
and t&t^){, 7671171, 7li7udhii and jBTbhAri and b&mbb&ri. And
karkarf Uile and dimdabbi drum hare the aipect of belonginf to the
•ame claw, bnt are ptobabl; onomalopoeUc. The accent. It vlll be noticed,
ia most often on the ledopllutlon, bat not teldom elsewhere [only once on
the root). It wat noticed aboTo (S71Q, that these rednpUcated derlTitlveB
ii i not eeldom take an object In the aociuttlve, like a present participle.

f. Fonnatlont in 1 from the root componnded with ptefliea aie not
at all nnmerona. Tbey aie accented oBoally on the aofDi. Eiamplea aro:
fiyaj{, T7&iiaf{, rUaghni, parBdadf, viftuuthi; bat alio ^jaol, Bm^iTi,
virAvrL As componnded with other preceding woida, die a^JectivM or
agent-nonna In 1 are not rare, and are legnlaily accented on the root: aee
the next chapter, 1S76.

g. From ySIiA cornea a deriiatlie •dhl, farming many maaonllne
compoonda, with the Talue both ot an abatract and a concrete : thaa, with
preftua, aotardtai, uddlii, nldld, paridlii, etc. From ydA la made m
like manner ftdl beginning, and from i^BtbK, pratift^ re»i*lanct. Opin-
ion* are at variance as to whether Micb forma ate to be regarded aa made
with th* Bofllx 1, dlapladng the radical fi, or with weakening ot & to 1.

3. h. Neuter noane in i are few, and of obsonro derivation: examplea
are Ucfl «y>, istJli bona, d&dhi curdt, etc.

1158. ^ I. Stems in ^ I (like those in ^ E^ abore,
1149) aie for the most part femioiae adjectives, conespond-
ing to masculines and neuters of other teiminationa.

a. Thna, remininea in i are made from a-atema (38S, 3S4; and aee

alao the dlfTerent anfflzea), from i-atema (344, 340), tiom u-ateme (344b),
from f-atama (37da), and from varlooa conaonant-atems (37Bb).

b. Bat there aie alao a few atemi in 1 wearing tho aapect of inde-
pendent deiivadvea. Examplea are; dakfi, dehl, nadt, nfindi, p^I,

Digitizecy Google

Ilea—] XVII. Primaey Dbbivation: 432

vakqi (ippiTentlr with aoristic e), ve;i, ijltkl, f&ol, qiml, qtnU, tari,
vSpi; the; tre clthei teUon-noiiDi oi ageDt-noaog. In the liMi luigsige
(u noticed at 344ll) theie Is very frnjaent Inteichioge of 1- and l-tlcmt
uid the romu froin tham.

Thsy

1157. frT ti. This suffix forms a large cla^ of fre-
quently used feminine nouns of action: and also a few
agent-nouns (masculine) and adjectives. The root has in
general the same form'as before the suffix ^^ of the pass-
ive participle (9B2 ff.) — that is to say, a weak, and oft«n
a weakened or abbreviated, form.

a. The accent ought, ft would appear* in analog? with that of
the participle, to rest always apon the saffix) hut in the recorded
cooditioD of the language it does eo only In a minority of cases:
namely, about fifty, against elxty cases of accent on the radical syl-
lable, and a hundred and forty of uDdetermined accent; a number of
words — la, rti, oltti, tTPti. paktl, pu^tH, bhntl, btaftl, vrffi, fakti,
f ruqti, en\U athiti — have both scoentuations.

1. b, Eiimples ol the normal formation >t«; r&ti gift, titl aid,
rlti Jtotc, BtutI praise, bhakt£ dicinon, vift^ tervice, Urt{ /am», pfUrtf
b«*loteal, tOAti thought, pit! drink (ypii pple pita), dli&utfjtlrcw)).
(j/dhftv; ppla dhftuta); — and with accented root, g&tl motion, ^iAM
rtpoae, dftl division (_ydi; pple dlt4), d^(l tight, fq(l offering {yyBii:
pple l4t&], liktl iptecJi {y'v&e : ppls uktA), vf ddbl inertate.

0. The roou which tonn their participle In ita (966) do not ba*e
the 1 ilBO berore ti: thus, only Eupti, dTPti. A few roota haTlog their
parllclple In na instead of ta (867) forn the abatiact |douq alao in oi
(below, II BS). And from the roots tan and ran occoi tanti and r4nti,
beside the mora regolai tatl and r4ti; atao ihanti (once, VS.) beaide
ihatl. From thu two roots dfi give and dft divide, (he derivatire in com-
position i» sometimes -tti (for datl, with loas of radical vowel: compare
the participle-foim -tta, abote, 96Bf): thus, nlravatti (K.), Bampr&ttl
(9B), p&ritti (TB.) T&suttl. bh&gatU, magMttl (>11 RY.).

d. A few deiJiatiTea are made from reduplicated roote; their aocent
is varioQi: thug, oark^, didbitl and -didltl, j{gartl, and perhapi the
proper name jaylltt; also J&gdlll from /jakf (333f).

e. Derivatives from roots with preSies are nnmerous, and have (as iu
the cose of the participles in ta, and the action-nouns in ta) the accent
on the prefix: examples are ftnomati, abhitl, abati, nlrrtl, vykpti,
a4ihgatl. The only exceptions noticed are ftsaktl and fiantf, and abhi-

Digitizecy Google

433 Stema in I, U, al [—1168

fff (beaid« «bhifti). In othei comblnatlonB thm «ith pieOset, the ueen-
tutioii is in general the tune: iee the next ehtpter (1S74).

% t. The ■dJectlTea and agent-nonos — whieb, u maieulines, ars to
be eoDneeted vltii thete nthei than with tbe femlniDe abitncta — ue reiy
tew : thus, pAtl putrid, v&ftl *<'9^! dhAti ihaktr, JfUtI raiativt, pftttj
footman, p&ti matter; and a few otliera, of more oi leae dablani ebuaotei.
Tbe aoeent la Tuiona, a« in tbe othttr alaaa.

3. 2. A f*w void* ahow the snfllz ti preceded bf -varioni Towels,
Bnton- or iteni'TOweli. Tbe ordlnaiy indennediate 1 of tbe tCi-putlciple etc
la »een in B&niU, nJhlU, -RrhiU (1, u Vioal with this loot: 800b],
pathiti, bbai^lti; and with them may be mentioned the adjeellve fjlti,
the pioper namea torvitl and dabtaltl, and Bsfhitl and su^hta, not-
wlthatonding their long final. With atl are made a few derlyatlieB, *■-
iloQsIy accented: thn>, the sttlon-nonnB nAtUltf, dp^ati, pak^ti, mlth-
at(, vasaH, ram&ti, Trat&tl, am&tl and &mati, -dhrajati; and the
agent-woids aratl, kh&latf, T^kAti, rimati, dahatl. In lome of tbeae
la to be aeen with piobabllit} a atem-TOwel, u alto In j&nayatl and
raaayatl (and RT. haa gopay&tya). The fiammaritna' method of re-
preaenttng a root by Iti 3d alng. ptei. Indlc, dedlnlof thii ai a ti-at«m,
beglBs in the older laognace: e. f. ittvant (TB-)i k^ettvaut (AB.),
Tajatl and Jnhoti and dadftU (3.), nandaU (HBb.). The feminine
yi^Tatl j/oung, mmdtn 1* of lioUted ckaiaoter.

h. In Bone of tbe worda InttaDced in the laat paragraph, ti ia pet-
hapB applied aa a aecondary anffli. A kindred character belongs to It In
the numeral derliatlTea tmta pronominal roou, k&U, t4tl, T&Cl, and from
namerala, as daqati. vifiqad, faqfi, etc., with psiUcti (ftom p&fioa);
In pad&tl', and In addhfttt, from tbe particle adduL

1,188. ^ ni. This suffix agrees in general in its uses
and in the foim of its deriratiTes with the preceding; but
it makes a very much emallet number of words, among
which the feminine abstracts are a minority.

a. Aa waa noticed aboie (llB7o), a few verba (ending in Towela)
making their paisive participle in na initcad of ta make Iheli action-noiui
Id nl ioatead of ti. From the older laugnage are quotable JySnf iiyury,
JOr^i heat, haul abandonment -(and the maacnllaet ghf^l and Jlnji);
later occur gl&ni, -ml&ni, nanni-.

b. Words of the other cliaa aie: a^fili eating, -u^^l burning, T&hni
taking, Jlir^ singing, tArql hatiy, bhinjl excited, dhar^ tutlaining^
pre^i hving, 'Vj^ifi and vf^^i viriU; and with them may be mentioned
p^ijni tpeckUd.

a. In pre^ T6nl, meni, qrd^l, qrA^i U leen a strengthening of
the radical ayllable, snch as doea not appear among the derivatiTea in tl.
d. DerivatiTea Id ni from roota with pieBiea do not appear to occur.
Whltaay, OrsBmu. 3. ed. 28

ioy Google

1168—] XVII. Pmmakt Deeitatios. 434

«. In hzAdnnl and hlSdnnl «s li*ie a pieDzed n. In the woid*
eodiBf In ani, the a hu piobtbly the tame Talne wtth that of aU (abort,
1167 c); bat ani has gained a mora Independsat Matiu, and mar be beat
treated a« a aepaiate nifflx.

1166. ^f anL The woids made by this suffix hare
the same doable ralae with those made by the preceding
suffixes. Their accent is various. Thus:

a. Feminine aetion-nonna, sometlmea with coDcretad meaning : aa, i^k^
impuUe, gar&ifl mjury, dTotanI brightntM, kqlpavl iJoMt, aq&ni mittik,
vaztani tr»ek; and -ar^aai, odanl-, jarai^-.

b. A4*ctlTea and othei agent-wotda are: ari^ Jire-ttick, cari^l
moeahU, oakfi^l aiU^tUmer, tari^l q^iek, dhatnAnI pipe, dhvas&nl
leettering, -vtA^kfJ ttrtHgOtater, aara^] frodt. Dharafi and one or t««
other late word* an pmbablr Tarlaute to slenu In ani. From a ndn-
pUeated root'roTm comes •paptanl From dMideiatlTO stems ate made
mrttkq&9i, si^tefail, and (with preBi] ft-^^nkfA^ And a small
mmbei of words appear to atlaob themaelies to an B-aoiitt Mem: thoa,
parf&^l. aak^tpi, cazfa^L

O. It is questionable wbether the inflnitlTes in fi^i (B78) are to b*
pat here, aa acenaatiTes of a formation in ani, or under the next bbCBs,
as loeatlT«« of a fonnation in an, fl«m roots and ttems Ineraased by an
Miiitlo a

1160. )ER an. Not many woids aie made with a suffix
of tbi« form, and of these few aie plainly to be connected
with toots. Certain laie neuteis (along with the doubtful
iafinitiTes) aie nouns of action; the test are masculine and
neuter agent-noons. The accent is various.

a. The inflnittres which admit of being referred to tiiii snflli, ai
loMtlTe cases, are those In f&i^, of which the siliilsnt may be the Dual
of a tenie-item. They are all given abofs (078).

b. The other acUon-noifns in an are mata&n greaintM, r^&n mtlAortijf
(ET., oDCe: compare ri^an; the leeent-ieladon Is the reverse of the nsnal
Doe), and e&mbban dtpth (VS., once); and PB. has kfepi^S one«.

C. Agent-nonns (in part of doabtrnl connection) are; okQ&n ox,
ni,'^1fa.ix tyt, t&kfan carpenter, dhTAo&n proper name, piif&n name of
a god, maJJ&n marrow, taian king, vffan virilt, bull, s&ghan, BDlbin
(snIUuui Apssi.); also -gman, Jm&n, -bhvan, -qvan, witb ^v&n, yu>
Tan. yofan, and the stems &han, Adhan, etc. (430-4), filling op the
Inflection of other defective stems.

d. With ptellxea occni pratldivan and Atidivan, vibbvin, ai-
kSman.

ioy Google

435 StehB in ni, anl. an, tu, nu. [—1168

1161. ^ ta. The gieaX mass of the Trordfl of this- form-
ation aie the infinitives — accusatives in the later lan-
guage, in the earlier likewise datives and ablative-genitivea:
see above, 970 b, 072. fiat a few aie also used independ-
ently, as aotion-nouns oi with concreted meaning; and an
extremely small number, of somewhat questionable charac-
ter, appeal to have the value of agent-wotds. They are of
all genders, but chiefly masculine. The root has the gups-
stiengthening.

a. The Infinitive words are accsnted on the radical syllable when
simple, and moat of the ethere have the same accent; bnt a few have
the tone on the ending.

b. Eximplea >ie: or the rsgnUc rormation, nuae. dita tkttre, jfttn-
hvrih, dhitn eUmant, t&nta thread, minta comuel, 6ta weft, aStU
reeeptaele, aita tit, fl6ta preeiure ; alio kr4ta eapaeitj/, >nd sAkta griie ;
rem. v&stn morning; nent. vastu thmg, vtata abode; — irlOi ucent
on the ending, aktu ray, jantd being, gSt& looy 4nd long, yStd |^P)
dmnon, hetu cauie,'ket6 banner (&U muc); — wltli anatrengUiened root,
ft4 teaton, pitu drink, sdtn birth, and appuently k^ta [In TtftvBS
timie); with vfddbl-atrsngtlieDlng, vaatn (>1>ot«), Ageat-nonnB appeu
to be dblEtn drinliable and iero^%u. jiuJcal.

O. The inflnitlTec in to have (868) ortan the nnlon-TOirel i before
the lurfli, and thU In ■ rew cue* Is lengthened to L In other iiie occnr
tUo -at&ilta and -dh&ritn (both with dua), -b&vltn (vlth en); tiu-
ph&rltn aeami of the ume foTmatlon, bat is obeenie.

d. In X few initanoei, the infllx tu appeus to be added to a tenae-
OT ooDjagation-»tem tn a; thai, edbat^ and vRbatn; tamTatti and
tapyatd; and aifSs&ta. The Mcent of the laat !■ paralltled only by that
of Jlvlttn life, which la farther exceptional in (bowing a long &; It ii
lued lometlmea In the manner of an InflnltiTe.

1162. ^ nu. This satQx forms a comparatively small
body of words, generally masculine, and having both the
abstract and the concrete value.

a. The accent ia nsnally on the ending, and the root nnstrength-
ened.

b. Thus: kfepnu jerk, bh&nd light (later lun], vagnu sound,
Bunu eon, danu (with irregalar accent} m. f. demon, n, drop, dete; dhenit
[. cow, — grdbnu hatty, tapnn biiming, trasna fearful, dhf^l^u bold;
— and vi^a ViiMna, and peibaps ath&Qn pillar. Compare also aeffls
tun, 11 86 a,

28*

Diaii.zecy Google

lies—] XVII. pRiHART Derivation. 43s

o.'Thtt >lw (IlkB ta) tppeut eonettneB vith a prellied a; thni,
kqlpaQ4 mitnle, kTUuUna and nadand rearing, atibiuam (uid •nd.
t) fountain, Tibhai^tUlia (only iDtUnce with prefli,] hrttJctHg to pi*ef*;
and peibipi the ptoper ninifli dlauin ud kf^iau Mong hare.

1168. ST tha. The words made with this suffix are
almost without exception action-noucs (though some hare
assumed a concrete Talue). They are of all genders. Tie
root is of a weak (or even weakened) form, and the accent
usually on the suffix.

a. Thai: muc, •itba ^in;, irtba goal, -kftha making, githi
tong, paktbA n. pr., bhrthi offering, -rttba road, -^itlia iging domt,
gotba taelling, slktha ladimanl; and, or let* ileu wimectioiu, ynUii
h«rd, r&tha cAarMf; — nent., oktbA toying, tirtU ford, laXbk long,
rillh& luriiagt, uid appanntlr Pnt^i^ hack; — lem. (with &), satiX
»<mg, nithS tooy. Badlckl ft It wealuned to 1 in githa tang and -pUhs
drink and •pitha proUction; a Bnal naMl ta loat in -gatha 9°i*V ""^
h&tha tlayittg. In viJiglthA (9B.; bat BAU -Ita) ii appuently ie«n 1
fonnitlan from > TedopUcatlon of yji, oietorioui.

b. A few ezamplee of combiDMlon with fnAzm OMnr, with aae«ai
on the anal: that, nirfthi dMtruetion, ■Mfagathi tmiem, etc.

C. Still more common In the older lan^a^ is a f>rm of tbli aafSx
to which haa become preflzed an t, which la probably of thematio orl^tn.
though become a nnlon-Towel. Thna : -anAtha braathing, ay4tba foot,
oar&tha mobHitg, tTB94tha vthomenee, and ao prothAtha, yajfctha, n-
r&tha, vahf&tha, no&tha, vid&tba, 9aA8athR, ^ap&tha, Qayitlia,
9T^&tha, qvasitha, sac&tha, stan&tha, atav&tha, BfaT^Uia. and,
with wMfc root-form, mvitlia; the later language add* karatha, taratha,
^amatha, aavatha. With a pi«fls, the accent it thrown (orirard npw
the final; thai, avaaathi abodo, pravasatbi aUaaet; bat pri^^tha
hrtath li treated ei If pr&n were Ml IntegiKl not.

d. Ifolated comblnatlonB of tba with other preceding towoIb ooeoi:
thnt, T&raUia prottetion, J&ratba uatling(f); and mat&tlia lymmnt).

1164. ^ tha. This suffix (like ET tha, above) has aa 9 <
attached to it, and, in the very few derivatires whioh it
makes, appears only as ^ ithu.

a. Tb« only Tedic examplea are ej&tbn quaking, vep&thn IrtmBUiig,
Btaa&tba roaring. Later caaea are nandittan (T9,), aadattao (D.),
kfavathu (S.), davatbo, bhraflf aChtt, m^ljathn, vamatbn, ^vayatbn,
sphltijatbu.

lies. TJ yu. With this suffix are made a very few nouns,

D,j,i,....,C-'OLWlC

437 Stems ih nu, tha, Urn, yn, mft, mi, man. [ — 1198

both of agent and of action, wilh uosttengtliened loot and
various accent. Thus:

a. Abitiaolt (muc) &re maSTU terath, mptyu death (with t added
to tfae ibort OniX ol the looi).

b. Adjectives eto. aie druhyu ii. pr., bhnjyi^ pliable, muoyti (OB.
1. 1. 7), 9iuidti;u purs, ;^yu piotu, a&hyn strong, d&eyu tntmy; and,
with vrddbi-itienglhealng, j&y^ victoriotu.

0. Fot otbei derlTatiTSi ending In ju, aee the tufflx n, belov, 1 1 78 b, 1.

1166. ^ ma. The action-nouns made by this suffix are
almost all masculine; and they are of various root-fotm and
accent, as axe also the agent-nouns and adjectives.

a. BiunpleE of Mtlon-noDU* &re: ajmA otmrie, gliarm& Awrf, tela
progrtM, bhima brightaett, stona jfoic, stoma long of praise.

b. Bxample* of igant-Qonna ete. ■!«: tigmk iliarp, bhlmA terrible,
9BKm& MM^iUy, idbm4,^^ Tndlun& warrior. A ilnglo Initenee trom
> rednpUcated root Is tQtiun& potoerjul. Sar&mt r, with a before the
salflx, U of donbttttl «oaiieetion.

e, A nunber of gteme In ma h&ve atemi in man btdda them, a&d
appaw, at leait In part, to be tranafen from the an- to tha a^edeoaion.
Sanik ate ^fma, oma, ema, arma, t6kma, darmA, dbarma> nan>i4,
yllms, TDgma, vema, ^afma, sAma, adnaa. ti6ma.

1167. fif mi. A very small nDinber of nouns, maecaline and
feminine, formed with mi, may be conveniently noticed here.

Thu», rirom T-niot<, -Orml tnave, -lEilrmi action, sQrmf t. lube; fhim
othen, JSmf relation, bhibnl or bhdml t. earth, lakpni lign; alao prot'
•bly ra^ml line, ray; and the adjective krddbmi 0 RV., once).

116B. TH man. The numeious derivatives made with
this suffix are almost only actiOD-aouns. The gteat majotJty
of them aie neutei, and accented on the root-syllable; a
muoh smallei number are masculine, and accented on the
suffix. The few agent-words are, if nouns, masculine, and
have the latter accent: in several instances, a neuter and
a masculine, of the one and the other value and accent,
stand side by side. The root has in general the gn^^a-
strengthening.

1, a. Examples of legnluly formed nsuten are: k&rman tietion,
jAnman birtk, ti^m^ji name, v&rtman track, v^man dioeiiing, ti6maii
taeriJkM, -dy6tmaa tphndor.

ioy Google

lies—] XVII. Pbihary Derivation. 438

b. Exunplei of mtscullDe abitrteti >re: amkafaeor, ojm&n aCrwi^A,
jem&n conquft, av^dmin tmettnam, bemiui impuUt.

O. OoiietpODding neuter iction-nonni &nd muoDllne ic^Dt-DonDB *n:
briihmKa tooraAij) >nd brabm&npriMf; daman fi/t &nd dftm4ii ^V«ri
db&mifta nth vai dhann&n orderer; B&dmtui itat uid aadm&n Mfto*.
But b\n.Ka friend stands fa Ihu contiuy roUtloD to oio&n m. fawn: "Vary
few other sgeut-nouiu occui; and all, except brahmim, are of lare ocoananee.

d. Oa the othei hand, Jeman and varfman and STftdman (and
variman) have the difference of geudei and accent wilhont a coneipondtng
dlffeienEe of meaning.

e. The noun ifOUui itime, thongh mascnUne, !■ accented on the
isdlcal Brl'<''>le; and two 01 three other qneatlonablG caaes of the aame kind

f. The derlTatlTeB in man naed aa inflDltlvee (974) have foi the moat
part the accent of Dented ; the only exceptloa ii vldm&ne.

g. A few vocdi, of either olua, have an Irngnlai root-form: thus,
6dmaii, fl^m&n 01 ufman, bbliman tarth, bhfUn&n abunAmee, syd-
man, Bim&a, bbajm&n, vldm&n, qikman, fnfman, Bidhmau; and
kir^nnaa, bhitrman, qikman.

h. DeiiratlTeg In man from loott with piettiea are not nnmMoa).
The; are nanally accented on the preBx, whsthet action-nonna ot adJectlTea:
thua, ptkbhtenaaji forthbrinffittg, pr&yfiman dtpartwe; AnnTartmut
following after: the exceptions, vijiman, pratlT«rtm^ vlsarmin,
are paibapa of posaeasive formation.

2. 1. The same suffix, thongh only with its abstract-making valae,
has in a number of casM before it a union- vowel, i or i; and lm4n
comee to be used aa a secondary suffix, forming abstract nonns (iDa»-
onliue) from a cosatderable number of u^jeotivea.

J. The nenteia In Im&a and iman are primary formatioua, belongloE
almoat only to the oldei language: thus, j4niman, dharlman (M.), vitrt-
man (beside varimin, aa noticed above); and dArlman. <ib^rima«,
p&rinum (and p&reman SV., anc«), bh&rlman, v&rlman, iUu^man,
sUulman, aivlman, and b&vltuan. Those in imaa are hardly met
with outside the Rig-Teda.

k. The maeenlinea in im&n are fn the oldest langoage less frequent
than the nenten Just described: they are t&Illman(?), Jarim&n, prathl-
m&n, mablm&n, varlmin (beside the eqalvalent v&rlmon and vin-
man)f varfimiLn (beside the aqulTilent viur^man and varfm&n), harl-
m&n, and drBgbim&n (VS.) beside drigbmin [Y.B.). Some of theie,
•a well as of (he deriTatives in simple man, attach themselvea In meaning,
01 in foTm also, to adJecUvea, to which they seem the accompanying ab-
stracts: compare the stmllai treatment of the primary comptrativea and
superlatlTes (above, 468): each are pSpm&a (t« pftp&, piplraa etc.);
dragjtun&c etc, (to dlrgb&, dr^ghlTaa, etc); v&rlmui etc. (to lurii,

Ugil.ze.., Google

439 St£hb in man, 7ui, viua, Tani, vano. [—1170

v&rlyaB, etc.); pr&thlnuui (to pfUlu, pr&thlqtha); harlm&n (to h&ri
or harlta); v&rfman ate. (to v&rflTOs etc.); avildmaii etc. (to srftdi^,
BV&Uyas, etc). Then In the Brihmuit Ungukge ue fouod fnnbei ez-
uDples: thill, dhamTimiai (TS. E.), dra^him&n (HS. E.: to dri}li&,
drA^talyas, etc.), "yiw^i^i" (^B.; and i.n<m«» a. hi(), sthemin, Bth4-
vlmiui (n. biff pitce), taruQiman (K.], pam^imaii (AB.), aballmaii
(ChU.), lobitdman (KB.); uid itill liter inch as lacbiman, kffqlman,
pflrpjman, madharlman, ytylman, etc., etc.

1160. ^ van. By this suffix are made almost only
agent-wotds, adjectives and nouns, the lattei chiefly mas-
culines. The loot is unstiengthened, and to a shoit final
Towel is added a rT t before the suffix. The aooent is almost
always on the root, both in the simple woids and in theit
compounds.

a. The laiertioD of t li an lotlmatlon that the wordi of tbli rorm Me
origiaally made hj the addition of an to deiintiTes in n and tu; fat
Tan has the praesnt valae ot an iDtegral snfai in the language, and moit
ba tisated u sneh.

b. Example* of the qbuU formation are: maso. y^van offering,
drAbvan harmifuf, f&kran enable, -rtkvan leaning, •jftvan eonqiurmg,
miitvaa prmting, kftvan active, -g&tran (like -gat, •gatya) goiatf, a&t-
van (v'8an)tmirrA>r; nent. pirTanjomf, dh&nvan frofo. Irregnlai, with
(Ctengthened root, are irran eourtmr, -Tftvan (f AV.) driving off-, and,
with aoeent on the infaz, dfrin (? VS.) and vidv&n (T AT.).

0. Examples from roots with preflxes (which aie not rale) are: atltvan
exeeUing, upab&STan rtvUer, sambbftnui coUeeting; and perliips viv&a-
VAa ehining: abhlaatvan la a componud with goTomlng preposition (1310).
For the compounds with other elements, which, except in spedsl casea,
have the same accent, see below, 1S77.

d. The stems mu^lT&n robber and sanftvan (each RV,, onee) aie the
only ones with a Daion-rowel, and are perhaps better regarded aa aecond-
ary deriiatiTes — ot which a few are made with this sufllx; aaa below,
1884. From a reduplicated root are made ir&r&Tan and clbltvAn (and
possibly TiT&avan).

e. Actlon-nouDS made witli the suRli van are onlj the inflnitlTsI words
mentioned at 974 — unless bhurri^ C^T., once) Is to !» added, u
locative of bharvim.

f. The feminines corresponding to ftdjectives in van are not
made (apparentlj) directly from this suffix, bnt from vara, and end
in Tari; see below, 1171b.

1170. cR vana, ^f% rani, ^ vanu. The very few words

Digitizecy Google

1 170—1 ^^^- PUHART Dekitatioh. 440

made vritfa these suffixes may best be noticed here, in coa-
nection with ^ van (of which the others are probably sec-
ondary extensions).

a. Vilh Tiuia are made vagvaak talkative, Mtvaak warrior (besida
a&trtui, abOTe); and, bou a t«dupIiMted iMt, gnqakvaui ihining.

b. Wlih vani are made from ilmple root* taTT&fi exceBing, and
bburv&i;! rettltai, and, (toin tedopllcaMd roots, QuqakrJual aAminy, da-
dhifT&fl daring, tntarr&i^ »triving tffttr, and JtigiirT4i^ praiting;
txbaxi^vktfi U obacnie.

a. With vana ia made only vagraau tone, noite.

1171. ^ vara. With this suffix are made a few deriv-
atives, of all genders, having for the most part the value
of agent-nouns and adjectives. Much more common are the
feminine stems in ^ft vart, which, &om the earliest period,
serve as corresponding feminines to the masculine stems in
^ von.

a> A tew naaooUne adJeeUvM In var& oeenr, formally aeoordant (ex-
cept In aoaent) with the temlnlnea: tboi, Itvari ffinoff' -wivant *atinff;
and (0, fntthei, in the otdet langaage, i^axt, -jAvara, ph&rvaia>
bbirvari, bhlsvari, vyadhvari (i), -aadvara. sthftvori, and danbt-
leti with them belonga vldvaUt; later, -kaavara, tatvara, ghaovan
(atoo ghaamara), -Jitvara, na^^vwa, pivara, madvara, -sftvazai
from a cednplicated root, yijrSvari (B. and later). Hany of these hat*
femlDlnes In &.

b. The femlnlnea In vail accord In treatmeut of the root and in
acoent with the masoolluoi la van to whtelii they corrwpoud: thus, ytij-
vari, -Jftvarl, aftvarl, -^tvari, -ytvaii, and so on (about twentj-flve
BDch formadooa In BV.]; from a ledaplUated toot, -qtOvaM.

0. A Tery small Damber of neatets occdj, with acoeat on the root:
thns, kArvara deed, gibvara (later also gabhvara) thicket; and i femin-
ine or two, with accent on the pennlt: orv&rB Jietd, and urv&ri torn
(both of doabtfol etymology).

We take ap now the saffizeH b^ which are made only ateiUB
having the valae of agent-noiUB and adjectiveH; beginning with a
brief mentloa of the participial endinga, which in general have been
already eaffieientlj treated.

1172. ^ ant (or SrT »<)■ The office of this suffix, in
making present and future participles active, has been folly
explained above, io connection with the various tense-stems
and conjugation-stems (chaps. VlH.-XrV.], in combination

Digilizecy Google

441 Stbmb in vona etc., vara, ant, vftAs, mOiia, &aa, ta. [ — 1176

with which alone it is employed (not directly with the root,
unlesB this is also used as tense-stem).

». A fev woTds of like origin, but nied u Inilependent tdJectlTM,
WMS fiTGD ttt 460. Wltb th« ume or a. formdlr Identlrd tanii ire nude
ttom pionominil niou {yant uid kirant (451, filTa). And idvayant
not doubh-iongued (BV., once), tppfttn to contain a ■iiollir fotmatlon fiom
the anmonl dvi — nnteiR we tn to uiame a denomloatire Teib-atem u
intennedikte.

1178. ?tH Tft^ (oi ^ Ysa). Foi the (perfect active] pat-
ticiples made with this suffix, see above, B02-6, and 468 ff.

a. A fair woida of irregiilat ind queitionable fonnttlon were noticed
■t 40S, abOTe. Atio, sppuent trangferg to a foim ns or Ufa. RY, Toca-
Uze« the v once, In Jqjnruin.

b. The oldest Unpuge (BV.) hu ■ very few words in vas, of donbt-
fnl relations: (bbvaB and fikvaa tkil/ul (beside words in vtt and van),
and perhaps kbidvaa (i^klUUIJ. The nentei abstract v&livaa breadth,
room (belonging to oru broad, In the same nunner with v&rtyas and
varimin), l» quite isolated. MBb. makes a nomlDRtlTe piv&n, at If from
pivSAa instead of plvau.

1174. rrH mana. The participles having this ending
are, as has been seen (584 b), present and future only, and
have the middle, or the deiived passive, value belonging in
geneial to the stems to which the suftix is attached.

1176. SIH &na. The participles ending in QPT Una are
of middle and passive value, like those just noticed, and
either present, perfect, oi (partly with the form ^H sftna:
above, 897 b) aoiist.

a. A few other words ending In the same maauer in the old language
may be mentioned here. The RT. has the adjBctlTes t4kavftna, bli^a>
vft^a, v&aavana, &rdliva8Kn&, apparently made on tbe model of par-
tlolplal stems. Also the proper names ApnavSna, pftbavftna, and 07&-
Tftua and S7&vataiia. P&rqbut abyti ii donbtfal; n^llnfi (BY., once)
is probably a false reading; apu&na Is of doabtfnl character.

1176. FT ta. The use of this suffix in forming parti-
ciples directly from the root, 01 from a coojugatiooal (not
a tense) stem, was explained above, 952-6. The participles
thus made ate in patt intransitive, but in great part passive

L.,j,i,....,LiOOgle

1176—] XVn. PRIHART OBRITATtOK. 442

in value [like those made by the two pieoeding suffixes, but
in much larger meamte, aud mote decidedly).

a. A few general adJecUyei, oi qodiu wUh concieU mMning, tn
tdtptuloiia of thli putloiplo. KximplM ue: ^^t& routfh, (jltk eold, d|^
4b& (foidf^M: SS4 a] >rm; aAtkm«»*«nger,90.tA.tAariott«r] ftkri^
gll)rt& ffJiM, jaU kind, dyfiti gangling, nftti dmie«, fivitk lift, oariU
hekmiior, onlta mnHe. The a^l^ctiTe tiglt& (BV.) Aarp ihowi uiomiloiu
TeTenioD or palitel to guttural beroie the i (S16d). Vftvata dtar li i
ringiB exuuple bom ■ tednplicued root

b, DoDbtleit Ulei tba example and model of paiticiples from denomi-
DaUre itemi (of vhteh, hoiray«i, no Initiiices are qaotabte fnm the Vedi
— DDlesi bh&mita BV.}, doTiTattTOf In ita aie in the later langnage made
directly from noun and adjectiTe-steme, having the meaning of enJonni
with, afftcUd bjf, made to be, and the like (compare the itmilar EnglUh
formation Id ed, u homed, barefooted, bluecoated). Examples ire rathlta
fUmiehtd tcith a eharioi, dnhkhlta pained, ktuomlta Jtotoered, dnr-

■ ballta toeaktnvd, nl^aaihgayitit indubitable, etc. etc.

o. A few wordt ending In ta ere accented on the radical lyllablt,
and thelt relation to the participial deriTatlTea la Tory donbtToI: aadi an
&ata home, niArta morUd, vita tcind; and with them may be mentioned
g&rta high teat, nikta night, biata hand. TratA li oommonly -rlered
eg eonUlnlng a inffli ta, hot it donbtleii comes from i/Vpt (vrat^ like
tradA, vraJA) and meant originally cottrte.

d. Several adjeeti*es denoliog color end in ita, bnt are hardly con*
nectlble Kith root* of kindred meaning: thai, palltA grog, iolta bltdi,
rAhita and l6hita rei^ hArita green ; akin with them are Ata variegaUi,
QTetA white. The femlnlnea of theee items an In part irregnlar: thu,
ini and ^ytol; rbhl^i and I6hiiil, and hAri^l (but the eomtpondlag
maac. faArli^ also occurs); and Asiknl, pAllknl, and hAriknI.

e. A small number of adjectives in the older language ending la at*
are not to be ieparated from the participial word) in ta, although thdi
epecHc meaning U In part gemndiTe, They are: -ptMaiit eooked, dar^atfc
and paqyata seen, to he teen, worth teeing; and so yi^atA, haryatt,
bharatA. The y of pa^yata and horyati indicates pretty plainly that the
a also la that of a preaent tense-stem. HajatA lilvery ia of more obiCBie
relation to V'raJ color; p&rrata mountain must be aecondary.

1177. ^ na [aud ^ iua, 3^ una). The use of the su£Bx
R ua in forming from certain loots participles equivalent to
those in rT ta, either alongside the latter or instead of them,
was explained above, at S57.

a> With the aame eafflt ate made a nnmber of general adjectliea,
and of nooni of *ailoni gender (tern. In BS). The aeoent It on the enfBi

ioy Google

443 Stems in to, na, ina, una. u. [ — 1178

oi on the root. A Tew examples are: U99& hot, qvoik forttmate, 4(iia
ravenout, qrftnR tchita; muc, praqnA qatelion, 7aJtL4 offering, ghn!>&
Asoi, v&nja color, BT&pna iZeep; neut., parqi winy, riitaet jeteel (f);
fern, t^^ft M»'t<, yftofii tupplieatton. But muiy of the itema ending in
na ue not latdlly conueatible with loots. An KntithaelB at eccant \» Been
111 UkTQB ^ar >ud lEar9& eorti'.

b. The few words ending In ina are of doubtful comiectioD, bat may
be nenttoned beie: thus, amln4 violent, vfjini erookad, d&k§t^ ri'^At,'
dr&Ti^ propefb/, druhlqa, -frefi^a, lutriQA ; and kanina may be added.

o. The Koida ending in ana are ot Tariona meaning and aeeent, like
thOBe in ana: they ate &rjnna, karfi^a, -oetnna, tiiro^a, dftra^A,
dliarA^a, nar&^a. p{9ima, mithoni, ;atAna, var^a, viruQa, 9a-
Inna, and the feminine yamOnK; and bliru9& may be added.

d. Tbeee are all the proper partioipial endings of the taaguage.
The getuDdWes, lBt«r and earlier, are in tbe mttln evident secondary
formationB, and will be treated under the head of secoodarj derivation.

We take up now the other inffiiea forming agent-nouns and
adjectives, beginning wiib tliose which have more or less a parti-
cipial value.

1176. ? u. With this suffix are made a considerable
body of derivatives, of very various chaiacter — adjectives,
and agent-nouns of all genders, with different tieatmeat of
the root, and with different accent. It is especially used
with certain conjugational stems, desideiative (particularly
later) and denominative (mainly earlier], making adjectives
with the value of present participles; and in such use it
wins in part the aspect of a secondary suffix.

a. The root has oftenest a veak (or weakened) form; but It is
aometimea vriddhied; least often [when capable of gu^a), it has the
guna-strengtheDing — all without any apparent connection with either
accent or meaning or gender. After final radical K is usually added
y (2S8) before tbe suffix. A few derivatives are made from the te-
dnplicated root. But many words ending in u are not readily, or not
at all, conneotible with roots; examples will be given especially of
those that have an obvious etymology.

b. Eiampiea of ordinaiy adjeotiveB ate: urd UMJe, fiti. straight, PFtbu
broad, mi^n lo/l, BKdbu good, av&dd euitet, t&pu hoi, v&au good; ]ftyu
eonquering, d&ni burHing; ^aya lying, rtku mnptt/; dhBjxi thinly, pByfi
proUcting. Final fi appeals to be lost before the anffli in -Bthn (anq^hu,
antifthu), and petbapa in yu, -gn (agregu), and •kbu [SfchA].

0> Examples of nouns ate: maic., aAfd ray, rlpvl dteeiv^, vfiyu

Digil.zecy Google

1176—] XVII. Fkihart Derivation. 444

leind, km life, rnktm man, Mantt; fem., {fa (aUo mue.) ttmne, Bfndhii
(alio mMo.) rietr, \AtA oi tan& hody; Dent., kq& food.

d. DerlTitiTes from redapIiMted roots ue: olkfto, J&gmn, jigT&(
Jjjfiiii ■ifl^Ut -tatna (nnU»i thli la mide with nu oi tna), didynO),
dadm. fAyn or yayii and yiya ("tth OmI & loM), pfpn (proper iwaic),
lUdluvn; aad titan, babhrfi, •nun (arim), malimld (?) have tke
lapect of betng ilmllai rormtUona.

e, A faw derlTitlTet are mids from roota witb pnflsM, wtUi Tarhni
■eoentnttlon ; for «z>mpls, op^A on-eomt'n;, pnunayn going to imtnu-
tion, vUdlndn t «emin diaeM«, abbiqu r<in (dineUr), a&ifaT«sa diMJ)-
tn; together.

1, Fiom teDM-»t«m«, appareiitlr. >i" made tonyd llmndormg, blllltd&
iplUting, -viaixi _findmg, and (with lorlBtle «) d&kfu and dbikfu (*U BT.).
g. Participial adJectiTM in 6 bom dMlder*tlT« "loota" ((Imd* vftb
1MB of their flnal a) are anffleientlT nomeroai Id tha anelNit lansaac^ (M^-
hu more than a do^en of them, AV. not qolta lO maay) to ikow that the
fDimattoo was altatdy a ragalar one, extensible at will; and later nch
adjeetlTei may be mada from every deilderttWe. Example) (older) aie:
dltB4, dlpsd, otkltaa, tltlkqd, piplqn, mnmukfu, irakfA. ql^Uk-
^d; with prefix, abhidlptd; with aoomalaiM looeDt, dldfkfu. Thete ad-
jectt'Ot, both earlier and later, may take an object In the aeciuatlTe (S71 a),
h. A few similar adjeMUee are mada In the older laoguage from cau-
atlTet: thns, dhSraru (^pertutent), bhSJayu, bh&rayn, mafih^o, man-
dayu, ^amayi; and mfgayu from the caDi.-denom. mrg&ra.

1. Hnch more numaroui, howerer, are each foTmatloas &om the mora
proper donomtnetlTos, especially In the oldest laofnage (KT. baa toward
ei|hty of thorn; AV. only a qoarter u many, Including six or eight nhJch
ate not found in RT. ; and they are still rarer in the Brihma^as, and
hardly met with later}. In a majority of cases, pergonal *erbsl fOrmi from
the same denomlnatlTe stem are In nse: thus, for example, to agtaATOt
arstl3r6, rJQfu, oarai^fiii, manaayu, BaniqTu, nnifTu, aaparyd; In
Dihen, only the present participle In yiuit, or tha abstrset nona In ji
(1 148 d), or DoUtlDg at all. A few are made upon danomlnatlTe items from
proDoans; thns, tvl^^ (beside tvSyint and tv5;a], ravayn or yuv&yu,
aimVu, KVsy&, and the more anomalDDs ahaifayA and Udird. Eape-
elally where i>a other denominative forms accompany the adjectire, this fais
often tha aspect of being made dltectlT from the noon with the sofSx yn,
either with a meaning of iteking or duiring, or with a mora general adjec-
tive sense : thns, yavayfi itefcing grain, variliay^ boar-hunting, BtanasTn
dttiring tht breait ; or^ftyu teoolm, ynvaoTU youthful, bblmayv UrriUt.
And 10 the "secondary snflli yn" wins ■ degree of standing and applioatlon
as one forming detlvstlTe adjectives (as in ahaibriu and kidty^ above,
ud donbtlesi some others, even of the RT. words). In three RV. eaid,
the llnal as of t noan-item is even changed to O before it: namely, aA-
hoyii, duvoyii (and dmojA; beside dtiTaa7&), iakrdhom.

D,j,i,....,CiOOylc

J. The woidi In ya do not sbaw In the Vedt lesolntion into in (ec'
cept dhOsi^ AV., once).

1179. ^37 a. Stems in :3t tl ate very few, even as
compared with those in 1 1 (1166}, They aie foi the most
part feminines conespODding to masculines in u (844 bj,
with half-a-dozen more independent feminines (see 866 o).

a. To those ilro&dy mentlDiied >bOTa >rt to be added kar^p»f, -oalfl
(In piuhQoalli), -Juin (In praJRnA), qninbhili.

1180. 3^ uka. With this suffix aie made deriTatiTes
having the meaning and oonstiuotion (271 g] of a present
participle. The root is stiengthened, and has the accent.

K, The deriTaUToa In ak& >ie hiidly knovn In the Yeda; bnt they
become frequent In the Biahminu, of nhoie luiguage tbey ue ■ miiked
cb*r*otwistio (abont sixty dilteieut etame occdi there); uid tbey ue foaiid
occuioually In the Utet Ungoege. In all piobibUlty, they ue orlgintlly and
properly obtained by adding tbe aeeondaiy BofOi ka (ISSfi) to a derlyatlve
in n; bat tbey bare gained fully tbe ehartoter of piimaiy foimatloai, and
In only au tnrtanoe or two ia there found in actnal uae an U'lrord from
wbiob they ibould be made.

b. The root ia only eo far etrengthened that tbe radical syllable is a
heavy (79) one ; and U baa the accent, whether the deriiatWe Is made from
a almple root or from one with prefli,

o, Eiamples, from the Brshmina language, are: vadoka, nagnka,
ttpokramuka, pr&p£dnk&, upastbSjrnka (368), vyfiyuka, v6duka,
bbavtika, k^dbnka, bamka, v^oka, naniitrdliuka, dMquka,
filambuka, Qlk;aka (QB.: RT. has qik^d), pramayuka ($B, ba»
pramSro).

d. EzceptlaDs a* regatde coot-torm are : nlnntrgiirka (with v^dhi-
•trengtbenlng, at Is nsnal with this root: 627), -kaauka, fdhsuka (^m
* tenie-stem; beside ArdtLUka). AV. accents B&ihkaaaka ({B. has
■Bihkitanka) and vikaeuka; RV. ha* B&nnk4 (which is its only example
of tbe formation, if it be one; AT. baa also gh^tnka from i/han, snd

. &pramfiyuka) ; vaauka (TS. et a1.) is probably of another character.
Aqanliyuka (FB. et al.) is tbe only example noticed from a conjogatlon-stem.

e. or later ooeotrence are a fe«r words whose relation to the others is
more ot lesa donbtfnl: ksnnuka and dbKnnnka, taSruka, tarknka,
n&ndoka, p&dnkB^ peouka. bblk^oka, la^nVa, aeduka. hi^^^^^t
bra^nka. Of tbue, only Iftfuka appears like a true continner of the
formation ; aeTeral are pretty clearly secondary derlvatlyes.

t, A fonuation in Oka (a anfllx of like origin, peihapi, with uka)
■nay be menUoned bete; namely, tndbilka, majjtika, and, tnm ledn-

D,j,i,...., Google

1180— ] XVa Prduby DERtVATiOM. 446

pliMtad n>ot«, Jlgarttka ttaktflU, jalU»pakft (latar) m¥tttrmg, d«DiU-
fAka biting, ySysjAka taerifiemg nwcA, ▼ftvsdtlka (later) (oftsfsM;
salallika b qaeMiaiiable.

1181. 19^ aka. Here, aa in the preceding caae, we
donbtleas have a suffix made by aecoudary addition of ^ ka
to a derivative in ^ a; bat it has, foi the same teason as
the othet, a right to be mentioned heie^ Its fiee use in
the manner of a primary suffix is of still later date than
that of uka; it has very few examples in the older language.

a. In BT. la lamaA (bMldai pSvaUt, whick hu a different >o«ent,
uid wUflh, H the metre ibowc, ii really pavSka) onlj al^aka mittHe;
AT. tddi piyaka and T&dbaka, and TS. Kbtiikr6^nka. But in the lalet
languige aaeh dariTatfTM are eommoD, more ninaUy with tdsliiK of the loot-
■fltable by itrengthenlng to heaTj qaaolilT: thoa, nl^aka, dSraka (S56},
pftoaka, grahaka, bodbaka, JBgaraka; bat al«o janaka, *•*"»"■*•■
They an declared by the granunariani (o hiTe the aoeeot on the radical
lylUble. They often ocenr In copnlatlTe eompoiillan with feraadlTef of
the Mme toot: tlraa, bhakfyabhakfaka tattle taid toUr, vb^ptvfteaka
ittigniAtd and daignatirm, and la on.

b. That the derlTitiTM in aka Bometlmea take an acousative object
iraa pointed ont above (971 a).

o. The coneaponding feminine la made sometiniei in skK 01 in at^
bat more nmaUy In IkS : thoa, nftyikft (with nftyakS), p&elkK. bodMk& ;
compare eecondary aka, below, ISSS.

d. DeiiiitlTea In Ska are made from a tew roots: tha«, Jalpika,
bbikfSka; bat very few occni in the oldsT langnafa: thna, pavftka (ibOTC,
a), nabhSka, smayaka, JUi«ka(?), -oaUka, patskl. With aka ie
made in RY. mf4ayika, bom the caaiadTe alem : pfdikn and the pi«-
pei name (kfrSku are of obicnie connection.

e. DetlTatlTea in ika and Ika will be treated below. In oonaeedon
with IhoM tu ka (tlSeo).

11S2. rT tr (di FT^ tar). The derivatives made by this
suffix, as r^ards both their mode of formation and tbeii
usee, have been the subject of remark more than onoe
above (see 869 ff., 942 ff.). Agent-nouns are freely formed
with it at every period of the language; these in the oldest
language are very frequently used participially, governing
an object in the accusative (271 d) ; later they entet into
'combination with an auxiliary verb, and, assuming a future

Diail.zecy Google

447 Steus in n^a, iika, tf. In. [—1183

meaning, make a periphiastic future tense (d42). Theit
coiiespooding feminine is in trl.

a. The root has re^larly the gUQa-strengtheDiDfr- A union-vowel
1 (very rarely, one of another character) is often taken: as re^rds
its ptesenoe or absence In the periphrsstfc future forms, see above
(048 ft).

b> WlthoDt Ktu^a-change ie only il^^ plough-ox (no proper *gent-Qouii:
kpparently Akf-t^: compare tbe noans of telidoDslilp tiiTther on). The loot
grah bu, u DBoil, 1 — thai, gsralUt^; uid the »me appear* In -tarltf,
-pavitt, -marltf', •vu^ti-, -Bavitp. An n-vowel is taken tnilead by
t&ratr and tarnt^, dbteutf, and ainntr; long in varQtf-, atrangthened
to O in inan6ti' and maaot^. Prom a reduplicated root comea vB.v6.tf.

o. The aooent, in the older language, is somettmea on the snffiz
and Bomclimea on the root; or, from roots combined with prefixes,
sometimes on the suffix and sometimes on the prefix.

d. In general, the acr.ent on the root or prefix aocompanles the parH-
dpial use of the word; bnt Ibera aie eieoptlons to this: in a Tery few in-
etancea (ranr)i > 'oi^ '"^^^ accented anfOx baa an acoaaatiTe object; very
much more often, accent on tbe root appears along wiUi ordinary nonn
value. The accent, aa well aa the fonD, ot iiuui6tr is an liolated Ineg-
uiarity. Eiamplea are: j^tfi dhinftiii ietrming treaiur«t; yuy&dl m&iv
tadl ^xAtfira^ ye litten io a mortal; but, on the otbei band, yaditi
vAsOnl vldluit^ butoviing good ihingt on the ptoiu; and j6tft JAnftnftm
conqatrer of peoplet.

«. The formation of these noans in tf from eonjagatioa-itemg, regnlai
and (reqaent in the later langaage, and not Toiy tare in tbe Biihmariaa,
ia met with bnt onoe or twice in the Teda [bodhayitf and ooda^tri,
BT.). In n^tF > certain priest [R7. and later), ii apparently aeen the
Boriatie B.

f. Tbe words of Telatlonefalp which, In whatever way, have gained
the aspect of derivatlvea in tf, are plt^, mSt^, blu^ti', yitj, duhitf',
&&ptT, JJm&ti'. Of these, only mhtf and ya^ are in accordance with
the ordinary rules of tbe formadon in tf.

g. Instead ot tf Is found tur in one oi t«o RY. examples: yadit^
BtlittOr.

h. AppueoUy formed by a snfflt f (or ar) are usf, eaTya^Jhc,
nAnKadf, dovf', tbe last two being words of relationship. For other words
ending in j, see Z09.

L188. ^ in. This ie another auffix T^hich has asstuned
a primary aspect and ase, while yet evidently identical in
leal character with the frequent secondaiy suffix of the
same form denoting possession [below, 1230).

uiaii.zecy Google

1188—] XVIUPeimakt Deritatiom. 448

t^. How tu it bad gUned > primtrr Tklae in tbe «ulr luigsmge ii
not euy to deteimla*. Hoit of the vordi in in occttiring in BT. and AT.
■TO expUlDsble m potsemtiM; In mui; tbe oAei Talne U poMlUe, ud In
a few It U dlttiDctlr aocsected: tbni, karsUdln. bbftdnivtdin, nitodiii.
if ftrCiffn, AnimlTi, vivrsdldii; from * teita»-<teDi, -a^a-rin, -pftfjin
(Ute); with loiUtlo s, BllTufn ; and, with redaplicatlon, ni7My{n, vnd*-
TBdln. At the eTampIei ifidi««le, composition, both with pivfliei and
with othei elementj, ii frequent; and, in all caiea alike, the acoHit i» on
the lutfli.

b< Later, the primary employment la naqueationable, and examplec e(
It, chiefly In oompoiition, ue frgquent. The radical syllable i» nasaUr
■trenftheoed, • medtiJ a being lometlmea len(tbened and aometimet nn«tii>
iDf nnchanged. Thos, BA^ftvftdin InM-ipeaking, •bbibUfln addretnnj
manotakrin taul'ioinning. In bUTin baa establUhed Itaelf a pieraiUnglr
fotnia meaning, chout to be,

a. The nie of an accnaatiie objeot with' words In In waa noticed
abore (871 b).

1184. J^TH 17M and ^ l^tlia. These safSxes, which, from
formlDg intenaive adjectivee corresponding , to the adjectiTe of root-
form, have come to be ased, within eomewbat narrow limits, u snf-
fiiea of adjective comparison, have been already snf6ciently treated
above, under the head of comparison (469-470).

a. It may be farther noticed that Jyiftha has in tbe older language
(only two or three timet in RV.) the accent alio on the flnal, jT«(tb4,
and that Iti correlatlTe alio li kHilf(h& in the oldest langnage; p&r^iftha
ig made buiR a lecondary form ot root, with aoifiUc B added.

b. Wben the oomparatiTe enfBi has the abbreviated form j*a (470 a),
it* 7 ii never to be lead in the Teda as L

o. No othei anfSzes make derivatives having participial valne
otherwise than in rare and sporadic oases; those that remain, there-
fore, will be taken up mainly in the order of their freqaenoy and
importance.

1185. IT tra. With this suffix aie foimed a few ad-
jectives, and a considerable number of nouns, mostly neuter,
and often having a specialized meaning, as signifying the
means ot instrument of the action expressed b; the root.
The latter has usually tbe sn^^a-etrengthening, but some-
times remains unchanged. The aooeat is various, but more
often on the radical syllable.

a> Here, as in certain other eatee above, wa have donbtlett a lofflx

Dij.ieo, Google

449 Stehb in lyM, Iffha, trn bto,, ka. [—1186

otlflntdly Becoiid4T7, mide by adding ft to the primary tf ot tar (1189);
bnt Iti nw li Id great part that of a primary raffli.

b. Eiamplea of nenter noiini ue: gitni limb, p&ttra tcing, p£tra
eup, y6ktrs bond, v&atra garment, fT6tra tar; aatr& mtuih, stotri
tong qfpraita, potri naue/i of mm* general meaning, d&ttTB gift, kfi-
bn_field, mtttrn un'»<, hotr& (iKn^iet. The wotda accenttd on the flail
hiv« often an abitract meaning : thua, kfatri authoriig, rSffrA kingdom,
qKatr4 dixilrint, aattr& laerifieial teuion [alio jfiitm knowkdgt).

e. Huoalinea are: d&Aqitrd tu*k, mimtra prat/a-, ftttr& (ot atri:
S8S} devonrtr, u(tn* buffalo, camel, and a few of qneatlonable etymology,
at mltri friend, putr& son, vftxk foe. lEitr& and TrtrA are aometImM
nenters even in the Veda, andmitra cornea latei to be legalarly of that gender.

d. Feminine* (In tril) are: 4ftrS goad, m^trll meaiure, Ii6trl sac-
rifiee (bealde hotrii}, dafi^frft (later, for dUffra); n&ffi^ dettroyer.

e. Not seldom, a "anion- tow el" appean beCoTe the aufflxj bnt ihls ii
not QiiiiDy the eqaWalsnt of the nnion-Towel aaed nith tf (above, 1182 a).
For the iForda In Itza have tbc accent on 1: tbna, arftra (iritra AV.,
once) impelling, oar, khanitra ihovel, pavltra sieve, Janltra birth-place,
•anitra gift; and >o -avitra, aqitra, caritra, •taritra, dhamitra,
dhavitra, bhavitra, bharltra.Tftdltra (with oansatlve root-»trengthenlng),
vahltra: the combination ttra bu almoat won the cbaiaotet of an In-
dependent aulfli. The preceding vowel ia also in a tew ciaea a (aomallmes
apparently of the pieaent-stem) : thai, yUatra venerable, k^t&tra ihred,
gSyatri (f •tri) song, •danuttra, p&tatra toing; bat also imatra violent,
▼4dbatFa deadly weapon; and varatrit f. strap. T&rutra overcoming
coneaponda to tarat^. H&kfatra atterism la of very doubtful etymology.
SaifaakftatrA (RV., once) leema of aeeondary formation.

f. The words atlll ns«d u adjectlvea In tza are moaily anch as have
anion-TOwels before (he safDi. A single example ftom a rednpllcated root
la JohAtra crying out.

g. A word or two In trl aud tru may be added here, as perhapa ot
kindred formstlon with those lb tea: thus, ittrl devouring, aro&trl beam-
ing, ttXxi or titA night; Q&tni (f&ttra: 232) «n«n^.

1186. ^ fca. The suffix ?i ka is o£ veiy oommon use in
secondary derivation (below, 1222); whether it is directly
added to roots is almost questionable: at any rate, extremely
few primary derivatives are made with it.

a. The worda which have moat distinctly the aepect of being made
bom toots are pi^ka-, •meka (f'ml fx), yaaka a. pr., qAfka dry,
ql6ka (yqm hear) noite, report, etc., and -sphSka teeming; and atukft
^fiaJce and atok& drop seem io belong together to a root eta ; r&ka f., name
of a goddeai, may be added.

Whitnsy, QnmiEir. 3. ed. 29

Digitizecy Google

1188—] XVII. Pbimast Dihtatioii. 459

b. Bnt kft eatan. Id In ytlne u aeconduy, into Ue MUpoiltlMi of
certain inrBxea reckoned uprimur: ae* ftk« uid uka [sboTe, 1180, 1181).

O. A few words In vhtch Ika uid Ik« aeem »dded to > root, tboufh
they are reatly of t, kindred forautlDn wltli the preceding, my 1>e moit
coBTenfeatlr notlted here: thu*, TfqolkK (yVraqo) tecrpion; &iilkk(f)
/ace, d^Qlka wp^el, dfbhika n. pr., mrjilit grace, VTdMk4 hktmmt,
<f aiilu Md -ri^uikft ^r^M, •(JOca beaming, p)Ika; fkfika; snd, from
reduplieated root, p*rpharlk4 teatUring (i). Compare aeoondaiy aufifac kk

(beiov, laas).

1187. IT Tft. It IB altogether probable that a part of the de-
livaHveB made vtth this mf&x are not lesa entitled to be ranked aa
primary than some of those whieh are above bo reckoned. 8neh,
however, are with eo much doabt and difficnlty to be sepuated from
the great mafla of BeoondaiT' derivatives made with the aame BofGi
that it ia preferred to treat them all together ander the head of eec-
ondar; formation (belov, iaiO-18).

1168. ^ Ts. With this suffix ue made a large namber
of adjectiveB, almost always with weak lOot-form, and usually
with aooent on the suffix. Also, a few woids used aa nouns,
of various gender. In some cases, the suffix is found with
a pieceding vowel, having the aspect of a union-vowel.

a. Eiamplea of adjecttvei In ra are: kfiprii quick, oliidr4 tplit,
tuxk itrong, bhadrA phating, fakri migktt/, qukri brigkt, blAart in-
furiout; — with aecent on the roet, only gfdhxn freetfy, tfimra «f«N<,
dhlra true (teoonduy?), vipra iatpired, tiigra a. pr.

b. From raota with preflxea came only an example or two: Ihaa, nioira
alUiUitia, oimrgra joining on.

O. NoaoB la ra are; maae., AJra ^fitld, vlr& man, vAJra llumdtrboU,
fdra hero; neot., iLgrapouiC, kflr& mili, r&ndlira hoUoie, rlpr& dejUe-
mtnt; fern., dhirft ilriam, <^-pii jau>, adrft iiitoxioating drink.

The forma of lUi aafflx with preeedlng Yoo-el may beat bs oonsidPred
bere, althoagb aome of them ba*e nearly or quite gained the valne of iDde-
pendent endlngi, Thoa:

d. With ara are made a few tare words: the adJeetiTea draTari
running, pntaxk Jlging, (with prefli) nyooard tuiting; and the doods
gambh&ra d^th, t&aara and traaara thtiliU, a&nara gain, -rfcfara
Acm: bhKrrarii and vSaari are donbtleas of tecondary formation; and
the aame thing may be pUnalbly eonjeotared of other*. Ai made with Are
may be mentioned mandtra a tree, m&rJSra cat.

e. With ira ira made a few wordt, some of which are in eonmon
nae: thus, ojiri guiek, kbadlri a tree, tlnUra dark, dbTaatrft ttirring
up, TDoMrk ptetuing, mndira aloud, badhirft daaf, raolra brigU, iflra

itizecy Google

451 Stbmb IK k», ya, r» bto., U. va. ri, ru. [—1182

iivefy, itslr* miiiU, mOtkvixA Jlrm; tad sthlra Mard, »nd aphlri fat,
vltk dliplsMBieDt of Bb^ ndiol I; tlio aaitri wans (aanallr b«UU).
With Ira ut made laldilri or gunbhiri profound ind f4T&« n^^iUy,
*iid pMhs^ q&rlrtt botlp.

t. With ora tt* made i f«v voida, of wme of vhleh th« ceoondarr
cbuattarlt pnbiUe: thna, ■iAhnr& (aAhn-rs P) n«Ttin>, Asnra (iaa-raP)
Uvmg, ohldoTA (MirM;, blMflgnri brtaking, bliBnura lAminp, bhidnra
flitting, mednra/of, yUnra wub'ii;, TiUiora toOaninf, vldnra ftaow-
mp, yidbtira lacking. With Ora, apparently, aia made ■ttaQri ttout
(conipaie Btb&TlTa), kbarjtba a tree, maydra peaeoek (oi imltatLTeT).

1189. ^ la. This suffix is only another foiin of the
preceding, exdiauging with it in certain words, in others
prevalently or solely used from their first appearance.

a. Consplcaons ezamplM of tha Intaiehaofe are ;iikl&, athIU&, •miqla,
9lthm, saliU.

b. Bxamplei Of the mora Independeat ase are: pIlA preteeting, iuuUa
(or anfla) tsifM^ tfpUa J»gout; later oapaU and ttuala (»aid to be
accented on the flnil], and harqnla (the Mma), Haoy Word* andine tu la
ate of obcente etymologT-

ll&O. ? ra. Very few words of clear derivation are
made with this suffix — too few to be worth classifying.
They are of various meaning and accent, and generally show
a weak root-form.

a. Thus : (kvA praittng, j^rik lofty, takvi quick, dbrav4 ^ed,
p«kT& rip4, padva going, yahvi quickfJ}, QarvA n. pr., Iiraav4 lAorf ,
qlkvA artful, r»if.vAjosfut, Ordbvi lofty, vikva ItBittmg, Orvk «(mU;
iva gtii^, eourit, &qva horn, erdkra oi spkva oerntr; and pethap*
ulba caul; a feminine la pruqvl (TS. p^vS, AV. prufv^ ; with aaton-
Towel are made aaolva companion, &mlva ditttue, and vldbivH leidow.

b. The word* ia Tft eihlbil only in aporadic caaai rsMlntion ot the
ending inta na.

1191. f^ ri. With this suffix are formed, directly or
with preceding u, a small number of derivatives.

a. TbDs; &ngtui oi aHhri foot, iqri edge, &srl dtnen, tandrl or
-dii wearinue, bb6rl abundant, v&ObTi rib, sDrl patron, -takrl quick,
T&dtarl etnmeh, Qubhrl beautiful, BtllllUi $inglt (teani); and, with nri,
JAaari exAaiuted, Oiqxaipioua, bhSgarl d. pr., aUmrl mighty; afigViri
(or aagiU) Jjnjw.

1192. T ru. This suffix makes a few adjectives and
neuter nouns, either directly oi with a preceding vowel.

29*

ugii.zec.y Google

a. nu:

wUk pnec41af •

■ad«r4 Ttr9*ri»f, wmaan ■Mmh^ lii»cii dh"%, tka ciMtll? we-
40407 atiUgt* aCf. tai piru [tt iaabt&l ■Mai-g)

k n* *MdJB7 nfb bi (Me laiTb) li ■rfwaMtr >Med u toMi

1195. 1? t1 By this mffix are made:

». T«« M tkree denmi>« ft«B t«d«fUeatid t»ot«: jisfvi Mc«ibi.
didhfri wrifaMtwy. dldiri aUnaiy: uid a iwy f«w other vradj: gjiffrl
lizti^. dtararf >nt. jtrrl son* Mrf (AT. ; etonko* jfrrf}) -pbsrvl it
doDktfsL

b. Hen mt.j be BcatloiMd cmtrlt (BV., okc), ippueBtly Made «Uk
* fofls Ttt froa a ledapU'^ated laot-fom.

1194. B BDo. With this suffix, with oi without a onion-
Towel, are made a few adjective derivatiTes &om roots, bat
also &om caasatiTe stems.

a. From (tsipl« toMt: direct, k|cyya perit/mblt. -gUann itek, Jlf^A
vietori«it, ds&kf9& bitmg, bhOf^n Arieimg, ol-^tMoii tittnif Anr*.
■thisnn /tud; with onion-rovel i, karifpo, Ufif^n, kfaylf^n, g^
mifi^&. grssif^n, grabifnu, oarlfno. -janlfj^u. Jayif^o, tapif^o,
•trapiffD. -patiffo. -bhavifQii, br^jiffii, inBdifipii. -mavlf^il,
;a)lf9ii, jftoif^a, -vadif^o, Tardbif9a, HMhif^o.

b. From (econdaiT conjDgatJon-itemi: kopayiq^u, kfapaylf^n,
cT&TaTlf^a, janayif^a, tspaylfi^ii. namarif^^n, patayifQii. pofa-
7if9^ plrayl^n, bodhajlnia, mBdarifi^ii, yamarif^n, ropayiff n,
-Vlrayiffii, -qooaylfi}&; and JSgarlf^o. An aaomalou fnmatioD ii

O. Tbeie derlT>ti«ei are fraelr compounded with prellies ; a. g.
nlfataa^ praJsulf?^ abhigooayln^ Baifavaraylafii.

d. It U not ODiikely that the a of tbii lofflx it originally that of ■
Item, to vhtcb nn irat added. Such ■ character ie etill apparent In kra-
Tlf^u «raoinprau'_f[#aA(kravifl); and alio In Tadhaanu, TrdtaaaDd (?),
and prathasno (t).

1196. ^ sua. Extremely few words have this ending.
a. tt ti teen In tikqi^fc iharp, and perbapi In {lakffi, -rOkf^^i,

-martsna; and In BOf^a and de;^ [nenaUj trlejllable: daif^) gijl.
Unleu in the lait, tt la not found preceded by 1; but it baa (like sno,
Rbova) a before It in vadhunA deadly \eaapon, kar&Bna fort-arm; na-
dlf^a tkilied aeema to be tecondarv. Femlninea are mftaaa loam, Jyot-
■ni moonlight.

Digitizecy Google

453 Stbhb in ru, vl, snu, ana, tun, sb, asI, kbho, etc. [— ISOI

use. 9 tnu. This suffix is used in neatly the same way
with a anu (above, H94).

a. As used with aimple roots, the t It gsnenlly eipsbte of being
coDiidered the adacititiou* t sfMi ■ Bbort root-flnaJ, to which ua li than
added : thai, kftnu aetivt, gKttl*^ (! ^^Oi hat&u d«adly, -tatnu (f)
Hretching; and, from ledaplicited rool<, JlgatnA heating, and JighatnA
harming; bat alio dartUU bursting. Alio, with utiion-Towel, dravitnn
running, dayltnn (? L^S.]-

b. With cauiatiTO atemB; foe example, drlToyitn^ /uuting, poqay-
itnd nourithirtg, mKdajitnti intoxteatiag, tanayltnn and staDayltnd
IhuTtdar, Btldayitau Jtoining, -Smayitau nckmting.

O. Vlth preceding a, In plyatni& scoffing, mriiatnA ■ tlvar, &-ru-
Jatnd breaking into; and bavatnd miterly (obeciuia deriTatlon).

1107- H Ba> The words eDding in raffizal H aa, with or
without preceding UDion-Yowel, are a heterogeoeoin group, and in
considerable part of obscure derivation. Thus:

a. with aa simply: gftss clever, Ja^ leinntn^ (rather, aorlitlc aP
11 48 J}, ^Afk■^^ looking, mkqf4 lAuim^, rSk^ rough; 4tsa n. /ountoin ;
bhifa f. ftar (or from the leoondary root bhif).

b. With pieoedlDg l-iowel: tavit^ (f. t&Tl^I) itrong, mablfi (f.
mUiigl mighty, Jthete^kif) teeking bootg; fmkrathing, T?i.tigA rvbbith,
manlfi f. deoofion; and compare rayi^ (? 9V.),

o. With prgeeding u-<ow«l: amqi (f. &ruql) rtJ, aqdfa ravenous,
t&rnfa Of arconwr, poraqa and m&nii^a (-uB-aP) man; piji^ hieating$. •

lies. Clfn aai. A few words in tbe oldest langoage are made
witli a suffix having this form (perhaps produced by the addition of
i to as).

a. ThDB, atasf vagabond, dhar^aal ^rm, s&nasi uiinmng; and dliKaf
m. drink, t. station, sarasi (?) pool.

1199. ^ abba. A few names of animals, for the most part
of obscure derivation, show this ending.

a. Thni, vT^abhA and i^^hi bull, qarablli a certain fabnlooi
animal, ferabha a certain snake, gardabbi and risabha om; further,
kanabba, karabha and kalabba, l^abba, qalabha; and, with other
union- Yowels, tu^^bha, nu^^ibha, and kttkkubha. The tecninine. If
oocnrring, la in I; and ba(abbl i> found withont corresponding matcallae.
AV. has the adJectiTB sthtUabbi, eqalTalsnt to stbiil&,

IfiOO. A few words ending in the consonants t, d, J, etc., and
for the most part of doubtful root-connections, were given above, at
883 k (3-5, Tj; it is unneoessary to repeat them here. Certain of those
in at are perhaps related to the participles in ant (117&}.

laoi. A number of other primary saffizes are either set up by

ioy Google

ISOl— 1 XVII. Sbcohdart Dbutation. 454

the Knmmarisns and anppoiMd with oxampleB of qtnadonable vklu^
or &re doobt^illj dedacible ftom isolated vords traceable to known
roots, or from worda of obacure connection.

a. A few inch mty be nienitoaed bete: ai}^ in karag^* 'i^ ^^
rai^4* '"^ cerUIn anqnotabla wotdi (piiJirltiied a-foime from the pieMiil
piTtlciple); era oi ora In nnqnottble worda, and ellma (above, M6d:
pethapi a (aitber deriTitiTe with leconduy Ima from era); mara (ma oi
man with agcoDdaiy ra added) in gbaamara, a(inar&, etc.; — aara in
mataari, kara lu pu^kara and othei obaenn words, pa in pfifpa,
atap&, Btdpa, and a uamlei of othet obBonte worda; and lo on.

B. Secondary Derivatives.
1202. Words of seoondaiy derivation are made by the
addition of fuithei suffixes to steins alieady ending in en-
dent suffixes.

a. But also, as pointed oat above (1 1S7 b), to pronominal roots.

b. fnrthei, In eioeptlonal caMi, to indaelinablea, to raie-foimi, and
to phratea: e. g. autarvant, apitwi, parataatva, aahatra. aftrra-
trlka. Ukadhya, mfataka, KnufmLka, Smofyftya^jk, apaum&nt,
apaavrk, kldieanya, kiibkartavyata, krftoltka, niatika, aTrlAdn-

1208. Changes of the stem. The stem to which the
suffix is added is liable to ceruin changes of form.

a. Before a suffix beginning with a vowel or with y (which in
this respsut is treated as if it were 1], final a- and i-vovels aro regnlarlr
lost altogether, while a final a-vowel has the ftu^streagthening aod
becomes av; r ^o*' o and So (all of rare ocenrrenoe) are treated in
accordance with uaaal enphonic rnle.

f>. An n-TOwel also aometimea remains nn strengthened : see 1208 e>

o. A final a Is varioaslj treated, being Bometimea retained, and
Bometimes lost, even along with a preceding a; and Bometimes an a
iB lost, while the n remains', thus, yrfaQvant, vffaQa, vna, vn*tVA>
▼n^ya, from v^fan. Of a stem ending In ant, the weak form, in at,
is regolarly taken ; thuB, vUvaayata (vlvaavant).

d. In general, the masoulina form of a primitive stem ii that n«m
which a Taithet aeeondary deiiiatlve la made. Bat there are not very rare
eases tn wbloh the feminine la taken Initead; eiamplea are: sat^tra,
bbBryatra, pra^UtvA, bhKratlvant, rakqftvant, prlyivant. On the
other hand, a final long vowel — I, mnch more rarely K — generally of a
femtnlne stem, la sometjmea shortened In derivation: than, y^ykvailt,
pra^ikbavaat, sof fctama, wafAtamft, aadhanltrii, JaratikA, ansa*

ioy Google

455 Chahqbs of Stkh. [— 1S04

ditaxns (ct. 471b), rohlqitvi (TB.; ■^Itvi ^B.), prthlTltrA, pratl-
patnivat, B^raaTativwtt.

e. As «!■ pointed oat >1>ove (111 0, d), the eomblnitlon of ■ «econdu7
inffli vitli 1 ttem is sametlioM mide aocording to the lulea of eztamil
comblnatLoa. Sncli ciaci are pointed oat nndei the cnffliei lya(ISIBe),
lu (IfiSSm], mayn (1225 5), mla (1S31 b), v1il(12S2o), vant
(18881), von (lS84c), mant (ISSDf), tTa(ISSeo}. taya[ia4Ba),
tya (1246 o), tana (124Gi).

1204. The most frequent change in eecoadaty derivation
ia the TrddM-Btrengthening of an initial syllable of the stem
to which a suffix is added.

a. The Btrengthened syllable maj be of any ohamoter: radlotl,
of a prefii, or of the GrBt member of a oompound: thus, i^rlni
(agvfn), eaamyi (a^iaa), ptrthiva (ppthlvi), ftmitrit (amitra), aim-
ri^ya (aamraj), aftCikftya (sukpti), mUtrSvaru:^ (mltravinu^),
auooftlt9raTaa4 (uooii^gravae). As to the- acoompaoying aoceot,
see the next paragraph.

b. If a stem beglDB with a eonsonuit followed by ; ot t, the aeml-
vowal U lometlinga Triddhled, u it II wore i or u, and the lesaltiug HI
01 ftu hai y or T farther added before the aneceading vowel.

O. ThU ta moat frequent where the y or w beloDga to a prefli — as
dI, vl, sn ^ allated before a following Initial rowel : thai, nUylylka
^m nySya (aa If nlySya), wKiyaqvA from vyitfva (as if viya^va),
■Buvafvya from BV&^a (la If Buvaqva)i but it oocnra also in other
caaet, aa a&UTari ^m avira, f SDwa from fwan, agalaat avSyambhuTa
(STayambha), and so on. AT. baa Inegalarly k&verak& from kiivera
(ti U from bvdra, withoat the euphonic v Ingerted).

d. Thla Miangthenlng takea plaoe oipeeially, and lerr often, before the
■nfllsea a and ya; alee regnlarly before i, Syana, eya (with Ineya), and
later iya; before the eomponnd aka and Ika, and later aki; and, in
single gporadie examples, before na, ena, ra, and tva (I): see these varioaa
tafflxea below.

a. Somettmea an nnatreogthened word i« prefixed to one thus stiengtb-
aned, as If the compoaltloa were made after instead of before the atiength-
•nlng: e. g. indradUva^a having Indra at divmUy (instead of ftin-
dradcratya). oaramafSlrfika wnVA head to ihf teeit, JIvalKnklka
btlongmg to (A« toorld of the living, autarbhbima loithin the earth,
aomAr&iulrat gumlABliava (ct *«.Tnfcj«.rfi gn-^nlftif^»'jaTii m. lii. 3&).
Bat especially when the first word Is ot nnmeral Talne: la ^at&g&rada
of a hundrai ptart, paftcaf ftradlya, trlaSihvataara, batLaTftr9ika>
affawSTflka, aoekavarfaa&baara, dafaoftbaara. trisUiaBrl, trlpfta
rofa, oaturftdhyl^ or -yikS of ftiur duvpian, eio. ew..

itizecy Google

1S(M — ] XVII. Sboondart Dbrivatioh, 456

f. Hoce ofteD, both memben of ■ oompaond word luve tho inilUl
■tienstlieniaB: e. g. BftuiiiSpKn;9&, kftfurapKfioftla, efttuirSidra,
KihoUnkUu, Ukabbftutikft, trUs^nbJftgata, yOJarvftidika. Sneb

g. The BUQa-ttiengthenlng (eicapt of > Anal n-Towel: ISOSa) is
only In the [Ueit euea an >Dcoinp>nl]nent of leeondir; derlTitloQ. EiMp-
tioDa are dvayi and tnty4 and niva (lfi09i), bhefoji and dmh
(laoej), dr^va (ISfiSg). 9skhara (ISSea).

ISOB. Accent, a. The derivatives with initial TTddhl-atrengUi-
ening alwajs bave their accent on either the firet or the last B^llabte.
And nsuallj it is laid, aa between these two sitaationa, in snob a
way u to be furthest removed from the aocent of the primitive; yet,
not rarely, it ie merely drawn down upon the Bnffix from the final of
the latter; much tesa often, it remaina upon an initial syllable without
change. Only in the case of one or two suffixes is the distinction
between Initial and final accent connected with aoy difference tn the
meaning and use of the derivatives (aee below, snfBx «ya: ISIS).

b. No other generAI rales as to accent, can be given. DBoaliy
the suffix takes the tone, or else this remuna where it was in the
primitive; qaite rarely, it la thrown back to the Initial syllable (>a in
derivation with initial Trddlii); and In a single case (tS: 1237) it is
drawn down to the syllable preceding the snfGi.

1206. Meaning, a. The great maaa of secondary anfSzes are
adjective-making: they form from Douns adjectives indicating apptu-
tenance or relation, of the most Indefinite and varied character. Bat,
as a matter of coarse, this indefiniteneas often nndergoea speciali-
zation: so, partionlarly, into designation of procedure or descent, so
that distinctive patronymic and metronymic and gentile words are the
reanlt; or, again, into the designation of poasesslon. Moreover, while
the masoDlines and femintnes of such adjectives are employed as
appellativea, the neuter is also widely used aa an abatract, denoting
the quality expreaaed attributively by the adjective; and neater ab-
stracts are with the eame snifixes made from adjectives. There are
also special suffixes (very few) by which abatraots are made direcUy,
from adjective or noun.

b. A few suffixes make no change In the part of speech of the
primitive, but either change its degree (diminution and comparison),
or make other modifications, or leave its meaning not sensibly altered.

1207, The Buffixea will be taken up below in the following
order. Firat, the general adjective-making auffixes, beginning with
those of moat frequent uae (a, ja and Ita connectiona, 1, ka); then,
those of apeclfic possesalve value |in, vant and mant, and their con-
nectiona); then, the abatract-roaking ones [t& and tva, and their con-
nectiooa); then, the suffixes of comparison etc.; and finally, those by
which derivatives are made only or almost only from partiolea.

ioy Google

lilt or them In tbeii otdet t

tratted

U beitt iddtd:

a ia08-9

maya

188B

tva, trata

1238

ra lSlO-10

ra, ira, etc

1886

trana

1240

iy»

IflU

la, lu

1227

tara. tama

1842

iya

121S

va, vala, vaya.

ra, ma

•y*. err*

isie

vya

1288

tba

«iiya

1S17

9"

122B

tltha

»yy<»

laie

in

1230

taya

1846

araiiB

121B

min

1231

tya

,

»yi

1S80

■rtn

1232

ta

t, ftU

1821

vant

1883

na

ka, aka, ika

1822

van

1834

tana, tna

na, Sua, Ina,

mant

1235

vat

Ina. ana

1223

ts

1887

ka{a

ma. Una, mna

1824

tati, at

18S8

vana, U«

1208. Q a. With this suffix ate made an immensely
large class of derivatives, &om nouns oi fiom adjectives
having a noun-value. Such derivatives ate primarily and
especially adjectives, denoting having a relation oi connection
{of the most various kind] toith that denoted by the more
primitive word. But they are also freely used substantively :
the masculine and feminine as appellatives, the neuter,
especially and frequently, as abstract. Often they have a
patronymic or gentile value.

a. The legalar and greatly prsvailing formation is tbat whieb
is accompsDied witli vrctdlil-etrengtheQing of the first syllable of
the primitive word, simple or oompouod. Ezamplesaof this for-
matioQ are:

b. Fiom primitlTM ending in eoDaonantc: vlth the Dmal ihift of
■coent, SyasA of mtlal (iyas), ro£na»4 relating to the mind (m&naa),
sKamanaai friendHnm (siuninas), brfthmayA prieat (br&hinan),
b&ln:iavat& from the Himalaya (himAvant), fillgtraa& of the Angirat
famUji (Afigiiaa); hlUtlna eUphantiTte (tiastln], m^mta pertaining to
the Maruti (mar&t); — with accant tbrovn forwud fiom ths final upon the
iofflx, 9(lrad& autumnal, wiixiii. relating to the viiitj, pSn^^ii bettmg-
ing to Piiihdn; 2!Urik4it4 ton of Oirikthit; — with accent unchangej,
mannqa descendant of Mdnue.

O. Tbe annii ia added (at abovs initanced] to the middle atem-form
of itanu In vant; it ie added to the weakMt in miEgliona and vitrtraglma ;
tb« eodtng In lemalDa unehanged; an nanally does the aame, bat aome-

ioy Google

ISOB— ] XVII. Secondary Derivation. 458

ilmu loiM Iti a, u Id pftof^ trUTTf^A, dSfwrijlUk; ud wmadinM
Its n, u Id brBlmii^ Ink^ bftrhatB&ma.

d. Ftan primltiTM Id J- Jftttra Dtetorioiit iS«*t or }btt eenqutror),
tTB^tri relating to TofiiWar, 8&vltr& dMMncJMf of Uu sun (Mrttf),
K&dbh«tra, pUtrs.

«. From prlmltlvgs In n: nmallip with go^iV'ttteDgthsaiag of the a,
MS TSsavi relating to the Fdtut, ftrtavi eonceming the itaeoiu (ptA).
dftnavi child of Danu (dinn). aUndhavi y^om the Indai (sludhn);
— bat tometlmei vtthoat, u iDadtaTa,/W of imeet* (midlia), ptrfvi
tufe (p&rqn rib), pUdT& belonging to PtiA, t^nva of the body (tanti),
jSkvA at Tidn.

f. From prlmltiToa In 1 ind I, vhleh Towel* ue inppUnted by ths
tdded tnftli : pitrtblva eioihlj/ (pitUvi), BSraavatA o/ U« SdratBoli,
■indrBgii& belonging to Indra and Agni (IndrSgoi) ; piflkta ^five-fold
(pafiktl), iiSirft& belonging to Jftrrii, pfirthnraf mA of ■Prthuraemi,
pBfnpat& of Faeupdli.

f. From prlmltlTea in S, wblch In like mannet dlsippeui: ybtnmk
of the Y amino, •firagli& AoMy etc. (aar&8h& i««), k&iilii& na<wra/aUU
(kaniuft girl).

h. A luga nambei (mors than ill tbe rest t«g«ther) from primltJiM
In a, of which the floal la rcpUoed by the anffli: for ezampla, wtth the
a*n»l ihift of usoent, BmltrA inimieai (amltra tmem^), Tftnu^i of Vintn«,
TiUfradevA belonging to all the godt (viqv&deva), nftirhastil handlett'
neu (nlrhaata), vfii;afT& deeeendant of Vya^a; gjrdablia atinini
(gardabhA), d&lva dtoine (d«v&), mitdbyadidiiia meridiomU (madh-
ykSxAioA), p&atra grandchild [putr& ton), s&iibhaga good fortitne
(aubhiga), vadhrjraqva of Vadhrya^d'a race; with unchsnged leceat
[comp»r»tl»ely (ew), Tfiaaiit4 vernal (vaaanli spring), latXtrk Mitrd'a,
Stitblffv& of Aiithigvd'i race, d&ivodftaa Divodasa'i. In a tew instucea,
7a la replaced by the aeftlx: thus, alnra, piofi, T^fiaTstka.

L The deflTatiTes of thi» la«t form are somettmes tegaided u made b;
Internal change, without added suffli. Goniidering, howeTer, that other
flnal Toweli are anppUnted by thli infflx, that a ditappean aa ateiD-flnal
alio before tationa other anffixea of aecoadaty darlTatioii, aad that no ex-
amplea of deiitition wlthoat tuRlz are quotable from prlmitlrea of any
other flnal than a, it aMme fai too Tlolent to asiume here a devlatloB from
the whole coorae of lado-Batopeaii word-making.

J. AdJectiTes of thia lormatlOD make their femlnlnea in i (see S3S a).
. 1209. The denTativeB made by adding ^ a withont
T^ddhi-ohaD^ of the initial syllable are not numerous, and
are in considerable pait, doubtless, of inoiganio make, results
of the tianafer to an a-deolension of woida of other finals.

ioy Google

4&9 Steus in ft, 7ft. [—12)0

ft. A DDmbeF or eiunples of itenu in n mule by tiiosfei ware noUcgd
■liOTe (3BB). The cues of inch trvigition occm most fteqnenlly in cam-
poimoa (131S): thus, further, apa- (for Rp oi ipvaier), -poa, -narft.etc.;
Arom stem) In ftn, -alia, -VTfa, «to., but tlio -fthna and -VTf;^^ uid
vffft^ft; from ttams in i, -aflgulft, -rfttra, etc.; from the weakett forn)
of afio-«t«int (407) uoofc, nIo&, pftr&oA, etc.

b. Alto occurring etpeclslly in compoBltioa, yet likawiic » limple
woids often enoafh to hare an independent upect, are derivadvos in b
fnm Donoi in as (tmly la, ub): tbaa, for example, tamss&, rRjas^
payafti, bratamaTarcaftA, BftrTftTadaaA, derAlnaBd, pam^ ttytfa^k,
mi probably m&nn«a.

O. Similar derivstlTet from adjecttvee in in are reckoned by the
giammaiiani aa made with the (nflli ina: thna, mallna polluted, para-
meqtb^* *^''- 0" 441b).

d. A anmber of wordi formed «itli the lo-oalled safQi acta are evi-
dent traDifeis from etema in ant. A few of them are foond even from
the eulleat period: tbua, p^ta deaught, qvltnti (?], vaaantA tpring,
hemanti winttr, Teqeiit4 etc lank, Jlvantt a certain healing plant; aod
otheri occoi later, aa jajanta, taranta, madbumanta, etc. They are
Mid to be accented on Che final.

e. From afio-aieoie (407) are made a fen noaiii rndlDgln k>a: thoa,
inOko, ipftka, up^ka, pr&Oka, parUA, etc.

f. From etema in f, liotr&, netri, Qo^fHi, potri, pra^fiitr&, etc.,
tnm titlea of ptieata; also dliKtri, bbrfttrA, eta.

g. Other sratteriag eaaea are: eavidyat4, fivyu^ viradha, ki*
kodft, luhnbbfc, a^n^a, bhOmyfc, aakbyi, idhipatya, Jaspatri,
aratir&, pftn^vk.

b. The Vedic geinndifet in tvR (tua), made by addition of a to
abstract uonD-etem* in tu, have been already (860 a) folly given.

i. Tra;4 and dvay& come with pli^a-ttrengthening from numeral
itemt; n&va new in like manner &^m xA now; and &ntara apparently
from ant&r.

j. Bbef4& nudieine ia from bbiqU healer, vith guqa-chauge; and
probably devi A«0tin^j/, divine, god. In like manner from div «ky, heaven
(there la no "root div (Ams" In the language).

1210. IT 3ra. With this suffix aie made a very laige
dasa of voids, both in the old language and later.

a. .The derlvativea In ya exhibit a great and perpteiing laiiety of
fOTDi, eonneetion, and application; and the reiatlona of the auffli to othen
containing a ya-element — iya, lya, «ya, ByTtt> VfW^ oajn — are
alao In part obacnre and dlfficuit. In the great m^ority of Inatanoe* in
(he oldeat Uogaage, the ;ft when it followa a conaonant ia diaiyllabic in

i, Google

1210—] XVII. Sbcondabt DEBiyATiOH. 460

metrlul Tilne; oi U to bs leid u la. Thn*, In BT. , 266 vordi (excluding
componadc) hiie ia, and only 75 bate 7a alwaya; 46 are to b« read n«ir
yrllh 1ft and now with ya, but many of tbate have ya oaly in iMl>t«d
cues. A* might be expected, the value ia it more fceqaent lAet a keaty
ayllable: thai, la RT., thete are 18S examplei of la and 27 of T» after
BDch a syllable, and 78 of la and 96 of 7a after t light ayllable (th«
clrcomflexed jk — that is to aay, ia — being, ai ia pololed ont below,
1212,1, more liable to (he resolution than ya or y&). It moat b« left tot
further tetearchei to decide vbether in the ya are not Inelnded more than
ono iDltti, with dilTeient aooant, and dilTereat quaotity of the i-fllement;
or with an a added to a floal 1 of the primltite. It ia also matUr fot
qneBtion whether there ii a primary u well aa a lecondary suffix ya; the
■uffii at least comes to be ased ai if primary, in the formation of gems-
dives and in that of action-noons : bnt II It quite impoisible to leparate
the derlTatlves Into two each classM, and it hu seemed ptefarable there-
fore to treat them all together here.

b. The derivatives made with ya may be first divided into tfaow
wliich do and those vhich do not ehov an aocompaaying T^ddhl-
Increment of the initial Billable.

O. AdjaetiTeB in ya, of both these divisioDS, make their femininu
ragolarly in yft. Bat in 1 number of cases, a feminine In I la made,
either alone or beside one In yS; e. g. o&tnnnftai, SgnlTe^, yn.^^w,
fbi (and trji), d&ivl (and d&{vy&], sftumi (and sftamyK); dbfiri,
QlTf a^I, Bvari, etc.

12H. Derivatives in ZT 7a with initial vrddhi-stieogth-
ening follow quite closely, in form and meaning, the analogy
of those in ^ a (above, 1208). They are, however, decidedly
less common than the latter (in Veda, about thiee fifths as
many).

a. Examples are: with the usual shift of seoent, dslvya divmt
(dev&}, palitya graynta (palltd), grSivya cervical (griva), Jirtvijya
priestly office (ftvlj), girhapatya houieholder'e (grh&patl], janarfijya
kingMp (janarit]), siihKrftmafitya victory in battle (aaifagrftmalft),
BAuvofvya wealth in Aoraee (sv&fva), fiupadraftiT^ wtlneu (upa-
draft^J; Mitjk Aditya (idlti), eSiimyd relating to lima, &tltIiy&A«(-
pitality (&tlthi), prBj&patyii htlonging to Prq/ipaii, vSlmanasyi mind-
ieuneei (vlmanan}, adhadevya deecendant of ScAddevti.; — with acoeni
thrown forward from the final upon the ending, Uolcyi of the world (lok4),
kSvy4 of the Kaoi-race, &rtvy& detceadant of Sitii, TSyav7& hehmging
to tha wind {v«y6), T(aTaty& iciuiAA (revimt); — with unchanged ac-
cent (very few), ^dhipatya lordtUp (iidbipatl), grSliftl>Ta exeeOmee
{iftb^^ba.), vl^qya belonging lo the third eatU (viq people), p&Adtflya
man^ieea (puitiB).

itizecy Google

b. The AV. hw once nUrbftdhyk, Tith eircomflexed flnil; If not
A-a error, It is doubtlaiiB mtit through nUrb&dlui; vU^^avrftJi (VS. L 12]
tppeui to ba dual fern, of TftiffSVT.

12ia. DeriTatires in ^ ya without initial vrddbi-
sttengtheniag ate usually adjectives, much less often (neutei,
oi, in UT yft, feminine) abatract nouns. They are made from
every vaiiety of primitive, and are very numerous [in Veda,
three or four times a» many as the preceding class).

a. The general mass of tbese words may be best divided accord-
ing to thetr aasent, into: I. Words retaiuing the accent of the prim-
itlvei 2. Words vith retracted accent; 3. Words with acate y4 (Ui);
4. Words with circnmfieied ya (la). Finally may be considered the
words, gernodives and action-nouns, which have the aspect of primary
derivatives.

1. b. £zamp1e« or derltUlvea in ya tetatnlng the utcent of their
prlmittTes are: hqvyA equine (ifva), Aagya o/ Mi /ufii# (&aga^ m&kb-
ya formuat (mukba moutK)^ 4vya ooint (&vl), g&vya bovine {g/bi),
vlfya of Uie people (vif ), di^a of the door (diir), nArya manly [n|),
vt^^ya tirite (v^^jbd), svar^ya autoeracy (svailEj], Buvirya uealth in
retainers (euvjro), vilfv6^aaja»>f all men, TiQV&devya of ali the godi
(vi^&deva), maylbra^epya peacoeh-taiUd.

a. In the 1i*t words, and in * few othen, -the ya tppoars to be u«ed
(Itke ka, laaSb: cf. lS12m) u > aDffli simply helping to make ■
poaiBulTo componnd; snd so further Buh&a^a (bealde the eqalviloat
■nb&sta), m&dbnhaa^a, d&famisya, mlqr&dbSnya, anyodarya,
aunboctaryat

1. d. Eumplea with retraritlon of the icoent to the lint syllable (aa
in derivatfoD with vrddhi'lncreoient] are: kdi^fhya guttural (ka^t^i),
sk^dbya humeral (skandhA), vr&tya of a etremony (vratA), m^sbya
in the douda [megb&), pftrya of the Fathers (pltj'), pr&tljanya adverse
(pratUaii&}. Hiraqy&ya o/ ^oJti (liira^a), ia anomalous both la draw-
ing the accent forward and in retaining the final a of the prlmitiTO; and
gavy&ya and avy&ya (also &vyaya] are to be compared with it aa to
formation,

3. e. Eiamplea with acote accent on the snfflx are; dlvy& htavenly
(div), sa^ true (s&nt), vyficbryi tigrine (vyfishrA), kavyi mite
(kavi), gt&mjk of the village (grtiatt), SOiny& relating to the soma,
anenaByi tinhisnets (anen&s), adakfi^yi not^t for d&kqd^K.

4. f. Of derlvatlTei ending in circumflexed jk (which In the Veda are
conaiderably more nnmeroDS than all the three preceding claasea together),
eiamplea are aa follows:

Digitizecy Google

ISIS — ] XVII- Sboondart Derivation. 462

(. From noDioDtnt-items : vifyit o/ the clan (RV.; v{q), bfdTB «/
tlu luari (Ilfd), vldyutyk of the lightning (vidyat), r^uiy^ of the
royal ekM» (ri^an), doqft^k nf the arm (do^ka), firqaQyil of the httd
(qtrfin'), barmo^b active (k&rman), dhanvaii;ii of the pltm (dh&D-
vkn), na'Jiuiyk reverend [n^maaj, tvaoasyk cutieulor (tr&aas), b&r-
hlfya »/ (orAff, ayufyk giving life Cftyiu). bbuadyk o/ the buttodu
(bhasdd), prftoy^ eatttra [pr&&c), etc. Ot «ieeptloDU forniktlon U «r-
Tuny& intimate (ftryamiin), with which doabtless beloog ■fttmyft (■It'
nuut) and sAkfya (silken).

h. From n-Blemc: huiavyk ofVtejmet (h&aa), TByavya Momjpm;
io Fuyu, p&qATyk relating to eatUe (pftf A), ifavyk rioting to arrouu
({fu), rasdhaTya 0/ fA< ttowf (m&dhu), apaAvyh 0/ fA« irat«r< (&ps&
loc.], ralJaTya of rope (r&JJu); qaxavyft t. arrow (9&mt do.); ud then
m>y ba added nftvyJt naBigabh (eapedall]' In fam., uftvyk naoigiAh tiream:
niii AooQ. The RT. baa prftfavyb to be partaken of (prft + V'a?), wli^-
out any earraapODding Dounpr&fu; and alio Sijavyh rick in nmiriahmmt
(fi^), without any latannediate fl.rju.

1. Gn^er this head balong, ag vu pointed out above (904), the m-
called gGlundivei in tftTyJt, ai made by the addition of yh to the inflnltlTe
nonn In tu. They ue wholly wanttag in the oldeit language, and hardly
foand in Utet Tedic, allboDgh «till litei tavya wlna the tUm of a pdmary
Buffll, and makes namBrans verbal derlTatltei.

J. From 1- and I-al«ml hardly any ex«mpl«l are to be qmoted. VS.
has dnndabhya from dundubhl.

b. From a-Btema : Bvargyb keavenlt/ (avarK^), AfivaXfrk relating to
a deify (davits), prap^liya guiding (prapathA), budhnyit ftmda-
mental (budhnji], Jaghanyk hindmoet Qagbioia), varuqyii Vinm^t,
TiTyk might (viri), iidary^ abdominal (ad4ra), utayil of the fomitain
(dtsa); and fiom fi-stemB, nrvaryk of eultietOod land (tu^r&rft), sriliyk
relating to the exclamation Bvlthft.

1. The ciroumflexed yk ia mote generall; laaolied (into ia) than the
other toiffio of the Barflx: thua, in RV. it is dbtbt to be read as ya aflec
a heayy syllable ending with a oonaonant; and even after a light ooe il
becomeB la in more than three qutrtera of the example!.

m. Thote are ■ few cases in whlob yh appean to be uaed to help
make * compound with governing preposition (next chapter, tSlO: of,
ISIS o): thus, aplkak;y& about M« arm-pit, apapab^b upon the tide*.
nd&pyk ap'tiream ; and perliaps iipat)7^a lying in the gran (occtui oqIt
in Toc). But, with other accent, itav&ntrya through the entrailt, upa-
m&sya in each 'month, abbiiUkbhy& up to the eloude, anta^parqavyi
between the ribt, &dhlgar^a on the chariot teat ; ot unknown accent, adhi*
haatya, &uuprft>iy&> annn&aibya, anuvafifya.

1213. The deiivatires in IT yft as to which it may be

ioy Google

463 Stems in 7a. [—1213

quettioned whediei they ue not, at leut in part, primaxy
detiTatires &om the beginning, are especially the geiund-
ives, together irith aotion-nouns coincident with these in
form; in the latet language, the gerundive-formation (above,
9d3) comes to be practically a primary one.

a. In BT. ocoar aboat foit; tiuUncM of garundlvas In ja, of tolai-
ablr lecordaDt (onn: the loot nsoallf nnstrengthened (bat o4^B, bh&vra,
-b&vra, mirjra. Tddhya; tUo -madya. -vtoyn, bhavji); the icMot
on the ndlcsl ijUible whsn the word la liuple, or componnded with piepo-
■Itlooi: that, prafAaya, npaa&dya, viti&vya (bat araillr oa tha flnal
•ftei the negtUTe pteOx: tbng, an&pfi, anapavTJ;&) — ezceptloni are
only- bhSVT^ and the doubtral XkMjyh, the ya rewlTed Into ia In the
yerr fft«at mijoiity of ocoanoarw; a float sbon towbI followed by t (In
-itya, •kf^a, -^rft^a, •Btdtya, and the tedaplioated oarkftTa, 'beaide
oark^: not Id n&v;a aad •h&vya), uid S changed to a (in -deja
only). If ngaidod aa McoDdary, ther might be made with ya, Id aecoid-
■neo with other foroiBtioDa b; tbfa anffli, Id part ftom fhe roDt-DOon, u
anok^t-ya, Id part bom derlTatlvea in a, u bhavyi (from bhlva). .

b. The AT. has a somewhat amallei namber (abont twenty-flTe] of
woida of a like formation; but alio a eonaideiable group (flfieen) of derlT-
•dTM In yk wltb the aame tbIub : thus, for example, fidyj) eatabh, kftr*
yk to ie dont, aamKpyJt te he obtaintd, atitftryi to he oetrpawed,
nivibh&ryfc to be carried t'n the ^ron, prathamavSayh to beJiTH worn.
Tfaeae leem more aiarfcedlT of lecondary origin: aod eapeelally anoh forms
M parlvarcyk to be avoided, avtmokyA not to be gotten rid of, where
the gattaral leveiiton (dearly lodleatea prlmltiTea in ga and ka (fllSh).

o. XhroDghont the older langaage are of cami
abatraot nonna ot tha same make with the former of theie claues. They
are rarely toond eicept in eompoiiUon [In AY,, only oftya and at^ya a)
ilmple], and are often used tn the dative, after the manner of a datlTe
InDnitlTe. Examples are: brahmajy^ya, vaaud6ya, bhBgadhiya,
ptlrvapiya, qataaiya, abMbbdya, devahtiya, mantrai^tya, kar*
mak^a, vrtratArya, botfvArya, ablMtya. aattraa&dya, flrqa-
bhidya, brahiiiao4rya, nrf&hya. Of exceptional form are ft6dya (Vvad
and saliMiAyTa (V;!); of rxceptloDal aecent, sadh&atntya. And AT.
ha* one example, ra^ytl, «1th clreumDexed final.

d> Cloaely akiD with theae, in meaning and nee, la a imaller class
of femlnlnet in ji: thus, bftjt, vldya, Ity^ agxiloltylt, vfij^ityit,
muffUiatyi, devayajyit, etc.

e. There remain, of oonrae, a coDslderable number ot lee* claaalflable
word*, both noans and adJectlTea, of which a tew from the older langnage
may be mentioned, wlihoat dticnsalon of Ihelr reladons: thns, aftrya (with

L.,j,i,.c..,LiOOgle

1218—] XVn. Shoohdaet Dmivation. 464

rem. aOryt). i^jtk, p^7»> iUA>b7B; T^TB, cfdliya, fiyk. mryA ud
irytt m&iya, m&dliTa.

The sufGiea apparently tnoBt oearl; akin with jk may boat be
next taken up.

1214, ^ iya. This suffix is virtually identical with
the pieoediug, being but another written form of the same
thing. It is used only after two consonants, where the
direct addition of IT ya would create a combination of diffi-
cult uttetanoe. It has the same variety of accent with ya.
Thus:

«. With accent {ya {= la ot yk); for eiample, abhrfya (Uso abli-
Tiy&) fi-om the cloudt (abbri), b^triya having aut/toriiy (k^atrit),
yajfiiya reverend (y^Oi), botiiya libational (b6tra), amltriya inimieai
(atoltra).

b. With aoeeut ly& (= 14 oi yi): for eiimple, Bgrly& (also agrfya)
foremoet (^cra), Indrlyi Zndra't (iat«r, $eiue: {ndra), kqetrlyi of Ot
field (k(«tra).

o. With accent on the primitive: 9r6trlya learned (9r6tra). ^tviya
(alio jtvijk) in etaton (ftfi),

laiB. ^ lya. This BufGx aho is apparently by orifin a ya
(la) of which the first element has maintained its long qnanti^ by the
interposition of a euphonic y. It Is accented always on the i

a. Id RY. oconi, of genetal adjeetivei, oDlf Brjlklya and gfhame-
db^n, and eiamplei In the later Vedle are vary few: e. g. parvatlya
mounlaiium* (AT., beaide BY. parvatyk). In the Brahmauaa are fonnd
a number ot adJecttTei, aome of them fiom phraae* (flrat irorda at Tertat
and the like]: thaa, anyar&ftrfya. pabcavKtiya, miijiliyk. h^rS-
Qubblya, aTftdiifldllya, Spohlftblya, etc.

b. It was pointed out above (866) that derlTative adJecOvei In lya
from acUon-noQni in ana begin in Uler Yeda and in Biahmana to be
mad gernndlTallf, and aie a Teeognlied toimatian ai gerundiiea in the
daaaical language. But adjactiiei in aniya without gemndlve charactei

c Deiivatlvet in lya with initial v^ddbi are lometlmea made in
the later language: e. g. pArralvai P&ltftpatllya, Sparapakflya.
vUxakiya.

d. The pronominal posseiaivea madlya etc. (Slfl a) do not occur either
in Yeda ur in Brahmana; but the ordlnala dvitiya eto. (467 b, o: with
fractionala t^Iya and t&Tlya: 488 a) ue found from the earlieit period.

e. The poeaeaiiyes bbacavadlya and bbavadlya, with the Unal of
the primitive made eonaot, have probably had thelt form determined bj the
pronominal poaieaaivea in -dlya.

ioy Google

465 Stbmh jh lya, lya, aya, eyyei, enya. [—1317

1216. ^ eya. With this suffix, aocompanied by vrddM-
inoremeat of an initial syllable, aie made adjectives, often
having a pationymio ot metronymio value. Theii neutei
is Bometimes used as abstiaot noun. The accent rests
usually on the final in adjectives of descent, and on the
first syllable in others.

a, KxunpleB iie: KrQey& dttetndttnt of a tage (^), jaiiafratey&
ton of Janacruti, B&nuney4 of Sardma'i raet, qUavaiiey& ^atavani'i
detetmdart, Tftttiajlt«y4 ton of JtaUut/it; iuieya of tko blood (oa&n),
viwt^a of tilt bladder (vuti), pa&mfoya coming from man (pArufa),
pBltnvaseya of a paUmai ttunl (pitf^vBMff, eta.

b. A. moie ttun diiuI proportion of derlTttires In eya come from
pTimlttTes In 1 or X; ind piobtbly tli« snfOx flitt gvlnsd iti form bjr addition
of ya to * goDkted 1, though ttterward oMd Indepeodtntlj.

0. The geiundWe etc. deilTMiTea Id ya [above, 1213) from &>rooti
end In ^B; and, beildea inch, BY. ate. have Mtbhiya bom oabb^. and
dldrfef^ya ujorth tteing, apparently from the de«tder*tlTe nonn dldfkfi,
after theic analog;. H. hai OOM adhyaya at gerund ot ^L

d. Dartvatlvei In the «>-e*lled infBs Ineyi — a» bhBglney&.
JyUfthlnaya, kAni^^iinvya — ure doubtleii made upon proximate
derlvatlTe* In -Inl (tem.)-

«. In ayya (i. e. «yla) end, beaidei the nentei abttraet aaha^eyjra
(above, lS13o), the a^Jecttve of gemndival meanlnf st1if«yya (with aor-
Ittlo ■ added te the toot), and f apathey^ atrto^bringing (or aeeurMtd),
tiom qap&tlia.

1217. ^^ enya,- This suffix is doubtless secondary in
origin, made by the addition TT ya to derivatives in a na-
su^z; but, like otheis of similar origin, it is applied in some
measure independently, chiefly in the older language, where
it has nearly the value of the later aniya [above, 1216b),
as making gerundival adjectives.

a> The y ef IMi inAlz fi almost alwayt to be' read u vowel, and th«
Mcent 1b (except In vAre^ya) on the e; that, -inla.

b. The gemudlvei have been all given above, under the diflerent
conjngatloni to irhleh they attach themteWes (eOeb, 1019b, lOSS). The
BV. iu alio two non-gemndlval adjecdvei, vlii^ya manfy (viri), and
kIrtAnya fomout (kbll), *nd T8. bag aiiabhifa8teny& (abhiqastl);
v^enyk (RY.) la a irord of doubtful couQectton; Qlkf«pya MutruefiVe la
found In a Sutra; privrfe^iya of th« rainy ttaion ocenrt later.

L.,j,i,....,LiOOgle

1918—] XVIL Sbcondart DamvATiOK. 466

1S18. utui i^y«. With tbia suffix are made gernndival adjec'
tires almost only in RV. They have been noticed above (966 c].
The ending ie everywhere to bo read jyla.

a. A few ailJectl'tM vltbont genindivtl Tklne, and neater abMncO,
also occut; thus, babupiyya proUetmg many, nfpiyyet mtrt-guarttmy;
kn94^pi;7a, md pumml^ai P>^FeT Dunea; porvapilyya _^(( drink,
maihayayya enjoyment; — aad rasayya nerfMM, and nttaioayya sitmmit,
contain no TSTbil loot. Ali^A is doubtful; alio £k£yyk, vhleh It* ae*
cent lefeii to a different fonnatlon, along with prah&Tyk (AT.; y^)
meuenger, "id pravS^T^ CA^-)i <»* donbtfnl value.

1319. tniH B7>D>- Iq the Br^manaa and latei, patoo-
nymics made by this suffir aie not rare. They come &oin
stems in ? a, and have Trddhi-strengthening of the first
syllable, and accent on the final.

a. In RT., the Doly example of this formation ig kS^vK;anA (toc.:
ki^Ta); AT. baa in metrical parti dSfcfl^avA and the fem. ramSya^;
and Bmufr&yanA Mon of so~and-»o (B16) In iu pnue; {B. ha t4}»>
■tambiraiia biiide -bBjaBA. The BT. name okfapriiyana li of a
different make, elaewhere nnkaaiai.

12S0. tjiul ayi. Only a very few words are made with this
suffix, namely agSRTi (agnf) ^gnCt wift vr^SkapKrl wifa of Truhi-
hapi; and later pQtakratfiyi, and manfiyi Mamit toife (but maaSTl ^B).

a. They seem to be femlninei of a derlTiCire a madi with v(dcUii-
Increment of the flaal 1 of the primltiTi.

1281. ^i. Derivatives made with this suffix are patro-
nymics from nouns in a. The acomt rests on the initial
syllable, which has die vrddbi-stren^thening.

a. In RT. are found h^f-i-doien patr«nynileB In i: for example, ng-
nlvefi, piurukatei, pratardani, aaiiivara^l; AT. ha« but one, pr<-
hrftdl; in the Brahminai they are more common: thni, In AB., a&nyavMit
J&naihtapl, anu^, jftnaki, etc. A lingle word of other lalne — aaratlil
dxarioteer (Bar&tham) — la found from RT. down.

b. The nordi made with the ao-called BofBi akl — aa vUrSaaki
deecendent of Vyaia — are donbtleis properly derlTatives In 1 from othMi in
ka or aka. That the lenoDdary aufflx ika la probably made by addlKon
of ka to a dfirlTatl<e in 1 la pointed oot below (ISaSj).

o. RT. haa t&pti;l, apparently from tApns with a aecondary 1 added,
and the n. pr. 9uaand; bhuvantl is foand in B., and Jivanti later.

1222. ^ ka. This is doubtless originally one of the
class of suffixes forming adjectives of appurtenance. And

ioy Google

467 Stbhb in VTa> iiyvna, etyU 1, ka. [— IBfiS

that value it still has in actual use; yet only in a small
minotity of occurrences. It has been, on the one hand,
specialised into an element forming diminutires; and, on
the other hand, and much more widely, attenuated into an
element without definable value, added to a great many
nouns and adjectives to make others of the same meaning
— this last is, even in the Veda, and still more in the
later language, its chief office.

fk HeDce, ka easil; ABsociatea itself with the finals of deriv-
atives to which it is attached and Cf>me9 to seem along wi^ them
an integtal suKs, and is further used as Bach. Of this origin are
donbtlesa, as was seen above (1180, 1181), the so-eailed primary suf-
fixes nka and aka; and likewise tlie BBoondary soffii ika (below, J).

b. Tbe accent of derivatives in ka varies — apparently without
rnle, save that the words most plainly of diminutive character bave
tbe tone usually on the suffix.

. O. Eiunplei ((torn the oldei language) of worda In wMch the eafflx
hu •□ adjMiive-Diildiig Ttlne »e; fintaka ^Aata) end-ttlekinff, bilhlka
(bilhi) of Baikh, K^fikn (A^^^) egg-btarittff, flQotka (aOof) Hinging,
uTv&nik& fruit of th« gourd (orv&rA), paryfiylUi (parySyi) Mtrophici
ftom nnmerals, ekakA, dvakft, trik4, a^faka; tftiyaka of Ae third
dafl\ from proaonn-stema, aem^a ours, yufmaka yma-t, m&maka mint
(&16b]: bom pTepwlUonB, AntlKa nwr, &iiiika foUowing, 4vakft a pUnt
(later adMka, atka); aud, with aoeant letnoted to tbe Initial ayllable
(beaide* Affaka and t^^aka, alieidf given), rdpaka (rap&) with form,
Mbhmka (babbr6 hroum) a ceiUln llzaid. Bh&vatka your uorthip't
has an anomalou* iniUU v^ddlil.

d. Of words in irhioh a diminutive meaning la more oi leas probable:
afvakA nag, kanlnaka and kiiinarak& boy,- kaninak^ or kaniolka
giri, pftdak& litth foot, patrakii litth ion, rBJak& princeling, qakun-
taki birdliitg. SometimeB a cDiiIeniptaous meaning I* conveyed by luch
a dlminntlve; for foimationi with this value (rwn pronominal ateme, aee
above, ^21; other examplai are anyaki (KV.), &lakam (RV.: from ilom),
and even the verb-form yBmakl (for ySml: KB.).

e> The derivatives In ha wiih unchanged meaning are made from
prlmltlvee of every variety of form, simple and compound, and have tbe
tame variety of aeoenl as (he adjective derivatives [with whkh they ere at
bottom Identical). Thus:

f. From eimple nonns and adjectives: frataka homt, nltalkB fioitril,
m&kqlkii ^y, aviki ewe, i;iiki arrow, d&rak& dittanl, earvakft ali,
dli6iink& (dhenii) cow, n&gneikn [nagni) naked, b&ddbaka (baddbi)
tapUve, abhinnataraka by no means different, anaatamitak^ before

30*

D,j,i,...., Google

ISSS— ] XrU. Sboondast Dertvatiom. 46g

tumet, T(uOTak& ant, HrbhakA tmaO, flgnki yotmg, «9lyaskK ./bwr,
oJfttU tranblmg, ftbhimidyatki intoxieattd, pmiari^ukk Jtyiuff. Sncb
derlTatlTei fn th« later luipitg« >ie Innnmenble; from almoit u; fiitn
Donn or >dJ»atlTe may be made an equlnlent, andlng In ka ot kft (Mcotd-
iDg to the gendet).

g. Fran oDmponnd prlmltlTM: aralpaki vtry muiB, •vinaxkyakM
rtmooing wrath, vikfl^atU deetroying , pravartamSDaki moving /or-
ward, vlkal^aU dtelroytd.

h. In the BiihtDinu and later, ka U often >dd»d to a ponadre
adjKtiTe componnd (1807), BoinetlDie* T*dand*ntlir, bat imally in ndei
to obtain > moie Daa>geab1« item tot infleotlan: thaf, ■"ftW-^'nt tftltn,
atv&kka akmlem, aretiaka wilMoul ttad, T;aatliafca boneUtt, osfiraaka
along with tht head, ekag&yaCrlka containing a tinglt gKyatzI-iwrw,
gflllt&TaaaUTarika ont leho hat taktn j/etUrdag'i toattr, Bapatnika wcU
hit tpouit, bahahastikB having many elephants, aadlkfopaa&tka tcith
dikfft and upaaad, Uiltaaamitka with hit fuel laid on, abhlnavaTa-
Taaka of youthful age, aflgiMKhamfttraka of thumb tist.

i. The Towel by whiob the ka li pree«ded hu often an tmpUai
chuactet; >nd eipeclally, ■ feminine In lk& It to oommon bealda a mu-
cnline la aka at to b« Itf legnlu ooneapondent (aa U the c«m with the
Bo-called primary *aka : above, 1181). In RV. are foand beaide one an-
other only iyattaki and lyattiki; bat AT. hu MToial example*.

J. Two niffliei made up of ka and ■ preceding rowel — namely,
aka and Ika — are glren by the grimmarlana ae Independent lecondary
sufflsei, requiring initial TT<ldhl-Btrengtheulng of the primldTe. Both of
them are doubtlcBs oilglDally made b; tddition of ka to a final 1 ot a,
though coming to be naed independently.

k. Of vfddM-deiiTatlTee Id aka no example! haye been noted from
tbe older langnaie (unleH »w««»ttVt mine is to be ao regarded); and they
are not common in the later; thn*, &Ta97aka necetiary; vSrddliaka
old age, rSmai^aka delighlfidnttt.

1. Of T^dbl-doriratlveB in ika, the Teda famiahei a very few
ctiei : T^santlka oemal, v^r^ika of tht rainy itaton, biimantika wintry
(none of them In RT.]; AT. haa kUr&tiki of the Kiratat, apparent fem.
to a muc. kUrfttaka, which Ii not foond till later. Example* from a
more recent period (when tbey become abnndani) are: vUdlka rtiaiing to
the Vedat, dbftnnika reUgioat, Umlka daily, Tfiinaylka wtU-bAaced,
dtUTllrlka doorkeeper, nUfSylka verted in the Ngaga.

7a. Before the infDx ka, tome BnaU abow ■ form which It ohatMter-
btle of exiainal nther than internal comblnatioi). A final aonant mute,
ot conrae, becomea aord, and an aapinte loaea lis aapiration (117a, 114):
ef. -upaaatka, -savoitka, above, h. So alto a palatal becomu gnttaral
(sB before t etc.: 217): e. g. -srukka, -rokka, -trakka, amfkka.
A B ramalna after It, and beceEoea ^ after an alterant vavel (180): e. f.
•adyaaka, Jyotl^ka. dlisbBju^ka. Bat the other ttbUwita teke the tana

ioy Google

469 Stems is ka, oka, ika, ftni, Ina, na, Inu. [— 19B4

Otey would li»Te In compailUoo : thae, adiklui C<Uq)i fatkA, -vifka,
-trltka (ig«9 ate.)' AnKqirka (TS.: ftqls) ii iDamslcxuj uid lo ii pa<
nitka (Ap«st,), if it comei from paniB.

ISas. Several saffizes, partly of rare oootuTBiice and qnegtionable
cbarscter, contain a ^ n as conBODaiital element, and may be gronped
together here.

a. A fair derlTttlTea la &na Id RT. waia given aboTS (IlTSa).

b. With laS (vhish U petbaps tbe Mrieapondlng temlnlne) tie made
a Noall Qnmbei of wordi, chleBf wife-namei ; thni, lndrj^li, Tam^ftni
(theae, witli uQln&r&i^, pnmkutaini, mndgallbil, flrj&ii, ne foond
In BT.), mdrK^I, mStulSnl mattmal imcle't wift, qarvS^Ii bhavSnl,
I^ftnKnl, gakrK^I, npKdliyfiyiiii, id^^SxS, brahmSfl; and ravKnl.

o. The femlolDea Id nJ aod kni tram mascDlliM atami in ta have
been already noticed above [ll76d). From p&ti maiter, htuband tbo
feminins ta p&tni, both m independent Troid, tpoute, and aa final of an
•djeotive eomponnd : thui, deTipatnl hoeing a god for huahand, afn-
dbopatnl kaning tke Inditt a* matttr. And the feminine of panif& rough
!■ in the older langnage aometimea p&mfi}!.

d. With Ina are made a full aertea ot adjeetive deiivatlves ftom tbe
word* with anal afio (407 ff.); they are accented utnally npon tbe pennit,
but aometlme* on tbe final; and the same word haa aametlmet both ac-
eenta: tor example, aptofna, nloba, prft^^na, arrftolaa and arvB-
0&1&. praHoioa and prataeini, BamlomA. Beeldea these, a number ot
other adjeotivea, earlier and later: eiamplei are aaifavataaii^a yearlf/,
prkTTfi^a of tht rainy teason, Tifrajanlna of all peoplt, JfiKtakoUna
of knoten famiU/, adkTamna bravelkr (idlivaii way), fifviDa day'*

jumey on horseback (iiqTa hortt). RY. bu onoe makina mine.

e. With enn ii made B&mldli«ni (f. -nf), from aamfdh, with Initial
atrengthening.

f. Aa to a few words in ina, compare 1308 o.

g. The adjectivea made with simple na tall partly andei anctbei head
(below, ia46f)j here may be ooted 9tira9a herouip), pbilena&, qma-
Qm^i^ dadra^a, and, with TTddhl-atiengthentng, striina uioman't (Ila
correlative, pftadtBna, ooenrg late) and cfBiatii& inciting. If di^^a comas
from dm toood, It haa the anomaly ot a gu^-strengtheniog.

1884. Certain anffixes cont^ning a )? m may be Blmilarly
gronped.

a. With ima are made a smaU number ot adleetives from nouns in
trs: that, kbanftrima mad« )y digging, krtrfma arti^ficial, dattrima,
paktrima, putrima; In other Snala, kuftlma. ga^ima. tallma. tnllma,
piUma, udgftrima, vyByoglma, aadivyfifalma, nirvedlilma, ftaaa-
glnui, all late. In agtlma (BT.) fortmort the ma has perhaps the ordi-
nal value.

b. The niei of simple ma In farming aaperlatlves (474) and ordinali
(487 d, e) have been already noticed, and the words thus made specUed.

ioy Google

lUM— ] XVII. SecoNDABT Dkritation. 470

0. A. few neaur abitn«t» end in tdjoa: thu, dyninn^ brifltbmt,
nfm^i mofiAnM*; ttnd, ham paniclea, niaui 4^pl& uid nuanA wt^mv.
The anffli nomsB peihap* rram man vtth ui «dd«d a. .

d> Foi the wordi ihowing a flnil min, IM beloT, I&31.

122B. 1^77 msya. With this Buf&z are formed adjectires
BignifyiDg made or copipoaed oi contitUnff of, also aiotmd-
inff in, that which is d«aot«d by the {nimitjve.

a. The accent la alwayi on the m&, and the temiiilna is rFgnlally
and uxually in m&yi. In the oldeit lingaage (V.), flna] aa renulD* bd-
changed befoie the talDx : thus, manasm&ya, aabhasm&ya, ayaam^TS;
but d ti treated aa Id external oombinatlon: thni, mfumAyai and in the
Brabma^at and later, floals in geneial hue the Uttei treatment: e. g. t«-
Jomiiyai adom&ya, ftpomAya, Jyotirmaya, yt^arm4ya, etanmiya,
aarfimaya, Tftam&ya, ammaya, prftTp^Jnaya. BV. baa a^manm&ya
(later afmamaya). In fairanm&ya (B. and latei) the piimitiTe (hlra-
^a) ii pacnllarly mutilated. RT. las aOmAya of good make, and klm-
miya made of whatt

b. A Te>r few examples of a feminine In yt occnt in the later
language.

1226. ^ ra. A few derivative fidjeotives are made with
this suffix. Accent and treatment of the primitive are va-
rious.

a. with rimpla addition of ra are made, for example: plAanr4
dutiy, -qrlra (also -^Illa) fn aftlri uglj/, dbOmri iuthji (dbOmi imoke),
■uadbtira (late) ttettt. In an example or two, there appsan to be aceom-
panjing initial ttrengtliBnlng: thna, ^Biildliiv o/ lAe ^/tre-bWbr (agnidh),
qlflkur& ttokflikt (fafiku); and in qekhara (alto ^k^iara), a m^a-
ttrengtbenlng.

b. With an iootganle iinrel before the ending aie made, for example,
midhlra wim, ratblrd m a ehariot; kann&« tmiih; dantma 0*te)
tutked; aoolitoa (? H8.), qrftma9«ra, aaihgamsnera.

a. The Qes of ra In fotmlng a few words of eampirati*e meaning waa
noticed above (474), and the words so made were given.

1227. ^IB. This and the preceding suftiz are really
but two fotme of the same. In «ome words they exchange
with one another, and ^ la is usually, but not ^ways, the
later form in use.

a. Examples are : babuUt abundant, madhuU (later madhnra) and
madbOla «u>««(, bhimala /tw/il, JivaU livdy, agdlU (and a^iiii)
tereUhtd; with K, TioUa taikatint (lat«)j with 1, phasila /(xmy (\tt«:

ioy Google

471 Stems in mna, majt^ nt, U, vn. qa, in. [— ISSO

pUn*); with a, ▼Unla, uid vStiila wwitfy (1*^- ▼<(*»): mi mstnltt
mattrnat tmth !■ * Bomeirkat Irregnlu ronnatloii from mttt mothtr.

b. In the Uter ]«ngvtge tn fonnd > few idjeetlves Id to, stwayi
prooedsd by ft; eiunples aia: kfplln and dByUn eompami«na(e, Irf-
yUn /'talotu, h^^Ud htated, fnytiu and BTapnUn shtpy, lajjaiu moif-
Mf, lU&Iu drooling, qnddhUn (ruih'n^, krodhUu paisionaU. One oi
two siicli deiiTattvea having a pdmar; aspect were Dodced at IlMb.

122B. ^ va. A small numbei of adjectives hare this
ending (accented, added to an unaltered primitiye).

a. ExacpplM ars: exifxvk hi&owy, h:e;&T& hairy; rSSnBvt girded;
afijlvi tlipptry, gantlvi iranquHliting, fraddhlvi credibie, amafim
Jmoelltti, ItjivBt atriptd.

b. There are a very few »d]eotlTas in vala and vaya which may be
noticed here: thai, k^flvoU petuant (kffl ploughing), Qr^SvaU tcooU/,
rajaavttla, flrjaavsla, payoBTola, q&dval*, na^trals. ^^UEbftvolft, dHi-
tftvola ; dmT&ra tcoodm diMh, oatorvoiyft fourfold.

a. With vya ate made two or tbree word* from name* of lelatian-
ohlp, thus, pltr^y^ paternal uneU, Haitfvya. ntpliMe, owfRy.

ia£8. n 9a. A Tcty few adjeotiTM appear to be made
by an added ending of this form.

a. Tbnf, Tomo^ or lonui9& hairy, Mafft (alio eta^i) variegated,
■ arraqa 01 irraqa hatting, babhlaqi or babhrnqi und kapi^a brownith,

knVOQa Uaeki^, ruTOfA nouthful, b&U^ cAiTditA, karbaga AorsA, kar-
ma^ (P) D. pr.; and glri^a, varlga (?), vfkqaga are doabUeu of the
same charactei (not eonialnlog the root ^]. The ohaiactei of hartmafi,
k&f maqa, kalaga la doahtftal.

b. Many of the adJectlTe derivatives already treated have aome-
times a possesaive value, the general meaning of bting concerned ailh,
haoiag relation to being specialized Into that of heing pogseuion of.
But there are also a few distlDottvely posBossive suffizea; and some
of these, on sccoiint of the onlimited freedom of using them and
the frequency of their occurrence, are very conspicaons parts of the
general system of derivation. These will be next considered.

12S0. ^ in. Possessive adjectives of this ending may
be formed almost unlimitedly from stems in Q 01 SFT fi,
and ate sometimes (but very laiely) made &om stems with
othei finals.

a. A filial vowel disappeara hefore the snfBz. The accent is on
the Buffii. As to the inflection of these adjectivesi see above, 438 ff.
They are to be oonnted hy*hnndredB in the oUei lai^u^e, and are
equally or more numerbus in the later.

ioy Google

LS80— ] XTU. Sbookdabt Dxbivatiok. 472

b. Eximplei from a-itemi aie: aqrin pouMtmg horttt, Alumwim
tctaWu/, pakq{n fcmged, bftlfn ttnmg, bhAg^ forUmaU, vi^rb leiM-
ing the thunderbolt, «;<vti«^ijtti eretted, luuitiD poiiMiing htmd», fo^afln
of sixteen, gardRbtuuL&d£n }iaving an am'* voice, brahioaTftroaaln cf
ntiMMnt lanctittf, BSdlmdevlll having luek at play, kQddftrth&l Aoou^
»rrand» everywhither; — from &-Bt«ms, mmlfij wwe, flUifii eretttd,
ftftyln piout.

O. DerlTitlTw from othoi stemi ue Twy- (ew In compuiMD; thu,
fiom 1-atemi, atlthin(7), abhimatfn, anrfn, sqanin, Dnnln, kUv
nemln, )f^<tjtfn, -pft^in, nuuioiii, mmUin, twfiniln, •yoniii, vaniiia
Bufadbin, aamrddhin, Bombhln (of Hioie tojoti only »X the end of t
poueMlTB eomponnd the ehuMtei la donbtfo], dnM «>H-fonaB ot i- ind
In-stemB He not BOldom exchanged); — from n-stemi, gnrvln, Ofttagvlil
(?), TAl^ftTln (with gaatk of the n); — from itemi in Ka, Tannin,
karmiiii oftrmltii •otutdmln, j*-nmtn, dbaiiTlii, -dtaAnniii« nxmia,
brahmin, yakfmtn, farmln, end ^wsSn; — in aa, T^tinrieh m teed,
■nd ptobabl; varoia n. pi.; elte (peihipa tbiongh stem* in -sa) favaobi
end flabaein, manaafai. -Tayaafn; — taoleted are pariarajfn garlanded,
and h<T*u(ii |lUr&q;a).

d. It wee pointed ODt eboTe (1 188) that deriTetlTea In In heve eeiniii-
ed on a largo icale the Mpect and Telne of pdmary deilTatiTa*, with the
■Igniflcance of pieeent partlciplet, eipeolell; at the end of componndi. The
properly leoonduy ehaiaetai of 'the whole fi>rmatloD ii shown, on the one
hand, by ths frequent nae in the tarn* manner of words beulng an nnmli-
takably lecandary form, aa pragn£n, garbbin, JOrQla, dtaamfn, sni-
nin, 'homin, matearin, paripantbln, pravepanin, tadigatin ; and,
on the other hand, by the ocranenee ot reverted palatal* (916) before the
In, which conld only be aa In replaced a: thni, arkin. -bhaflgln, •Bafi-
gCn, -rokfru

e. In a few case*, there appear* before the in a y preceded by an
fi of inorganic character; thus, dbanvKy{n, tantrftfin, ^0t^iii,
Bf^fia, Ktatftyfo, pratlbitl^ln, mar&yin, ftaylii, Bvadbllyln (V8.\
TB. -via). The y in all inch word* Is etidently the inserted y after i
(268 a), and to aeaome for them a aufflz yln la qnlte needleae.

f. The aocantnatlan pravrl^in, pTasy&ndin, in the canclodiaf part
of ^B., Is donbtleii false; and the same is to be atupected for ^ahi, nArl,
{n (BT. each onee).

g. A very few word* in in have not euffered the posaeeslve speclall'
latlon. Soch are wanin tree, hermit, kapottn dovelike, a94^ terotttm-
like (of. lS38f.).

1281, ^R min. With thu Bu£fiz are made an extremely
small numbei of poasesBive adjectires.

a< In the old langnage, the words in loin haye tfa* aspect of deriT'
ativea In In from noon* in ma, althoDgh In twe or three oasee — iqmin

ioy Google

473 Stbms m in, min. viu. vilst. [—1888

■Dd fgmin In RV., vlgmfn Id (B. — no mch noani ut hnai in wtud
Qie beilde them. In the IMer Ungutge, mln ii uaed u todependeiit •!»•
ment In * Terr f*w voids; thus, gomln potiMting axtth, avSmln (Sikttu
4ad liUr) mtultr, lord (sva cton), kskudmln humped.

b. The two ironli fgrnia and vSgrnfa ihov not anlr revenloii >Dt
■1m KOMntlilng of an oiiginil piUUl.

1282. fcTT Tin. The adjectives made with this suffix
aie also not numetous. They have the same meanings irith
those in ^ in. The accent is on the suffix.

a. The RT. h>i ten idjecdie* In vin; they become nthei mon com-
mon latei. Though Tot them may be mtpected ■ Bimllsi origin to thoae in
yin iDd mln (ibote), signs of it ace much lesB cleacly traceable.

b> The gnat majority have vin added after as: e. g. namaavfn
raetrtntitU, tapasvin heated, tajasvln briUiant, ya^asvin beautijiil, and
BO retasvin, enasvln, haraavln, etc.; and gataevin, Qrotaavfn, ra-
pasvin have an inaerled s, by analogy with them. Host others haye K
(tometimeB, by lengthening): thae, giftvin, medhSvin, m&yftvio, aa-
bhSvfu, aqfrftvln obedient to the goad, dvBj&viix double-minded, ubha-
rSvin poneeting of both kxndi, dbanvKvlTi, tandrKviji, Smay&vfn,
Uat&vin. Hora rarely, vln 1j added after another conBonant than s: thna,
Tfigvfur dhTfadvin, Ktmanviit, knmudvini sracrln, yalvln, a|Tln<
The donbtfal word vytt^xxvia (VS., ooce; TB. vy&fnJya) appean to add
the ending (oi in, with enphonlc v) to a pteaent tenie-Mem.

0> Ad eitsmal form of combination la aeen only In vftgrln and
dbn<*<tvil> (both Vedic), with the common lerenlon ot • palatal in srasvln.

1288. ^ vant. Very numerous possessive adjectives
are made by this suCCx, &om noun-stems of every form,
both in the eailiei language and in the later.

a. Tfas accent generally remtina npon the primitive, without
change ', bat an accent reBting on a Btem'final, if this be aajthing but
k ot i, ie in the majority of cases thrown forward npon the soffiz.
As to inflection, fonnatdon of femfoine, etc, see 452 ff.

b. A Bnal towbI — ofteoeit a, very rarely u — is in many words
lengthened in the older language (247) before thli eDdlng, as In compo-
sition. Nonna in an more often retain the n.

o. Etample* of the normal toimatlon are: with nnchanged aecent,
ki^avant hairy, patf&vant having a ton, pnj&nanavuit procreativt,
pm^^^rlkavaiit rtcA in lotate*, hlranyaTant rich in gold, apap&vaiit
hoeing cakea, r^an^vant allied loith a kehatriya ; prajiivant himing pro-
geny, lin^vant iBooiy, dAk^i^Svant rich in laerifieial gijti \ sAkhlvant
hioing fritndi, aaptarfivant accompanied by the <«ticn eagee; tj&e&TKiit
powtrfiU; tiviflvant vehement, p&tnlvant with tpouae, dblvant devoted.

Digitizecy Google

1988—] XVII. Sbcohbaky Dkritation. 474

dyitvipptblvlTiuit (94 b^ toiCA AtonM and cortA; vf^^nvant (MMMponM
by VUhnu; h&ritvant golden, Avftrant hither lum»d, Kftrrant miseail
tetth milk, svkrvant ipltndid, qar&dTant full of yeart, podievant haeiny
a male, pirftflTant rieh, UmBBvant dark, brAhma^vant aceompanUd
wAh wonhip, r&ma^Tant hairy (but also romftTWit, 16iiiavant, -vrtraba-
vant, etc.], kab&bhTant containing a kakubbi — with aaeeat on thi
■nrai, aKnlv&Dt Aotrinjr ^re, t&yivioit wealthy, Ofrkat manly, pfidvAikt
having feet, naBV&nt vith note, ftsonT&nt having a m«utA, qlr^a^Tint
htttdtd (*J«o qiTfavaat).

d. With flnU stsm-vowel lengtbaned ; for example, AfvAvaiit (bMlde
&9Tavant) poaaetting horiee, aut^vant having toma expreaed, T^f^ySvant
0/ virile force (ibout tbirt; inch caeeB oecur in V.); Q4kHTant naghly,
ST&dlilUvaiit having axet, gb^^Ivant hot; vifuv&nt flw'idwi;(vifaar>iirf).

a. Certtin »pecial inecolaTltteB sie u foUo«B : an iiis«rtad ■ in fn-
drasTaut, m&hlfvant; inierted n in v&nauTant, badiumvant, t4-
dhanTant, gartauT&nt, miSABaiivAiit; ahorteDing of • final of the ptimi-
tlTs In mSy&vant, yiiyh-vajA, pnronavBkyavaut;, imfk^avAnt,
saraSTatlvaiit; abbrsTiacian in hixa^vaiit; Ineerted 5 in QSTBaSvant,
Bahas&Taut, and the odd maliimJlTaivt; anomaloas accent in fefqana-
irant (it rrom k^aoa pearl); darivation bom particles In ant&rwit
pregnant, vitf&vkat (abo»e, d).

f. Instead of tbe apeciallzod mstniDg of poutMing, tke mote geoerU
one of like to, retemUtng it leen In a number of iroide, eapectall; Id tlw
deriiaUTee from proDOPlnal stenu, m^Tailt &A« m« etc (61T: add
tTftUt, kivant]. Other examplee are {ndraSTAUt Hke Indra, nl^vant
ntiUike, oilaTaat blackith, nfv&iit manly, pf^adTftDt ^eakled, kfSf-
tavfint prinee^/i compaie the latei paratraat dependent. It was pointed
ont above (1107) that the adTerb of compatisoa Id v&t it the aceaeatiiB
nenter of a deriTatlTO of (his elaM.

K. Id 1 ten voTda, vanC has the aspect tt fomiag primarr derii-
atlyes: thns, vlT&aTant (ot vivaBTant) tAmui^, also n. pt., &nap»-
daavatit, Arrant, pfpl^vant [?), jBiivkat.

h' Foe the deriTatlveg in vat ftom pieposltioi)*, vblcb appear to h»e
nothing to do with this tulBx, see ia45j.

1. While this luIBi ia geneially add^d to a primitive accocdisj to the
Idles of Internal eombtnation (see eiamples above, o). treatnent also u
In external combination begiju already in BV., in p^advant (p|fat),
and becomes more common later: thug, tapoTont, tejovanti anf^rovmnt
(beside t&paavant etc.); vldy^dvant (beside vldyutvaat), b^wdTantf
JaBsdvant, sadvant, etc.; briftubTant (against kaki^Uivant), aas)-
Idvant, vlmFdvanti vigrant (against r^vanC); >TST&4v<Uit; bavT*-

J. None of the anfflies beginning with v ihov In the Teda rwidntion

ioy Google

475 Stbus in TUit, vui, mnnt. [—1936

1134. ^ van. The aecondar^ derivatives in this aaffix belong
to the older lanpnage, and are a small nnmber, of which extremely
few have more than an oeearrence or two.

a. They hsTe the tapect of being piodneed under the Joint InflnencB
of prlmaty van ind seconduy vant. A ioH short vowel i* niaill; length-
ened befoift tbe luffli. The accent la vutona, bat oftenut on the peDoIt
of the Item. The lemlnlDe (like that of the derliktlTea lo primary van:
ll«9f) 1» in vara.

b. The Tedle sumplei are: from a^lema, ^^viia or p}KV&a, j\A-
vaa [and t. -vtalf, ightvaa, 6bitiv»n, satyiTan, atmm&v&rl, and
maghivan; torn &-stenu, aOnftATail, BTadhaTon (and f •Tari); &om
l-(tciD(, amativ&n, ar&tlT&ii, gmfpT&n, mu^lvAn, and fc^lTau (only
m the further deiivative kftifiTa^a); dUvan; from conaonant-stemB,
Athsrraa, aam&dTaii, aAhoTan (bad AV. variant to RT. aahiyan);
htrdvaa (TA. also h&rdiTan). Somewhat anomalom are Baliivaii,
Indhanvan (for fndbanavan P), and aanitvan (for s&ultivaiiP). The
only worde of more than iporadlo ooennence are ftavan, macb^van,

O. S&bovaa (aee b) Is the only example ot eiUmal combination
with thU suffix.

1886. IRT mairt. Thia is a twin-suffix to ^tT vant (above,
1238]; theii deiivatives have the eame value, and are to
»ome extent exchangeable with one another. But posseee-
ivee in ITtT mant are much less frequent {in the older lan-
guage, about a third as many), and are only very rarely
made fiom a-Btems.

a. If the aeceot of the primitive word is on the final, ft is in
the great mftjority of instancea (three qnartere] thrown forward upon
tbe added suffix; otherwise, it maintains its place unchanged. A final
vowel before the snffis is in only a few cases made long. Exam-
ples are:

b. Wlih the accent of the primitive nocbaDged: kii^vamant, y&va-
mant ricA in harU;/, and Tibhavamont n. pi. (these alone from a-«temg,
and the AiBt only oconrrlng once); Avlmaat potttttmg ^^, aq&nimant
hearing th* Ihmtdtrbolt, 6;adMmant ritA in herbt, vafunaot carrying an
axe, T&aumaiit postmitig good things, in4dlLumant riak in iweeU, tr&f-
tTStant aeeompanied by Tvaslttar, hitpnant provided ailA prietti, ^yuf-
mant iong-lived, jy&tlfmant full of brigktntu; — nlku^lmnnt accom-
panied tcith meteora, pQumant (P), praadmsnt having young tfioote,
K^mant ricA in kint, garutmant winged, viliutniBiit with libation,
kakudmant humped, vldy4iunant (with jTregnUi aaeimlUiioD of t: VS.
hag alio.kak&nmant) gleaming, vlrdlcmant thining, bavf^mant tcith
Ubationt, vlpmfmant tcith dropi.

ioy Google

1236—] XVII. Sbcokdaky DKSiTATiOti. 476

e. with ths mcMnt tbrawD fonrud upon tha ending: arimimt triA
ktuvtt, agnlmint having Jb-e, Ifndhlmint toiih a quitier, pftfomiiil
poMMting eattU, vl^xaoiixt toith tcind, pitfiniiit (AV. pitfm&nt) ateom
ponied bji Ua Fathen, mS^mint honing a moOiar; no long find voveli
■te (oand befoie the iDflli In this dlTliion, uid onlj once > conioiunt, in
d«>mAt (RT., odm).

d. ProtisctioD of ■ flu*] vovel la teen In trf^imant, dhr&Jinuii^
blrimftQt; in Jyitlqimkiit is Inegitlftilr InMttad in I (tfter tha uulogr
of t&vifinuuit}; in faol^naat, nuJtlfiiuuit, >n s; sufonuiit OtT.,
ODoe) tppeUB to b« primer?.

«. The adTerb Kftuniit appeui to be lelated to ■dveibi in vit u
the (nffli mnnt to VKot.

t. By the tide of deriiallTet mtds with Intenul combUutlDB appeia
Vidy^nmant even in BV.; uid other like cues ocom later: thni, pail*
■r^nmaut, V ■.fcTirun ^^Tl^■., v^n n m T^Tl^:, poToriiAiiuuit, vK&maiit, k»kTun-
Bumt, gudftUqnuuit, Tft^onuuat.

lfiS6. It hu been aeen abore (Mpeoially in connection with the
suffixes a and ja) that the nent«r of a derivative adjacdTe is fre-
qnently used aa an abBtnutt noon. There are, however, two anffixea
which have in tlie later language the specific ofSce of making abatraet
nonne from adjeotivea and Donns; and these are fonnd also, man
sparingly used, in the oldest langnage, each having there one or two
other evidently related suffixes beside Ik

a. For derlTatlves of the ««me value made with the infllx inum, m
aboie, 116Bi-k.

ias7. fTT tS. With thia suffix are made feminine &!>»•
tract QOune, denoting the qualiti/ of being so and ao, fiom
both adjectives and nouns.

a. The fotm of the primitive is tmchanged, and the aeeeU ii
uniformly on the syllable preceding the snfBi.

b. Examples (from the older langnage) are: dev&tS divinity, vtriU
matdintu, pum^tS human natitrt, agnltfi prthood, apaqdtS eoMt-faM-
tMM, bandhutS rdationthip, voaAtK wtaUJi; aagn^tfi nakeAtett, butI-
r&ta uieatih in ntaineri, anapatydtft lack of lUtctndantt, Ag6tM pocertjf
in cattle, abrnhmitB lack of devotion, apr^j&stK abtenet of progta^;
alio donbtteii eunftft (frorn gun&ra), althongh the word li a feir tinea
nied ai an adJectlTB (like ^aifatStl and aatyattU; see next paragraph).

O. Or epedal formatlan ale mani&tK i»lfithn«»», tritS triplieit^, astlU
aelualiCy. RT. haa aviratfi, vlth exceptional accent In efcapatntU li
«een * ahortened final vowel of Ibe prlmltlTo. Jan&tA has acquired a con-
erete meanlug, pecpU, folk; also gr&matft (once) viUaga colleotlvelr.

ISaS. fn% tfttl, HTrT tat These anffixei are Vedlc only, and
the latter is Umited to R^. Their relatJonshlp to the preeedtag is

ioy Google

477 Stbus ra mant, t&, tftti, tftt. tra, tvuia. [—1840

evideDi, bnt opinions ar« at Tariance as to its natare. The aoceot is
M in the derivatives with ti.

a. Tbe qn<iU1)l6 eitrnplet In tatl ue: ariqtiUltl imit\/urednett,
afakfm&tStl frwdom from diietui, gi'bttlt&tSti tht being teittd, jTBf-
fh4t&ti tupremaej/, der&t&ti divinity, vaslitilti tee^th, q&ibtfttl gooi-
fortune, sarv&itStl compitttnai; uid, with czceptlontl accent, AatatfitI
homa, tni diJ^fatAti elaiem«$»; ^vatKtl and fnbhatfttl accnr (onne
each) in the Utei langntfe. Twa iroide In tOtl *n aged adjeetirelir (in-
oiBtnloally, b; appoiltiOD?): 9&ibtKtl (RT., twice; and AV. lii. 44. 1,
in mannaciipts], and aatyatStl (BT., once: toc).

b. The -word* in tftt (appuently made • by abtitevlatloD Ilom tKtl)
occQi la cnlj one ot two oaae-fonuB; the; weie all mentioned abOTe (383k. 2).

1289. ?tva. With this suffix aie made neutet nouns,
of the same value as the feminines in ^ ta (above, 1287).

a. The nenter abstracts In tva aie Id tbe older langtiage con-
siderably more conunon than the femiuinei In ts, althongb them-
aelTCB ateo not verj numerons- The accent is without exception on
the snfBx.

b. Examples (from tlie older language) are: amptatri immortality,
devatv4 divinity, BnbhagaMtgood-forlun; fthaiiiuttaraitv'& itruggk for
precedencg, <faoitv& purity, pa,titvithtt»b<mdihip,Uaaj)itv& energy, dSr-
gta^Titv& long life, 9atmtT& enmity, bbrStrtri brotherhood, vpfatvi
virility, B&tmatT& aoulfuineat, magliavBttvA liberality, nlk^OEtvk eorcery.
In anlgftatri and •prajBatv& there it a lengthening of a final eyl-
lable of the piimitlTe; and la BftupnOUtri (AT., once] this appears to
be accompanied b; ialclal Trddhi (aftubbagatvi is doabttess from s&^
bhaga, not eabbiga); and In tbeie and pra^anaatv& there la an appa-
Tent*in»eitlon of e, In aadbanltvi (RT.), vaaaUTaritv& (TS.), cohl-
•qXtvk (TB.), there ia Bhortening of Anal feminine 1 before the anfOx. Of
pecDllai formation are astitTa actuality and aahatra tiiiion. The apparent
feminine datlTsa yiitbatvS7&i (nd ga^atrKyU (ES.) are donbtleu Uee

0. Besides the nsual gqtinral reieraiana tn eamyaktra, sayoktra,
we hare external combination In aamlttra (-IdbO and pQrvav&ttva
(-rah-).

d. In l|itatT&tfi (ET., once) ineiUdneie, and pUTU^atv&tft (RV.,
twice) humatt quality, appears to be a eomblnatlon of the two eqalralent
BufOxes tva and tS.

e. Tbe T of tra is to be read In Teda ai a only once (r^9aatxL&).
1840. (^ trana. The derivativea made with this aufSx are,

like those in tra, nenter abstracts. They occnr almost onlj in BV.,
and, except in a single instance (mar^atrani), have beside them
equivalent derivatives in tva. The accent ie on the final, and the
tva is never resolved into tna.

ioy Google

1S40— ] XVO. Seoondakt I^uvATiON. 47S

a. The ^mit'ne: Itavitvank, jKnltvani, paUtTOoi (■!«> }B.)>
martyatTaii&, mataltvnnA, TaauWMi&, vj^tnaA, aakbitrtati.

1S41, A few anfltxes mftke no ckaagv in the ohanetar is part
of speech of the primhire to which Uhj an added, but either an
merely format appendages, leaving the valM of the word what it wai
beA>re, or nake a change of degree, or intiodaoe some otfaer modt
fieadoD of meantng.-

1242. The sufGxeB of comparison and oidioa] suffixes
have for the most patt been treated abetnl^, and need only
a reference hete.

a. rT^ tara aad rjtj tama are the usual secondary sufKsea of
adjective comparisoD: respecting their oae as each, see above, 471-473-
respeotiug the use of tama as ordinal etc. suffix, see 487-8; re«pee>
ing that of their accnsativee as adverbial snfSxes to prepositioni
etc., see lllle.

b. In vrtrat&ra and purut&ina (RV.) the kcbdi ii tnomiJow;
in mf4^7&ttama, It 1« drawn rorwud to the Dual of the participle, u
often in composition (ISOO); ^a^vatttun^ (BT.) hu the oii]|d«1 Msoent;
aaibvataaratami ((B.) 1« an ordinal; dlvStara (BT., once: an erroil)
is an ordinary adjactivo, of the day; anrabbfgtama and tav{;(ajiu inaert
a a; bKKitaF& and kitOltari aio probably vrddhl-deriTatiYB* in a. In
vatBatarA (f. -rij wemUing, a^vatari muU, and dtaenuffai^ cow iomf
her milk, the application of the Butfli U pecollar aad obacnw; bo alio in
rathaditu'&, name of a certain taman.

a. ^ ra and ^ ma, like tara aad tami^ have a comparative and
BUperlatiTfl value; and the latter of them forms otdlnala: see above,
474.487.

d. ei tha, like tama and ma, forms ordinals from a few Dime-
ralg: see 4870; also (with fem. Id -thf) from tati, kat^ yati, IH:
thus tatith4 lo-aumtf-tth etc

e. Apparently by ralie analogy with tatlthii etc. (aljove, d), tie
qnad-ordlnala tttvatltaia, yivaHtha, bahuUtha are made, as If with i
autfli tltha (alBo taHtitha, lalo, for katith*); and, it le aald, from other
words moaning a ttambm- or eoUeelion, ai ga^a, pnga, saihghai bot hone
in oh ate qnotaMe.

1348. Of diminntive anffir^s there are none in Sanskrit with
clearly developed meaning and use. The oooasional employment of
ka, in a somewhat indistinct way, to make dimrnuUvea, baa been
noticed above (ISSS).

1844. Of the ordinary adjective-making suffixes, given above,
some occasionally make adjectives from adjectives, wtth slight or
imperceptible modification of value. The only one used to any con-
siderable extent in this way is ka: as to which, see IfiSa.

D,a,i,ze..,Gooylc

479 Steub in tftra, t&ma, tha, taya, tk, no, tana etc. [ — 1246

. 184fi. A few raffizes an used to m&ke derwatiTeii fi«iii certain
limited and special claMee of words, aa nnmenlB -and particles. Thus:

a. tJH taya makes a few adJeotiTCs meuiing of to many divi'
tiom or kinds (naed io the ueuCer aa oollectiTes), from numarals:
thus, ^kataya IMS.j, dvitaya, tiitaya, oitn^tay* (AV.), (atta^a [KB.:
with extenial combiuation), Baptfctaya (^B.)i aftAtaya (AB.), d&^tar*
(RV.j, bahdUya [T3.|- Tbeir fem^ is in -yl

b. rU tya makes a claai of adjeotires from partloles: e. g. nltya
otcti, niftya foreign, ain^tTa companioa, etc. Aa the examples show,
the accent of the primitive is retained. The fem. is in -tyS.

o. Tbe other quotable examples ue: &patya, ftviq^ya, a&Dntya,
antaa^a, anyataatya-, tataatya, kataetya, atratya, tatratya, ya-
tratya. kutiatya, ihatya, upatya, adhitya, pr&tastytt, dak^jttya
(instep of which, the legnlu form, li genertll; faund dftk^l^ftlya, appa-
lently a further T^dhi-deriv>tiia from It: u if helonging to the loutWn-
art), *nd p&^o&ttya and p&arastya (ot > slmlUi chiracter: these three
Iwt are said by the grammarians to be accented on the llaal, at ta proper
for TT^dbi-dotiTatiTesjj apty& and ltpty& perhaps contain the lame auffli.
In antaetya and prfttaatya la seen external eomblnatloD.

d. The y of tya Is in RY. aliriya to be read as 1 after a haarr
syllable.

e. fj ta fonoB ekat&, dvit&, and trlt&, also mubartd moment,
and apparentlf ftratA wtll (for water).

f. Whh ^ na are made purC^ anci«n(, vi^a3}» vatiou*,' and
perhaps BamKii& likt.

g. With H^ taUa or (in a few cases] ^ tna are made adjectives
trom adverbs, nearly always of time: e. g. pratnft ancient, nlitana
or ndtna prtient, san&t&na or aan&tna laiting, divStana of t/m day,
^v&atana of lomorrote, byaetana of yttterday. The accent is various.
The feminine is in ni.

h. The other quotable examples are: aKTstana, adyatana, adhu-
DfttAna, Idadttana, Idftniifataiia, etarhitana, oliraditaiia, tadflaiih-
tana, doffttana, pnr&taaa, prfiktaiia, pr&tBBt&n&, aadAtana, bB-
yaihtAna; from adTorbs of place, adliastana, arvShtana, aparitana,
kutaatana; — with tna, paraat&ttna. puraatfittna. A farther Tf^dlil-
deriTative, with equivalent meaning, n&iitana (cf. above, a), oecurs Iste.
In FB. la once fonnd trattana belonging to thee.

i, Basides the obvlons cases, of an assimilated final m before this
anfflx, we have external combination In pritast&na.

J. ^^ vat makes from particles of direction the feminine nonne
mentioned above (883 k. 1).

k. mz kat«. properly a noun In oomposition, is reckoned by tbe

ioy Google

IMB— ] XVIII. CoKPoamoK. 480

gTammftrians tu a mi&x, in atkafa, nlkAfa, prakato, vikata (BV.,
onca, TOC.)i and aadika^a [all aaid to be acceoted on the final).

1. A aufBx vana Is peilupi to be leeo In nlvan4, prava^; —
and Ua In ontar&la.

m. OecBBioDal deriTativeB made with the ordinary Baffiiea of
primary and secondary derivation from nnmeralB and particlBs have
been noted above: thne, lee ana (llKOn), tl (llBTh), tiat (llTSa],
u 111781), a(iaoei;, ka (laaao), iima(lSa4o), maya(1886a), TWt
(laSSaJ.

CHAPTEK XVm.

FORBIATION OF COMPOUND STEMS.

1246. Thb frequent combination of declinable stems
with one another to form oompoimdB which then aie tieated
as if simple, in respect to acoent, inflection, and oonatruo-
tion, is a conspicuous feature of the language, from its
earliest period.

a. There la, however, a marked difference 'between the earlier
and the later language as regards the length and intrieacy of the
comblnaUoaa allowed. In Teda and Bithmana, it ia quite rare that
more than two sterna are compoanded together — except that to some
much nsed and famtliar compound, as to an integral word, a ftartber
element is sometimes added. Bnt the later the period, and, espeoiallj,
the more elaborate the stjle, the more a emnbrona and dlffieolt aggm-
gate of elements, abnegating the advantages of an Inflective langaage,
takes the place of the due syntactical nnlon of formed words into

1247. Sanskrit compounds fall into three principal
classes :

I. a. Copulative or aggi^ative compounds, of which
the members are syntically coordinate: a joining t<^ethet
into one of words which in an uncompounded condition
would be connected by the conjunction <md (rarely or).

Digitizecy Google

b. Eaunplu ue: {ndrftv&m^Iu Indra and ForutM, Bat;^bift4
truih and faitthood, Iq^t&kft&iD dotu atid undone, daTaguidharvaiaft-
naforagaxftkfaBfts godt and Oaadharvat and nMn ortij serpent* and

«. The memlwrt of msh ■ Bomponnd miy obTtouIy be of eny nom-
bw, two 01 moie than two. No compowtd of eny othet cUu our oontiin
noia th*n two memben — of which, howeiu, aithoi oi both may be muh
poond, ot deoompowid (below, 1348).

U. d. Deteiminative eomponnds, of which theformei
member is syDtaotioally dependent on the latter, aa ita
deteimisiDg ot qualifying adjunct: being eithei, 1. a noun
(oi pionoun) limitit^ it iu a case-ielation, or, 2. an adjeotire
ot adverb deeciibing it. And, according a« it U the one
01 the other, are to be distinguished the two sub-classea:

A. Dependent compounds; and B. Descriptive com-
pounds. Their difference is not an absolute one.

e. Examples are: of dependent eomponnda, amitraseni army of
enemies, pKdodaka leater for the /eel, arnrda life-giving, bABtc^fta
made uriih the handi; of deBcrlptive eooipODDde, mahavfl jfreal sage, prlya-
■aklil dear friend, amitra enemy, sAkpta icell done.

r. These two claaacB are of primary valae; tbey have undergone
no nnlfThig modification in the prooess of oonposltioo; their charac-
ter as parts of speeoh is determined b; their &ial memt>er, and they
are capable of being resolTed into equivalent phrssea bj giving the
proper independent form and formal means of conaeotion to each
member. That is not the case with the remaining class, which aecor-
dingly is more fmidamentaily distinct from them than they are from
one another.

in. g. Secondary adjective compounds, the value
of which ia not given by a simple resolution into their
component parts, but which, though having as final member
a noun, are themselves adjectives. These, again, are of two
anb-elasses: A. Possessive compounds, which are noun-
oompounds of the preceding diass, with the idea of potsess-
mg added, turning them from nouns into adjectives ;

B. Compounds in which the second member is a noon syn-
tactically dependent on the first: namely, 1. Prepositional
compounds, of a governing pieposition and following noun ;

WkltD*T, 0niiiiuT. a. ed. 31

L.,j,i,._..,LiOOglc

1S47— ] XVIII. COMPOflmON. 4S2

2. Participial compounds (only Vedic), of a pteBent pu-
tioiple aad its following object.

h> The anb-claii B> la compuitlTsly small, and Ita lerond dMafoo
(pirdctplal eomponnda] li httdly met with aven fn the \\ttt Vsdle.

1. Esamplea are: vtraaena pottettttig a hero-army, prsjikSmft
haomg dmire of progeny, tlgiii&9Tflg« iharphomad, hArltoorAj waaring
'ffrttn gmriandi; atlinfttT& excaiiive; y&ray4ddveqft8 driving meag

j. The adjective 'Ompoandg aie, like simple adjectlres, liable Id be
used, especliUr In the neater, aa abstract and collefttve nonna, and in the
acensatlTS as adTetba; and out of these ases haxe grown appaient speHal
classes of compounds, teckoned and namad *• anch Tiy Iba Hlodn gram-
marians. The relatton of the olaselfleatlon glisn above to that present«d in
the native gtammai, and widely adopted from the latter b; tba Earopesn
gramman, will be made olear aa we go on to treat the classes In detail.

1248. A 4H>iDpound may, like a simple woid, become a
member in anothet compound, and this in yet another —
and 8o on, without definite limit. The analysis of any
compound, of whatever length (unless it be a oopulatiTe),
must be made by a succession of bisections.

a. Thus, the dependent oomponnd pflrr^utmsktiiK dont in a preeioia
exiltence ti flrat dlvjalbla Into kfi« and the desrripllTe pSrT^Jnjtnuul,
then this into ita elemeiitg ; the dependeat BaknlanItiqaBtnttattv4J&»
knmeing ilu eatenet of all hooki of htkatior has flrst the root-stem j&a
(fttr VjfiB) knowmg separated ^m the rest, which la again dependent; then
this is divided Into tattra Mttnce and the remainder, whlrh Is descriptive;
this, again, divides Into sakftla aU and nttlfRatra hookt of hahaoior, of
whioh the Islter Is a. dependent compound and the fonner a possessive (u
and kalS havmg it» parU tog*lher).

1249. a. The final of a stem is combined with the initial
of another stem in composition according to the general
rules for external combination: they have been given, with
their exceptions, in chap. III.,' abore.

b. If a stem has a distinction of strong and weak forms,
it r^ularly enters into composition as prior member in its
weak form; or, if it has a triple distinction (311), in its
middle form.

Digitizecy Google

4S3 FoBu OF Pbiob Hrubbb o? Compound. [— tS50

o. That is, eBpecUIty, BtemB to p or or, at or ant, ro ot kfio, etc.,
flbow in composition the forms tn Pi at, ko, eto.;>while those in an
and in. ueiuilly (ezceplioos sometimeB occnr, is TTfajjaqri, v^kij.-
vaai) lose theii final a, and are oombined as if a and 1 were tlieir
proper finals.

d. At in seeoDduT derlT&tlon (1S03 d), to t\u> ii pHoi membtt of
a eomponnd, t item Mmetlinei atiortens iti llnU long TOvel (nniilly I, rare-
ly ft): thai. In v., roduiprd, p^rtblvlqtliit, prthlvlf&d, dhirapilts,
dbftravftU; in B., ifrthlvl-ds, •bhiga, -loU, saraavaUk^a, B«ni-
nigrimaoydd ; in 8., garbhl^prftyafoltta, aSmldhsniprUfa, vaa-
aUvarlpaTihara^a, ek&da^iniUilga, prapbarvldft, dsTatalakqai^,
dftTBtapradtaSnatTa; Ut«r, devaUnandana, lakfmivardliftna, ka-
mftridatta, l^falEaaita, tW.

a. Oceulonallf, * (tern li aged u prior member of a componad which
doM aot appear, or not la that form, ai an independent word; aiainplea
• are mahft greiU (apparently aled Independently In V. in aecoaatlie), tnvl
miyhij/ (v.), dvi two.

t. Not Infrequently, the final member ef a compoand aainmea a Epecial
form: see below, ISltti

1260. But a oaee-fonb In the prior member of a eomponnd is by
no meana rare, from the earliest period of the laognage. Thus:

a. Qaite often, an aooaiatlTB, especially before a root-item, or a derir-
atl*e in a of eqiilTalent meaning : for example, pataifagA going by Jiight,
dhaiiadija7& tainnmg tceallh, abhayaitikaT& caiuing abitnee of danger,
■pn^^tabbaxk bringing proiptriiy, vftoamIfibluy& tnciting the voice; but
alio lometimea before words ot other fonn, aa &qramlft' horit-detirirtg,
qnbhaitiy^Taii going in iplendor, aabhSgaiIilt4ra9a making Happy,
bhayadikartr eauter of fear. In a few cases, by analogy with ibeae, a
word recelTu ati accnaatlTe form to whlcb It baa no right: tbne, hfdaifaaAni,
maksiiihitaiiift, Taatuiidbara, fttmambharl*

b. Mneb more rarely, an Inatmmental: fbr example, gtrftvfdli inerea*-
mg by prai$e, Vftoistena lieaiing by incantation, kritTftmasha gladly
bttlowing, bbftsiketu bright teith tight, Tidroan^paa active with wi$dom.

o. In a lery few Initanrei, a dative: thai, nar«fth& tervmg a.man,
aamillltl errand to u$, and perbape Uyedba and majiovtdb.

d. Not apldom, a loeatiTe; and this also especially with a root-item or
a-derlTatire : for example, agreg& going at the heaJ, divik^t dwelling
in the iky, vane; Ah prmailing in the teood, afig«fth& exiiting in the
limbe, proftbegay& lyinff on a touch, ant^kara active with Ota Mdma,
divloara moving in the siy; Iriqatm having enemiee far renunred,
oomn&spl near in favor, mideraKba hotting in rxeUement, yudbiftbira
_/Erm ia battle, antevfisln dwelling near; apauj& bom in the.watera,
hftsTAa hurling at hearte.

a. Lsait often, a genltWe: thai, rlyjtfksma deeirout of uiealth.

ioy Google

I960—] X7I1I. CoKFOsmoN. 434

KkMyftvid iMMoing no one. Bat the oldn lugnasa hu > f tw exwplet
of tha putting tog*tlMr of * g«iiltlTa with iti govenilDg noDn, Meh membei
of the xbrnMnatlaB keeping Iti own Mceot: lee below, 1987 d.

f, AbUtlTB forms (te te be Men In l>KUtk&nt vioUnce and bttUt-
kfta, ind perhftpi In parStprlya. And ■ ttem In j sometime* »ppem tn a
eopolitlTe eonpoand In iti nomlMitlTe form; thu, plttpnb4ii^atAer oarf
ton, hOtlpoUr&a U« incekT and purt/Ur. Adtoots "nt imatJitr U >
fuied phnaa, of namlnaUTe and obUitM eaaa.

K. Id a leiT few woidt, plorel metnlDg it algnUled by plnral form;
thiu, apBQji etc. (In derivation, also, apen li need ai a ttem), hftoria^
n^fi^pra^str* eondu^mg m»n, mjulurai ettiuing paint, (and 4n*I)
banBkampa treoAlmg of lie Uco jam.

li. Hnoh more often, of wotdi hiTlng |endet-fomiB, the feminine li
need Id eompoiitlon, wben tbe diiUnetlTO famtnloe aente li to be' eonveyed:
e. g. goplnltbft matUr of tkt AephtrdtMM, dIMpUtra ton of a famait
iltm; nqnldT^ gatatU-eged, pra^tlpTa^TUift vttttl for eonMtnUtd '

18B1. The Mcent of compoandi ii veiy Tsriotu, and liable to
noDBidenibla Irregnlarit; even wltUn the Umite of the eame fonnatloB;
and it muBt be left to be pointed out in detail below. All poMlble
Taiietiee are fonnd to ooonr. Tbtu:

a. Each mambei of the eomponnd letaln) it* own aepuat* a«aent. Thl»
U the moit anomaloot and iDheqnent method. It appear* In oertaln Tedlc
eopnlatlTe oompoand* chiefly compoaed of the name* of divlnltiea (*»-eallad
deratE-dvandTaa : 1S661T.), and in a email Dnmher of aggregiUoBi
partly oentaloiug a geaitlTe oaae-form a* prior m'embei (1S67 d).

b. The aoeent of the oomponnd 1* tiiat of It* prior member. Thii !■
eepactally the eate la the greit oUbs of p(i**e*tl*e eompoanda; bnt alM In
determlnatfTM haring the participle in ta 01 na aa final member, In thoae
baglDaing with the aegitlTa a or an, and In other le** onmetona and Im-
portant ela*M*.

0> Tbe accent of the oomponnd 1* that of the final member. ThI* 1* not
on *o large 1 icale the case u the preceding; bnt It U neiertheleea qnlte
oomm^, being fondd In many eomponndi hailng a verbal uonu or ad}eeU*e
ae floal member. In componod* beglnntng with the numeral* dvl and tri
or the pTefli.et ra and dns, and elsewhere In not intteqaent eicepdoni.

d. Tbe oomponnd take* an aeoent of Iti own, lodepeadeot of that ot
eilber ot Ite oenttltaenl*, on it* final sylUble [not alwayi, ot eonne, to be
diitihgolihcd from the preceding caie). ThI* method ii larfely followed:
eepedelly, by th* regular copnlatlTea, and by the great ma** of dependent
and deaortptire noan-componndi, by moat poaieialres beginning with th*
negatlTe.preBi; and by othen.

•. Tbe cemponnd haa an accent which it altered Crom that of one of
It* memlMr*. Tbii i* eTsrywhare an exceptional and aporadically occoning

ioy Google

4SC> COPULATIVV COMPOOHDB. [ — IS68

cue, uid the iDituiMi of IV noted bolov Aoder e«eb fomutlon, do not
leqnlie to be iMRinbltd here. Examplea ue: medh&aSti (mAdha), U-
Umii9ra (tila), kbidltiutB (kMdf). y&widdveQM (yST&fant);
qakadlidma (dh&iii&), amfte (mrti). Bavira ivJxk), tavlgrivR
(gtivi), A few voidi — M viqva, 'plirva, uid tometimM B&rra — take
uBoally t changed accent aa prloi mcmbeia o( oempanudi.

I. Copulative Compounda.
13BZ; Two ot more Douns — much teaa often adjectives,
and, in an instance ot two, adverbs — having a coordinate
oonBtruction, as if connected bjr a conjunction, usuallf and,
are sometimes combined into compounds.

a. This is the dug to whicli the Blodn grammariaos give the
name of dTandva pair, MapU; a drmdva of adjectives, however, ii
not reoogDJMd bj them.

b. Oompoundi In which the relation of the two memben ia alteinatlTe
inat«ad of eopnlatlTe, thongh only exceptional, Me not Tery rarer eiamplea
are nytinKdhika tUfeetite or rtdunAmt, JayaparUaya victory or dt/tat,
krltotpanna ptirokated or on hand, kft^fhalo^taaaiiia lik* a log or
clod, pakf bnncatB the eondilion of baing bird or btatt, trUkfadvlfifa
nttmbtring tw*nfy or thirtj/, oaU)fpa&oak|tTaa fovr or fioe iimea,
dvyekSntara different by one or tao. A leaa marked modlfloatlon of the
eopnlatlTe Idea la leen in such initancas as prlyaaatya agreeable ihough
true, prkrthitadurlablia eought after but hard to obtain; or In ^rftnta-
gata arrived aeary. ,

1268. The noun-copulatives fall, as regards their in-
flectire form, into two classes:

1. a. The compound has the gender and declension of
its final member, and is in number a dual ot a plural,
according to its logical value, as denoting two or more than
two individual things.

b. Examples are: prfi^panid inepiration and expiration, vrihl-
yavKA rie* and parley, fkrimi verte and ehant, kapotolUcl6 dove
pad otel, oandrKdity&a moon and eun, hastyafrftu the elephant and
horM, a)&viyaa goat* and etieep, davftBorjEs the goda and demons,
atharvSllglT&aas the Aikarvant and Angiratet, aambadhatande^UI
oKcietie* and fatigue*, vidyKkarmii^ knoteledge and action, hastyafvia
elephant* and hor*ee; of more tbui two membere (do examples quotable
, from the older laQgnage), ^anrjUanabhogKa lying, tiUing, and etOinf,
brfthma^akfatrlyavlttadrSa'a^ra^i^r^aAiiilr^a, Vai^a, and fSdra,

Digil.zecy Google

1SS&— ] XVIII. Co^osiTioH. 4S6

rogaqokaptUltftpabEUldliUMTyBsaiiSoi ditaate, pain, grief, eoptteUy,
and mitforlunt.

2. o. The oompoimd, without reg&rd to the number de-
noted, 01 to the gendeL of its constituents, becomes a neutei
siogul&r collective.

d. Exftmplea ar«; if(apllrt&in mhat it offtrtd and balowed, mho-
rStr&m a day and night, k^tJUklt&in Vie don» and undone, bh&tAbbAV
y4in poff and future, ke9aqmaqru hair and heard, of uUiiTaiiaspRd
plante and Ireee, o^drKt&rak&m moon and gtara, uhlnftkulaia enaie
and ichneumon, flrogrlvam head and neck, yukamnkfUctunfttfcn^am
liee, Jliet, and hug*.

1264. a. That a item In f as prloi member Mmetlmes takea iU
iiomlnatlTe totm, in K, wu noticed abore, ISCOf.

b. A stem ae ttnal member la aometimeB changed to an a-fonn lo nuke
a nenter collective: tbua, ohattropftnftham an umbrella and a ehoe.

o. The grammuiaDa give riilei aa to tbe oidai of the elementa com'
poalng a capnUtiTe camponnd: thns, that a mora Important, a briefer, a
vowel-lnltial member ahaii^ itand first; and that one ending in a ahonld
be pUced iMt. VIolationa ol them all, however, are not Infieqnent.

12KB. Id the oldest langoBge (BV.), copulative oomponnda anch
as appear later are quite rare, tbe ctasa being cbieflr represented by
dnal combinatioDS of the asmeH of divinitiOB aod other personages,
and of personified natural objects.

a. In these combinatloiu, each name has regnUrly and usnally
the dual form, and its own accent; but, In the verr rare Instances
lonly three rficcurrenoes oat of more than three hundred] in which
other cases than the nom.-acc.-voc- are formed, the final member ODly
is inflected.

b. Examples are: indTBs6inS, indrSvf^n, {ndrftbthaap&ti, agnl-
fdmftn, tuTT^fty&dO. djlvspptbivl, afisSii&kt& (and, with inter-
vonin^ trorda, nUtft . . . uqaa&), sdryftmaaft. Tbe onl; picial U Indrft-
marutaa (voc). The caaat of other than nominstiie form are mltii-
V^nijiSbhTSm and mltriivAru^aros (also mitr&yor v&ru^ayo^), and
{ndrireinu^aTOB (each once only).

0. From dfavSpftbivl ia made the very peculiar genitive divftap^
thlvyoa (4 times: AY. baa dyaTaprthivibhram and d7llT&prUilv3r6s).

d. Id one compound, parj^yavatfi, the firat member (RV., ODca)
does not have the dual endlsg along vilifa the doable >coent (Indranft-
satyA, voc, ia doubtful aa to sBCent). lu aeveral, the doable awenl li
vantlng, irhlle yet the double dedgnalion of number Is preaeut: thus,
Indzapfif^As (beside {ndiSpQf&i^S), eomSpii^bhykm (somKpQfa^a
occuiB only aa vec.), vKtSparjanyi, BQi7Soandraiu4s&, and IndrlgDl .
(with indr&gnfbbyim and Indrlignyos): somamdrSa la accented only

Digmzec^yGoOylc

487 COPUI^TIVE COUPOtTHDB. [—1267

io ^. And In one, tadxKviyi, fonn snil acseot ue both uujidant with
the Uiiget of tlie later Iiagnage.

e. Of otiiei eepolttlTts, like thoae nude later, the BY. hu the plnial
' l^ftv&yae, the dnale rkakmA, att^KnrtA, a&qanKna^iuiA; &I*o the nen-
tet colleottfa ift&pQrt&o), >nd the inbittntliely oied nent'er of s eopn-
■■tive adjective, nSAlohltitm. Fnithei, the neatei pluiale Aborfttrujl
ni/etMtmtra, and nfc-thjtrV^ pfailts and tongt, of which the final member*
M independent words are not neater. No one of the^e words hae more thin
a ringle oocutrence.

1266. In the Uter Vedio (AYj, the nasge ia UDob more nearly
accordant with that of the oloeaical language, aaye that the class of
neoteT Bingalai oollec^ves Is almoat wanting.

a. The words with doable dnal form are only a tmitl mlnarlt]r (a
qtiHter, Initead of three qnartera, m In BV.); and half of them have only
* iingle accent, on the flual : Uiut, beiidei those in BV., bhavKradrftA,
btutTS^arvfiu; acmftviffa, too., U of anomalons form. The whole num-
ber of oopulstiTee Is more than doable that In BV,

b. The onl; proper neuter ooUeMlTes, composed of two nouns, are
beqafmafrd hair and htard, IfiJanAbhral^aikAin Mleg and ointment, and
ka^tpap^arhai^Am mat and piltow, anlfled because of the ilitual unit;
of the two objects spewed. Neater ilngnlars, used in a ilmilsr oolleeUm
way, of adJectlTB compounds, are (besides thoae In BV,): b|t&k)^t&m tehat
u done and undone (Instead of viitat ia dona and what ia andone), oittS-
kftt&m thought and deeire, bhadrapBp&m good and evil, bhfitabhaTy&m
paat and futMra.

1267. Copu]a,tive compounds composed of adjectives
which letain their adjective ohaiaotei aie made in the Bame
mannei, but aie ia comparisoa rate,

a. Examples are: quklaki^na light and dark, BthalaJ&ndaka f«r-
reatrial and aquatic, dftntarUatasftnvar^a of ivory and liher and gold
nsed distribntively i and vfttaplna round and plump, 9SntSiitib:flla
tranquil and propitiout, hffltaaTagraJoMiia wearing freah gartanda and
frta from dual, nifekfidl^maQAiiaiita beginning teith conception and
ending with burial, used cumulatiTeiy; n8 tlqltofi^a not over cold or
hot, used alteraatively ; kfa^adfft^iiaqta aeen for a moment and then
loat, dntitopaBthlta at hand aa toon aa thought of, in more pregnant

b. In the Veda, .the' only eiampUs noted are the cnmalatlTe nUa-
lohit& and l4{ftp&rt& etc, used in the neat, sing, as eolleatiTes (as point-
ed oat aboie), with tfimradlLanirik dark tatong; and the distributive
dakQl^a(MVT& right and left, aaptaioS^t^mi teventh and eighth, and
bliadrapftp4 ^ood and bad [betide the oerrespondiug nent. collecUie).
Sneh combinatioQB as satyKn^ti truth and fdUekood, priyfipriyifl ^ngt

ioy Google

ISB7— ] XVUI. Coueosmoa. 48S

agrMobh and ditagrteable, irhen ««di oMBpoiuait it used nbiUntiroIr, aie,
of conrM, not to bs leputted from the oidlnaiy iioaii-«oBipoB»di.

O. A apKltl cua fi th«t of tke oompoiuid tdJantlTu of diractlen; u
attorttpOrvs mri^iut, prBgdakflfA tmiHt-tait, ■*"^t' 7*1*^7**"^
i««lA-iM*<, 4tc.'. coopua 1S91 b.

ISU. In acoentuAted texts, Ae copnlatlve aompotiBds tutve
nnlfonalf the umnt (acnto) on the fiiul of the stem.

a. EseeptlDni ue » cue or two In AT., Theie donbtleai the Tsading
la f«li«: thai, vfttftpftrjftnyft (onoe: tealde -nyiyos), dvmmana^fta
(oDii^: (B. •ari.), brahmwijftiijftbfarim (>la« VS.), foithet, vfiko-
pavskyk (gB.), a9aiift7<tplp««e (9B.).

1S60. An aiimple or two an met irltli of idTeiMal copnlaHrei:
thaa, Ahardlvl dag by day, aSjr&mprKtar at tvming and in tSamermng.
they haTe the areent of their prior membei. Later oecai alao bU)j«atur,
pmtrxcdnlqdvB. pnttyacudak.

laeo. Bepeated voids. la all agM of the bmgugv, nowu
and pronouns and adjecttTee and partieles are notinfreqnentl; repeated,
to give an intensive, or & distributiTe, or a rspetitionU meutiag.

a. Thoefh Aese us not property oopektlTe eompDnnds, thefa la . no
better oonneetlon Id whloh to notlM them thu) here. They are, ae Ota
oldsT lanfaage ahowa, a sort of eompovnd, of which tlia prior member haa
Its own Independent aoeent, and the other la wlthoDt accent: hence they
are moat asltably and propsrty written (as In Hie Tedlc pAda-taita) aa
mmponnda. Thna: Jaby ^flih vAraih-varam *^ o/tAmn aatA ftsat man;
div^dlTe or drthvi-dyavl J)rom day to day; ifigRd-ofigBl 16iimo-loin-
na^ pirravi-paTva^l ^or» efary limb, frata may hair, in each joint;
pr&-pra roJfiApatirb tlra make the matter of the taerifice live on and on;
bhlliyo-btLilTa^ <fvify-^v»i^ fWfftm' and fitrtho', tomorrmD and again to-
morrote; ikayU-'kaTK Kith in each caee one; vayUi-varain our eery

b. Exceptional and rare uses are thoie of a pergonal vetb-form ra^
peated: thiu,' pibft-plba (RV.), y&jasva-rnjaava (^B.), v6da-veda
(? QB.); — and ot two words repeated: thoa, yjvad vft-ySvad wB (QB,),
yatatti6 vK-yatame vK (QB.).

0. Id ■ tew InitanoM, a word la found uaed twice In anoeeaalon with-
out that loaa of accent the second tUse whloh makes the repeUtloD a ilr-
teal compoBlte: tiius, nti a6 (BT.), a&di akm (AV.), Ihi Iki (AT.),
^ndyft- "n^ft (fB.), atahi atohi (BT., ace. to pada-teit).

d. The claaa of combination* hers dsacribed la called by the natlie
giammariaoa Smre^ita added untoO).

1991. Finally may be noticed Id passing tbe compoand naDsrsls,
Akadaqa 11, dTltwl&qatl Si, trifate 103, ektalfMahBarm. lOOi, and
■0 on (476 fl.}, aa a apedal and primltlTe claaa of oopnIstlTes. They are
aceentad on the prior member.

Dijiiiieo, Google

489 Dbtsrhinatftb Cohpounds. [—1804

II. Determinattv* Compoandt.

1262. A noun or adjective is often combined into a
oompound with a preoediag^eteimiiung oi qualifying word
— a nomif or adjective, or adretb. Such a compound is
conveniently called deteiminative.

1288. This is the class of compounds which is of most
geneial and frequent occiAence in all biancfaes of Indo-
European language. Its two principal divisions have bem
already pointed out: thus, A. Dependent compounds, in
which the prior member is a substantive word (noun or pro-
noun or substantively used adjective), standing to the other
member in the relation of a case dependent on it; and
B. Descriptive compounds, in which the prior member is
an adjective, or other word having the value of an adject-
ive, qualif^g a'noun; or else an adverb or its equivalent,
qualifying an adjective. Each of these divisions then falls
into two sub-divisions, according as the final member, and
therefore the whole compound, is a noun or an adjective.

a. The whole class of detennlnatiTeB is called b; the Hindu
gmnmsrlaiui tatpurofa (the term Is a ipecimen of the class, mesa-
Ing Aw nun); aod the second divisioii, the deuripdves, hu tiie
special name of kannadhKro^a (of obscure application: ike literal
senw is something like o^fioa-hearim/). After their evniple, thg two
divisions are in finropean usage widely known by these two names
reqteetiTsly-

A. Dependant Compounds.
1264, Dependent Nouo-compounds. In this di-
vision, the oase-relation of the prior member to the othe^
may be 'of any kind; but, in accordance with the usual re-
lations of one noun to another, it is oftenest genitive, and
least often accusative.

* R. Eumplei &re: of genitive laUtlon, devasentt army of godt,
yamadntA Yama't miMotger, JlvaloUi M« u)orld of iht living, indra-

L.,j,i,....,LiOOgle

1S64— } XVIU. GoxpoeiTiON. 490

dhanus Jndra't bom, bralunagavi the Brahman't eow, vlfaglrf poivM-
mount, mitralftbha acquitition of fritndt, mOrfcliaf&Uiiil kttndradi oj
fooU, viraBenaauta Vtraiena't ton, riyeadra chit/ 0/ kuigt, amut-
putr&B our totu, tadvaoas Am toorA- — of d&tlTe, pAdodak« teaUr for
tht feet, mttaaaloaya aceumulaiion for a month; — ot initraiaeDUl, U-
IIUU&dr97ft lihenta with telf, dhS&yftrtha wetUtk acquired by graiit,
dhamutpatnl Jcw/uJ qiOMs, pltacbandhA jiafortMi/ r«Ja(u»u — of BbUtin,
apaara^sambliava deeeenf from a nymph, zandviyogAeepanitiimfrem
me, O&orabhaya fear of a (Aia/;<— of locative, J«]akrt4S tport in the
water, grSmavSaa abotle in iJu rillage, pumQAnrta ttntruth about a aioa;
— of accuiitlTa, oagaragamana goin^ to the eiiy.

12eB. Dependent AdjeotiTe-oompounda. la this
divisioD, only a very small proportion of the compoundj
have an ordinaiy adjective as final member; but uaually a
participle, or a deiivative of agency with the value of a
participle. The prior member stands in any case-relation
which is possible in the independent oonstiuctioa of such
words.

a. Eismples are: of locatiie leUtion, ath&Upabva cooktd ui a p«t,
aqvakovlda knowing in horset, vaya^aama alike in age, Tadhlffhlra
eleadfaet in battle, taiili9ablira beautiful in body; — of iDitnunental,
mfttrsadrfa liko hi* mother; — of dative, gobita good for oattla; — of
ablatliB, bhavadanya other tha/i you, garbhfiftama eighth firom hirtk,
df^^tKrm other thanvitibleil. e. incitible); — of genltlTe, bharatafTOft'^
beet of the Sharaiai, dvljottama fortmoet of Brahman* : — wltb paitidp-
ial Toida, in icenaaClye TeUtioD, vedavid Veda-knowiag, ■^pwMi't food-
eating, tanDplina body-protecting, naty avJLdfn truih-tpealdng, pattragata
committed to paper (lit. gone to a leaf); — in initruDieutal, madbapd
clear^ing toith honey, avafidikfta eetf-made, lodragnpta proUettd by
Indra, vldyUiiaa deterted by (I «. de*titut* of) hmnoledga i — ia loea-
ti«*, hrdayKvldb pierced in the heart, ftvt) taerijicing m due teaton,
divioara moving in the ehy;~ia iblatlTe, xSiyaM3S»i^\t. fallen fi'om
the kingdom, vrkablilta afraid of a teolf; — In dative, f ara^ftgata com*
for refuge.

1266. We take up now some of the principal groups of oomponnda
'falling under these two beads, in order to notice their specialities of

fonnaljon and use, their relative frequency, their aooentnati<Mi,-aDd so on.

1267. Compounds having as final member ordinary nouns [ench,
namely, as do uot disduotly exhibit the character of verbal nouns,
of action or agency) are quite common. They are regslarly and obd-
ally accented on the final syllable, without reference to theaocent'of
either constituent. Examples were given above |ise4sk).

Digil.zecy Google

491 Dbpendsht Cohpodnds. [—1270

B. A prtnslpil exception viti) regud to accent is p&tl matter, lord
(uid ita femlulDe p&tnl], compoundi with which u«iuUy tettio the ac«ent
at the prlei' member: thus, pc^japati, T&aapatl, itlthlpati, gApatl,
S^bApatni, etc. eto. (compu'e the *erb*l naani la tl, below, 1274), But
in > tav wotde p&tl lettlna iU own accent: thus', viQP&tl, rsyip&tl,
pB9i^4tl, vaanp&tni, etc. i tad tbe cnore general rule Is followed in
»pBar&pat{ and vrajapati (AT.), and naiSpati (VS.), citpatl (MS.j
BlBBwhete oitp&ti).

b. Other ezoeptiDDs are iporadio only : for example, Janar^aa, dava-
v&rmaiL, hlra^yat^Jaii, pptansh&va, Kodtadma and ^akadb^ma (bnt
dliOmA); TKoMteoa.

O. The appeannce of a eaie-form in aneb compound* ie rare: eiamplea
are dlwodSaa, v&oaate&a, noaftiljiqraTaB, aao&£rgtiofa, dor^bliAB
(tbe fbrae latt in poaseaaiTe application).

d. A number of eomponnda are accented on both membera : thna,
9&(Ap&ti, a&dae'p&ti, bfhaap&ti, vinaapitl, r&thaiipdtl, Jaspiti (Uao
j£apatl), nirS^iAaa, t&DQn&ptr. t&nnn&p&t (taiiA as independent word),
^Aoa^qfipa. And ^B. bae ■ long Hit of metron^mlu hiTing the anoma-
lona MoaDtoattoQ kftatalp^tra, g&rgiputra, etc.

1268. The compoundB haying an ordinaiy adjective as final mem-
ber are [ae already noticed) comparatively few.

' a. So far as can be gathered ^om the scanty examples occnrring in
the older lingoage, they retain the acceut of (he prior member: thna,
S&vii^tbiTa (AV gavifthira), tanftgubbra, m&deragbu, y^jfi&dbira,
aoioavlpra, tUiunlgra (but tila); but kf^^apaori ripening in eulti-
vafed toil.

1268. Tbe adjective dependent compounds having ae final mem-
ber the bare lOOt — or, if It end in a short vowel, generally with
an added t — are very nuinerouB in all periods of tbe language, aa
baa been already repeatedly noticed (thus, 888 f-h, 1147). They are
accented on the root.

a. Irr a very tew instances, the accent of words having apparently or
conjecturally thia origin le otherwise laid: thus, i^aatro, inarvig, Bvivfi,
praty&k^adpg, puraibdtal, o^adhl, tounlj, u^&dagb, vatn&pa, ibda.

b. Before a final root-stem appears not very seldom a caae-forDlj for
example, pstaihgii, glrSvfdli, dhiy^iir, akfi^ay&dnUi, h^dlapff,
dlvispf;, vanea&h, dlvl^d, aBige;tb£, brtBT&s, prtoutfir, apatiji.

o. The root-aleiD bse sometlmeB a middle at paaslve value: for ex-
ample, manoynj goked (j/oking themstlvet) by the will, hfdayfivldb
pierctd to the heart, nuuinja bom of Manu.

1270. Compounds made witb verbal derivatives in a, both of
aetioD and of agency, are nameroDs, and take the accent nsnally on
tbeir final syllable [as in the case of compoands with verbal prefiies:
1148 m].

itizecy Google

1870—] XVm. CoMPoeiTiOH. 492

k. Examplai are: haatagrftbh& hand-gratping, demruttU goi-
praiiing, iMvirftdA dtvouring th« offtring, hbxvKtMajKrii thaldof Ott
teorld, raKtyftbravA caliing ont't t4lf a vrfttya ; Kkfapftrijori fgSwn
at plag, Ta|&tkBr& utttranoe of vaf a(, gopofi protptri^ t» mM^

b. In a Tew Inatancea, the accent h (ti in oomponiidi vtdi DrdiniTT
■djeottvw: above, 1S06) that of the prior msmbei: thna, lOKtadvjibM,
latikarB, divicara (*D<t other more queitlonable vordt). And d6g]U
milking, yitldmg Is bo accented at final : thna, muUtTid&sh&, IcSnutdaglu.

O. Caae'formi are Mpeclallf frtqaent in tho piior memben of eomponndi
with adjactlre derivatlvei in n ■boi'lDg (cmjA-atrengthenlng of the mot:
thni, ft)i example, abh»radtkRr&, ytidhi]fagtuii&, dbMiadiJay&, porsifa.
d«T&, Tl^(unbliar4, dlTftk*i&, talpe^ftyik, diTlffambliA.

1S71. CompoQodB with verbal nouns sad adjectives in uia are
very DumerotiB, and have' tbe accent always on the. radical s^Uble
(as in the oaae of componnda with verbal prefixes: llfiO«).

a. Examptet are: keQaTirdbana hatr-inereanng, ftytifprat&n^
tifa-ltngihenitxg, tarrOpftDa bodg-protteting; devabfi^itiift hatred of tht
godt, podiB&Taiia giving birth to tnaht.

b. A rer; few ippiient eicsptionfl ai legarda accent are really oaau
vhere the derlTatlvt has loit Its veibil ehincter: thna, yomasAdani Tama'i
rtahn, ftob&dvidbana m4ani of protection.

o. An accniatiie-form la aomctlmet foond before a derlratlTe in «Ba:
thnt, sarQpaihp&raQa, Ryak^fmathkira^a, anbhigaih It Arapa. -ranaA-
k&ra^R.

ISTS. a. The Hctlon-tiouns in ya, (1913) are not infreqaent In
composition as final member, and retsia their own proper accent (m
In combination with prefiiea). Sufficient ezamptes were given above

(lais).

b. The lame is trne of the eqniialent fbmlnlnes in y&: aee above,
1818 d.

0> The gerandlToa In ya (1819) hardly oeonr In the older Ungnage
In GombinaUan with other eletoente than preflxea. The tvo sivibh&ryk
and prathamavBfl]^ (the latter a deicriptlve) have tbe accent of the
Ind^enlent woida of the same form; balaylj&i3r& and i^TabodDya (I)
are ineensigtent with tbeae and with one another.

1878. Componnda made with the passive pttrtiolple In -ta or na
have the accent of their prior member (as do the combinations of the
aame words with prefixes: lOSBa).

a. Eiamples are: h&stakfta made toith the hand, vTrAJSta bomofa
hero, gb6{abnddlia axakmted by noiet, prajipatlsrfta ereafed by Praje-
pali, d«v&tta given bg the godt; and, of participles combined witA prtflzes.
{mdraprMttta incited bg Indra, bthasp&tlpra^atta driven ateay by
Brihatpati, olUtbhlhata tlruek bg a thunderbolt, T&jraviliata, eaAvst-

Digitizecy Google

493 Dhpihdbht CoMPonNDa. [— 1S76

•ttrtaurunlt* eommmtnraU loilk Ike year. AV. hu tlia uwnulou apa4-
Mihfita guidtmud by the uiaieri.

b> A nuobet of eic«ptloii» oconr, In which the flasl sylltbla of ths
camponnd hu tho uwmt: fbt uumple, ttgnltaptA, Indroti, pit^tU,
raUMkiltA, ■ciildi«dh& (lutlda agnidagdlia), bftvlfutA (bwiae k»vi-
f aato), kAvlpTS9aat&.

o. One or two Epeoiil niigei nay be notleed. The ptrticlple gatft,
gon* to, M 1Id>1 of > compound, ii med Id > loois my In the Utei Itn-
gaage to oxpreH leUttou of TUtooj klndi : tbaa, JagatlgRttt exittmg m the
teorid, tvadCSittt belonging to thee, BkUlIgatft relating <o afrUnd, edtrft-
g»t» HI 0 pititure, pntragatufa Bnahftm affteiion toward a son, etc. The
ptrtlelple bh&ta htait, become li mad In compoiltlon vlth^ Donn m hudly
moie than a gnmmatteal deyloe to gire it an tdJeotlTe tonn: that, idaib
tMaobhQtMn thit creation, being darhnete {eaieting in tt« condition- of
darkneet); tSifa ratnabbtttfidl Iokae7& Aor, being the pearl of Aev>orld;
kffltrabhQU am^tS nftn b^abhata^ smrta^ pum&n a uwnum u
rtgarded at a Jidd; a man, ae seed; and lo on.

d. The other pattleiplee only wldom ooani u flnaU of oomponnda:
tbni, prSaak&n&dkAblbhrat bearing javelin and beta, aqftBtraTidvft&B
not knoteing the text-booke, (uJoniUlarqlTSAs having eeenArf una,. Aprijtt-
QA&BlvK&B annooneing loAo^ ii dttagretuble, K&ntaniabraTftfA eaUing
himet^f Qautama.

1974. Compounds with derivativeB in tl h«Te (like comblnatlona
witb the prefixes: llK7e) the ftcoent of the prior member.

a. BiiAplBi are: dfa&iutafttl winning of weatth, edmaplti »oma-
dritMitg, derUitlti ineoeation of the god*, oimafikti utieranee of
homage, hA-vjidMi pruenttOion ofo^ringe; and aotok&sSll. deribltl,
rodvAliatl, tOkt^ktl. ■Tagikftl, Sivi^.

b. In aem&dbitl, medb&a&tl, vui&dlilti (kII RV.), the accent of
tba prloi membei la chaDged from pennlt to Anal.

o. When the rerbal charHCtei of the dediative la lost, the |eneial
rule of anal accent (1867) U foUooed: Ihna, Aavtiietl teeapon of the goda,
deraeoiIlRtf favor of the god; brahmaeld Brahman-pile. Also In sar-
v^7ftn{ entire jvin, the accent li that of oompounda with ordinary nonna.

1275. Compounds with a derivative in in u final member have
(aa tn all otber oaaea) the accent on the fa.

a. ThoE, ukthaqa&Btii peaht-einging, vrataoKrfn vow-performing,
r^bhad&yln bulloek-giving, aatrav&dlu truth-^eahifig, qro^pratodln
fhigh-povnding.

1876. There is a gronp of compounds with derlvativea in 1,
haying the accent on the pennlt or radical ajllable,

a. Ttmt,paitiilTi^iroad-proteoting,iia,vinakthi«acriflce-di»twbing,
fttmad^ louNuirming, pathl^idl litting in the path, aahobhiri ttrengih-

Digitizecy Google

187*7-] XVIII. Composition. 494

btaring, vtMUvkni minmng good-things^ <HinTifMiAii1 gaining ictaUh, mano-
vait^ ntind'$tealing, -pbtdagrAbi letting fi^il; kud, from radnpUnted n>ot,
vmo&krl making room. Campoaad* with -akai »nd -vkai ue scpecdally
fteqnent In Ted> >nd Biibmuii; u Independent words, nonnB, theu ice
■ccented sani uid Tanf. In many ouei, the iroida &re not fomd in
Independent, nie. Combinattons «Ub ptelLcea do not ocenr In inrHcient
Dumber Co establiih e distinct mle, bat tbey eppeer to be oftanest eccented
OD tbe anffli (ll66fj.

b. From yluui ue made In eompoBittoD -glmi and -ghnl, witti
■cent on tbe ending: thni, laliaaragluif, ahiglmi, Tvaghsl; .dhl trem
l^dhft (IlBBg) bit the acMnt la IM nDmerau componndi: thna, Ifodhf,
garblutdbi, pa|pliadhL

1277. Compoands with deriT&tlvea in van have (like oombina-
tions with prefixes: lieSoj the accent of the final member: namelf,
on the radical syllable.

a. Thns, somapaTau soma-drinking, balftd^Tan ttrength-giving,
pftpak^tran evil-doing, bohaaliTaii mueh-giilding, talpaflvan lying en
a eoueht rathaylETaii going in a chariot, draf&clTan sitting on a tr4f,
agretrdri f. going at the htad. Tbe aceent of the obsenre worda lolta-
riqvan and mfttaribbvan ia inDmalona.

b. Tbs fen componnda with final masi appear to follow tbe aime rale
aa those with Tan: tboa, svidM^^tAjaKO. eharing out swetts, Sfohteian
sited- impelling.

1S78. CompoundB witb other derlTatlTea, of rare oi eporadie occnirence,
ma; be brlefiy noticed: thas, in n, r54^radipB&, devaplyiv gOTindo.
Tanariu (?): compare 1178e; — In an or tnu, lokak|tnd, bdtII-
pakftnu: compare 1190; — tn tr,'Drp&tf, mandliKt^, haakart^ (vaan-
db&taraa, AV., is doobtleaa a false reading). ' The derivatiTsa In aa ate
of infrequent occurrence In compoaition (aa in combination with prcflirs:
aboTe, 1161k), and appear to be treated aa ordinary nouDa: Uiub, y^lOa-
▼ae&B (bnt birai^yatAJas, AT.).

B. DeaoriptiTe Oompousds.
1279. In thia division of the claas of detetmi natives,
the piioi member stands to the othei in no distinct case-
relation, but qualifies it adjectively ot adverbially, accord-
ing as it (the final member} is noun or adjective.

a. Einmplee are: nllotpali hlae lotut, aarvagn^a all goad guality,
prlrasakha dear friend, mahar^l great^age, rajatapStri eilorr cup ;
^fiftta unknoum, aAlq^ weU done, dufk^ ill-doitig, paru^tQU inu«ft
praieed, pi^nar^ava renewed. '

b. The prior member ia not aUaya sn adjective before a noan, or

ioy Google-

495 Dbsoriptitb Cohpodhds. [—1880'

ut idraib before in kdjaotlve; othei put* ot ipeeah ue ionetimei n"«d
tdjectlvelr and tdverbltllr in that potidon.

o. The bonndvy between descrlptlTe and dependent componnda la not
■a (biolate one ; In cert*ln oiiea It li open to qneiUon, for inttuiM, whethet
■ prioi nooD, or »d|ectiTe vlth anna-T*loe, li Died mote in ■ ciee-Telitlon,
01 4dv«iblilly.

d. Moreover, vhere th« flnil member I* » deilTatlie beflng botli nonn
and adJectlTe falne, It la not aeldom doobtTDl «h«tbei an adjective oom-
ponnd la to be regarded aa dear^ptlie, made with llnal adjective, or poa-
««fslTe, mads with Bnal noon. SometlDiea the aocent ottbe woid^detennlnea
Ita chataBtei in tbia leepect, bat not alwaya.

«, A ■ittafaetorilT almpls and penplonona elaiilflcatlon of tbe deeerlp-
dT« etfmponnda 1* not piaetieable; we oannot hold apart tbronghont tke oom-
ponnda of nonn and of kdJeotiTs value, bnt may better ^np botb together,
aa tliey appear vlth preflied elementa of varloni klnda.

1280. The simpleat case is that in which a noun as
final membet is pteoeded by a qualifying adjective as prior
member.

a. In this combination, both nonn and adjective mnj be of anj
kind, verbal or otberwise. The accent is (as in the correepoDding
clitBfl of dependent nonn-compoands : lfi67) on the final syllable.

b. TbDB, aififttayBkqiu& uTtknoum diteaie, mahSdhani great veallh,
k^praqyeni luiifl hmek, kf^i^a^akant black bird, dakql^Sgnl loulhrm
Jirt, omkflti ^Bide dbod», adbarabaB& loteerjaw, ItaraJanA olherfolki,
Mtrvfttm&n whole loul, ekaviri tola hvro, ^ptar^ tevsn $agei, tftlya-
BaTan& third libation, ekonavUEqatf a tcore diminithtd by imt, JAgrat-
BTapii& toaking tleep, Tftvi^atsakbi difandmg firiend, apBk9l7amt9a<
pakfa aoning Kaif.

O. There are not a few exceptlona aa regarda accnnt. Eapeoially, rom-
ponnda with vifva (lA compoaltlaD, accented vlqv&), wbleh Itaelf retaina
the accent: thng, vl^&dewfts aB the jode, vUfvixatipt^ every man. For
worda la tl, see below, 1S87 d. Sporadic caaea are tnadbTailldlna,
vffakapl, both at which abow an irregular shift of tone In the prior
member; and a tew others.

d. Instead of an adjective, the prior member Is in a few cases
a noDn nsed appositionally, or with a qnasi-at^ective valne. Thas,
TlUayabfioA king-dieeaee, bratunarfl prieit^age, r^ar^i king-tage,
rajadanta king-tooth, dav^ona god-folk, duhltfjana daughter-ptrton,
^amQata creeper named <}ami, mUflkakliya the name "moiue", jays-
qabda the urord "conquer", ajblta^abda the word "deeertt^; or, more
figuratively, gfhanaraka houee-hali [haute which t$ a hell), gftpfigni
eurie-Jire (romuming curMJ.

e. Tbia group ia of i^anaeqnanoe, inaimnch at in poaataai-re applleatlon

ioy Google

- 1S80— ] XTUL COMPOaoiOH. 4^6

It U (TsMlr eit«ad*d, utd tonai a Bamamu slats af tpfatUioaxl coa-
poimdi: »*a below, 1288.

t. TUi vhole inbdiTlaloii, of aouM vltk ^««diB( qulifjli^ tdjoe-
tlTsa, ii not mnMnamoii; bat It 1> giaatl; (In AV., foi axanpU, man tkw
Htc tJmea) excsadad In bafnanqr by tke amb-claat of poMeadTca at tha
■use toim : lae bolow, 1 S98.

' 1281. Ilie adrerbial woids which are most &eely asd
ooauuoaly used as prior members of oompoonds, qualifying
the finak membei, are the rerbal prefixes and tlie words of
direction related with them, and the inseparable prefixes,
a 01 an, an, dns, etc. (1121). These are combined not
only with adjectiTes, but also, in qassi-adjectiral valao,
with nouns; and the two classes of combinations will best
be treated together.

IS8S. Verbal adjeotires and nonna with preoediag
adrerbfl. As the largest and most important class noder tlda bead
night properly eoough be regarded the derivatives with preceding
verbal prefixes. These, however, ha?e been here reckoned latber
as derivativeB from loota oombined with prefixes [1141], and have
been treated under the head of derivation, In the preceding chsfiter.
In taking np the others, we will begin with the partioiplas.

1S88. The' participles beloni^Bg to the teiue-ByBtanM — tbne ia
ant (or at), mfina, ftoa, vUs — ue only rarely componnded wMb
any other adverbial element than the negative a or on, which thea
takes tbe aooent

a. Eumpleitie: 4nad(uit, ^dadat, Anagnont, tersTant) UnUi*
yaot, AdOayant, Aditsaut, Adevayaat; fananyiinmna, thtAiina.
Aohldyamkna; Adadivftfia, AbibhlTftAs, atoatbanai ud, with veibal
pt«flx««, &napaapliurant. Anigamiffant, &nabli7Bg«mlqyaBti ivi-
rUbaorant, ivioKoalat, ipratimaiiyilTamAna.

b. ExceptloDs in legtrd to ueent ue very few: anmdhati, ajirantl.
aood&nt (RV., once; donbtleii a faUe reading; tte tlmpla paMiolpIe li
oAdant]; AY. bu auip&dyunSaa tot BT. fcnlpad7amio«^(and the
pnbtlthed text bu asadiy&iit, with ■ put of tbe minuMilpta); (^. ha*

C Of otbet eonponndi thm vitb the negatlTO pieBx ha*e been Doled
In tha Teda -punardlyamKna (In ipunaid-) and savldTfiAs. In alaM-
bhivant and Jafijanftbhivant BY,, u in astadiyAst and aatameorAnt
(AY.), we haTs parUcfplM of • compound conjngation (1001), In which,
as bai been pnlnted out, the aocent li a« in combinations with the verba]

Digitizecy Google

.497 Dbbcriptivb Coupoitnds. [— 198B

1X84. The paaiWa (ot past) participle io ta or na ia mneh more
vuionaly compounded; and in ^oetal (kb in the case of the verbal
prefixes: 1086a} the preceding adverbial element has the acoenL

0. Tbua, with Ike negktiTe a oi an (b; ta lb* most BOmmmi Ma»):
ilqrta, idabdba, Arista, inftdhpfa, iparitjita, AoaihUirata, Ana-
Uiy&ra^lia, iparimitaaamrddlia; — with bu, s^Ata, aiihnta, afiaadi-
^ta, arkraifakfta; — with due, d&^oarita, d^rdhlta uid ddrbita.
d&^^Ifta; — wlib othsr >dT«tbUl worda, dAAeuJilta, n&v^tta, s4n^
frota, BTaT^ublErta, trfpratt^tbita: &nuhkFta an<l kaltafAkrta ut
nUhei putidplM of > compoaod conjugation.

b, EzceptloDs in regard to meeent are: with a or an, anBfastA, apra-
^ast&i and, with the acMnt of ihs part1cip1« retracted tc the root, amfta,
adfft>> adtta, a^ta. myriad, atArta (beatde 4tilrta), aaArta (! beside
«Arta)i — with ■ii(neailr half u namtroni a* the lesnlar cases), eubbflti,
>fikt&t anprafaati, aviikta, bhA:^ and aiijati (beside sfikrta and
fliOftCa), and a few others; with dtu (quite ai nuneroaa as the tegular
ease*), dnrltA (alto diirlta). dnmkt&, dTifkrU (also dd^kfta). dnr- '
btaati; with ea, aaj&t^; with other adverbs, amot&, ariftati, tavij&ti,
prBauiopavIt4, tad&iiiiiidiigdhi, pi;fttardugdli4, etc., and the com-
pounds with poru, purujftt&, purupraj&t4, porupra^aBtA, parnf(ut4.
etc., and with avayam, BvayadikftA eta. The proper name a^&^'u^
sUDd» baslde AfB^ba; and AT. has abMiui& for KT. Abhlona.

1S8&. The gemndivee occur almost only in combination with
the negative prefix, and have usually the accent on the final syllable

a> Eismpl«i are; anftpy&, aiiind7&, abndhyi, asahyA, ayodhyi,
amoby&; ad'Vi;e9y&; atuiaT&yy&; and, 'along with verbal preflies, the
cases are aaaihhliye7&, apramr^yA, anapavrJT&i anatyudyi. anR-
dliT^&, avlmokyA, anKnak|!ly& (the secant of the simple word being
aaifakliy&ya etc.).

b. Exoeptions in regard to accent are : &nedya, Adfibbya, Agohya,
ijoqya, iyabhya. The two anavadtaar^yB and anativySdhy^ (both AT.)
bsloDg to the yhrJiTlslou (ISlSb) of gernndlves, and have retained the
accent of the simple word. And igbnya and ashnyi or^cor together.

0< The oniT componnda of these words with other adverbial elements
in T. are aiiyabhya (accented like Its twin iyabhya] and prathaiiiaTftsy&
(wbleh retains the flnal circnmflei), and perbapa ekaT8dy4.

d. The neuter nouns of the same form (1813o: except eadli&Btntya}
retain their o«n accent after sn adverbial prior member: thus, pilrrapayya,
ptlrvapiya, amutrabhiiya ; and saho^^yya. And the negatived gerundives
Inatsnced above are capable of being viewed as possessive compoDods with

o. Some of the other verbal derivatives wbich have rules of their
own ae to accent etc. may be next noticed.

Wbitner, Qrenaar. 3. sd. 32

D,j,i,.c.., Google

isee— 1 XVII!. CoMPOsmos. 498

1286. The root-stem (pare root, or witb t added after a afaoTt
final rowel: 1147 d) is veiy often combined vith a preceding adrerbial
word, of rarlona klnda; and in the combiDation it retuna the accent

0. EikmplM >r«: with tmcputlile pieflzei, adrati not harming, ast)
not giving birth, arno ttoi Mniiig; ankfl well-ihing, saqrdt hearing teell;
&a^k^ iU-doing, Afi^i/^[\WS) impitnu; eajii joining logtlAtr, »axakA
eonfiiet; aali^i horn together, eahavUi eorrt/ing together; — with otkei
idTeib), am^dr groteing old at home, nparlapfq taudang uptcard,
pmuurbhA appearing again, prSttUT^ hame«»ed early, aadyafajtrt bought
the tame day, akkadivfdli grouting up together, aadaihdi ecer-Hitding,
TifBvft turning to both lidte, TTtbBa&h- eaeib/ overcoming; — witb id-
JeetlTei nied adTerbially, Qmvy&o viide-ipreading, pratheanaii Jirit-bom,
Qokrapfq brightly adorned, d.TlJ4 tuiioa bom, telv^ triple, arar^ eelf-
ruling; — with noona used idTerbLtll;, ijBXabhi. . hene_fieent, aaryofrit
thining like the tun, Iq&nakft acting at lord, arayambbll lalf-exittenfi
■Dd, with ic«nMtlTe MM-foim, pataifag4^oin^ by Jlight.

b. When, loweTer, & root-stem li ilre»dy In MmpositioD, whether
vith ■ *eib>1 pralli or in element at otbei cbancter, the farthei added
nsfatlTe Itself ttfeei the ueent [la in rue of wt ordlnuy adjective; helow,
lS68a): thoi, tor ei».mii\«, ixMoiit not abiding, kattv^t not turning hack,
4vtdTlq not ehowing hotiilityj &duqk^ not iU-doing, ina^rodft not giving
a horee, ikpaf ohan not tlaying cattle, (aaBgia would be an exception, If
it coatained i^gSi which ia rery unlikely). Similar combinations with aa
team to retsln the isdical accent; thns, auprat^, BVftbhd, srSyifu;
aw&T^ is an Dnsnppoited exoeptlon.

a. A few other ezceptlOK occur, moatly of donhtfal character, is
pr&tlprftq, sadh&sttia, &dhrlffni 'id the words having afio u aotl
member (407 ff.;.ir this element is not, after aJt, asnfat): compare ISBQa.

IS87, Other verbal deriratiTes, requiring to be treated apart
from the general body of adjectives, are few and of minor impoi-
tance. Thae:

a. The derlvatiTes in a are In great part of doabtfnl character, becanie
of the posaibillty of their being used vith anbetantlTe Tslne to make a poa-
sessiie compoand. The last ambigaoos, probably, are the derlTatliee from
pretenl-atems (1148J), which have the accent on the suffix i thus, asnnwi,
apsqyi, akfadhy&, aTidasyft, toMavpfit, Bad(lpr9&, panarmanyi;
and with them belong auch cssea as atfp&, aTTdli4, araiiigamA, nnDcrunA,
eT&Tad&, BatrBsah&, pnna^BarJl, purahsarA; and the noona SKyain-
bbav&, BaluioSr&, prfttal^aftTi, mlthoyodhi. Differently accented, on
the other hand, althongh apparently of the same formation, are such is
&napaapbnra, AnawahTara (compare the cempoonda noticed at lS86b).
aadav^dba. atibbarrai nyagr6dlia, purot^a, aadhamido, sadAgha,
sap&oa, anbiwa, and othen. Words like adibha, durbi^a, sokijira,
Biiy&iiia, ace probably poieeasiTe*.

Digitizec^y Google

499 Deboriftive Coupouhds. [— ises

b. The deriTktlTeB In vftn keep in genenl the tcoent of the flnsl
■DBmbar, on the root (eompste II6O0, 1977): thai, ftfup&tvtui and
raghapAtran $ieiji-_^fing, pvxojtivaii going in front, sokftvMi letll-
doing; and Bat&rmBJi and ■UTUunKnand ragbaytiiian ue ptohthlr to
ha elMiBd vlth th«m. Bnl th« oegatlro pieflx hu the aoeent even b«foie
theM: thna, kyttivAa, iaiivtai, Aprayutraa; and BatyAmadTAn (If It
bs not pORieulve) has the aeoent of its prioi mamber.

0. A tew woTds tn i aaem to ha*B [at Id dependent componndi ; 1876)
the accent od the radical syllable: thus, diu^bbi, rJaT&ni, tuvi^A^.

d. The derlvatlTea In ti aie Tiiiousl; treated: the nagatlTB pieflz haa
alwaja Ibe accent before them: aa, iotttl, &bh&ti, infiliStl; with aa and
dna, the oomponnd ia accented now. on the prefix and now on the Onal, and
In aoroe woidg' on either (snnlti and Bimlti, d&;futl and dtif(ati[]; with
other elements, the socent of the pieflz preraila : thaa, sUkntl. Badbiatatl,
pnr6hiti, pBrv&^tt, parrytotutl.

a. The derlTatlves in in have, as tn general, the accent on the suffli :
thai, pflrrfiaiD, bobaoSrfn, ■ftdh'adeTfn, aavftaln, karal&diii. Bat
with the negative prefli, ^Smtn, Avlt&rlii.

f. Other combiDitlona are too Tarjona In treatment, 01 are represented
by too few examples In accentaated texts, to Jastlfy the setUag up of rales
respecting them.

1S86. Of the [emaining combinAdoDS, those made with the insep-
M-able pre£xea form io some meuare a class hj themselres.

I- a. The negative prefix a or an, when it directly negatives the
word to which it is added, has a very decided tendency to take the

b. We have seen abOTa (1283) that It does so OTen in the oase of
pteaent and perteet and future putiolplea, althongh these In combination
with a verhd preSi retain their own accent (108B : bat there are exceptiona,
as ftTad&nt, apa^&nt, etc. (B.); and also In the ca«e of a toot-stem, It
this be already compoauded with another element (lS86b). And the same
la true of its other combinalloDii

c. Thai, with varions adjectiv* words: Ataadra, Adabbra, AdS^uri,
Afltja, &dev«m, i^^aji itavyUta, Animin, Advay&vin, ipracetaa,
Anapatyavant, innpadasvant, ApromSynka, imamri, Apr^^Jfil,
^vldldhayu, AuAgnidagdho, &k&ma][ar9ana, Apa^oftddagtiTan. Far-
ther, with nonne, Apati, Akamftro, ibrSbma^ta, AvidyK. &qraddli&,
&yTStyft-

d. Bat there are a namher of exceptions. In whloh the accent is on
the final syllable, wllhoat regard to the original iccentnatlon of the final
member: thna. for example, aoitrA, aqririi, aviprit, ay^jfUyA, anft-
BmOkA, asthurl, an&^u. ^orayA, an&mayitnd; and in amitra tntmy,
and avfra unmanly, there ia a retraction of the accent from the final ayllable
of the final member to Its penult.

3a*

Diaii.ze.., Google

1S8S— ] XVm. CoicpostTioH. 500

2. 6. The prefisea an and dns have this tendeDc^ in *. much
IcM d«gi«», KBd thttir oompouodB ve veiy Tarionely accented, now
on tha prefix, now on tbe final B^IUble, now on tke acceatnd ByUaUe
of the final membei; and oocaaionallj on either of two sjUablea,

f. Thni, tot eiiDiple, s&bhadra, B^vipra, anpakva, anbrUmuiQa,
B^bbifi^; autirthA, Buvaeani, Bu^Kratbf, sapa^ aadbi; aa^Ara,
aah6tr:8nTiraUHteaviTa; ^dunaitr&,dal^fTipDysiind dnecAAuft
(108b}, with in«galu letractloa of ucent (ftui4).

3. g. The oomponndi with aa >re too fow to (nrniih oeewion for
Mpu4tB msDtloD; 4Dd tkiMs With tho inteTrogatiTB prefix In Iti tuIom
tonat ne alio extcemely me In the Tedi: eiunptes are kooarA, kat-
payA, kAbaadba, IcnnannamA, kumirA, kftyava, ko^va.

1380. The verbal prefixes are aometiines used in fe general ad-
verbial way, qnallfying a following adjective or oonn*.

a. Eismples of inch oombinationi »re not aomeioos In the Vedt.
Their iceentoatlon Is vtiione, (boagh the tons lesti oRenest on the pre-
podtlon. Thni Adhlpatl over-lord, Aparapa mu-form, prAtl^a^n opfot-
ingfoe, ■pi&paAA /ore part o//oof, priiif&'pit great-ffranddiild, vipakva
quilo doru, aAmprlra mutually dtar; upajUivikS side tongue (with le-
tcaetion of the uceot of Jihvli); antarde^A intermediate direction, pradiT
forward heaven, prapttSmahA («lao iprApitfimaha] great-grandfatier,
pratlJanA opponent, TyadhvA midway. Theie compouada ue mote he-
qoenl with poiaesrire iiJue (below, 1306).

b. Thli uie of the Terbal preflies ta mote common later, and some of
them have a legolu valne In anoh componnda. Thus, at! deaotea eice«*,
aa in atldttra very far, atl^haya exceeding fear, Atip&ra^a (^B.) daef
man; adhi, eoperioTitf, aalnadbidantauj)^ ar-tootA sidbintrl chief woman;

. abbi la latenaire, as in abhlnamra mucA inclining, abMnava apan-neio,
abhiruolra delightful; i algnlflea lometohaf, aa in ikii(ila aomeiehai croaked,
ftnCa hUtith; npa denotea aomething aeceaiory or aeeondarf, ai in viptf
purft^a additionai Parana; pari, exceia aa In parldorbala very weak;
prati, oppoaiUon, a> In pratipak^ oppoting eide, pratipnataka eopg;
■vi, variation or exoeae, aa in vidQra very far, vipft^^a gregith, vikfUdra
retpectively email; aam, completeneaa, ft in sampakTa jiMfe ripe.

IflftO. Other eomponnd* with adveiblat piioi membera are quite In^
ulall; loeented.

Thna, the eomponnda with pum, on the final (compare tbe putldple*
with puxu, lS84b): ai, ptunidasniA, porupriTA, pumqoaQdrA; thoM
with pitmar, on the prior member, as p^ar^va, pdaarmogha, p&nar-
yuTan, pAnarvaso (bat pnna^aarA etn.); those wlUi satAs, aatlnA,
aa^jrA, the eanie, as aat6inahaiit, aatioAraaiiya, BatyAmugra; ■ few
oombination* ot nouna In tf and ana with adyerba akin with the praflie*,
on the flnaf syllable, as puraStlf, pttra]pBtbfttt< upaliqayanA, prBta^^aa-
TanA; and mlacellaneoaa casea are mitb^aTadyapa, hAHfoandra, Alpa-
9a7u, BftdhvaryA, y&cohrefthA and yfivaoobrefthA, jyogitnay&vlii.

itizecy Google

501 Seookdarv Adjective CoiiPOUNDe. 1B83— ]

IMl. One or two exceptlonitl omos auty be noted, k follows:

a. An adjeotlve ia aDinetimei preeedsd by a nona stsndtBg tcwaid tt
in a qa»sl-»dTetbl»l relation expreBslTs of comparison or Ukeiiea*; e. g.
qixkebabhm (VS.) parrot-brotnn, fbr^ftmpla (TB.) loft at wool, pr&^a-
prlya dear at life, knqeQarftTaJomrdu 'ofl <" lotui-poUen, bakUma
hidd^i like a henm,lati,tXeaBttta&ge^aaia moving likt a maddtntd elephant.

b. An adjecltve la now and then qualified by another adjective: «. g.
kf^filta dark-gray, dbfimr&rohlta jrrayM red: and eompaie tbe a4]ec-
tWeg of iDteraedlate dlrecllon, 1357 0.

e. The adjeatlve pDrra ia Id the later language heqnently naed aa
flnal member of a compound In whlcb lU logical Talae U that of an adverb
qDslifytDg tbe other member (which ia aald to retain its own accent). Thuat
dr^f^pOrva pretiiouali/ »«en, pori^ItapilrTa already married, apnriJfUl-
tapdrra not before ftnoutn, BbmapItapHrva having formerly drunk soma,
BtrtpQrra /oriTwr/y a woman.

III. Secondary Adjective Compounds.

1202. a. A compound having a noun as its final mem-
ber very often wins secondarily the value of an adjective,
being inflected in the three genders to agree with the noun
which it qualifies, and used in all the constructions of an
adjective.

b. This class of compounds, as was pointed out above
(1247. ni), falls into the two divisions of A. Fossessivea,
having their adjective character given them by addition of
the idea of possessing', and B, those in which the final
member is syntactically dependent on or governed by the
prior member.

A. Fosseasive Oompoonds,

1298. The poBsessives are noun-compounds of the pie-
ceding dass, determinatives, of all its various subdivisions,,
to which is given an adjective inflection, and which take
on an adjective meaning of a kind which is most conve-
niently and accurately defined by adding having or pos-
seasmg to the meaning of the determinative.

a. Thus: the dependent BQryataJ&s »un't brigUneii becomes the

Diaii.zec., Google

1893—] XVIII. Composition. 502

pOBBeesive sftryatfljas potteuing the brightnai* of Ihe tan; yKj&akSmi
de>ir6 of taerifict becomes yaJMkBma having detire of tecrifiea; the
descriptive b^luulTatha great chariot becomsB the possessiva b^h&d*
rstha having grtat eharioU; iliaata not hand becomes ataaatfc handlett;
dnrghandl ill tator becomes daigindlil of SI »avor; ftDd bo od.

b. A copnlatlTe componnd ii not eonvetUble into im kdjcctlv* dliectly,
■07 more tli&n li > simple doud, bat reqnliea, like the Utter, a poneuiTe
sufllx 01 othec meaiiti e. g. TigshMt&Taat, doqaga^ln, nOastamsaka,
aqirogrlVit, AOfgy^lU* A. yvtf imall number of exceptlona, howersr,
ue ranod: thiu, •oinendr& (TSO, 8t6iiiapr9tha(V8. T3.)< hastynabba
(^B.), "mBTn'^*" (ChD.), and, later, ookramuaala, sadinandA, aaocid-
UnftP'^". sSflUurayoga (u d. pi.)i bal&b&U, bbfitabUutika.

o. The aune gtien by thV Ditlia giUDmarlkos to the poueMiie com-
ponDdj i* bahnvrOli: the word li ao example of the claai, meaning po*-
iming much rice.

d. The name "leUtlTe", lutead of poifleMlTe, sometimes applied la
this eltse, 1* an etter miinomer; since, though the ineaniD| of such a com-
ponnd (aa of an; attribute word) ti eaail; east tota a relatlTa form, iti
essantial cbaiaetar lies In the potseasl*B verb which has neTerthelees to be
added, or In the possesaiTe case of the relatiye wloh mast be osed; thus,
mahftkavl and IrordS, detoriptiTe and dependent, are "relatlTe" alao,
teho M a grtat poet, and that it life-giving, but b^hadratlLa, peoaauiTe,
means uAo hat a great chariot, or tekote u a great chariot.

1S84. a. Thst a noDn, simple 01 componnd, ahoold be added to an-
other nonn, in an opposite way, with a Talne TlTtoally attrlbnUTe, and tbal
such nouns should ooeastonally gain by frequent usociation and applioadon
an adjective form also, la uatmal enongh, and occun in many Ungnagei;
the peculiarity of the Sanskrit formation lies In two tblof*. Pint, that
iuoh use should have become a perfectly regular and Indellnltely extensible
one in the case of compounded woids, to that any compound with nonn-
dnal may be tamed without alteration Into an adjectire, while to • simple
noun must be added an adJectlTe-maklng sofOs in older to adapt It to
adj^lve nsei for example, thst while baata most become h""**" and
bUia mast. become bUmmant, hlra^ahasta and mohKbilia ehangs
from noan to adjective valoe with no added ending. And second, that
the lelatteo of the qnalilled nonn to the componnd should have come to be
so generally that of pouesslon, not of llheaees, not of ^pnitenance, nor of
any other relation which Is as nstarally Involved in such a eonsttactlon:
that we may only say, for example, mabftbUm^ purnfa^ man toitk
grtat armi, and not also mabfibihtu ma^il^ jttetl for a great arm, ot
mabibKbavai^ qikhB^ brandiet like great armt.

b. There are, however, in the older language a few derivative ad-
jective compoanda which Imply the relation of appnitenaoce rather than that
of potseesion, and which are with probability to be viewed as suivlvals of
a State of things antecedent (0 the specialiiatton ot the general olass at

il.zecy Google

503 . Possessive CouponnDs. [—1887

poBiettlvA (eompue the limtlu ezeeptiooi ondeT pottouive infflssB, 1S30B,
lasSf). Eumplai are: rlgv^ora of m for ail mtn, b«ionging to aO
(*Dd $0 viqv&kfn^ -oarifaql, -kfiti, •gotrk, -mauas, -B711, and eax-
T&p«QU, sapt&mftnufa), TlgT&QllrMia of eaary mtttimm, vlpathA for
had roadi, dTir^& [battU\ of tico king; ftQTftpn^a tarried on horaebadc,
Tlripastya abiding with heroM, ptln^&m&Ba at full moon, oddvoka/M-
no divinity, bahndevata or -tyk for many divinitia, aparlsaihvataara
not lotting a full year, ekSdsqakapUa/or einim (IuAm, Bomexiirkfor
Soma and Indra, And the componuda with ttoal inemb«i In ana mentioned
at 1886 b ire probably of the aaine cbaraot«T. Bot alio In the Utei lan-
foage, aome of the so-oallid dTicU'Campoaadi (1313) belong with thete:
•D dvtga itaelf, M maaniog tcorth two eotct, dvinftn bought for two Aips;
alK> oceatlonaL caiss like dflTiBiua [sadtgrima] of the god* and demon*,
narahaTa of man and horie, cakramtuala with diteue of cbA, garu-
talpa violating lite teacher''* bed.

ISOB. The ptMBflsaiTe oompoaiid ie diBtingnished from its Bob-
stiate, the determinative, generallj' by a differenoe of accent This
difference is not of the Bame iiatare In all the dlviHions of the olaBB;
but oftenest, the poBsCBBive has as a compound the natural accent
of itB prior member (aa tn moBt of the examples given above).

1286. Possessively used dependent compounds, 01 pos-
sessive dependents, aie very much less oommoo than
those conesponding to the othei division of deteiminatives.

a. Fnrtbei azamplea are : may^aroman having the ptumei of pea-
eoeks, agnitejas having the hrightneei of fire, J&Kdmukha aearing the
atptet of relative*, p&tlkSma detiring a hutband, haatlpftda having an
elephant'* feet, T^any^baudhu having fcehairiya* for relative*.

b. The accent ta, as in the examplea given, isgnlaily that of the
piloT member, and eicapliona ue rare and of doabtfnl character. A. few
conpoanda with derlTatltei in ana have the acccent of tbe final member;
•. g. indrapana leroing a* driftk for Indiv, dovasAdana ierving a* aeat
for &i god*, mylBthintf being eouree of aeaWi; bat they coiitala no
impllMtlon of poisetdon, and ue poaaiblT in character, aa in accent, de-
pendent (but compare 1884b). Alio a few in aa, aa nfo&k^aa men-
beholding, nrvithaa men-hearing, k^trasltdliaa ^field-pro*pering, are pro-
bably to be Jndged In the aame way.

1287. Possessively used desciiptive compounds, oi pos-
sessive descriptives, aie extremely numerous and of
eveiy variety of chaiactei; and some kinds of combination
which aie raie in proper descriptive use are very common
as possessives. ■

a. They will be taken up belov in order, accordtng to the cbar-

Digil.zecy Google

1207—] XVm. CoicpoamoM. . . &04

acter of the prior member — whetbet the noou-fiiul be pteoeded b;
a qaaliffing; sdjectiTe, or nonii, or adverb.

1888. PoMeasive compoDnda in which a noun is preceded by
. a qualifying ordinary adjective are (an pointed out above, ISSOf.

very much more common than deBcriptives of the same form.

(& Tlisy legoluly t.od asuilly h&T* the accent of their prioi member:
thu, any&rdpa of other form, u^4btUiii having poteerful ann», JtvA-
putra having living tont, dlrgb&f ma^ ru longbeardtd, brh&oobravaa of
great rmourrt, bhArimtlla many-rooted, mahlCvadlia bearing a great wea-
pon, vl^&rupa having ali formt, qukr&var^ of bright color, qivabhl-
TOtT^ka^ of propifioue touch, saty^adidlia 0/ (ru> ^ rotnuei, a&rrftfigR
whole-limbed, BvAyafaa having own glory, b&rltaart^ icearing yellow
gariandt,

b. ExcspUong, boweier, la regud to tCMDt are not rare (& Mventh
01 eighth of the whole number, perhapi). That, the accent it aomeUmea
that of the flnal memher; eapeclall; vlth derlTadvee In aa, a« tuviiidluM,
purap^aa, p^np&kfMi •■"i othera In vhtoh (aa above, IflMb) a
detenuloatiTe character may ha saepected: thus, amjr&yas beside arojr^
omvy&aas beside univy&O, and so oa; but also with those of other
finals, as pjuhbta, qitdUikfa etc., lq^7ak&r?a, dtrad^ika, tovi-
^dfmo, ijnkr&tni, p^ap&r^, pnnivirtman, raghnyiman, vi^a*
p&tmaDi In a very tew oaiei, the aocent U retractad from the -final to
the llMt syllable of the lecond member: thoi, afihnbbdda, tnvigrlTa,
pnravira, pnrurApa, tjitibithu (aUo QittbUiA). The largest class is
that of componnds which take the accent upon their final syllable (In part,
of oonrae, not dlBtingnlshable from those which retain the accent of the
final .member): for example, bahTanni. nIlanaUl&, parupntrfc,
Tiqvftfigfc, Bvapatf, tavlpratf, pi^nlpaTQi I, dar^ataqrl, patln^ljfi.
aaitajad. prthngmin, bahopn^&B.

0. The adjective viqr* all, as prior member of a compound (and also
In derivation), changes its accent regnlailyl; to vifvi; B&rva tcAo^B, aS,
does the same In a few eases. *

1889. FoBSesiive compounds with a participle preceding and
qualifying the Gsal noun-member are numerous, although such a
compound with simple descriptive valne is almost unknown. The
accent is, with few exceptions, that of the prior member.

^ The partlaiple Is oftenest the paaaive one, In ta or aa. Thns,
Ohinniipakfa with levered wing, dbftix&^I^A of firmly held royalty,
hat4mfitr whose mother ii ilain, iddb^gni whote fire it kindled. uttSni-
haata wi'M outttretdud hand, pr&ytitAdakqijfA having pretented lacrijieial
gift*; and, «ith prefixed negative, irl^favlra whoee men are unharmtd,
Ataptatann of unburned tubttanee, inabhlmlfttavari^a of witamithed
color. Exceptions In regard to accent are very few: there have been noticed
only parraat&k^ vyaatake^i f., aohlnnaptai}&.

Digitizecy Google

505 POBSBSSIVE COHPOtniDS. [—1800

b. Ex»mplM ooani of ■ pieient partlolpic In the asme iltnation. In
■bout hiM the (icoentaated) Inttknces, it ffiM Iti own tccent to the com-
poand: thai, dmt&dy&UUUi, dbn^dvan^ etc., fao^Ldratha, riiqad-
vatsa etc., bbx^i^JJftiiiaaii et«., Baihridvlra, Btan&yndama, eidhad-
Ifti; In the oihen, tha aecsnt li drawn forwud to the final syllable or
the participle (a in the componnds with gOTamtng piiticiple; belov, 1808):
thna, drav4tpipl etc. (draT&t alw occurs ai adfecb), rap^ddadhan,
BTan&dratha, aro&ddliflma, bband&difti, krand&difli- ^i^h tlieie last
agceea in foim jar&dafti attaining old age, long-lieed; but iU make-up,
in Tie* of its meaning, Is anomalana,

O. The RV. haa two compoanda with the peifect middle participle as
prior member: thus, yiiTUJftii&Baptl xciih harneited eottrteri (perhaps rather
having hametitd tkttr couritrt), and dad^Sn&paTi (with regular accent,
instead of d4dfQ&na, as elsewhere iTregnlarly in this participle) tcith con-
ipieuou* mh»al-rimt.

d. Of a nearly paitlctplal character is the prior element in ^rutkar^
(RV.) oflittgning ear; and nlth thli are perhaps accordant ^dyagul and
Vtli^raQinan [RV., each once).

ISOO. PoBaesBire compounds haring a nnioersl as prior member
are ver? common, and for tbe moat part follow the same rule of
accent which is followed by compounds with other adjectlvea: ex-
cepted are thoae beginning with dvi and tri, which accent in geoeral
the finat member.

a. Examples with other numerals than dvi and tri are: dkaoakra,
ilutfliqaii, 6kapad, oituTaOKOi o&toni^Qai pASaKasnrl. p&flcKn-
dana, qA^^^^ <^tP<^^> aapt^lbva, saptiinfttf, a^tapad, a^t&pntra,
n&vapad, nivadTAra, dAQa^Skha, diifaqlrfaa. dvidaq&ra, trlAq&d-

nra, qatipBTvaji, i;at&dant, Bah&sragitDan, eab&Hramaia.

b. Exceptions in regard to accent are hut few, and haie tha tone on
he final iyllable, whateier may be that belonging originally to the final
member; they are mostly stems In final a, used by substitution for others
in an, i, or a consonant: thus, eatoTBik^ etc. (akf&n or &kfl: 431),
fft^ahi etc. (&han or Uiar: 480 a), d»;avn& etc. (vf^aa), akarStri
etc. (ritli or ratif), ekaroA etc. (fo); but also a few others, as fa^-
jo^k, aftfiyogi, 9atargti&, Bataaarftrgbi, ekapar&(P).

o. The compounds with dvl and tri for the most part bsve the ac?
cent of their final member: thus, fat example, dvijAnman. dvldhiira,
dvlbjuidhu, dvivartanl, dvlp&d; trit4ntu, trlnabhl> tiiq6ka, trlvii-
Ttitha, trioakrA, triqlrffui, trip&d. A namber of worda, however, follow
the general snalogy, and accent the numeral: tbus, for example, dvipaik^a,
dv^qaTas, dvy^ya, trifandtil, trfke^ try&qir, and sometimes dvl-
pad and txfpad in AV. As In the other nnmeral compounds, ai siibatl- -
tntad stem In a. Is apt to take the accent on the final; thns, dvlv^f^
and tiivn^ dvlr^}^ Avixitrk, ttjtifn.^ tridlvA; and a few of other

ioy Google

■ ISOO— ] XVIII. Composition. 506

chuaetei vith tri folloo Ibe suds rnle: thna, trlka^ trinUci. tti-
baudh^ tiyndhAo, trlborlila, etc. '

d. Th« nenlaT, oi >1bo th« fsmliilDe, of nnmeni componnd* U oftao
luad BDbatuitiTeli', wltb » colttctlve or abitraet TUne, and the Meant U
then regnlaily od thiHnil Byll&bla: lee balow, 181S.

'1301. PoMSMiTe compouDds havbg as prior iiiemb«r ft noun
which h&B a quasi- adjective valne In qxuMtjiag tiie final member are
very frequent, and show oertaia specialities of nsage.

ft. Lewt pecnilu la ■ nonn of miterUl >s prior member (hardly to be
reckoned u poBBelelTe depBudeDts, becanse the lelatiBn of material 1b not
regnlarly ezprested'b; a oaae: S06): thna, hlrft^yftliftBtft gold-handad,
birai^asTai utilh goldtn garlandi, kyaifatbai^A haeing brazen tupportt,
nOftt^nftbhl of tilver navel.

I30S. Especially common Is the nse of a noon as prior member
to qualify the other ftppositionally, or by way of aqnivatenoe (the
occasional occnrrenoe of determinatiyes of this cfaarscter haa been no-
ticed above, 1280d], These may conveniently be called appo-
sltional poiBOBfiives. Their accent Ib that of the prior member,
like the ordinary possessivs desoripttves.

ft. Eiamplea are: kqvKpsjnpt horte-winged, or liaiiing horta at vinffi
(aald of ■ chariot), bhdsiig]-hft having (Ae earth a* house, {ndraattUii
having Indra for fri»nd, agaihot^ hoeing Agni at prie*t, gftndhftiTipfttnl
having a Oandharva for epoiut, ftlr&puta'a having hero-ions, jarimftyn
having old age a* mode of doaih, living iilt aid age, agldvfiaaa ^fire-elad^
tftdftnta ending with that, cBrftOftkf ub using spies for eyes, TifQ.nfar-
mf^H^nmn named Vtshnu^drman; and, with prononn Initead of noon,
tv^nta having Ihet a$ mttsengor, t&dapfts havwg this for aork. Ezeep-
tlouB in regard to accent ocoar here, aa In the more legnlai dCBciiptiTB
foimittoD : thns, acnUU>T&, vj^Ki}tu;v&, dbOmtujikhk, pftvlius&, Mftu-
nibmii. tatkiila, etc.

b- Not Infreqnently, a BubBtaDtiTely (Ued adJeetlTe U tbs flnal member
in anch a oompoaad: thus, Indr^yeft^ having Indra as chief , m&na^-
fftftllB having the mind as sixth, nAmaqreftlift of which soma is best,
akapar4 of which the ace is highest (?), A«tMbh&y«s having bone at the
larger part, chiefly of bone, sbhlrapabtatlyiftbft ehie_fig compoied of
worthy pertons, da^ftTRTft having ten at the lowest nrnnber, dntSparft
having meditation aa highest obftcl or oeatpation, devoted to moditation,
nl^qTiSft-parftinR much addicted to tighmg.

o. Certain worda are of eapeclal fteqnency In the eompoondB here de-
scribed, and haTo In part won a peculiar appUMtlon. Thna:

d. With fidi beginning or ftdlka or ft<^ft ^rti are made oompouDda

- Blgaifjing the poraon oi thing apecilled along with otheie, Bnob a person or

thing el cetera. For example, de7& IndrAdftya^ the gods having Indra at

Jbrtt, t, e. the godt Indra etc., marloySdln. munln Mand and the other

D,j,i,.c-..,LiOOylC

507 PossEesiTE Gohpodndb. [—1803

aaga, KviJea^ibim.■vidsU^ oaptAi te mAna.vaif. that lavtn Manut,
Svayamhhuva etc., agni^fomftdik&n th« taertjiee* AguitMoma tmd jo on.
Or the qvallfled qouq la omitted, as In BimftpSnen(Utaiiftdmi/oo<J, driiA,
fflti, etc., ri ftTmH h KT-m ftiH h»iti oarfttu bhftT&n let your honor praefiae
Hbtralify, rtUgieut rites, and the like. The putlclet evRm uid Iti ue also
iom«time* oted by subititntian u piloi memtiers: thut, evaniftdl vaoa-
nam loord* to (hit and the like effief; sto tiBih brsvlml kartftvya^
SAdiOKro nityun l^fidl hence I toy "accumulation ie ever to be made" etc.

e. TJud In mach the lune «■;, but lesi often, ia prabbptl begin-
ning: tbni, Tl^BTaauprBibhfilbMT gftndhorvSl^ toith Ike Oandkarvae
fievanaeu etc. ; e«|>ectillv ftdveTbUlly, In meaanremenU of ipace and time
M ttttprabbftl or tata^prabhftl ^encefortcard.

r. Woidi meudnf foregoer, predeceiior, and the like — D«mely,
pfUrvft, pOrvakft, pnra^Bam, pnraakfta, pnxoBam* — ue often
■employed Id > ilmlUr mumei, and aipecially idieiblklly, bnt foi the moat
put to denote acconpuiimeDt, nther thui uitecedence, of tbat irblcb ia
deilfnated by the prloi membeT of th« conponod : e. g. BmitaparTam
with a imile, anSmayapTaQnaparvakam tciih inquiriet after keaUk
pitftmahapurogama accompanied by the Qreat Father.

g. The noun mfitrft meature stands u flnal of a Dompoand which ii
uaed a^jactlTsly oi In the anbitantlTo neater to ligDlfy ■ limit that la not
exMeded, and obtalna thot the Tlttnal value of mert, only: tbna, Jala-
mStrs^a Tartayan living by water only (lit. hy tkai wkitA kat aattr
for iti meaeure or limit), garbhaoyntlm&trei^a by tnerefy iuuing frtan
Ma loaini, prbjay&trlkamStra^ b;U lei him be one potiee*ing what
doe* not exceed tke preservation of life; oktuafttiw tn Taoane but the
leorde being merely uttered.

h. The noan artha object, purpose ia naad at the end of a compound,
in the adTeiblal accaaatiye nanter, to aignlfy /or the sake of oi the like:
thnt, 7i^fLaalddli;arthain in order to the aceomplitkment of the sacrifice
(lit. m a manner kaeing the aecompliekment of tke sacri_fice at its object),
■ damaTantyartbam for Damayanfi'e sake (loith Damayanti ae object).

1. Otber Dxamplei are ftbbSi kalpa. In the aenie of like, approaching:
thna, hemftbba gold-like, mftakalpa nearly dead, pratipannakalpa
almost accomplished; — vidhA, In the lenae ot kind, sort: tbna, tvadvldha
of thy sort, pumqaTldlia of human kind; — prtjtt, In the tense of
mostly, often, and the like; thus, dvi^kbA^Tf^K full of pain, tp^pr^a
abounding in graae, nirgamanaprSya often going out ; — antara ('n
tobatantiTs nenter). In the aense of other: thns, de^fintara another region
(lit. that uikick has a difference of region), Jaamaotarftvi other exislencee,
^Iktaftntara u> another text.

1903. In appotlttonal poaacistie componndt, the leoond member. If it
dedgoate* a part of the body, eometlines loglcall)' aiguilles that part t« which
what Is deaignated by the prior member beloRES, that on or in which It Is.

Digitizecy Google

1308—] XVni. CouPOBinoH. 508

B. Tbns, shrt&pntlia bulter-baeked, mfcdhnjlhva horuy-toHfftiett,
nlqkigrfTft aifa m&^rlvs neekiaoe-neekad, plitTAhastn ve$»el-hatided,
vi^rabUiu lightning-armed, AsrAmukha blood-faced, milodbaii mead-
uMtred, Titlajafhara lacrifice-beUied, vfifPt^k&ijttM untA tcora >n tA«
throat, 9rw3dlittin«nna tciU /m'tf m Me Aeorf; irlth liregolu Bceent,
dbttmSkfl f. tmoke-eyeA, a9ramnkhl f, tear-fae»d; tat kh^diliasta
ring-handtd (kbftdfj. In tfas l*tei Ungntge, inch eomponnda ire not In-
frequent with woTdi mssnlng hand: thus, qsBtrapSijl having a mcard in
the hand, lAfCu4ali&8tB carrying a itaff.

1S04. Of powesBlve oompoiindB li»ing an adrerbial element •«
prior member, the moBt nnmerouB bj for are those made with the
insepftrable prefiies. Their accent is varionB. TUub:

a. lu compounds with the negative piefli a or an (Id which the latter
logically negatire* the imported Idea of poiaetaion), the accent la preTaUfn^lr
on the Qnal ayllable, without regard to the origlDal accent of the final niember.
For eEunple : anant& having no end, abal& not posttising itrtng^ arath4
teilhout chariot, aqraddhi faithUtt, amaQl teiOumt omarnvM, KtjaXe^
without a foe, aTarm&n not cuiramad, adint toofhlm, apU footiaa
atej&B teilhout brightness, anSranibha9& net to bt gotten hold of, apra-
tlmftn4 incomparable, aduoohan4 bringing no harm, apakfapnootiA
icithout aidee or tail.

b> Bat a nnmber of examplea' (few in proporttoa lo those already tn-
glanced) have the prefix accented (like the eimple deserlptlvea: IBBSa):
thoa, 4b^ti indeslrucfibU, itgn kineleae, Agopft without shepherd, Tirana
lifeleii, &nftpi without friends, &^fTi t without young, toiftTii death-
leit, &brabman wUhoui priest, &vyacaa urithotU extension, kbAvia without
oblation, and a few others; AV. has Jiprojaa, but (B. apraJfto. A very
(£w have the accent on the penult: namely, aQ^aa, oj&ii, and BTba
(with retraction, from TiHt), apiitra (do., from putr&); and AV. has
abhritf, bat BT. abliratf.

o> In eomponnda with the prefixes of praise and dispraise, ra and
dus, the accent it in the great majority of cases that of the Snal memher:
thus, BuUlpa of easy make, enbh&ga well portioned, awnAkyttra of
propitious alar, Bupntr& having excellent sons, angopif weU-sh^herded,
Buklrtt of good fame, sug&ndhi fragrant, Bub&bn meli-armed, Boy&dita
of easy control, Bukr&ta of good capacity, Buhard good-hearled, nuari^
te ell-garlanded, auv&rman well-cuiraased, BUTltaas weU-clad, anpr&ijltl
. well guiding; durbh^^ ill-portioned, diitdftfikA of evil aspect, durdUtra
hard lo restrain, durg&ndbi iU-tavorsd, dva&dbi of evil designs, dnr-
dtt&rtu hard to restrain, duqfArltu hard to excel, dnratydtn hard to cross,
dnrdh^ iU-ycked, dun^aman ill-named, durrSBaB ill-clad.

d. There are, however, a not inconsiderahle number of inatancea in
which the accent of theae campannds ta npon the final syllable: thni, aa-
^ptk well-lipped, BVApAtyt of good progeny, BTaaiikitfkofgoodatpeel,
svaflgurl well-fingered, trvi^ii having good arrows, Bupiv&B well fatted;

D,j,i,....,'^iOLWlC

509 PoBBEBsrsB Compounds. [—1306

ftnd oomponnda with dariTUlvM In ftui, u Bnvt){Ubi& oj nay dUcemment,
stipCSaTpKQi of eaty approaek, dTMjoyKVKok hard to tkake; >nd AY. hu
■npIiaUi iDd Bubtuidlivi agslnst KV. Bnph&la and Bab&Ddbu. Like
(kvir», Buvira shovs letTactlon of ascent. Only dur&^lr hu the tone on
the piefli.

e. On the whole, the dlitinctloD bj tccent of poueulTe &om deter-
mlDitiTe ii let* olettl; «ho*n tn the woide made with bu uid diu thin
Id any other body of oempoands.

f. The- utoclttife preilx sa oc (le» often) BahiL Is treated Ilbe an
tdJeetlTe element, and Itaelf taket the accent in ■ poueaitre campoand :
thn*, B&krata of joint tciU, B&tULmaa of lik« name; s&rilp& of itmilar
form, s&yotd. having a tomnum origin, B&vftoas ofaisenting word*, B&toka
haeiag progeny along, tciih one't progtny, B&br&hm«9a together with tha
Srahmane, B&mnla aith the root, santardeqa with the intermeduUe dtreet-
iont; aah&gopmieith the s?upheTd, aahkvtLtatk aeemnpanied by on«'i young,
Bab4patiu having her hiuband icith tier, aahkpQxu^A along aith our men.

g. In RV. (a»e In > donhtCal case or two), only sabs Id inch com-
ponnds girea the meaning of having loith one, accompanied by; and, tince
saha goiema the tnatiDntental, the worde beginning with It mlfht be of the
piepoiltlonal elase pielow, 1310). But in AY. both ea and aaha hare thia
Talue (as lllDBtrated by eiamples given above) ^ and In the later langnage,
the combliutlani with sa are mnch the more numerona.

b. Theie ace a few exceptions, In which the accent is that of the final
member: thua, aeJ6;a, BBj6qas, aad^^a, (iBprAthaa, aabadhas, Bamaay&
«nd AV. ehowB the accent on the final syllable In a&ag& (^6. B^figa) and
the anbttantivtzed (1312) BavidTnti.

1. PoMaaalTe compoande with the exclamatory prefliea kn etc. are
too few In the older language to rnmiah ground tor any rule as to accent:
Utbandtaa la peihape an example of anch.

1306. PoBsesBive eompoanda in vhich a verbal prefix is used
as prior member with a^j^'^l''^^ value, qualifying a noun as final
member, are found even In the oldest langnage, and are rather more
common later (compare the descriptive compounds, above, 1280; and
the prepositional, beloV, 1810). They nsuall; have the accent of
the prefix.

a. Moat common aie tho'ee made with pra, vl, and Bam: thni, for
example, pr4maliRB having exceeding niipAJ, priujTKVM ieidety famed;
vigviva of vrry nefk, vybfiga hoeing limb* away or gone, litnbkea, v{j anl
icifeUtf, vip&rva and \ipaxvAjointUe», vyadbvan of wide ways, vfmanaB
both of vide mind and mindleu, vfvftoaa of discordant gpeeeh; a&mpatnl
having one'e hueband along, S&mmauaB of accordant mind, b Jkifaeabaara
aeeompanied by a thoueand, B&mokaa of joint ahode. Exauiplea of othvia
are: iXjvxiai surging over, idhivastra Anuinj; a ^aruMtif on, Mhyardba
with a half over, Adbyakqa overseer, JLpodaka without water, abbirupa

DfgitizecDy Google

180B — ] XVIII. CoMPosmos. 510

of adapttd ckaraeter, JLVatoka that ha* aborted, ^mtmaa of favorable
mind, ndoju of txalted poteer, nimaiiTil of attuagtd fitry, ii£miX7(l
free from guiU, nirhaata handieit.

b. In >, compaTiUielT imall numbei of oiiei, the accent it otherwiie,
end genetilly on the flDiI: tbni, avaksfi, npamany^ vi^apbi, ▼iglkU
(AV. vffiklia), vikan^ sammStf, et«.i in id Instince oi tvo, that of
the final member: thus, a&difl^aii having a common young.

1306. PoaeeBBive componndB with so ordinary adverb as prior
member are alao found in every period of the laognage. 'They lun-
ally have the accent which Itelonga to the adverb ae independent word.

a. Eixnples ate': AntfQti bringing mar he^, aT6deva eaUing doten
the god*, it&Qti helping on thie tide, Ih&oltta ttrith mind directed hither,
dak^i^atAskaparda wearing the braid on the right tide, iu£n&dhannnn
of varioui character, pnTadb&pralalEa of manifold aspect, Tl^T&tomiikha
loith faces on all eidet, aadjriQtl of immediate aid, vifforGpa of cariou*
form, am&dudhan with udder, adh&stSUakfmaii with mark b^hto, eka-
tomuUift with face on one tide, t4tbSTldlia of ettch tort.

b. An Instance or two oC IrregQlar accent are met with: Uiaa, poro-
Tath& whoee chariot ie foremoet, evaibkratb ao-minded.

1307. a. It was pointed ont in the preceding chapter (12SSh)
that the indifferent aurfis ka is often added to a pure poeseBsive
compound, to help Uie coDverBion of the compounded stem into an
adjective; especially, where the final of the stem is less usnal or
manageable in adjective inflection.

b. Alao, the compound poBsesslve item occaalonalty takes farther a pos-
■eiilTe-maklng suffli: thus, raqobhaglit, Bufiprin, TaraTar^in, dlrgha-
afktrin, punyaTlgbiiddbikarmlii, Bat&somavant, tAdfgrQpavant,
trayodaqadvipaTaut, nSrakap&laku^^alavatit, amrtabnddhlmant.

0. The frequent changes which are undergone b; the final of a atem
occoirlng at the end of a compound are noticed further on (131B].

1306. The posBMsive compounds are not always nsed in the
later language with the simple value of qualifying adjective; often
they have a pregnant sense, and become the eqnivalents of depen-
dent clauBeB) or the having which is implied in them obtains virtn-
ally the value of our having as BigD of past time.

a. Thna, for example, pr&ptaySavana poiteteing aUained adoleteenee,
i.e. having arrived at adoleteenee; anadhlgataQBstra wi'U tnuturfisd £i»ft*.
1, e. who hat neglected etudg; kftaprayatoa poteeieing performed effort.
1. e. on tchom effort it expended; afiffulirahadar^aaivaaSna having the
eight of the ring at termination, i. e. dettined to end on tight of the ring ;
uddht^vif Sdaqalya^ having an extracted detpair-arrow, i. e. when tthaU
hace extracted the barb of despair; fnitavlBtSTa^ kriyatfim let him be
mi^e icith heard detaile. i.e. let him be informed of the details; dnt^Tlryo
me rSma^ Rama hat teen mg prowess, bhagnabbi^^ dvijo yatba like

Digitizecy Google

511 PAETICIPIAL AND pEBPOfllTlONAL COJIPODNDB. [—1810

Oe Braliman tluU broke U« poU, nkt&nrtatn p^ yatba Uke a $age
that ha* gpoktn fakely.

B. Compounds with Oovemed Final Member.

1309. Participial ComponndH, This group of compounda,
in which the prior member Is a present participle anil the final mem-
bei Ita object, fa a small one (toward tfairtj exftmplei) and ezclnsi-
relf Vedio — iudeed, almost limited to the oldest Vedic (of the Big-
Veda). The aofent Is on the final syllable of the participle, whatever
nutj bare been the letter's accent as an Independent word.

ft. EitmpleB aie: vld&dvMu teitinmg good thtngi, kfftT&dTlrn
governing (kf&rsnt) have*, tariddvefaa overcoming (t&raat) /oei,
KbbaridTasu bringing good thing*, oodayinmati inciting (ood&yant'l
lUvoiion, mftnday&tsakha rejoicing friend*, dbRrs;&tkaTl nuiaining
fage», m&Ahay&dTftyl btstnwiing wealth.

b. In e&d&dyonl lifting in the lap [e&dat quite mnomalonaly foi eidftt
OTBftdat), iDd epThay&dvai^ft emulous of color, the cue-reUtloa ot the
flnal member it other tfaan ■e<:a>ulve. In pfttsy&n manday&taaUiam -
(BY. t. 4. 7], patay&t, with accent chiuged accordingly, lepresenti pntfty-
&taakhami tba final member being undentood from the foUovlng verd.
Vldidftfva ie to be inreired from Its dertTatlTe TSidadaQVi Of this
fonnation appear to be Jftm&dagni, prat&dvaau (prathMP), and tros- .
Uaayii(toi traB&ddaByuP). It was noticed above (1288a) thatyuytijS-
n&Bftptt is capable o( being undentood as a nnlqne compound ot like
cbaracter, with a peifect Instead of present participle; aidliadl^tl, on
aneoDnt of its accent, Is probably poseeiMTe.

1310. Prepositional Compounds. By this name may be
conveniently called those combinationa in which the prior member
is ft particle having true prepositional value, and the final member
ia ft noun governed by it Such combinations, though few' in num-
ber as compared with other classes of compounds, are not rare, either
In the earlier language or in the later. Their accent is so various that
no mle can bo set op respecting It

ft. Eiamples ate: ityavi pasting through the tcool, atitttri over-
night, atlinatr& exceeding meaiure ; AdMrftthft tging on the chariot, adhl-
gftvi belonging to the coto ; ftdliftapadi under th« feet, ftdhoak^ below
(^ axle; knupA^ha foUouring the road, anupQTV& follotcing the onepre-
ceding, one after another, anuqatyd in accordance tcith truth, ftnnkdla
dottrn stream, etc. ; ^taspatha (with anomBloael^ changed accent of ant&T),
tcithin the way, antai'dilvi within theflame{^\ ftatarbftftti in the hand;
totiK^ba near the house ; apip^^^ accompanying the breath (prlLjfk'), 4pi-
TTfttft concerned icxth the ceremony, api^ftrvftrft bordering on night, apl-
^An}knexliheear;a.hi>li1ia reaching to theknee, abbfvlrft andabhiBatvan
overcoming Across; ipathi on the road, lEdera going to the gods, ^ftrftsi

Digitizecy Google

ISIO— ] XTm. CoMToeinoH. 513

fmeiimg aid ag*^ iclrftda^ ap ta Uetivt ; opkkAkfi readimg ta ti* am-
fiit. vpt^Xatmk nacl to imO, ptmtltimmli ; ap4ribiidlma ahoftflte bett«m,
up^riramrtrm ruing abace mortmii; UrojaiiA beyond people; nihif^^n g^
o/ Oe luHut; p«zlp4d (aAouf Oe/eet) mare, puihoaU aio«( U« totd,
brmttUl; ptLTokf* otii of tight, p&romUr* ft^otuf BwoiKra, p&rogATTtltl

immtr|A m _^wat o/' U« «]M(; pTStidi>q4 tmemrd ntating, prsUltani
afaimrl tlU gnam, iwatikAlA iq» rfriaw, pr«tyilcf» Ae/ore (A« ^w; balii^
piurtdltl (Mdn^ (A« ete^MW*; vipftthi tmUith the raad; ■■■"iwhyi doH
(o bU aye*. M (^U.

b. CompooBd* of lUt ekuaetai ue lo tke Ulet Isnguge aspadiUr
comaioa vhk adhl: tku, adlijt&nk relating lo tAt loui oi mJ/) adbi-
y^JilA nJa(H»9 to Ue taerifiea, etc.

& A infbtl » is MBatiDes added to > final eODM>a>nt, u in i^ktBan
on tt< Hfoffom, ftvynf4 UHltl daybreak. Id a faw liMUnoea, tbe asSlz 7a
la ukBn (iee abOTe, ISlSm); ud in ana word the satfls In: Ikma, p«l-
p^pthlw hmtting ilu polk.

d. Tke prepositional conponndt an MpedaUi liable ta adTCTbial nic:
iee below, 1813 b.

Adjective CempeHmls it Nohm and as Adverbs.

1811. Compound adjeetiTea, like sjmple odab, ue freely nMd
* snbaUntively u ntntracts nnd collectiTes, especUIly In the nenter,
less ofteik in the feminiae; nnd tbey nre also mach nted adrerlHallF,
eopeoinlly in the KcnutiTe neater.

' Ik Tbe matter li entitled to lyeeiel notice only beeante certain bnu
of combination haTO become of ipedal freqnencr in theae dim, and becanw
tbe Hindu gtsmmaitan* luve made oat of tbem diitinet daaaea of com-
pounds, with sepalate namea. Thaie is nothing In tlie older langaage wUch
by its own merita ironid call for partlcalar lemark under thle Iteed.

131S. The snbBUntively used compounda baring a nomenl at
prior member, along with, in part, the a<tjective compounds them-
selveB, are treated by the Hindus as a separate elasa, called dvisiL

a. The name is a aample of the claaa, end neana of Ueo anot, said
to be need In the sense of tcorfA Ubo coat; aa also pafipagn bought for
fiot eotei, dvinAu teorth two Aip$, pAfloakapM* iHode in jfv* «c^, and

b. Vedio examples of nnmeial abstiaetg and collectiTes ate: dTirKjA
[eomiat] of two kingi, Crlyngi three ages, triyoJonA apace efthret laaguet,
tridivi the triple heaven, 'pafioayoJ<Ul& apace of fioe leaguet, jajoh* tit
day^ time, ia^ibgolk tenjingen' breadth; and, with snfflx ya, nahaarfthpyt
thoutand dagt" journey. Othms, not nnmecal, but essentially of the same
cbarieter, ere, far example: KOKmitri, freedom from enemiet, nikUblfi
freedom from guUl, saTldyat4 thundtrstoTTn, vibfdi^a heartleatHeet, and

ioy Google

■»13 ADjBonnt CoKFOinRM as Kouns and Adtbrbb. [—1319

B&liTdaya keariinett, radlT& pr<Mp»nty by day, tum^t, -uid auf AlranA
pTOtp»nty wiih baatta tmd birdt, Femlntnu of like nie ais not qaoUble
ftom RT. OT AT.; Iitei ocom ibcI^u trlqatl thrte htmdrtd, (481], trllokl
<A« (Area H>t>rMt, pattoamMI aggrtgate ofjhe root*.

• o. As Uie exunpln ihoir, the Moent of vordi thai nied ii tuIoqi ;
bat tt ii moie prettUlngly on the fliul sjUable tbtiD la the ailJeotlTe oom-
ponndi Id their oidlauy lue.

1818, Thow sdverbWly aaed acooMtiTeB of uoonduy adjeo-
tire compoiuidB which h»vf an Indeclinable or particle aa prior mem-
ber are reckoned . by the Hindu granunariana as a aeparata cUiu of
compoanda, and called bj the name »Tyivlbli&T&<

a. Thli term ii > derlTitiTB from the eompoand Teib (10S4) mids np
of Kfjay* yminfia^ti uid )/bhtl, aad aiecDi mniMmon to on ■aJscJnoi^
' b. The prepoiitloti^ eonpoandt (1810] ue a^odUiy fteqneot In tUi
nte; tbnt, for example, annfTadlUun by tttuf* onm mO, aUllpflTvAn
ind parovaf&m n> mtectttiim, ftdvihtoyfan up to lu?tlM, pnttidof&m tU
avenui^, aaaoak^fan m n^Af. Jnitaiicei elvaii hr tfaa gnnmulani ue:
•dhlhari ttpon ^or*', -spar^Hn teiih tA« Am;, upanadam ot Ttranadl
(MOT <A« rHi<r,*pratyagnl toward tha firt, pnttinlf am ooery (upM, alr^
makflkua tnfA froodom from JUtt.

O. A luge uid important alaai U made op of vordi hiving > relative
•dverb, eapedelly jrotbE, u prloi membei. Thna, for example, ratUviaf dm
M one «A«a*«a (Vi^a wiC), - yatbikrt&m at duna [i^or«], aceording t»
tuaf% yathtoamt Sy ni»n«, yathabliftgAin aocording to tmaral portion,
yattiltPgA'" aad jatbl^MWa /iinfi ^ Mni, Tutritkitiimtn wJUtAar on< wii^
jSTanmStrim m aeiiM buomts, yftva^lT&m a* joty m om Una,
yKvata&baadlia aeeordmg to Oto mtmbtr of rtlation*. .

d. TheiB eomponndi ue not aommoQ In the old luigvage; ByT haa
with yatliA anlT fanr of them, AT. anlr tan; and no ineb eomfMnd ii
uiad adjectively eioept yftaabre9tli& RT., y&vaaohraftbA AT. at good at
pottibh. fB. hia yathfikBrCn, yathCofirfn, yAthMdbna. y&tbakxatu u
■dJeetiTea (fallowed in each oaie by a correlative t&thS), The adjaottre aae
in the later language also la' qolte rare ii compared with the adveibtal.

e. Other oaaai than the aoenaative oecaalonally osoar; thna, initittmBiital,
at yfttbaeaifakhyeiia, yathftqaktyft, yathepaay*, yathlpratlgm^ ■ ;
and ablative, as yatbXaoltyat. . '

f. A olaas of adverb* of 'frequent aacBimnee li made with aa; *e. g.
Mkopam angrily, aSdanun retptetfuOy, aasmltam toiU a tmUt, Bavl-
fefam Mpeeially. ■

g. Oljier adverblil compounds of aqnlvalent character occur earHer, and
are oommon later: for eiample, ftAarm&m without work, nBnlratfaAm
on different eharioit, nbbayady^ Iteo dayt in tuoeution, oitrapadakrik-
mam with uondtrfitt progrttt, pradtnapBrma with mton^animint

■ of a gift; etc.

Whilnar, OianBiu. >. H. 33

Diaiiize. ..Google

XVIIl. COMPOeiTION.

Anofflalous Compounds.

1914> As in every iMipuige, coujJonDdB. are now ind then met
with which are of anonuloDH ohar&cter, ai exhibiting combi nations
of elements aot nsnally pot together, or not after each a method, or
for such a parpoee. Some of these, eapeoially of those oconrring in
the old langoage, may well be noticed here.

a. CompouDilB hiTlng s particle u final mein1>er: u, Sipmtf havmff
no equal, tnvlpratf mightUy oppotmg, itathJl ref^ttiag, vltatha fal«e,
yattaltstbA at it redUy w, s^aha protperity in eompaniomhip, tmllta
and Miamatrft hatiing no htra »nd no t/ondtr, ete.

b. Agglomenttona ottwo or more elementi ont of pbraut: tliai, &ham-
pilrv4 eager tob«ytr»t, atxttakxMmrk cotUett /or prelfimnenee, ttiM3ntin,^A
eonteet for pomeeeion, ItlbfteA Itgend (iti hi "an lAui, indeed, it teat),
naghunftri and naghbifA not, eurefy, dying oi eommg to harm, kavitwt
tome utJmovm pereon, tadldftrtbn Aotnnjr j'uft Otai oi own, kQold«itti£n
kaptng errande in every direetion, kleltkar& doing oA, eorle of tkmgt,
knhaoldvfd teherever found, akntaf cldbh^« out of alt danger, rad-
bhavlfra What-ie-to-be, etc.

0, AgglomanttoBi in «htch t&« prior member letaina a aTotaetie form:
a«, anyonya and paraspara one another, aTnraapara inverted.

d. Aggiepitloni irltiv the natural order InreTtad: e. g. pltainali4 and
tatXmaIi& grandfather, patrabata loitA An tone alain^ JSnTSkn4 and
-Jftavakta teith bended knee, dantaj&ta provided vith teetk, aomM^alijIA
derived of toma, pafiktlrKdhaa having groupe of gifte, gojara oldhuB,
agraJlhvi, agranBaikS, etc. tip of the tongue, of the note, ttc Compare
alio 1S91 o.

'e. Aggregadani of particlei were pointed ont* above (1111a); alto
(llflSe) caiM in whlnb ok and mt are tued in oompoaitlon.

f. In late Sanikrlt (perhapE aftir tbf ffalse snaloiT of eombinattons
like tad ana, viewed aa tadano, wlfh tad u item instead of nenter tccu-
' saUveJ, a prepoaltloo ia aDmetlmei compoanded aa final member itlth the -
nosn governed by It: c, g. TTk^ftdhas or v^kfRdhantftt under the
tree, dant&nta^ betmeen the teeth, bhaTanoparl on top of the haute,
BatyavlllS without truth.

Stem-finals altemi in Composition.

1816. Transfers to an a-form of declension from other leaa
common finals, which are not rare in Independent use, are especially
oommon in the final members of compounds. Thus:

a. A Item in an often dropa Its final consonant (eompara 4S8at
437): eiamplea are akq^a, adhva, arra, astha, aha, tak^a, braluna,
mOrdha, rija, loma, vr^ fra, aaktha, eKma.

Digitizecy Google

515 LOOBB COMflTBUOTIOM WITH COMFOtlSDS. [—1318

h. An 1 or I ia changed to a: eiamples ue aflfrola, a&Jala, aqr&,
knkfa, ktaftrft, DftdA. nibba, bhfluia, rBtra, saklia. * .

O. An a 1» added aftei ■ Anal eonBonant, and tometlmsi after an
a-'owal OT a diphthong (compare 388]: eiamplei tie jott, tvKOtt; udft,
pado, garnda; apn; dlmra, porn; alma, agnuiDa, udhna, rlj&a;
■iLaso, ayasa, fiyufa, orasa, enaaa, tamana, manaaa, y^u^a, r^aaa,
rahaaa. Taroasa, vedaaa. qreyaaa, earasa; bhruva, dlja, K^va,
gtva, nSva.

At More ipoiadie and anamaloD* uiea an loch at: apaima-da (-daat),
pafioa-^a (•fM)). tOUka^pa (-pad), qata-bhifft (-bhlfaj), vlpw;-ol
(•oit), yatha-pura (-poraa).

Loose Construction with Compounds.

131-6. Id the looaenws of nnlimited and fortnitona comblDation,. '
especially in the later language, it is by no means rare that a word
in composition baa ui independent vord in tbe sentence depending
npon or qnalifying it alone, rather than the componnd of which it
forms a part.

a. Eiimplet are: rSyiakftmo vlgTipenyasya (RV.) detirotu of
alt-ety'oyabh wealtk; aAh6r nruo&krih CRT.) emmrif reUeffrom diitrmt;
inahfidbaii6 &rbbe (KV.) tn grtat amteit and in amali; avAnKdi qrfii^
tbynkftma^ (^9^0 dtairing guptriorify over- hit fttUmt; briUima^Sfi
ahratafllaTTttsBampaiuiSii ekena-vA (AOS.) £raAfnan« endowed milh
learning, character, and behavior, or with ont [of the tAree]; olttapramfi-
tblnl bU& derSii&in api (HBb.) a girl dittarbiag the mimli even of
the godt - va^iftbatraoanftd jifSBt^^isaBy» oo "btiayo^ (R.) at the laordt
of both Vatv^if"' ""d Siihyaa'inga; titftdraTySpaharafe gasti^b^Ain
Safadhasya oa (H.) tn eate ofaleaUng ploughing implom«nt$ or wtc^ona
or medicament; Jyotlf)iih toadbyaofirl (H,) moving in the midat of the
eiari; dirap&traih oa mrnmayam (IS.) a aoodefi and 'an earthon
VMtel; syandane dattadntib (^.) with eye fixed on the chariot;
taamlnn nUambltamfta^ (KS8.) dead and hanging upon it.

Li,a,l,zec,y Google

APPENDIX.

A. The following teit is ^ven (as proposed above, 3) in order
' to illaBtrste by an example the variety of Sanskrit type in ns«. It
ii given twice over, and a traoelite ration into Bnropean letters foUows.
The text is a fable extracted from the first book of the Hitopsdegs.

Tlie HnntOT, beer. Boar, and Jaokal.

^ ?^ "(imtXii; I fwRjt T^Bii^ vi)4.i^f(i:
^^ ct: I JTiriR JJ^ >JhI ftvR ^r: ^^ ?h:. i

^TUT (iiflf^mr*! ^n^l'! 4i'i«ir*i ftrra <«l4'irfii^«^ ^ng^ ^-

Dij.ieo, Google

(ll9l4HlPl tnifTn nwifit HlSIU vi^Klld^lHM SI^S^ WWnftwWWF
in: I wf) ■! 4 Bo^ra 1

fiait kftl^AqakatakiTABtavyo blifiirKTO a&ma vyHdha^. aft
o&l 'kads mftAsalnbdhfth sftn dhanur ftd&ya vlndhyiltaTTtnadhyBifa
gfttfti;. tatra tana mrga eko vyKpadlta^ mncftm Kdl^ gaoobftU
tenft ■horUr'^ ankaro dfff^*- tatas tena mfgaih bhumSn ni-
dh^ft BtUura^ qarafft bata^ aiUuuievS "py Sgatya pralayacUft- .
naghoragarjanaifa k^trS aa vyU^o mof kads^e bataq ohlimadnuna
Iva pap&ta, yatah;
* Jalam agniifa vl^aih faatraih k;advySdU patanadi glre^

nlmlttadt klihoid ftsftdya debl prt^ftlr vlmuoyate.

Digitizecy Google

^18 Afpei«dis.

arthi tSo mrtaa mrKBTTKdbaalUufSa «p(M;yftt ftlokyft *ciiit«7ad

aaftu: aho bhScyam. maluul bhoj^aih s&mapoatbituu. atbATt:

ftolntitbii da^Uiftnl ynthU 'rS "yaaU dsliliiSm.

BnkUny apt tathft manye dftlvam atrK tlrioyat*.

blukvatn; rniili t"*^'^^*^ mAaatntyaib i**^ fti<tiffcaA bholMuA

ma bhavlfyati. tatafi pntthamabubboktSySifa t&vad imftnl svi-

diltil mUsKni vUiAya koda^iJ&tanDagiuuh mJ^nbandluuh vi»«^«i»it

'ty oktrS tathR 'karot. tata^ oMnne Bnftyubaadbe drutam ntpa-

Utana dhanwfft b^dl bblnnal; sa dlrgharkTab pafioatvaib gata^

ato 'haih. bravlml:

kairtftTyft^ ■tuho^yo nityaih kartavyo nft tlMufaoaya^;
atisaifaoayadofe^ dbanofft Jamboko hata^.

B. Hie foUorlng t«xt is given in order to illaatrate by a snlS-
eient example the usual method of marking kooent, u deMiibed
above (87). In tbemannfloripta, the acoent-aigns are almoat ioTariabl/
added in red ink. The text is a hTmn extracted &oin the tenth or
lut book of the filg-Veda; it ia regarded by the tradition *a nttared
by Tfcj voiee'{\. e. M* JTortJ or Zojfotl

Hymn (Z. 12B) flrom ttte Big-Teda.
^ ^R^liltm BiH^-jW^illft a^JlftRlHI II V, II

^ ^^n% ?rf^ .ffifulH jjyieJQ^ usIhhiu g^^ « fi n
rtT 4t1^ °fi^- 5^ ^^'«inI Hifi^sudtflH^ii 5 «

It ^f^ firlyU 4iiiilfii ft a^nifl rnrf^ ?t ^^m^ii h h

.?? "^'^ ^*3r fJ^lPl B^rfs^ 5^^ ^^^ ^ I

mzec^y Google

y^*^^ ^ ^ v( eiiHin»lmuji ^olniPj f^^ i

■ gft f|=IT 37 1^ ili6|!l2lHI*lHl Hf-pl ^ 4^ II ^ II

Hh&ih tudrdbhir v&aabblq oar&my ahim ftdltyl£r ati TiqT&-
derti^, ftbiuh mltiiT&ni^o 'bht blbbannr nbiin ludrKgni oh&m

Kfvino *bluL 1.
aUuh B^nMia ilhaniitnih blbbanor ahiuta tvift'^am nt& pfl^Ayaifa
j9Iii«tUD, ali&di dftdhBioi dr&vl^aifa bavifniftte aapr&T;& yAJa-

mBn&ra bhhtrU. 2.
aliioh rfiff^ uifag&manl T&aOiibfa dklto^I prathami yoJ&iy&nRm,
tiifa mB d«Tii vy hdadh^^^ puratra bblirlstliStiridi bhtii;

ftTe^&yRntim. 3.
inAy& B& iiuuun atti y6 yipif yntl y&^ prlt^lU y& lih qr^fity uktiim,
amKnt&TO miifa t& 6pa k;lyantl qnidhl qruta qraddhlviih te

vadaml. 4.
ahim evA evay&in Idith vftdfimi J&f t«di dev^btiir utA m^uqebhl^,
yikifa kfim&ye t&ih-tiun ugr&ifa ki^oml Uidi bralunltsjftdi t4in fflth

ah&ih radr^a dh4nuT £ tanoml brahmadvlffl tjke&ve b&ntavii u,
ah&ib J&nAya Bam&daih kfipom; ah&ifa dyjtvRprthiTi it vlvega. 6.
ah&di BnTe pit&ram oaya mOrdbiJi m&nui y6iilY apov hntA^ sa-
mndrd, t4to vi tlf^e bhfivKni lin t{qto ti 'mdib dylbfa Tarq-

nt&^d 'pa Bprg&mi. 7.
ah&m eT& vtta lya pr& vKmy Rr&bbamK^K bb&Tantnl v£^S,
par6 diva par& euit pptblvyai tlEvata mahlni bAiIi babhava. 8.

C Od the next page ia given, in ayateinatic arraDgement,' a
BynopslB of all the modeB and tenaeB reoogoiud u nonnally to be
iqade from every root in its primary conjagatl^, for the two common
roots bhu be and kf maJu [only the precative middle and peri-
phraetio f^tare middle are bracketod, as never really oocnrring).
Added, in each case, are the most Important of the verbal nouna and
adjeotires, the T>iily ones which it is needrnl to give aa part of every
Torb-syBten).

iiy Google

r

*■ «■ » C ff

iffir

I

3 3

i - ' » I M ' 1

I- I

II I I I I

14 t I r I

I

fl

t If i i I I k i

r

!

i=y Google

SANSKMT INDEX.

'Tkt ntvnamt* in both IndexM ue to puagiaphi. In tbU'one, muy
4bl>TeTUtio|iB ue uMd; bu It li bolinad tbit thay will be foniid mU-
expT^nlnj, For eiunple, "proD." ia pronnnciitlon ; "enph.'* 'pointa out
anything relating 10 phonetlo Conn oi enpbonle combination;' "piaft,", to
pteMnt-ayitem ; "Int." is IntcnaiTs; "dei." la deslderatlTe ; and ao on, A
pieAxed hn>ben denotea > aofflt; ana tppanded, a praAx.

a, pron. etc, 1&-22; combination
with foUair!Bg vowel, 126, 127;
loai of Initial after « and O, 135,
175a; loaaltlag aatent, 135a; not
liable to tOM, 235a; ligbtaned
to 1 01 D, 049; lost in ireakaned
ayUable, 253.

a, aa nnion-vowel in tenia- in flectloD,
621c, 631.

-a, pilmy, 1148; acdiy, 1308, 1209;
-A In -ak*, -1181; — R-itama,
ddn, 326-34; bom idcl t-at, 333,
■ 344; in oompan, 1270, 1287a.

H- CT an- megative, 1131a-c; In
oompsQ, 1283(1., 1288b. 1304a, b.

•Rka, pimy, 1181; aka-stema aome-
tlmes goTSTn aeeo*., 271c; ^odr]',
1222], h.

•akl, aee 1221b.

y-ftkf, pf., 786.

akgara, 8.

ak^&n, 4k«i, a43f, 431.

agtaof a, 34b:

yac ot alio, pf., 788b; ppla 956b,
967e; stems ending with, ^07-10.

•ft), 319a, 383k. 5.

yalLo, sea ao.

yaSii, enph., 219a; pies., 694,687;
pf., 788; tTft-ger'd, 991d.

rtOfitk, 1201 a.

-at, 383k. 3 — and aea -ant

-ata, see 1176e.

■atl, aea 1157 g.

•ata, tea 1161d.

-atnn, aea 119ec.

-atra, see 1185 o.

•atha, see lieSo.

-athn, see 1164.

I'ad, impf., 621o; c

•ad, 383k. 4.

adhl, loss of initial, 1(^7 a.

adhlka, In odd namben, i77a, 478b.

Van, auph!, 192b: piea., 631.

-an, 1160.

1160; stema in compsn, 1271,

,, 1042g.

-ana, 1
12961

anaiJTUi, eaph., 224b; dedn, 404.

-anS, 1150.

-anl, 1159.

-ani, 1150.

•aniya, 962, 965, 1215b.

ana, changed to Bun attar an-, 1087b,

-onn, aea 1162c.

anudStta, 81.

anudattatara, eOc.

annnftilka, 36a, 73*.

anavrata, with aooos,, 272.

ann^tnbh, enph., 161d.

annairfirai pion. etc., 70-3; trana-

llteiatioD, 73c.
fcTifliiAj^ dciD, 419.
•ant 01 -at, of pplu, 584, 11T2;

thcit dcta, 443B.

D,a*zec.y Google

Sanskbit Imdbx.

-utte, 1209 d.
Mita^thft, 31, 51 1.
■ntara, in oompsa, 18D21.
•KDti, >ee 1221c.
tauh, ddu, 523.
ftp 01 ftp, dcln, 161e, 393.
»pl, iMi or initUl, 1087 >.
•abb», 1199.

abllliiitllta-ciioaiiiflei, 84 e.
I/Am, pi«9., 634; Mt., 662.
-um, iofln. In, dTOij ganind, 1
-amK, «ee lt66b.

V'fth'COf

ilutn, d

&, proa, etc, 1^22j com'blDation of
Onal, 126, 127; eUrioii of inituL
136 d ; vrddlil of a, 236 ff. ; llth- .
tsned to t or 1, 260; to a, 260c;

•ri, dfla, ! „

•ara, ase 1192a.

VBTth, «>rc»lled, lOib, 1066, 1067.

ortito, in compsn. 1302h.

KejamAxi., dcln, 126 1.

Arvara, Arrant, 165.

ytah, pfei,,.613; pf., 788; «or,, 862;

de«ld., 1029b.
-ala, «ee 1189l».
alpSiPT&^a, 37 d.
yav, Mw., 838, 908; pplB, 9648r

toft, 968e; ya-gei'd, 992o.-
avft, lo«B of Inltitl, 1087 ».
-ava, Bee U»Oa.
svaffralia, 16.
f'ttTailhir, lo-uiled, 104b.
ava^U. ava;i, 406.
RVyayibhftva, 1111 d, 1313.
- I attain, pf., 788; mi., 834b,
"■" " "" inf.,

387-9, 847; fnt.,

868 d.
v'aq eat, pf., 803a; des., 1029b,

1031; 0^1., 1042d.
yM bt. piu., 636, 621e; pf., 800m;

in perlphr. eonln, 1070-2, 1073d;

In ppi^ periphr. phraBes, 1076 d;

in cmpd conjn, 1093, 1094.
Vm Oirmn, pies., 761c; soi., 847;

Fple, 956e; inf.^ 9B3c.
M final, eupb. tieatmsnt of, 175;

eiMptlontl cuet, 176.
-as, 1161 ; dcln of stemi In, 411ff.;

aa-ctems In eomp&n, 1278, 1296e,

1398 b.
•aa, in&n. In, 970a, 971.
aa4ii, &ar), 398, 432.
-asl, 1198.

&arJ, onpb., 219: and aee aa&n.
-aa«, infln. in, 970 c, 973 a.
aathioi, AatU, 9431, 431.
-aona, see 1196a.
•ason, see 1194<1.
Yah *ay, pf., 801 *.

, 661-6

ilf, e;

pple, 964c; in dn.,
. lOQSd.

t, witli abUtlTe, 2930, 983 a.

-a, 1149.

B-ttema, dcln, 347 IT.

-&ka, see 1181d.

-ftka, see 1181 d.

•&tU, aee 1161 d.

Stnutn, uBftd lelteilTely, 614i.

Btmane padam, 629.

adl, ftdlka, Adya, lo eompni, 1303 d.

-ftna, In pplea, 684, 1175; iu«d in-
stead of mBna. 741 a, T&2e, 1043 f;
-Sua In otber derivitlTei, llTSa.

-Knl, >ee 1223b.

-ftnu, *ee 1162c.

Urn 1IT1 ftjriVy A^ 36 a.

/ftp, 1087fi pf, 783d; aor., 8*7,

863; des., 1030.
ftbhS, In eompan, 1302L
Km, Impi. Sd itng. in, 618.
fimre^lta, 1260 d.
•Byana, 1319.
.«yl, 1230.

-a^a, 966c, 1061f, 1318.
'fira, ace 1188d, 1326b.
-aru, eee 1193a.
-ala, eee 1227a, 12461.
-ilu, see 1192b, 1327b. "
ytM, piesL. 619c, 628; Inl, 968d;

peiiph. pf., 1071c; In ppla] periph.

phrases, 1075 c.
Its, SB&n, aayk, 398 b, 432.
fia flaal, enpb. tieatment of, 177.

combinatiana of dnil,
139, 797f. i with pieceding a-To«el,'
137; from ya, 352, 784b, 769,
9221), 864 b; caaea of loss before
y, 233 a.

1, nnion-Towel, 264, 65Gb; in pna.,
630, 631, 634, 640; la pf., 796-8,
803; tn aor., 876b, 677; in fnt,

. 934, 935, 943; in pple, 966; in
iniln., 968; in des., 1031.

l-nema, dcln, 336 ff. ; from idd I-
at, 364; In-oompsn, 1376, 1287c;
aometlmea goveni accua., 271 f.

DlgitizecDV Google

Sanskrit Indbs..

Tft'gei'd, 992^, e; int., iO&lt,

1031b; wag., 10421; In ppUl

periphr. phrtse*, 994e, .1075a;

perlphi. conj., 1071f; Irieg. oomb.

with. preflxsB, 1087c; in compd

Mnjn, 1092b.
yi (In, tav] lend, 716a.
-i, pimy, 1166: sodrr, 1221.
-Ika, pim;, llgBi:; ecdrr,' mSj, I.
'IkS, fern, to -aka, II8I0, 12221.
i/ioh, 608b, 763b.
-y, 219», 389k. 5.
■It, 383k. 3; tdTbl, 1109>.
-It«rll76», b, d.
ftl. Diet of, 1102a-c; pecnliu wn-

■trnctioa wltb, 268b; ibbiBr'd lo

U, 1102 d.
-Iti, >ee 1167g.
-Itu, see 1161 e.
-itnn, lee 1196.
-ItM, tee 1186e. ^ '
i/ldli 01 indh, eupb.^eOc; aot.,

836, 837, 810 b.
yin (or inv), 699b, 709, 716»,

748 b.
-in, 1183, 1230; In-stemg, dcln,

438 IT.; In compiD, 1276, 1287 e;

tametimes goiern moqs., 271 b ;

-naad pBtttcipUllj, 960b.
•liM, see 1177b, 1209c, 1223r.
Imdifa, 1029 c.
•inajft, tee 1216d.
yloT, see In.
-ibbe, gee 1199a.
-ima, 1224*.
-iman, see llSei-h.
I7 in enph. comb'n from >n l-iovel,

129a-, c, d, 362b.
-lya, 1214.
{^£fa, 10290.
^ont, dcln, 461.
ir-Btemt, ddn, 392.
ira, seo 1188e, 1226b.
Ir^jrn. Iradha, 1021s.
ya, caag., i042b.
.Ua, lee 1189b, 1227a.
iTa, eapb., 1102.
•Iva, gee 1190a.
.Ivaa, tee 1173b.
>'lB dtaira, prea., 606 b, 763 b; inf.,

968d; deeid., 1029b.
flf tend, cans., 1042 b.
-1^, aee 1197b.
-iftba, 467-70, 1164.
-ipju, 1194,
-iB, 1153; iB-ttemg, dslo, 411ff.

1, pron. ete., 16, 20 22; combina-

tioin of Ontl, 126, 129, 797f;

with preceding a-Towel, 127; eii-

cnmBeied, 128; . uneomblnable in

dual etc., 138; i aa tinal of gtem

in verbal oompm, 1093, 1094.
1, anion-iowei, 254; In ttnte-in-*

flactlon, fie6b, c; of pies., 632-4;

of Impf., 621, 631-4; of B-aoi.,

860b, 888-91; or Int., 1004(r.;

I for i, gOOb, 936a, 968d, f.
I-ttemg dcln, 347ff.
-I, 1166; to i before added afi, .

471b, 1203 d, 1237 c, 1239b; in

oomptB, 1249 d.
-ika, >ee II860.
yikf, aor., 862; degid., 1029b;

periph. pf., 1071c, 1073a.
y\4, pre>., tt28, 630; pf., 783d.
Ita- for et&-forms in optative, 738 b,

771d, 1032a, 1043c.
-iti, se* 1167g.
-itu, gee 1161 e.
-Ina, pimy, see 1171b; sodry,

1223d.
-Iman, see 1168],
iya, conj.-gtem, 1021b.
-iya, 121B,
-lyae, 467-70, 1184; gtemt tn, dcln,

463 ff.
Vlr-, pres., 628; pf., 783 d, 801 d;

pple, 967b.
-Ira, leo 1188 a.
-Ira, see 1190a.
ylo, prea., 628, 630.
iQVaFa, with laBn., 984, 987.
l^H, enph., 226 a.
•I^, aee 1197.
yih, enph., 240b.

iW; with ptaceding a-vowei, 127;
from va, 252, 784, 769, 922b,
954b, 966d; eaaoa of loss before
T, 233afflrial u gnnated in ledty "
derivation, 1203 a.

n-gtems, dcln, 335 ff.; from rdd fl-
it., 354: desid. n-gtems govern
accni., 271a.

-n, 1178; -a In -nka, 1180a.

-lika, 1180; atems Bomatimei govern

■ aeons., 271g.

Okf&n, dcln, 426b.

yaob, 608b, 753b.

yqjh, perlpht. pf., 1071 c.

Ugil.zec., Google

.Sahskkit Iksez.

|/ttfioh, piM-, 768,

untdl-iufOzet, 1138).

-ut, 383 k. 3.

-DtM, see 1185&

-ntr, see llSSb.

-nUM, BBS 1163d.

ynd ot and, prei., 694a, 768 a

pple, 967d; dg^d., 10296. '

<iA, Ad^a, ddui, 398b, 4%1.
udStta, m.
>iuiA, >ee UTTo.
-onl, aee llC»8a.
npftdhmKniTK, 69.
j/ttbi, 101., 862.

t/ubb or Dmbh, pie«., 691, 7fi8«.
■Ubha, »ee UWe.
abhira, dolu, 626e.
ur 01 UB » 3d pL ending, 169b.
ur-M«iiu, ddo, 392, •
•nn, lee 118Br, 122Ab.
-uri, 1191*.
. -nU, .be 1189b, 1227..
ar In eaph. comb'a Mm an u-tow-

el, 12fl»,c,d, 862b, 697*,
a^Mua, nq&nil, dcln, 960 1, 116.
Vof, pieg., 608 b: yK-ger'd, 992 b;

peripht. pt, 1071 f.
-M», aee lJ97o. •

n«M, enph., 168*; ddo, 4i5b.
-U^ see 1221c.
ufijih, eupb., 223b.
-hb, 1164: OB-itema, dtilq, 411 It.
nst, 371].
lis 01 ur u 3d pi. ending, 169b.

a, pron. etc., 19, 20, 22; combtaa-

ttoQi or final, 126, 129, 797 f;
• with pieceding a-iowel, 12T; clr-.

comflezed, 128; nacomMnable in

dual, 138 a.
&-Btemi, dcln, 34711.
-fl, 1179.
-Oka, lee 1180^.
-atf, B«e 1182b.
-tktha, a«e 1163d.
Adhan, Adliar, ddha< 430d.
tioa, in odd DambenrT??*, 478b.
-ana, aae 1177 o.
-TllM, gee 1188 f.
ArJ, enpb., 219 a.
varan, ie-ulled, 101b, 713; pt,

80lg, 1071e; ya-ger'd, 992c.
-n^,. gee 1197c.
tt^rnan, 31, 59.
yah remotte, Infla., 968c,' ya-ger'd,

992c. -

f , pion. ato., 23-6; objadioufcla
piOBnndatiDD and tnndlUnlbB
aa fl, 24ai qneatlan of ^ war in
roota and itenu, lOid, e, 237;
eomblnathma o( final, 129, 129;
witb pAoedlng a-TOwel, 127; tt-
Mpdou, 137 a; Impedei ckaivo (i.
pwoeding a to ;, 181a; cliaiga
aocoeedlng a to q.,-189[a.; piM
and v^ddhl ineremcnta of, 230l; '
Inegolu changea, 241, 243; tad-
.able Unal f of loota. [ao-oalled fL
242.

(■Toota, root-noDDs bom, 389 b, g

r-atema, dcln, 369 ff,

f, vailablB (ao-ulled |^, nwta Is,
242, 245b; their paadTe, 770c;
aoT., 68&^p0b; piec, VXlt,; Int.,
936 a; ppTe, d67b ; loot-tDfln., 971 ;
genmd in ya, 992a.

)/r, enpli.. 212c; ptas., 608a, S9ea,
753b, T43d, 646, 716ai paidn,
770c; pf., 783a; aoi. , 631*,
8S7b, 810b, 8i7, 853, 862; pple,
W7h; int., 1002c; una., l(mi;
oaDB. aoT., 1047.

•r, aee 1182h.

fi, ri , bad tiansliteratloni foi f , f ,

yvo ot aro, pf., 788a; aor, 863,
■ S94d, 897b; ya-gei'd, 9Q2b.
yiftitL 608, 763b; pf., 768b.

yr&J «iij 01 arj ttretA mtt, pi«*.,
76ea; pf.^788b; aor., SftiO, 69Tb.

Kr^v, 716 a.

•rt, 363 k. 3.

rtvi], eopb., 219.

yri, pple, 957 d.

yidh, piea., 694; pf., 788*; toi.,
. 832, 837, 836, 640*, 847, 663;
dea., 1029b, 1030.

rbltnkf&ii, doln, 484.

VXf. pf., 7e8b.

rh&nt, doln, 460 e.

f, pron. and occnrronee, 28-6; ob-
jectionable pionnnciatlan and tram-
llteiaMon aa p, 21at. m ■Uagad
final or cooU, 104d,242 (andia*
r, Tailable); cbange* aaouodUig
n to 9, 189ff.

. DigilizecDV Google

SANtOCBR IttDU'.

), pTOB. uid oocnnence, !13-d; ob-
Jeotlontble ptonntidttloii and truii^
Htentlon m }1 oi M, !U«; lU
gm^a-lnctement, 296.

p, ^ei, bid tnnilltetttloiu fot)^!^^.

I, 23^

Tovel, 127; nncomblntble In dud
ete., 1384, b, f; gn^a of 1 uid I,
335ff.; flam ladiul i, 260d; ■■
■Ileged floal of Tooto, Ibi, 761 f.

«, iDflD. In, 970a, 971.

SkL dcln, 4691, b; used u irUcle,
482c; In miUng 9^ 477 >, b.

flkaorutl, 90 c. .

ysdli, pr, 790 e; Hesld., 1029 b,
10311); periph. pf., 1071c

■ena, 1223e. -

-miTS, 9e6b, 1038, 1217.

-•ya, 1216.

-ejya, 1216 b. ■

-«m, Bee 1201«, 1226b.

•era, see 1192..

•eltma, 966 d lllOli.

ef&a, eaph., J76a.

fii, pron. etc., '27-9^ colnblnatlon
with flnal a-TOvel, 127; ai hul,
131-3 ; TTddU or 1 and I, 236 tr. ;
as alleged final of roots, 2G1, 761 e;
' foi nnion-TOwel i In ten ae-in flec-
tion, bCi^e; foie in' tub], endings,
661 ».

SI ae gen.-ibl, endlog, 366d. .

i31,-132, 134, 135; before aufBi
ya, 136b; nncomblottble, 138e, f;
foi flnU aa, 176, 176; ar, 179a;
sb^a'of n and % 336 ff. ; ai alleg'
ed final of loota, 251, 761 g.

odi, enph., 137b.

-otr, eee 1162b.

odana, euph., 137b.

-ora, aee 1201?

Oftba, eupb., 137b.

offbra, 49.

^I'pioo. etc., 67-9; makea beavjr
■yllable, 79; oeonnenm >• flnat,
148, 170i; tot Ifae Ublal and gnt-
tnral bplunta, 170 d; &om final b,
146, 170a, 172; from r, 144, 178;
allowa ehange of ■ to q, IBS.

A or ih, pTOD. etc., 70^3; makes
beiTT syllable, 79; ocoattence at'
final, 146; alloirs ohsnge of a to
»,20i,212,219e.

k, pron. ato., 39, 10; relation to o,

42; to Q, 64; a to a after, 180ff.;

added to Anal fi,211; from o, by

rereitton, 214fl.; o Dual, and In

Internal oombinatipn 142, 217;
. from q, do., 146, 216; bom f,

266e; snomilonsly from t, i61a;

to t, 151 c.
•ka, prmy, 1166;.scdr7, 1322; ka

In -uka, 1180a; in -aka, 1181.
-kftta, see 124Bk.
ka^t^iTa guttural, 39.
VteKi, pf., 786 e; aor., 899 d.
|''katb, io-«a]1ed, 1066.
i/kam, aoi., 868; pple, 9S6*.
kampa, 78d, 87 d, BOb.
k&mvant, eaph., 212.
-kara, 1301 a.
karmadh&rara, 1163 a. '
)/kal, una., 1042g.
kalpa In compan, 13021.
ykas, pple, 966 b.
ykS, Int. (?), 1013 b.
kBma, *Ith aoetiB., 272; in oompsn,

vlth Infia.-stem, 968g.1
kamya as denom.-slgn, 1065.
kara, In BOnnd-namea, 18.
>/kaq, Int., 1017.
ykfts, periph. pf., 107) f.
kfTant. dcln, 461.
ykir, 766,

ykirt or kft, so-oalled, 1066.
i/kn, prea., 633,
ylnio; ^cana., 1043h.
ykup, prea., 761a; aor., 640b;

pple, 966 h.
>/kumfiT, so-called, 104b.
knvid, accent of yerb witb, 696 e.
VkT mait, prea., 714, 716, 866a;
. pf. 7970, 800k; aor. 831, 834a

-40,. 847, 894d; int., 10D2g, b;

preOies a, 1087d; in perlph. eonjn,

107&-3; Id eompd oonln, 1091-4;

apeelal constractioni, 266a.

UgilizecyGoOgle

SAEtsEBiT Index.

u., 766;
7d.
1002 d.

1019 b.
ykft cut, pr«i., 1

862a; fnt., 935t..
'■k^. Bee llOa.
kii-iufflieg, 1183l
-krtvas, sea 1106.
ylqp, ptw. , 7451

CMB., 1042b.
krgA M ppl^ fi58.
vi^ 102.; Bopli., 228f; pf. 790.

847,

834b;

•^d

920>; tat., 9(t5a,
i inf., 968d.
26; pf., 786«; fnt, fl35b.

-kni, see 1176(!.

j'knfl, cioi., 10421.

yiaand,pf., 794il; mt., 847,861>,

680b; int., 1002g, ii, 1017.
ykrom, prea., 74dd; aor. 838, 847,

8e9d, 904a; fnt. 9S6b; pple,

955>; inf.; 968d; tvfi-gu'd, 991b;

dM., 1031b; ciDi., 1042i; in

perlpht. mq]., lOTOc.
ykrl, Mue., 10421.
ykrii, cans,, 1042n,
)/kmdh, aor., 847.
ykTW}, aot., 9ie», 920a.
br&Bta, kroBt^. 343k, 374.
yUam, proi., 745d, 7ei>, 763;

pple, OlKia.
Vli:lld, pple, 9&7d.
»Oi:Ug, aor., 916a.
ka, eomblaationa of, 146, 221.
l^tm, pple, 954d; inf., 9S6e.
VkflMD, ptes., 763; fnt, 935b;-

pple,' 965a, 966b; inf., 968d;

cans., 1042 g.
fca&m, dcln, 388.
i/kMT, aot., 890.
ykqal, cau«,, 1042n.
Vt^R, prea., 761e; pE'e. S57a, ■
ksfima aa pple, 9!i8.
yul potaeu, piea. , 765; cau».,

1042 d, I.
y'ksl deetroy , pres. , 761 b ; fat,

93?ia: pple, 967a; ya-g^d, 922a;

cans., 10421.
ykfud, pple, '967 d.
VTEfudh, preB., 761 a; aor., 847.
yk«ubh, pple, 956b.
kqUpnt-clicnmflei, 84*.
vic^Qu, prea., 626.
. V'k^d, pple, 9!^7d.

kh, pron. etc, 39; relation to f, 61b.
fkium ot kU, 102a; past., 771;

pf., 794e; aoi., 890a; pple,9&5b;

inf., B68e; ra^er'd, 992a; oat.,

1042 g.
V^ha, 102 a.

pUUd, pf., 790b; pple, 967.d.
Klchud. khim. Int. 1002g, b.
ykhya, tot., &47, 894c; fnt, 936e.

g, pron. etc, 29; relation to j, 43;
&om J b; revision,- 214 ff.

gata, In oompin, 1273c.

ygsm. 102a; pres., 60Sb, 747.
%6a; aw., 833, 834b, «t7-40,
817, 881 e, 887b; pf., 794o,805a;
fut, 9t3a,' pple, 964d; tat,
1002g, h, 1003; de«., 102Se, 1031b:
cans., 1042«; raot-oonif, 383L

ygAl, Int., ]002d.

Vti-go, 102a: pre<., 660; aor., 838,
836,839,884,8940; dedd., 10284.

ygft ting, 2S1; prea., 761e; un.,

894d, 912; pple, 961o; inf.. 96St;

ya-get'd, 992a; cana.. 1042 j, k.
VgUi or ^nii, pple, 966e;- int,

1002d.
ygtr. bU. 766; cao.., 1042b.
yga, int., 1002d. .
guija, 27, 235 ft.
VKUp, aor., 863*; inf.. 968c; yv

gfli'd, 992o; dee., 1040.
l/pir, pre*., 756; aor., 834*; pple,

957b.
ygnb, enph., 106b d 233b, 240e;

praa., T45c; pf, 7931; aor., 847,

852, 916a, 920a, t; Inf., 968e;

ytt-ger'd, 992c; cans., 1042b.
ygp sing, enph., 242b; aor., 894d.
ygr tiBalhw, enpb., 242b; pre*.,

7*56; aor., 836; inf., 968d; int.

10024.
VBT (oTjagr) WW**, 1020; aor., 867,

87f.
ygrdh, pf., 786*: aor., SH. '
k6, eaph., 134a, 236b; deln, 361<, f.
gdbB. gdM, 233 f.
Vgrath or gnntl), proa., ^a;

pf., 794h; MQB,1042h.
j/grftbh 01 grail, enpb., 166 b, 333g;

pre*., 723, 729, 731, 732, 9014,

1066b: pf., 794o, 8011; aor.,

834b, 847, 900b, 904*, b; fnt,

93ee; pple, 966d, e; infln., 968f;

paat., V98fj de*., 103ib; caut.,

1042b.
ygroa, pple, 956 b,

D,a,i,zec.,Gooylc

Sanskbit Indes.

v'BU, dim., 761e: M»., 912: pple,
'^7.ro..i, 1042J.
gU&, dilD, 361a.

Ch, pran. etc., 30j h deilTed fKna,

W; from h, b; tevenlon, 211ff.,

403.
yehKi, UDB., 1043g.
V'Kluu, enpb., 167, 233r; Jakf

bom, 640: pf., Te4di ht., 833,

847; pplB, 9&l8.
gho^avftat, 34.
ygtiti, pies., 6Tl,749si trft-gu'd,

001 A ■ t.a-iF.F'rl 9(l9.i>- nna

Other mates, 303a; In Intenul
ooinbliiitiDii, 220; dapliutioo be-
tween Tonela, 227; cioh for, 227>.

ab& present-iteins, 608.

y-ohad, pple, ga7d.

ydund, tor., 863a, 890b; cm*.,
1042 g.

yeb&, piu., 7eSe; pple, 964c;
trTA-gei'd, 991 b; o<u., 1042k.

i/ohld, piM., 694b; pf., 806b:
aqt., 632>, 834d, 647, 887a;
pple, 967 d.

y^ohor, eaai., 1042b.

yobrd, pple, 967 d ; tvS-ser'd , 991 d.

fi, pron. etc., 39; oocDireDce-a final,
143, 387. 2, 3, 407a; dnpUoition
KB flual, 210; addB k be/Dis ilbi-
lant, 211.

c, pion. etc., 12-4; u final, 142;
from t before a palatal, 202a,
203; n to £k before it, 208b; inter-
Qal comblnatioDB of, 217; leTenloD
to k, 216fr.-, tn pret., 681; pt:,
787; Int., 10021; de.., 1028f.

yookSa or Mk&Q, Bo-caUBd, 677.

Voakq, prea., 4Ua, 621., 628, 676.

MtoT, doln, 482£, b.

yotaa, prat., 74Gd; pple, SBda;
cana., i042g.

yOKT, enpb., iVU; aor., 699d; pple,
957b; inf., 968 c; trll-gei'd,
991b, c; int., 1002d, 1008, 1017;
det., 1031b; In pplal peilphr.
phrasea, 1076b.

yoarv, pple, 966a, 957 b.

yoftl. int., 1003; cans., i042g.

yoBy, prsB., 761 B;'tv&-ger'd, 991 c;
ya-ger'd, 992b; periphr. pf., 1071f.

y<A gather, reversion of o to k,
2161, 681, 787 1028f; prea., 716b,
855.; aor.. 889; tTR-gerM 991d;
ya-gor'd, 992a; can*., 10421.

yoi note, prea., 645!; aor., 834a.

ydt, raTerslaD of c to k, 2161,
681, 788, 10021, 1028f; pf., 790b,
601a; aor., 840a, b; Int., 10021,
1024; dea., 1040; cana.. 1042b.

yb^%. pf., 790c.

yoyn, pt, 786»; aor., &40b, 866,
867, 866a, 870; Inf., 968c; cava.,
1043 e.

oh, pion. etc., 42, 44; aa final, 142;
from g after t or n, 203; after

J, pron. etc.; 42-4; .ag flul, 143;
in Internal combinatioD , 219; n
to fi before it, 302b; from t be-
fore lonant palatal, 202a; reret-
Blon to g, 215ir.( in pt, 787; Iti
dea., 1028f.; before Da of pple,
9tt7c; anomalodaly changed to d,
151 c

yi*k^, 103a; Bnph., 233f; prea.,
640, 676; pple, 954e.

j&gttt, dcln, 450d.
Jagdtaa etc, 233 f.

v-jan, 102a; ores., 631a, 646, 680, "
76ib, 772; pi., T94b; aor., 834b,
904d; pple, 955b; Inf., 968e;
dea., 1031b.

jkaL ddn, 343f.

JanUB, ddn, 415o.

yjap, pple, 966b; Int., 1002d, 1017.

VJombb or Jabb, inf., 968e; iai.,
1017.

yjaiv, pf., 790c.

yiaa, aor., 671.

yjft. 102 a.

yiSgi, Bo-called, 104b, 1020; pf.,
1071 e.

jfitya-clrcumfiex, 64 b.

VJl conquer, leiarelon of j to g.
2161; In pf., 787; in dea., 1028f;
aor., 839, 889, 894b, 904b; fat.,
935a; eana:, 10421; eaoa. aor.,
1047, 861b; pertph. pf., 1071f.

Vjl iryure — eee jyft.

VjiDV, 7I6», 749b.

Jlbv&mallra, 39a, 69.

j/jlv, aor, 861a; dea., I028h, 103il>;
cana., 1043n.

yjnp, prea., 766, 766.

yjof, aor., 634b, 836, 840b>, In
B^Aa, 226 a, 392 b.

V-ju, pre*., 728; pt., 766«.

D,a,l,zec.,G00glt

BakbbXu Inoex^

piet., 7Se, 766i pf., 793h, TMk:
pple, 957b: otiu., lOi^e.

VJt*, fin., 790b, 731; pf, T90bi
■or., 830, 838, 894(s, 911; Mtu.j
10i2ji cam. mi., 1017, B61b;
etiu. del., 1030; c4DB..pple, 10Mb.

VJyS 01 jl, piM., 761b; pf., 785»,
7Ub; «>i., 912; pple, 064^

yjri, tor., B97b.

VivH, aw., 8»94; ems., 1042s.

jb, pnm. and oemirsDM, 43; u
flnil, 142; tn Intero*! oombloitlon,
MOb.

Sra

pioD. etc. , 43; fram n (ftar >
laul, 301; before j, 302b; o,
■" - 308b.

t, pTDn. «te., 46, 46; from a flnal
paUlal, 142; tj, 146. 318; 4, 14b;
li, 147; ftdda t before b, ISee;
added to final 9 befDre ribllant,
311; ftom J in Intemal combina-
tion, 218; Ob, 230; k^ 221; h,
232; 9, 22Bb. ■ . •

' fill pran. eta., 46, 46.

^ pron. etc., 46; ordlnair derivation,
46; 1 naedlbi.^a, 64; from d with
piae^ing libiUnt, ]98d, 199d.

^h, pron. etc., 46, 46; Ih a«ed tot,
' 64; from dh wltii pteMdlng tlbl-

lant, leSil; from h vlth following

t 01 th 01 dli, 233b.
dtavun or dbvam, 226e, 881b,

901a, 924 a.

9, proD. eto., 46; ordinary derivitlon,
46; u flnal, 143; ohangs of n to,
16ft-96; ftom.n with preceding
•tbnant, 199b; aoabled aa flnal,
310; addi t before a liblluit, 211.

t, pron. etc., 47, 48; from flnal
radical ■, 146; do. In intemal
combn, 167, 166; with preceding
ionant aspirate, 160; laiim. to
fallowing 1, 162; added after (
before S, 19Se; after n before a
or q, 207; to palatal before pal-
atU, 302; before q, 203; anoma-
loDsly changed to k, 161a; to (,
161b; bom k and J, 161 e.

-t, added after ■hbrtHnal rowel of

root, 346, 376b, SBSf-h, 1143d.

1147d, fl96a, 1213a; bregulax

oaiea, 1147 e.
-te, or pple, 962-6 1176; te^tAnu

In compln, 1279, 1384; iedrjr,

1346e.
»taAs 01 taa. pf., 794d: Mr.,847.
Vesica, prei., 638; pf., 7Wb; ppla,

966 a.
yU4, eaph., 1980..
tatpnrofa, 1263 a.
Utddhlts-iofflsM, 1138 a.
i^tan ttr*ttA, past., 772; vUJUL.

80ba; aoT., 833a, 834b, 847,

88ie, 890a, 8994; pple, 964di

y»<geT'd, 992*; de«., l028a.
-tftDk, 1346 gwi.
tuiQ aa refl. ptonoon, 614b.
Vtap, pTei.,7«il>; aor.,834d,233v

8ti6a; fnt., 936b.
ytun, pni., 763; aor., 847; pple,
. fl5Ba; inf., 966e.
■tarns, 471-3, 487f, g, 1243a, b.
•Mmam and -twnftm, llile, 1119.'
■txr», 1346a.
-tayo, Infln. in, 970e, 976.
-tur, aee 1109a, and 'tf.
-tarn, 471-3, 1243a, b.
•tAram and tarftm, 1111*, 1119.
-tarl, inan. In, WOl, 979.
-tavant, pple.ln, 959, 960.
-tav« and tarU,. infln In, 970b,

972.
•tavya,- 962, 964, 12121
ytta, see tafia,
■tas, 1163; adTbl, 1098.
-ti, 1237.

839, 1011a, 1032a, 1043d.
AU, 3^k, 1238; adrbl, liOOb.
-Ultl, 1238.
v'tl^, pre*., 761a; perlphr. pf.,

1071 f,
UOaVya, 44a.
•U, 1157; U-itema tn ooonni, 1374,

1287d; icdry, 519, 1157h; ad*bl,

1102 a-d.
yty, enpb., 31fla; del., 1010.
•Utha, 1343e.
ytix, 766, 766.
V-tu, prei., 633; pf., 786c; aOi.,

SeSa; ln^ 1003g.

-tu, 1161, 970J), 973.

ytaj, cao«:, 1042b.

l/tnd, prei., 768; pple, 9674.

D,a,l,zec.y Google

,tain, Infln, Id, 968,. 970b, 972,

987, 988.
ytur, piea., 756, 766; dM., lOaSi:

emt., lM2b.
-tur, llS2g.^
ytol, una., flU^b.
f'tnf, una., 1042b.
ytr, enpb., 242b; dim., 709; 7 IB e,

766, 766; pf., 7»4k, 80!f, 804;

aoT., 904 d: pple, 957 b; iaf.,

-tr, 043, 1182; tr-itema, doln, 369ff.;
- goveA> aecns., 271 d; •nibtl use

of, 946; mike ptiilpbt. fat., 942-7.
troa, eapb., 233 1.
tfta, tfisjA, «npb., 243.
ytfd, w>r., 836D, 837.; pple, 967 d.
ytTP, prei., 710, 768; pf, 786»;

rot.,~936d; wt., 847, 852.. ■
ytn, pf., 786a; Mt., 840b, 847.
i/trh or tiAli, enpb., 223b, 224b;

piei., 694^, 696; tor., 847; 916a.
UxjiM, dclD, 416b.
-toB, infin. in, 970 b, 972.
tU ftr dftta, 956f, 1087 e. •
ttl for dSti, 1167 c.
•too, 1246e, h:
-tnur 1196.
tman, ddu, 4tBb.
-tyii, for -ya, 992; scdiy, 1246 b-d.
ytyni, 1087f: enpli., 219.; pf,

786«; fot 935b; pple, 956b.
-tyM, InllD. In, 970*, 976 ».
-tr», 1185; or trt,' i^rtl, 1099.
Vtnp, ft., 794h.

tri, dcln, 482.,

, 687 d,

eompiDt

. -trl, see 1166g.
triatftbb, enph., 16id.
-trt, 376 e, 1182.
■tni, eee 1186g.
•tra, jcemndlTtl, 96Si, 1209b ; sodrr,

•CntS^ 1239 d.
•trw, lee 11^.
-tvana, 1240.
ytVKT, cam., i042B.
-trara, see 1171.
-tri, 990, 991, 993.
-trinam, 993 e.
■tv^B, 993b.

ytvi^, pre*., 621»; aoT,916x -

-tTl, 993 b.

•tvlnam, 993 c.

ytaar, aor., 890a, 89gd.

th, piOD. etc., 47, 46; iritb preted-

ing i6Daat aspirate, 160.
•tha, 11B3; ordlual, 487c, 1242d;

or tb&, adTbt, 1101.
-tham, adibl, lee 1101a.
-th&, aee tha,
-tbftt, ulTbl, aee llOla.
-tba, 1164.

, 160c; aoi.,

sas, 83ei), 858, 847.
V'dad, 672; p(., 794 J.
VdadlL, 672; enph., 166e, t60c.
dadhiin. didhl, 3431, 431.
d&n, euph., 389 b. •
d&ut, dcln, 396.
dant^ 47.
ydabh. or dambh, eapli., 166b;

pf, 794h; aor., 833; dee., 1030.
j/dam, pre*., 763; pple, 965 a; trt-
. ger'd. 991 b.
-dam, adTbl, aee 1103b.
j/day, pres,, 761 f ; peripb. pf , 1071 f
T/darldrS, so-oaUed, 104b, 1024a;

pf., UJTle.
ydal, una., 1042;.
V'dao or daAq, proa., 746; pf.,

794 d; tvB-ger'd, 991 d.
|/das, aor., 847, 852b, 899d.
ydali, eoph., 165b, 4, 223.; aor.,

890a, 897., 444.; fot., 935d;

inL, 1002 d; del., 1030.
yds givt, pres., 667-9, 672, 366 a;

pf, mt; aor., 830, 834a, 836;

837, "839, 847, 884^94c: pple,

966f, 1087 e, ll67c; inf., 968fi

tvK-ger'd, 991b; ya-ger'd, 092 a;

d*»., 1030, 1034 b.
yda dMtU, 251; prea., 763a, 761g;

aor., 634i; pple, 964c, 966f,

967., 1087e, lt67c; ya-ger'd.

i/dA proteel, aUeged, pf , 787.

-da, adrbl, 1103 a b.

.dsmm, advbl, 1103c.

ydhq, prea., 444, 639o; pf, 790b,

I. ed.

L:,j,i,....,LiOOgle

Sakbkkit Ikdex.

-di, >dTbl, ll<@a.
did76t etc., 336 e.

V'dlv,

0 diT.

; WT.,9i6,920>;

div, dchi, f
r'diQ, aqph., -^ISi

IBL, 1017.
Kdlb, enpb., 166l>,223>; Mt- 91S.
Vdlkf, dM., 1031 bj Mu,, 1042 D.
fdldi, *o-ollsd, 676; pf., 786b.
|/dldlil, io-Ml1ed, 104b, 67Si pf.,

786b; w»., 897b.
^dlp, lOr., 861 >.

ydlvplay, enph., 240b; piM., 765;
. pple, 966e; iof., 068e.
ydlv at der Jamraf, pple, 95Ta;

inr, 968*.
ydD or do, ptei., 716b 1 pple, 957a.
dnoobonf, enph., 168b.
Vdadh, 102ft.
ydna, eaph., 240c, UMa; un.,

847; am., 1042b.
Abe-, 236>, 1 131 ; In compgn, 1284 4, b,

1288e, t, g, 1304c, d.
ydnh, anph., i56b, d, f, 923&; pros.,

S21, 636; pf.,80lh; ur., 916,

9204-f.
KdTi»«n!«,eQph., 242e; pf., 793l(;

pple,' 957b; IqL, 10O2d, 1003,

1023; uo*., 1042e.

dTlffD, 1

Vdvla, «Dph.,226d,ri pieL, «21i;
ur^ 916, 930b.

db, piOQ. etc, 47, 48* from tertfc
liftei Bonint uplnta, 160; h. fDn.
223 g;

•dllA, lee -dha.

ydJtuun 01 lihina^ pre*-, ~fiO; paw,
772; aoT., 912; ppltr, 96&b; ji-

ydfp, wr., 847; fnt, 936b, 836 d.

ydM, anph., 218»; pf., 790i!, 80te,
806b; Mr., 832, 834b, 836, 840b,
847, 890», B84>; fat., 936d; put.,
99Sf; root noon, ddn, 386. 3.

dfO, d^B, drksA, with pran.-tteou,

oia

ydfh «r drAh,euph., lO&b, 223b,d ;

pree., 758, 761b, 767; pf., TW*.

devanlgari, 1.

l/dfut, pr., 786a; aor., 840a, b,
847, 86Sa, 690a; iat, 1002g;
' eaos., 1042b.
-dyua, »ee 1105b.
ydrS run, pple,-9&7a; lot, 1024a.
ydrK fiMp, aor, 912; pple, 954c,

967a; Int.

,, Iffki
i/dm, pf., 797ci aor., 86fi

IOI81; UDB., i042e.
i/drtUl, enpb., 156b, d, 1'.

aor., a34d, 847, 920g, t.
dvtuidT&, i262a.
Avit, doln, 388. 3.

ydtut

-9,

, 992a.

SS:

eapb., 233 g; ptta^ 6

Inf., 968 1; tvirfvfi, '

1028d, 1030, 1031a; in pmipki.

too]., 1070o.
ydhS mek, 261; pree., 761 f; aor.,

668; pple, 9Uc; inf., 968f; J^

gei'd, 992a.
-dlis 01 -dha, adTbi, 1104.
ydliftT ruMs, pple, dliftnti, 9M«.
ydhl (or dlilnv), 716a.
dM, final of compds, ll56g, 1276b.
ydtaa 01 dhn, proa., 712, 7%.,

755; pf., 790b; aor., 8684, 88(7.;

Int., 1002g,'1003, 1018t; cm*.,

1042 m.
yabOrr, aoT., 687o; dei., lOffih.
ydhf, prat., 757, 773; pt, 786»;

aor., 834a, 667, 871 ; InL, 10(3.
ydbn, ?f, TMa; aer., 847, W2b;

pple, 956 b.
i/cUunA, iee dhuo,-
ydtayK, prea., 761 e; aor., 912.
-dhyU, Infin. in, 97ag, 976, 1050f.
ydhvK&fl OT dbTtw, eapb., 168;

pf., 790oi aor. 847; r»o^, i042|.
y-dliTau, pple, 965 a, 956b ; caw.,
.1042g.
ydhvx, pple, 955 e.

n, pron. ete., 47, 48; ai final, 143;
loT anal rdel m, 143a, 212i;
cbange to 1^, 189-96; to fl after
and before palatals, 201-3, 328b;
combinations as root-Boal , 204;
Ion as stem-final, 204b; aai^im.
to palatal» aad llngoaU, 205; to
1, 206; before elbilante, 207;
treated as ns, 208, 209; dnplica-
tlOD of Bnal, 210; InatablHtr as
An^, 266, 1203b; used aa nnlon-
cona., 257, 313, 4S2h; qncatlon
Of final of paftoftn etc., 4&4; Onil
n in lesD^iy derm, 1203e.

Digitizec^y-GoOglc

Sanskbii Index.

nik, compintiTs, 1122h.

I1& added to ttL& or ta or 2d pi.,

549ft; foimi ni mida,- ItlS, 6ieb,
. 618, 62111, 664, 668, 869, 690,

701, 107, 723, 736b, 7iO, 762b,

760 «, 831 >, 839, 849 >.
•na, of pplu, 962, 967, 1177; enph.,

161b; acdiy, 1323k, 13Ur; In

cotDfBn, 1273, 1284.
l-'iuM, 102*.
. /nad, uua., 1042e.
^nond, eupb., 192a.
ynabh, eaph,, 192a; oaiu., 1042g.
i/iMm, pf., 786a; aoi., 890a, 897b,

911, 912; Alt., 936b; pple, 9Ud;

inf., 968d; int., 1017, cans.,

1042 g.
•nam, advbl, 1109a.
ytuUS be lo»t, euph.,*192a; aoi.,

847, 861b, 867; fat., 936d, 936i;

dBf., 1028.
r'naq attain, enph,, 21Sa; pf., 801g;

»or., 833, 834b, 837b; dea., 1029e.
ywM, aor., S37b.
Q&a, dcln, 387, 397.
-nas, 1162.

Viiah, enpb., 223g; prM., 761<-.
-lift, eaa 1177.
nllgarl, ta.
-nfi^^a, 230 b.
nf, «nph., 192f.
-ni, 1168.

j/nlfis, enph., 183a; piaa., 628.
Vni], enph., 219a; aof., 817; Int.,

1021.
nitya-clicamUgx, 81b.
V'oiad, pf., 790 b; aor., 840 b.
nilay, qaaai-root, 10870.
nlf and nlf 0, 397.
nlB, loM of InitUl or 1087 a.
yni, aor., 889, 896, ■ 900b; fot.,

936a; tar, 968a; tvft-ger'd, 9910;

Int.' 1017, 1018a; peiiphi. pt.,

1071 f..
-ni, font, ending, 1176d, 1223c
ni4&, enph., 198d.
Vnu or nO, ptM., 626>; aoi., 868>,'

887o; int, ■1002g, 1003.
•nu, 1162.
i/nud, aoi., 834(1, 904c; pple, 966b,

967 d; int., 1017.
nf, doln, 371.
ynrt, eaph., 192a; aor., 833, 847,

862b; inf., 968 d; trS-ger'd, 9910.
nM, accent of Terb wlih, 696e.
ntakft, dcln, 526 0.
n&u, doln, 361 a.

p, pron. eto., 49, 60. *'

-p, oaiu.-8<gn, 10421-1; lor. from

taoh caoK.,- 1017.
-pa, 1201.

'pakT& at pple, 958.
Vpao, prsi., 761 b.
ypat, pf., 791f, h; aoi., 817; int.,

1002g; de>., 1030, 1031; caa».,

1012 g.
p&tl, doln, 313d, e; In dpndt eompin,

1267i; denom. fonj. from, 1061a.
pith, path!, p&nthan, dcln, 3431,

396, 133. '
|/pad, piei., 7610; aor., 634b, d,

836, 837b; pplo, 967d} tin.,

1002g; dea., 1030.
p&d, dcln, 387, 389 b.
pada, llla;pada-«DdlugBandcaaa(,

Ilia, b.
ypan, pf., 791r; Int., 1002g.
p&ntlian, ibe pith.
pAra, doln, 625 c.
parasmU padam, 629.
piruoohspa, enph., 168b.
Pr1B7, quasl-root, 1087 c.
palyedlg, qoaai-robt, 1087 e.
palyay, qaail-iSot, 1087 o.
ypaf, fiaa., 761 o.
pa^oluM, dcln, 626 c.
yp& drink, prea., 671, 719a, 866a;

aoi., 880, -838; pple OHe; ya-

gei'd, 992a; daa., 10284; oaai.,

1012k.
ypS proiact aor., 912; caoa., 1042m.
pftda, 79, 93 d.
pftdapOra^a, 1122ti.
pl^ak, enpb., 190o.
ypinv, e99b, 716a, 719b.
i/plB pifls., 758; aoi., SlOb; pple,

966 b.
v'pis or pi&B, enpli., 226 d, f; piea,

694i, 920a; ior", 190o, 768a.
ypiB, eaph., 181d.
ypiij, enph., ]98d.
pipi, GonJ.-9tem, 676, 786 b.
pmha, pum&fiB, eupb., 183a; doln,

394.
poral^aaFa. pnraafcita, pnro-

gama, in compan, 1302 f.
pura, pies, in past sense with, 778 a.
puru, in compiB, 1284b, 1290.
ypm, aor., 847.
)/pa, piBB., 728; aor. (9), 868a,

891d; inf., 9680; cana., 1012».
pdrva, dcln, 526 e; in compsn, 1361 e,

1291 f^ 1302 f.

34»

itizecy Google .

Sanbksit Imdsx.

p&fin, doln, 126 «.

i^r'7^> e"pii-> ^3«; pt**'. I3i<

Tfllb, 766; pf.,793li; ppls,

957b; inf., 8680.
ypi pau, ft, 793h ; tot., SBC
ypf b» butg, prM., 767, 773.
ypTO, pte«., 6B4*; ur., 834c, 6S6b,

837b, 810b, ''"" ""*

967 c.
Vppi?, 731, 763.
pft, pftuii. 997.
pt4«at, doln, 160 0.
ypyS 01 pi, pm., 781e; pf., 766,

794b; 101., 912, 9Ub; pple,

967.; »».. 1043k.

pngrbrtK 13s.

praoaya oi prsolta acoent,. 90k.
t^>Taoh, eapb., 220; pru., 766i

pr., 794e; mc, &34c-, 880; ppte,

954 b,
ypistb, Mr., eiOb, 863>.
prabhjti, fn eompm, 1302s.
prMllata-cfrcumfles, 64d.
i/prft, >ar., 830, 889.
prtyft. In compM, 13021.
Vpri, pr«i., 731; lor. (!), 866, 868|

cam., 1042m. '
yi»ruth, Jft-ior-d, ^92b.
ypra^, »< • "■*"■ "'

732, lot
plSy, quul-i
ypltt, >or.,

ph, proD. etc., 49, 60.
ypkan, pf., 794hi Int., 1002t,
1003. ,

b, proa, etc, 19, 50; interchuige

with V, 60*.
ybftfih, eapb., 233b.
Vbadh or T«dh, MI., 901>; dsB.,

1029 >, 1040.
ybandh, •npb., 166b; pie«.,. 72S,

730i; pf., 794d; fut., »36b; Inf.

968 d.
babuMhi, 1293 b.
i/b&db, euph., 155b; kor., 904d;

Int. 1002d, 1003; de«., 1029*,

1031, 1040.
i/bndb, eapb., 166b; Mr, 634b, d,

8397810 b, 647. •

ybrh, evph., 2:23b; ptea., 768; i>t-

1011; Vd*., 1012b.
brhint, dctn, I5O4.
bbh, occBirenee. 161e.
ybrd, prM.,

tion, 2681.

!; pecnllar e

bh, pnin. ete., 49, 60; uoMikiW'
It £lMDg«d t6 &.fattBTa]', 1614;
h from, 223g.

ybhakf, 1034.

ybhMi, tnpb., 219>; pf., 7Mk;
"" "*" """ ; fOt, 935b;

,,'8341,8^7, 8904;

Vldufi], enph.; 219»; pre*., 691;

■ pplB, 967 05 tTS-g«T'd, 9911.

bUvant, 466, 614e.

yblMB, BDpK.,.23Sf; pTM., 678.

l^bUa, inf., 9e8d.

V-bhlka, 1024.

ybbiA, Mr., 832, 884d, ^64, 8404,

817; pple, 967 d.
blilf^, aaph., 2104; dsnam. cm}.

from, 1064*.
i^hi, prea., 645, 679; pf., 786b;

401., 831>,640b, 866, 881, 897b;

t*<U., 10121, m; CUB. 401., 1047;

periphr. pf,, 1071 f, 1073 1.
f^hif, 10l2m; 4or., 88I4, 1047.
I'bhl^ bold, eupb., 319*; pple,

9571:; tra-ger'd, 991d.
>1t>bl]J am'oy, eupb., 2194; piM.,

6944; Mr., 836b, 847, 912.
Vl)hur, pres., 766; Int., 1003d.
bbavaa, enph., 176 c.
ybha,'pt., 7804, 793b, 600d;4«.,

839, 830, 836-9, 853, 924; inf.,

968e; In periphr. conjn, 1070-73;

in pplal periphr. phiuet, 1076d;

In oonpd conjn, 1091-4.
bbtita In GOmpan, 1273 c.
i/bhr, pres., 646, 8664; pf., 789b,.

7g7c; 40r., 8904; Int., 1003 g, h,
1003; periphr. pf., 1071 f.

bhOB, 466; enph., 174b.

ybbraAo or bbntq, pre*., 767;

40T., 617; pple, 954b; oani.,

1042 h.

)/blUAlJ 01 bhrlj, eoph., 219b.

|/blir»in pre*., 763; pf., 794 b;
pplB,9664; lnt,968d; trt-ger'd,
991b; ya-sei'd, 992c; ttju.,

1043 e.

l/bhrBJ, enph., 219b; pf., 790t,
794h; 40r., 833.

g,3,i,ze..,G00ylc

Sanskiut Index.

m, pTDD. etc., 49, 50 1 u Onil, U3;
*u Hatl ndfll, 143a, 213, 266; in

extinl combB, 313; before r&J,

213 b.
-ma, pmy, 1166; scdry, 474, 467 a, d,

1224 b, 1242 c.
ymwUi oc nMh, pf., 7S6a; caoi.,

1042g.
maghAvsLii, dctn, 428.

ymaJJ, enph. 219.;pf., 801t;Mr.,
. 887.; fat., 926ii; pple, 967o; int.,

SeSe; des., 1028^.
-mat,BdTbl, 1236«.
Vmath oT manth , pras, , 730 &,

731, 732, J066b, 746, .or., 899di

y»-gei'd, 992b; una., 1042g.
ymad 01 mand, 102.; prei., 628,

645, 764; aor., SB3, 834d, 839,

840b, 887», 897b, 899d, 904d;

pple, g66b; (am., l(>42g.
I/man, pf., 7B4f! aor., 834b, g40b,

881a, 887», b; fut., 935b; pple,

964d; des., 1028e, 1029., 1040;

ipeclsl constioetlon, 268., 994e.
-man, 1168; man^ >Dd ma-itamR,

1166ei man-Bteint In compni,

1277b.
manaa, in camp, with inftn.-stem,

968g.
-mane, tnfln. in, 9T0d, 874.
-mant, 1236.
y'mantr, ao-cUed, 104b, 1066,

1067, 1073 d.
minthan, dcln, 434.
ymaad, 102a; ise mad.
-m«7a, 161a, 1225.
-nutra, 1201 1.
y'miAl, Bee maAli.
mUi, nuihi, 400..
mali&nt, dcln, 460b.
mabit, 356..
mahftprfaia, 37 d.
yiai metuure, pteg., 660, 663;-m>t.,
- 839; pple, 964c; Inf., 968f; trft-

ger'd, 991b; ya-gei'd, 992b; dei.,

1030.
ymt exe/utnge, prei., 761 f.
ymft beliote, pies., 660, 663, 672,

676ei «or., 868e.
jaiitM, m&Aa& (aai taia), 397.
mStrA, in tompin, 1302k; euph.,

161 >.
.m&na, 684 b, 11'74.
mlU, enph., 168.; dcln, 389b,*397:

and aee mifAs.
ymify, >oi., 911; del., 1030. -
-ml, 1167.

>''mik4, 1033a; ^.na., 1042b.

mltrA, 1166«.

•mln, 1231.

(/mil, fnt, ^6b.

|/jiil OT nil damage, ptes., 192c,

731, 761b; ior., 911; da«., 1030;

cna., 10421.
ymlh, enph., "OA^; pf., 790b; Ui.,

916., 9^ a.
>'iiuv, pple, 965b.
yamo, pn.., 768, 761 b, 805a; u>i.,

832,884<i, 837b, 899, 847,8901;

de«., 1030.
ymuA, .or., 637b.
ymm, pre«., 732, 1066b; pple,

966b; caoa., 1042b.
ymah, enph., 223a, c; prea., 761 a ;

a>i., 847; ;^le, 95&e.
)/mQrati, 220.; prei., 745ri pple,

954e.
mardhmya, 46. •

ymi die, enph., 242 e; pna., 767,

773; aoi., ^>, 837h.
yvHt erui&, pies., 731.
yaui, enph., 219b: prea., 621a,'

m, 7456-, pf.,.786a, 7931: tor., '

900a, 919, 920; fnt., 935b, 936d;

pple, -966b, d; fnt, 968c; trS-

ger'd, 9»i«; ya'gei'd, 992b-, int.,

lQ02g, 1003, 1017; del., 1028j;

cans., 1042 b.
yinr4, enph., 19ad; canv 1042b.
ympi, 731, 763a.
ymii, tat., 936 d.
Vmrdh, Mir., 838, 847.
V'mrf , pf., 786a; aar., 916, 920;

pple, 966b; Int., 1002g, 1003,

ynmi, 102a; aoi., 912.

y'mrao, aoT., 847.

ymlR, piaa., 761e; aoi., 912; pple,

967a; oan*., 1042],
yaHvLO, int., 1002g,

844, lfl2e, 1151d, i236e, 995b;

reaolyed to 1, 65, 113b, 129e;

cue* of loaa of i before, 233 a;

y Ot ttf treated sa 1 1203..
ra eoutraoted to 1, 262, 769, 784b,

794 b.
ya aa conJ.-Glasa'alga , 606, 759;

aa paaaive-algn, 606, 768, 998 a;

Digil.zec.y Google

■dded to intene.. atem , 1016; Id

WQi. *'Si'i lOC^t; u denom. dga,

1056-67.
-y« (oT yft] of garund, 990, 992,
' 999; oTgerundlTe, 962, 9B3, 1219.
-ya, prmy, 1187, 1213; y»-(it«ma In

compu), 1272; acdry, 1210-12.
yaUn, yAkpt, 398 >, 132.
j/yaj, eoph., 2i9b, 784b; prea.,

eaa; pf,, iUb; mor., 834c, 839,

690 B, 89i d ; Inf., OeSd ; del., 1029«.
I^yat, >o[., 840 b; pple, 9&{!b.
y&thft, Mcent, 1101b; In compin,

1813 c— e.
yyam, wet., 608b, B31»^74T;

■ pt.; rflObi ior., 833, 836-9, 887.,
8B0a, 896, 897b, 911; fut., 936b;
pple, 964 d; inf., 968 d; tvft-ger'd,
991b; <»□»., lQ42g'.

ytum»,230(L.

yytM. ««., 847; pple, 966*.

-yae fbt -lyaa, i70i.l

VjIl, 102i; aor., 894c, 912, 914e.

-yR, ..1213 d.

-ylQ, lee 1290e.

■ yya vnile, piea., 6264, 756; ya-

gafd, 992..
Vya itparaU, prea., 608», 646; aflr.,

898,-868a,889, 894bi Int, lOlSi;

ciQE., 1042 e.
-ya. 1166; •eell78h-].
y'yuj, eapb. , 219>; prea., 768.;

>or., 832, 834b, ^b, 837.,

839, 840b, 847, 887i

l^yudh,

, 834d, 836b,

Vyup, Int., 1017.
yfivan, deln, 427.
yoffc, ytiqin, 432.
yd^an, dclu, 426b.

and tnid, iftb, 166., 164; fln.l,
144 169; Korda ending in oilgliial
r.l69.; comblD.tlDn u flnU rdcl,
.166; u other, 178; avoiduiee of
donble, 179; a or r u Bn.l of
oerttin fomu, 169b; from s »ftet

raeMedlDg n t^i 9, 189ff.; d[mli'
cation of conaonant after, "SiH;
BTarabhakU aftai, 230(

)/rak^ tar., 899 d.

vYaJ or raBJ, anpb., 219a; pre*.,

746, 767; caw., 1042g.
VnOh. 01 randh, pf., 786a, 794b;

aor., 847. ■
V'ran,pf.,786»;Mr.,899d.
V'rabh, pf., 783a, T94h; aoi., 834d,

8971); dea., 1030.
yiam, aOT., 911, 912; pple, 064d;

Inf., 968d; tv««er>d, 991b; euu.,

1042g.
yn give, prea., 660, 666, 672;

aoi., 839, 896.
yr& hark, prea., 761 e.
yrBi, enph., 21»b, 219b; pt., 794h.
vir&dli, pf., 794h; aor., 636; dea.,

1030.
iM<)Trt,c>Da., 10421.
-h; 1191.
v'Tlo, prea., 761b; Ml., 834c, 839,

847, 890.

VH9,.

., 916.

870; una., 1042b.
yrili, euph., 223h; iflt., 1017.
>'rl,»eerl.

i^ru, ptea., 626, 633, 756.
-TO, 1193.
ynio, aor., 834c, 837b, 840b, 347;

deitd., 1031b.
yrai, eoph., 219.; uir., 832; pple,

967 c; tTR-gei'd, 991c.
yrud, ptei., 631; aor.', 847; tvR-

gei'd, 991. d.
v^mdh, ptea., 694., ,756a, 866a;

pf., 801h; aor., 832, 834d", 847,

887a, 890.; Ii)f.,96ed; ya-gST'd,

992b.
yra<f, aoi., 916; caoa., 1042b.
r&^ant, dcln,'4o0c.
ym?, pplB, 956b.
yrah, enph., 223b, d; vn., 8t0b,

847,863, 916, 920a,b;fnt.,936d;

inf., 968d; ya-ger'd, mln; oana.,

10421.
rspha, 18.
rU, dcln, 361b,-r.
-rU, advbl, 1103d,

I, pioo. etc., 51, '63; 1 and r, 63b;
1 foi r In cettUn verbal pie&zeB,
10e7c; DaBalt,71b,c, 206, 213di
uOsal, 144; aadm. to, 117g; of t,
162; of n, 206; of m; 213d;

Digifl^ecoy Google

Sangsbit Ikdez.

uteited B to ; after, IBOb; du-
plication at conaanant Bftei, 228a;
BTftrabbftkti afier, S30d.

-la, prmy, 1189; aodry, 1227.

ylag. pple,fl57ci tvR-ger'a, Wlc;
caDs., 104£g.

j/lajj, pres., 754.

ylfp, pple, 956b ; influ., 968«.

yiabh, lor., 834d: fut, 93(ib; def.,
1030.

ylal, caoB., 1012g.

Kllkh, fat., 936b.

ylip, Fr«., 763, 758; aor., 831d,
847.

yUf , aor., 916.

I^lih, euph., 223b; aoi., 916, 920s.

yli eling, aor., 911; pplo, 867a;
7B.geiM, 992a| caaa., 10121, m.

ya tatter, int., 1016a, 1022.

yiap, pte»., 768, 761b; aor., 887i.

laubh, piM., 761 a.

yi% prei., 728 a; pple, 957 s.

- 1, pron. etc., 5b, 64.

V, pion. etc., 51, 67, 68; leUHoD
to ii>TowelB, D7a; Jnteicbsng«
Tltlib, 50a; naaal v, 71'c, 213d;
reiolTsd to n, 5ea, 113b; caaea
of loei of u before, 233»; dupll-
oatlOD of GOUBOasnts after, 228a.

va, cootraoted to n, iti2, 769, 764,
794 b.

-Tft, pimy, 1190; taiiy, 1228; adfbl,
1102e, (.■

VvaliB, pple, 956b.

VvftC, enpb., 2161; ptes., 660; pf.,

- 784, 789|d; aoi., 847, 863, BMs.
Vvafio, mph., 3151; pf., 766 a.
-■ffat, advbl, 1107, 1233(; icdry,

383k. 1, 1245J.
Vvad, 102ai pre*., 738«i pf., 784;

aor., 8e9d, 9D4d; pple, g66d|

int., 1017; de«td., 1031b.
)/vadlt. Bee badh.
yvan, pf., 786s, 794f; aor., 839,

887 b, 912, 914; ppU, 956b; des.,

1028g.
-van, pmy, 1169; acdiy, 1234; van'

ateme in compsn, 1277, 1267b.
-vana, -vanl, -vano, 1170; -vana,

1245 L
-vane, lofln. Id 9?0d, 974.
-vant, 617,. 959, 1233; prmy,

12Mg.
yVan<t,'102a.

>'vap, ■pf-i'784; fnt., 936b; pple.

advbl,
-vaya, 122811,
•vara, 1171.
-Tari, rem. to van, 1169, 117t,

1234a.
varga, 32.

yvar^, eo-called, 1066.
•vala, 1228b.
yvao, prea., 638, 660; pf., 784,

yvaa, elolht, onph., 167; proa., 6^,
eSla, 638a; pt., 786a.

yvas, dwtU, enph., 167: pf., 784;
aor., 84ab, 883; fnt., 935d; pple,
956b, d; Inf., 968ci tvS-gei'd,
991 c; in portphr. conj. 1070 c;
porlphr. pf., 1071 f.

-vas, 1173b; and aee vUa.

yvab, eaph., 137c, 223b, 224b;
■ -"' 837b, 839, 840b,

:DinpdB, 403.
yv« blow, aor., 912; pple, 957a.
yv& ^oop, prw., 761 e.
yvS or vi weaee, prea., 761 f; pf.,
784, 801b; flit., 936o; pple, 964e;
' inf., 968f; oana., 1042k.
yva&i (or -vaa), of pples, 684c,
802-6, 1173; vfiAs-etemB, ddn,
458ir.

vac^t> AciDj ^^*'

VvSq, pf., 786a; sot., 861s.

vi, dcln, 343 b.

-vl, 1193.

viicunpana, 87 d.

j/vlo, int., 1024.

yvlj, eaph., 219a; aor., 834g; fdl.,

g36b, 936c; pple, g57c; int.,

1017, 1024.
-Tit, aee 1193b.

yvld Jcmw, 102b; prei.. 613, 618,
■6218; pf., 790s, 803a; fat., 996b;

Ur., 968d; dee., 1031b; porlphr.

pf., 1071f, 1073a; peiiphi. aor.

and fK»., 1073b, c.
yvid find, 102a; prBs., 768; pf.,

606b; 101., 847, 852a; pple, 057 d.
vidhA, la compsn, 13021.

Diaiiizec., Google

SaMBKSIT iMIffiZ.

-Tin, 1284

v'Tlndb, prM.. T&8.

r^tp, MI., 840b; cuu., 10£»b.

virftnu, 11.

yvig, enph., 218>i pt, 803s, 805b;

40T., mib, 016, 920t.
Ticra, dclu, 524; In eompsn, 1351 e,

1280 e, 1298 c.
fvif, eupV 225», 226d, f; Mr.,

916; int., 1024.
viaa/tgA, vtoarj&my*, 6T;*Knd

yvl, Int, lOlT, 1024*.

yvT cover, 102 »; prei. (OrnnX

713) >oi., 831>, 834i, ^b,

839, 840b, 900b; Inr., 968^;

Inl., 1002 g.
yvr choote, 102a: enph., 1024,

"'" pf.,7e7c; Mr.,g37b,840bi

'inf., 968d-^o«n8., 1042e.

■or., S32, I
Int, 1002

tnr., 968d; cans., 1042e.

9, 919, 820*;

i/TTt, pin., 643c, 856 i;pt., 786*;

Mr., 832, B34b, 836b, 839, 840*,

847, 904d; fnt., ^5b, 943t;

Inf., 966e; int., 1003^, 1003.

1017, 1023.
TrtrA, 1186 c.
▼JdiJhl, 27, 236 ff.
i^dh, pf., 786*; Mr., 847, 862*, b,

897 b; fut., 943*; tnf.. 9666.
yvn, pf., 786*1 MI., 847; inf.,

968d.
irfftui, dola, 426b.
y-nh, «.»., 916, 920*.
TOO, qa*ri-toat, 864*.
-rya 1228e.
yVyao, 1087 f ; ptw., 682; pf., 785,

.794b.
vykfijaiut, 31.
yvrMt, pf, 786.
>^adh, prei.,761; pf., 785,794b;

fat., 936b; pple, 964b) Inf., 968f;

wui., 1042g.
yvy«y, praa., 761 f.
yvy&, or vi, piM,, 761f; pf., 785,

794b, solo; .01., 847; fnt., 936e;

pple, 964 c; c*ub., 1042k.
yvrei, eoph., 219b; Mr., 899cl. ,
y-vrw}a, eupb., 221b; ppte, 967C;

tvft-gei'd, 991 c.
Wli, pre*., T28b; pple, 957*; Int.,

1017; Moi., 1042L

Id IoOdI combn, 218; irttb pre-
ceding t 01 n, 303.
-g^ £229.

VfaAi, pf., 790c; jrvcci'd, BeSc
yvtX, un., 837k, 869, 847; ppli,

^6b.; del., 1030 1040.
^akAn; fAlqt, 398, 433.
yqaak, MI., 904d.
>'9ad prgeail, pf., 786.
ytjad. fall, pple, 957 d.
yij^p, tor., ^3e; inf.. 968e.
.y<tBxa labor, ^m., 634, 763.
i/aun be qmtt, vtm., 7St; aot.^

847; pple, 966*; c*a>., 1043g.
»'9W), pf , 79iJ-
V^M, Mr., 639.
^M, *dvbl, 1106.
VQ&, prei., 660', 663, 753c, TSlf;

■or., 834*; pple, 964o; eini.,

1042k.
yeS» (pi qlB), pres., lU, 639,

675; MT., 847, 862*, 864c; pple,

954e', -SaBb; inf., 968e; Tft-ger'd,

992c; desld., 1031b; £^ from, .

225*, 392 b.
Vgliy, anph., 319*; piea., 628.
yeiB leave, eoph., 236f; praa., 894*,

768.; «.r., 847, 853.
yalff, see oSa.'
V;I lie, pre*., 638, 639; pf., 806.;

fnt, 936.; pple, 9560; jra-gel'i,

(MO..

993fl.

; Mr., 847; int.,

52^bi

, ;ao, pre!., 631*.

968d4 tvR-ier'd, «■■

1042 b.
l/gadta, um., 10431).
ycubh, piei., 868; MI

840b; ens., 1043b.
l/gn^, pre*., 761..
fdfka u pple, 958.
V^Q, see ifvi.
VfOf, eijpb., 340 b.
v'OT crtMA, eiiph., 212b;' prei., 731;

pf., 793h; .or., 900., 9Mb;'

ppte, 966d, 9&Tb; inf., 968d.
|/q<jUMl, Int., 1002g,
l/fnath, piM., 631.; Mr., 667.
y<3y^ 01 <}i, prei., 761 e; pple, 9ti4e,

yorath, prei., 733, 1066b. 766;

pf., 794b; pple. 956d.
yanm, pr*.., 763; pf., 794h; mt.,

817; pple, 955*;.c*u., 1042g.
ymA, pies., 761a;. pple, 954t>;

Miu., 1042]; c*a..-.or., B61b,

1047.

Digil.zec., Google'

Sakskbit hfDBX.

966b;
786 0,

yari, Bor., 831, 867, 868,
Inf., 968e; oma., i042L

VTTl?, «dr., 847.

y^ri, ppls, 956d,

yiriv, i«e btIt.

Voni, eoph., 343; pTsi,, 6d9t
p(., 7fllc; «>r., 831, 836
8JW, 853, 866, 887; JMid.,
««., 1042e.

Vqllfl, euph., 236d, f; prei.,

W:,84f, 4i6.
r'qvaflo, Mr., 863 >.
9V&I1, dclE, 437.
Vqv&B, prei., 631;' ppla,

otuB., I042g.
Vovil er qvl o» oG , pf. ,

794 b; aor., 817, 868,897 b

9(>3a; Inf., 968e.
y-qvlt, «or., 832, 790.

f, pion. etc, 69 61, 62, 120, 182;
lelation to q, 63 ■ j oidinuy deriT-
. ation, 46; ezerotioiul oocDnence,
183; mBdiI, 146, 146b; schiDg-
ed [0, 180-8; nconenee kTolded,
181o, 184e, 10281; u loot flail,
.183>,.184c, 225, 236; chuigsi
'encsBedlDf QUO. 189ft; ualm.
of deDttd *n«r, 197; fiom 9, 218.
-Mnl, r«T -Baul), Infln. In, 9T0h,
9re, li69c, 1160.:
- U9, eapb., 146b, 199c.
Hjo (or -ao), iofin, in, 970o, 973b.
I^athiv, enph., 340b; pias., 745g,
766; pr. 789 0; pp1«, 956 c; tT&>
ger'd, 991 d.
>B7JU (oT ■B7S1), Infln. in, 9T0g,
977.

B, pion. etc., 69, 60; s and r u
eoritapondlng surd and lonmt,
117b, ]68>, 164^ a 01 T u flnal
of OMlifn ToTma, 169b; m final,
146, 169, 170a; combination* of
llnal rid B, 146b, 166-8; of
olhar , 170-7; exceptloaal oaaeg,
171, 173; dnal as, 175, 176; fis,
17T; B. to 0, 180-8; gxceptlanai
caeea, 181, 184o, 186c, d, 186a;
% add* t befon, 199e; final n
add( (reulna) b, 208, 209; a loit
between mutes, 233 o-f; in b* aoi.,
834, 881, 883; after a rowel, 333b;
exceptional combination aftei aaob
loss, 233f; a anomalonsl; from
flnal Toot-eonionant, 406 a | B before

am of gen. pi., 313a, 496a; tn

aor., 874fr.; tn fat., 931ff.; in

desid., 1027 ff. .
-B, advbl, 1106.
-B», 1197.

■a-, il21e; In c^mpsn, I'^g,
. 1304f-h, 1313f.
BAdiTTtR a, 31.
sAkhl, doln, 343 a-c.
Bafeth&n, B&kthl, 3431, 431.
KasKh, aor., SSfib.
yesa, piM., 660; pf., 794f; aor.,
. 840b; Baqo from, 673, 676.
yeai 01 aoaj, euph., 219a; ptM.,

"'" pf. 794d, b, 801b; i

834c,

Inf., 908 f; des.,

10 d; mt., 936 b, 936 c'l

, 847,

965b;-
ESg, I, 1032 a.
ae ^wjl

pple, 9571; Inf., 968d.
/Ban or bS, pf., 804;
■ 853, 899(1

1002g; Am
-Banl, Infln. In, ae
BBdidhl, 109.
aaihdlirakqara, 28 a, 30,
aannatara, 90 c.-
ynbhSg. ao-called, 104b, 1067.
BamKnUqarft, 30.
aampraBara^a, 262 a.
aamrBj etc, 213 b.
■-Bora, 1301a.
aar&gh or Bair&4, 389b.
B&rra ddn, 634; Id compsa, 1261 e,

Kaaqo, pies., 4U, 673, 676..
s&B, enph., lT6a, b.
•Baa, 1152.

yeah, eaph,, 186a, 223b, 224b;
■^" 7»0b,

S37, 838, 1

)9d; fat, 9

830, 834., 889-, 868
fat., 936., 936b; pjdi
Inf., 96efi ya-jer'd, 9K
1042 k.

-SU, adTbl, 1108.

VaSdli, Mr., 861 ..

-sSna^ pplal worda in, 89

VB&utT, so-calM, 104j>.

S897a,

VBl, «

B a&.

, l'643h. '

,l,zec.y Google

m, t,.

Vstl preu out, Fprea,, 699b; lor.,

839, &40b, 667; tat., 935 >; yft-

gBr'd, 993«. "
en-, iilib, I; In compiu, 1281b,

b, 1288, 1304c, d.
■BU, 8e« liTSf.
yBubh, piM,, 768.
i/BQ 01 flu, prei., 626, 628, 765;

pf., 789.; tor, 868b; fnt., 935>,

936b, 939b; inf., 968d, e.
y«Q0, MI., 861.
yofld, Mr., 871.
VBT, pr, 797c, 80ea; lOt., 847;

uuB., l042e.
y«ti, enpb., !W6I, 219b, c; tor.,

834b, c, 840b, 890; fat., 936d.
ytm, enph., 161 i: pf., 790 c; »ot.,

^4d, 847; fat., 935b, 936d; Juf.,

968b; fm., 1002e.
•■e, iolln. Id, aee -^.*
Boqm&n, 37 d.
' Bk, oilginBl of cb, 12.

i/Bkoad, BOT., 833, SOOb; pple,

967 d; ya-geiM, 992b; Int.,
1002e, h.

[/Bkabh or Bk&mbh, piei., 730,

732, 1066b; pf., 786», 7flOb,

794 d.
V'Bku, ptM., 626«; Int., 1017. .
V'Btan, piM., 631 1; BOr., 899d.
VBtabb 01 Btambh, etiph., 233c;

pre.., 730, 732, 1066bi pf., 794d;

pple,. 966 b.
•sWt foi -tit, adTbl, llOOb.
V'atlsb, deaid., 1031b.
ystu, pre*., 626, 633; pt., 797c;

u)[., 8tl6-, 8»4b, d; fnt., 935b;

ya.gei'd, 9e2>; deetd., 1028i;

C411B.-, iOi'ie.
VBtr, eupb.*U2c; pf., 80ir, '806b;

■oi., 8B1, 834>, 885, 900b; pple,

957b; inf 968d; ya-ger'd, 992b.
8tf, dcln, 371k.
VBtrh, Mt., 916.
>^etya, pres., 761c; pple, 957*.
Btri, dcln, 366, 367c.
V'sthft, euph.,233c;pte«., 671, 749a;

aot., 830, 8341, 836, 837, 840.,

847, 884, 894c; pplfl, 9&4c; Inf.,

968 f; CBUB. Boi., %lb, 1047; in
pplil peiiphr. phniea, 1075c.

-BOa, H95.

VsnA, ens., 1042J,

ymaih, eopb., 223 ^ 4.

ymiu, pits., 626*.

•Btm, 1191.

Sparta, 31, 32.

VspM, Mr., 831e.

VBpj, BOT., 831, 836 b, 839.

ymj^, eupb., 242d; Mr., 831b,

yspTf , enph., 218.; mi., 916, 910t;

fnl., 936d.
j/spfh, euph., 223 b, d; cbm., f012d.
yaphh, pple, 954c; uaa., 1042m.
y-Bphnt, fat., 936 b.
yapbjf, prea., 766; trS^er'd, 991d;

UDB., 1042b.

aphotana, 230e.

Bma, in pronom'l dcM, 498, 496.,

60^.
Bm&, prei. in put Bsnie with, 778b, c

yaial, tvK-ger'd , 991 d ; cam.,

10421; pariph. pf., 1071f.
ysmr, paaa., 770c; trft-geT'd, 991d:

cue,, 1042 e:
aya .s denom. algn, 1064.
VByaud, pf., 786.; Mr., 861v

890b'; fut 943.; pple, 957di

tTi^ei'd, 991d; lot, itmg.
yayam, pf., 791h.
syAa, enph., 176.. ■
-eylll, iDfln. in, eee -fySL
Bnij, eupb., 219a. ,
v'Bras or Bra&a, 'eopb., 168; pf.,

790c; .or., 833, 817: ysWd,

992b.
l/arldb, mi., 847, 852 b.
i^srlv for orlv), enph., 210b; pteo.,

766; CDS., 1042b.
Vbtu, pf , 797c; Bor., 86Q; omw.,

lOliie.
Bva, 513b, &16e; dcln, 525c
)/svaJ,.eaph., 219.; pree., 746; pf.,

7911i; MI., 863.; tTt-gar'd,

V'Bvad, pple, 9(

V'OTan, pf., 7Mh; .or., 899d; Int,

1002 g.
|/Bvap, pre.., 631; pf, 7a5b, 791bi

BTayam, Id compsn, 1284b.
ymnx, MI., 890a, 899d.
BV&r, ddD, 388.

STBTB, 30, 81.

svarabhaktl, 230c-e.
Bvarlta, 81.

Bviivaa, eiiph^ 168a, 416b.
yarld, pple, 967d.

Digitizecy Google

Sanskrit Index.

li, proD. etc., 60, 66, 66, 119; from .
dh >iid.bb, !223g^ as And, 147;
compeuiitlag tuplntion of Initial,
U7, I56bi with following t or
th, 160>; with preceding Onsl
mute, 163; m bcfoi* tk uid an-
othei cone., 213g; teienlon to gh,
214 ff., 222; Id Inflection, 402,
637 ; Id pr, 787; In Inteni., 1002i;
in de«id., 1028f; Intenil combD,
222-4 ; uiomalODBly chuiged to
a Eiblluit, IGOf; to d, 404; da-
pllcation of ■ CODS. aflcT, 228 s ;
ntaikyft added aner, 23ab; lou
beloie hi, 1011a.

-ba, adTbl, llOOi, 1104b.

yliad, pple, 967 d.

Vhan., enph., 192b, 2161, 403,
637, 787; pros., 637, 673, 709;
pf., 794«, 806a; «or., 899d; rat.,
936b, 943a; pasB,, 998r; pple,
961d; tnf., 968d; Int, l()02g,
h, 1, 1003; dea., -1028e, t: cina.
1042m; """• '""

I, i02.

Mnta, accent of verb witb,

V^aa, Ji^ Horn, 640.

)/lift move, prea., 660, 664; d«i.,

1028d; cans., 1042d.
yhi leave, prei., 666, 761b; aoc,

830, 889, 912: fnt., 936c; opls,

96Ta; luf., 968f; cant, wt., 861b,

1047.

lOii, eopb., 192c, 2161, 674, 787;

pre.., 699b, 7l6a; aor., 831,839,

&40b, 847, 889a, 894d; dea.,

1028 f.
hi, &95a, 1122b. -
-hi, ad>bl, 1100c.
yhlAfl, eupb., 18Sa:^pre8., 687, 696;

de>., 1031b.
yhinv, 716a. .
Vlud, anpb., 240b; pf., TSfib; caue.,

1042 b..
yhn, pies., 645, 647 o, 662; peilphi.

pf. etc., 1071 f, iOTSo.
yhfl or hvS, pres., 761 f, 765 ; pf.,

794b; ao.., 834a, bil , 887o,

912; fnt., 936c; iuf, 968f; cana.,

1042k; perfpbr. pf., 1071f.
yhy teixe, aor., 884a, 890a-; inf.;

968d; cana., 1042e.
Vbtd, bfdayK, 397.
yIirf,.aoT., 847; pple, 966b.
yima, pTM., eMa.
ybxM, pple, 966 b.

t/hl4, pies., 645; BOr., 840b; pple,
967a; una., 10421; periphi. pf,
1071 f.

yhvi, see hu.

yhyi or hvar, enph., 242c; prea.,
682; aor., 8e3a, 690; pple, 955e.

u^j,i,:«,.„'Googk'

GENERAL INDEX.

ft-MTl«t (titople aoTlst, 1), 824, 846

-54; In tbe Utet Ungiuge, 846; .
lODtB farming it In the older lui-
gD»ge, 847^ InSeetlon, 848; modes,
849-M: pullaiplei. 802: inegn-
Urittee, 663, 854.

B-dBM (fl"t, bhQ-oliiw) of TMbS,
606, 734-BO; formitloii of item,
734; Inflettlon, 736-43; roote of
the cluB, 744; Irregnlultle'e, 74Ci
-60.

&-c1mb 01 tceented a-dui (alxtb,
tad-clMB) of votbfl 606,751-8;
formatioB of gtem, 761 ; Inflection
762; root* of the elui, 753, 754;
inegnliTltlei, 755-6.

a-conjngition — aee. corJngitionR.

ft- 01 A-declMMion , tnneferenee of
e«ns.-etemB to, 399, 4i5«, 429i,
437, 441b: 11481, il49^ 1166e,
1209, 1315.

■gronpi,

■bbierletion'

. 231-3.

abUtlTB use. Dies of, 289-93; >b-
UdTO of compuiton 292b; irith
pTeposlttoag, 293, 1128; naod ad-
TBibiilly, 1114; .1)1. inBnlUTfl 983;
ftbl. b^attnetianwithlnfln., 983b;
• kbL use of wlTeibs in taa, 1098d;
■bl. M pdor member of oomponnd,
l?60f.

■bsolate a«e of iDetnunental , 281 g ; '
of goDttiTe, 300bj of IomUto,
303b-d; of gemnd, 994e.

BbtolntlTe — ■ e e geniad.

ftbstract noniHr aeoanduT derlTaUon
of, 1206, 12S&-40.

aceent genenl, &()-97: Iti T&rietlM,
80-6; aooentnated texts, 87; mo-
del of deilgnatlQg, 87, 88; Ulaa-
tTKtIon of RT. method, pp. 618-9;

oTer-reflnemeDle of Hindu deoiy,

- 90; modem dellTBry of sodent
accented texta , 91 ; no aentMiee
sraaDt,. 92; aocentlen irordi, 93;
TOTda donblT accented, 94, 1256,
1287 d; secant of protrseted arl-
lable , 78 a ; freedom of pU«e of '
accent, 96; — ohangea of seeent
in vowel aom1)lnatlon , 128, 130,
136a; — «ouiit in deeleniion,
314-20; of -TOcatlTe, 92a, SiS;
change of acoent In mMioayllablc
etc. declension, 316-9; in nn-
meial 482g, 483a-c; of ftaetion-
all, 488s; of oaM-ftora» nted as
adverbs, llllg, lli2e, llUd;
dlffeient aoeent of setlon-noDna
and agent-nonns, 1 144 s ; of.detei-
minatWe snd possesslTe oom-
pounds, 1296; — accent of personal
endings , 6^^^ ; in relstton to
strong and weak foima, 656; of
penonal Terb-fonns in the sen-
tence, 92b, 691-8; of periphns-
tlc foTmstiona, 945, lO'^n of
oompoonded Tocb-fonni, iO»t-6;
— accent In prlmaty dertTatiou,
1144; In secDndary, 1205; in

. composition, 1251 ; -*- ordinary ac-
centuation of Skt words by Testern
scholan, 96.

accnaative case uses of, 269-77:
wltb verbs, 270 274; with noana

- and adjeottves, 271, 272; with pre-
positions, 273, 1129; with verbt
of motion and address etc, 274;
cognate, 275; adverbial, 276, 1111 ;
doable, 277; accus. infinitive, 981,
986-8; genmd, 995; aocos. as prior
member of'cemponnd, 1250 a.

actton-noDns and agent-nonns , chiaf
classes of prlmaiy derivatfres, 1146,
1146.

DiailizetfoyGOOgre

Gbitskal Imssx.

udTB *alea, In T«rbi, 628, 639.

acuft (ndfttta) iccsut, 81.

ad-(Ius of Terli» — lee root^lv*- .
. adJeotiTB, its dlitlnctlan from naon,
322; &om pple', 967^ ^foTin&tlon
of compound ^.,-323-6, 129211.;
Inflection of *4]-, 321-165; ooni-
piilBOn, i/K-Ti; >dj. pionomiiuJlr
Inflooted, 532-6.

kdjwtiTB compounds, lecondaryjlUTg,

wpnlatlye compoandi, 1267.

■dTwbs, 10d7'l]22: idv, bj deil-
ndon, 1097-1109; eMa-foim*
nsed u idf., 1110-17: idTOiblU
compounds, lllld, 1313: TSibd
preflxes etc. u idT lllS-20;
iDMpinbla preflxBi, 1121; othar
ml*c«lUneoni Adv. , 1122; adv.
Died piepoiltloniJlv, 112311.; idr.
Topnliitive componnda, 1209; forms
oflcompuiMa, 473b.

sgein-nDuiM — lee mHod-ooods.

■ggrsgstlTe oomponDds — see oopn-
IbUtb oompoondi.

tlpb&bets nied for mrltiog Siiuktlt,
1 ;. older lodlsn, 2; the DetaoS-
C*r1 alph., 1-17; TirieUei of irrlt-
Ing and of ijpt for, 3, pp. &16>7;
ctianct«rf u>d truiiUteratlon , 5;
anwigement, 7; theory of ase, 6,
9; DttlTB mode of writing, 9b, b;
modiflcBtioDi of tbU In Teitern
ptictlee, Sc-e; vowel-«Htlna^ 10;
consonant oomblnatloni , 12-16 ;
other slgna, 11, 16; nomenl Og-
nres, 17; namea of chanoten, 18;
Signs sod tiansIUerattoD of KOa-;
Bvir», 73.
^ alpbabet, spoken — lee system of

altennt loweU, changing following

B to 9, 180:
inalyalB of language int« its etementi,

96, 99; anal, of eompoimd words,

1218.
sntllhetlcal conibnetlon, lis Inflnsnce
* on acoent of verb, 696, 697.
aiiasvirft,.lt* pronondatlon etc.,

70-2 ;-algnb and transUteratioD, 73,
' 16b; see also &, ib.
aoilRt teoae, 532; Its nies, 926-30;

In piohlbitiTe ezpreisfon, 679; —

*or. «irstem, 635, 824-930; c1m«1-

flcation of forms of sor. , 624 ;

chuaeler and oooarrenee, 820-7:

Tarlety fiem same root, 827b, c;
simple aor., 824, 828: 1. root-aor.,
829-41; passlTe aor. 3d. slog.,
842-6; 2. A-aor., 846-64; 3. re-
dnpllotted or oiusitlTe aor., 806-
73; sibilanl^aor. , 874-920; 4. b- .
aor., 878-897; 5. i»-»or., 898-910;
A. tda-aor., 911-16; 7. sa-aoi.,
916-20; aor. opUUve 0( pieoatlie
of later langxiage, 921-6; ior. 1u
secondary coningation, 1019, 1036,
1046-8, 1068; perlpbrastie aor,
1073b; — B40I. Item In dsllTa-
Hon, 1140o.

i^posltional compOBnde,128pd J appos.
pOBsessiTc nomponnds, 1302.

ar or r In root and stem form*,-104e,
237.

•sptiate mntes, phonetic character etc.
at 37, 38; their deaaptratloD, 114,.
1d3-6; reatoiattoD of lost aspira-
tion to, }41a, 147, 166; not be-
fore Impv. ending dhl, 155f; de-
riistion of h from, 66; sonant
aspirate wltb following t, tb, 160;
non-asplnte for aspirate in rada-
pUcation, &90a; — and see the
different letters.

aaptntiuD Hi), its prononoiatton etc.,
69, 66, 66 : — a n d a e e h.

assoTeradTa particles, J122a, b.

assimilation In en phonio combination,
llfr-20; with or withont fchange
of articniate position, 116; anrd
and Ktnant, 117, 156-64; nual,
il7g, 198b, 199c; 1, 117g, 306;

- dental to lingnal and palatal, 118;
other cases, 118-20.

augment , 5a6-7 ; ft as sngment,
586 1; omltilon, 587; Ineg. com-
bination with inltlil Towel of root,
' 136a; Irregularly pUeed, 1087c, f;
nses of angmentless preterit per-
sona, 563, 687; with mil prohlblt-
. He, 579.

avy^rlbliSTK eompoands, 1313.

bahnvTlhi componnds — see pos-
sessive componnd*.
benedlotive — aeo precatlTe.
bbfl-olass of verbs — see ft-clate.

itizecy Google

-5; coDstractian, 486:- derlvKtWe*.
4ft7-fl.

cue-endlags — aee endings of de-
elenalon.

oue'fonns, prDloogition of SnaJ tow-
el of, 2mb; oied u advecbi,
111&-17; chuige-of iBcaut In lufh,
llUg, 1112c, 1114di their pra-
poiitional uiei, 1126d; deilvktives
ftoDi cMe-farma, 1202 b ; oue-foima
In compDBition, 1250.

cuBi, 266; their ordei of arrsnge-
ment', 266s; naee, 267-305: —
tni'tee the different Buea.

cansUlve conJagstlOD, 640, 607,775,
SG6ft., 1041-62; lektion to so-
cftUed tenth or our-dasi, 607,
1041b; b denomlnftlTe, 1041c
1066; fonuatiaii of atem , 1041,
1042; Inflection, preaent-ayiteBi,
775, 1043; other older foimi,
104i; perfect, lOlfii atUehed re-
duplicated aorlgt, 1046, 1047,
SMff-i other aoriit fotCDa, 1048,
104S; fatare etc., 1060; Teibal
noun* and adjectifea, 1051 ; derlTs-
tive or tertiary eonJogatiODB from
ciai. Item, 1062; eaat. from In-
tenB.i 1026; from desld., 1039;
deeUnible atemi ftom cam. atem,
1140b; double object irith can-
eatf*e«, 277a, 282b.
' cerebral mnleSf 33, 46.

changeable or variable f of root* —
see variable.

olreumflai (STftrltft) accent, 81-6,
90b; iDdependeut, 81-4; Its va-
rletiea, 84; enclitia, 85; their dif-
ference, 86; designation, 87-9; oe-'
cortenoe from rowel combinations,
128, 130, 136.

classes or aerlae of mutes, 32 IT.

classes of lerbi — see oonjugetlon-

clanses, slnplleitr of combination of,

collectiTe alngulai form of copulative
compoande, 1253c; in Veda, 1255 e,
1260 b.

combination of elemental 100, 101;
euphonic roles for, 109-260; dla-
tincilon of internal and external,
109-12; general arrangement of
rales, 124; order of comb, of three
encceietva yoweli, 127 b.

comparison of adjectives etc, 466-
74; primary, In Ifaa and Istb^
467-70, 1134; secondary, in tartt
and tuoa, 47t-3 1242a, b ; in ra
and ma, 474, 1242c; inflectioa
of eompatitlves in yM, 463-5^
comp. of nones, prenoans, piepo-
sldons, 473, 474, 620, 1119; of
verbs, 473 c; doable comparison,
473d; particles of comp., 1101b,
1102c 1107, 1122g, h.

oompirlMn or llieness, deecriptlTS
compounds of, 1291 a.

compensatory *oirel-leiigthanlng, 246.

composition of stems — see eom-
poand stems.

compoand conjagation, 640a, 1076 '
-96: root) with verbal prefliea and
Uke elements, 107649; accent
of comp. rorms, 1082-6; iRegiQa-
rities, 1087; rooU with tnleparsbla
preflzes, 1089, 1121b, g,l; with
noun and adjeotive stemt, 1090-5.

compoand stems, formatioQ of , lOl,
1246-1316: difference of ^lier
, and later language as to compoeltlon,
1246a; olasslBcatlon of CDinponsda,
1247; their anatyiU, 1248; mlea
of phonetic combination, 1249;
case-forms ss prior member, 1260;
accent, 1251; copaladve oomp.,
1252-61 ; determinative; dependent,
126:^78; descriptive, 1279-91: se-
condary adjeotiTe: possessive, 1292
-1308; participial, 1309; prepo-
eltlonal, 1310; adJeetlTe comp. as
nonna and as adverbs, 1311-3;
anomalous comp., 1314; stem-Bnala
altered hi copip., 1315; loose eoo-
stractton wiUi comp., 1316.

condltlonU tense, 633, 910, 941; its
uses, 950; conditional iue« of op-
Utlve sod inbjnncttve, 681b, e, f.

coojogatlon, verbal Inflection, 527-
1096; general, 627-98; voice, 628
-31 ; tenses and their oses , 592,
776-9, 821-3, 928-30, 948^;
modes and their uses, 533, 567
Sa, 921-5; tense-ayatenu , 536; *
piaeent- system , 536 , 599-779 ;
pBTfeot-system, 780-823;- aorlat-
aystema, 824-830; futn re-systems',
931-50; number and person, 536;
personal endings, 541-66; verbal
adJectivM and nouns, 537-9, 951
-95; secondary conjugations, 540,
996-1068; periphrastic and com-

Digmzec^y Google

Oene&ai. Ikdex.

pouAd eon}ugattoD,540>, 10B9-96;
examplra of co(Oag«t'*<Q ^ syno-
paia, p. 620.

coDjugitiOD-cUues, on wbu fonnded,
601; theli ohuicteiB, 60!1-10.

eonjag&tiona, flnt oi Don>a' tad tac-
-ond or ar-conJugatlDn, 601-3, 733 ;
tmuIGTB rrom the fonnar to -the
kttw, 626 >, 631s, 666 1, 670-4,
694 1, 716, 731 896.

ooi^jiinctioiu, 1131-3.

eonsoDinti, pionnnoiiition eta., 31-
76: mniea, 32-60; ■«[ulroffela,
6f-8; apiianU, 6S-66; vls(Vgft
iDd anoBTSTK Btc, 67-73; qaan-
tity, 76;' cons. aJloirtd u fla&la,
122, 139-52; aocurriug &t end oF
atems and endlngi, 139>: — *nd
lee the different cUtaet and
letters,
•oonaouant-gtoapi, hoir wtiClan in de>
TftoftBaH, 9, 1-2-&; their ex-
tenalon and abbreriation , 131,
227-33.

couBOnantil atema, decleoeion or, 377
-465; their otuaifleatlon, 382.

■Hmtemptuoni prefix, 506, 1121e; do.
Eaffii,'621, 1223d.

oopolative compouQdi, 1247 a- a,
1262-61; of QDuna, 1263-6; ad-
JectivBi, 1257; (dveibe, 1269; na-
nerale, 1261; copulattTee ill later
language, 1263, 1254; in Rig-Veda,
- 12M; in Atharra-Veda, 1266; ac-
oeot, 1266; poawaaliea ftom oopn-*
Utirei, 1293 b.

our-cla»s of verbs, 607, 776, 1041 b,
1066: — and tee eaoi««»8 ooo-
jngation.

dative ca», dms of, 286-6; dst
Infinltire, 962,986; dat. need ad-
verbiaUy,. 1113; dat. by attraction
with Infln. , 982a; dat w prior
member of compound, 1260o.

deaipintlott of aapirste mates, 114,
153-5; oonaeqnont la-anpirallon of
- Initial, 141a, 147, 156.

deelepeloD, in general, 361-320:
gender, 263; number, 264, 265;
eaae, 266; nsea of the caite , 267'
-305; endtngi of deol,, 306^10;
variation of stem and inaertloas,
311-3; accent, 314-20; ~ decl.

-46; m. ft-. I-, and a- (and diph-
thongal) stema, 347-68; IV. j-
atema, 369-76; V. cooaonant-
Btemi , 377-466; A. root-itema
etc., 383-410;. B. detirattte sterna
In OB, la, lu, 111-9; 0. In oa,
420-37; D. in In, 438-41; E. in
ant, 441-67; F. In vJftB, 468
-62; G. In yaa, 463-6; — decl.
of nnmeiala, 462-6; of pranonns,
491-521; of adjectives Inflected
pionominally, 622-6. '

declinable atema, composition of, vlth
verbs, 1090-5; derivation of — aee
derivation.

decompound oom pounds and tbelt
analyala, 1243.

decrement and Increment of elements,
123, 234 ff.

demoDttratl've piouonns, 496-603.

denominative conjugation, 540a, 1063
-68; formaticQ (rithont sign, 1064 ;
with aign ya, from stems of varioua
flnaJ, 1056-64; tbeli ooenrrence,
1067; meaning, 1058; relation of
aya- and Oya-atema, 105&c| re-
lation to cauaatlve, .1041c, l056,
1067; with aigna sya, kftmyo,
Kpaya. 1064, 1066; with ftya,
beside nft-clasa verba etc 732,
1066; from other etems, M66b, e;
Inflection, 1066; declloable steois
from denom. stem, 1068 b, 1148d,
1178h,i, liaOdL.

dental aeriea of mntes (t, Ox, d, dli,
n), pronouciatton etc., 33, 47, 48;

Secullar quality of Skt Rentals,
7b; dent ebuacter of I, 26; of
1, 61, 63; or s, SO; asilmUaUon
of dent, to palatals and Unguals,
118, 196-203, 305; deut. aiblUnt
and naaal converted to Ungual,
180-96; anCmalona converaiona to
gqttural and lingual, 161a, b;
of guttural, palatal, and labial to
dental, 161 c, e: — and see the
different tetters.

dependent clauaa, accent of verb in,
695.

dependent ccmpoands, . 1247 d-f,
1263, 1264-76; neun, 1264; ad-
jective, 1266; their varieties, 1366
-76: wlllr ordinary noon or ad-
jective as Itnal member 1367, 1368;
with root-stem, 1269; derivative
in a, 1270; ana, 1271; ya, 1270;
partlolple in ta or na, 1273; U,

Diaiiize. ..Google

GEMsaAL Index.

1274; In, 1276; i, 1276; Tan,
num etc., 1277, 1278; dep. eoDip.
In pouMBlve use, 1296.

derlTiUcm of >ilT«r1ii, 1097'llOg; of
deollnable utettu, 1136-1245: In
geaeni, 1136-42;' Fiimnr, 1143
-1201; eetoaiuy, 1202-46.

deiiTMtie OT lecondu; coojugulaii —
■ae BecondsTT-

denMiDt, uUeetiTCB and DAuDl IndloBt-
ing, 1:2061.

deECiiptlif componndt, 1247d-f,
12e3, 1279-91; of otdinuj id-
JeotlTa with noun,- 1280; o( •ppo-

* tMontl nnan wltb ddqii, 1280 d;
with partielple m ttnti member,
1283, 1384; with seiDDdlTe, 1260;
wltb iDot-nem , 1286 : wltb other
verbil deriiativea, 1287; with In-
setiirible prefix te prior nember,
1288; with verbal prefli etc, 1289;
with other adTeibtal worla, 1290;
■pedal caaea, 1291; deacr. comp.
Id poaaeasive uaa, 129711.

deaideradTe eoajagatibn, UO, 102$-
40; maaning, 1036,1040; uaed in
fDtnra aenae, 1040a; formation of
■tern , 1027-9 ; abbioTlated alema,
1030; uae of QDloU-TOweli, 1031;
inflection, pieaent-aTatem , 1032)
other 4orma, 1033-6; derlTttlTe
or tertiary conjogatlana from deald.
atem, 1039; deald. Item cauaadve
stem, 10&2c; declinable stems bom
deald. stem, 1036, 1036, 1140b,
1149d,ll&Sb 1181d,1178g;desld.
Toot-aUmia, 392d; tatnre In deaid.
aen«e,849; deald. in fatue senae.
1040 a.

detenutnatlia campoDoda, 1247 d-f,
1262-91; dependent, 1264-78;
deaoTlptlva, 1379-91 ; in poaaeaaive '

. adjectlva DM, 1293fr.

deT&tft-dTBiidviioompadndt,1261 a,
1266.

dlmlnutlTaa, secondary derivation of,
1206b, 1222d, 1243.

diphlhoDga (4, ftl, o, ftn), vode of
writing with oonaonuita, 10 g, h;
proDanclsdou etc., 27-30; protrac-
tion of, 7Sc; enphonlc coablnfttion
as flnals, 131-6: — and seethe
dlffarent letters. *

diphthongal stems, declension of, 300,

doable stimi, present, 815: aoriat,

894d, 697b-.
doobling of aspirate mntea, IM; of

a flnal natal, 210; at Oh, 237; of

first conssnaut of a group, 228; of

a coQtonant after r (and b. 1, t),

228.
dual number. Its use, 266; its forma

In declension, 308; in pertontl si«-

nonn, 492 b.
dnal flnali e, I, & nncMUblnable,
■ 136., g.
dvandva eomponnda — see copnU-

tive.
dvlgn componnds, 1312.

alghth daaa of verba — aee q^cUm.

eUflon of initial a, 136 ; how mark-
ed, 16; its tufrequeDcy in Teda,
.136c; alision of initial ft, 136di of -
Wl a or (, 137 b.

empbasia, accent of verb for, 696.

emphatic prooonn, 613.

enditte or dependent drcamflei, 86,

. endlnga, of inflection and derivation,
98-100; of declension 306-10; of
eiDgular, 307; dual, 3b8; plural,
309;, normal Bchams, 310; end. of
(fatama, 327-9; of 1-uid U'ltama,
336-8; of radical ^, I-, Q-Mama,
349; of darlvatlTe do., 363; of f-
atems, 371 ; qf personal pranonDt, '
• 492, 493; of ganeral pronentlnal
'declenalon , 496 ; — end. of con-
jugation, 523, 541-69; of l«t
sing., 643) 2d, 6U; 3d, 645; of
Istdn., 646: 2d and 3d, 547; -of
Ist pL, 648; 2d, 649; 3d, 650;
normal sebemea, G63; aoeent, 652
-4; end. of 2d and 3d slug, tak-
ing the place of root-Anal, bbCa;
nulon-voweU , 656 b, 0; end. of
aubjnnctlvs cogibined with mode-
algn, 560-2: of opUtlre,^ 666; of
preAtive, 568; tftt Of Imperative,
570;_ — end. of derivation — aae

euphoDic combiiiatton of eleinenl8,100,
' 101; rules respecting It, 10frT226.
excUmatory pronoan,. 507; exolam.

prefii from IntetiogatlTe prononn,

506, 1121e.
extenaloD of eoni.-gronps, 227-30.
euemai and Interaal combiaMion,

dlatinotion of, 10e-12i caMS of

Digil.ze'cy Google

Obnbkai. Indbx.

lis-'**

1, 376 »i

QB, b44-6|

378&, 101c, 135, 436, 149, 462b,
469, 463d; fam. Id I riom fa-
Btems, 1210e; fern, fornit in com-
podtton, 1260 h.

Dlth cl>a< of Terb» — •«« i»i>cltu.

DnalB, peimltted, 132, 139-62; most
usual, 149; only oneflml coneonuit
»llow«d, 150; exutptions, l&Ob, c;
tnomaloiu cbangei of flnil mntei,
151 ; final toaaonanU of »tonii ind
eodiDgB, 139 a.

final dauiBB, modes nsad in, 581 c, d.

fiiit class of Taibs — see et-claBS.

flcst OT non-ft-conjiigBtion of verbs,
iit chincUiIaUcg, 604.

forms, stiongai and neaker, of loots
and Btems, t04e, 105, 106; — and
sea variation of stam.

fonrtli class of verbs — ses ya-

I^Betlonal nee of ordiaals, 488.
frsqnenlativB conjugation — see In-

ftttnre paaslfe parUciplBs — see ge-

futnie tense*, 532; their nses, 948,
849i fnt. system., 635, 831-60;
8-fatiue and eonditioml, 99!M1;
periphrastic fntnre, 942-7; fulan
ose ofpres., 777; of desld., 1040a;
desld. nee of fnt., 948b; fat. par-
ticipial phrase^ 1075d.

gender in declension, 262, 263.

general and speoial tenses, 699 a.

genitive case, use* of, 294-300:
with adj., 296; vitb verb, 297,
298; with piepositions, 2g9a, 1130;
with adverbs, 299bi gen. absolute,
300b; loss of accent of gen. with
vocative, 314d, e; gen. infinitive,
984; gsD. used advetblaUy, 300a,
1115; as prior member of com-
ponnd, 1250 e.

gerandB, 539, 969-96; tkair uses,
989, 994; ger. In trft, 990, 991,
998; In ya or tya, 990, 992,
993; In tvaya and tvl, 993b;
in trftnam and tTlnun 093 c;
adverbial gemnd in am, 996.

gemndlves, or fatnre passive parti-
ciples, 961-6, 12121, 1213, 1216
-8; ger- in ya, 963-3, 1219; In
tavya, 962, 964, 12l2i; in aniTa,

. 962, 96.'>, 1216b; in tva, 9e6«,
120911 ; in anyft, 966b, 1217;
In Syya, 966c, 1218; in elima,
966d, 1201a; ger. in eompoiitlon,
1386.

grave (onadKtta) accent, 61.

gm^-Btrengtheuing, ohaiaeleiand oc-
currence or, 27,236-43, andpauini;
in prlmaij derivation ill3a; In
secondary, 1203 a, 1204£.

gnttnral series of mutes (k, kh, g,
gh, fi), pronunciation etc., 33,
39-41, 160a; asserted gott char-
acter of a, 20b; of h, 66s; pU-
atals ttam original gull, 41-3;.
4} and tl do., 64, 66; reversion of
palatals etc. to gutt form, 43, 64
142, 146, 147, 214-26: — and
see the different letters.

heavy and light syllables, 79.

hiatus, avoidance of, 113 126-36;
not avoided in Veda, 113 b, 126 o,
129 e; its ocoottenc* as resnlt of
euphonic processes, 132-4, 176 b, d,

177.

e rednpllcat-

imperative

57d; scheme of its endlngt, 663 d ;
its lat persons old subjunctive,
533, 574, 678; Impv. form In t«
and Its uses, 570, 571; with rnft
prohibitive, 579 c; Vedlc. 2d aing.
In si, 624; Impv. use of inOnl-
Uves, 982 d.

impeifeci, tense, 632, 690; its use,
779.

imperfect time, no rati designation of,
632a.

Increment and decrement of elements,
123, 234ff.

indecllnableB, 98a, 1096-1135: ad-
verbs, 1097-1122; preposltionB,
1128-30; conjunctions, 1131-3;
Interjections, 1134, 1135; derivative
stems from indedlnables, 1302b,
1245; componnds with Indecl. as
final member, 1314 b, f.

Indefinite pronouns, 513c; indef. use
of Intenogative and relative pro-
nouns, 507, 511.

35

ioy Google

Qkhskal Index

inflnltim, 538, 968-88; Uter, 968,
987; auUar, 969-79; luea, 980-8;
Telition to onUnirj reibtl nonns,
969, 970L

intepuible pteflie*, 1121; In de-
inriptlTecompoiltlan, 1283 S., 1288;
In poiuuWe, 1304.

intertiona between etem md ending
in dedeniion, 313.

lasnamenUI cue, naei at, 2f3-81;
of septfatfan, SoSa; with prepoai-
tiona, 284, 1127; gerundial, 939;
Died iidTerblaliy , 1112; u piior
membar of compoand, 1250 b.

lnt«n<i»e for freqaenlativB) eonjuga-
tion, MO, 1000-2o; chaneter »nd
oEcurrence, lOOO, 1001; wdapli-
eation, 1002, 1003 ; inflectioa, prea-
■nt-^fBtam , 1004'17; deri>atiT>
mtddla InllBctlou, 1016, 1017;
rorma outddB pruent-iyBtcDi, 1018,
1019, 1025; doubtTuI lateni. roi-
niatloDa, 1024M; deiivatlTe oc
tertluf oonjngatlona bom intena.
atem, 1026.

Inteijecdona, 1134, 1135; tbelT fln*I
towel ancambinable, 138C

internal and external oombioatLon,
diitinttlon or, 109-12.

Interoai chaage, qnestton or deriri-
tloB by, 12081.

IntenogativB parttelsa, 1122t

intanogatiie pronoun, &01-7; Ita in-
definite use, 507; exclamatoTT prefix
"". 1121J.
lands, 1291c, 13Ud.

inflection, 901,
902; rooti making It, 903; Inegn-
larltlea, 904; modes, 905-6; ftom
■econdary eonjngatlons, 1010, 1035,

1048, loee*.

from it, 6
inverted con
If-aoriat, i

Ji bTftmOllTK-ipi ra

L 170 d.

karmadlL&roTa coraponndB — see

deacriptive componndB.
ktl-daaa of verba — aee nft-dasa.

labial Beiie« or mulM (p, ph, b,
bb, m), pronnneiation etc., 33,
49, BO; lab. iiliaract«r of, U, Q.
20; of V, 51, 67, 68; anomalona
converaion or labial to gattnral,
l&ld; to denUl, 161e: —and
see tha different lettera.

lengthening of towel* In fomiatlon

and iofleotion, 244-6; of final
vowel In eompositlan, 247, 1087 b;
in the aenteaee In Veda, 248.

Itgbt and lieavy ayll»blea, 79.

UghtenlDg of a or K to an 1- or n-
YOwel, 219 (T.

Ungual aeries of mntea (;, Ul, i 4h,
1}), prounnciadoD etc, 33, 45, 46;
non-ortginallty and ordinary dnriva-
tlon 46; Hog. character of r< ^;
of *, 61, 52;Ung. 1,6a, 54; Rug.
character ot f, 61; asaimilatioD of
dentata to ling., 118, 19611.; Un-
gnaliEaUon of S and a, 180-95:
— and aae the different let-

locatite ease, tue* of, 301-5; loc
abaolate, 303b-d; of goal of mo-
tion or action 301 e, 304; with
prepoaitions 305, 1126; naed ad-
verbially, 303e, 1116; loc infiui-
tive, 985; loc. aae of adverbs in
txa, 1099; in ha, 1100a; in dft,
lt03b; loD. aa prior member of
compound, 1260d.

long and short qaantlty, 76-9.

manner, particUt or, 1101, 1102,

1107, 1122 k.
lOanaeeilptB , natite Sanskrit, mode

of writing In, 9a, b.
middle ttem-foim la declension, Sll.
middle voice, 528-30; its use ••

paaalte, 531, 998 c, d.
mode In verbal InDeotion, 533; tttb-

Janctive, 557-68; optative, 564-8;

imperatlva 569-71; naaa of the

modes, 572-82.
mul^lloatlve nnmeral »dveTbs,489s,

aumplloa

ii(u-e.

irles of, (heir pTDnnndallon
eto.', 32-60; elassificatlaQ , 32-8;

EUnral serlas, 39-41; palatal,
-4; llDgnal, 45 48; dental, 47,
48; labial, 49, 50; atsimilalioD,
117a b; mutes permitted as flnala,
141-9; anomalous coDveiaiDDB riom
one BHieg to snothet, 151 ; — and
see the different aertes.

nft^lasB (ninth, krt-claaa) of verba,
603, 717-32: formation of stem,
717; infleetion, 718-36; roots of
the elaas, 727; irregolaritlee , 728
-32; aooompanying deneminatlv*
in Rya, 732, 1066 b.

ioy Google

Gehehal Index.

ntsU isalmlUtion , 117c, r, g, 161,
188b, 188 c.

uaEil clue (seventh, mdb-cluB) of
iBTbs, 603, 663-96: roriDKUan of
stem , 683 ; Inflentioii , 681-93 ;
toots of tlie elau, 681 ; iiragnlirl-
ties, 683-B.

□asil increment In Strang forms, 265,
366.

niial mntes (B, fi, 9, n, m), 34, 36 ;
their occarreDCG as iailt, 143^
dapllcfttiOD, 210; iGsimilatian of
preceding mute, 161, 188b, 189b;
abbieviition of coDBOnint-grovp af-
ter, 231 ; — dbmI spirant or fura-
Dvftrs, 70-3 ; — Dasal Eemlvawels,
71c, 206, 213ci — nasalTOwels, 71,
72; — and see the different
letters.

nasality, Hindu deftnitlen of, 36a.

negative particles, 1122 c-e; neg.
prefli, fl21»-c.

neutral pion. of ft, 21.

ninth class of verbs — see nfi-class.

DominatiTe case, uses of, 267, 268;
peculiar constmctlon with verbs,
2681; with m, 268bi with voc-
att'B, SeSc; used adverbially,
HIT; nom. use of InflnitlTe, 98?!
nom. form aa paidele, 1117; In
eomposltton, 1250f.

nonn and adjective, distinction of,
322; infleeiion of bouub — aae
declension.

nn-class (tUth, Bn-clasa) of verbs,
603, 697-716 : formation of sWm,
697; Infiectlon, 1598-707; rools
of tbe class, 708; lnegularlties,
710-3, 716.

uomber in declension, 264, 266; in
conjugation, 636; numbei-fotia* in
composition, 1250 g. '

numeralg, 475-89; simple caidlnals,
475; their combinations for odd
numbers, 176-81; inQoctlon, 482
-5: construction, 486; ordinals,
487, 488; other num. derivatives,
489, 1104-6, 1246; nnm. figures, 17;
possessive compoonds with num.,
1300; num. or dvlpl compounds,
1312.

omission, sign indicatiag, 16.

onomatopoetic words, 1091, 1136b.

optative mode, 633, 564-8; its for-
mation, 564, 566; scheme of end-
ing! combined with mode-iign.

666; preoatlve, 567, 621-6; scbeme
of prec. endings, 668; asea of
opt., 673-83; with mi probib-
itlve, 679 b I optative use of ang-
mentlsss preterit forms, 587.

order of subjects in the grammar,
107; as best Ulcen np by a in-
dent, 108, 112; of snbJecU In euph.
combination, 121.

ordinal namerat adjecllves, 487. 488.

poda-endlngs In declension. Ills.

palatal series of muteg (o, cih, j, Jh,
fi), prounnclation etc, 33, 12-4;
derived ^m original gutturals, 42;
roversioD to guttural form, 43,
' 2i4tr.; enphonic combinations, 118,
119, 214-20; treatment as flnals,
142; assimilation of dentals to,
196-203; pal. character of 1, i,
20; of y, 61, 68; of 9, 63, 64;
palstal for guttaial in leduplica-
tloQ, 5d0b: — and see the dif-
ferent letters.

participial componnds, 1247 g, 1909.

partloiples, 634, D37, 683, 584 1173
-7; of present-systems, 618 etc.
etc.; of perfect, 803-7; of aorist,
810, 852, 872, 897, 909 ; of future,
939; passive part., 9624, 1176,
1177; active, in tnvnnt, navaiit,
958, 960; fotDre passive, 961-6;

of secondary conjugations, 1013,
1013, 1019, 1037, J043e, f, 1061,
1068; part, in possessive composi-
tion, 1299; — inOection of part,
in ant, 443-9; in t&As, 168-
63; — part-phrases, periphrastic,
1074, 1075; — reUHon of part,
and adjective, 967.

partleles, 98a; prolongatloQ of final
vowel of, 248a; part, giving ac-
cent to verb, 595c, e, &9Ba.

passive conjugation, 591, 640, 998;
present-system (yi-claas), 606, 768
-74; aorUt 3d sljig., 842-6, 1048;
periphrastic perfect, 1072; parti-
ciple in tM or na, 962-8, 1061b,
1176, 1177; future participle*, 96i
-6 (and see gerundives] ; pass,
use of InQnitive, 888; pass. fVom
intransltlves, 098*a; pass, of secon-
dary coDjogatlona , 1025, 1038,
1062a; pass, constructions, 383a,

ioy Google

Obmbkal Ikdez.

endiugt, USe; nu*, 621'3i —
perLiTSMw, 63!j, 7»0-823; far-
nttioD of Etem , 781-M; isda-
plicktlOD, TS^-Dl i itroog and weak
■lem-fonn*, 793-1; eodingi and
theU Dombinitian villi item, 7%
-9; uDlon-TOwel i, 786-8; in-
flection , 800 ; IrcegnUrlllM , 801 ;
pirllciple, 802-7; Its Inflection,
46&-62; model, 808-16; plupai-
f«ct, 817-20; — periphrutlc peif.,
1070-73.

perfect time, KptOMed b} so-c*11ed
urUt, b32t, 825, 9^; bj perfect,
822, 823; by participial phiMD»,
1076 d.

peilphtMUc conjugation, 640 a, 1069
-75; pertpb. fatore, 532, 931, A42
-7; iti naes, 949; perfect, 1070
-3, 1018, 1034, 10^5; Milrt and
piecative, 1073b; piesent, 1073c;
periph. puticlpial phii5ei, 1074,'
1073.

peiaoD In verbal luQectloD, 536.

paitonal endings — see endings of
ooDJiigation.

poisoQal ptononns, 491-4; noune sied
SI anch, 514.

pbiaies , deriTatives trom , 1302 b ;
coiapamnds from, 1314b.

pUce, pntlcles of, 1099, 1100. 11221.

pluperfect tense, 532, 81 7-%; plup.
time, no deiigastloa of, 532a;
save by paitlcipUl pbTM*s, 1076 d.

position, length of syllable by, 79.

poiseeiiis adjeoUTOB, 1206a 1229 b,
1230-36; pronomtiial, 516.

poaeeasiie compounds, 324, 1247 g,
1293-1308; P09B. dependenta.
1296; poi8. desoTlptiTes, 1297 tf. :
vith ordinary sdjectite as prtoi
member, 1298; wMh participle,
1299; witii DOmeral, 1300; vith
anposltWe noun, 1301-3; with
adverb, 1304-6; added mtti-ie,
i312c, 1307; pteguant

USB, 673 c

prepssltloiu , 1123-30; vords used
as lueb, 1123-6>; cases eonstiued
witb thes, ll!i6-30; gerunds used
a*, 994g; — prep, in composition
with roots — see verbal preOxM.

pi^Dsitimalcampound», 12471,1310;
with added sufttx, 1212m.

^ment tense, 532; lu asaa, 777,
778; — pres.-syateDi , 636, 599-
779 : prwoinenee as part of vn^
system, 600; vuletlei effraaanj
their dassifloadon, 601-9; laibu
from aamo root, 609; eoajugatim
and ronJngatlon-claMea , 603-10;
first or Don-k-coDjDgatieD: L raat-
dasi, 611-41; n. rednplfeattig
dois, 642-82; til. nasal dua,
683-96; IV. nu- and n-datt.
697-716; V. nft-daaa, 717-32;
aeeond or a-conjagation, 733: TL
a-otaaa, 734-60; VII. atmtad
i^au, 761-8; vm. ja-cUsi,
769-67; IX. 74-cl*Bs, or pawiTs
conjBcition , 768-74; le-rdled
onr- or tenth class, 776; nse* of
tense*, 776-9; of mode*, 572-81;
— prea. (lens, deri'Tstties boo,

l8^

1141
present

of aoriit, '
preanii^tiaii

of perfect, ^21 s, 823;
930.

r conjeelmie, fature of.

schemes, 663.

primary derlYitloD, 1138-1201: rria-
tlon to BeconduT, IISQ; fteim what
made, 1140, 1141; laniOD-vowek,
1142; form of root, 1143; aetsDt,
1144; meuilag, 1146, 1146; prim.
lafSxes and the deriialiTes maile
with them, 1148-1201.

piahlbttive eipressioo, 674, 579, 580.

proaominal root*, 490; tbeir ohar-
■ctei, In Inflection and dertvitian,
1137b, 1138; adverbs from tliam,
109711.

prononni, 490-531: persHUtl, 191
-4; demanstraClve, 496-503; in-
terrogattve, 604-7; reUttva, 508
-12; emphatic', InMlnite, 613;
nouns used pteaominaUy , 614;
pron. derivative adjecdvee , 615
-21 ; adjectives declined prokem-
InaUy, 522-8.

pcontuiclation — eee system of

SODOdl.

protracted (pluta) quantity , 78 ;
protr. final vowel uucombliuble.

i, Google

QSNERAL Index.

ivendingi of 3d pi., 660d.
rtdical sterna — see coot'i
lednpllcated (oi uniiillTe) aorlit, 824,

866-73 1046, 1047; formation of

Mem, 867-63; loBBdlon, 864-7;

UM in piliDiiy GDTijngatloii , 868;

In unMtlve, 1046, 1047: modep,

869-71.
nduplicatlng elan (iliird, hn-clise]

of TorbB, 603, 643-82; Tsdaplk.-

tion and accent, 64'^6j inflection,

647-667; Toota of the cUaa, 659;

Inegulultleft, 668, 660^63.
rednpllcition , occDiience of, 369;

general mlea foi (ormtDg, 668-90 ;

pi««ent red., 643, 6«0«.; perfen,

T83-91; aofUt, 667-68; IntenalTe,

1003; destderittve, 1039; In deri-

vttiOD, ]143e{ inomalona, 1087f.
let&tlouahlp, nonna of, tn r, 36*ir.,

1182 f.
lelitlTe oUnies, pecDHirltlBS of, 613;

model Daed In, 661a; Mcent ef

TBrb In, 596.
lelattre componndi , Imprepei DBine

fiti poetesaiie, l^^d.
laUtlTe pTODOun 608-13.
npeated woidi, 1260.
teaolatton , in Veda , of aemlvowele

Into totgIb, and of lowela Into

two eyllablea, 56a, 68b, 84n, 113 b,

126c, 139e, 309f, S63a, 470b,

666 c, 761 g, 771 g.
revetalon, ao-ealled, of paliital mntei

and sIbllaDt, and of b, to gnttutal

form, 43, 64, W, 119, 142, 146,

147, 314ir., 681, WT, i038f,

1176 a.
roots, 98-100; roots of the 8kt

laognage, 103-6; loota and Toot-

fonn> ace to the native grsmma-

rlane, 103, 104.
loot-aorut, 824, 629-46: in later

la«ciuge, 83»; la older, SSOff.;

modea, 836-9; paiUciplee, 840;

paaalTfl aei. 3d liog., 642-&
root-clau (aecoud, ad-claei) of iMba,

603, 611-41; iaflectioD, 613-23;

loota of tlie claai, 636: Inegnlari-

tiw, 634, 636-41. ,
root-atema, tlieli occnirenee ukd ase,

333, 383, 1137, 1147: u litAnl-

Uiea, e7&a, d71; te

coMpoeillDn, 12<d; '

1386; inflection of smcb tteme.ln
S. I, a, 349 361; In conaonaRts,
383-410; aomellnea gorein accne.,
37Id; nant. pi. forme, 379b.
radh-cUat of verba — see naeal due.

0-aoiiat, 834, 878-97: formatlDn of
etem, 878, 879; endinga and com-
btnatlon «ltli atem, 880, 881;
qoeatloB of loaa of s In certain
foima, 834, 681; inflection, 883;
Irregularltiei, 884-91; abience of
1 In 3d and 3d sing, in older
language, 868-90; modes, 893-6;
paitlelples, 897 ; — »-ior. iten In
deitfatlon, 1140 r.

^future, 931-9: formatlDn of alem,
933, 936; Die of anlon-vowol 1,
^4, 936; ooconence, 937; modes,
936 ; paitlcipleB, 939 ; tte pietarli,
the eonditional, 940, 041; uaM,
948.

M-aoiiit, 834, 916-20; roole lUoir-
ed Uter to make it, 916: occar-
renee In older Uogaige, 919, 930;
inflection, 917, 918.

second elaaa ttf verbs — see root-

erbe, its

second OT a-conJngaUoB of t<
ehaiactedstiM, 606, 793.

SKOidary ad]e«tlve compouudB, 1247e,
1392-1310.

aecoadaiy civjugalioaa 640, 996-
1068: passive, 698, 999; tBtanslve,
1000-1026; destaentlve 1026-40;
cansatlve, 1041-53; iteBomlriKUie,
1063-68; teitlar; oi d«riv«tlie
fiam HCMidaTr, 1026, 1(B9, 1063.

secMidarT derlvaUoo, 1136, 1139,
1302-45; relatlM WFr1naTy,lia9;
oitloa-vovcla, 1143; foims sf sImh,
1303, 1304 ; aeoeBt, 1206; meaning,
(206; set. svfflxea and the dsri-
vativee ssade i>tt* thsm, 1207-46;
oxtemal combiiMtlon In see. dntva-
tioii, llle, d, 1303e.

secondary peisonil endives, 642ff.;
soimal leheme, 663b.

semivovele (j, r, 1, v), pinuneia-
ttoD e*o. 61-8; nasal lenlv., 71o,r,
306, 213d; lemiv. aulBllation,
1174-f: — and see the dit-
farent letter*.

eentODoe, ivka ef enpbonlo conU-
KUtea Id, 101 ; tkeir psebftble ar-
tlflclaUtr, 101 e.

of Mlesv 32«.

ioy Google

Genebal Indkx.

leTenth clua of veibs — lee nut!

■A-«aaod8 (ff ind q), 61, 63.

■boK and long qauility, 76-9.

■ibllantt (g, f, ■), proiiBnalatian etc.,
60-4; — and lee th« difrerent
letterg.

slbtUnt OT signKtlc «oii«t, 934, 874-
920: formition and clasaiaMtiDi),
8T4-7; 4. B-Mriit, 878-97^ 6. ia-
Mirlst, 896-910; 6. BiMOTtot, 911-6;
7. Bo^aortst, 916-20; It* item In
deriY»«oo, llWe.

Btmple Mrigt, 824, ^8-65: 1. root-
aorlit, 829-41; piMWc mt. 3d
sing., 842-6; 2. a-aoHx, 846-£5.

Bif-iDTiit, 824, 911-fi: roimittDn of
Mam, and inflactlon, 911 : fonng In
older langtLage, 912, 913; modes,
914; middle formi, 916.

«lith claai of Toibi — lee ^daw.

•oaantandniTd loandi, 34, 30; Hlnda
daHnltlon o( their diffeience, 34 b;
mates, 34, 3b; aipliitet, 37, 38;
qnestlOD ai to ohaiaoter of h, 65 a ;
of final mate, 141b; eophoaic at-
dmllatlon of the two cUuei, 117,
156-78.

Bpeclal aad general tenaei, &99a.

■piranta, 69fr.: alblUnU, 59-64;
aapliatlon , 66 ; otbei bceatblnga,
67-9.

■terns, InBectlble, 98-100, 106; theit
deilTatlen — sea deriyatloD.

strengthening and weakening pToeesi-
es, 234-60.

strong and wsak, or sUong, middle,
and weakest, forms of stem* to
deeleniion, 311 ; of roots and items
In general, 104-6; tonfasions of
itrong and weak forms In deel.,
462d; In con]^ 666a; strong forms
In 2d sing., 723; in 2d da., 704,
881a, 839, 1007b; in 8d dn.,
793h, 839; In lit pi., 621b, 668,
676a, 703h, 831a, 832; In 2d pi.,
618, 621b, 664, 668, 669, 690,
704, 707, 723, 831a, 830; In 3d
pi., 793h, 831a.

au-clisi of Teibi — see nti-olase.

subjnnctlie mode, 533; formation and
endlngi, 567-62; Its flrat persons
used later as ImpeiatiTe, 533, 674,
678; iubj. Dse of aagmentles* ptet-
crll forms^ 663, 687; osea of atibj.
mode, 574-82.

snfflzei, 96-100; forming^ adTOrhs,

1097-1109; flo. declinable stemc
* — gee derivatiou.

•nperlatlTe — eee compariioa.

said and soaint gonudg ~~ seesonaDt.

gyllablee, qaantltr of, 79; distin-
gnlsbed aa heavy «nd light, 79.

system of lonndi, 19-76: Tovels
and diphthongs, 19-30; ronson-
anti, Slff.; Diiitei, 32-50; seml-
Towels, 6J-8; sibilant., 69-64;
ispirsttoD, 65, 66; vlsarga and
other breatblngi, 68, 69; ana-
OTKra, 70-3; unwritten soands
defined by Bin da grammariiDs,
74, 230;.gcheiae of spoken alpha-
bet, with notice of comparatiTe
frequency of the sounds, 76; qnan-
tlty, 76-9; accent and lu desig-
nation, 80-97.

tan-class of veibs — sea o-elass.
tatvonifa-compotmds — see deter-

tense In Toibal inflection, 532; tanae-
aystems, 536; present-system, 599
-779; perfect-system 780-823;
■OTlst-syitenu 824-930; fntore-
sygtema, 931-950.

tenth class of Terbs — see canBati*e
conjugation, and onr-elass.

tertiary, or deitvatlTe from Gecondary,
eoDjugations, 1026, 1039, 1003,
1068 a.

third class of verbs — see redupli-
cating class.

time, psiUcles of, 1103, 1122j.

tian^te ration, general method of, 5;
of sign of elision, 135b; of com-
bined final and Initial vowels, 126*;
of antiBvftra, 73c; of accent, 83a,

tiid-elasa of verbs -

a 4-eUM.

n-clasa (eighth tui-class) of verbi,
603, 697-716; formation of stem,
697; inflection, 688-707; roota of
the class, 709; InegnUr root kf
orkar, 714, 715; other irregolait-
ties, 716.

uncomblnable (pragrbja) flnal vow-
els, 138.

nnlnflected wof)|s — see Indeeltn-
sbles.

nolon-vowels , 264, 666 b, e^ I In
present iBdeatloa, 630, 631, 640;
In paifeet, T96>«, 803; bi aorist,

ioy Google

Obnbkal Index.

876b, aili In B-fature, 931,936;
in peitphrutle tntars , 913 ; tn
dwlderaitWe, 1031; Id puilTepei-
tlriple, 956; In iuBnltiTe and ge-
iDnd, 968, 991; In derivttton,
1142: — I In prtseni inflection,
631-4; in 2d and 3d dng., ^&5b;
in intei(sive, lOMlT.; i fori, 900b;
&1 for i, 65ec.
npodlunKalTa-Bplnut, 69, 170d.

Tiriable oi changeable f of loota,
212; treatment or, 215b; in pass-
ive, 770g; In B-»or,, 8S6; tn Ifl-
aot., 900b; in prec, 922a; In b-
fnt., 935»; In pple, 965d, 9&7b;
In infln., 968d; in tvS-garund,
991b; in ;a>genind, 982a; In
deaid., 1028b.

variation ot gtem-foiiD In declenelon,
311, 312; in f-Btoms, 3T0h; tn
consonatiul atema, 379, 38o-8,
421, 413, 141, 468, 463; — In
conjngation, 566; l[i present-atom,
604; in perfect, 792-4; in aorlst,
83Hf., 879, 899; In iDlonalye,
1004; in primatT dedvatlon, 1143;
in aecondary 1203, 1204; In com-
poeltioD, 1249 b, c.

verb — see conjngation.

verb-toima, accentuation oi, in the
sentence, 92b, 591-8; prolonga-
tion oC noal a or 1 of 248o, d;
comparison of, 173c, 474; comb,
with tnsep. pieflxea, 1121b, g, t.

verbal praflies, 1076, 1077; Madred
words, 1078, 1079, 1120; oompo-
silioD with roots, 1076-87, 137;
enph. effect on loot, 185, 192,
1086; accent, 1082-6; theii mora
Independent oae, 1084, 1118; pie-
positlonsl nses , 1126 ; forma of
comparison, 473 b, 1119; declinable
sterna from roots compoanded witb
them, 1141, 1282; nse In descrip-
tive composition, 1281, 1280; In

1 possessive, 1306: in pieposlUonal,

1310.
vioargR (or visaiijuaiyft) , 67-9;

Jnanlltatlve value, 79; occnirence,
14, 145, 170-72; alphabetic or-
der, 7a, 172a; — and see h.

Tocative case, form of, 266a, 307k;
Vedlc, in U, 42og, 404b, 462a,
465 a; accent (along ifitb quali-
fying word), 92a, 311; verb ac-
cented after, 594 a.

voles Id verbal InfleoUon, 528-31.

vowels, hair written Id davaDBgu^
with consonants, 10 ; sign of absence
of, 11; their pronunciation etc.,
19-29: a-, 1-, u-vowels, 19-22;
f-. 1-vowels, 23-6; dlphtbonga,
27-9; qnanllty, 77, 78; accent,
80ir.; nasal vowels, 71; nilea of
vowel -combination, 126-38; re-
sulting accent, 128, 130, 136a;
eiosptiooal cages, 136-8.

TfddlLt-strengtbenlng, character and
occurrence of, 27, 236-43, and
patstm; In piimary derlvstloD,
1143a; In secondary, 1204.

w-sonnd, belonging to t, 67.

weak, ot weakest, form of stem in
declension, 311.

weakening and strengthening pro-
cesses, 234-60.

writing in India, 2a; mode of. In
Skt. manuscripts, 9a, b; its modi-
fications in western practice, 8 c-e.

759; Inflection, 760; roots ot the
class and tbeir classification , 761,
762; irregalarlties, 763-7.
y&-claa8 of verbs, or passive present-
■ system, 606, 768-74; fbrmatlan
of stem, 768-70; Inflfctlon, 771;
fnegnlattties , 772-4; 7&-[orma-
tiun from iDtensive stem, 1016,
1017

S^'^4^}«^ctUt. $ J-jr'/^J%3, 73*>, Too.

ERRATA. .

p. 147, 391, Plof. I.o«. — for ftRFH resd f'^^rH

365, 736, last 1. — • bb&TftQtMi • bh4TSntSL
S67, 8830, L 2 — - ffuhya • g^hya.

101, 1081a, 1. 3 — > akkhallkjtra - ftkiikbaUk^tya.

itizecy Google

i, Google

,1,1.0, Google

Dijiiiieo, Google

H, , . V, w-.-.

itizecy Google

i, Google

,1,1.0, Google

i, Google

i, Google